Komatsu pc130-8

SEN03763-05
HYDRAULIC PC130 -8
EXCAVATOR
SERIAL NUMBERS 80001 and up
SEN03765-05
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL
PC130-8
Machine model Serial number

PC130-8 80001 and up
00 Index and foreword 1

Index
Composition of shop manual .......................................................................................................................... 2
Table of contents ............................................................................................................................................. 4
PC130-8 1
SEN03765-05 00 Index and foreword
Composition of shop manual 1

The contents of this shop manual are shown together with Form No. in a list.
Note 1: Always keep the latest version of this manual in accordance with this list and utilize accordingly.
The marks shown to the right of Form No. denote the following:
Q: New issue (to be filed additionally) q: Revision (to be replaced for each Form No.)
Note 2: This shop manual can be supplied for each Form No.
Note 3: To file this shop manual in the special binder for management, handle it as follows:
• Place a divider on the top of each section in the file after matching the Tub No. with No. indicated
next to each Section Name shown in the table below:
• File overview and other materials in sections in the order shown below and utilize them accord-
ingly.
Section Title Form Number
Shop Manual, contents binder, binder label and tabs SEN03763-05
00 Index and foreword SEN03764-05

Index SEN03765-05 q
Foreword and general information SEN03766-01
01 Specification SEN03767-01
Specification and technical data SEN03768-01
10 Structure, function and maintenance standard SEN03769-02

Engine and cooling system SEN03770-01
Power train SEN03771-00
Undercarriage and frame SEN03772-01
Hydraulic system, Part 1 SEN03773-00
Work equipment SEN03776-00
Cab and its attachments SEN03777-00
Electrical system SEN03778-01
20 Standard value table SEN03779-02

Standard service value table SEN04113-02
30 Testing and adjusting SEN03780-02

Testing and adjusting, Part 1 SEN04114-02
40 Troubleshooting SEN03781-02
Failure code table and fuse locations SEN04117-02
General information on troubleshooting SEN04118-02
Troubleshooting by failure code, Part 1 SEN04119-01
Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-mode) SEN04123-01
2 PC130-8
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-mode) SEN04124-00

Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) SEN04125-02
50 Disassembly and assembly SEN03782-03

General information on disassembly and assembly SEN04126-02
Power train SEN04128-01 q
Hydraulic system SEN04130-00
90 Diagrams and drawings SEN03783-01

Hydraulic diagrams and drawings SEN03784-00
Electrical diagrams and drawings SEN03785-01
PC130-8 3
Table of contents 1
00 Index and foreword
Index SEN03765-05
Composition of shop manual....................................................................................................... 2
Table of contents ......................................................................................................................... 4
Foreword and general information SEN03766-01

Safety notice................................................................................................................................ 2
How to read the shop manual ..................................................................................................... 7
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard .......................................................................... 9
Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component........................................................... 11
Handling of connectors newly used for engines.......................................................................... 20
How to read electric wire code .................................................................................................... 23
Precautions when carrying out operation .................................................................................... 26
Method of disassembling and connecting push-pull type coupler ............................................... 29
Standard tightening torque table ................................................................................................. 32
Conversion table ......................................................................................................................... 36
01 Specification
Specification and technical data SEN03768-01
Specification dimension drawings ............................................................................................... 2
Working range diagram ............................................................................................................... 3
Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 4
List of weights.............................................................................................................................. 8
List of lubricant and coolant to be filled ....................................................................................... 10
10 Structure, function and maintenance standard

Engine mount .............................................................................................................................. 2
PTO ............................................................................................................................................. 3
Cooling system............................................................................................................................ 4
Power train .................................................................................................................................. 2
Swing circle ................................................................................................................................. 3
Swing machinery ......................................................................................................................... 4
Track frame ................................................................................................................................. 2
Idler cushion ................................................................................................................................ 3
Idler ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Track roller................................................................................................................................... 5
Carrier roller ................................................................................................................................ 6
Sprocket ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Track shoe................................................................................................................................... 8
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing ........................................................................................... 2
Valve control................................................................................................................................ 4
Hydraulic tank and filter ............................................................................................................... 6
Hydraulic pump ........................................................................................................................... 8
Control valve ............................................................................................................................... 2
CLSS ........................................................................................................................................... 12
Functions and operation by valve................................................................................................ 16
PPC valve.................................................................................................................................... 2
4 PC130-8
Swing motor ................................................................................................................................ 17

Travel motor ................................................................................................................................ 25
Center swivel joint ....................................................................................................................... 34
Solenoid valve............................................................................................................................. 36
Accumulator ................................................................................................................................ 40
Holding valve............................................................................................................................... 42
Hydraulic cylinder........................................................................................................................ 48
Work equipment .......................................................................................................................... 2
Dimensions of components ......................................................................................................... 4
Air conditioner ............................................................................................................................. 2
Electronic control system ............................................................................................................ 2
Machine monitor system ............................................................................................................. 33
KOMTRAX system ...................................................................................................................... 47
Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 49
20 Standard value table

Standard service value table SEN04113-02
Standard value table for engine related parts.............................................................................. 2
Standard value table for chassis related parts ............................................................................ 3
30 Testing and adjusting

Tools for testing, adjusting, and troubleshooting ......................................................................... 3
Sketches of special tools ............................................................................................................ 8
Testing engine speed .................................................................................................................. 9
Testing exhaust temperature....................................................................................................... 10
Checking exhaust gas color ........................................................................................................ 11
Adjusting valve clearance ........................................................................................................... 12
Testing compression pressure .................................................................................................... 14
Testing blow-by pressure ............................................................................................................ 16
Testing engine oil pressure ......................................................................................................... 17
Reduced cylinder mode operation ............................................................................................. 18
No-injection cranking .................................................................................................................. 18
Handling fuel system parts .......................................................................................................... 19
Releasing residual pressure from fuel system ............................................................................ 19
Testing fuel pressure ................................................................................................................... 20
Testing fuel return rate and fuel leakage ..................................................................................... 21
Bleeding air from fuel circuit........................................................................................................ 23
Checking fuel circuit for leakage ................................................................................................. 24
Testing and adjusting alternator belt tension............................................................................... 25
Checking and adjusting air conditioner compressor belt tension ................................................ 26
Testing swing circle bearing clearance........................................................................................ 27
Checking and adjusting track shoe tension................................................................................. 28
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in work equipment, swing, and travel circuits........................ 30
Testing control circuit basic pressure .......................................................................................... 33
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in pump PC control circuit..................................................... 34
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in pump LS control circuit ..................................................... 37
Testing solenoid valve output pressure ....................................................................................... 40
Testing PPC valve output pressure ............................................................................................. 44
Adjusting play of work equipment and swing PPC valves........................................................... 45
Checking parts which cause hydraulic drift of work equipment................................................... 46
Testing and adjusting travel deviation ......................................................................................... 48
Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic circuit...................................................................... 50
PC130-8 5
Testing oil leakage....................................................................................................................... 51

Bleeding air from each part ......................................................................................................... 54
Checking cab tipping stopper ...................................................................................................... 56
Installation and adjustment of mirrors and camera ..................................................................... 57
Inspection of air conditioner Recirc/Fresh air filter ...................................................................... 61
Special functions of machine monitor.......................................................................................... 2
Handling voltage circuit of engine controller................................................................................ 2
Preparation work for troubleshooting of electrical system ........................................................... 3
Procedure for testing diodes ....................................................................................................... 8
Pm Clinic service......................................................................................................................... 9
40 Troubleshooting
Failure code table and fuse locations SEN04117-02
Failure code table........................................................................................................................ 2
Fuse locations ............................................................................................................................. 6
General information on troubleshooting SEN04118-02
Points to remember when troubleshooting .................................................................................. 2
Sequence of events in troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 3
Checks before troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 4
Classification and procedures for troubleshooting ...................................................................... 5
Information in troubleshooting table ............................................................................................ 6
Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos. ....................................................... 8
Connection table for connector pin numbers............................................................................... 11
T- branch box and T- branch adapter table ................................................................................. 47
Failure code [989L00] Engine controller lock caution 1............................................................... 3
Failure code [989M00] Engine controller lock caution 2.............................................................. 3
Failure code [989N00] Engine controller lock caution 3 .............................................................. 4
Failure code [AA10NX] Air cleaner clogging ............................................................................... 5
Failure code [AB00KE] Charge voltage low ................................................................................ 6
Failure code [B@BAZG] Eng oil press. low................................................................................. 8
Failure code [B@BAZK] Eng oil level low ................................................................................... 9
Failure code [B@BCNS] Eng coolant overheat........................................................................... 10
Failure code [B@BCZK] Eng water level low .............................................................................. 12
Failure code [B@HANS] Hydr oil overheat ................................................................................. 14
Failure code [CA111] ECM critical internal failure ....................................................................... 16
Failure code [CA115] Eng Ne and Bkup speed sensor error ...................................................... 19
Failure code [CA122] Charge air press sensor high error........................................................... 20
Failure code [CA123] Charge air press sensor low error ............................................................ 22
Failure code [CA131] Throttle sensor high error ......................................................................... 24
Failure code [CA132] Throttle sensor low error........................................................................... 26
Failure code [CA144] Coolant temp. sensor high error ............................................................... 28
Failure code [CA145] Coolant temp. sensor low error ................................................................ 30
Failure code [CA153] Charge air temp. sensor high error........................................................... 32
Failure code [CA154] Charge air temp. sensor low error ............................................................ 34
Failure code [CA155] Chg air temp high speed derate ............................................................... 34
Failure code [CA187] Sensor sup. 2 volt. low error..................................................................... 35
Failure code [CA221] Ambient air press. sensor high error ........................................................ 36
Failure code [CA222] Ambient air press. sensor low error.......................................................... 38
Failure code [CA227] Sensor sup. 2 volt. high error ................................................................... 39
Failure code [CA234] Eng. overspeed ........................................................................................ 40
Failure code [CA238] Ne speed sensor sup. volt. error .............................................................. 42
Failure code [CA271] IMV/PCV1 short error ............................................................................... 44
Failure code [CA272] IMV/PCV1 open error ............................................................................... 45
6 PC130-8
Failure code [CA322] Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error ............................................... 46

Failure code [CA342] Calibration code incompatibility ................................................................ 3
Failure code [CA351] Inj. drive circuit error................................................................................. 4
Failure code [CA352] Sensor sup. 1 volt. low error..................................................................... 7
Failure code [CA386] Sensor sup. 1 volt. high error ................................................................... 8
Failure code [CA435] Abnormality in engine oil pressure switch ................................................ 10
Failure code [CA441] Battery voltage low error .......................................................................... 11
Failure code [CA442] Battery voltage high error ......................................................................... 12
Failure code [CA449] Rail press. very high error ........................................................................ 13
Failure code [CA451] Rail press. sensor high error .................................................................... 14
Failure code [CA452] Rail press. sensor low error...................................................................... 16
Failure code [CA488] Chg air temp high torque derate............................................................... 17
Failure code [CA553] Rail press. high error ................................................................................ 18
Failure code [CA559] Rail press. low error ................................................................................. 19
Failure code [CA689] Eng. Ne speed sensor error ..................................................................... 22
Failure code [CA731] Eng. Bkup speed sensor phase error....................................................... 24
Failure code [CA757] All persistent data lost error...................................................................... 25
Failure code [CA778] Eng. Bkup speed sensor error.................................................................. 26
Failure code [CA1633] KOMNET datalink timeout error ............................................................. 28
Failure code [CA2185] Throttle sens. sup. volt. high error .......................................................... 30
Failure code [CA2186] Throttle sens. sup. volt. low error ........................................................... 32
Failure code [CA2249] Rail press. very low error........................................................................ 32
Failure code [CA2311] Abnormality in IMV solenoid ................................................................... 33
Failure code [D110KB] Battery relay drive short ......................................................................... 34
Failure code [D19JKZ] Personal code relay abnormality ............................................................ 36
Failure code [D862KA] GPS antenna discon .............................................................................. 38
Failure code [DA22KK] Pump solenoid power low error ............................................................. 40
Failure code [DA25KP] 5V sensor 1 power abnormality ............................................................. 42
Failure code [DA26KP] 5V sensor 2 power abnormality ............................................................. 45
Failure code [DA29KQ] Model selection abnormality.................................................................. 46
Failure code [DA2RMC] CAN discon (Pump controller detected) ............................................... 4
Failure code [DAF8KB] Short circuit in camera power supply .................................................... 6
Failure code [DAFGMC] GPS module error ................................................................................ 8
Failure code [DAFRMC] CAN discon (Monitor detected) ............................................................ 10
Failure code [DGH2KB] Hydr oil sensor short............................................................................. 12
Failure code [DHPAMA] Pump press sensor abnormality........................................................... 14
Failure code [DHSFMA] Travel left forward PPC press sensor abnormality ............................... 16
Failure code [DHSGMA] Travel right forward PPC press sensor abnormality ............................ 18
Failure code [DHSHMA] Travel left reverse PPC press sensor abnormality............................... 20
Failure code [DHSJMA] Travel right reverse PPC press sensor abnormality ............................. 22
Failure code [DHX1MA] Overload sensor abnormality (Analog) ................................................. 24
Failure code [DV20KB] Travel alarm short circuit ....................................................................... 25
Failure code [DW43KA] Travel speed sol discon ........................................................................ 26
Failure code [DW43KB] Travel speed sol short .......................................................................... 27
Failure code [DW45KA] Swing brake sol discon ......................................................................... 28
Failure code [DW45KB] Swing brake sol short ........................................................................... 30
Failure code [DW91KA] Travel junction sol discon ..................................................................... 32
Failure code [DW91KB] Travel junction sol short........................................................................ 34
Failure code [DWJ0KA] Merge-divider sol discon....................................................................... 36
Failure code [DWJ0KB] Merge-divider sol short ......................................................................... 38
Failure code [DWK0KA] 2-stage relief sol discon ....................................................................... 40
Failure code [DWK0KB] 2-stage relief sol short .......................................................................... 42
PC130-8 7

Failure code [DXA8KA] PC-EPC sol discon................................................................................ 2
Failure code [DXA8KB] PC-EPC sol short .................................................................................. 4
Failure code [DXE4KA] Service current EPC discon .................................................................. 6
Failure code [DXE4KB] Service current EPC short..................................................................... 8
Failure code [DY20KA] Wiper working abnormality .................................................................... 10
Failure code [DY20MA] Wiper parking abnormality .................................................................... 12
Failure code [DY2CKA] Washer drive discon.............................................................................. 14
Failure code [DY2CKB] Washer drive short ................................................................................ 16
Failure code [DY2DKB] Wiper drive (for) short ........................................................................... 18
Failure code [DY2EKB] Wiper drive (rev) short........................................................................... 20
Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-mode) SEN04123-01
Before carrying out troubleshooting of electrical system............................................................. 3
Information in troubleshooting table ............................................................................................ 5
E-1 When starting switch turned ON, machine monitor displays nothing.................................... 6
E-2 When starting switch turned ON (before starting engine), basic check item lights up .......... 8
E-3 Engine does not start (Engine does not turn) ....................................................................... 11
E-4 Preheater does not operate .................................................................................................. 14
E-5 Automatic warm-up system does not operate (in cold season) ............................................ 16
E-6 All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move or cannot be locked.......... 18
E-7 Precaution lights up while engine is running......................................................................... 20
E-8 Emergency stop item lights up while engine is running ........................................................ 25
E-9 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally............................................ 26
E-10 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally .............................................. 27
E-11 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally ....................................................................... 29
E-12 Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable machine................. 31
E-13 Machine monitor does not display some items................................................................... 31
E-14 Function switch does not work............................................................................................ 31
E-15 Auto-decelerator does not operate normally....................................................................... 32
E-16 Working mode does not change ......................................................................................... 33
E-17 Travel speed does not change............................................................................................ 34
E-18 Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped ........................................................................................ 35
E-19 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate........................................................ 36
E-20 Power maximizing function does not operate normally ...................................................... 40
E-21 Swing holding brake does not operate normally................................................................. 42
E-22 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding .................................................... 44
E-23 Air conditioner does not operate normally (including air conditioner abnormality record) .. 45
E-24 While starting switch is in OFF position, service meter is not displayed............................. 57
E-25 Machine monitor cannot be set in service mode ................................................................ 57
E-26 Monitoring function does not display lever control signal normally..................................... 58
E-27 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally ................................................................... 74
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-mode) SEN04124-00
Information contained in troubleshooting table............................................................................ 3
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems .................................................................. 4
H-1 Speed or power of all work equipment, swing, and travel are low........................................ 6
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls ........................................................................ 7
H-3 No work equipment, travel and swing move......................................................................... 8
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump ......................................................... 8
H-5 Fine control mode does not function .................................................................................... 9
H-6 Speed or power of boom is low ............................................................................................ 10
H-7 Speed or power of arm is low ............................................................................................... 11
H-8 Speed or power of bucket is low........................................................................................... 12
H-9 Work equipment does not move in its single operation ........................................................ 13
H-10 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large........................................................................... 14
H-11 Time lag of work equipment is large ................................................................................... 15
H-12 Power maximizing function does not operate normally ...................................................... 15
H-13 Work equipment loaded more is slower during compound operation................................. 16
8 PC130-8
H-14 Boom RAISE speed is low in compound operation of swing + boom RAISE..................... 16
H-15 Travel speed lowers largely during compound operation of work equipment/swing + travel .. 17
H-16 Machine deviates during travel........................................................................................... 18
H-17 Travel speed is low............................................................................................................. 19
H-18 Machine cannot be steered easily or steering power is low ............................................... 20
H-19 Travel speed does not change or it is kept low or high ...................................................... 21
H-20 Track does not move (Only either side).............................................................................. 21
H-21 Machine does not swing..................................................................................................... 22
H-22 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low .......................................................................... 23
H-23 Excessive overrun when stopping swing............................................................................ 24
H-24 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large shock ............................................. 25
H-25 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large sound ............................................. 25
H-26 Hydraulic drift of swing is large........................................................................................... 26
H-27 Flow rate in attachment circuit cannot be adjusted ............................................................ 27
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) SEN04125-02
Method of using troubleshooting chart ........................................................................................ 4
S-1 Starting performance is poor ................................................................................................ 8
S-2 Engine does not start............................................................................................................ 9
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly........................................................................................ 12
S-4 Engine stops during operations ............................................................................................ 13
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly .......................................................................................... 14
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power).................................................................................... 15
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) ................................................................ 16
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) .................................................... 17
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ....................................................................................... 18
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive........................................................................................... 19
S-11 Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) ................................. 20
S-12 Oil pressure drops .............................................................................................................. 21
S-13 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel)............................................................................... 22
S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) ....................................................... 23
S-15 Abnormal noise is made ..................................................................................................... 24
S-16 Vibration is excessive ......................................................................................................... 25
50 Disassembly and assembly

General information on disassembly and assembly SEN04126-02
How to read this manual ............................................................................................................. 2
Coating materials list................................................................................................................... 4
Special tool list ............................................................................................................................ 7
Sketch of special tool .................................................................................................................. 11
Removal and installation of fuel supply pump assembly............................................................. 2
Removal and installation of fuel injector assembly ..................................................................... 5
Removal and installation of front oil seal..................................................................................... 8
Removal and installation of rear oil seal ..................................................................................... 10
Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly .................................................................. 13
Removal and installation of radiator assembly............................................................................ 23
Removal and installation of aftercooler assembly ....................................................................... 25
Removal and installation of work equipment oil cooler assembly ............................................... 27
Removal and installation of engine and work equipment pump assembly.................................. 29
Removal and installation of fuel tank assembly .......................................................................... 37
Removal and installation of travel motor and final drive assembly ............................................. 2
Disassembly and assembly of travel motor and final drive assembly ......................................... 4
Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly.................................. 41
Disassembly and assembly of swing machinery assembly......................................................... 43
Removal and installation of swing circle assembly ..................................................................... 49
PC130-8 9

Disassembly and assembly of track roller ................................................................................... 2
Disassembly and assembly of idler assembly............................................................................. 5
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring ................................................................................ 8
Spreading and installation of track shoe assembly ..................................................................... 11
Removal and installation of sprocket........................................................................................... 13
Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly ............................................................... 14
Removal and installation of counterweight assembly.................................................................. 16
Hydraulic system SEN04130-00
Removal and installation of center swivel joint assembly............................................................ 2
Disassembly and assembly of center swivel joint assembly ....................................................... 4
Removal and installation of hydraulic tank assembly .................................................................. 5
Removal and installation of work equipment pump assembly..................................................... 8
Removal and installation of control valve assembly .................................................................... 12
Disassembly and assembly of control valve assembly ............................................................... 16
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment PPC valve assembly ........................................ 28
Disassembly and assembly of travel PPC valve assembly ......................................................... 30
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder assembly........................................................ 33
Removal and installation of work equipment assembly............................................................... 2
Removal and installation of operator's cab assembly ................................................................. 2
Removal and installation of operator cab glass (stuck glass) ..................................................... 5
Removal and installation of front window assembly .................................................................... 15
Removal and installation of floor frame assembly ....................................................................... 22
Removal and installation of air compressor assembly ................................................................ 2
Removal and installation of air conditioner condenser ................................................................ 3
Removal and installation of air compressor unit assembly ......................................................... 4
Removal and installation of KOMTRAX communication modem assembly ................................ 7
Removal and installation of monitor assembly ............................................................................ 8
Removal and installation of pump controller assembly ............................................................... 10
Removal and installation of engine controller assembly ............................................................. 12
90 Diagrams and drawings

Hydraulic diagrams and drawings SEN03784-00
Hydraulic circuit diagram (1/2)..................................................................................................... 3
Hydraulic circuit diagram (2/2)..................................................................................................... 5
Electrical diagrams and drawings SEN03785-01
Electrical circuit diagram (1/5) ..................................................................................................... 3
Connectors table and arrangement drawing ............................................................................... 13
10 PC130-8
PC130-8 11
PC130-8 Hydraulic excavator

Form No. SEN03765-05
© 2010 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 03-10
12 PC130-8
SEN03766-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
00 Index and foreword 1

Foreword and general information
Safety notice ................................................................................................................................................... 2
How to read the shop manual ......................................................................................................................... 7
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard ............................................................................................. 9
Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component .............................................................................11
Handling of connectors newly used for engines ........................................................................................... 20
How to read electric wire code...................................................................................................................... 23
Precautions when carrying out operation...................................................................................................... 26
Method of disassembling and connecting push-pull type coupler................................................................. 29
Standard tightening torque table ................................................................................................................... 32
Conversion table ........................................................................................................................................... 36
PC130-8 1
Safety notice 1
(Rev. 2008/08)
Important safety notice
Proper service and repair are extremely important for safe machine operation. The service and repair
techniques recommended by Komatsu and described in this manual are both effective and safe.
Some of these techniques require the use of tools specially designed by Komatsu for the specific
purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbol k is used to mark safety precautions in this manual. The
cautions accompanying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any dangerous situa-
tion arises or may possibly arise, first consider safety, and take the necessary actions to deal with
the situation.
1. General precautions 7) If welding repairs are needed, always

k Mistakes in operation are extremely have a trained and experienced welder
dangerous. Read the Operation and carry out the work. When carrying out
Maintenance Manual carefully before weld in g wo rk , al way s wear wel din g
operating the machine. In addition, gloves, apron, shielding goggles, cap and
read this manual and understand its other clothes suited for welding work.
contents before starting the work. 8) Before starting work, warm up your body
1) Before carrying out any greasing or thoroughly to start work under good condi-
repairs, read all the safety labels stuck to tion.
the machine. For the locations of the 9) Avoid continuing work for long hours and
safety labels and detailed explanation of take rests at proper intervals to keep your
precautions, see the Operation and Main- body in good condition. Take rests in
tenance Manual. specified safe places.
2) Decide a place in the repair workshop to
keep tools and removed parts. Always Safety points
keep the tools and parts in their correct
places. Always keep the work area clean 1 Good arrangement
and make sure that there is no dirt, water, 2 Correct work clothes
or oil on the floor. Smoke only in the areas 3 Following work standard
provided for smoking. Never smoke while
working. 4 Making and checking signs
3) When carrying out any operation, always Prohibition of operation and handling by
5
wear safety shoes and helmet. Do not unlicensed workers
wear loose work clothes, or clothes with 6 Safety check before starting work
buttons missing.
Wearing protective goggles
q Always wear safety glasses when hit- 7
(for cleaning or grinding work)
ting parts with a hammer.
q Always wear safety glasses when Wearing shielding goggles and protectors
8
grinding parts with a grinder, etc. (for welding work)
4) When carrying out any operation with 2 or 9 Good physical condition and preparation
more workers, always agree on the oper- Precautions against work which you are
ating procedure before starting. Always 10
not used to or you are used to too much
inform your fellow workers before starting
any step of the operation. Before starting
work, hang UNDER REPAIR warning
signs in the operator's compartment.
5) Only qualified workers must carry out work
and operation which require license or
qualification.
6) Keep all tools in good condition, learn the
correct way to use them, and use the
proper ones of them. Before starting work,
thoroughly check the tools, machine, fork-
lift, service car, etc.
2 PC130-8
2. Preparations for work 6) When removing a cover which is under

1) Before adding oil or making any repairs, internal pressure or under pressure from a
park the machine on a hard and level spring, always leave 2 bolts in diagonal
ground, and apply the parking brake and positions. Loosen those bolts gradually
block the wheels or tracks to prevent the and alternately to release the pressure,
machine from moving. and then remove the cover.
2) Before starting work, lower the work 7) When removing components, be careful
equipment (blade, ripper, bucket, etc.) to not to break or damage the electrical wir-
the ground. If this is not possible, insert ing. Damaged wiring may cause electrical
the lock pin or use blocks to prevent the fires.
work equipment from falling. In addition, 8) When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil
be sure to lock all the control levers and from spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips
hang warning signs on them. onto the floor, wipe it up immediately. Fuel
3) When disassembling or assembling, sup- or oil on the floor can cause you to slip
port the machine with blocks, jacks, or and can even start fires.
stands before starting work. 9) As a general rule, do not use gasoline to
4) Remove all mud and oil from the steps or wash parts. Do not use it to clean electri-
other places used to get on and off the cal parts, in particular.
machine. Always use the handrails, lad- 10) Be sure to assemble all parts again in their
ders or steps when getting on or off the original places. Replace any damaged
m a c h i n e . N e v e r j u m p o n o r o ff t h e parts and parts which must not be reused
machine. If it is impossible to use the with new parts. When installing hoses and
handrails, ladders or steps, use a stand to wires, be sure that they will not be dam-
provide safe footing. aged by contact with other parts when the
machine is operated.
3. Precautions during work 11) When installing high pressure hoses,
1) Before disconnecting or removing compo- make sure that they are not twisted. Dam-
nents of the oil, water, or air circuits, first aged tubes are dangerous, so be
release the pressure completely from the extremely careful when installing tubes for
circuit. When removing the oil filler cap, a high pressure circuits. In addition, check
drain plug, or an oil pressure pickup plug, t h a t c o n n e c t i n g pa r ts a r e c o r r e c t l y
loosen it slowly to prevent the oil from installed.
spurting out. 12) When assembling or installing parts,
2) The coolant and oil in the circuits are hot always tighten them to the specified
when the engine is stopped, so be careful torques. When installing protective parts
not to get scalded. Wait for the oil and such as guards, or parts which vibrate vio-
coolant to cool before carrying out any lently or rotate at high speed, be particu-
work on the oil or water circuits. l a r ly c a r e fu l t o c he c k t h a t t h e y ar e
3) Before starting work, stop the engine. installed correctly.
When working on or around a rotating 13) When aligning 2 holes, never insert your
part, in particular, stop the engine. When fingers or hand. Be careful not to get your
checking the machine without stopping fingers caught in a hole.
the engine (measuring oil pressure, 14) When measuring hydraulic pressure,
revolving speed, temperature, etc.), take check that the measuring tools are cor-
extreme care not to get rolled or caught in rectly assembled.
rotating parts or moving parts. 15) Take care when removing or installing the
4) Before starting work, remove the leads tracks of track-type machines. When
from the battery. Always remove the lead removing the track, the track separates
from the negative (–) terminal first. suddenly, so never let anyone stand at
5) When raising a heavy component (heavier either end of the track.
than 25 kg), use a hoist or crane. Before 16) If the engine is operated for a long time in
starting work, check that the slings (wire a place which is not ventilated well, you
ropes, chains, and hooks) are free from may suffer from gas poisoning. Accord-
damage. Always use slings which have ingly, open the windows and doors to ven-
ample capacity and install them to proper tilate well.
places. Operate the hoist or crane slowly
to prevent the component from hitting any
other part. Do not work with any part still
raised by the hoist or crane.
PC130-8 3
4. Precautions for sling work and making

signs
1) Only one appointed worker must make
signs and co-workers must communicate
with each other frequently. The appointed
sign maker must make specified signs
clearly at a place where he is well seen
from the operator's seat and where he can
see the working condition easily. The sign
maker must always stand in front of the
load and guide the operator safely.
q Do not stand under the load.
q Do not step on the load.
2) Check the slings before starting sling
work.
8) When installing wire ropes to an angular
3) Keep putting on gloves during sling work.
load, apply pads to protect the wire ropes.
(Put on leather gloves, if available.)
If the load is slippery, apply proper mate-
4) Measure the weight of the load by the eye
rial to prevent the wire rope from slipping.
and check its center of gravity.
9) Use the specified eyebolts and fix wire
5) Use proper sling according to the weight
ropes, chains, etc. to them with shackles,
of the load and method of slinging. If too
etc.
thick wire ropes are used to sling a light
10) Apply wire ropes to the middle portion of
load, the load may slip and fall.
the hook.
6) Do not sling a load with 1 wire rope alone.
q Slinging near the tip of the hook may
If it is slung so, it may rotate and may slip
cause the rope to slip off the hook
out of the rope. Install 2 or more wire
during hoisting. The hook has the
ropes symmetrically.
k Slinging with 1 rope may cause
maximum strength at the middle por-
tion.
turning of the load during hoisting,
untwisting of the rope, or slipping
of the rope from its original wind-
ing position on the load, which can
result in a dangerous accident.
7) Limit the hanging angle to 60°, as a rule.
Do not sling a heavy load with ropes form-
ing a wide hanging angle from the hook.
When hoisting a load with 2 or more
ropes, the force subjected to each rope
will increase with the hanging angle. The
table below shows the variation of allow-
able load in kN {kg} when hoisting is made
with 2 ropes, each of which is allowed to
sling up to 9.8 kN {1,000 kg} vertically, at
various hanging angles. When the 2 ropes 11) Do not use twisted or kinked wire ropes.
sling a load vertically, up to 19.6 kN {2,000 12) When lifting up a load, observe the follow-
kg} of total weight can be suspended. ing.
This weight is reduced to 9.8 kN {1,000 q Wind in the crane slowly until wire
kg} when the 2 ropes make a hanging ropes are stretched. When settling
angle of 120°. If the 2 ropes sling a 19.6 the wire ropes with the hand, do not
kN {2,000 kg} load at a lifting angle of grasp them but press them from
150°, each of them is subjected to a force above. If you grasp them, your fingers
as large as 39.2 kN {4,000 kg}. may be caught.
q After the wire ropes are stretched,
stop the crane and check the condi-
tion of the slung load, wire ropes, and
pads.
4 PC130-8
q If the load is unstable or the wire rope 13) If the hoist stops because of a power fail-
or chains are twisted, lower the load ure, turn the power switch OFF. When
and lift it up again. turning on a switch which was turned OFF
q Do not lift up the load slantingly. by the electric shock prevention earth
13) When lifting down a load, observe the fol- leakage breaker, check that the devices
lowing. related to that switch are not in operation
q When lifting down a load, stop it tem- state.
porarily at 30 cm above the floor, and 14) If you find an obstacle around the hoist,
then lower it slowly. stop the operation.
q Check that the load is stable, and 15) After finishing the work, stop the hoist at
then remove the sling. the specified position and raise the hook
q Remove kinks and dirt from the wire to at least 2 m above the floor. Do not
ropes and chains used for the sling leave the sling installed to the hook.
work, and put them in the specified
place. 7. Selecting wire ropes
1) Select adequate ropes depending on the
5. Precautions for using mobile crane weight of parts to be hoisted, referring to
a Read the Operation and Maintenance the table below.
Manual of the crane carefully in advance
and operate the crane safely. Wire ropes
(Standard “Z” twist ropes without galvanizing)
6. Precautions for using overhead hoist crane (JIS G3525, No. 6, Type 6X37-A)
k When raising a heavy part (heavier Nominal
Allowable load
than 25 kg), use a hoist, etc. In Disas- diameter of rope
sembly and assembly, the weight of a mm kN ton
part heavier than 25 kg is indicated 10 8.8 0.9
after the mark of 4. 12 12.7 1.3
1) Before starting work, inspect the wire 14 17.3 1.7
ropes, brake, clutch, controller, rails, over 16 22.6 2.3
wind stop device, electric shock preven- 18 28.6 2.9
tion earth leakage breaker, crane collision 20 35.3 3.6
prevention device, and power application
25 55.3 5.6
warning lamp, and check safety.
30 79.6 8.1
2) Observe the signs for sling work.
40 141.6 14.4
3) Operate the hoist at a safe place.
4) Check the direction indicator plates (east, 50 221.6 22.6
west, south, and north) and the directions 60 318.3 32.4
of the control buttons without fail.
5) Do not sling a load slantingly. Do not move a The allowable load is one-sixth of the
the crane while the slung load is swinging. breaking strength of the rope used
6) Do not raise or lower a load while the (Safety coefficient: 6).
crane is moving longitudinally or laterally.
7) Do not drag a sling.
8) When lifting up a load, stop it just after it
leaves the ground and check safety, and
then lift it up.
9) Consider the travel route in advance and
lift up a load to a safe height.
10) Place the control switch on a position
where it will not be an obstacle to work
and passage.
11) After operating the hoist, do not swing the
control switch.
12) Remember the position of the main switch
so that you can turn off the power immedi-
ately in an emergency.
PC130-8 5
8. Precautions for disconnecting and con- a Example of O-ring (Fitted to every joint of
necting hoses and tubes in air conditioner hoses and tubes)
circuit
1) Disconnection
k For the environment, the air condi-
tioner of this machine uses the
refrigerant (air conditioner gas:
R134a) which has fewer factors of
the depletion of the ozone layer.
However, it does not mean that you
may discharge the refrigerant into
the atmosphere as it is. Be sure to
recover the refrigerant when dis-
connecting the refrigerant gas cir-
cuit and then reuse it.
a Ask professional traders for collecting a For tightening torque, see the precautions for
and filling operation of refrigerant installation in each section of "Disassembly
(R134a). and assembly".
a Never release the refrigerant (R134a)
to the atmosphere.
k If the refrigerant gas gets in your
eyes or contacts your skin, you
may lose your sight and your skin
may be frozen. Accordingly, put
on safety glasses, safety gloves
and safety clothes when recover-
ing or adding the refrigerant.
Refrigerant gas must be recovered
and added by a qualified person.
2) Connection
1] When installing the air conditioner cir-
cuit hoses and tubes, take care that
dirt, dust, water, etc. will not enter
them.
2] When connecting the air conditioner
hoses and tubes, check that O-rings
(1) are fitted to their joints.
3] Check that each O-ring is not dam-
aged or deteriorated.
4] When connecting the refrigerant pip-
ing, apply compressor oil for refriger-
ant (R134a) (DENSO: ND-OIL8,
VA L E O T H E R M A L S Y S T E M S :
ZXL100PG (equivalent to PAG46))
to its O-rings.
6 PC130-8
How to read the shop manual 1
q Some attachments and optional parts in this shop manual may not be delivered to certain areas. If one
of them is required, consult KOMATSU distributors.
q Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
q Shop manuals are divided into the “Chassis volume” and “Engine volume”. For the engine unit, see the
engine volume of the engine model mounted on the machine.
1. Composition of shop manual

This shop manual contains the necessary technical information for services performed in a workshop.
For ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following sections.
00. Index and foreword

This section explains the shop manuals list, table of contents, safety, and basic information.
01. Specification
This section explains the specifications of the machine.
10. Structure, function and maintenance standard

This section explains the structure, function, and maintenance standard values of each component.
The structure and function sub-section explains the structure and function of each component. It
serves not only to give an understanding of the structure, but also serves as reference material for
troubleshooting. The maintenance standard sub-section explains the criteria and remedies for dis-
assembly and service.
20. Standard value table

This section explains the standard values for new machine and judgement criteria for testing,
adjusting, and troubleshooting. This standard value table is used to check the standard values in
testing and adjusting and to judge parts in troubleshooting.
30. Testing and adjusting

This section explains measuring instruments and measuring methods for testing and adjusting, and
method of adjusting each part. The standard values and judgement criteria for testing and adjusting
are explained in Testing and adjusting.
40. Troubleshooting
This section explains how to find out failed parts and how to repair them. The troubleshooting is
divided by failure modes. The “S mode” of the troubleshooting related to the engine may be also
explained in the Chassis volume and Engine volume. In this case, see the Chassis volume.
50. Disassembly and assembly

This section explains the special tools and procedures for removing, installing, disassembling, and
assembling each component, as well as precautions for them. In addition, tightening torque and
quantity and weight of coating material, oil, grease, and coolant necessary for the work are also
explained.
90. Diagrams and drawings (chassis volume)/Repair and replacement of parts (engine volume)
q Chassis volume
This section gives hydraulic circuit diagrams and electrical circuit diagrams.
q Engine volume
This section explains the method of reproducing, repairing, and replacing parts.
2. Revision and distribution

Any additions, revisions, or other change of notices will be sent to KOMATSU distributors. Get the most
up-to-date information before you start any work.
PC130-8 7
3. Filing method
File by the brochures in the correct order of the form number printed in the shop manual composition
table.
q Revised edition mark

When a manual is revised, the ones and tens digits of the form number of each brochure is
increased by 1. (Example: 00, 01, 02 …)
q Revisions
Revised brochures are shown in the shop manual composition table.
4. Symbols
Important safety and quality portions are marked with the following symbols so that the shop manual will
be used practically.
Symbol Item Remarks
k Safety Special safety precautions are necessary when performing work.
Special technical precautions or other precautions for preserving stan-

a Caution
dards are necessary when performing work.
4
Weight of parts of component or parts. Caution necessary when
Weight
selecting hoisting wire, or when working posture is important, etc.
3
Tightening Places that require special attention for tightening torque during
torque assembly.
2 Coat Places to be coated with adhesives, etc. during assembly.
5
Oil, coolant Places where oil, etc. must be added, and capacity.
6
Drain Places where oil, etc. must be drained, and quantity to be drained.
5. Units
In this shop manual, the units are indicated with International System of units (SI). For reference, con-
ventionally used Gravitational System of units is indicated in parentheses { }.
8 PC130-8
Explanation of terms for maintenance standard 1

The maintenance standard chapter explains the criteria for replacing or reusing products and parts in the
machine maintenance work. The following terms are used to explain the criteria.
1. Standard size and tolerance

q To be accurate, the finishing size of parts
is a little different from one to another.
q To specify a finishing size of a part, a tem-
porary standard size is set and an allow-
able difference from that size is indicated.
q The above size set temporarily is called
the “standard size” and the range of differ-
ence from the standard size is called the
“tolerance”.
q The tolerance with the symbols of + or – is
indicated on the right side of the standard
size.
Example:
Standard size Tolerance
–0.022
120
–0.126
a The tolerance may be indicated in the text

and a table as [standard size (upper limit
of tolerance/lower limit of tolerance)].
Example) 120 (–0.022/–0.126)
q Usually, the size of a hole and the size of

the shaft to be fitted to that hole are indi-
cated by the same standard size and dif-
ferent tolerances of the hole and shaft.
The tightness of fit is decided by the toler-
ance.
q Indication of size of rotating shaft and hole
and relationship drawing of them
Example:
Tolerance
Standard size
Shaft Hole
–0.030 +0.046
60
–0.076 +0
PC130-8 9
2. Standard clearance and standard value 5. Clearance limit

q The clearance made when new parts are q Parts can be used until the clearance
assembled is called the “standard clear- between them is increased to a certain
ance“, which is indicated by the range limit. The limit at which those parts cannot
from the minimum clearance to the maxi- be used is called the “clearance limit”.
mum clearance. q If the clearance between the parts
q When some parts are repaired, the clear- exceeds the clearance limit, they must be
ance is generally adjusted to the standard replaced or repaired.
clearance.
q A value of performance and function of 6. Interference limit
new products or equivalent is called the q The allowable maximum interference
“standard value“, which is indicated by a between the hole of a part and the shaft of
range or a target value. another part to be assembled is called the
q When some parts are repaired, the value “interference limit”.
of performance/function is set to the stan- q The interference limit shows the repair
dard value. limit of the part of smaller tolerance.
q If the interference between the parts
3. Standard interference exceeds the interference limit, they must
q When the diameter of a hole of a part be replaced or repaired.
shown in the given standard size and tol-
erance table is smaller than that of the
mating shaft, the difference between those
diameters is called the “interference”.
q The range (A – B) from the difference (A)
between the minimum size of the shaft
and the maximum size of the hole to the
difference (B) between the maximum size
of the shaft and the minimum size of the
hole is the “standard interference”.
q After repairing or replacing some parts,
measure the size of their hole and shaft
and check that the interference is in the
standard range.
4. Repair limit and allowable value or allow-

able dimension
q The size of a part changes because of
wear and deformation while it is used. The
limit of changed size is called the “repair
limit”.
q If a part is worn to the repair limit, it must
be replaced or repaired.
q The performance and function of a prod-
uct lowers while it is used. A value which
the product can be used without causing a
problem is called the “allowable value” or
“allowable dimension”.
q If a product is worn to the allowable value,
it must be checked or repaired. Since the
permissible value is estimated from vari-
ous tests or experiences in most cases,
however, it must be judged after consider-
ing the operating condition and customer's
requirement.
10 PC130-8
Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component 1

To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period, and to prevent failures or other troubles
before they occur, correct “operation“, “maintenance and inspection“, “troubleshooting“, and “repairs” must
be carried out. This section deals particularly with correct repair procedures for mechatronics and is aimed at
improving the quality of repairs. For this purpose, it gives sections on “Handling electric equipment” and
“Handling hydraulic equipment” (particularly gear oil and hydraulic oil).
Points to remember when handling electric

equipment
1. Handling wiring harnesses and connectors
Wiring harnesses consist of wiring connecting
one component to another component, con-
nectors used for connecting and disconnecting
one wire from another wire, and protectors or
tubes used for protecting the wiring.
Compared with other electrical components fit-
ted in boxes or cases, wiring harnesses are
more likely to be affected by the direct effects
of rain, water, heat, or vibration. Furthermore,
during inspection and repair operations, they
are frequently removed and installed again, so
they are likely to suffer deformation or damage.
For this reason, it is necessary to be extremely
careful when handling wiring harnesses.
2. Main failures occurring in wiring harness

1) Defective contact of connectors (defec-
tive contact between male and female)
Problems with defective contact are likely
to occur because the male connector is
not properly inserted into the female con-
nector, or because one or both of the con-
nectors is deformed or the position is not
correctly aligned, or because there is cor-
rosion or oxidization of the contact sur-
faces. The corroded or oxidized contact
surfaces may become shiny again (and
contact may become normal) by connect-
ing and disconnecting the connector about
10 times.
2) Defective crimping or soldering of connec-

tors
The pins of the male and female connec-
tors are in contact at the crimped terminal
or soldered portion, but if there is exces-
sive force brought to bear on the wiring,
the plating at the joint will peel and cause
improper connection or breakage.
PC130-8 11
3) Disconnections in wiring
If the wiring is held and the connectors are
pulled apart, or components are lifted with
a crane with the wiring still connected, or a
heavy object hits the wiring, the crimping
of the connector may separate, or the sol-
dering may be damaged, or the wiring
may be broken.
4) High-pressure water entering connector

The connector is designed to make it diffi-
cult for water to enter (drip-proof struc-
ture), but if high-pressure water is sprayed
directly on the connector, water may enter
the connector, depending on the direction
of the water jet. Accordingly, take care not
to splash water over the connector. The
connector is designed to prevent water
from entering, but at the same time, if
water does enter, it is difficult for it to be
drained. Therefore, if water should get into
the connector, the pins will be short-cir-
cuited by the water, so if any water gets in,
immediately dry the connector or take
other appropriate action before passing
electricity through it.
5) Oil or dirt stuck to connector

If oil or grease are stuck to the connector
and an oil film is formed on the mating sur-
face between the male and female pins,
the oil will not let the electricity pass, so
there will be defective contact. If there is
oil or grease stuck to the connector, wipe it
off with a dry cloth or blow it dry with com-
pressed air and spray it with a contact
restorer.
a When wiping the mating portion of the
connector, be careful not to use
excessive force or deform the pins.
a If there is oil or water in the com-
pressed air, the contacts will become
even dirtier, so remove the oil and
water from the compressed air com-
pletely before cleaning with com-
pressed air.
12 PC130-8
3. Removing, installing, and drying connec-

tors and wiring harnesses
1) Disconnecting connectors
1] Hold the connectors when discon-
necting.
When disconnecting the connectors,
hold the connectors. For connectors
held by a screw, loosen the screw
fully, then hold the male and female
connectors in each hand and pull
apart. For connectors which have a
lock stopper, press down the stopper
with your thumb and pull the connec-
tors apart.
a Never pull with one hand.
2] When removing from clips

q Both of the connector and clip have
stoppers, which are engaged with
each other when the connector is
installed.
q When removing a connector from a

clip, pull the connector in a parallel
direction to the clip for removing stop-
pers.
a If the connector is twisted up and
down or to the left or right, the
housing may break.
3] Action to take after removing connec-

tors
After removing any connector, cover it
with a vinyl bag to prevent any dust,
dirt, oil, or water from getting in the
connector portion.
a If the machine is left disassem-
bled for a long time, it is particu-
larly easy for improper contact to
occur, so always cover the con-
nector.
PC130-8 13
2) Connecting connectors
1] Check the connector visually.
Check that there is no oil, dirt, or
water stuck to the connector pins
(mating portion).
Check that there is no deformation,
defective contact, corrosion, or dam-
age to the connector pins.
Check that there is no damage or
breakage to the outside of the con-
nector.
a If there is any oil, water, or dirt
stuck to the connector, wipe it off
with a dry cloth. If any water has
got inside the connector, warm
the inside of the wiring with a
dryer, but be careful not to make
it too hot as this will cause short
circuits.
a If there is any damage or break-
age, replace the connector.
2] Fix the connector securely.
Align the position of the connector
correctly, and then insert it securely.
For connectors with the lock stopper,
push in the connector until the stop-
per clicks into position.
3] Correct any protrusion of the boot and
any misalignment of the wiring har-
ness.
For connectors fitted with boots, cor-
rect any protrusion of the boot. In
addition, if the wiring harness is mis-
aligned, or the clamp is out of posi-
tion, adjust it to its correct position.
a If the connector cannot be cor-
rected easily, remove the clamp
and adjust the position.
q If the connector clamp has been
removed, be sure to return it to
its original position. Check also
that there are no loose clamps.
14 PC130-8
3) Heavy duty wire connector (DT 8-pole, 12- q Disconnection q Connection (Example of
pole) incomplete setting of (a))
Disconnection (Left of figure)
While pressing both sides of locks (a)
and (b), pull out female connector (2).
Connection (Right of figure)
1] Push in female connector (2) horizon-
tally until the lock clicks.
Arrow: 1)
2] Since locks (a) and (b) may not be set
completely, push in female connector
(2) while moving it up and down until
the locks are set normally.
Arrow: 1), 2), 3)
a Right of figure: Lock (a) is pulled
down (not set completely) and
lock (b) is set completely.
(1): Male connector
(2): Female connector
(a), (b): Locks
PC130-8 15
4) Drying wiring harness

If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring har-
ness, wipe it off with a dry cloth. Avoid
washing it in water or using steam. If the
connector must be washed in water, do
not use high-pressure water or steam
directly on the wiring harness. If water
gets directly on the connector, do as fol-
lows.
1] Disconnect the connector and wipe
off the water with a dry cloth.
a If the connector is blown dry with
compressed air, there is the risk
that oil in the air may cause
defective contact, so remove all
oi l a nd wa ter fr om t he c om -
pressed air before blowing with
air.
2] Dry the inside of the connector with a
dryer.
If water gets inside the connector, use
a dryer to dry the connector.
a Hot air from the dryer can be
used, but regulate the time that
the hot air is used in order not to
make the connector or related
parts too hot, as this will cause
deformation or damage to the
connector.
3] Carry out a continuity test on the con-
nector.
After drying, leave the wiring harness
disconnected and carry out a continu-
ity test to check for any short circuits
between pins caused by water.
a After completely drying the con-
n e c t o r, b l o w i t w i t h c o n ta c t
restorer and reassemble.
16 PC130-8
4. Handling controller
1) The controller contains a microcomputer
and electronic control circuits. These con-
trol all of the electronic circuits on the
machine, so be extremely careful when
handling the controller.
2) Do not place objects on top of the control-
ler.
3) Cover the control connectors with tape or
a vinyl bag. Never touch the connector
contacts with your hand.
4) During rainy weather, do not leave the
controller in a place where it is exposed to
rain.
5) Do not place the controller on oil, water, or
soil, or in any hot place, even for a short
time. (Place it on a suitable dry stand).
6) Precautions when carrying out arc welding
When carrying out arc welding on the
body, disconnect all wiring harness con-
nectors connected to the controller. Fit an
arc welding ground close to the welding
point.
5. Points to remember when troubleshooting

electric circuits
1) Always turn the power OFF before discon-
necting or connecting connectors.
2) Before carrying out troubleshooting, check
that all the related connectors are properly
inserted.
a Disconnect and connect the related
connectors several times to check.
3) Always connect any disconnected con-
nectors before going on to the next step.
a If the power is turned ON with the
connectors still disconnected, unnec-
essary abnormality displays will be
generated.
4) When carrying out troubleshooting of cir-
cuits (measuring the voltage, resistance,
continuity, or current), move the related
wiring and connectors several times and
check that there is no change in the read-
ing of the tester.
a If there is any change, there is proba-
bly defective contact in that circuit.
PC130-8 17
Points to remember when handling hydraulic equipment

With the increase in pressure and precision of hydraulic equipment, the most common cause of failure is dirt
(foreign material) in the hydraulic circuit. When adding hydraulic oil, or when disassembling or assembling
hydraulic equipment, it is necessary to be particularly careful.
1. Be careful of the operating environment.

Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or
repairing the machine in rain or high winds, or
places where there is a lot of dust.
2. Disassembly and maintenance work in the

field
If disassembly or maintenance work is carried
out on hydraulic equipment in the field, there is
danger of dust entering the equipment. It is
also difficult to check the performance after
repairs, so it is desirable to use unit exchange.
Disassembly and maintenance of hydraulic
equipment should be carried out in a specially
prepared dustproof workshop, and the perfor-
mance should be checked with special test
equipment.
3. Sealing openings
After any piping or equipment is removed, the
openings should be sealed with caps, tapes, or
vinyl bags to prevent any dirt or dust from
entering. If the opening is left open or is
blocked with a rag, there is danger of dirt
entering or of the surrounding area being
made dirty by leaking oil so never do this. Do
not simply drain oil out onto the ground, but
collect it and ask the customer to dispose of it,
or take it back with you for disposal.
4. Do not let any dirt or dust get in during

refilling operations
Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get in when
refilling with hydraulic oil. Always keep the oil
filler and the area around it clean, and also use
clean pumps and oil containers. If an oil clean-
ing device is used, it is possible to filter out the
dirt that has collected during storage, so this is
an even more effective method.
18 PC130-8
5. Change hydraulic oil when the temperature

is high
When hydraulic oil or other oil is warm, it flows
easily. In addition, the sludge can also be
drained out easily from the circuit together with
the oil, so it is best to change the oil when it is
still warm. When changing the oil, as much as
possible of the old hydraulic oil must be
drained out. (Drain the oil from the hydraulic
tank; also drain the oil from the filter and from
the drain plug in the circuit.) If any old oil is left,
the contaminants and sludge in it will mix with
the new oil and will shorten the life of the
hydraulic oil.
6. Flushing operations
After disassembling and assembling the equip-
ment, or changing the oil, use flushing oil to
remove the contaminants, sludge, and old oil
from the hydraulic circuit. Normally, flushing is
carried out twice: primary flushing is carried
out with flushing oil, and secondary flushing is
carried out with the specified hydraulic oil.
7. Cleaning operations
After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump,
control valve, etc.) or when running the
machine, carry out oil cleaning to remove the
sludge or contaminants in the hydraulic oil cir-
cuit. The oil cleaning equipment is used to
remove the ultra fine (about 3 m) particles that
the filter built in the hydraulic equipment can-
not remove, so it is an extremely effective
device.
PC130-8 19
Handling of connectors newly used for engines 1

a Mainly, following engines are object for follow- 2. Pull lock type (PACKARD-2)
ing connectors. q 95 – 170, 12V140 engines
q 95E-5 q Various temperature sensors
q 107E-1 Example)
q 114E-3 Intake air temperature sensor in
q 125E-5 intake manifold: TIM
q 140E-5 Fuel temperature sensor: TFUEL
q 170E-5 Oil temperature sensor: TOIL
q 12V140E-3 Coolant temperature sensor: TWTR,
etc.
1. Slide lock type Disconnect the connector by pulling lock
(FRAMATOME-3, FRAMATOME-2) (B) (on the wiring harness side) of connec-
q 95 – 170, 12V140 engines tor (2) outward.
q Various pressure sensors and NE
speed sensor
Examples)
Intake air pressure sensor in intake
manifold: PIM
(125, 170, 12V140 engines)
Oil pressure sensor: POIL
(125, 170, 12V140 engines)
Oil pressure switch
(95, 107, 114 engines)
Ne speed sensor of flywheel housing:
NE (95 – 170, 12V140 engines)
Ambient pressure sensor: PAMB
(125, 170, 12V140 engines)
Disconnect connector (1) according to the fol-

lowing procedure.
1) Slide lock (L1) to the right.
2) While pressing lock (L2), pull out connec-
tor (1) toward you.
a Even if lock (L2) is pressed, connec-
tor (1) cannot be pulled out toward
you, if part A does not float. In this
case, float part A with a small screw-
driver while press lock (L2), and then
pull out connector (1) toward you.
20 PC130-8
3. Push lock type

q 95, 107, 114 engines
Example)
Fuel pressure sensor in common rail
(BOSCH-03)
Disconnect connector (3) according to the fol-

lowing procedure.
1) While pressing lock (C), pull out connector
(3) in the direction of the arrow.
q 114 engine
q 107, 114 engines

Example)
Intake air pressure/temperature sensor in
intake manifold
(SUMITOMO-04)
3) While pressing lock (D), pull out connector

(4) in the direction of the arrow.
q 107 engine
a If the lock is on the underside, use

flat-head screwdriver [1] since you
cannot insert your fingers.
2) While pressing up lock (C) of the connec-
tor with flat-head screwdriver [1], pull out
connector (3) in the direction of the arrow.
PC130-8 21
q 95, 125 – 170, 12V140 engines 4. Turn-housing type (Round green connector)
4) While pressing lock (E) of the connector, q 140 engine
pull out connector (5) in the direction of Example)
the arrow. Intake air pressure sensor in intake mani-
fold (CANNON-04): PIM etc.
Example)
Fuel pressure sensor in common rail: 1) Disconnect connector (6) according to the
PFUEL etc. (AMP-3) following procedure.
1] Turn housing (H1) in the direction of
the arrow.
a When connector is unlocked,
housing (H1) becomes heavy to
turn.
2] Pull out housing (H1) in the direction
of the arrow.
a Housing (H1) is left on the wiring har-
ness side.
Example)
Injection pressure control valve of fuel
supply pump: PCV (SUMITOMO-2)
2) Connect the connector according to the

following procedure.
1] Insert the connector to the end, while
setting its groove.
2] Turn housing (H1) in the direction of
the arrow until it “clicks”.
Example)
Speed sensor of fuel supply pump:
G (SUMITOMO-3)
a Pull the connector straight up.
22 PC130-8
How to read electric wire code 1

a The information about the wires unique to each machine model is described in Troubleshooting section,
Relational information of troubleshooting.
In the electric circuit diagram, the material, thickness, and color of each electric wire are indicated by sym-
bols. The electric wire code is helpful in understanding the electric circuit diagram.
Example: AEX 0.85 L - - - Indicates blue, heat-resistant, low-voltage wire for automobile, having nomi-
nal No. of 0.85
Indicates color of wire by color code.
Color codes are shown in Table 3.
Indicates size of wire by nominal No.

Size (Nominal No.) is shown in Table 2.
Indicates type of wire by symbol.

Type, symbol, and material of wire are shown in Table 1.
(Since AV and AVS are classified by size (nominal No.), they are not indi-
cated.)
1. Type, symbol, and material

AV and AVS are different in only thickness and outside diameter of the cover. AEX is similar to AV in
thickness and outside diameter of AEX and different from AV and AVS in material of the cover.
(Table 1)
Using
Sym-
Type Material temperature Example of use
bol
range (°C)
Low-voltage Conduc- Annealed copper for elec-
General wiring
wire for AV tor tric appliance
(Nominal No. 5 and above)
automobile Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride
Thin-cover Conduc- Annealed copper for elec- –30 to +60
low-voltage tor tric appliance General wiring
AVS
wire for (Nominal No. 3 and below)
automobile Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride
Heat-resis- Conduc- Annealed copper for elec-
General wiring in extremely
tant low-volt- tor tric appliance
AEX –50 to +110 cold district, wiring at high-tem-
age wire for Heat-resistant crosslinked
Insulator perature place
automobile polyethylene
PC130-8 23
2. Dimensions
(Table 2)
Nominal No. 0.5f (0.5) 0.75f (0.85) 1.25f (1.25) 2f 2 3f 3 5
Number of
strands/Diam- 20/0.18 7/0.32 30/0.18 11/0.32 50/0.18 16/0.32 37/0.26 26/0.32 58/0.26 41/0.32 65/0.32
eter of strand
Conductor
Sectional
0.51 0.56 0.76 0.88 1.27 1.29 1.96 2.09 3.08 3.30 5.23
area (mm2)
d (approx.) 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.4 3.0
AVS Standard 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.9 2.9 3.5 3.6 –
Cov-
AV Standard – – – – – – – 4.6
er D
AEX Standard 2.0 2.2 2.7 3.0 3.1 – 3.8 4.6
Nominal No. 8 15 20 30 40 50 60 85 100

Number of
strands/Diam- 50/0.45 84/0.45 41/0.80 70/0.80 85/0.80 108/0.80 127/0.80 169/0.80 217/0.80
eter of strand
Conductor
Sectional
7.95 13.36 20.61 35.19 42.73 54.29 63.84 84.96 109.1
area (mm2)
d (approx.) 3.7 4.8 6.0 8.0 8.6 9.8 10.4 12.0 13.6
AVS Standard – – – – – – – – –
Cov-
AV Standard 5.5 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
er D
AEX Standard 5.3 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
“f” of nominal No. denotes flexible”.
24 PC130-8
3. Color codes table
(Table 3)
Color Code Color of wire Color Code Color of wire
B Black LgW Light green & White
Br Brown LgY Light green & Yellow
BrB Brown & Black LR Blue & Red
BrR Brown & Red LW Blue & White
BrW Brown & White LY Blue & Yellow
BrY Brown & Yellow O Orange
Ch Charcoal P Pink
Dg Dark green R Red
G Green RB Red & Black
GB Green & Black RG Red & Green
GL Green & Blue RL Red & Blue
Gr Gray RW Red & White
GR Green & Red RY Red & Yellow
GW Green & White Sb Sky Blue
GY Green & Yellow Y Yellow
L Blue YB Yellow & Black
LB Blue & Black YG Yellow &Green
Lg Light green YL Yellow & Blue
LgB Light green & Black YR Yellow & Red
LgR Light green & Red YW Yellow & White
Remarks: In a color code consisting of 2 colors, the first color is the color of the background and
the second color is the color of the marking.
Example: “GW” means that the background is Green and marking is White.
4. Types of circuits and color codes
(Table 4)
Type of wire AVS or AV AEX
Charge R WG – – – – R –
Ground B – – – – – B –
Start R – – – – – R –
Light RW RB RY RG RL – D –
Instrument Y YR YB YG YL YW Y Gr
Signal G GW GR GY GB GL G Br
L LW LR LY LB – L –
Type of
Br BrW BrR BrY BrB – – –
circuit
Lg LgR LgY LgB LgW – – –
O – – – – – – –
Others Gr – – – – – – –
P – – – – – – –
Sb – – – – – – –
Dg – – – – – – –
Ch – – – – – – –
PC130-8 25
Precautions when carrying out operation 1

[When carrying out removal or installation (disassembly or assembly) of units, be sure to follow the general
precautions given below when carrying out the operation.]
1. Precautions when carrying out removal work

q If the coolant contains antifreeze, dispose of it correctly.
q After disconnecting hoses or tubes, cover them or fit plugs to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
q When draining oil, prepare a container of adequate size to catch the oil.
q Confirm the match marks showing the installation position, and make match marks in the necessary
places before removal to prevent any mistake when assembling.
q To prevent any excessive force from being applied to the wiring, always hold the connectors when dis-
connecting the connectors. Do not pull the wires.
q Fit wires and hoses with tags to show their installation position to prevent any mistake when installing.
q Check the number and thickness of the shims, and keep in a safe place.
q When raising components, be sure to use lifting equipment of ample strength.
q When using forcing screws to remove any components, tighten the forcing screws uniformly in turn.
q Before removing any unit, clean the surrounding area and fit a cover to prevent any dust or dirt from
entering after removal.
a Precautions when handling piping during disassembly
Fit the following plugs into the piping after disconnecting it during disassembly operations.
1) Face seal type hoses and tubes
Nominal
Plug (nut end) Sleeve nut (elbow end)
number
02 07376-70210 02789-20210
03 07376-70315 02789-20315
04 07376-70422 02789-20422
05 07376-70522 02789-20522
06 07376-70628 02789-20628
10 07376-71034 07221-21034
12 07376-71234 07221-21234
2) Split flange type hoses and tubes

Nominal
Flange (hose end) Sleeve head (tube end) Split flange
number
04 07379-00400 07378-10400 07371-30400
05 07379-00500 07378-10500 07371-30500
3) If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following corks can be used.
Nominal Dimensions
Part Number
number D d L
06 07049-00608 6 5 8
08 07049-00811 8 6.5 11
10 07049-01012 10 8.5 12
12 07049-01215 12 10 15
14 07049-01418 14 11.5 18
16 07049-01620 16 13.5 20
18 07049-01822 18 15 22
20 07049-02025 20 17 25
22 07049-02228 22 18.5 28
24 07049-02430 24 20 30
27 07049-02734 27 22.5 34
26 PC130-8
2. Precautions when carrying out installation work

q Tighten all bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified (KES) torque.
q Install the hoses without twisting or interference and fix them with intermediate clamps, if there are any.
q Replace all gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates with new parts.
q Bend the cotter pins and lock plates securely.
q When coating with adhesive, clean the part and remove all oil and grease, then coat the threaded por-
tion with 2 – 3 drops of adhesive.
q When coating with gasket sealant, clean the surface and remove all oil and grease, check that there is
no dirt or damage, then coat uniformly with gasket sealant.
q Clean all parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or rust.
q Coat rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
q When press fitting parts, coat the surface with anti-friction compound (LM-P).
q After fitting snap rings, check that the snap ring is fitted securely in the ring groove.
q When connecting wiring connectors, clean the connector to remove all oil, dirt, or water, then connect
securely.
q When using eyebolts, check that there is no deformation or deterioration, screw them in fully, and align
the direction of the hook.
q When tightening split flanges, tighten uniformly in turn to prevent excessive tightening on one side.
a When operating the hydraulic cylinders for the first time after reassembling cylinders, pumps and other
hydraulic equipment removed for repair, always bleed the air as follows:
1) Start the engine and run at low idle.
2) Operate the work equipment control lever to operate the hydraulic cylinder 4 – 5 times, stopping the
cylinder 100 mm from the end of its stroke.
3) Next, operate the hydraulic cylinder 3 – 4 times to the end of its stroke.
4) After doing this, run the engine at normal speed.
a When using the machine for the first time after repair or long storage, follow the same procedure.
3. Precautions when completing the operation

1) Refilling with coolant, oil and grease
q If the coolant has been drained, tighten the drain valve, and add coolant to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the coolant through the system. Then check the coolant level
again.
q If the hydraulic equipment has been removed and installed again, add engine oil to the speci-
fied level. Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system. Then check the oil level
again.
q If the piping or hydraulic equipment have been removed, always bleed the air from the system
after reassembling the parts.
a For details, see Testing and adjusting, “Bleeding air”.
q Add the specified amount of grease (molybdenum disulphide grease) to the work equipment
parts.
2) Checking cylinder head and manifolds for looseness
Check the cylinder head and intake and exhaust manifold for looseness.
If any part is loosened, retighten it.
q For the tightening torque, see “Disassembly and assembly”.
3) Checking engine piping for damage and looseness
Intake and exhaust system
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the joints for air
suction and exhaust gas leakage.
If any part is loosened or damaged, retighten or repair it.
Cooling system
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the joints for
coolant leakage.
Fuel system
Check the piping for damage, the mounting bolts and nuts for looseness, and the joints for fuel
leakage.
PC130-8 27
4) Checking muffler and exhaust pipe for damage and looseness

1] Visually check the muffler, exhaust pipe and their mounting parts for a crack and damage.
If any part is damaged, replace it.
2] Check the mounting bolts and nuts of the muffler, exhaust pipe and their mounting parts for
looseness.
If any bolt or nut is loosened, retighten it.
5) Checking muffler function
Check the muffler for abnormal sound and sound different from that of a new muffler.
If any abnormal sound is heard, repair the muffler, referring to “Troubleshooting” and “Disassembly
and assembly”.
28 PC130-8
Method of disassembling and connecting push-pull type coupler 1

k Before carrying out the following work, loosen the oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank gradually to
release the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank.
k Even if the residual pressure is released from the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows out
when the hose is disconnected. Accordingly, prepare an oil receiving container.
Type 1
1. Disconnection
1) Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2)
into mating adapter (3). (Fig. 1)
a The adapter can be pushed in about
3.5 mm.
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After hose joint (2) is pushed into adapter
(3), press rubber cap portion (4) against
adapter (3) until it clicks. (Fig. 2)
3) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull
it out. (Fig. 3)
a Since some hydraulic oil flows out,
prepare an oil receiving container.
2. Connection
1) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and
insert it in mating adapter (3), aligning
them with each other. (Fig. 4)
a Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After inserting the hose in the mating
adapter perfectly, pull it back to check its
connecting condition. (Fig. 5)
a When the hose is pulled back, the
rubber cap portion moves toward the
hose about 3.5 mm. This does not
indicate abnormality, however.
PC130-8 29
Type 2
1. Disconnection
1) Hold the tightening portion and push body
(7) straight until sliding prevention ring (6)
contacts contact surface (a) of the hexag-
onal portion at the male end. (Fig. 6)
2) While holding the condition of Step 1), turn
lever (8) to the right (clockwise). (Fig. 7)
3) While holding the condition of Steps 1)
and 2), pull out whole body (7) to discon-
nect it. (Fig. 8)
2. Connection
q Hold the tightening portion and push body
contacts contact surface (a) of the hexag-
30 PC130-8
Type 3
1. Disconnection
1) Hold the tightening portion and push body
contacts contact surface (b) of the hexag-
2) While holding the condition of Step 1),
push cover (10) straight until it contacts
contact surface (b) of the hexagonal por-
tion at the male end. (Fig. 11)
3) While holding the condition of Steps 1)
and 2), pull out whole body (9) to discon-
nect it. (Fig. 12)
2. Connection
q Hold the tightening portion and push body
(9) straight until the sliding prevention ring
contacts contact surface (b) of the hexag-
PC130-8 31
Standard tightening torque table 1

1. Table of tightening torques for bolts and nuts
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten metric nuts and bolts to the torque below.
a The following table applies to the bolts in Fig. A.
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats Tightening torque

mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 11.8 – 14.7 1.2 – 1.5
8 13 27 – 34 2.8 – 3.5
10 17 59 – 74 6.0 – 7.5
12 19 98 – 123 10.0 – 12.5
14 22 157 – 196 16 – 20
16 24 245 – 309 25 – 31.5
18 27 343 – 427 35 – 43.5
20 30 490 – 608 50 – 62
22 32 662 – 829 67.5 – 84.5
24 36 824 – 1,030 84 – 105
27 41 1,180 – 1,470 120 – 150
30 46 1,520 – 1,910 155 – 195
33 50 1,960 – 2,450 200 – 250
36 55 2,450 – 3,040 250 – 310
39 60 2,890 – 3,630 295 – 370
a The following table applies to the bolts in Fig. B.

mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 5.9 – 9.8 0.6 – 1.0
8 12 13.7 – 23.5 1.4 – 2.4
10 14 34.3 – 46.1 3.5 – 4.7
12 17 74.5 – 90.2 7.6 – 9.2
a Fig. A a Fig. B
Remarks: The widths across flats against the thread diameters of flanged bolts (marks with "*") in Fig. A are
the ones indicated in the table for bolts shown in Fig. B.
(Values of tightening torques shown in the table for Fig. A are applied.)
32 PC130-8
2. Table of tightening torques for split flange bolts

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten split flange bolts to the torque below.

mm mm Nm kgm
10 14 59 – 74 6.0 – 7.5
12 17 98 – 123 10.0 – 12.5
16 22 235 – 285 23.5 – 29.5
3. Table of tightening torques for O-ring boss piping joints

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.
Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque Nm {kgm}

Nominal No.
mm mm Range Target
02 14 35 – 63 { 3.5 – 6.5} 44 { 4.5}
03,04 20 Varies depending 84 – 132 { 8.5 – 13.5} 103 {10.5}
05,06 24 on type of connec- 128 – 186 {13.0 – 19.0} 157 {16.0}
10,12 33 tor. 363 – 480 {37.0 – 49.0} 422 {43.0}
14 42 746 – 1,010 {76.0 – 103} 883 {90.0}
4. Table of tightening torques for O-ring boss plugs

a Unless there are special instructions, tighten O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.
Nominal Thread diameter Width across flats Tightening torque Nm {kgm}

No. mm mm Range Target
08 8 14 5.88 – 8.82 {0.6 – 0.9} 7.35 {0.75}
10 10 17 9.81 – 12.74 {1.0 – 1.3} 11.27 {1.15}
12 12 19 14.7 – 19.6 {1.5 – 2.0} 17.64 {1.8}
14 14 22 19.6 – 24.5 {2.0 – 2.5} 22.54 {2.3}
16 16 24 24.5 – 34.3 {2.5 – 3.5} 29.4 {3.0}
18 18 27 34.3 – 44.1 {3.5 – 4.5} 39.2 {4.0}
20 20 30 44.1 – 53.9 {4.5 – 5.5} 49.0 {5.0}
24 24 32 58.8 – 78.4 {6.0 – 8.0} 68.6 {7.0}
30 30 32 93.1 – 122.5 { 9.5 – 12.5} 107.8 {11.0}
33 33 – 107.8 – 147.0 {11.0 – 15.0} 127.4 {13.0}
36 36 36 127.4 – 176.4 {13.0 – 18.0} 151.9 {15.5}
42 42 – 181.3 – 240.1 {18.5 – 24.5} 210.7 {21.5}
52 52 – 274.4 – 367.5 {28.0 – 37.5} 323.4 {33.0}
PC130-8 33
5. Table of tightening torques for hoses (taper seal type and face seal type)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the
torque below.
a Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.
Tightening torque Nm {kgm} Taper seal Face seal

Nominal Width Nominal No. –
No. of across Thread
Thread size Number of
hose flats Range Target diameter (mm)
(mm) threads, type of
(Reference)
thread
34 – 54 { 3.5 – 5.5} – 9/16-18UN 14.3
02 19 44 { 4.5}
34 – 63 { 3.5 – 6.5} 14 – –
22 54 – 93 { 5.5 – 9.5} 74 { 7.5} – 11/16-16UN 17.5
03
24 59 – 98 { 6.0 – 10.0} 78 { 8.0} 18 – –
04 27 84 – 132 { 8.5 – 13.5} 103 {10.5} 22 13/16-16UN 20.6
05 32 128 – 186 {13.0 – 19.0} 157 {16.0} 24 1-14UNS 25.4
06 36 177 – 245 {18.0 – 25.0} 216 {22.0} 30 1-3/16-12UN 30.2
(10) 41 177 – 245 {18.0 – 25.0} 216 {22.0} 33 – –
(12) 46 197 – 294 {20.0 – 30.0} 245 {25.0} 36 – –
(14) 55 246 – 343 {25.0 – 35.0} 294 {30.0} 42 – –
6. Table of tightening torques for face seal joints

a Tighten the face seal joints (sleeve nut type) made of plated steel pipes for low pressure service to
be used for engines etc. to the torque shown in the following table.
a Apply the following torque to the face seal joint while their threaded parts are coated with engine oil
(wetted).
Outer Width Tightening torque Nm {kgm} Face seal

diameter across Nominal No. – Thread diameter
of pipe flats Range Target Number of threads, (mm)
(mm) (mm) type of thread (Reference)
8 19 14 – 16 {1.4 – 1.6} 15 {1.5} 9/16-18UN 14.3
10 22 24 – 27 {2.4 – 2.7} 25.5 {2.6} 11/16-16UN 17.5
12 24 (27) 43 – 47 {4.4 – 4.8} 45 {4.6} 13/16-16UN 20.6
15 (16) 30 (32) 60 – 68 {6.1 – 6.8} 64 {6.5} 1-14UN 25.4
22 (20) 36 90 – 95 {9.2 – 9.7} 92.5 {9.4} 1-3/16-12UN 30.2
Reference: The face seal joints of the dimensions in ( ) are also used, depending on the specification.
7. Table of tightening torques for 102, 107 and 114 engine series (Bolts and nuts)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the metric bolts and nuts of the 102, 107 and 114
engine series to the torque below.
Tightening torque
Thread size
Bolts and nuts
mm Nm kgm
6 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
8 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
10 43 ± 6 4.38 ± 0.61
12 77 ± 12 7.85 ± 1.22
14 — —
34 PC130-8
8. Table of tightening torques for 102, 107 and 114 engine series (Eye joints)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the metric eye joints of the 102, 107 and 114 engine
series to the torque below.
Thread size Tightening torque

mm Nm kgm
6 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
8 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
10 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
12 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
14 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51
9. Table of tightening torques for 102, 107 and 114 engine series (Taper screws)
a Unless there are special instructions, tighten the taper screws (unit: inch) of the 102, 107 and 114
engine series to the torque below.
Tightening torque
Material In cast iron or steel In aluminum
Thread size (inch) Nm kgm Nm kgm
1/16 15 ± 2 1.53 ± 0.20 5±1 0.51 ± 0.10
1/8 20 ± 2 2.04 ± 0.20 15 ± 2 1.53 ± 0.20
1/4 25 ± 3 2.55 ± 0.31 20 ± 2 2.04 ± 0.20
3/8 35 ± 4 3.57 ± 0.41 25 ± 3 2.55 ± 0.31
1/2 55 ± 6 5.61 ± 0.61 35 ± 4 3.57 ± 0.41
3/4 75 ± 8 7.65 ± 0.82 45 ± 5 4.59 ± 0.51
PC130-8 35
Conversion table 1
Method of using the conversion table
The conversion table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the
method of using the conversion table, see the example given below.
Example: Method of using the conversion table to convert from millimeters to inches
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.

1) Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as (A), and then draw a hori-
zontal line from (A).
2) Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as (B), then draw a perpendicular line down
from (B).
3) Take the point where the 2 lines cross as (C). This point (C) gives the value when converting from
millimeters to inches. Therefore, 55 mm = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.

1) The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide it by 10 (move the decimal point one place
to the left) to convert it to 55 mm.
2) Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.
3) The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal
point one place to the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.
Millimeters to inches (B)

1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
(C)
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
(A)
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
36 PC130-8
Millimeters to inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
Kilogram to pound
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84
10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03
50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26
Liters to U.S. Gallons

1 l = 0.2642 U.S.Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378
10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944
50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153
PC130-8 37
Liters to U.K. Gallons

1 l = 0.21997 U.K.Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980
10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778
50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777
kgm to ft.lb
1 kgm = 7.233 ft.lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1
10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4
50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1
100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7
150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.6 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4
38 PC130-8
kg/cm2 to lb/in2
1 kg/cm2 = 14.2233 lb/in2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0
10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9
50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1,010 1,024 1,038 1,053 1,067 1,081 1,095 1,109 1,124
80 1,138 1,152 1,166 1,181 1,195 1,209 1,223 1,237 1,252 1,266
90 1,280 1,294 1,309 1,323 1,337 1,351 1,365 1,380 1,394 1,408
100 1,422 1,437 1,451 1,465 1,479 1,493 1,508 1,522 1,536 1,550
110 1,565 1,579 1,593 1,607 1,621 1,636 1,650 1,664 1,678 1,693
120 1,707 1,721 1,735 1,749 1,764 1,778 1,792 1,806 1,821 1,835
130 1,849 1,863 1,877 1,892 1,906 1,920 1,934 1,949 1,963 1,977
140 1,991 2,005 2,020 2,034 2,048 2,062 2,077 2,091 2,105 2,119
150 2,134 2,148 2,162 2,176 2,190 2,205 2,219 2,233 2,247 2,262
160 2,276 2,290 2,304 2,318 2,333 2,347 2,361 2,375 2,389 2,404
170 2,418 2,432 2,446 2,460 2,475 2,489 2,503 2,518 2,532 2,546
180 2,560 2,574 2,589 2,603 2,617 2,631 2,646 2,660 2,674 2,688
190 2,702 2,717 2,731 2,745 2,759 2,773 2,788 2,802 2,816 2,830
200 2,845 2,859 2,873 2,887 2,901 2,916 2,930 2,944 2,958 2,973
210 2,987 3,001 3,015 3,030 3,044 3,058 3,072 3,086 3,101 3,115
220 3,129 3,143 3,158 3,172 3,186 3,200 3,214 3,229 3,243 3,257
230 3,271 3,286 3,300 3,314 3,328 3,343 3,357 3,371 3,385 3,399
240 3,414 3,428 3,442 3,456 3,470 3,485 3,499 3,513 3,527 3,542
PC130-8 39
Temperature
Fahrenheit-Centigrade conversion: A simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centi-
grade temperature reading or vice versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center (boldface column)
of figures. These figures refer to the temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees.
When convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, consider the center column to be a table of Fahren-
heit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column at the left.
When convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column to be a table of Centi-
grade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
1°C = 33.8°F
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
–40.4 –40 –40.0 –11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 177.8
–37.2 –35 –31.0 –11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
–34.4 –30 –22.0 –10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
–31.7 –25 –13.0 –10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
–28.9 –20 –4.0 –9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0
–28.3 –19 –2.2 –8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8

–27.8 –18 –0.4 –8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
–27.2 –17 1.4 –7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
–26.7 –16 3.2 –7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
–26.1 –15 5.0 –6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0
–25.6 –14 6.8 –6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8

–25.0 –13 8.6 –5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
–24.4 –12 10.4 –5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
–23.9 –11 12.2 –4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
–23.3 –10 14.0 –3.9 25 77.0 15.6 60 140.0 35.0 95 203.0
–22.8 –9 15.8 –3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8

–22.2 –8 17.6 –2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
–21.7 –7 19.4 –2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
–21.1 –6 21.2 –1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
–20.6 –5 23.0 –1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0
–20.0 –4 24.8 –0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0

–19.4 –3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
–18.9 –2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
–18.3 –1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
–17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0
–17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0

–16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
–16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
–15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
–15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0
–14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0

–13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
–13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
–12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
–12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0
40 PC130-8
PC130-8 41

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 12-08 (02)
42 PC130-8
SEN03768-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
01 Specification
Specification and technical data
Specification dimension drawings ................................................................................................................... 2
Working range diagram................................................................................................................................... 3
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 4
List of weights ................................................................................................................................................. 8
List of lubricant and coolant to be filled......................................................................................................... 10
PC130-8 1
SEN03768-01 01 Specification
Specification dimension drawings 1
Item Unit PC130-8

Machine weight (Standard specification) kg 12,700
Bucket capacity m 3 0.50
Engine type — Komatsu SAA4D95LE-5 Diesel engine
Net [ISO 9249/SAE J1349] 68.4{91.7}/2,200
Engine rated output kW{HP}/rpm
Gross [SAE J1955] 72.1{96.6}/2,200
A Overall length (Standard specification) mm 7,590
B Overall height mm 2,875
C Overall width mm 2,500
D Shoe width mm 500
E Tail swing radius mm 2,190
F Crawler overall length mm 3,610
G Distance between tambler center mm 2,880
H Cab height mm 2,855
Ground clearance mm 400
Traveling speed (Low/High) km/h 2.9/5.5
Continuous swing speed rpm 11.0
a There are net value and gross value for displaying engine rate output. Gross value is measurement of
engine alone, and net value is measurement with close to on-board conditions.
2 PC130-8
Working range diagram 1
Unit: mm
Working range (mm) PC130-8
A Maximum digging reach 8,290
B Maximum digging depth 5,520
C Maximum digging height 8,650
D Maximum vertical wall digging depth 4,980
E Maximum dumping height 6,210
Minimum swing radius of work
F 2,450
equipment
G Maximum reach at ground level 8,170
PC130-8 3
Specifications 1
PC130-8
Machine model
Standard specification
Serial No. 80001 and up
Bucket capacity m3 0.50
Operating weight kg 12,700
Max. digging depth mm 5,520
Working ranges
Max. vertical wall depth mm 4,980

Max. digging reach mm 8,290
Max. reach at ground level mm 8,170
Max. digging height mm 8,650
Performance
Max. dumping height mm 6,210

Maximum digging force (bucket) kN{kg} 93.4{9,520}
Swing speed rpm 11.0
Swing max. slope angle Degree 20.0
Travel speed (Low/High) km/h 2.9/5.5
Gradeability deg. 35
Ground pressure kPa{kg/cm2} 39.9{0.41}
Overall length (for transport) mm 7,590
Overall width mm 2,500
Overall height (for transport) mm 2,875
Overall height (for work) mm 2,855
Ground clearance of counterweight mm 895
Min. ground clearance mm 400
Dimension
Tail swing radius mm 2,190

Min. swing radius of work equipment mm 2,450
Height of work equipment at min.
mm 6,495
swing radius
Crawler overall width mm 2,490
Crawler overall length mm 3,610
Length of track on ground mm 2,880
Track gauge mm 1,990
Overall height of machine cab mm 2,855
The values are based on the machine with the triple grouser shoe.
4 PC130-8
PC130-8
Machine model
Model SAA4D95LE-5
4-cycle, water-cooled, in-line, vertical, direct injection, with
Type
turbocharger and air cooled aftercooler
No. of cylinders-bore x stroke mm 95 x 115
Piston displacement l{cc} 3.260{3,260}
Rated horsepower
• Net [ISO 9249/SAE J1349] kW{HP}/rpm 68.4{91.7}/2,200
• Gross [SAE J1995] 72.1{96.6}/2,200
Performance
Max. torque Nm{kgm}/rpm 350{35.7}/1,500

Engine
High idling speed rpm 2,300

Low idling speed rpm 1,100
g/kWh
Min. fuel consumption ratio 224{167}
{g/HPh}
Starting motor 24 V, 4.5 kW
Alternator 24 V, 35 A
Battery (*1) 12 V, 64 Ah x 2
Radiator core type 4-array aluminum mesh core
Aftercooler core type Aluminum mesh core
Carrier roller 1 on each side
Undercarriage
Track roller 7 on each side

Track shoe (iron shoe) Assembly-type triple grouser shoe, 43 on each side
(road liner) Assembly-type road liner, 43 on each side
Hydraulic motor Control valve Hydraulic pump
Type x no. Variable displacement piston type x 1
Discharge l/min 121+121 (at 2,200 rpm)
Set pressure MPa{kg/cm2} 34.8{355}
Type x no. 6-spool type x 1

Hydraulic system
Control method Hydraulic type
Variable displacement piston type

Travel motor
(with brake valve and parking brake) x 2
Fixed displacement piston type

Swing motor
(with safety valve and holding brake) x 1
Hydraulic tank Box-shaped, open
Hydraulic oil filter Tank return side
Hydraulic cooler Air cooled (CF40)
*1. Battery capacity (Ah) is based on 5-hour rate.

a There are net value and gross value for displaying engine rate horsepower. Gross value is measure-
ment of engine alone, and net value is measurement with close to on-board conditions.
PC130-8 5
PC130-8
Machine model
Type Reciprocating piston type
Boom cylinder
Cylinder inner diameter mm ø 105

Piston rod diameter mm ø 70
Stroke mm 995
Max. length between pins mm 2,510
Min. length between pins mm 1,515
Work equipment cylinder

Hydraulic system

Arm cylinder

Stroke mm 1,175
Bucket cylinder

Stroke mm 885
6 PC130-8
PC130-8 7
List of weights 1
k This weight table is prepared for your reference when handling or transporting the components.
Unit: kg
PC130-8
Machine model
Engine assembly (excl. water, oil) 461
• Engine (excl. water, oil) 332
• Engine mount 21.5
• PTO 5.5
• Hydraulic pump 102
• • Filter (for KA specification) (6 x 2)
Cooling assembly (excl. coolant, oil) 96.1
• Radiator (excl. coolant) 9.2
• Oil cooler (excl. oil) 11.0
• Aftercooler 7.5
• Fuel cooler (excl. fuel) 0.53
Revolving frame 1,190
Operator cab 480
Operator seat 35
Fuel cooler (excl. fuel) 105
Hydraulic tank (excl. hydraulic oil) 97
Control valve 95
Counterweight 2,455
Swing motor (incl. brake valve) 20
Swing circle 153
Swing machinery 71.6
Center swivel joint 28.6
Track frame assembly (excl. track shoe) 2,300
• Track frame 1,305
• Idler assembly 79 x 2
• Recoil spring assembly 69 x 2
• Carrier roller 16.5 x 2
• Track roller 22 x 14
• Travel motor (with reduction gear) 145 x 2
• Sprocket 33.1 x 2
Track shoe assembly
• Triple grouser shoe (500 mm) 755 x 2
• Road liner (500 mm) 780 x 2
8 PC130-8
Unit: kg
PC130-8
Machine model
Boom assembly 787
Arm assembly 406
Bucket link assembly 122.9
Bucket assembly
• 980 mm width (incl. side cutter) 454
Boom cylinder assembly 100.3 x 2
Arm cylinder assembly 135
Bucket cylinder assembly 77.8
a BOC: Bolt-On Cutting edge

1
PC130-8 9
List of lubricant and coolant to be filled 1

a For details of the notes (Note. 1, 2, 3, 4) in the table, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
a The details refer to an Operation and Maintenance Manual about Recommended Komatsu fluids again.
10 PC130-8
Unit: l
Reservoir Specified capacity Refill capacity
Engine oil pan 11.5 11.0
Swing machinery case 2.5 2.5
Final drive case (each side) 2.1 2.1
PTO case 0.75 —
Hydraulic system 145 90
Fuel tank 246 —
Cooling system 13.9 13.9
PC130-8 11

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
12 PC130-8
SEN03770-01
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
10 Structure, function and

maintenance standard 1
Engine and cooling system
Engine mount.................................................................................................................................................. 2
PTO................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Cooling system ............................................................................................................................................... 4
PC130-8 1
SEN03770-01 10 Structure, function and maintenance standard
Engine mount 1
2 PC130-8
PTO 1
a PTO: Abbreviation for Power Take Off
1. Flywheel
2. Coupling
3. Hydraulic pump shaft
4. Drain plug
5. Oil filler plug
6. Oil level plug
PC130-8 3
Cooling system 1
4 PC130-8
1. Radiator cap 10. Fuel cooler inlet

2. Shroud 11. Radiator outlet hose
3. Reservoir tank 12. Radiator inlet hose
4. Oil cooler outlet 13. Aftercooler outlet hose
5. Oil cooler 14. Fan guard
6. Aftercooler 15. Oil cooler inlet
7. Radiator 16. Aftercooler inlet hose
8. Fuel cooler 17. Drain cock
9. Fuel cooler outlet
Specifications
Radiator Oil cooler Aftercooler Fuel cooler

4-array aluminum Aluminum mesh
Core type CF40 Drawn cup
mesh core core
Fine pitch (mm) 3.5/2 3.5/2 4.0/2 4.0/2
Total heat dissipation surface 12.96
27.82 8.79 0.59
(m²) (6.48 x 2)
Pressure valve cracking
49.0 ± 14.7
pressure — — —
{0.5 ± 0.15}
(kPa{kg/cm²})
Vacuum valve cracking pressure -4.9 – 0
— — —
(kPa{kg/cm²}) {-0.05 – 0}
PC130-8 5

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
6 PC130-8
SEN03771-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Power train
Power train...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Swing circle..................................................................................................................................................... 3
Swing machinery............................................................................................................................................. 4
PC130-8 1
Power train 1
1. Idler 6. Hydraulic pump

2. Control valve 7. Engine
2a. Self pressure reducing valve 8. Swing motor
3. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve 9. Center swivel joint
4. Swing holding brake solenoid valve 10. Swing machinery
5. Travel motor (Final drive) 11. Swing circle
2 PC130-8
Swing circle 1
Unit: mm
No. Item Criteria Remedy
Basic clearance Clearance limit
1 Bearing clearance Replace
0.5 – 1.6 2.6
2. Swing circle bearing lubrication a. Inner race soft zone position

3. Swing circle pinion lubrication b. Outer race soft zone position
4. Outer race
5. Ball Specifications
6. Seal
Reduction ratio 90/11=8.182
7. Inner race (Number of teeth: 90)
Grease G2-LI
Grease quantity (l) 9.1
PC130-8 3
Swing machinery 1
1. Level gauge Specifications

2. Oil feed pipe
Reduction ratio (14+61) / 14 × (17+61) / 17 = 24.58
3. Swing pinion (Number of teeth: 11)
4. Swing machinery case Swing reduction
24.58 × 8.182 = 201.11
5. No. 2 planetary carrier ratio
6. No. 2 sun gear (Number of teeth: 17) Swing speed
11.0
7. Ring gear (Number of teeth: 61) (rpm)
8. No. 1 planetary carrier
9. No. 1 sun gear (Number of teeth: 14)
10. Swing motor
11. No. 1 planetary gear (Number of teeth: 24)
12. No. 2 planetary gear (Number of teeth: 22)
13. Drain plug
4 PC130-8
Unit: mm
Backlash between swing motor Standard clearance Clearance limit
1
shaft and No. 1 sun gear 0.07 – 0.18 0.4
Backlash between No. 1 sun
2 0.13 – 0.31 0.6
gear and No. 1 planetary gear
Backlash between No. 1 plane-
3 0.15 – 0.34 0.7
tary gear and ring gear
4 0.14 – 0.34 0.7
tary carrier and No. 2 sun gear
Replace
Backlash between No. 2 sun
5 0.13 – 0.31 0.6
gear and No. 2 planetary gear
6 0.15 – 0.34 0.7
tary gear and ring gear
7 0.08 – 0.19 0.4
tary carrier and swing pinion
Back lash between Swing pin-
8 0.13 – 1.16 2.3
ion and swing circle
Outside diameter of oil seal Standard size Tolerance Repair limit Repair by hard
9 contacting surface on swing 0 chrome-plating
pinion collar ø 145 ø 144.8 or replace
-0.100
PC130-8 5
PC130-8 GALEO Hydraulic excavator

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
6 PC130-8
SEN03772-01
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Undercarriage and frame
Track frame ..................................................................................................................................................... 2
Idler cushion.................................................................................................................................................... 3
Idler ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Track roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
Carrier roller .................................................................................................................................................... 6
Sprocket .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
Track shoe ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
PC130-8 1
Track frame 1
Unit: mm
Standard size Repair limit
Track Rebuilding
84 89
1 Length at idler guide frame
Idler Rebuilding or
82 77
support replace
Track
185 193 Rebuilding
frame
2 Width at idler guide
Idler Rebuilding or
183 175
support replace
3. Idler 7. Sprocket
4. Track frame 8. Track roller
5. Carrier roller 9. Idler cushion
6. Travel motor (Final drive) 10. Track shoe
2 PC130-8
Idler cushion 1
Unit: mm
Installed Installed Installed
Free length Free length
1 Recoil spring length load load Replace
84.3 kN 75.0 kN
501.4 390 489
{8,600 kg} {7,650 kg}
2. Idler Specifications
3. Support
Grease G2-LI
4. Rod
5. Cylinder Grease quantity (cc) 118
6. U-packing
7. Pilot
8. Nut
9. Valve
10. Grease fitting
PC130-8 3
Idler 1
Unit: mm
1 Outside diameter of projection
ø 527 —
Rebuilding or
2 Outside diameter of tread ø 489 ø 477
replace
3 Tread depth 19 25
4 Width of projection 52 42
5 Overall width 115 107 —
Rebuilding or
6 Tread width (one side) 31.5 36.5
replace
Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
Clearance between idler gear size Shaft Hole clearance limit
7
and bushing -0.250 +0.074 0.250 –
54 1.5
-0.280 0 0.354
Tolerance Standard
Standard Interfer-
interfer- Replace
Interference between bushing size Shaft Hole ence limit
8 ence
and link
+0.117 +0.030 0.057 –
61 —
+0.087 0 0.117
Side clearance of idler Standard clearance Clearance limit
9
(each side) 0.18 – 0.38 1.5
Tread thickness Basic dimension Repair limit Rebuilding or
10
(at tread center) 15 9 replace
— Oil capacity 90 cc (engine oil: SAE30CD) —
4 PC130-8
Track roller 1
Unit: mm
1 Outside diameter of projection
ø 158 — Rebuilding or
2 Outside diameter of tread ø 130 ø 120 replace
3 Flange width 26.5 —
4 Overall width 176 — —
Rebuilding or
5 Tread width 35 —
replace
Clearance between Shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
6
bushing -0.220 +0.190 0.250 –
ø 50 1.5
-0.240 +0.030 0.430
Tolerance Standard
Standard Interfer-
interfer- Replace
Interference between roller and size Shaft Hole ence limit
7 ence
bushing
+0.190 0.110 –
ø 54 ± 0.030 —
+0.140 0.220
Side clearance of track roller Standard clearance Clearance limit
8
(each side) 0.41 – 0.90 1.5
Tread thickness Standard size Repair limit Rebuilding or
9
(at tread center) 38 33 replace
— Oil capacity 145 – 155 cc (engine oil: SAE30CD) —
PC130-8 5
Carrier roller 1
Unit: mm
Standard size Repair limit Rebuilding or
1 Outside diameter of tread
ø 116 ø 106 replace
2 Tread width 123 — —
Clearance between shaft and size Shaft Hole clearance limit
3
bushing +0.055 +0.261 0.145 –
ø 40 —
+0.035 +0.200 0.226
Tolerance Standard
Standard Interfer-
interfer- Replace
Interference between collar and size Shaft Hole ence limit
4 ence
bushing
+0.061 +0.025 0.011 –
ø 47 —
+0.036 0 0.061
Side clearance of carrier roller Standard clearance Clearance limit
5
(each side) 0.363 – 0.537 1.5
Tread thickness Standard size Repair limit
Rebuilding or
6 (at 10 mm from roller outer
17.7 12.7 replace
edge)
— Oil capacity 68 – 76 cc (engine oil: SAE30CD) —
6 PC130-8
Sprocket 1
Unit: mm
Standard size Tolerance Repair limit
1 Wear on tooth bottom diameter +1.0
ø 547.4 ø 535
-2.0
2 Wear on tooth tip diameter ø 607 — ø 595 Rebuilding or
3 Wear on tooth tip width 27 — 22 replace
4 Wear on tooth bottom width 42 ±1.5 39
+0.465
5 Thickness at tooth bottom 111.7 105.5
-1.160
PC130-8 7
Track shoe 1
Triple grouser shoe, road liner
*1. Triple grouser shoe

*2. Road liner
a P portion shows the link of bushing press fitting end.
8 PC130-8
(1/2) Unit: mm
1 Link pitch
175.3 178.3
Reverse or
Standard size Reverse
2 Bushing external diameter replace
ø 46.3 ø 42.3
3 Bushing thickness 7.9 3.9
Standard size Repair limit Repair or
4 Link height
86 81 replace
Link thickness (bushing press fit
5 24 19
part)
6 102.4 Replace
7 Shoe bolt pitch 86.4
8 57
9 Internal width 52.4
Repair or
10 Link Overall width 35
replace
11 Tread width 30.1
12 Pin projection 3
13 Regular bushing projection 3.75
14 Pin overall length 168 Adjust or
Bushing overall length (master replace
15 86.7
bushing)
16 Spacer thickness —
17 Bushing 39.2 – 137.3 kN {4 – 14 ton}
18 Regular pin 78.5 – 186.3 kN {8 – 19 ton}
Press-fit force —
19
Master pin 39.2 – 98.1 kN {4 – 10 ton}
(*)
*: In case of dry type track.
PC130-8 9
(2/2) Unit: mm
Tightening torque (Nm {kgm}) Retightening angle (degree)
• Triple grouser 196 ± 20
a. Regu- 90 ± 10
shoe {20 ± 2}
lar link
147 ± 10
20 Shoe bolt • Road liner 50 ± 5 Retighten
{15 ± 1}
Tightening torque Retightening angle Torque lower limit
b. Mas- (Nm {kgm}) (degree) (Nm {kgm})
ter link
— — —
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
Interference between bushing Shaft Hole interference
21
and link +0.387 +0.062
ø 46 0.285 – 0.387
+0.347 +0.074
Interference between regular +0.150 -0.198
22 ø 30 0.198 – 0.400
pin and link +0.050 -0.250
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
Clearance between regular pin Shaft Hole clearance
23
and bushing +0.150 +0.830 Adjust or
ø 30 0.180 – 0.830
+0.050 +0.330 replace
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
24 Interference between master Shaft Hole interference
(*) pin and link +0.020 +0.198
ø 30 0.178 – 0.270
-0.020 -0.250
Tolerance Standard
Standard size
25 Clearance between master pin Shaft Hole clearance
(*) and bushing -0.200 +0.830
ø 30 0.530 – 1.130
-0.300 +0.330
26 Grouser height (road liner) 58 21 Replace
*: In case of dry type track.
10 PC130-8
Triple grouser shoe
Unit: mm
1 Grouser height
20 10
2 Shoe height 29.5 19.5
3 Plate thickness 9.5
Rebuilding or
4 20
Grouser bottom length replace
5 20
6 14
7 Grouser tip length 13
8 15
PC130-8 11

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
12 PC130-8
SEN03773-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Hydraulic system, Part 1
Hydraulic equipment layout drawing ............................................................................................................... 2
Valve control ................................................................................................................................................... 4
Hydraulic tank and filter .................................................................................................................................. 6
Hydraulic pump ............................................................................................................................................... 8
PC130-8 1
Hydraulic equipment layout

drawing 1
1. Bucket cylinder
2. Arm cylinder
3. Control valve
4. Solenoid valve
5. Accumulator (for PPC circuit)
6. Boom cylinder
7. Hydraulic tank
8. Swing motor
9. Hydraulic pump
10. R.H. travel motor (R.H. Final drive)
11. Oil cooler
12. L.H. travel motor (L.H. Final drive)
13. L.H. work equipment PPC valve
14. R.H. work equipment PPC valve
15. Center swivel joint
16. Travel PPC valve
17. Attachment PPC valve
(Machine ready for attachment)
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
Valve control 1
1. Connecting valve 9. R.H. work equipment PPC valve

2. Solenoid valve 10. Travel lever
3. Accumulator (for PPC circuit) 11. Travel pedal
4. Control valve 12. Travel PPC valve
5. R.H. work equipment control lever (for boom 13. Attachment PPC valve
and bucket control) (Machine ready for attachment)
6. L.H. work equipment control lever (for arm and 14. Attachment control pedal
swing control) (Machine ready for attachment)
7. L.H. work equipment PPC valve 15. Lock pin
8. Lock lever
4 PC130-8
PC130-8 5
Hydraulic tank and filter 1
1. Hydraulic tank Specifications

2. Suction strainer
3. Filter element Hydraulic tank capacity (l) 130
4. Bypass valve Oil level in hydraulic tank (l) 90
5. Drain plug Bypass valve set pressure 0.15 ± 0.03
6. Sight gauge (MPa{kg/cm²}) {1.53 ± 0.3}
7. Oil filler cap combined with breather
6 PC130-8
Breather
1. Filter element
2. Bottom plate
3. Gasket
4. Seam valve
5. Spring
Prevention of negative pressure in tank

q The hydraulic tank is enclosed and pressur-
ized. When the oil level in the hydraulic tank
drops, negative pressure is generated in the
tank.
To prevent this negative pressure generation,
seam valve (4) is opened to draw the atmo-
sphere to the tank.
(Intake valve set pressure:
0 – 0.49 kPa {0 – 0.005 kg/cm²})
Prevention of pressure rise in tank

q When the hydraulic circuit is operating, the
pressure in the hydraulic tank increases as the
hydraulic cylinder operates and the oil level
and temperature increase in the tank.
If the pressure in the tank rises above the set
value, bottom plate (2) is pushed up to release
the pressure in the tank.
(Exhaust valve set pressure:
16.7 ± 6.86 kPa {0.17 ± 0.07 kg/cm²})
PC130-8 7
Hydraulic pump 1
Type: HPD56+56
8 PC130-8
Outline
q This pump consists of a variable-displacement
swash plate type piston pump, PC valve, LS
valve and EPC valve.
Features of double pump system

q The common single pump system makes much
loss in the pressure compensation valve.
Accordingly, the machine travel speed is
reduced much when the machine is steered.
q The double pump system does not make much
loss in the pressure compensation valve, since
the right and left travel circuits are independent
from each other. Accordingly, the machine
travel speed is less reduced when the machine
is steered.
q The double pump has simpler structure than
the tandem pump.
BMP : Breather mounting port

IM : PC mode selector current
OCP : Oil level pick-up port
OFP : Oil filler port
P1T : Travel deviation control orifice
P2T : Travel deviation control orifice
PA1 : Pump discharge port
PA1C : Pump discharge pressure pick-up port
PA2 : Pump discharge port
PA2C : Pump discharge pressure pick-up port
PB : Pump pressure input port
PD1 : Case drain port
PD2 : Drain plug
PEN : Control pressure pick-up port
PEPB : EPC basic pressure pick-up port
PEPC: EPC basic pressure input port
PLS : Load pressure input port
PLSC : Load pressure pickup port
PM : PC mode selector pressure pick-up port
PS : Pump suction port
1. Main pump
2. LS valve
3. PC valve
4. PC-EPC valve
5. Shuttle valve
6. No. 1 check valve
7. No. 2 check valve
PC130-8 9
1. Shaft 7. Cylinder block

2. Cradle 8. Valve plate
3. Case 9. End cap
4. Rocker cam 10. Servo piston
5. Shoe 11. PC valve
6. Piston
10 PC130-8
Function q Rocker cam (4) conducts high pressure oil to

q The pump converts the engine rotation and the cylinder surface (B) with cradle (2), which
torque transmitted to its shaft to oil pressure is secured to the case, and forms a static pres-
and delivers pressurized oil corresponding to sure bearing when it slides.
the load. q Piston (6) carries out relative movement in the
q It is possible to change the delivery by chang- axial direction inside each cylinder chamber of
ing the swash plate angle. cylinder block (7).
q Cylinder block (7) seals the pressurized oil to
Structure valve plate (8) and carries out relative rotation.
q Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) by q This surface is designed so that the oil pres-
spline (10). sure balance is maintained at a suitable level.
q Shaft (1) is supported by front and rear bear- q The oil inside the respective cylinder chambers
ings (11). of cylinder block (7) is suctioned and dis-
q Tip of piston (6) is shaped as a concave ball charged through valve plate (8).
and shoe (5) is caulked to it to form one unit.
q Piston (6) and shoe (5) constitute the spherical
bearing.
q Rocker cam (4) has flat surface (A), and shoe
(5) is always pressed against this surface while
sliding in a circular movement.
PC130-8 11
Operation of pump
q Cylinder block (7) rotates together with shaft q As center line (X) of rocker cam (4) matches
(1), and shoe (5) slides on flat surface (A). the axial direction of cylinder block (7) (swash
q When this happens, rocker cam (4) moves plate angle (a) = 0), the difference between
along cylindrical surface (B), so angle (a) volumes (E) and (F) inside cylinder block (7)
between center line (X) of rocker cam (4) and becomes 0.
the ax ial di rec tio n of cy li nder b loc k (7) q Suction and discharge of pressurized oil is not
changes. carried out in this state. Namely pumping
q (a) is named the swash plate angle. action is not performed. (Actually, however, the
swash plate angle is not set to 0)
q With center line (X) of rocker cam (4) at a

swash plate angle (a) in relation to the axial
direction of cylinder block (7), flat surface (A)
acts as a cam in relation to shoe (5).
q In this way, piston (6) slides on the inside of
cylinder block (7), so a difference between vol-
umes (E) and (F) is created inside cylinder
block (7).
q A single piston (6) suctions and discharges the
oil by the amount (F) – (E).
q As cylinder block (7) rotates and the volume of
chamber (E) becomes smaller, the pressurized
oil is discharged.
q On the other hand, the volume of chamber (F)
grows larger and, in this process, the oil is suc-
tioned.
12 PC130-8
Control of delivery
q If the swash plate angle (a) becomes larger,
the difference between volumes (E) and (F)
b ec o me s l ar g er a nd pu m p d el i v e r y ( Q )
increases.
q Servo piston (12) is used for changing swash
plate angle (a).
q Servo piston (12) carries out linear reciprocal
movement according to the signal pressure
from the PC and LS valves.
q This linear movement is transmitted to rocker
cam (4) via slider (13).
q Being supported by cradle (2) on the cylindrical
surface, rocker cam (4) slides on the surface
while continuing revolving movement.
q Space of the pressure receiving area of servo
piston (12) are not identical on the left side and
right side. Main pump discharge pressure
(check valve output pressure) (PP) is always
brought to the pressure chamber of the small
diameter piston side.
q Output pressure (PEN) of the LS valve is
brought to the chamber receiving the pressure
at the large diameter piston end.
q The relationship in the size of pressure (PP) at
the small diameter piston end and pressure
(PEN) at the large diameter piston end, and
the ratio between the area receiving the pres-
sure of the small diameter piston and the large
diameter piston controls the movement of
servo piston (12).
PC130-8 13
LS valve
PA : Pump port 1. Sleeve 7. Plug

PDP : Drain port 2. Piston 8. Locknut
PLP : LS control pressure output port 3. Spool
PLS : LS pressure input port 4. Spring
PP : Pump port 5. Sheet
PPL : Control pressure input port 6. Sleeve
Function
q The LS (load sensing) valve detects the load
and controls the delivery.
q This valve controls main pump delivery (Q)
according to differential pressure ( PLS) [=
(PP) — (PLS)], called the LS differential pres-
sure (the difference between main pump pres-
sure (PP) and control valve outlet port pressure
(PLS)).
q Main pump pressure (PP), pressure (PLS)
(called the LS pressure) coming from the con-
trol valve output enters this valve.
14 PC130-8
Operation
1. When the control valve is situated at neutral
q The LS valve is a 3-way selector valve, with q Pump pressure (PP) is conducted to the larger
pressure (PLS) (LS pressure) from the outlet diameter end from the port (K).
port of the control valve brought to spring q The same pump pressure (PP) is conducted to
chamber (B), and main pump discharge pres- the smaller diameter end from the port (J).
sure (PP) brought to port (H) of sleeve (8). q According to the difference in the areas on
q Magnitude of the force resulting from this LS servo piston (12), the pressure moves in such
pressure (PLS), force of spring (4) and the that the swash plate angle may be minimized.
pump delivery pressure (check valve output
pressure) (PP) determine the position of spool
(6).
q Before the engine is started, servo piston (12)
is pushed to the left. (See the diagram on the
right)
q If the control lever is at the neutral position
when the engine is started, LS pressure (PLS)
will be set to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}. (It is intercon-
nected to the drain circuit via the control valve
spool)
q Spool (6) is pushed to the left, and port (C) and
port (D) will be connected.
PC130-8 15
2. Action for the direction of maximizing the pump delivery
q When the difference between the main pump

pressure (PP) and LS pressure (PLS), in other
words, LS differ ential press ure ( P LS)
becomes smaller [for example, when the area
of opening of the control valve becomes larger
and pump pressure (PP) drops], spool (6) is
pushed to the right by the combined force of
LS pressure (PLS) and the force of spring (4).
q When spool (6) moves, port (D) and port (E)
are interconnected and connected to the PC
valve.
q The PC valve is connected to the drain port, so
the pressure across circuits (D) and (K)
becomes drain pressure (PT). (The operation
of the PC valve is explained later.)
q The pressure at the large diameter end of
servo piston (12) becomes drain pressure
(PT), and pump pressure (PP) enters port (J)
at the small diameter end, so servo piston (12)
is pushed to the right side. Therefore, the
swash plate is moved in the direction to make
the delivery larger.
16 PC130-8
3. Action for the direction of minimizing the pump delivery
q When LS differential pressure ( PLS)

becomes larger [for example, when the area of
opening of the control valve becomes smaller
and pump pressure (PP) rises] because of the
leftward move (it reduces delivery) of servo
piston (12), pump pressure (PP) pushes spool
(6) to the left.
q When spool (6) moves, main pump pressure
(PP) flows from port (C) to port (D) and from
port (K), it enters the large diameter end of the
piston.
q Main pump pressure (PP) also enters port (J)
of the small diameter end of the piston, but
because of the difference in area between the
large diameter end and the small diameter end
on servo piston (12), it is pushed to the left. As
the result, the servo piston (12) moves into the
direction of reducing the swash plate angle.
PC130-8 17
4. When servo piston is balanced
q Let us take the area receiving the pressure at q Force of spring (4) is adjusted in such that the
the large diameter end of the piston as (A1), position of the balanced stop of this spool (6)
the area receiving the pressure at the small may be determined when (PP) — (PLS) = 2.2
diameter end as (A0), and the pressure flowing MPa {22.5 kg/cm2} at the median of the speci-
into the large diameter end of the piston as fied value.
(PEN).
q If the main pump pressure (PP) of the LS valve
and the combined force of spring (4) and LS
pressure (PLS) are balanced, and the relation-
ship is (A0) × (PP) = (A1) × (PEN), servo pis-
ton (12) will stop in that position.
q The swash plate of the pump will be held at the
intermediate position. [Spool (6) will be
stopped at a position where the distance of the
opening from port (D) to port (E) and the dis-
tance from port (C) to port (D) is almost the
same.]
q At this point, the relationship between the pres-
sure receiving areas across servo piston (12)
is (A0) : (A1) = 1 : 2, so the pressure applied
across the piston when it is balanced becomes
(PP) : (PEN) C 2 : 1.
18 PC130-8
PC valve
PA : Pump port 1. Plug

PA2 : Pump pressure pilot port 2. Servo piston assembly
PDP : Drain port 3. Pin
PM : Mode selector pressure pilot port 4. Spool
PPL : PC control pressure output port 5. Retainer
PPL2: LC control pressure output port 6. Sheet
7. Cover
8. Wiring
Function
q When the pump discharge pressure (PP1) q If the engine speed goes below the specified
(check valve output pressure) and (PP2) (shut- value because of increased load, the controller
tle valve output pressure) are high, the PC sends a command current to PC-EPC valve
valve controls the pump so that the volume of solenoid in order to reduce the slope angle in
oil beyond the discharge pressure-based spe- proportion to reduction in the engine speed.
cific flowrate may not be conducted however
you may increase the control valve stroke.
Namely it is intended at controlling the horse
power for the pumps so that it may not exceed
the engine hose power.
q If the pump discharge pressure (PP1) increases
due to increased load during operation, this
valve decreases the pump delivery.
q And if the pump delivery pressure goes low, it
increases the pump delivery.
q In this case, relation between the mean average
discharge pressure of the pump [(PP1) +
(PP2)]/2 and the pump delivery (Q) will
becomes as shown in the diagram if the relation
is represented as the parameter of the current
value to be given to PC-EPC valve solenoid.
q The controller continues counting the actual
engine speed.
q If the engine speed is slowed down due to
increased load, the controller reduces the
pump delivery to recover the speed.
PC130-8 19
Operation
1. When pump controller is normal
1) When the load on the actuator is small and pump discharge pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are low
Action of PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)

q Command current (X) is being sent to PC-EPC q The pressure [port (C) pressure] output from
valve solenoid (1) from the pump controller. PC valve is changed depending on the above
q This command current acts on PC-EPC valve position.
to output the signal pressure in order to modify q The size of command current (X) is determined
the force pushing piston (2). by the nature of the operation (lever opera-
q Spool (3) stops at a position where the com- tion), the selected working mode, and the set
bined spool-pushing force is balanced by the value and actual value of the engine speed.
setting force of springs (4) and (6) as well as
the pump pressures (PP1) (check valve output
pressure) and (PP2) (shuttle valve output pres-
sure).
20 PC130-8
PC130-8 21
Action of spring
q Load of springs (4) and (6) on the PC valve is q Spring load of springs (4) and (6) is also
determined by the swash plate position. affected by the command current (X) to PC-
q As servo piston (9) moves to left, spring (6) is EPC valve solenoid.
retracted. q Port (C) of the PC valve is connected to port
q If the servo piston moves further, it will be con- (E) of the LS valve.
tacted again seat (5) and spring (6) will be q Check valve output pressure (PP1) enters port
fixed. (B) and the small diameter end of servo piston
q After that, spring (4) alone will operate. (9), and shuttle valve output pressure (PP2)
q The spring load is changed by servo piston (9) enters port (A).
as it extends or compresses springs (4) and q When pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are
(6). small, spool (3) will be positioned in the right
q If the command current (X) to PC-EPC valve side.
solenoid (1) changes, so does the force push- q Port (C) and (D) are connected, and the pres-
ing piston (2). sure entering the LS valve becomes drain
pressure (PT).
22 PC130-8
q If port (E) and port (G) of the LS valve are con-

nected, the pressure entering the large diame-
ter end of the piston from port (J) becomes
drain pressure (PT), and servo piston (9)
moves to the right side.
q The pump delivery will be set to the increasing
trend.
q Accompanied with move of servo piston (9),
springs (4) and (6) will be expanded and the
spring force becomes weaker.
q As the spring force is weakened, spool (3)
moves to the left, the connecting between port
(C) and port (D) is shut off and the pump dis-
charge pressure ports (B) and (C) are con-
nected.
q As a result, the pressure on port (C) rises and
the pressure on the large diameter end of the
piston also rises. Thus, the rightward move of
servo piston (9) is stopped.
q Servo piston (9) stop position (= Pump deliv-
ery) is decided by the position where the push-
ing force generated from the pressures (PP1)
and (PP2) applied to spool (3), the pushing
force of the solenoid in PC-EPC valve gener-
ates and the pushing force of springs (4) and
(6) are balanced.
PC130-8 23
2) When load on actuator is large and pump discharge pressure is high
Outline Operation
q When the load is large and pump discharge q When port (E) and port (G) of the LS valve are
pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are high, the force connected, this pressure from port (J) enters
pushing spool (3) to the left becomes larger the large diameter end of servo piston (9),
and spool (3) will be moved to the position stopping servo piston (9).
shown in above figure. q If main pump pressure (PP) increases further
q Part of the pressure to be conducted from port and spool (3) moves further to the left, main
(C) to LS valve flows from port (A) to port (C) pump pressure (PP1) flows to port (C) and acts
and (D) through LS valve. At the end this flow, to make the pump delivery the minimum.
level of this pressure becomes approximately q When servo piston (9) moves to the left,
half of the main pump pressure (PP). springs (4) and (6) are compressed and push
back spool (3).
q When spool (3) moves to the right, the opening
of port (C) and port (D) becomes larger.
24 PC130-8
q As a result, the pressure on port (C) (= J) is

decreased and the rightward move of servo
piston (9) is stopped.
q The position in which servo piston (9) stops at
this time is further to the left than the position
when pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2) are
low.
q The relationship between the average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and servo piston (9) in
terms of their positions can be represented by
the broken line in the figure because springs
(4) and (6) form the double springs.
q The relationship between the average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and average pump
delivery (Q) becomes as shown below.
q If command current (X) sent to PC-EPC valve

solenoid (1) increases further, the relationship
between average pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/
2, and pump delivery (Q) is proportional to the
force of the PC-EPC valve solenoid and moves
in parallel.
q Namely, the force of PC-EPC valve solenoid
(1) is added to the pushing force to the left
because of the pump pressure applied to the
spool (3), so the relationship between the aver-
age pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and the
pump delivery (Q) moves from (A) to (B) as the
command current (X) is increased.
PC130-8 25
2. As the emergency pump drive switch is turned on due to failure on the pump
controller
1) When the main pump is under light load
26 PC130-8
q If there is a failure in the pump controller, the

emergency pump drive switch is turned on to
hand the control to the resistor side.
q In this case, the power is directly supplied from
the battery. The current, however, is too large
as is, so the resistor is set in between to con-
trol the current flowing to PC-EPC valve sole-
noid (1).
q The current becomes constant, so the force
pushing piston (2) is also constant.
q If the main pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2)
are low, the combined force of the pump pres-
sure and the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) is
weaker than the spring set force, so spool (3)
is balanced at a position to the right.
q The port (C) is connected to the drain pressure
of the port (D), and the large diameter end of
the servo piston (9) also becomes the drain
pressure (PT) through the LS valve.
q Since the pressure on the small diameter end
of the piston is large, servo piston (9) moves in
the direction to make the delivery larger.
PC130-8 27
2) When the main pump is under heavy load
28 PC130-8
q If the emergency pump drive switch is turned

on in the same way as in above, the command
current (X) sent to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)
becomes constant.
q For this reason, the force of piston (2) pushing
spool (3) is constant.
q If main pump pressures (PP1) and (PP2)
increase, spool (3) moves further to the left
than when the main pump load is light, and is
balanced at the position in the figure above.
q In this case, the pressure from port (A) flows to
port (C), so servo piston (9) moves to the left
(smaller pump delivery) and stops at a position
to the further to the left then when the load on
the pump is light.
q When the emergency pump drive switch is
turned on, too, the pump pressure (PP) and
pump delivery (Q) have a relationship as
shown with the curve in the figure correspond-
ing to the current sent to the PC-EPC valve
solenoid through the resistor.
q The curve resulting when the emergency pump
drive switch is ON is situated further to the left
(B) than when the pump controller is normal
(A).
PC130-8 29
PC-EPC valve
C : To PC valve
P : From self pressure reducing valve
T : To tank
1. Connector
2. Coil
3. Body
4. Spring
5. Spool
6. Rod
7. Plunger
30 PC130-8
Function Operation
q The EPC valve consists of the proportional
solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve por- 1. When signal current is 0 (coil is de-
tion. energized)
q When it receives signal current (i) from the q When there is no signal current flowing from
controller, it generates the EPC output pres- the controller to coil (2), coil (2) is de-ener-
sure in proportion to the size of the signal, and gized.
outputs it to the PC valve. q Spool (5) is pushed to the left by spring (4).
q Port (P) closes and the pressurized oil from the
self pressure reducing valve does not flow to
the PC valve.
q The pressurized oil from the PC valve is
drained to the tank through port (C) and port
(T).
PC130-8 31
2. When signal current is very small 3. When signal current is maximum

(coil is energized) (coil is energized)
q When a very small signal current flows to coil q As the signal current flows to coil (2), coil (2) is
(2), coil (2) is energized, and a propulsion force energized.
is generated on the right side of plunger (7). q When this happens, the signal current is at its
q Rod (6) pushes spool (5) to the right, and pres- maximum, so the propulsion force of plunger
surized oil flows from port (P) to port (C). (7) is also at its maximum.
q Pressure on port (C) increases and the force to q Spool (5) is pushed toward right side by rod
act on spool (5) surface and the spring load on (6).
spring (4) become larger than the propulsion q The maximum volume of pressurized oil is
force of plunger (7). conducted from port (P) to port (C), increasing
q Spool (5) is pushed to the left, and port (P) is the circuit pressure across EPC valve and PC
shut off from port (C). valve to the maximum level.
q Port (C) and port (T) are connected. q Since port (T) is closed, pressurized oil does
q Spool (5) moves up and down so that the pro- not flow to the tank.
pulsion force of plunger (7) may be balanced
with pressure of port (C) + spring load of spring
(4).
q The circuit pressure between the EPC valve
and the PC valve is controlled in proportion to
the size of the signal current.
32 PC130-8
Check valve
PA1: Discharge pressure of main pump 1. Poppet valve

PA2: Discharge pressure of main pump 2. Poppet valve
PP1: Output pressure of check valve
Function Operation
q A set of 2 check valves is used to select and 1. When (PA1) > (PA2)
output the higher discharge pressure of the 2 q Discharge pressures (PA1) and (PA2) of the
main pumps. main pumps are applied to poppet valves (1)
and (2). Since (PA1) > (PA2), however, poppet
valve (2) is kept closed and (PA1) is output to
(PP1).
2. When (PA1) < (PA2)

q Reversely to 1., poppet valve (1) is kept closed
and (PA2) is output to (PP1).
PC130-8 33
Shuttle valve
PA1: Discharge pressure of main pump

PA2: Discharge pressure of main pump
PP2: Output pressure of shuttle valve
1. Poppet valve
2. Poppet valve
3. Pin
Function Operation
q The shuttle valve selects and outputs the lower q The discharge pressures (PA1) and (PA2) of
discharge pressure of the 2 main pumps. the 2 main pumps are applied to poppet valves
(1) and (2) respectively.
q Since poppet valves (1) and (2) push each
other through pin (3), either one of them
receiving higher pressure is closed and the
other one receiving lower pressure is opened.
q Accordingly, lower discharge pressure of the 2
main pumps is output.
34 PC130-8
PC130-8 35

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
36 PC130-8
SEN03774-01
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Control valve ................................................................................................................................................... 2
CLSS............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Functions and operation by valve ................................................................................................................. 16
PC130-8 1
Control valve 1
Outline
The control valves of the following types are set.
q 6-spool valve (Without service valve)
q 7-spool valve (6-spool valve + service valve)
q 8-spool valve (6-spool valve + 2 service valves)
The appearance and section of only the 8-spool valve (6-spool valve + 2 service valves) are shown here.
A1 : To swing motor PA6 : From bucket dump PPC valve

A2 : To left travel motor PA7 : From attachment 1 PPC valve
A3 : To right travel motor PA8 : From attachment 2 PPC valve
A4 : To boom cylinder bottom PB1 : From swing left PPC valve
A5 : To arm cylinder head PB2 : From left travel reverse PPC valve
A6 : To bucket cylinder head PB3 : From right travel forward PPC valve
A7 : To attachment 1 PB4 : From boom lower PPC valve
A8 : To attachment 2 PB5 : From arm in PPC valve
B1 : To swing motor PB6 : From bucket curl PPC valve
B2 : To left travel motor PB7 : From attachment 1 PPC valve
B3 : To right travel motor PB8 : From attachment 2 PPC valve
B4 : To boom cylinder head PMAX: Pressure sensor port
B5 : To arm cylinder bottom PP : To main pump
B6 : To bucket cylinder bottom PP1 : PP1 pressure pick-up port
B7 : To attachment 1 PP2 : PP2 pressure pick-up port
B8 : To attachment 2 PPI1 : Pump 1 pressure pick-up port
BP1: From boom raise PPC valve PPI2 : Pump 2 pressure pick-up port
LS : To pump LS valve PR : To solenoid valve and EPC valve
LS1 : LS1 pressure pick-up port PRI : PR pressure pick-up port
LS2 : LS2 pressure pick-up port PS : From solenoid valve of merge-divider valve
LS3 : LS3 pressure pick-up port PS2 : To tank
P1 : From main pump PST : From solenoid valve of travel junction sole-
P2 : From main pump noid valve
PA1: From swing right PPC valve PX : 2-stage relief solenoid valve
PA2: From left travel forward PPC valve TB : To tank
PA3: From right travel reverse PPC valve TC : To oil cooler
PA4: From boom raise PPC valve TS1 : To tank
PA5: From arm dump PPC valve TSW : To swing motor
1. Cover 9. Swing valve

2. Service valve 2 10. Block
3. Service valve 1 11. Swing bleeding valve
4. Bucket valve 12. LS check valve
5. Arm valve 13. Travel junction valve + LS check valve
6. Boom valve 14. Arm regeneration valve
7. Right travel valve 15. Boom hydraulic drift prevention valve
8. Left travel valve 16. Merge-divider valve block
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
4 PC130-8
1. Suction safety valve (Service 2) 15. Suction safety valve (Service 1)

2. Suction safety valve (Service 1) 16. Suction safety valve (Service 2)
3. Suction valve (Bucket) 17. Suction safety valve
4. Suction valve (Arm) 18. Spool (Service 2)
5. Suction valve (Boom) 19. Spool (Service 1)
6. Lift check valve 20. Spool (Bucket)
7. Suction valve (Right travel) 21. Spool (Arm)
8. Suction valve (Left travel) 22. Spool (Boom)
9. Suction valve (Left travel) 23. Spool (Right travel)
10. Suction valve (Right travel) 24. Spool (Left travel)
11. Main relief valve 25. Spool (Swing)
12. Suction valve (Boom) 26. Unload valve
13. Suction valve (Arm) 27. Unload valve
14. Suction valve (Bucket)
Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Free length × Installed Installed Installed
Free length
28 Suction valve spring Outside diameter length load load
5.49 N 4.41 N
46.8 × 7.5 40.6 —
{0.56 kg} {0.45 kg}
135 N 108 N
29 Piston return spring 72.7 × 20.6 42.5 —
{13.8 kg} {11.0 kg}
5.1 N 4.12 N
30 Suction valve spring 39.2 × 4.45 33.5 —
{0.52 kg} {0.42 kg}
141 N 113 N
31 Spool return spring 41.8 × 19 38.5 —
{14.4 kg} {11.5 kg}
55.9 N 44.7 N If damaged or
32 Spool return spring 27.14 × 25.8 25.5 —
{5.7 kg} {4.56 kg} deformed,
60.2 N 48.2 N replace spring
33 Spool return spring 32.4 × 11 31.4 —
{6.137 kg} {4.91 kg}
423 N 338 N
34 Spool return spring 76.78 × 20.9 70 —
{43.1 kg} {34.5 kg}
221 N 177 N
35 Spool return spring 45.7 × 28 43 —
{22.55 kg} {18.0 kg}
222 N 178 N
{22.6 kg} {18.1 kg}
230 N 184 N
{23.5 kg} {18.8 kg}
203 N 163 N
{20.7 kg} {16.6 kg}
PC130-8 5
6 PC130-8
1. LS selector valve
2. Cooler bypass valve
3. Pressure compensation valve R (Service 2)
5. Pressure compensation valve R (Bucket)
6. Pressure compensation valve R (Arm)
7. Pressure compensation valve R (Boom)
8. Pressure compensation valve R (Right travel)
9. Pressure compensation valve R (Left travel)
10. Pressure compensation valve R (Swing)
11. Pressure compensation valve F (Swing)
12. Pressure compensation valve F (Left travel)
13. Pressure compensation valve F (Right travel)
14. Merge-divider valve spool
15. Pressure compensation valve F (Boom)
16. Pressure compensation valve F (Arm)
17. Pressure compensation valve F (Bucket)
18. Pressure compensation valve F (Service 1)
F: Flow control valve

R: Pressure reducing valve
Unit: mm
Free length
20 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
5.88 N 4.71 N deformed,
41.5 x 8.5 31.5 — replace spring
{0.6 kg} {0.48 kg}
2.94 N 2.35 N
21 Check valve spring 20.3 x 13.7 16 —
{0.3 kg} {0.24 kg}
PC130-8 7
8 PC130-8
Swing valve
2. Pressure compensation valve F
3. Spool
4. Pressure compensation valve R
5. Swing bleeding valve
Left travel valve

7. Suction valve
8. Suction valve
9. Spool
11. LS check valve
Right travel valve

13. Suction valve
14. Suction valve
15. Spool
17. Travel junction valve + LS check valve
18. Unload valve

19. LS bypass valve

Unit: mm
Free length
21 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load
3.92 N 3.14 N
23.3 × 12.5 23 —
{0.4 kg} {0.32 kg}
1.96 N 1.57 N
22 Check valve spring 21.9 × 5 15.8 —
{0.2 kg} {0.16 kg}
0.98 N 0.78 N
23 Retainer spring 9.1 × 4.2 7.4 —
{0.10 kg} {0.08 kg} If damaged or
24 Spool return spring 19.26 × 7.5 14 — replace spring
{1.6 kg} {1.28 kg}
1.96 N 1.57 N
25 Check valve spring 21.9 × 5 15.8 —
{0.2 kg} {0.16 kg}
83.4 N 66.7 N
26 Valve return spring 58.9 × 13 53 —
{8.5 kg} {6.8 kg}
98.1 N 78.5 N
27 Spool return spring 49.8 × 18.8 33 —
{10 kg} {8 kg}
13.7 N 11.0 N
28 Check valve spring 16.4 × 8.9 11.5 —
{1.4 kg} {1.12 kg}
PC130-8 9
10 PC130-8
1. Unload valve
2. Main relief valve
4. Lift check valve
Boom valve
6. Suction valve
7. Hydraulic drift prevention valve
8. Suction valve
9. Spool
Arm valve
12. Suction valve
13. Suction valve
14. Spool
16. Regeneration valve
Bucket valve
18. Suction valve
19. Suction valve
20. Spool
Service valve 1
23. Suction safety valve
25. Spool
Service valve 2
30. Spool

Unit: mm
Free length
32 Valve return spring Outside diameter length load load
58.9 × 13 53 —
168 N 134 N replace spring
33 Spool return valve spring 67.47 × 20.6 42.5 —
{17.1 kg} {13.7 kg}
5.88 N 4.71 N
34 Valve spring 41.5 × 8.5 31.5 —
{0.6 kg} {0.48 kg}
PC130-8 11
CLSS 1
Outline of CLSS 1
Features Configuration
CLSS stands for Closed center Load Sensing Sys- q CLSS is configured with variable capacity
tem, which has the following characteristics: piston pumps, control valves, and respective
actuators.
q Fine control not influenced by load q The hydraulic pump is configured with pump
q Controllability enabling digging even with fine body, PC valve and LS valve.
control
q Ease of compound operation ensured by flow
divider function using area of opening of spool
during compound operations
q Energy saving using variable pump control
12 PC130-8
Basic principle 1
1. Pump swash plate angle control
q The pump swash plate angle (pump delivery) q The pump swash plate angle shifts toward the
is controlled so that LS differential pressure maximum position if LS differential pressure
( P L S ) ( t h e d i ff e r e n c e b e t w e e n p u m p ( PLS) is lower than the set pressure of the
pressure PP and control valve outlet port LS LS valve (when the actuator load pressure is
pressure PLS) (load pressure of actuator) is high).
constant. q If it becomes higher than the set pressure
q [LS differential pressure ( PLS) = Pump (when the actuator load pressure is low), the
discharge pressure (PP) — LS pressure (PLS)] pump swash plate angle shifts toward the
minimum position.
LS differential pressure ( PLS) and pump

swash plate angle
a For details of functions, see the "Hydraulic

pump" paragraph.
PC130-8 13
2. Pressure compensation control
q A pressure compensation valve is installed to

the outlet port side of the control valve to bal-
ance the load.
q When actuators are operated together, the
p r e s s u r e d i ff e r e n c e ( P ) b e t w e e n t h e
upstream (inlet port) and downstream (outlet
port) of the spool of each valve becomes the
same regardless the size of the load (pres-
sure).
q The flow of oil from the pump is divided (com-
pensated) in proportion to the area of opening
(S1) and (S2) of each valve.
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15
Functions and operation by valve 1

Hydraulic circuit diagram and the name of valves 1
16 PC130-8
1. Swing valve
2. Left travel valve
3. Right travel valve
4. Boom valve
5. Arm valve
6. Bucket valve
7. Service 1 valve
8. Service 2 valve
9. Swing spool
10. Left travel spool
11. Right travel spool
12. Boom spool
13. Arm spool
14. Bucket spool
15. Service 1 spool
16. Service 2 spool
17. Pressure compensation valve
18. Suction valve
20. Merge-divider valve
21. Arm regeneration valve
22. Self-pressure reducing valve
23. Travel junction valve
24. Lift check valve
26. Boom hydraulic drift prevention valve
27. Swing bleeding valve
Set pressure: 36.8 MPa {375 kg/cm²}
30. Main relief valve
In one-touch power maximizing mode:
34.5 MPa {352 kg/cm²}
31. Unload valve
PC130-8 17
Unload valve
1. When control valve is at HOLD
Function q When the control valve is at HOLD, LS pres-

q When the control valve is at HOLD, pump sures (LS1) and (LS2) are not generated, so
delivery (Q) discharged by the minimum swash only pump discharge pressures (P1) and (P2)
plate angle is released to the tank circuit. At act, and (P1) and (P2) are set by only the load
this time, pump discharge pressure (P1) and of spring (2).
(P2) is set by spring (2) in the valve. [LS pres- q As pump discharge pressure (P1) and (P2)
sure (LS1) and (LS2) = 0 MPa {0 kg/cm²}] rises and reaches the load of spring (2), spool
q Since the pump merge-divider valve is at the (1) is moved to the left. Pump discharge pres-
merge position, pump discharge pressures sures (P1) and (P2) are connected to tank cir-
(P1) and (P2) are merged. LS pressures (LS1), cuit (T) through the notch of spool (1).
(LS2), and (LS3) are also merged.
Operation
q Pump discharge pressures (P1) and (P2) are
applied to pump pressure receiving (SA) face
of unload spool (1).
q LS pressures (LS1) and (LS2) are applied to
LS pressure receiving (SB) face. [(P1) = (P2),
(LS1) = (LS2)]
18 PC130-8
2. When work equipment valve is operated
Function Operation
q When any work equipment valve is operated if q When any work equipment valve is operated
the demand flow for the actuator becomes for a long stroke, LS pressures (LS1) and
greater than the pump discharge from the min- (LS2) are generated and act on the face (SB)
imum swash plate angle, the oil flow to tank cir- of unload spool (1) [(P1) = (P2), (LS1) = (LS2)].
cuit (T) is cut off, and all pump discharge q For this reason, the difference between pump
amount (Q) flows to the actuator circuit. discharge pressure (P1) and (P2) and LS pres-
q Since the pump merge-divider valve is at the sure (LS1) and (LS2) does not reach the load
merge position, pump discharge pressures of spring (2), so spool (1) is pushed to the right
(P1) and (P2) are merged. LS pressures (LS1), by spring (2).
(LS2), and (LS3) are also merged. q As a result, pump discharge pressures (P1)
and (P2) and tank circuit (T) are shut off, and
all pump discharge amount (Q) flows to the
actuator circuit.
PC130-8 19
3. During fine control of both travel valves
Function Operation
q When the difference between pump discharge q When fine control is carried out on both travel
pressure (P1) and (P2) and LS pressure (LS1) valves, LS pressures (LS1) and (LS2) are gen-
and (LS2) reaches the load of spring (2), erated and act on the face (SB) of spool (1)
unload spool (1) opens, so excessive oil (maxi- [(P1), (P2), (LS1), and (LS2) are separated].
mum pump discharge mount - demand flow) q When the difference between pump discharge
flows into the tank circuit. pressure (P1) and (P2) and LS pressure (LS1)
q Since the pump merge-divider valve is at the and (LS2) reaches the load of spring (2), spool
separate position, pump discharge pressures (1) moves to the left, and pump discharge
(P1) and (P2) are separated. LS pressures pressures (P1) and (P2) are connected to tank
(LS1) and (LS2) are also separated. circuit (T) and the excessive oil (maximum
q The swash plate angle of the pump becomes pump discharge mount - demand flow) flows.
maximum, so the pump discharge amount q In other words, the excessive oil (maximum
becomes maximum. (For details, see the sec- pump discharge mount - demand flow) above
tions on the pump merge-divider valve.) the strokes of both travel valves flows into tank
circuit (T).
20 PC130-8
4. When both travel valves are operated
Function Operation
q During operation of both travel valves, when q When both travel valves are operated to the
the demand flow becomes maximum, the oil stroke ends, LS pressures (LS1) and (LS2) are
flow to tank circuit (T) is cut off, and all pump generated and act on the face (SB) of unload
discharge amount (Q) flows to both travel cir- spool (1) [(P1), (P2), (LS1), and (LS2) are sep-
cuits. arated].
q Since the pump merge-divider spool is at the q The area of the openings of both travel valve
separate position, pump discharge pressures spools is large, so LS pressures (LS1) and
(P1) and (P2) are separated. LS pressures (LS2) are not so different from pump discharge
(LS1) and (LS2) are also separated. pressures (P1) and (P2).
q The swash plate angle of the pump becomes q For this reason, the difference between pump
maximum, so the pump discharge amount discharge pressure (P1) and (P2) and LS pres-
becomes maximum. (For details, see the sec- sure (LS1) and (LS2) does not reach the load
tions on the pump merge-divider valve .) of spring (2), so spool (1) is pushed to the right
by spring (2).
q As a result, pump discharge pressures (P1)
and (P2) and tank circuit (T) are shut off, and
all pump discharge amount (Q) flows to the
actuator circuit.
PC130-8 21
5. When either travel valve is operated
Function q The area of the openings of left travel valve

q The demand flow decided by the valve stroke spool is large, so LS pressures (LS1) is not so
is sent to the travel circuit on the operated different from pump discharge pressures (P1).
travel valve side and the all pump discharge q For this reason, the difference between pump
amount is sent to the tank circuit on the non- discharge pressure (P1) and LS pressure
operated travel valve side. (LS1) does not reach the load of spring (2), so
q Since the pump merge-divider valve is at the spool (1) is pushed to the right by spring (2).
separate position, pump discharge pressures q As a result, pump discharge pressures (P1)
(P1) and (P2) are separated. LS pressures and tank circuit (T) are shut off, and all pump
(LS1) and (LS2) are also separated. discharge amount (QP1) on the (P1) side flows
q The swash plate angle of the pump becomes to the left travel circuit.
maximum, so the pump discharge amount q Since the right travel valve is at HOLD, LS
becomes maximum. (For details, see the sec- pressure (LS2) is not generated, so only pump
tions on the pump merge-divider valve.) discharge pressure (P2) acts.
q When pump discharge pressure (P2) reaches
Operation the load of spring (2), spool (1) moves to the
left, and all pump discharge amount (QP2) on
When left travel valve is operated to stroke end the (P2) side flows into tank circuit (T).
and right one is at HOLD.
q When the left travel valve is operated to the
stroke end, LS pressure (LS1) is generated
and acts on the face (SB) of unload spool (1).
22 PC130-8
PC130-8 23
Merge-divider valve
1. When oil is merged: (PS) = 0 kg/cm2
Function
merged in pump merge-divider spool (3).
(LS1), (LS2), and (LS3) are also merged.
q At this time, (P1) = (P2) and (LS1) = (LS2) =
(LS3) and the pump swash plate is controlled
by the difference between (P) and (LS).
24 PC130-8
2. When oil is divided: (PS) = 30 kg/cm2
Function
divided in pump merge-divider spool (3).
(LS1), (LS2), and (LS3) are also divided.
q At this time, higher one of (P1) and (P2) is
applied through pump merge-divider spool (3)
to the output port of the LS pressure.
q As a result, there is not difference between (P)
and (LS) and the pump swash plate is set to
the maximum position.
PC130-8 25
Introduction of LS pressure
1. Work equipment valve
Function q When this happens, LS circuit (PLS) is con-

q The LS pressure is the actuator load pressure nected to tank circuit (T) from LS bypass valve
at the outlet port end of the control valve. (4) (See the section on the LS bypass valve).
q Actually, pump discharge pressure (PP) is q The areas at both ends of reducing valve (3)
reduced by reducing valve (3) of the pressure are the same [(SA) = (SLS)], and actuator cir-
compensation valve to the same pressure as cuit pressure (PA) acts on the (SA) end. The
actuator circuit pressure (A) and sent to LS cir- reduced pump discharge pressure (PP) acts
cuit (PLS). on (SLS) at the other end.
q In the travel valve, actuator circuit pressure (A) q As a result, reducing valve (3) is balanced at a
is directly introduced to LS circuit (PLS). position where actuator circuit pressure (PA)
and the pressure of spring chamber (PLSS)
Operation are the same. Pump discharge pressure (PP)
q When spool (1) is operated, pump discharge reduced at notch (c) becomes actuator pres-
pressure (PP) flows from flow control valve (2) sure (A) and is introduced into LS circuit (PLS).
through notch (a) in the spool and bridge pas-
sage (b) to actuator circuit (A).
q At the same time, reducing valve (3) also
moves to the right, so pump discharge pres-
sure (PP) is reduced by the pressure loss at
notch (c). It goes to LS circuit (PLS), and then
goes to spring chamber (PLSS).
26 PC130-8
2. Travel valve
Operation
q When spool (1) is operated, pump discharge
pressure (PP) flows from flow control valve (2)
through notch (a) in the spool and bridge pas-
sage (b) to actuator circuit (A).
q Actuator circuit pressure (PA) (= A) is intro-
duced through the check valve (5) into LS cir-
cuit (PLS).
a The travel circuit is different from the work

equipment circuit: actuator circuit pressure
(PA) is directly introduced into LS circuit (PLS).
PC130-8 27
LS bypass valve
1. When work equipment valve is operated
(including compound operation of work equipment + travel)
Function Operation
q The LS bypass valve releases the residual q Since pump merge-divider spool (1) is at the
pressure of LS pressure (PLS). merge position, the hydraulic oil in LS circuits
q This lowers the rising speed of LS pressure (PLS1), (PLS2), and (PLS3) flows from tip filter
(PLS). In addition, the discarded throttled flow (a) of LS bypass valve (2) through orifice (b) to
causes a pressure loss in the throttled flow in tank circuit (T).
the reducing valve, and that lowers the effec-
tive LS differential pressure to improve the sta-
bility.
28 PC130-8
2. When either or both travel valves are operated

(Including operation of only one travel valve)
Operation q The hydraulic oil (PLS2) flows from tip filter (c)
q Since pump merge-divider spool (1) is at the of LS bypass valve (3) through orifice (d) to
separate position, LS circuits (PLS1) and tank circuit (T).
(PLS2) are separated.
q The hydraulic oil (PLS1) flows from tip filter (a)
of LS bypass valve (2) through orifice (b) to
tank circuit (T).
PC130-8 29
Pressure compensation valve
30 PC130-8
Function
q When the load pressure becomes lower than
another actuator and the flow is going to
increase during a compound operation, this
valve compensates the load pressure. [At the
time, the load pressure of another actuator
under compound operation (the upper side) is
higher than that of the actuator on this side
(the lower side)].
Operation
q When the load pressure (Ab) of another actua-
tor side (the upper side) rises during a com-
pound operation, the flow in the actuator circuit
(Aa) on this side (the lower side) is apt to
increase.
q In this case, the LS pressure (PLS) of another
actuator is applied to the spring chamber
(PLS1) and pushes the pressure reducing
valve (1) and the flow control valve (2) to the
left side.
q The flow control valve (2) throttles the opening
area between the pump circuit (PP) and the
spool upstream (PPA) and causes a pressure
loss between (PP) and (PPA).
q The flow control valve (2) and the pressure
reducing valve (1) balance each other where
the pressure difference between (PA) applied
to the both end faces of the pressure reducing
valve (1) and (PLS) becomes the same as the
pressure loss between (PP) before and after
the flow control valve (2) and (PPA).
q So, the pressure differences between the
upstream pressures (PPA) and the down-
stream pressures (PA) of the both spools
under compound operation become the same,
and the pump flow is distributed in proportion
to the opening area of each spool notch (a).
PC130-8 31
Area ratio of pressure compensation valve
Function Area ratio (S1) : (S2) and compensation charac-

q The pressure compensation valve slightly teristics
adjusts the ratio (S2) and (S1) of the area (S1) q When the ratio is 1.00 :
on the left side of the flow control valve (2) and The expression [Pump (discharge) pres-
the area (S2) on the right side of the pressure sure (PP) – Spool notch upstream pres-
reducing valve (1) to suite the characteristics sure (PPB)] C [LS circuit pressure (PLS) –
of each actuator and determines the compen- Actuator circuit pressure (PA) (= A)] can
sation characteristics. be held, and the flow is distributed as per
the spool opening area ratio.
S1 : Area of the flow control valve (2) – area of the q When the ratio is more than 1.00:
piston (3) The expression (PP) – (PPB) > (PLS) –
S2 : Area of the pressure reducing valve (1) – (PA) (= A) can be held, and the flow is dis-
area of the piston (3) tributed less than the spool opening area
ratio.
q When the ratio is less than 1.00:
The expression (PP) – (PPB) < (PLS) –
(PA) (= A) can be held, and the flow is dis-
tributed more than the spool opening area
ratio.
32 PC130-8
Boom regeneration circuit

1. At boom lower and own weight fall
Function q At the time, part of the return flow on the bot-

q When the boom is lowered and falls due to its tom side passes through the regeneration pas-
own weight because the bottom pressure (A) sage (a) of the boom spool (2), pushes the
in the cylinder (1) is higher than the head pres- check valve (3) to open it and flows to the head
sure (B), this circuit brings the return flow on side.
the bottom side to the head side to increase q This increases the boom lower speed.
the cylinder speed.
Operation
q When the boom is lowered and falls due to its
own weight, the bottom side pressure (A) in the
boom cylinder (1) will rise above the head side
pressure (B).
PC130-8 33
2. At boom lower load process
Function q At the time, the head side pressure (B) and the
q When the head pressure (B) of the cylinder (1) spring (4) close the check valve (3), and the
is higher than the bottom pressure (A) while circuits on the head side and the bottom side
the boom is lowered and the boom is in the are interrupted.
load process, the check valve (3) will be
closed, and the circuits on the head side and
the bottom side will be interrupted.
Operation
q When the boom is lowered and is in the load
process, the head side pressure (B) of the
boom cylinder (1) rises above the bottom side
pressure (A).
34 PC130-8
Arm regeneration circuit

1. At arm in and own weight fall
A : Head circuit 1. Arm cylinder

B : Bottom circuit 2. Arm spool
PP : Pump circuit 3. Check valve
Function q At the time, part of the return flow on the head

q When the arm falls due to its own weight side passes through the regeneration passage
because the head pressure (A) in the arm cyl- (a) of the arm spool (2), pushes the check
inder (1) is higher than the bottom pressure (B) valve (3) to open it and flows to the bottom
during arm digging, this circuit brings the return side.
flow on the head side to the bottom side to q This increases the arm digging speed.
increase the cylinder speed.
Operation
q When the arm falls for digging due to its own
weight, the head side pressure (A) in the arm
cylinder (1) will rise above the bottom side
pressure (B).
PC130-8 35
2. At arm in process
A : Head circuit 1. Arm cylinder

B : Bottom circuit 2. Arm spool
PP : Pump circuit 3. Check valve
Function
q When the bottom pressure (B) of the cylinder
(1) rises above the head pressure (A) and the
arm enters the digging process, the check
valve (3) will be closed and the circuits on the
head side and the bottom side will be inter-
rupted.
Operation
q When the arm is in the digging process, the
bottom side pressure (B) of the arm cylinder
(1) will rise, close the check valve (3) and inter-
rupt the circuits on the head side and the bot-
tom side.
36 PC130-8
Hydraulic drift prevention valve

1. When boom is raised
Function Operation
q While the boom lever is not operated, the q If the boom is raised out, the main pressure
hydraulic drift prevention valve prevents pres- from the control valve pushes up poppet (5).
surized oil from leaking from the boom bottom As a result, the main pressure from the control
through spool (1) to prevent the boom from valve flows through the valve into the boom
drifting hydraulically. cylinder bottom.
PC130-8 37
2. When boom and arm are set in neutral
Operation
q If the control lever is returned to the neutral
position while the boom is raised out, the hold-
ing pressure in the boom cylinder bottom and
arm cylinder head is blocked by poppet (5) and
the pressurized oil flowing in through orifice (a)
is blocked by pilot spool (3). Accordingly, the
boom is held.
38 PC130-8
3. When boom is lowered
Operation
q If the boom is lowered, pilot pressure (P1) from
the PPC valve pushes pilot spool (3) and the
pressurized oil in chamber (b) in the poppet is
drained.
q The pressurized oil in port (Ab) is raised by the
pressurized oil from the boom cylinder bottom,
but the pressurized oil in chamber (b) is low-
ered by orifice (a).
q If the pressure in chamber (b) is lowered below
the pressure in port (Aa), poppet (5) opens and
the pressurized oil from port (Ab) flows through
port (Aa) into the control valve.
PC130-8 39
Swing bleeding valve
Function q Accordingly, the intermediate pressure is set

q When the machine swings, the bleeding valve lower than pump discharge pressure (PP) and
installed to the pressure reducing valve works raised as bleeding spool (3) moves. As a
so that the LS pressure rises gradually and the result, LS pressure (PLS) rises gradually.
machine swings smoothly. q When the lever is in neutral or operated fully,
the bleed-off circuit is closed.
Operation
(In fine control operation)
q The pressure reducing valve moves to the right
and notch (a) connects to the LS circuit. As a
result, pump circuit (PP), bleed-off circuit, and
LS circuit are connected through piston (2).
q Bleeding spool (3) moves to the left in propor-
tion as swing PPC pressure (PA) rises. In the
fine control area, notch (b) chokes the bleed-
off circuit and determines the intermediate
pressure before the lowered pressure is
applied to pump discharge pressure (PP) and
LS pressure (PLS).
40 PC130-8
LS select valve
1. During normal operation
Function
q At the time of simultaneous operation of swing
+ boom RAISE, this valve prevents high swing
LS pressure from entering the LS circuit (PLS)
and also prevents the boom RAISE speed
from reducing by securing the pump flow at the
time of swing drive.
Operation
q The pilot pressure is not generally applied to
the pilot port (BP) except for boom RAISE
operation.
q In this state, the pump discharge pressure
(PP) pushes the valve (1) to open it and is led
to the pressure reducing valve (4) of the swing
valve. At the time of swing operation, there
occurs the LS pressure (PLS) suitable for the
load pressure, and the pressure is led to the
pump LS valve.
PC130-8 41
2. At simultaneous operation of swing + boom RAISE
Operation
q At the simultaneous operation of swing + boom
RAISE, the signal pressure of the PPC circuit
is led to the pilot port (BP).
q When this pilot pressure (BP) is applied to the
piston (2) and reaches a pressure that is stron-
ger than the spring (3), the piston (2) will be
pushed to the left side, the valve (1) will close
and the pump discharge pressure (PP) will not
come to flow to the pressure reducing valve (4)
of the swing valve.
q Then, the swing pressure does not cause LS
pressure (PLS), but the LS pressure (PLS)
caused by the boom RAISE pressure is led to
the pump LS valve, and the pump delivery is
controlled with the boom RAISE LS pressure.
q The pilot pressure (BP) depends on the control
lever stroke.
42 PC130-8
Travel junction valve
Function Operation
q This valve connects both travel circuits to each When pilot pressure is turned ON
other so that hydraulic oil will be supplied q If the pilot pressure from the travel junction
evenly to both travel motors and the machine solenoid valve becomes higher than the force
will travel straight. of spring (2), travel junction spool (1) moves to
q When the machine is steered, outside pilot the left stroke end and the junction circuit
pressure (PST) closes the travel junction valve between port (PTL) (Left travel circuit) and
to secure high steering performance. (PTR) (Right travel circuit) is closed.
PC130-8 43
Self pressure reducing valve
Function When abnormally high pressure is generated

q The self pressure reducing valve lowers the q If the (PR) pressure of the self pressure reduc-
discharge pressure of the main pump and sup- ing valve is raised abnormally, ball (6) sepa-
plies it as the control pressure for the solenoid rates from the seat against the force of spring
valves, PPC valves, etc. (5). As a result, the hydraulic oil flows from
output port (PR) to (TS) and the (PR) pressure
Operation lowers.
q If the (PR) pressure rises higher than the set q Accordingly, the devices receiving the oil pres-
level, poppet (1) opens and the hydraulic oil sure (PPC valves, solenoid valves, etc.) are
flows from port (PR) through orifice (a) in spool protected from abnormally high pressure.
(4) and opening of poppet (1) into seal drain
port (TS).
q Accordingly, differential pressure is generated
over orifice (a) in spool (4) and spool (4)
moves in the direction to close the opening
between ports (P) and (PR). The (P) pressure
is lowered and controlled to a constant pres-
sure (set pressure) by the opening ratio at this
time and supplied as the (PR) pressure.
44 PC130-8
Lift check valve and cooler bypass valve
Lift check valve Cooler bypass valve
Function Function
q The lift check valve generates back pressure in q The cooler bypass valve protects oil cooler (4)
the drain circuit to prevent negative pressure from breakage when the return flow rate from
on each actuator (motor, cylinder, etc.) the control valve increases and oil cooler inlet
pressure (PB) increases.
Operation q The cooler bypass valve returns the return oil
q Drain circuit pressure (PA) of the control valve to the tank directly without passing it through
acts on the left side of piston (2) to move the oil cooler (4).
piston to the right.
q The piston is so balanced that the back pres- Operation
sure will be as follows. q Oil cooler inlet pressure (PB) acts on the
q (PA) – (PB) = Force of spring (3) / Area of pis- underside of piston (1) to push up the piston.
ton (2) at diameter (d1) q Piston (1) is so balanced that oil cooler inlet
[(PB) C 0 kg/cm2] pressure (PB) will be as follows.
q (PB) – (PT) = Force of spring (5) / Area of pis-
ton (1) at diameter (d2)
[(PT) C 0 kg/cm2]
PC130-8 45

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
46 PC130-8
SEN03775-02
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

PPC valve ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Swing motor .................................................................................................................................................. 17
Travel motor .................................................................................................................................................. 25
Center swivel joint......................................................................................................................................... 34
Solenoid valve............................................................................................................................................... 36
Accumulator .................................................................................................................................................. 40
Holding valve ................................................................................................................................................ 42
Hydraulic cylinder.......................................................................................................................................... 48
PC130-8 1
PPC valve 1
Work equipment and swing PPC valve 1
P : From self-pressure reducing valve

P1 : L.H. PPC valve: Arm OUT port/R.H. PPC valve: Boom LOWER port
P2 : L.H. PPC valve: Arm IN port/R.H. PPC valve: Boom RAISE port
P3 : L.H. PPC valve: Swing LEFT port/R.H PPC valve: Bucket CURL port
P4 : L.H. PPC valve: Swing RIGHT port/R.H. PPC valve: Bucket DUMP port
T : To tank
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Disc
4. Nut (for lever connection)
5. Joint
6. Plate
7. Retainer
8. Body
9. Filter
Unit: mm
Free length × Installation Installation Installation
Centering spring Free length
10 Outside diameter length load load
(for ports P3 and P4)
42.48 × 15.5 34 —
Centering spring 29.4 N 23.5 N replace spring.
11 44.45 × 15.5 34 —
(for ports P1 and P2) {3 kg} {2.40 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
12 Metering spring 26.53 × 8.15 24.9 —
{1.7 kg} {1.36 kg}
4 PC130-8
Operation q The relationship of the position of spool (1) and

body (10) [fine control hole (f) is in the middle
1. When in neutral between drain chamber (D) and pump pres-
q Ports (A) and (B) of the control valve and ports sure chamber (PP)] does not change until
(P1) and (P2) of the PPC valve are connected retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
to drain chamber (D) through fine control hole q Metering spring (2) contracts in proportion to
(f) in spool (1). the stroke of the control lever.
q Pressure at port (P1) also rises in proportion to
the stroke of the control lever.
q In this way, the control valve spool moves to a
position where the pressure of chamber (A)
[same as pressure at port (P1)] and the force
of the return spring of the control valve spool
are balanced.
2. During fine control

(Neutral o fine control)
q When piston (4) is pushed by disc (5), retainer
(9) is pushed, spool (1) is also pushed by
metering spring (2), and moves down.
q When fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), it is almost simultaneously inter-
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pilot pressurized oil of the control pump is led
to port (A) from port (P1) through fine control
hole (f).
q When the pressure at port (P1) becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine con-
trol hole (f) is shut off from pump pressure
chamber (PP). At almost the same time, it is
connected to drain chamber (D) to release the
pressure at port (P1).
q As a result, spool (1) moves up and down until
the force of metering spring (2) is balanced
with the pressure at port (P1).
PC130-8 5
3. During fine control 4. At full stroke

(When control lever is returned) q Disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer
q When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) is (9) pushes down spool (1).
pushed up by the force of centering spring (3) q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
and the pressure at port (P1). chamber (D), and is interconnected to pump
q Because of this, fine control hole (f) is con- pressure chamber (PP).
nected to drain chamber (D), and the pressur- q Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the self
ized oil at port (P1) is released. pressure reducing valve passes through fine
q If the pressure of port (P1) is lowered exces- control hole (f) and flows to chamber (A) from
sively, spool (1) is pushed down by metering port (P1) to push the control valve spool.
spring (2). q The oil returning from chamber (B) passes
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain from port (P2) through fine control hole (f') and
chamber (D), and it is almost simultaneously flows to drain chamber (D).
interconnected to pump pressure chamber
(PP).
q Pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at
port (P1) recovers to the level equivalent to the
lever position.
q When the spool of the control valve returns,
the oil in drain chamber (D) flows in from fine
control hole (f') in the valve on the side that is
not working. The oil passes through port (P2)
and enters chamber (B) to replenish the cham-
ber with pressurized oil.
6 PC130-8
Travel PPC valve

P1 : L.H. REVERSE
P2 : L.H. FORWARD
P3 : R.H. REVERSE
P4 : R.H. FORWARD
T : To hydraulic tank
PC130-8 7
8 PC130-8
1. Plate
2. Body
3. Piston
4. Seal
5. Valve
6. Damper
Unit: mm
Free length
7 Centering spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
108 N 86.3 N deformed,
48.57 × 15.5 32.5 —
{11 kg} {8.8 kg} replace spring.
16.7 N 13.3 N
8 Metering spring 26.53 × 8.15 24.9 —
{1.7 kg} {1.36 kg}
PC130-8 9
Operation q The relationship of the position of spool (1) and

body (10) [fine control hole (f) is in the middle
1. When in neutral between drain chamber (D) and pump pres-
q Ports (A) and (B) of the control valve and ports sure chamber (PP)] does not change until
(P1) and (P2) of the PPC valve are connected retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
to drain chamber (D) through fine control hole q Metering spring (2) contracts in proportion to
(f) in spool (1). the stroke of the control lever.
q Pressure at port (P1) also rises in proportion to
the stroke of the control lever.
q In this way, the control valve spool moves to a
position where the pressure of chamber (A)
[same as pressure at port (P1)] and the force
of the return spring of the control valve spool
are balanced.
2. During fine control

(Neutral o fine control)
q When piston (4) is pushed by lever (5), retainer
(9) is pushed, spool (1) is also pushed by
metering spring (2), and moves down.
q When fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
chamber (D), it is almost simultaneously inter-
connected to pump pressure chamber (PP).
q Pilot pressurized oil of the control pump is led
to port (A) from port (P1) through fine control
hole (f).
q When the pressure at port (P1) becomes
higher, spool (1) is pushed back and fine con-
trol hole (f) is shut off from pump pressure
chamber (PP). At almost the same time, it is
connected to drain chamber (D) to release the
pressure at port (P1).
q As a result, spool (1) moves up and down until
the force of metering spool (2) is balanced with
the pressure at port (P1).
10 PC130-8
3. During fine control 4. At full stroke

(When control lever is returned) q Lever (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer
q When lever (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) (9) pushes down spool (1).
is pushed up by the force of centering spring q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain
(3) and pressure at port (P1). chamber (D), and is interconnected to pump
q Because of this, fine control hole (f) is con- pressure chamber (PP).
nected to drain chamber (D), and the pressur- q Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the self
ized oil at port (P1) is released. pressure reducing valve passes through fine
q If the pressure of port (P1) is lowered exces- control hole (f) and flows to chamber (A) from
sively, spool (1) is pushed down by metering port (P1) to push the control valve spool.
spring (2). q The oil returning from chamber (B) passes
q Fine control hole (f) is shut off from drain from port (P2) through fine control hole (f') and
chamber (D), and it is almost simultaneously flows to drain chamber (D).
interconnected to pump pressure chamber
(PP).
q Pump pressure is supplied until the pressure at
port (P1) recovers to the level equivalent to the
lever position.
q When the spool of the control valve returns,
the oil in drain chamber (D) flows in from fine
control hole (f') in the valve on the side that is
not working. The oil passes through port (P2)
and enters chamber (B) to replenish the cham-
ber with pressurized oil.
PC130-8 11
Attachment PPC valve

(with EPC valve) 1
a For the details of operation, see the paragraph of "Work equipment and swing PPC valve".
12 PC130-8

P1 : To service valve
P2 : To service valve
T : To tank
1. Spool
2. Piston
3. Lever
4. Plate
5. Retainer
6. Block
7. Body
8. EPC valve
Unit: mm
Free length
9 Centering spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
125 N 100 N deformed,
33.88 × 15.3 28.4 —
{12.7 kg} {10.2 kg} replace spring.
16.7 N 13.3 N
10 Metering spring 22.73 × 8.10 22 .0 —
{1.70 kg} {1.36 kg}
PC130-8 13
1. EPC valve
C: To control valve 3. Spool

P: From self-pressure reducing valve 4. Push pin
T: To hydraulic tank 5. Coil
6. Plunger
1. Body 7. Connector
2. Plug
Unit: mm
If damaged or
Free length deformed,
8 Return spring Outside diameter length load load
replace EPC
3.1 N 2.6 N valve assembly.
9.5 × 11.4 8.4 —
{0.32 kg} {0.26 kg}
14 PC130-8
Function Operation
q The EPC valve consists of the proportional
solenoid portion and the hydraulic valve por- 1) When signal current is 0
tion. (coil is de-energized)
q When it receives signal current (i) from the q When there is no signal current flowing from
pump controller, it generates the EPC output the controller to coil (14), coil (14) is de-ener-
pressure in proportion to the size of the signal, gized.
and outputs it to the control valve. q Spool (11) is pushed to the right by spring (12).
q Port (P) closes and the pressurized oil from the
front pump does not flow to the control valve.
q The pressurized oil from the control valve is
drained to the tank via port (C) and port (T).
PC130-8 15
2) When signal current is very small 3) When signal current is maximum

(coil is energized) (coil is energized)
q When a very small signal current flows to coil q As the signal current flows to coil (5), coil (5) is
(5), coil (5) is energized, and a propulsion force energized.
is generated on the left side of plunger (6). q When this happens, the signal current is at its
q Push pin (4) pushes spool (2) to the left, and maximum, so the propulsion force of plunger
pressurized oil flows from port (P) to port (C). (6) is also at its maximum.
q Pressures on port (C) increases and the force q Spool (2) is pushed to the left by push pin (4).
to act on surface (a) of spool (2) and the spring q The maximum volume of pressurized oil is
load on spring (3) become larger than the pro- conducted from port (P) to port (C), increasing
pulsion force of plunger (6). the circuit pressure across EPC valve and the
q Spool (2) is pushed to the right, port (P) is shut control valve to the maximum level.
off from port (C) and ports (C) and (T) are con- q Since port (T) is closed, pressurized oil does
nected. not flow to the hydraulic tank.
q Spool (2) moves up and down so that the pro-
pulsion force of plunger (6) may be balanced
with pressure of port (C) + spring load of spring
(3).
q The circuit pressure between the EPC valve
and the control valve is controlled in proportion
to the size of the signal current.
16 PC130-8
Swing motor 1
Type: KMF45ABE-5
B: From swing holding brake solenoid valve Specifications

MA: From control valve Type : KMF45ABE-5
MB: From control valve Theoretical displacement : 143.8 cm³/rev
S: From control valve Safety valve set pressure : 27.1 MPa {276 kg/cm²}
T: To tank Rated speed : 2,111 rpm
Brake release pressure : 1.1 MPa {11 kg/cm²}
1. Reverse prevention valve
2. Safety valve
PC130-8 17
18 PC130-8
1. Brake spring
2. Drive shaft
3. Spacer
4. Case
5. Disc
6. Plate
7. Brake ring
8. Brake piston
9. Housing
10. Piston
11. Cylinder block
12. Valve plate
13. Center shaft
14. Center spring
15. Check valve
16. Shuttle valve
Unit: mm
Free length
17 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load If damaged or
43.3 × 6 36.5 —
{0.88 kg} {0.70 kg} replace spring.
1.96 N 1.57 N
18 Shuttle valve spring 13 × 6.5 9.5 —
{0.2 kg} {0.16 kg}
PC130-8 19
Swing holding brake
1. When solenoid valve is de-energized 2. When solenoid valve is energized
Operation Operation
q As the swing holding brake solenoid valve is q As the swing holding brake solenoid valve is
de-energized, the pressurized oil from the self energized, the valve is switched.
pressure reducing valve is shut off. q The pressurized oil from the self pressure
q Port (B) is connected to tank circuit (T). reducing valve is conducted brake chamber (a)
q Brake piston (8) is pushed down by brake via port (B).
spring (1). q After entering chamber (a), the pressurized oil
q Disc (5) and plate (6) are pushed together, and compresses brake spring (1) and pushes
the brake is applied. brake piston (8) up.
q Disc (5) is separated from plate (6), releasing
the brake.
20 PC130-8
Relief valve portion
Outline 2. When swing is stopped

q The relief valve portion consists of check q When the swing control lever is returned to
valves (2) and (3), shuttle valves (4) and (5), neutral, the supply of pressurized oil from the
and relief valve (1). pump to port (MA) is stopped.
q The pressurized oil from the motor outlet can't
Function return to the tank since the returning circuit to
q When the machine is in the swing holding the tank is closed from control valve (6). Thus,
mode, control valve (6) closes the motor outlet pressure on port (MB) increases.
circuit, but the motor rotation is continued by q Rotation resistance is generated on the motor
inertial force. and hence the brake starts working.
q The motor output, therefore, is abnormally q Shuttle valve (4) is pressed as pressure on
increased, resulting in damaging the motor. port (MB) goes above port (MA).
q In order to prevent the motor damages, the q The pressure on chamber (C) is increased to
relief valve relieves the abnormally high pres- the se t pr es sure of relief va lv e (1) an d
sure to port (S) from the motor outlet side becomes the same as that of port (MB).
(high-pressure side) of the motor. q A high braking torque works on the motor,
thereby stopping the motor.
Operation q When relief valve (1) is being actuated, the
1. When starting swing relieved pressurized oil and the pressurized oil
q When the swing control lever is operated to the from port (S) are fed to port (MA) via check
right- swing, the pressurized oil from the pump valve (3).
is supplied to port (MA) via control valve (6). q Above prevents cavitation on port (MA).
q The pressure on port (MA) rises, the starting
torque is generated in the motor, and the motor
starts to rotate.
q The pressurized oil from the outlet port of the
motor passes from port (MB) through the con-
trol valve (6) and returns to the tank.
PC130-8 21
Reverse prevention valve
22 PC130-8
MA: From control valve

MB: From control valve
T1: To tank
T2: To tank
1. Valve body
2. Spool (MA side)
3. Spring (MA side)
4. Plug (MA side)
5. Spool (MB side)
6. Spring (MB side)
7. Plug (MB side)
Explanatory drawing of effects
PC130-8 23
Function 2. When motor is stopped temporarily

q This valve reduces the swing back generation q The motor rotation is reversed by the closing
in the swing body by the inertia of the swing pressure generated at port (MB). (1st time:
body, the backlash and rigidity of the machin- reverse rotation)
ery system, and the compression of the q Reversing pressure is generated on port (MA).
hydraulic oil when the swing is stopped. Pressure (MA) is conducted to chamber (a).
q The valve contributes in preventing collapsing q The pressure compresses spring (3) by use of
of load when the swing is stopped and also the difference in areas of circles (øD3 > øD4)
contributes in reducing cycle time (enhances of spool (2) and moves spool (2) to the right
the positioning performance, enabling you to side.
proceed to the next work quicker than ever). q Port (MA) o chamber (b) will be intercon-
nected.
Operation q Ports (b) and (f) will be interconnected through
the drilled hole (h) on spool (5). This intercon-
1. When port (MB) brake pressure is generated nection bypasses the reversing pressure on
q Pressure (MB) is conducted to chamber (d) via port (MA) to port (T), thereby preventing the
notch (g). reverse rotation of the 2nd time.
q The pressure compresses spring (6) by use of
the difference in areas of circles (øD1 > øD2)
of spool (5) and moves spool (5) to the left
side.
q Port (MB) o chamber (e) will be intercon-
nected.
q Since pressure (MA) is lower than the set pres-
sure of spring (3), spool (2) does not move and
the pressurized oil is kept in. Thus the braking
force is ensured.
24 PC130-8
Travel motor 1
(With reduction gears)
A: From center swivel joint, port B2

(L.H. travel motor)
From center swivel joint, port C2
(R.H. travel motor)
B: From center swivel joint, port D2
(L.H. travel motor)
From center swivel joint, port A2
(R.H. travel motor)
D: To center swivel joint, port DR2
P: From center swivel joint, port E2
1. Oil filler plug

2. Oil level plug
3. Drain plug
PC130-8 25
1. Plug 16. Cover

2. Check valve 17. Sun gear A
3. Counterbalance valve 18. Carrier A
4. Sleeve 19. Sun gear B
5. Relief valve 20. Carrier B
6. End cover 21. Regulator piston
7. Brake piston 22. Shaft
8. Disc 23. Piston
9. Plate 24. Floating seal
10. Swash plate 25. Spindle
11. Pivot 26. Cylinder
12. Bearing 27. Timing plate
13. Hub 28. Regulator valve
14. Planetary pinion B 29. Check valve
15. Planetary pinion A 30. Piston
26 PC130-8
Specifications
Type GM21VA-A
Stroke volume Hi 44.2
(cm³/rev) Lo 79.1
Rated speed Hi 2,809
(rpm) Lo 1,486
Brake releasing pressure 0.76
(MPa{kg/cm²}) {7.71}
Hi-Lo switching pressure 2.94
(MPa{kg/cm²}) {30}
Reduction ratio 54.0
Outline
1. Reduction gears (Final drive) 4. 2nd travel speed selector mechanism

Consists of 2-stage planetary gear mecha- Consists of the regulator valve and regulator
nism. Reduces the hydraulic motor speed from piston. Changes the rotation speed in 2 stages
high speed to low speed high torque. by changing the stroke volume of the hydraulic
motor.
2. Hydraulic motor
Swash plate type axial piston motor mecha- 5. Parking brake
nism. Converts oil pressure from the hydraulic Multiple disc type brake mechanism. Forms a
pump into rotary motion. unit with the hydraulic motor.
3. Brake valve
Consists of various valves. Provides the follow-
ing functions: stops the hydraulic motor
smoothly, prevents runway of hydraulic motor,
prevents generation of abnormally high pres-
sure when the hydraulic motor is stopped sud-
denly.
PC130-8 27
Operation
Operation of motor
At low speed (the motor swash plate angle is maximized.)
1. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve q Since 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve
2. Regulator valve (1) is de-energized, the pressurized oil from
3. Spring self pressure reduction valve (11) is not fed to
4. Check valve port (P).
5. Regulator piston q Regulator valve (2) is pushed down with spring
6. Swash plate (3) reaction force.
7. Parking brake piston q The main pressurized oil, sent from the control
8. Hydraulic pump valve through check valve (4), is controlled by
9. Travel control valve regulator valve (2) and used to shuts off the cir-
10. Pump merge-divider valve cuit to regular piston (5).
11. Self pressure reducing valve q The pressurized oil in control chamber (C) is
12. Brake valve drained from port (D) through oil passage (e) of
regulator valve (2).
q Swash plate (7) reaches its maximum tilt
angle, and the machine travels at low speed
with the maximum motor capacity.
28 PC130-8
At high speed (the motor swash plate angle is minimized.)
1. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve q When 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve
2. Regulator valve (1) is energized, the pressurized oil from self
3. Spring pressure reduction valve (11) is fed to port (P).
4. Check valve q Regulator valve (2) is pushed up with the pres-
5. Regulator piston surized oil that is sent to port (P).
6. Swash plate q The main pressurized oil from the control valve
7. Parking brake piston passes through check valve (4), and passes
8. Hydraulic pump through oil passage (F) in regulator valve (2) to
9. Travel control valve control chamber (C), and is used to push to
10. Pump merge-divider valve regular piston (5) to the left.
11. Self pressure reducing valve q Swash plate (7) reaches its minimum tilt angle,
12. Brake valve and the machine travels at high speed with the
minimum motor capacity.
PC130-8 29
Brake valve
Operation when pressure oil is supplied Operation when pressure is shut off
q When the travel lever is operated, the pressur- q When the travel lever is returned to its neutral
ized oil from the control valve is fed to port (A) position, the hydraulic oil circuit from the con-
and check valve (1) is opened. The oil is fur- trol valve is closed. And counterbalance valve
ther sent from port (C) to port (D) through the (2) starts to return to the left by spring (3) reac-
motor. tion force.
q At the same time, when the pressure of the q The hydraulic oil in chamber (G) tends to flow
hydraulic oil that entered in chamber (G) to port (A) through orifice (f). However, the
through orifice (f) exceeds spring (3) reaction back pressure is generated by closing of orifice
force, counterbalance valve (2) moves to the (f), controlling the return speed of counterbal-
right, opening ports (D) and (B), and the motor ance (2) to the right.
becomes ready to rotate. q The motor tends to rotate by inertia even when
q As ports (A) and (E) also open, parking brake the hydraulic oil from the control valve is
piston (4) is pressed down by the hydraulic stopped.During this time, the oil return circuit is
pressure. This releases the parking brake and gradually closed by controlling the movement
the motor starts to rotate. speed of counterbalance valve (2) and by
using its cutout portion. By this, the motor is
smoothly stopped.
30 PC130-8
Brake operation at travelling downhill
q If the machine is going to run away when trav-

eling downhill, the motor idles and the hydrau-
lic pressure at port (C) drops. The pressure of
hydraulic oil that is sent to chamber (G)
through orifice (f) also drops.
q When the hydraulic oil pressure in chamber
(G) goes below spring (3) reaction force, coun-
terbalance valve (2) starts to return to the left.
q The hydraulic oil in chamber (J) tends to flow
to port (B) through orifice (h). However, the
back pressure is generated by closing of orifice
(h), controlling the return speed of counterbal-
ance (2) to the right.
q When ports (D) and (B) are closed and when
the hydraulic pressure at port (D) increases, a
resistance is generated in motor rotation to
protect the machine from running away.
q Counterbalance valve (2) is moved to the posi-
tion where the hydraulic pressure at port (B) is
well balanced with the pressure by the weight
of machine itself and the pressure at port (A).
The motor speed is controlled according to the
pump delivery by controlling the opening of
hydraulic oil output circuit.
PC130-8 31
Relief valve
When starting When stopping
q The pressurized oil from the control valve is q When the hydraulic oil from the control valve is
fed from port (A) to port (C). As port (C) is con- stopped, ports (A) and (C) are closed. At the
nected to the motor, the pressure drives the same time, ports (D) and (B) are closed, but
motor to rotate. the motor continues to rotate by the inertia.
q When the hydraulic pressure at port (C) q When the hydraulic pressure at port (D)
exceeds the specified value, relief valve (1a) is exceeds the specified value, relief valve (1b) is
pushed up and the hydraulic oil is fed to port pushed up and the hydraulic oil is fed to port
(D).However, relief valve (1b) is kept closed (C).The hydraulic pressure applied to port (D)
independent from the hydraulic pressure at at the outlet side is fed to port (C) at the inlet
port (C). side, and it is used to prevent the oil cavitation.
q The hydraulic oil is fed from port (C) to cham- q The hydraulic oil from port (D) passes through
ber (E) through the oil passages of relief valve the oil passages of relief valve (1b) and sleeve
(1a) and sleeve (2a). By this pressure, piston (2b), and sent to chamber (F). By this pres-
(3) is moved to the right. sure, piston (3) is moved to the left.
q When piston (3) reaches its stroke end posi- q When piston (3) reaches its stroke end posi-
tion, the hydraulic pressure from relief valve tion, the hydraulic pressure from relief valve
(1a) to chamber (E) increases. Therefore, (1b) to chamber (F) increases. Therefore, ports
ports (C) and (D) are closed by relief valve (D) and (C) are closed by relief valve (1b).
(1a). q The hydraulic pressure at port (D) at the inlet
q The hydraulic pressure at port (C) at the inlet side is controlled so that the motor is smoothly
side is controlled so that the motor is smoothly stopped.
started to rotate.
32 PC130-8
PC130-8 33
Center swivel joint 1

A1: From control valve (R.H. travel FORWARD) A2: To R.H. travel motor port B
B1: From control valve (L.H. travel FORWARD) B2: To L.H. travel motor port A
C1: From control valve (R.H. travel REVERSE) C2: To R.H. travel motor port A
D1: From control valve (L.H. travel REVERSE) D2: To L.H. travel motor port B
E1: From 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve E2: To L.H. and R.H. travel motor port P
DR1: To hydraulic tank DR2: From L.H. and R.H. travel motor port D
1. Cover 4. O-ring
2. Body 5. Shaft
3. Slipper seal
34 PC130-8
Unit: mm
Clearance between rotor and Standard size Standard clearance Clearance limit
1 Replace
shaft ø 80 0.056 – 0.105 0.111
PC130-8 35
Solenoid valve 1
36 PC130-8
P1 : From self pressure reducing valve

A1 : To PPC valve
A2 : To control valve, port PS
A3 : To control valve, port PST
A4 : To center swivel joint, port E1
A5 : To swing motor, port B
A6 : To control valve, port Px
T : To hydraulic tank
ACC : To accumulator (for PPC circuit)
1. PPC lock solenoid valve

2. Merge-flow divider solenoid valve
3. Travel junction solenoid valve
4. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve
5. Swing holding brake solenoid valve
6. 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
7. Coil (ON/OFF type)
8. Push pin
9. Valve spool
10. Sleeve
11. Block
12. Plug
Check valve
13. Plunger
14. Plug
PC130-8 37
Operation Solenoid valve
Check valve When solenoid valve is “de-energized“ (circuit

is closed)
q Installed between port (P) and PPC solenoid

valve. When the engine is stopped, plunger (1) q Coil (1) is de-energized when no signal current
is pushed back to the left with spring (2) reac- is supplied to coil (1).
tion force, and ports (ACC) and (P) are closed q Spool (2) is pushed back to the left with spring
to maintain the pressure in the accumulator. (3) reaction force.
q When the engine is running, plunger (1) is q As ports (P) and (A) are closed, the pilot pres-
pushed to the right with the pilot pressure that sure is not fed to the actuator through port (A).
is sent to port (P), and ports (P) and (ACC) are At the same time, port (T) is opened, allowing
interconnected. the oil from the actuator to drain to the hydrau-
lic tank.
When solenoid valve is “energized“ (circuit is

connected)
q Coil (1) is energized when signal current is

supplied to coil (1).
q Spool (2) is pushed to the right with push pin
(4).
q As ports (P) and (A) are opened, the pilot pres-
sure is fed to the actuator through port (A).
At the same time, port (T) is closed, shutting off
the oil from the actuator to the hydraulic tank.
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39
Accumulator 1
For PPC circuit
1. Gas plug
2. Shell
3. Poppet
4. Holder
5. Bladder
6. Oil port
Outline
q Mounted on the solenoid valve. If the engine is
stopped with the work equipment is kept at an
elevated position, the pilot pressure is supplied
to the control valve by the pressure of the com-
pressed nitrogen gas in the accumulator.
Therefore, the spool can be operated to the
lower the work equipment by its own weight.
Specifications
Gas to be used: Nitrogen gas
Gas capacity: 300 cc
Sealed gas pressure:
1.18 MPa {12 kg/cm²} (at 80°C)
Maximum operating pressure:
6.86 MPa {70 kg/cm²}
40 PC130-8
For breaker
For low pressure For high pressure
1. Cap 1. Cap
2. Core 2. Core
3. Guard rubber 3. Locknut
4. Ring 4. Gas port
5. Lid 5. Bladder
6. Bladder 6. Shell
7. Shell
Outline Outline
q Connected to the attachment piping. When the q Connected to the attachment piping. When the
breaker operates, the oil pulsation is absorbed breaker operates, the oil pulsation is absorbed
by the pressure of compressed nitrogen gas of by the pressure of compressed nitrogen gas of
the accumulator, to protect the hydraulic sys- the accumulator, to protect the hydraulic sys-
tem devices and piping. tem devices and piping.
Specifications Specifications
Gas to be used: Nitrogen gas Gas to be used: Nitrogen gas
Gas capacity: 480 cc Gas capacity: 500 cc
Sealed gas pressure: 0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm²} (at 80°C) Sealed gas pressure:
Maximum operating pressure: 0.69 MPa {7 kg/cm²} 5.88 MPa {60 kg/cm²} (at 80°C)
Maximum operating pressure:
20.6 MPa {210 kg/cm²}
PC130-8 41
Holding valve 1
(An immediate fall prevention valve for work equipment)
42 PC130-8
CY : To work equipment cylinder

PCY: For pressure pickup port and equalizer circuit
PI : From PPC valve
T : To tank
V : From control valve
1. Pilot spool
2. Safety valve
3. Check valve
Unit: mm
Free length
4 Check valve spring Outside diameter length load load
20.8 × ø 12.2 13.5 —
58.8 N 47.1 N replace spring.
5 Spool return spring 41.1 × ø 9.6 35.0 —
{6.0 kg} {4.8 kg}
78.5 N 62.8 N
6 Spool return spring 41.9 × ø 25.8 41.0 —
{8.0 kg} {6.4 kg}
PC130-8 43
Function
q Prevents the pressurized oil from reversing
from the work equipment cylinder in order to
prevents sudden drift of the work equipment at
breaking of the piping between the control
valve and the work equipment cylinder.
Operation
1. When the work equipment lever is in neu-
tral
When the piping is free of breakage If the piping is bursted

q Check valve (5) is closed under the holding q If piping (A) is broken between the control
pressure of the cylinder led from port (CY) to valve and the work equipment cylinder, cham-
chamber (b). bers (a) and (b) are shut off in the same way
q At the neutral, pilot pressure led to port (PI) as the piping is free from damages.
from the PPC valve is 0 MPa {0 kg/cm²}. q Pressure for the work equipment cylinder is
q Spool (1) is pressed to the left by the force of held to prevent a sudden drop of the work
springs (2) and (3). equipment.
q Chambers (a) and (b) are shut off.
q No pressurized oil flows between the control
valve and the work equipment cylinder.
q Accordingly, the work equipment is held in
position.
q If the work equipment cylinder has abnomally
high pressure, safety valve (4) is actuated by
the holding pressure of the work equipment
cylinder.
q Chambers (b) of L.H. and R.H. holding valve
for the boom are interconnected by port (PCY).
q Chambers (b) will have the same pressure if
the L.H. and R.H. holding valves have a differ-
ence in leakage.
44 PC130-8
2. When pressurized oil flows from the main

valve to the cylinder
When the piping is free of breakage

q Pressurized oil led to chamber (a) from the
control valve becomes higher than the com-
bined force of pressure from work equipment
cylinder circuit chamber (b) and spring (6).
q Check valve (5) opens and chambers (a) and
(b) are interconnected.
q Pressurized oil flows from the control valve to
the work equipment cylinder.
If the piping is bursted

q If piping (A) between the control valve and the
work equipment cylinder is broken, pressur-
ized oil in chamber (a) flows outside from the
damaged portion.
q Pressure force in chamber (a) drops.
q Pressure force in chamber (a) drops lower than
the combined pressure force of chamber (b)
and spring (6).
q Check valve (5) closes and chambers (a) and
(b) are cut off.
q Pressure for the work equipment cylinder is
held to prevent a sudden drop of the work
equipment.
PC130-8 45
3. When returning pressurized oil to the main

valve from the work equipment cylinder
When the piping is free of burst If the piping is bursted

q Holding pressure of the work equipment cylin- q If piping (A) bursts between the control valve
der is led to chamber (b) and check valve (5) and the work equipment cylinder.
closes. q Pressurized oil in chamber (a) flows out to the
q Pilot pressure from the PPC valve is led to port bursted portion but resupplied from chamber
(PI) and reaches [Pilot Pressure > Force of (b).
Spring (3)] (area of d). q Since pressurized oil flows via opening (c) of
q Spool (1) moves to the right to the standby spool (1), a sudden drop of the cylinder is pre-
position.(1st stage stroke) vented.
q At this point, chambers (a) and (b) are not
interconnected.
q & Pilot pressure further rises, and reaches
[Pilot pressure > Force of spring (2)] (area of
d).
q Spool (1) moves further to the right, and cham-
bers (a) and (b) are interconnected. (2nd stage
stroke)
q Pressurized oil returns to the control valve
from the work equipment cylinder.
46 PC130-8
PC130-8 47
Hydraulic cylinder 1
Boom cylinder
Arm cylinder
Bucket cylinder
48 PC130-8
Unit: mm
Cylinder Standard Tolerance Standard Clearance
name size Shaft Hole clearance limit
-0.030 +0.259 0.093 –
Clearance between Boom ø 70 0.435
-0.076 +0.063 0.335
1 piston rod and bush-
ing -0.030 +0.279 0.095 –
Arm ø 75 0.455
-0.076 +0.065 0.355
-0.030 +0.250 0.085 –
Bucket ø 65 0.426
-0.076 +0.055 0.326
-0.030 +0.190 0.120 –
Boom ø 70 1.0
-0.100 +0.090 0.290 Replace bush-
Clearance between ing
-0.030 +0.190 0.120 –
2 piston rod support Arm ø 70 1.0
-0.100 +0.090 0.290
shaft and bushing
-0.030 +0.170 0.100 –
Bucket ø 65 1.0
-0.080 +0.070 0.250
-0.030 +0.190 0.120 –
Boom ø 70 1.0
Clearance between -0.100 +0.090 0.290
cylinder bottom -0.030 +0.190 0.120 –
3 Arm ø 70 1.0
support shaft and -0.100 +0.090 0.290
bushing -0.030 +0.170 0.100 –
Bucket ø 65 1.0
-0.080 +0.070 0.250
PC130-8 49

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
50 PC130-8
SEN03776-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Work equipment
Work equipment .............................................................................................................................................. 2
Dimensions of components............................................................................................................................. 4
PC130-8 1
Work equipment 1
Unit: mm
Clearance between mounting size clearance limit
Shaft Hole
1 pin and bushing of boom and
revolving frame -0.030 +0.143 0.093 –
ø 70 0.8
-0.100 +0.063 0.245
Clearance between mounting
-0.030 +0.145 0.095 –
2 pin and bushing of boom and ø 70 0.8
-0.100 +0.065 0.245
arm
Clearance between mounting Replace pin and
-0.030 +0.129 0.104 –
3 pin and bushing of arm and ø 60 0.8 bushing
-0.080 +0.074 0.209
bucket
Clearance between mounting -0.030 +0.133 0.105 –
4 ø 60 0.8
pin and bushing of arm and link -0.080 +0.075 0.213
Clearance between mounting -0.030 +0.132 0.105 –
5 ø 65 0.8
pin and bushing of link and link -0.080 +0.075 0.212
Clearance between mounting
-0.030 +0.130 0.108 –
6 pin and bushing of link and ø 60 0.8
-0.080 +0.078 0.210
bucket
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
Dimensions of components 1
Arm
4 PC130-8
Unit: mm
Tolerance
No. Measurement point Standard size
Shaft Hole
-0.030 +0.100
1 — ø 70
-0.100 0
+1.0
Arm side 81.5
2 0
Cylinder head side 80 ±1.2
+0.5
Boom side 226
0
3
-0.2
Arm side 226
-0.7
-0.030 +0.100
4 — ø 70
-0.100 0
5 — 264 ±2.0
6 — 213.5 ±1.0
7 — 640.6 ±0.5
8 — 2,491 —
9 — 2,101.9 ±1.5
10 — 290.4 ±0.5
11 — 493 ±0.2
12 — 422 ±0.5
13 — 374.9 —
14 — 1,251 —
-0.030 +0.200
15 — ø 60
-0.080 0
0
Link side 259
16 -1.0
Bucket side 261 ±1.0
-0.030 +0.200
17 — ø 60
-0.080 0
0
Arm side 226
-0.5
18
+2.0
Bucket side 274
0
Min. 1,378 —
19
Max. 2,263 —
PC130-8 5
Bucket
6 PC130-8
Unit: mm
No. Measurement point Standard size Tolerance
1 — 371.3 ±0.5
2 — 51.6 ±0.5
3 — 97.9° —
4 — 374.9 —
5 — 1,236.6 —
6 — 189.5 —
7 — 5° —
8 — 0° —
+0.2
9 — ø 60
0
10 — ø 64 —
+0.25
11 — ø 80
0
12 — 261 ±1.0
13 — 50 —
14 — 85 —
+1.0
15 — 380
0
16 — 18 —
17 — ø 110 —
18 — ø 130 —
19 — ø 132 —
20 — ø 108 —
+2.0
21 — 274
0
22 — 51 —
23 — 34 —
24 — 100.5 —
25 — 115.3 —
26 — 74 —
27 — 65 —
PC130-8 7

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
8 PC130-8
SEN03777-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Cab and its attachments
Air conditioner ................................................................................................................................................. 2
PC130-8 1
Air conditioner 1
Air conditioner piping
1. Air conditioner unit A: Fresh air

2. Hot water pickup piping B: Recirculated air
3. Air conditioner compressor C: Hot air/cold air
4. Refrigerant piping
5. Condenser
6. Hot water return piping
7. Duct
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
4 PC130-8
SEN03778-01
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Electrical system
Electronic control system ................................................................................................................................ 2
Machine monitor system ............................................................................................................................... 33
KOMTRAX system........................................................................................................................................ 47
Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 49
PC130-8 1
Electronic control system 1

Machine control system diagram
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
Engine control function
1. Battery Function
2. Battery relay 1. The neutral safety circuit is employed to
3. Fusible link secure safety when the engine is started.
4. Fuse box q The engine does not start until the lock
5. Starting switch lever is set in the “LOCK“ position.
6. Engine controller
7. Lock lever 2. The KOMTRAX engine cut circuit is employed
8. PPC lock switch to disable the engine from starting when the
9. Starting motor cut-out relay (for PPC lock) KOMTRAX terminal receives an engine cut
10. Starting motor cut-out relay (for personal code) command issued through external operation.
11. Fuel control dial
12. Safety relay
13. Starting motor
14. Fuel supply pump
15. Sensors
16. Engine controller power cut-off relay A
17. Engine controller power cut-off relay B
18. Machine monitor
19. KOMTRAX terminal
4 PC130-8
Starting engine
q When starting switch (5) is turned "ON", engine
controller (6) sends command current to fuel
supply pump (14).
For this reason, a fail-safe mechanism is pro-
vided with the electrical system to "prevent the
engine from starting when an electrical failure
occurs".
q When starting switch (5) is turned to “START“
with lock lever (7) set in the “LOCK“ position, a
starting current is supplied to starting motor
(13) causing the engine to start.
However, as the neutral safety mechanism is
provided, the engine will not start if lock lever
(7) is set in the "FREE" position at this time,
that is, starting motor cut-out relay (9) cuts off
the starting current to starting motor (13).
However, if lock lever (7) is set in the "FREE"
position at this time, the neutral safety mecha-
nism works so that starting motor cut-out relay
(9) will cut off the starting current to starting
motor (13) to prevent the engine from starting.
q Upon receipt of the engine cut-off command
from the external source, KOMTRAX terminal
(19) sends the signal to machine monitor (18).
Machine monitor (18) causes starting motor
cut-out relay (10) to cut off the starting current
to starting motor (13), therefore the engine
does not start.
Engine speed control

q Upon receipt of a fuel control dial (11) control
signal, engine controller (6) sends a command
current to fuel supply pump (14) to adjust the
fuel injection amount to control the engine
speed.
Stopping engine
q When starting switch (5) is turned “OFF“, the
current from the ACC terminal of starting
switch (5) to engine controller (6) is cut off, and
consequently the command current to fuel sup-
ply pump (14) is cut off.
Fuel supply pump (14) stops fuel feed, causing
the engine speed to go down and the engine
stops.
PC130-8 5
Pump and engine mutual control function
1. Battery Input and output signals

2. Battery relay a. Constant power supply
3. Fusible link b. CAN signal (Note.1)
4. Fuse box c. PC-EPC valve drive signal
5. Resistor d. Solenoid valve GND
6. Pump controller e. Oil pressure sensor signal
7. Engine controller f. Oil pressure switch signal
8. Machine monitor g. Throttle signal
9. Emergency pump drive switch h. Fuel supply pump control signal
10. Fuel control dial i. Sensor signals
12. Sensors Note.1: CAN is abbreviation of “Controller Area
13. Pump oil pressure sensor Network“ in an in-vehicle standard.
14. Oil pressure sensor
15. Oil pressure switch
16. Hydraulic pump
16a. Servo
16b. LS valve
16c. PC valve
17. Control valve
17a. Pump merge-divider valve
17b. Self pressure reducing valve
18. PC-EPC valve
6 PC130-8
Function
q A function that selects working mode with the
working mode selector switch in the machine
monitor. 5 modes (P, E, L, ATT, B) are avail-
able, allowing the operator to select appropri-
ate engine torque (T) and pump absorption
torque depending on the work. In the default
setting of the service mode, only 3 modes (P,
E, L) are available in which “Without“ is
selected for the attachment.
q According to the pump absorption torque set at
each mode, based on the engine governor set
speed with the fuel control dial and the actual
engine speed, the controller controls so that
the pump absorbs all torques at each engine
output point.
q When the engine speed is lowered, the con-
troller prevents the engine from stopping by
throttling the pump absorption torque.
PC130-8 7
Control method in each mode
P mode, E mode, and ATT mode

q Matching point:
Working mode Matching point
68.4 kW/2,200 rpm
Travel
{91.7 HP/2,200 rpm}
P
Working 64.4 kW/2,050 rpm
&
(At arm digging) {86.4 HP/2,050 rpm}
ATT
Working 66.3 kW/2,050 rpm
(Except arm digging) {88.9 HP/2,050 rpm}
60.0 kW/1,980 rpm
E
{80.5 HP/1,980 rpm}
q In P, E, or ATT mode, engine speed is always

controlled so that it is kept around the match-
ing point specified for each mode.
q When a load to the pump increases and the
pressure rises, the engine speed (N) lowers. At
the time, the controller reduces the pump deliv-
ery (Q) to increase the engine speed to the
matching point. If the pressure drops, the con-
troller increases the pump delivery to increase
the engine speed to the matching point.
8 PC130-8
Modes B and L
Working mode Partial output

B 75%
L 70%
q Matching point:
Working mode Matching point
50.9 kW/1,870 rpm
B
{68.2 HP/1,870 rpm}
47.8 kW/1,640 rpm
L
{64.1 HP/1,640 rpm}
q In B or L mode, engine output is controlled to a

constant level.
q The controller controls the pump absorption
torque to decrease the engine speed while
keeping the engine torque at a constant level
along the equal engine horsepower curve.
q The controller controls pump delivery (Q) so
that the engine torque can be kept at a con-
stant level along the equal engine horsepower
curve.
PC130-8 9
Control function during travel Control function with emergency pump drive
q Traveling the machine in P or ATT mode switch “ON“
increases engine speed (N). q If the controller gets out of order and no work is
(Traveling the machine in "Hi" mode increases possible because the hydraulic pump does not
the idle speed, too.) work properly, turning on emergency pump
q Traveling the machine in E, L or B mode does drive switch (1) temporarily enables to main-
not change engine speed (N) or pump absorp- tain functions of the machine with absorption
tion torque. torques quite similar to those in E Mode.
In this case, a constant current flows from the
battery to the PC-EPC valve, and the valve
detects the oil pressure only.
a. Emergency
b: Normal
a Emergency pump drive switch (1) is of the
alternative type. If the machine is operated
after the switch is set to "Emergency (a)" even
through the machine is normal, user code
"E02" is displayed on the display.
10 PC130-8
One-touch power maximizing function
1. Pump controller Function

2. Engine controller q The one-touch power maximizing function
3. Machine monitor allows the operator to increases power for a
4. Main relief valve certain time by operating the left knob switch.
5. Fuel control dial q This function is used to increase digging force
6. Fuel supply pump for a certain period of time (e.g., when digging
7. Sensors of the engine up a large rock).
8. 2-stage relief valve switching solenoid q Pressing the L.H. knob switch in P, E, or ATT
9. Hydraulic pump mode increases a hydraulic force by approxi-
9a. Servo mately 8% and horsepower by approximately
9b. LS valve 3%, increasing a digging force.
9c. PC valve At this time, each function is automatically set
10. Oil pressure sensor as shown below.
11. Knob switch
(Work equipment control lever, L.H.) Function Setting
12. Main control valve Engine and pump control
Maching at rated output
12a. Pump merge-divider valve point
12b. Self pressure reducing valve Normal
2-stage relief 31.9 MPa {325 kg/cm²}
13. PC-EPC valve mode
function of
the main One-touch
Input signals
relief valve power max. 34.5 MPa {352 kg/cm²}
a. CAN signal (Note.1) mode
b. PC-EPC valve drive signal Software cut-off function Cancel
c. Solenoid valve change signal
d. Oil pressure sensor signal q These setting are automatically reset after 8.5
e. Throttle signal seconds when the switch is pressed.
f. Fuel supply pump control signal
g. Sensor signals
h. Knob switch signal
Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
PC130-8 11
Auto-decelerator function
1. Pump controller Input and output signals

2. Engine controller a. CAN signal (Note.1)
3. Machine monitor b. Oil pressure sensor signal
4. Fuel control dial c. Oil pressure switch signal
5. Fuel supply pump d. Throttle signal
6. Sensors e. Fuel supply pump control signal
7. Oil pressure sensor f. Sensor signals
8. Oil pressure switch
9. Hydraulic pump Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
10. Control valve
12 PC130-8
Function
q When all the control levers are set to NEU-
TRAL for waiting for a dump track or work, the
engine speed is automatically reduced to a
control speed, and fuel consumption and noise
are lowered.
q When any control lever is operated, the engine
speed returns immediately to the speed that is
set with the fuel control dial.
Operation
When control levers are set in neutral
q If all the control levers are set to NEUTRAL for
4 seconds or more with the engine speed
exceeding approx. 1,400 rpm, the engine
speed lowers down to the control speed
(approx. 1,400 rpm) and is held until the con-
trol lever is operated again.
When any control lever is operated

q With the engine speed at the control speed
(approx. 1,400 rpm), when any control lever is
operated, the engine speed increases immedi-
ately to the speed that is set with the fuel con-
trol dial.
A : All work equipment control levers in “NATU-

RAL“
B : All work equipment control levers “OPER-
ATED“
C: Fuel control dial set speed
D: Engine control speed (approx. 1,400 rpm)
E : 4 sec.
F : Max. 2 sec.
G: Max. 0.2 sec.
PC130-8 13
Engine automatic warm-up function

2. Battery relay a. CAN signal (Note.1)
3. Fusible link b. PC-EPC valve drive signal
4. Fuse box c. Solenoid valve GND
5. Resistor d. Hydraulic oil temperature signal
6. Pump controller e. Throttle signal
7. Engine controller f . Fuel supply pump control signal
8. Machine monitor g. Sensor signals
9. Emergency pump drive switch
10. Fuel control dial Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
12. Sensors
13. Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
14. Hydraulic pump
14a. Servo
14b. LS valve
14c. PC valve
15. Control valve
16. PC-EPC valve
14 PC130-8
Function
q Raises the engine speed automatically to warm up the engine if the coolant temperature is low after
start-up of the engine.
Operational conditions (all required) Operation
Coolant temperature: Max. 55 °C o
Fuel control dial: Max. 1,300 rpm Engine speed: 1,300 rpm
All control lever position: Neutral
Release conditions (either one required) Release

Coolant temperature: Min. 55 °C and All control lever position: Neutral o
Engine speed: Any
Fuel control dial: Min. 1,300 rpm and All control lever position: Neutral
Overheat prevention function

a See “Engine automatic warm-up function“ for system circuit diagram.
q Prevents overheat to protect the engine by reducing load on the pump if the coolant or hydraulic oil tem-
perature becomes too high.
Operational conditions Operation and actions taken Release conditions
Coolant temperature: Max. 95°C
Working mode: P, ATT Engine speed: Remains same
Coolant temperature: Min. 95°C o • Sends torque control signal to o Hydraulic oil temperature: Max. 95°C
• The original conditions are restored if
Hydraulic oil temperature: Min. 95°C lower the pump absorption torque
above requirements are met (auto-
Traveling status check: OFF and reduce the engine load. matic restoration).

Working mode: P, ATT
Coolant temperature: Min. 98°C o • Engine speed: Remains same o Hydraulic oil temperature: Max. 98°C
Hydraulic oil temperature: Min. 98°C • Travel speed: Down
Traveling status check: ON
matic restoration).
Working mode: P, ATT Engine speed: Remains same Coolant temperature: Max. 100°C
Coolant temperature: Min. 100°C o • Sends torque control signal to o Hydraulic oil temperature: Max. 100°C
Hydraulic oil temperature: Min. 100°C lower the pump absorption torque
Traveling status check: Any and reduce the engine load. matic restoration).

Engine speed: Remains same Coolant temperature: Max. 102°C
Working mode: P, ATT, E, B
Coolant temperature: Min. 102°C o Alarm monitor: ON o Hydraulic oil temperature: Max. 102°C
Hydraulic oil temperature: Min. 102°C
• Sends torque control signal to • The original conditions are restored if
lower the pump absorption torque above requirements are met (auto-
Traveling status check: Any
and reduce the engine load. matic restoration).

Hydraulic oil temperature: Max. 105°C
Working mode: Any
Coolant temperature: Min. 105°C o Engine speed: Low idle o Fuel control dial: Returns to low idle
Alarm monitor: ON (MIN) position.
Hydraulic oil temperature: Min. 105°C
Alarm monitor: Sounds • The original conditions are restored if
Traveling status check: Any
above requirements are met (man-
ual restoration).
PC130-8 15
Turbocharger protection function

a See “Engine automatic warm-up function“ for system circuit diagram.
q When the engine is started at low temperatures and the engine speed is increased sharply, the turbo-
charger may be seized. Controlling the engine speed prevents this problem.
q The duration of turbocharger protection depends on the coolant temperature.
Operational conditions Operating
o Turbocharger protection
Engine oil pressure: Max. 50 kPa {0.51 kg/cm2}
(See the following figure)
A: Start engine
B: Duration of turbocharger protection (approx. 0
– 20 sec)
C: Modulating time (approx. 1.5 sec)
D: 500 rpm
E: 1,100 rpm
F: 2,300 rpm (*1)
*1. Working mode: Mode P

Fuel control dial: Full rotation position
Travel lever operated
16 PC130-8
Swing control function

2. Battery relay a. Swing holding brake release signal
3. Fusible link b. Swing holding brake solenoid valve drive sig-
4. Fuse box nal
5. Swing holding brake release switch c. CAN signal (Note.1)
6. Swing lock switch d. Solenoid valve GND
7. Pump controller e. Oil pressure switch signal
8. Machine monitor
9. Oil pressure switch Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
10. Hydraulic pump
11. Control valve
12. Swing motor
13. Swing holding brake solenoid valve
PC130-8 17
Function
Swing lock
OFF ON
switch
Swing lock and swing holding brake functions
Swing lock
q Turning swing lock switch (1) to “ON“ locks the OFF ON
monitor
swing lock (manual lock) at any position.
Function Swing holding brake Swing lock
q Interlocked with the swing operation, the swing
holding brake (auto lock) prevents hydraulic • When the L.H. work • The swing hold-
drift from occurring after the swing stops. equipment control ing brake works to
q Interlocked with the arm retract operation, the lever is set to NEU- lock the swing.
TRAL, the swing • Even if the L.H.
swing holding brake is released to reduce the holding brake works work equipment
load on the swing equipment during excavation in 5 sec. control lever is
work. • When the L.H. work operated for
Operation equipment control swing, the swing
lever is operated for holding brake
swing or the arm cannot be
lever is operated for released, and no
retract, the swing swing is possible.
holding brake is
released allowing
free swing opera-
tion.
A: L.H. work equipment control lever “SWING“

(Swing holding brake “RELEASE“)
B: L.H. work equipment control lever “NEUTRAL“
C: Swing holding brake “OPERATED“
D: 5 sec
18 PC130-8
Swing holding brake release function

q If the controller gets out of order and no swing
is possible because the swing holding brake
does not work properly, operating swing hold-
ing brake release switch (2) releases the swing
holding brake and allows swing operation.
a: Release (Emergency)
b: Normal
Swing
holding Release Normal
brake (when the controller (when the controller
release is out of order) is in order)
switch
Swing
lock ON OFF ON OFF
switch
Swing
Swing
Swing holding Swing
Swing holding
lock brake is lock
brake brake
works. released. works.
works.
(*1)
*1: Hydraulic brake by the safety valve.
a Even if the swing holding brake release switch

is set to “RELEASE“, the swing holding brake
is not be released while the swing lock switch
is set to “ON“.
a When the swing holding brake is released,
only the hydraulic brake with the safety valve is
effective for swing. So, note that, when the
swing stops on a slope, a hydraulic drift may
occur.
a Swing holding brake release switch (2) is of the
alternator type. When the switch is turned to
“RELEASE (a)“ position, the swing lock moni-
tor in the machine monitor will blink.
PC130-8 19
Travel control function

2. Engine controller a. Oil pressure sensor signal
3. Machine monitor b. CAN signal (Note.1)
4. Fuel control dial c. Pump merge-divider solenoid valve drive sig-
5. Fuel supply pump nal
6. Sensors d. Travel junction solenoid valve drive signal
7. Pump oil pressure sensor e. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve drive
8. Oil pressure sensor signal
9. Travel alarm buzzer f . Oil pressure sensor signal
10. Hydraulic pump g. Travel alarm buzzer operation signal
11. Control valve h. Throttle signal
11a. Pump merge-divider valve i . Fuel supply pump control signal
11b. Self pressure reducing valve j . Sensor signals
11c. Travel junction valve
11d. Pump merge-divider valve Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
12. Travel motor
13. 2nd travel speed select solenoid valve
14. Travel junction solenoid valve
15. Pump merge-divider solenoid valve
20 PC130-8
Function
Travel speed select function

1. Travel speed “Manual“ change
q Turning the travel speed selector switch
“Hi“ and “Lo“ changes the motor capacity
and allows the machine to select travel
speed.
Lo (low Hi (high
Travel speed selector switch
speed) speed)
Motor capacity (cc/rev.) 79.1 44.2
Travel speed (km/h) 2.9 5.5
Travel motor swash plate angle Max. Min. A: 17.7 MPa {180 kg/cm²}
B: 32.4 MPa {330 kg/cm²}
2. Travel speed “Automatic“ change C: Min. 0.1 sec.
1) Automatic selection corresponding to D: Min. 0.02 sec.
engine speed
q When the engine speed is lowered to Pump control function during travel
below 1,500 rpm with the fuel control a See “Pump and engine mutual control func-
dial, the travel speed changes to “Lo“ tion“ for details.
automatically.
Travel junction function
2) Automatic selection corresponding to q When the travel lever is operated, detects the
pump discharge pressure pilot pressure and judges whether it is for
q If the travel pressure increases on an straight-travel or for steering.
uphill with the travel speed selector q For straight-travel, a signal is sent to the travel
switch in “Hi“, and the travel hydraulic junction solenoid valve, controlling the pump
pressure exceeding 32.4 MPa {330 flow between the right and left to be equal, to
kg/cm²} continues for 0.02 seconds or prevent travel deviation and improve straight
more, the travel motor capacity is line stability.
switched to low speed (corresponds q When steering, the signal to the travel junction
to “Lo“) automatically (the travel solenoid valve is cut-off, separating the pump
speed switch position is remain “Hi“). flow between the right and left, to improve
q If the travel pressure decreases on a steering stability.
flat or downhill with low speed
(caused by the automatic gear shift- Pump merge-divider function
ing due to high pressure), and the q When the travel lever is operated, detects the
travel hydraulic pressure below 17.7 pilot pressure and judges if it is for straight-
MPa {180 kg/cm²} continues for 0.1 travel.
seconds or more, the travel motor q For straight-travel, a signal is sent to the pump
capacity is switched back to the set merge-divider solenoid valve, dividing the
speed of “Hi“ automatically. pump delivery, to improve travel performance.
PC130-8 21
PPC lock function
1. Battery Function
2. Battery relay q Interlocked with the lock lever, the PPC lock
3. Fusible link switch is turned “OFF“ when operating the lock
4. Fuse box lever to “LOCK“ position.
5. Starting switch q When the PPC lock switch is turned “OFF“, the
6. Lock lever current to the PPC lock solenoid valve is cut-
7. PPC lock switch off, causing neither the work equipment nor
8. Hydraulic pump machine moves even if levers or pedal is oper-
9. Control valve ated.
22 PC130-8
Oil flow adjuster function for attachment


2. Engine controller a. Oil flow adjuster EPC valve drive signal for
3. Machine monitor attachment
4. Fuel control dial b. Oil pressure switch signal
5. Fuel supply pump c. CAN signal (Note.1)
6. Sensors d. PC-EPC valve drive signal
7. Emergency pump drive switch e. Solenoid valve GND
8. Oil pressure switch f . Throttle signal
9. Hydraulic pump g. Fuel supply pump control signal
9a. Servo h. Sensor signals
9b. LS valve
9c. PC valve Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
10. Control valve
10a. Pump merge-divider valve Function
10b. Self pressure reducing valve q Setting of the working mode and oil flow rate
11. PPC lock solenoid valve on the machine monitor controls the oil flow to
12. Oil flow adjuster EPC valve for attachment the attachment when the attachment control
13. PC-EPC valve pedal is depressed all the way.
14. Attachment circuit selector valve
15. Attachment
PC130-8 23
System components
Engine controller
Input and output signals

q The following is the list of the symbols used for
signal classification in the input/output signal
chart.
A: Power supply
B: Input
C: Ground/shield/return
D: Output
E: Communication
DTP-4P [CN-CE03]
Signal
Pin No. Signal name
classification
1 GND C
2 NC —
3 Constant power supply (24 V) A
4 NC —
24 PC130-8
DRC-60P(1) [CN-CE01]
Signal Signal
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
classification classification
1 NC — 31 NC —
2 NC — 32 Engine oil pressure switch B
3 NC — 33 NC —
4 NC — 34 NC —
5 NC — 35 NC —
6 NC — 36 Sensor power supply (5 V) A
7 NC — 37 Camshaft speed sensor B
8 NC — 38 NC —
9 NC — 39 NC —
10 Fuel supply pump regulator (+) B 40 NC —
11 Boost temperature sensor B 41 NC —
12 NC — 42 Crankshaft speed sensor B
13 NC — 43 NC —
14 Fuel supply pump regulator (–) C 44 Crankshaft speed sensor GND C
15 NC — 45 Injector #2 (+) D
16 NC — 46 NC —
17 NC — 47 Coolant temperature sensor GND C
18 NC — 48 Sensor GND C
19 Boost pressure sensor B 49 Coolant temperature sensor D
20 Ambient pressure sensor B 50 NC —
21 NC — 51 Injector #4 (–) C
22 NC — 52 NC —
23 NC — 53 Injector #1 (–) C
24 NC — 54 NC —
25 NC — 55 Injector #3 (+) D
26 Crankshaft speed sensor (5 V) A 56 Injector #4 (+) D
27 NC — 57 Injector #1 (+) D
28 NC — 58 Injector #2 (–) C
29 Common rail pressure sensor B 59 Injector #3 (–) C
30 NC — 60 NC —
DRC-60P(2) [CN-CE02]
Signal Signal
Pin No. Signal name classification Pin No. Signal name classification
1 CAN(+) E 31 NC —
2 NC — 32 Engine controller power cut-off relay C
GND
3 NC — 33 NC —
4 NC — 34 NC —
5 NC — 35 Fuel control dial (+) B
6 NC — 36 NC —
7 NC — 37 NC —
8 NC — 38 NC —
9 NC — 39 NC —
10 NC — 40 NC —
11 NC — 41 NC —
12 NC — 42 NC —
13 NC — 43 NC —
14 NC — 44 NC —
15 NC — 45 Starting switch ACC signal B
16 NC — 46 NC —
17 NC — 47 NC —
18 NC — 48 NC —
19 NC — 49 NC —
20 NC — 50 NC —
21 CAN (–) E 51 NC —
22 NC — 52 NC —
23 NC — 53 NC —
24 NC — 54 NC —
25 NC — 55 Engine controller power cut-off relay D
26 NC — 56 NC —
27 Fuel control dial (5 V) A 57 NC —
28 Fuel control dial (–) C 58 NC —
29 NC — 59 NC —
30 NC — 60 NC —
PC130-8 25
Pump controller
26 PC130-8

AMP-81P [CN-C01]
Pin No. Signal name Input/output Pin No. Signal name Input/output
signal signal
1 Constant power supply (24 V) Input 41 Knob switch Input
2 GND Input 42 NC —
3 Window washer Output 43 Starting switch ACC signal Input
4 Constant power supply (24 V) Input 44 GND (pulse signal) Input
5 GND Input 45 CAN_H Input/output
6 NC — 46 GND (analog signal) Input
7 NC — 47 NC —
8 Potentiometer power supply (5 V) Output 48 NC —
9 Potentiometer power supply (5 V) Output 49 Pump oil pressure sensor Input
10 NC — 50 NC —
11 Arm angle sensor Input 51 Blade LOWER oil pressure sensor Input
12 Boom cylinder head oil pressure sensor Input 52 Attachment oil pressure switch Input
13 L.H. travel REVERSE oil pressure sensor Input 53 Boom RAISE oil pressure switch Input
14 Boom LOWER oil pressure switch Input 54 NC —
15 Arm OUT pressure switch Input 55 R.H. travel FORWARD oil pressure sensor Input
16 Swing oil pressure switch Input 56 Wiper motor reverse (W) Input
17 Arm IN pressure switch Input 57 Cab front window open limit switch Input
18 GND (analog signal) Input 58 Model select 4 Input
19 Swing lock switch Input 59 NC —
20 NC — 60 Starting switch C signal Input
21 Model select 2 Input 61 NC —
22 NC — 62 External start signal Input
23 NC — 63 NC —
24 Starting switch ACC signal Input 64 CAN_L Input/output
25 NC — 65 NC —
26 NC — 66 NC —
27 NC — 67 Boom angle sensor Input
28 NC — 68 NC —
29 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Input 69 L.H. travel FORWARD oil pressure sensor Input
30 NC — 70 GND (analog signal) Input
31 Boom cylinder bottom oil pressure sensor Input 71 NC —
32 Blade RAISE oil pressure sensor Input 72 NC —
33 NC — 73 Bucket CURL oil pressure switch Input
34 Bucket DUMP oil pressure switch Input 74 NC —
35 NC — 75 Wiper motor stop (P) Input
36 R.H. travel REVERSE oil pressure sensor Input 76 Blade specification signal Input
37 GND (digital signal) Input 77 Model select 3 Input
38 Swing holding brake cancel switch Input 78 Overload alarm enable signal Input
39 Model select 5 Input 79 Starting switch ACC signal Input
40 Model select 1 Input 80 NC —
81 NC —
AMP-40P [CN-C02]
Input/output Input/output
signal signal
82 NC — 102 NC —
83 NC — 103 NC —
84 NC — 104 NC —
85 NC — 105 NC —
86 NC — 106 NC —
87 2nd travel speed select solenoid Output 107 Travel and swing alarm buzzer Output
88 NC — 108 Battery relay drive Output
89 NC — 109 NC —
90 NC — 110 Travel junction solenoid Output
91 NC — 111 NC —
92 NC — 112 Pump merge-divider solenoid Output
93 NC — 113 NC —
94 Bucket DUMP operation lock solenoid Output 114 Wiper motor (–) Output
95 NC — 115 GND (solenoid) Input
96 PC-EPC Output 116 Solenoid power supply Input
97 Oil flow adjuster EPC for attachment Output 117 GND (solenoid) Input
98 NC — 118 Solenoid power supply Input
99 NC — 119 Wiper motor (+) Output
100 NC — 120 GND (solenoid) Input
101 Swing holding brake solenoid Output 121 Solenoid power supply Input
PC130-8 27
Fuel control dial
1. Knob
2. Dial
3. Spring
4. Ball
5. Potentiometer
6. Connector
Function
q Installed in the right console box. Potentiome-
ter (5) is installed inside knob (1). Turning knob
(1) causes potentiometer (5) shaft to rotate.
q This rotation changes the resistance of the
variable resistor within potentiometer (5), and a
throttle signal is sent to the controller.
q The hatched areas in the graph are error
detection areas. If the throttle voltage is within
the area, the engine drops down to low idle.
28 PC130-8
Resistor
1. Resistance
2. Connector
Specifications
For PC-EPC valve: 30 z
Function
q Sends an electric current to each EPC valve
that is appropriate for each condition, when the
emergency pump drive switch is turned to
“ON“.
a No electric current flows in the normal condi-
tion.
PC130-8 29
Engine oil pressure switch
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Specifications
Contact type: Normal close
Function
q Installed in the cylinder block. Detects engine
oil pressure, and turns the switch “ON“ when
the pressure goes below the specified value.
30 PC130-8
PPC oil pressure switch
1. Plug
2. Switch
3. Connector
Specifications
Contact type: Normal open
Operating pressure to make contact point ON:
490 ± 98.1 kPa {5.0 ± 1.0 kg/cm2}
Operating pressure to break contact point OFF:
294 ± 49.0 kPa {3.0 ± 0.5 kg/cm2}
Function
q Installed (8 places) in the connecting valve.
Detects the PPC oil pressure when each actu-
ator is operated, and turns the switch “ON“
when the pressure exceeds the specified
value.
PC130-8 31
32 PC130-8
Machine monitor system 1
1. Machine monitor Outline

2. Battery q The monitor system keeps the operator
3. Pump controller informed of all machine functions, by monitor-
4. Engine controller ing the machine conditions using the sensors
5. Air conditioner controller and switches installed in various parts of the
6. KOMTRAX terminal machine and processing them instantly to dis-
7. Sensors, switches play on the machine monitor.
8. Wiper motor, window washer motor The information displayed on the machine
monitor falls into the following types:
Input and output signals 1. Alarm when an error occurs
a. Power supply 2. Machine status display (coolant tempera-
b. CAN signal (Note.1) ture, hydraulic oil temperature and fuel
c. Sensor and switch signals level)
d. Drive signal q The switches on the machine monitor controls
the machine.
Note.1: CAN is cf. 6 page.
PC130-8 33
Machine monitor
Outline Precautions on the machine monitor display

q The machine monitor provides monitor display q The LCD panel may has black points (points
function, mode selection function and switch which are not lighted) and bright points (points
function of the electrical equipment etc. Also it which do not go off) for the reason of its char-
provides an alarm buzzer. acteristics. If the number of the bright points
q The monitor panel has a CPU (Central Pro- and black points does not exceed 10, it does
cessing Unit) in it to process, display, and out- not indicate a failure or a defect.
put the information. q When the engine is started, the battery voltage
q The machine monitor consists of display and may drop suddenly depending on ambient
switches: the display is of LCD type, and the temperatures and battery conditions. In this
switches are of flat sheet switch. case, the machine monitor may go off for a
q If an error occurs in the machine monitor itself, moment. However, this phenomenon is not a
controller or wiring circuit between monitor and failure.
controller, the monitor does not display prop- q After the machine monitor is used continu-
erly. ously, blue points (points which do not go off)
may be seen on the black background. This
phenomenon does not indicate a failure or a
defect.
Blue points can never be a problem as the
screen has usually blue or white background.
(White in the LCD is made up of red, green and
blue.)
34 PC130-8

070-18P(1) [CN-CM01]
signal signal
1 Constant power supply (24 V) Input 10 Engine coolant temperature Input
2 Constant power supply (24 V) Input 11 Battery level Input
3 GND (constant power supply) — 12 GND (machine analog signal) —
4 GND (constant power supply) — 13 Lamp switch Input
5 Wake-up Input/output 14 Starting switch ACC signal Input
Starting motor cut-out relay (for per-
6 Output 15 Starting switch C signal Input
sonal code)
7 GND (machine signal) — 16 Preheat Input
8 Hydraulic oil temperature Input 17 USB power supply (5 V) Output
9 Fuel level Input 18 GND (USB power supply) —
070-12P(1) [CN-CM02]
signal signal
1 Engine oil pressure sensor Input 7 GND (machine signal) —
2 Engine oil level sensor Input 8 CAN terminal signal —
3 Radiator coolant level sensor Input 9 CAN_H Input/output
4 Air cleaner clogging sensor Input 10 CAN_L Input/output
5 Swing lock switch Input 11 USB data (–) Input/output
6 Spare Input 12 USB data (+) Input/output
070-18P(2) [CN-CM03]
signal signal
For communication terminal, RS232C For communication terminal, RS232C
1 Input 10 Input
CD CTS
For communication terminal, RS232C For communication terminal, RS232C
2 Input 11 Input
RXD RI
For communication terminal, RS232C GND (communication terminal power
3 — 12 —
SG supply)
GND (communication terminal con- Communication terminal status signal
4 — 13 Input
trol signal) CH1
Communication terminal selection Communication terminal power sup-
5 Input 14 Output
signal ply control signal
For communication terminal, RS232C Communication terminal control sig-
6 Output 15 Output
RTS nal CH1
For communication terminal, RS232C Communication terminal control sig-
7 Output 16 Output
TXD nal CH2
For communication terminal, RS232C Communication terminal status signal
8 Output 17 Input
DTR CH2
For communication terminal, RS232C Communication terminal power sup-
9 Input 18 Output
DSR ply (12 V)
070-12P(2) [CN-CM04]
signal signal
GND (peripheral equipment power
1 — 7 Reserved —
supply)
2 Peripheral equipment control signal Output 8 Reserved —
GND (for peripheral equipment,
3 — 9 Reserved —
RS232C)
4 For peripheral equipment, RS232C TXD Output 10 Reserved —
For peripheral equipment, RS232C
5 Input 11 Reserved —
RXD
Peripheral equipment power supply
6 Reserved — 12 Output
(12 V)
B60-8P [CN-CM05]
signal signal
1 Camera power supply (8 V) Output 5 GND (Camera power supply) —
2 Camera NTSC signal 1 Input 6 GND (Camera signal 1) —
PC130-8 35
Display
A: Normal operation screen

B: All indicators light-up screen
q When monitor items (14) to (18) are faulty after starting the engine, monitor items are displayed on
the screen in chronological order from the upper left.
q If the hydraulic oil temperature goes High or Low while the hydraulic oil temperature gauge is dis-
played at the center of the screen, the screen displays only hydraulic oil temperature monitor (2b).
C: Screen with maintenance interval reminder
36 PC130-8
No. Classification Display item Description Remarks

Display Tempera- Background
location ture (°C) color
W1 105 Red • Indicates corresponding temperature
W2 102 Red range.
1a Gauge (*1)
W3 100 Blue • Alarm buzzer sounds when the temper-
Coolant tem-
perature ature exceeds 105°C.
W4 85 Blue
• If the monitor background appears
W5 60 Blue
white, warm-up the engine.
W6 30 White
1b Caution See the column “Gauge“.
Display Tempera- Background
location ture (°C) color
• Indicates corresponding temperature
H1 105 Red
range.
H2 102 Red • Alarm buzzer sounds when the temper-
2a Gauge (*1)
Hydraulic oil H3 100 Blue ature exceeds 105°C.
temperature H4 85 Blue • If the monitor background appears
H5 40 Blue white, warm-up the hydraulic compo-
H6 20 White nents.
Display Background
Quantity (l)
location color
F1 198 Blue
F2 148 Blue
3a Gauge (*1) F3 123 Blue • Indicates corresponding fuel level.
Fuel level
F4 84 Blue
F5 66 Blue
F6 36 Red
Segment Load level • Indicates average load per minute on a
Light to scale of 1 to 10.
4 ECO gauge Green 1–8
medium (Indicates when “Default (ECO display
Orange 9,10 Heavy setting)“ of the service mode is “ON“.)
• Indicates accumulated engine operat-
Service meter 00000 h – 99999 h ing hours (the alternator is generating).
5 (F4 switch changes for clock display.)
• 12-hour display (AM/PM) • Displays time.
Clock
• 24-hour display (F4 switch changes for service meter.)
Background
Status (If KOMTRAX is equipped.)
color
6 Message • Displays message status.
Green There is unread message.
(OFF when no message is available.)
Blue There is unsent message.
Light ON: ON • Indicates air conditioner and air blower
7 Air conditioner
Light OFF: OFF operating status.
INT: Intermittent
• Indicates front glass wiper operating
8 Wiper ON: Continuous
Pilot Light OFF: Stop status.
Swing lock Swing hold-

ing brake Monitor
switch
release display
switch
9 Swing lock OFF OFF OFF • Indicates swing lock operating status.
ON OFF ON
OFF ON Blink
ON ON Blink
*1: If the gauge signal is not available due to disconnection of CAN communication line, the gauge pointer
goes off.
PC130-8 37
No. Classification Display item Description Remarks

Elapsed time after turning
Monitor
the starting switch to
display
“HEAT (preheat)“.
Preheat 0 – 30 sec. ON • Indicates preheat operating status.
30 – 40 sec. Blink
10
40 sec. or more OFF
One-touch power max. Monitor
One-touch switch display Goes off after about 8.5 seconds if switch
power max. While pressed ON is kept pressed.
Pilot While released OFF
Auto-decelera- Light ON: ON • Indicates auto-decelerator operating
11
tor Light OFF: OFF status.
P: Heavy-duty operation
E: Low-fuel consumption operation
12 Working mode L: Fine operation • Displays working mode.
B: Breaker operation
ATT: Compound attachment operation
Lo: Low speed
13 Travel speed • Displays travel speed setting.
Hi: High speed
• When an error is detected with the
Light ON: Abnormal range (below the
(*2) engine running, the monitor lights up on
14 specified value)
Engine oil level the screen and the alarm buzzer
Light OFF: Normal range
sounds at the same time.
(*2) Light ON: Abnormal range (below the • When an error is detected with the
15 Engine oil specified value) engine stopped, the monitor lights up
pressure Light OFF: Normal range on the screen.
Light ON: Defective battery charge • When an error is detected with the
(*2)
16 (Charge voltage < Battery voltage) engine running, the monitor lights up on
Battery level
Light OFF: Normal range the screen.
• When an error is detected with the
(*2) Light ON: Abnormal range (below the
engine running, the monitor lights up on
17 Caution Radiator cool- specified value)
ant level Light OFF: Normal range the screen and the alarm buzzer
sounds at the same time.
(*2) • When an error is detected with the
Light ON: Abnormal range
18 Air cleaner engine running, the monitor lights up on
Light OFF: Normal range
clogging the screen.
Background
Status
color • The display changes depending on the
There is a maintenance time to/after the maintenance.
Maintenance item which is 30 hours or • After the starting switch is turned “ON“,
19 Yellow
interval less left before next main- the monitor turns ON if the monitor
tenance. light-up conditions are met, and then
There is a maintenance turns OFF in 30 seconds.
Red
overdue item.
*2: Included in the star-up check. After the staring switch is turned “ON“, the monitor turns ON for 2 sec-
onds, and changes to a normal operation screen if no error is found.
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39
Switches
No. Name Function Operation

Turns the auto-decelerator function ON/ • When the working mode is in “L“, the auto-
Auto-decelerator
OFF. decelerator does not work.
1 switch
Light ON: ON
[Numeric keypad: 1] OFF io ON
Light OFF: OFF
P: Heavy-duty operation
(*1) Working mode E: Low-fuel consumption operation
Displays the working mode selector
2 selector switch L: Fine operation
screen.
[Numeric keypad: 2] B: Breaker operation
ATT: Compound attachment operation
Travel speed selec- Changes the travel speed.
3 tor switch Lo light ON: Low speed Lo (low speed) io Hi (high speed)
[Numeric keypad: 3] Hi light ON: High speed
Stops the alarm buzzer. • Stops the alarm buzzer.
Buzzer cancel switch
4 (Some alarm buzzer does not stop even if • The alarm buzzer resumes when another
[Numeric keypad: 4]
the switch is pressed.) error is detected.
Operates the front glass wiper.
o INT o ON o OFF o
Wiper switch INT: Intermittent
5 I (Intermittent) (Continuous) (Stop) O
[Numeric keypad: 5] ON: Continuous
i i i
Light OFF: Stop
ON: Washer fluid is sprayed and wiper
works continuously.
[When wiper is not working]
Window washer OFF: Wiper works twice and stops after the
6 switch Sprays washer fluid onto the front glass. switch is released.
[Numeric keypad: 6] [When wiper is working intermittently]
OFF: Wiper works twice continuously and
returns to intermittent operation after
the switch is released.
*1: When the working mode is changed, the auto-decelerator function turns “ON“.
40 PC130-8
No. Name Function Operation

• The air flow increases immediately after
Fan switch (Up)
7 Controls the fan speed of the air condi- the air conditioner adjustment screen
[Numeric keypad: 7]
tioner in 6 levels. appears.
(Low, Medium 1, Medium 2, Medium 3, • The air flow decreases immediately after
7a Fan switch (Down) Medium 4, High)
the air conditioner adjustment screen
appears.
Temperature control • The temperature control increases immedi-
8 switch (Up) ately after the air conditioner adjustment
[Numeric keypad: 8] Controls the temperature inside the cab. screen appears.
Temperature control (18.0°C – 32.0°C: Aailable at every 0.5°C) • The temperature control decreases imme-
8a switch (Down) diately after the air conditioner adjustment
[Numeric keypad: 0] screen appears.
• Automatically controls the fan speed, air
outlet port, internal/external air flow accord-
(*2) Auto switch Auto-runs the air conditioner and air
9 ing to the temperature setting, immediately
[Numeric keypad: 9] blower. AUTO light ON: Auto run
after the air conditioner adjustment screen
appears.
• Switches to the air conditioner adjustment
Turns the air conditioner ON/OFF. screen, and pressing it again switches ON/
(*3) Air conditioner
10 AC ON lights-up: Manual operation OFF.
switch
Light OFF: Stop
OFF io ON
FRESH/RECIRC screen, and pressing it again switches
11 Changes the FRESH/RECIRC. internal/external air flow.
selector switch
RECIRC io FRESH
Selects the air vent mode from 6 modes. screen, and pressing it again switches air
1. Front outlet mode.
2. Front and rear
• Mode 1, 5 and 6 are not available with auto
12 Vent selector switch 3. Front and rear-foot
4. Foot mode.
5. Foot and defroster o 1 o 2 o 3 o 4 o 5o 6 o
6. Defroster I O
i i i i i i i
Turns the fan and air conditioner OFF.
13 OFF switch • Turns the fan and air conditioner OFF.
Light OFF: OFF
14a Guidance icon
a See “Guidance icon and function switch.“
14b Function switch
*2: When the temperature is set at 18.0°C or 32.0°C, the fan speed is kept at “High“. Even if the set tem-
perature is reached, the fan speed remains the same.
*3: When the fan is set at Stop, the air conditioner does not start even if the switch is pressed.
PC130-8 41
Guidance icon and function switch

q Functions available with the function switch depend on the guidance icon displayed above the switch.
q No function is available if no guidance icon appears above the function switch.
q The following is the list of guidance icons and the functions displayed above the function switches.
Guidance
Function switch Item Function
icon
1 Clear Clears selected/displayed item.
Moves selection down one page.
2 Move selection
(To the top page from the bottom page.)
3 Set Sets function.
F1 Starts function.
4 Start (Used for starting measurement of spilt fuel consump-
tion.)
Stops function.
5 Stop (Used for stopping measurement of spilt fuel con-
sumption.)
Sets selected item back to default.
1 Default
(Used for screen adjustment.)
F2 Moves selection up one page.
2 Move selection
(To the bottom page from the top page.)
3 Clear Clears selected/displayed item.
1 Camera image Switches to camera image.
Moves selection down one item.
2 Move selection (To the top item from the bottom item.) Releases hold-
F3
ing of the monitor.
Moves selection to the left.
3 Move selection
(To the rightmost item from the leftmost item.)
1 Switching clock/service meter Switches clock/service meter display.
Moves selection up one item.
2 Move selection (To the bottom item from the top item.) Holds the mon-
F4
itor.
Moves selection to the right.
3 Move selection
(To the leftmost item from the rightmost item.)
42 PC130-8
Guidance
Function switch Item Function
icon
1 Selecting maintenance screen Selects maintenance screen.
F5
2 Return Returns to the previous screen or condition.
1 Selecting user mode screen Selects user mode screen.
F6
2 Fix Fixes selected/displayed item.
PC130-8 43
Operator mode function

q The functions in this mode are displayed in normal operation. Display and setting of these functions are
available from the operator's switch operations.
Display and setting of some functions require special operation of the switch.
q Items available in the operator mode are as follows:
Category Display order (*2)
Item
(*1) W X Y Z
Display of KOMATSU logo 1 1 1 1
Display of inputting password 2 — — —
Display of start-up check 3 2 2 2
Display of warning after start-up check — — 3 —
A
Display of overdue maintenance — — — 3
Display of check of working mode and travel speed 4 3 4 4
Display of normal operation screen 5 4 5 5
Display of end screen
Selection of auto-decelerator
Selection of working mode
Selection of travel speed
Operation to stop alarm buzzer
Operation of windshield wiper
Operation of windshield washer
Operation of air conditioner
Operation to display camera mode
B Operation to display clock/service meter
Check of maintenance information
Setting and display of user mode
• Breaker/attachment setting
• Display of message (including KOMTRAX messages for user)
• Screen adjustment
• Clock adjustment
• Language setting
• Economy mode adjustment
Display of energy-saving guidance
C Display of caution monitor
Display of user code and failure code
Function of checking display of LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
D Function of checking service meter
Function of changing attachment/maintenance password
*1: The items available in the operator mode fall into the following categories.
A: Display from the time starting switch is turned “ON“ until the ordinary screen appears. Display after
the starting switch is turned “OFF“.
B: Display when the switch of machine monitor is operated.
C: Display when a certain condition is satisfied
D: Display when special switch operation is necessary.
*2: For the category A, the order in which items are displayed varies depending on the setting and condi-
tions of the machine as follows:
W: When the engine start lock is set on
X: When the engine start lock is set off
Y: When an error is detected during start-up check.
Z: When a maintenance overdue is detected.
a For how to operate the operator mode functions, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual or “Spe-
cial functions of machine monitor“ in Testing and adjusting.
a For how to set the engine start lock on/off, see “Password setting/cancel manual“.
44 PC130-8
Oil flow setting for breaker Oil flow setting for attachment
q Oil flow for the breaker can be changed in the q Oil flow for the compound attachment can be
“Breaker/attachment setting“ of the user mode. changed in the “Breaker/attachment setting“ of
q Oil flow level can be set as follows: the user mode.
q Oil flow level can be set as follows:
Oil flow level Quantity (l/min) Remarks
1 60 Oil flow level Quantity (l/min) Remarks
2 70 1 30
3 80 2 85
4 90 3 105
5 100 4 130
6 110 5 155
7 120 6 175
8 130 Default 7 200
9 140 8 225 Default
10 150
11 160 Language setting
12 170
13 180
14 190
15 200
q The language used in the machine monitor can

be changed in the “Language setting“ of the
user mode.
q The available languages are as follows:
English, Japanese, Chinese, French, Spanish,
Portuguese, Italian, German, Russian, Turkish,
Indonesian and Thai
PC130-8 45
Service mode function

q The functions in this mode are not accessible from the normal operation screen. Display and setting of
these functions are available by the serviceman's special operations of the switch.
This mode is used for special setting, testing, adjusting or troubleshooting.
q Items available in the service mode are as follows:
Monitoring
Mechanical systems
Abnormality record Electrical systems
Air conditioner system
Maintenance record
Change of maintenance mode
Setting of telephone No.
Working mode with key ON
Selection of units of measure
With/Without attachment
Default
Setting of attachment/maintenance password
Setting of camera
Setting of ECO display
Adjustment Pump absorption torque
Cylinder cut-out operation
No injection cranking
Display of fuel consumption
Setting condition of KOMTRAX terminal
Display of KOMTRAX
Condition of positioning and communication
system setting
KOMTRAX terminal serial number (Model TH300)
Display of KOMTRAX message
a For how to operate the service mode functions, see “Special functions of machine monitor“ in Testing
and adjusting.
46 PC130-8
KOMTRAX system 1
q The KOMTRAX system uses satellite commu-

nication technology.
q This system consists of the KOMTRAX termi-
nal, communication antenna, machine monitor
and GPS antenna.
q This system sends various information of the
machine via wireless communication. It allows
operators of the KOMTRAX to obtain the
machine information from the office and to pro-
vide various services with the customers.
q The information available from the KOMTRAX
system are as follows:
1. Operation map
2. Service meter
3. Machine location
4. Error record
a To provide the services, you need to make an
arrangement for starting the KOMTRAX sys-
tem service separately.
PC130-8 47
KOMTRAX terminal
TH300
1. Communication antenna connection Input and output signals

2. Machine harness connection (AMP-14P)
3. Machine harness connection (AMP-10P) AMP-14P [CN-CK01]
Input/output
Pin No. Signal name
Outline signal
q The KOMTRAX terminal sends various A1 Power supply (5 V) Input
machine information based on the network sig- A2 NC —
nals and input signals obtained through the
A3 NC —
machine monitor, as well as GPS position
d ata , v i a wi r e l e s s c o mm u n i c at i o n. T h e A4 Selection of power supply voltage Output
KOMTRAX terminal can sends information via A5 NC —
communication antenna. A6 NC —
q Conditions of the KOMTRAX terminal can be
A7 GND Input
checked with the “Display of KOMTRAX sys-
tem s etting“ in the ser vic e mode of the A8 GND Input
machine monitor. A9 NC —
q Use of KOMTRAX terminal must be limited for A10 NC —
the countries in which such communication is
A11 NC —
allowed.
A12 NC —
A13 NC —
A14 NC —
AMP-10P [CN-CK02]
Input/output
Pin No. Signal name
signal
B1 RS232C DCD Output
B2 RS232C RXD Output
B3 RS232C TXD Input
B4 RS232C DTR Input
B5 RS232C SGND Input
B6 RS232C DSR Output
B7 NC —
B8 NC —
B9 NC —
B10 NC —
48 PC130-8
Sensor 1
Atmospheric pressure sensor
1. Connector
2. Pressure inlet port
Function
q Installed in the bracket on the side face of the cylinder block. Detects the ambient pressure and outputs
variable voltage.
Boost pressure, temperature sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Function
q Installed in the intake manifold. Detects the boost pressure and boost temperature, and outputs signal
as a variable voltage for pressure, and a resistance change for temperature.
PC130-8 49
Coolant temperature sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Function
q Installed in the water pump. Detects the temperature change and outputs signal as a resistance change.
Crankshaft speed sensor

Camshaft speed sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Function
q The crankshaft speed sensor is installed in the gear of the flywheel, and the camshaft speed sensor is
installed in the gear of the camshaft. Each of the sensors outputs a pulse voltage according to the gear
rotation.
50 PC130-8
Common rail pressure sensor
1. Common rail
2. Sensor
3. Connector
Function
q Installed in the common rail. Detects the fuel pressure and outputs variable voltage.
Engine oil level sensor
1. Connector 3. Float
2. Bracket 4. Switch
Function
q The engine oil level sensor is installed to the side of the oil pan. If the oil level lowers below the specified
level, the float lowers and the switch is turned “OFF“.
PC130-8 51
Fuel level sensor
1. Connector 5. Spring
2. Float 6. Contact
3. Arm 7. Spacer
4. Body
Function
q This sensor is installed on the side face of the fuel tank. The float moves up and down according to the
fuel level.
The float moves the variable resistor through the arm. The resistance changes according to the fuel
level and a signal voltage is generated from the source voltage according to the change of the resis-
tance.
52 PC130-8
Air cleaner clogging sensor
Coolant level sensor
1. Reserve tank
2. Float
3. Sensor
4. Connector
PC130-8 53
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
1. Connector
2. Plug
3. Thermistor
Function
q Installed in the suction pipe of the hydraulic pump. Detects the temperature change and outputs signal
as a resistance change of the thermistor.
Pump oil pressure sensor
1. O-ring Output characteristics

2. Sensor
3. Connector
Function
q The pump oil pressure sensor is installed in the
control valve. Detects the pump discharge
pressure and outputs variable voltage.
54 PC130-8
PPC oil pressure sensor

(For travel operation)
1. O-ring Output characteristics

2. Sensor
3. Connector
Function
q The PPC oil pressure sensor is installed in the
control valve connecting part of the pilot circuit
for travel operation. Detects the pilot pressure
and outputs variable voltage.
PC130-8 55

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
56 PC130-8
SEN04113-02
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
20 Standard value table 1

Standard service value table
Standard value table for engine related parts ................................................................................................. 2
Standard value table for chassis related parts ................................................................................................ 3
PC130-8 1
SEN04113-02 20 Standard value table
Standard value table for engine related parts 1
Applicable model PC130-8
Engine SAA4D95LE-5
Cate- Standard value for

Item Test conditions Unit Service limit value
gory new machine
High idle rpm 2,150 ± 60 —

• Coolant
Engine speed temperature: Low idle rpm 1,100 ± 50 —
operating range
Rated
rpm 2,200 —
speed
At sudden
• Coolant % Max. 30 30
acceleration
Exhaust gas color temperature:
operating range At high idle % Max. 10 20
Intake valve mm 0.35 —

• Normal
Valve clearance
temperature Exhaust
mm 0.50 —
valve
• Oil temperature: 40 – 60°C
Compression MPa Min. 2.9 2.0
• Engine speed: 320 – 360 rpm
pressure {kg/cm2} {Min. 30} {20}
• SAE0W30E0S
• Coolant temperature: operating
kPa Max. 0.98 1.47
Blow-by pressure range
{mmH2O} {Max. 100} {150}
Engine
• Arm IN relief
0.34 – 0.59 0.25
SAE30 Oil
• At sudden {3.5 – 6.0} {2.5}
Oil pressure acceleration 0.29 – 0.49 0.2
SAE10W Oil
(Hydraulic oil MPa {3.0 – 5.0} {2.1}
temperature: {kg/cm2} Min. 0.18 0.15
Min. 80°C) SAE30 Oil
{Min. 1.8} {1.5}
• Low idle
Min. 0.15 0.13
SAE10W Oil
{Min. 1.5} {1.3}
• Whole speed range
Oil temperature °C 80 – 115 120
(inside oil pan)
• Between fan pulley and
alternator pulley
Fan belt tension • Deflection when pressed with mm 6 – 10 —
finger force of approx.
60 N {6.1 kg}
• Between fan pulley and
Air conditioner compressor pulley
compressor belt • Deflection when pressed with mm 12 – 15 12 – 15
tension finger force of approx.
60 N {6.1 kg}
2 PC130-8
Standard value table for chassis related parts 1

Item Test conditions Unit Service limit value
gory new machine
• Hydraulic oil temperature:
Engine speed
45 – 55°C
• Engine oil pressure:
At 1-pump relief rpm 2,050 ± 100 —
Within operating range
• Engine water temperature:
Within operating range
• Center of No
Boom control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
lever knob RAISE, LOWER
• Tip of pedal
Arm control lever • Read max. N o IN, OUT 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
value to end
Travel of control levers
of travel No
Bucket control lever • Engine 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
CURL, DUMP
stopped
No
Swing control lever 85 ± 10 85 ± 10
LEFT, RIGHT mm
N o FORWARD,
Travel control lever REVERSE 115 ± 12 115 ± 12
(LEFT, RIGHT)
Work equipment,
Max. 1.5 Max. 20
swing
Play of control lever
Travel Max. 20 Max. 25
• Engine at high idle 15.7 ± 3.9 Max. 24.5

Boom control lever
Operating effort of control lever
• Oil temperature: 45 – 55°C {1.6 ± 0.4} {Max. 2.5}

• Fit push-pull scale to center of
15.7 ± 3.9 Max. 24.5
Arm control lever control lever knob to test
{1.6 ± 0.4} {Max. 2.5}
• Fit push-pull scale to tip of
control pedal to test 12.7 ± 2.9 Max. 21.6
Bucket control lever • Test max. value to end of travel N {1.3 ± 0.3} {Max. 2.2}
{kg} 12.7 ± 2.9 Max. 21.6
Swing control lever
{1.3 ± 0.3} {Max. 2.2}
24.5 ± 5.9 Max. 39.2
Travel control lever
{2.5 ± 0.6} {Max. 4.0}
74.5 ± 18.6 Max. 107.6
Travel pedal
{7.6 ± 1.9} {Max. 11}
45 – 55°C
• Engine at high idle
MPa 5.9 5.9
Unload pressure • Working mode: P mode
{kg/cm2} {Max. 60} {Max. 60}
• Hydraulic pump output pressure
with all control levers in
NEUTRAL position
Hydraulic pressure
+2.0
• Hydraulic oil In power-max. 34.8 ± 1.0 34.8 –1.0
temperature: mode {355 ± 10} {355 +20
–10 }
Boom relief 45 – 55°C +2.0
31.9 ± 1.0 31.9 –1.0
• Engine at In normal mode
{325 ± 10} {325 +20
–10 }
high idle MPa +2.0
• Pump In power-max. {kg/cm2} 34.8 ± 1.0 34.8 –1.0
discharge mode {355 ± 10} {355 +20
–10 }
Arm relief pressure Target 31.9 ± 1.0
+2.0
31.9 –1.0
• Relieve only In normal mode value
circuit to be {325 ± 10} {325 +20
–10 }
(Range) +2.0
tested In power-max. 34.8 ± 1.0 34.8 –1.0
mode {355 ± 10} {355 +20
–10 }
Bucket relief +2.0
31.9 ± 1.0 31.9 –1.0
In normal mode
{325 ± 10} {325 +20
–10 }
PC130-8 3

gory Item Test conditions Unit Service limit value
new machine
+1.5
• Hydraulic oil temperature: 29.2 ± 1.0 29.2 –2.5
Swing relief
45 – 55°C {298 ± 10} {298 +15
–25 }
• Engine at high idle +2.0
34.8 +0
+2.0
34.8 –1.0
Blade RAISE • Pump discharge pressure {355 +20
+0 } {355 +20
–10 }
• Relieve only circuit to be tested
34.8 ± 1.5 34.8 ± 2.5
Blade LOWER
{355 ± 15} {355 ± 25}
34.8 ± 1.0 34.8 ± 2.0
Travel relief
{355 ± 10} {355 ± 20}
Control circuit source 3.2 ± 0.2 3.2 ± 0.5
Hydraulic pressure
pressure MPa {33 ± 2} {33 ± 5}

2
• Hydraulic oil Control levers at {kg/cm } 3.4 ± 1.0 3.4 ± 1.0
temperature: HOLD {35 ± 10} {35 ± 10}
Servo piston input Target
45 – 55°C
pressure At pump relief value 16.0 ± 1.5 16.0 ± 2.5
• Engine at
high idle (normal actuation) (Range) {163 ± 15} {163 ± 25}
• Hydraulic oil
temperature:
All levers at 2.75 ± 0.98 —
45 – 55°C
HOLD {28 ± 10} {—}
• Engine at
LS differential high idle
pressure a LS differential
pressure = Travel rotating
pump outlet under no load 2.2 ± 0.1 —
port pressure Travel lever at {22.5 ± 1} {—}
– LS pressure half-way position
• For testing posture, see Swing

1
Overrun when 45 – 55°C Deg. 75 ± 10 Max. 90
stopping swing • Stop after swinging one turn (mm) (730 ± 100) (Max. 870)
and test distance that swing
circle moves
• Figure in ( ) shows movement
at outside of swing circle
• For testing posture, see
Swing 1
• Engine at high idle 2.9 ± 0.3 Max. 3.5
90°
{3.5 ± 0.4} (Max. 4.0)
Swing

45 – 55°C
Time taken to start
• Time taken to swing 90° sec.
swing
and 180° from starting
position 4.3 ± 0.4 Max. 6.2
• Figure in ( ) shows time 180°
{5.1 ± 0.5} (Max. 6.4)
when bucket is at rated
load
1
Time taken to swing • Hydraulic oil temperature: sec. 27.3 ± 2 27.3 ± 4
45 – 55°C
• Swing one turn, and test time
taken to swing next 5 turns
4 PC130-8

new machine
2
• Engine stopped
45 – 55°C
• Bucket at rated load
Hydraulic drift of • Set machine on 15° slope, and Deg. 0 0
swing set upper structure at an uphill (mm) (0) (0)
Swing
angle of 45°.
• Make match marks on swing
circle outer race and track
frame.
• Test distance that match marks
move apart after 15 minutes.
Leakage from travel • Hydraulic oil temperature:
l/min Max. 3 Max. 6
motor 45 – 55°C
• Relieve swing circuit.
Travel 1
• Engine at high idle Lo Max. 39.6 Max. 45
Travel speed
45 – 55°C sec.
(without load)
• Raise track on one side at a
time, rotate one turn, then Hi Max. 22.0 Max. 25
test time taken for next 5
turns with no load.
Travel 2
• Engine at high idle Lo Max. 31.0 Max. 35
Travel speed
45 – 55°C sec.
(actual run)
• Run up for at least 10 m,
and test time taken to travel Hi Max. 14.5 Max. 17
next 20 m on flat ground.
Travel
• For testing posture, see Travel

2 and 3
Travel deviation 45 – 55°C mm Max. 150 Max. 220
• Run up for at least 10 m, and
test deviation when traveling
next 20 m on flat ground.
a Use a hard horizontal surface.
• For testing posture, see Travel
4
• Engine stopped
Hydraulic drift of 45 – 55°C
mm 0 0
travel • Stop machine on 12° slope with
sprocket facing straight up the
slope.
• Test the distance the machine
moves in 5 minutes.
PC130-8 5

new machine
Travel
Leakage from travel

45 – 55°C l/min Max. 1.1 Max. 1.7
motor
• Lock shoes and relieve travel
circuit.
Total work • For testing posture, see Work
equipment equipment 1
(hydraulic drift at • Place in above posture and test Max. 460 Max. 700
Hydraulic drift of work equipment
tip of bucket extension or retraction of each

teeth) cylinder and downward
Boom cylinder movement at tip of bucket teeth.
(amount of • Horizontal, flat ground
• Bucket: Rated load (450 kg) Max. 10 Max. 12
retraction of
cylinder) • Levers at HOLD
mm
• Engine stopped
Arm cylinder • Hydraulic oil temperature:
(amount of 45 – 55°C Max. 80 Max. 90
extension of • Start testing immediately after
cylinder) setting.
Bucket cylinder • Test hydraulic drift every 5
(amount of minutes, and judge from results
for 15 minutes. Max. 22 Max. 40
retraction of
Work equipment
cylinder)
Boom • For testing posture, see 3.7 ± 0.3 Max. 4.3
RAISE
Bucket teeth in Work equipment 2 (Until touching (Until touching

contact with • Engine at high idle cushion) cushion)
ground • Hydraulic oil temperature:
I 45 – 55°C
LOWER
O
Cylinder fully 2.6 ± 0.3 Max. 3.2
Work equipment speed
extended
• For testing posture, see 3.2 ± 0.3 Max. 4.0
Arm
IN
Cylinder fully Work equipment 3 (Until touching (Until touching

• Engine at high idle sec. cushion) cushion)
retracted
I 2.7 ± 0.3 Max. 3.7
O
OUT
45 – 55°C (Until touching (Until touching

Fully extended
cushion) cushion)
CURL
Bucket +0.4
Cylinder fully Work equipment 4 2.5 –0.1 Max. 3.4
retracted • Engine at high idle
I • Hydraulic oil temperature:
DUMP
O 45 – 55°C 2.0
+0.3
Max. 2.6
–0.1
Fully extended
6 PC130-8

new machine
• For testing posture, see Work
equipment 5
• Engine at low idle
45 – 55°C
Boom • Fully retract arm and bucket Max. 3 Max. 3
cylinders, then lower boom from
maximum height and test time
taken from point where bucket
contacts ground to point where
chassis rises from ground.
equipment 6
Time lag
45 – 55°C
Arm • Set top surface of boom sec. Max. 2 Max. 2
horizontal, retract bucket
Work equipment
cylinder fully, then extend arm

cylinder and test time taken for
arm to start moving again after
stopping at bottom.
equipment 7
45 – 55°C
Bucket • Set top surface of boom Max. 2 Max. 2
horizontal, retract arm cylinder
fully, then extend bucket
cylinder and test time taken for
bucket to start moving again
after stopping at bottom.
Internal leakage level

Each cylinder 45 – 55°C Max. 3.5 Max. 15
• Circuit to be tested is relieved.
cc/min
Center swivel
Max. 10 Max. 50
joint
PC130-8 7
Pump performance curve
q TVC current: 0.4 A

q Pump speed: At 2,400 rpm (Engine rated speed at 1,800 rpm)
Test pump Discharge Average Standard value for Judgement
Check point discharge pressure of pressure discharge amount standard lower
pressure other pump Q (l/min) limit Q (l/min)
(MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2})
P1 + P2
As desired P1 P2 See graph See graph
2
a As far as possible, bring pump discharge pressure P1 and P2 as close as possible to the average pres-
sure when testing.
The error is large near the point where the graph curves, so avoid testing at this point.
a When testing with the pump mounted on the machine, if it is impossible to set the engine speed to the
specified speed with the fuel control dial, take the pump discharge amount and the engine speed at the
point of test, and use them as a base for calculating the pump discharge amount at the specified speed.
a Pump delivery Q in the graph is the delivery from 1 side of the pump.
8 PC130-8
Posture of machine for testing performance and Travel 2: Travel speed (actual run), travel deviation
test procedure
Swing 1: Swing brake angle, time taken to start
swing, time taken to swing
Travel 3: Travel deviation
Swing 2: Hydraulic drift of swing
Travel 4: Hydraulic drift of travel
Travel 1: Travel speed (without load)
PC130-8 9
Work equipment 1: Hydraulic drift of work Work equipment 4: Bucket speed

equipment
Work equipment 5: Boom time lag

Work equipment 2: Boom speed
Work equipment 6: Arm time lag

Work equipment 3: Arm speed
10 PC130-8
Work equipment 7: Bucket time lag
PC130-8 11

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
12 PC130-8
SEN04114-02
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
30 Testing and adjusting 1

Testing and adjusting, Part 1
Tools for testing, adjusting, and troubleshooting............................................................................................. 3
Sketches of special tools ................................................................................................................................ 8
Testing engine speed ...................................................................................................................................... 9
Testing exhaust temperature......................................................................................................................... 10
Checking exhaust gas color...........................................................................................................................11
Adjusting valve clearance ............................................................................................................................. 12
Testing compression pressure ...................................................................................................................... 14
Testing blow-by pressure .............................................................................................................................. 16
Testing engine oil pressure ........................................................................................................................... 17
Reduced cylinder mode operation ................................................................................................................ 18
No-injection cranking .................................................................................................................................... 18
Handling fuel system parts............................................................................................................................ 19
Releasing residual pressure from fuel system .............................................................................................. 19
Testing fuel pressure..................................................................................................................................... 20
Testing fuel return rate and fuel leakage....................................................................................................... 21
Bleeding air from fuel circuit.......................................................................................................................... 23
PC130-8 1
SEN04114-02 30 Testing and adjusting
Checking fuel circuit for leakage ................................................................................................................... 24

Testing and adjusting alternator belt tension................................................................................................. 25
Checking and adjusting air conditioner compressor belt tension .................................................................. 26
Testing swing circle bearing clearance.......................................................................................................... 27
Checking and adjusting track shoe tension................................................................................................... 28
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in work equipment, swing, and travel circuits ......................................... 30
Testing control circuit basic pressure ............................................................................................................ 33
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in pump PC control circuit....................................................................... 34
Testing and adjusting oil pressure in pump LS control circuit ....................................................................... 37
Testing solenoid valve output pressure ......................................................................................................... 40
Testing PPC valve output pressure ............................................................................................................... 44
Adjusting play of work equipment and swing PPC valves............................................................................. 45
Checking parts which cause hydraulic drift of work equipment..................................................................... 46
Testing and adjusting travel deviation ........................................................................................................... 48
Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic circuit........................................................................................ 50
Testing oil leakage......................................................................................................................................... 51
Bleeding air from each part ........................................................................................................................... 54
Checking cab tipping stopper........................................................................................................................ 56
Installation and adjustment of mirrors and camera ....................................................................................... 57
Inspection of air conditioner Recirc/Fresh air filter ........................................................................................ 61
2 PC130-8
Tools for testing, adjusting, and troubleshooting 1

Sym-
Q'ty
Testing/Adjusting item Part No. Part name Remarks
bol
Exhaust temperatures R 799-101-1502 Digital thermometer 1 -99.9 – 1,299°C
1 799-201-9001 Handy smoke checker 1 Bosch index: 0 – 9
Checking exhaust gas
A Commercially
color 2 Smoke meter 1
available
1 795-799-1131 Gear 1
Adjusting valve clearance B Commercially Intake: 0.35 mm
2 Thickness gauge 1
available Exhaust: 0.57 mm
1 795-502-1590 Compression gauge 1 0 – 6.9 MPa {0 – 70 kg/cm2}
Testing compression pres-
C 795-502-1370 Adapter 1
sure 2 For 95E-5 engine
6261-11-3880 Gasket 1
Testing blow-by pressure D 1 799-201-1504 Blow-by checker 1 0 – 5 kPa {0 – 500 mmH2O}
Pressure gauge:
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester 1 2.5, 6, 40, 60 MPa
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:60 MPa
799-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
{600 kg/cm2}
Testing engine oil pres- Pressure gauge:1.0 MPa
E 2 799-401-2320 Gauge 1
sure {10 kg/cm2}
799-401-3500 Adapter 1 Size: 06
3
02896-11018 O-ring 1
799-101-5220 Nipple 1 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
4
07002-11023 O-ring 1
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Pressure gauge:60 MPa
Testing fuel pressure F 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
{600 kg/cm2}
795-471-1450 Adapter 1 Size: 8 x 1.25 mm
2
07005-00812 Washer 1
3 799-401-2320 Boost gauge kit 1
1 6151-51-8490 Spacer 1 ø14
2 6164-81-5750 Joint 1 ø14
3 07042-20108 Plug 1
Commercially
4 Hose 1 Internal dimensions: Approx. 12 mm
available
Testing fuel return rate
G Commercially
and leakage 5 Hose 1 Internal dimensions: Approx. 9 mm
available
Commercially
6 Measuring cylinder 1
available
Commercially
7 Stopwatch 1
available
Testing swing circle bear- Commercially
H Dial gauge 1
ing clearance available
PC130-8 3
Sym-
Q'ty
bol
Pressure gauge:
Testing and adjusting oil 1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
pressure in work equip- Pressure gauge: 60 MPa
J
ment, swing, and travel 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
{600 kg/cm2}
circuits
799-101-5220 Nipple 2 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
2
07002-11023 O-ring 2
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Testing basic pressure of Pressure gauge: 60 MPa
K
control circuit 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
{600 kg/cm2}
799-101-5220 Nipple 2 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
2
07002-11023 O-ring 2
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Testing and adjusting oil
pressure in pump PC con- L Pressure gauge: 60 MPa
trol circuit {600 kg/cm2}
799-101-5220 Nipple 2 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
2
07002-11023 O-ring 2
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Testing and adjusting oil Pressure gauge: 60 MPa
pressure in pump LS con- M {600 kg/cm2}
trol circuit Differential pressure
2 799-401-2701 1 50 MPa {500 kg/cm2}
gauge
799-101-5220 Nipple 2 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
3
07002-11023 O-ring 2
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Testing solenoid valve out- Pressure gauge: 60 MPa
N 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
put pressure {600 kg/cm2}
2 799-401-3100 Adapter 1 Size: 02
799-101-5220 Nipple 2 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
3
07002-11023 O-ring 2
Pressure gauge:
1 {25, 60, 400, 600 kg/cm2}
Testing PPC valve output Pressure gauge: 60 MPa
P 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester 1
pressure {600 kg/cm2}
2 799-401-3100 Adapter 1 Size: 02
799-101-5220 Nipple 2 Size: 10 x 1.25 mm
3
07002-11023 O-ring 2
Commercially
Testing oil leakage Q Measuring cylinder 1
available
4 PC130-8
Sym-
Q'ty
bol
799-601-4101
or T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-4201
For DRC60, Econo (Does not
799-601-4350 • Measuremen box 1
include 799-601-4201)
799-601-4130 • T-adapter 1 CAM
Troubleshooting for 799-601-4160 • T-adapter 1 Ne sensor
engine controller/sensors/ S 799-601-4220 • T-adapter 1 Engine controller
actuators
799-601-4240 • Socket 1 For ambient pressure sensor
799-601-4190 • Socket 1 Common rall pressure sensor
799-601-4340 • Socket 1 Injector
795-799-5530 • Socket 1 Engine water temprature sensor
799-601-4380 Socket 1 Boost pressure sensor
799-601-4260 Socket 1 Engine controller
799-601-2500
or
799-601-2700
or
799-601-2800
or
799-601-2900 is not supplied any
799-601-2900 T-adapter assembly 1
more.
or
799-601-7100
or
799-601-7400
or
799-601-8000
For Econo (Does not include 799-
601-2700)
799-601-4101
or
799-601-4201
Troubleshooting for chas- or T-adapter assembly 1
sis sensors/wiring har- T 799-601-9000
nesses or
799-601-9200
For DRC60 and Econo (excluding
799-601-4350 • Measuremen box 1 799-601-4201, 799-601-9000 and
799-601-9200 for DT6P)
For DT, HD (Does not include 799-
601-4100 and 799-601-4201)
799-601-9020 • Adapter for DT 1 For DT2P
For DT3P (Does not include 799-601-
799-601-9030 • Adapter for DT 1
4100 and 799-601-4201)
799-601-9040 • Adapter for DT 1
For DT6P (Does not include 799-601-
799-601-9050 • Adapter for DT 1
4100 and 799-601-4201)
For DT12P (Does not include 799-
799-601-9110 • Adapter for DT (Gray) 1
601-4100 and 799-601-4201)
For AMP3P (Does not include 799-
799-601-9420 • Adapter for AMP 1
601-9000 and 799-601-9200)
PC130-8 5
Sym-
Q'ty
bol
799-601-7000
or
799-601-7100
or T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-7400
or
799-601-8000
For X1P (Does not include 799-601-
799-601-7010 • Adapter for X 1
7000 and 799-601-7100)
799-601-7020 • Adapter for X 1 For X2P
For SW6P (Does not include 799-
799-601-7050 • Adapter for SWP 1
601-8000)
For SW6P (Does not include 799-
799-601-7060 • Adapter for SWP 1
601-8000)
For M1P (Does not include 799-601-
799-601-7080 • Adapter for M 1
7000 and 799-601-7100)
Troubleshooting for chas- 799-601-7090 • Adapter for M 1 For M2P
sis sensors/wiring har- T 799-601-7110 • Adapter for M 1 For M3P
nesses 799-601-7120 • Adapter for M 1 For M4P
799-601-7130 • Adapter for M For M6P
799-601-7140 • Adapter for S 1 For S8P
799-601-7500 T-adapter assembly 1
799-601-7510 • Adapter for 070 1 For 070-10P
799-601-7520 • Adapter for 070 1 For 070-12P
799-601-7530 • Adapter for 070 1 For 070-14P
799-601-7540 • Adapter for 070 1 For 070-18P
799-601-9890 1 For DT-2, 3, 4/DTM-2P
799-601-4280 Box for controller (PUMP) 1
799-601-7310 • Adapter for SWP 1 For SW12P
799-601-7360 Adapter for relay 1 For REL-5P
799-601-7370 Adapter for relay 1 For REL-6P
Socket for engine (CRI-
799-601-9410 1
T2)
Testing coolant tempera-
799-101-1502 Digital thermometer 1 -99.9 – 1,299°C
ture and oil temperature
—
Testing operating effort 79A-264-0021 Push-pull scale 1
and depressing force 79A-264-0091 Push-pull scale 1
Testing stroke and hydrau- Commercially
— Ruler 1
lic drift available
Testing work equipment Commercially
— Stopwatch 1
speed available
Testing voltage and resis- Commercially
— Circuit tester 1
tance available
Removal and installation
27 mm deep socket (hexagonal),
of engine oil pressure — 795-799-6210 Deep socket 1
Inside diameter: 24.5 mm
switch
21mm deep socket
Commercially (MITOLOY 4ML-21 or equivalent)
of engine coolant temper- — Socket 1
available Applicable engine serial No.:
ature sensor
500001 - 502653
6 PC130-8
Sym-
Q'ty
bol
19mm deep socket
(MITOLOY 4ML-19 or equivalent)
of engine coolant temper- — 795T-981-1010 Socket 1
Applicable engine serial No.:
ature sensor
502654 and up
a For the model names and part Nos. of the T-boxes and T-adapters used for troubleshooting for the
machine monitor, controllers, sensors, actuators, electrical equipment, and wiring harnesses, see "Trou-
bleshooting (General information on troubleshooting), List of T-boxes and T-adapters".
PC130-8 7
Sketches of special tools 1

Note: Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these sketches.
Socket
8 PC130-8
Testing engine speed 1 4. Testing pump relief speed

1) Start the engine and operate the arm cyl-
a Test the engine speed with the monitoring inder to the IN stroke end.
function of the machine monitor. 2) Set the fuel control dial in the high idle
a Test the engine speed under the following con- (MAX) position and set the working mode
dition. in the power mode (P).
q Engine coolant temperature: Within oper- 3) Operate the left work equipment control
ating range lever to relieve the arm circuit at the IN
q Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operat- stroke end and test the engine speed.
ing range
5. Testing auto-deceleration speed
1. Preparation work 1) Start the engine, set the fuel control dial in
Operate the machine monitor so that the the high idle position (MAX), and turn the
engine speed can be monitored. auto-decelerator ON.
a For the operating method of the machine 2) Set all the levers and pedals for work
monitor, see Special functions of machine equipment control, swing control, and
monitor. travel in neutral and test the engine speed
a Monitoring code: 01002 Engine speed when the auto-decelerator operates.
a The engine speed lowers to a certain level
about 5 seconds after all the levers and
pedals are set in neutral. This level is the
auto-deceleration speed.
2. Testing low idle speed

1) Start the engine and set the fuel control
dial in the low idle (MIN) position.
2) Set all the levers and pedals for work
equipment control, swing control, and
travel in neutral and test the engine
speed.
3. Testing high idle speed

1) Start the engine and set the fuel control
dial in the high idle (MAX) position.
2) Set the working mode in the power mode
(P) and turn the auto-decelerator OFF.
3) Set all the levers and pedals for work
equipment control, swing control, and
travel in neutral and test the engine
speed.
PC130-8 9
Testing exhaust temperature 1 4. Run the engine and test the exhaust tempera-
ture over the speed range.
a Testing tools for exhaust temperature
Symbol Part No. Part name
R 799-101-1502 Digital thermometer
k Install or remove the testing instrument

after the exhaust manifold temperature has
lowered.
1. Remove the engine compartment side cover

and exhaust manifold cover.
2. Remove exhaust temperature pickup plug (1)

from the side of the center of the exhaust man-
ifold.
5. After finishing test, remove the testing instru-
ment and return the removed parts.
3. Install sensor [1] of digital thermometer R and

connect it to thermometer [2].
10 PC130-8
Checking exhaust gas color 1

a Checking tools for exhaust gas color
1 799-210-9001 Handy smoke checker
A Commercially
2 Smoke meter
available
k Stop the machine on a level ground and

lower the work equipment to the ground.
k Be careful not to touch any hot part when
removing or installing the checking tools.
a Check the exhaust gas color under the follow-
ing condition.
q Engine coolant temperature: Within oper- 2) Connect the probe hose, receptacle of the
ating range accelerator switch, and air hose to smoke
a If an air source and an electric power source meter A2.
are not available in the field, use handy smoke a Limit the supplied air pressure to 1.5
checker A1. When recording official data, use MPa {15 kg/cm2}.
smoke meter A2. 3) Connect the power cable to an AC recep-
tacle.
1. Testing with handy smoke checker A1 a Before connecting the cable, check
1) Stick a sheet of filter paper to smoke that the power switch of the smoke
checker A1. meter is turned OFF.
2) Insert the exhaust gas intake pipe in 4) Loosen the cap nut of the suction pump
exhaust pipe (1). and fit the filter paper.
3) Start the engine and accelerate it sud- a Fit the filter paper securely so that the
denly or run it at high idle and operate the exhaust gas will not leak.
handle of smoke checker A1 so that the 5) Turn on the power switch of smoke meter
filter paper will absorb the exhaust gas. A2.
a Absorbing time: 1.4 ± 0.2 sec
6) Start the engine and accelerate it sud-

4) Remove the filter paper and compare it denly or run it at high idle and depress the
with the attached scale. accelerator pedal of smoke meter A2 and
5) After finishing checking, remove the test- collect the exhaust gas into the filter
ing tools and return the removed parts. paper.
7) Place the contaminated filter paper on the
2. Checking with smoke meter A2 clean filter paper (at least 10 sheets) in the
1) Insert probe [1] of smoke meter A2 in the filter paper holder and read the indicated
outlet of the exhaust pipe and fix it to the value.
exhaust pipe with a clip. 8) After finishing checking, remove the
checking tools and return the removed
parts.
PC130-8 11
Adjusting valve clearance 1 3. Remove plate (5) on the starting motor and
insert gear B1.
a Adjusting tools for valve clearance
1 795-799-1131 Gear
B Commercially
2 Thickness gauge
available

a Adjust the valve clearance under the following
condition.
q Engine coolant temperature: Normal tem-
perature
1. Open the engine hood and remove mainte-

nance step (1) and air supply hose (2) on the 4. Remove compression top dead center TDC
engine. check plug (6) from the flywheel housing.
Rotate the crankshaft forward with gear B1
and set it so that you can see the white mark of
the flywheel.
2. Remove cylinder head cover (4).
a When the No. 1 cylinder is at the compres-

sion top dead center, the rocker arm of the
No. 1 cylinder can be moved by the valve
clearance with the hand. If the rocker arm
cannot be moved, the No. 1 cylinder is not
at the compression top dead center. In
this case, rotate the crankshaft one more
turn.
12 PC130-8
5. Adjust the valve clearances marked with q in 7. After finishing adjustment, remove the adjust-
the valve arrangement drawing according to ing tools and return the removed parts.
the following procedure. k Take care not to forget remove gear B1.
3 Cylinder head cover mounting nut:
8.82 ± 0.98 Nm {0.9 ± 0.1 kgm}
1) While fixing adjustment screw (1), loosen

locknut (2).
2) Insert thickness gauge B2 in the clearance
between rocker arm (3) and valve stem (4)
and adjust the valve clearance with
adjustment screw (1).
a With the thickness gauge inserted,
turn the adjustment screw to a degree
that you can move the thickness
gauge lightly.
3) While fixing adjustment screw (1), tighten
locknut (2).
3 Locknut: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
a After tightening the locknut, check the
valve clearance again.
6. Rotate the crankshaft forward 1 turn according

to step 4 to set the No. 4 cylinder to the com-
pression top dead center and adjust the valve
c l ea r a nc e s m a r k ed w i t h Q i n t he va l v e
arrangement drawing similarly to those marked
with q.
PC130-8 13
Testing compression pressure 1

a Testing tools for compression pressure
1 795-502-1590 Compression gauge
C 795-502-1370 Adapter
2
6261-11-3880 Gasket
k When testing the compression pressure,

take care n ot to burn you rself on t he
exhaust manifold or muffler or get caught
in a rotating part.
a Test the compression pressure after the engine
is warmed up. 2. Install adapter C2 to the injector mounting part
(Engine oil temperature: 40 – 60°C) with holder (7) and connect compression
gauge C1.
1. Remove the injector of the cylinder to be tested a Fit the gasket to the adapter end without
according to the following procedure. fail.
a Test of the No. 1 cylinder is explained
3
below as an example. Holder mounting bolt:
1) Remove wiring harness connector (2) 27 – 30 Nm {2.8 – 3.1 kgm}
from injector (1). a Tighten the mounting bolt after the fulcrum
2) Move fuel scatter prevention cover (3) of the holder is seated perfectly.
from the joint.
3) Remove clamp (4) and high-pressure pipe
(5).
4) Pull spill hose connector (6) out of injector
(1).
5) Remove holder (7) and injector (1).

a If the injector is stuck and is not
removed easily, pass a wire under the
fuel inlet and pull it up to remove the
injector.
a Do not apply an external force to the
terminal at the injector top.
14 PC130-8
3. Set the engine in the no-injection cranking

mode with the machine monitor.
q Instead of the above work, you may dis-
connect the wiring harness connectors
from all the injectors so that fuel will not be
injected at all.
k Since starting of engine is dangerous,
be sure to set the injectors so that they
will not inject fuel before starting the
check.
4. Rotate the engine with the starting motor and

test the compression pressure.
a Test the compression pressure when the
gauge pointer is stabilized.
5. After finishing test, remove the testing instru-

ments and return the removed parts.
a Install the injector and spill hose connector
according to the following procedure.
1) Fit O-ring (8) and gasket (9) to injector (1).
a Do not fit O-ring (8) to groove (a).
PC130-8 15
Testing blow-by pressure 1

a Testing tools for blow-by pressure
D 1 799-201-1504 Blow-by checker

a Test the blow-by pressure under the following
condition.
q Engine coolant temperature: Within oper-
ating range
q Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operat-
ing range
5. After finishing test, remove the testing tools
1. Remove the undercover of the hydraulic pump. and return the removed parts.
2. Install tool and adapter [1] of blow-by checker

D1 to breather hose (1) and connect gauge [2].
3. Start the engine, set the working mode in the

power mode (P), and turn the swing lock
switch ON.
a If the swing lock switch is turned ON, the
main relief valve is set for high-pressure
relief.
4. While running the engine at high idle, relieve

the arm circuit and test the blow-by pressure.
a Read the gauge when the pointer is stabi-
lized.
16 PC130-8
Testing engine oil pressure 1 5. Test the oil pressure during low idle and high
idle.
a Testing tools for engine oil pressure
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester
1
790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester
2 799-401-2320 Gauge
E 799-401-3500 Adapter (Size: 06)
3
02896-11018 O-ring
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
4
07002-11023 O-ring
1. Open the pump room cover and disconnect

outlet hose (1) of the engine oil filter.
6. After finishing test, remove the Testing tools
and return the removed parts.
2. Install adapter E3 and connect the discon-

nected hose again.
3. Install nipple E4 and connect it to hydraulic

tester E2.
4. Start the engine and heighten the engine cool-

ant temperature to the operating range.
PC130-8 17
Reduced cylinder mode No-injection cranking 1

operation 1 a No-injection cranking means to crank the
a Reduced cylinder mode operation means to engine with the starting motor while all the
run the engine with the fuel injectors of 1 or injections are stopped electrically. The pur-
more cylinders disabled electrically to reduce pose and effect of this operation are as follows.
the number of effective cylinders. The pur- q Before the engine is started after it or the
poses and effects of this operation are as fol- engine unit has been stored for a long period,
lows. the no-injection cranking is performed to lubri-
1. This operation is used to find out a cylinder cate the engine parts and protect them from
which does not output power normally (or, seizure.
combustion in it is abnormal).
2. When a cylinder is selected for the reduced
cylinder mode operation, if the engine speed
and output do not change from the normal
operation (all-cylinder operation), that cylinder
has 1 or more defects.
The possible defects are as follows.
q Compression leakage through cylinder
head gasket
q Defective injection
q Defective piston, piston ring, or cylinder
liner
q Defective valve mechanism (Moving valve
system)
q Defect in electrical system
3. Since the common rail fuel injection system
controls the injector of each cylinder electroni-
cally, the operator can perform the reduced cyl-
inder mode operation easily with switches to
find out a defective cylinder.
18 PC130-8
Handling fuel system parts 1 Releasing residual pressure from

a Precautions for checking and maintaining fuel fuel system 1
system a Pressure is generated in the low-pressure cir-
The common rail fuel injection system (CRI) cuit and high-pressure circuit of the fuel sys-
consists of more precise parts than the con- tem while the engine is running.
ventional fuel injection pump and nozzle. If for- Low-pressure circuit:
eign matter enters this system, it can cause a Feed pump – Fuel main filter – Supply pump
trouble. High-pressure circuit:
When checking and maintaining the fuel sys- Supply pump – Common rail – Injector
tem, take care more than the past. If dust, etc. a The pressure in both low-pressure circuit and
sticks to any part, wash that part thoroughly high-pressure circuit lowers to a safety level
with clean fuel. automatically 30 seconds after the engine is
a Precautions for replacing fuel filter cartridge stopped.
Be sure to use the Komatsu genuine fuel filter a Before the fuel circuit is checked and its parts
cartridge. are removed, the residual pressure in the fuel
Since the common rail fuel injection system circuit must be released completely. Accord-
(CRI) consists of more precise parts than the ingly, observe the following.
conventional fuel injection pump and nozzle, it k Before checking the fuel system or remov-
employs a high-efficiency special filter to pre- ing its parts, wait at least 30 seconds after
vent foreign matter from entering it. If a filter stopping the engine until the residual pres-
other than the genuine one is used, the fuel sure in the fuel circuit is released. (Do not
system may have a trouble. Accordingly, never start the work just after stopping the engine
use such a filter. since there is residual pressure.)
PC130-8 19
Testing fuel pressure 1 3) Run the engine at high idle and test the
pressure in the fuel low-pressure circuit.
a Testing tools for fuel pressure a If the pressure in the fuel low-pres-
Symbol Part No. Part name sure circuit is in the following range, it
is normal.
1 Reference: Negative pressure is indi-
790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester cated.
F 795-471-1450 Adapter (8 x 1.25 mm)
2 Engine speed Fuel pressure
07005-00812 O-ring
-49 – 0 kPa
3 799-201-2202 Boost gauge kit At high idle
{-0.5 – 0 kg/cm2}

a Test only the fuel pressure in the low-pressure
circuit from the priming pump through the fuel
main filter to the supply pump and the return
circuit from the supply pump/common rail/
injector to fuel tank.
k Since the pressure in the high-pressure cir-
cuit from the supply pump through the
common rail to the injector is very high, it
cannot be tested.
1. Testing pressure in fuel low-pressure cir-

cuit
1) Open the engine hood and remove fuel
pressure pickup plug (1) from the fuel
4) After finishing test, remove the testing
main filter.
tools and return the removed parts.
3 Fuel pressure pickup plug:
7.8 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}
2) Install adapter F2 and nipple [1] of the

hydraulic tester F1 and connect them to
gauge of boost gauge kit F3.
20 PC130-8
Testing fuel return rate and fuel a Lay test hose G4 so that it will not
leakage 1 slacken and put its end in the oil pan.
a Testing tools for fuel return rate and fuel leak-

age
1 6151-51-8490 Spacer
2 6164-81-5750 Joint
3 07042-20108 Plug
Commercially
4 Hose
available
G Commercially
5 Hose
available
Commercially
6 Measuring cylinder
available
6) Remove spill hose connector joint (5) and
Commercially
7 Stopwatch install plug G3.
available
a Prepare an oil pan of about 20 l to receive the

fuel flowing out during the test.
1. Preparation work
1) Remove tube (3) and spill hose (4)
between common rail (1) and return block
(2).
a The above is the preparation work for

test of the leakage from the pressure
limiter and return rate from the injec-
tor.
2) Insert spacer G1 on return block (2) side

and tighten the removed joint bolt again.
a Be sure to fit the gaskets to both ends
of the spacer.
3) Insert joint G2 on common rail (1) side and
tighten the removed joint bolt again.
a Be sure to fit the gaskets to both ends
of the joint.
4) Connect test hose G4 to the end of joint
G2.
5) Connect test hose G5 to connector (6)
side of spill hose (4).
a Bind the connecting part of the test
hose with a wire etc. to prevent it from
coming off.
PC130-8 21
2. Testing leakage from pressure limiter 3. Testing return rate from injector
1) Lay test hose G4 so that it will not slacken a While testing the return rate from the
and put its end in the oil pan. injector, keep the test hose on the pres-
2) Start the engine and keep its speed at sure limiter side connected and keep its
1,600 rpm with no load. end in the oil pan.
3) After the engine speed is stabilized, test 1) Run the engine at the rated output.
the leakage in 1 minute with measuring 2) After the engine speed is stabilized, test
cylinder G6. the return rate in 1 minute with measuring
a You may test for 20 seconds and cylinder G6.
judge by multiplying the result by 3. a You may test for 20 seconds and
a If the leakage from the pressure lim- judge by multiplying the result by 3.
iter is in the following standard range, a If the supply pump pressure is low,
it is normal. the engine speed may not rise. In this
case, record the engine speed, too,
Engine speed Leakage during the test.
(rpm) (cc/min)
a If the return rate (spill) from the injec-
At rated output Max. 20 tor is in the following standard range,
it is normal.
Rated output Limit of return rate
speed (rpm) (spill) (cc/min)
1,600 190
1,700 200
1,800 210
1,900 220
2,000 230
4) After finishing test, stop the engine.
3) After finishing test, stop the engine.

3 Joint bolt: 3.9 – 6.9 Nm {0.4 – 0.7 kgm}
22 PC130-8
Bleeding air from fuel circuit 1

a If fuel is used up or if a fuel circuit part is
removed and installed, bleed air from the fuel
circuit according to the following procedure.
1. Fill the fuel tank with fuel.

a Add oil until the oil filler float reaches the
maximum rising position.
2. Open the side cover of the pump room.
3. Loosen knob (1) of the feed pump and pull it

out, and then operate it forward and backward.
a Move the knob until it becomes heavy.
a The plug at the top of the fuel main filter
does not need to be removed.
4. After bleeding air, push in and tighten knob (1).
PC130-8 23
Checking fuel circuit for leakage 1 9. Check the fuel piping and devices for fuel leak-
k
age.
Very high pressure is generated in the high- a Check mainly around the high-pressure
pressure circuit of the fuel system. If fuel circuit parts coated with the color checker
leaks while the engine is running, it is dan- for fuel leakage.
gerous since it can catch fire. a If any fuel leakage is detected, repair it
After checking the fuel system or removing and check again from step 2.
its parts, check it for fuel leakage according a If no fuel leakage is detected, check is
to the following procedure.
k
completed.
Stop the machine on a level ground and
a Clean and degrease the engine and the parts
around it in advance so that you can check it
easily for fuel leakage.
1. Spray color checker (developer) over the fuel

supply pump, common rail, fuel injector, and
joints of the high-pressure piping.
2. Run the engine at speed below 1,000 rpm and

stop it after its speed is stabilized.
3. Check the fuel piping and devices for fuel leak-

age.
a Check mainly around the high-pressure
circuit parts coated with the color checker
for fuel leakage.
a If any fuel leakage is detected, repair it
and check again from step 2.
4. Run the engine at low idle.

age.
a Check mainly around the high-pressure
circuit parts coated with the color checker
for fuel leakage.
6. Run the engine at high idle.

age.
a Check around the high-pressure circuit
parts coated with the color checker for fuel
leakage.
8. Run the engine at high idle and load it.

a Relieve the arm circuit at the IN stroke
end.
24 PC130-8
Testing and adjusting alternator Adjusting

belt tension 1 a If the deflection is out of the standard range,
adjust the belt tension according to the follow-
Testing ing procedure.
1. Open the engine hood and remove belt guard
(1). 1. Loosen alternator fixing bolts (1) and (2).
a Loosen fixing bolt (2) from the rear side of
the engine.
Press the intermediate point of the belt

between the alternator pulley and fan pulley
with a finger and test deflection (a) of the belt. 2. Adjust the tension of alternator belt (4) by turn-
a Pressing force: Approx. 60 Nm {Approx. ing adjustment bolt (3).
6.1 kg} a Do not loosen double nut (5) at the adjust-
a Deflection (a): 6 – 10 mm ment bolt end. (If you have loosened it,
apply LOCTITE (LT-2) to it when tighten-
ing.)
Reference: If adjustment bolt (3) is tightened
(turned to the right), the alternator
belt (4) is loosened. If the former
is turned to the left, the latter is
tightened.
3. After adjusting the belt tension, tighten alterna-

tor fixing bolts (1) and (2).
4. Check again that the tension of alternator belt

(4) is in the standard range.
PC130-8 25
Checking and adjusting air Adjusting

conditioner compressor belt a If the belt deflection is abnormal, adjust it
tension 1 according to the following procedure.
k Stop the machine on a level ground and 1. Loosen bolts (1) and (2).
2. Move compressor (3) and bracket (4) together
Checking to adjust the belt tension.
1. Open the engine hood and remove fan guard
(1). 3. After positioning compressor (3), tighten bolts
(1) and (2).
a Check each pulley for breakage, wear of
the V-groove, and contact of the V-belt
and V-groove.
a If the V-belt is so lengthened that the
adjustment allowance is eliminated or it
has a cut or a crack, replace it.
a If the belt is replaced, adjust their tension
again after operating the machine for 1
hour.
a After tightening the bolts, check the belt
tension again according the above proce-
dure.
2. Press the intermediate point of the belt

between fan pulley and compressor pulley with
a finger and measure deflection (a) of the belt.
q Belt pressing force: 58.8 N {6 kg}
4. After finishing test, return the removed parts.
26 PC130-8
Testing swing circle bearing 4. Set the arm almost perpendicular to the
clearance 1 ground and lower the boom until the front track
shoe floats.
a Testing tools for swing circle bearing clearance a At this time the front of the upper structure
Symbol Part No. Part name rises and the rear lowers.
Commercially
H Dial gauge 5. Under this condition, read dial gauge H.
available
a The value indicated by dial gauge H is the
clearance of the bearing.
a When testing the swing circle bearing clear-
a For the standard value, see Structure,
ance installed to the machine, perform the fol-
function and maintenance standard,
lowing procedure.
k
"Swing circle".
Stop the machine on a level ground and
k Do not put your hands or feet under the
undercarriage during test.
1. Fix dial gauge H to the track frame and apply

the probe to the lower end of the outer race.
6. Return the machine to the condition of step 2

and check that dial gauge H indicates 0.
a If the dial gauge does not indicate 0,
repeat steps 2 through 5.
2. Set the work equipment to the maximum reach

position and set the bucket tip to the height of
the under side of the revolving frame.
a At this time the front of the upper structure
lowers and the rear rises.
3. Set dial gauge H to the 0 point.
PC130-8 27
Checking and adjusting track Adjusting

shoe tension 1 a If the track shoe tension is abnormal, adjust it
Checking
1. Run the engine at low idle and drive the 1. Increasing tension
machine forward by the length of track on 1) Add grease through grease fitting (2) with
ground, and then stop slowly. a grease gun.
2) To check that the tension is normal, run
2. Place square bar [3] longer than the distance the engine at low idle and move the
between idler (1) and carrier roller (2) on the machine forward by the length of track on
track shoe. ground, then stop slowly.
a As the steel bar, use an angle steel, etc. 3) After adjusting, check the track shoe ten-
which will be deflected less. sion again according to the above proce-
dure.
3. Test maximum clearance (a) between steel bar
[3] and track shoe.
q Standard maximum clearance (a):
10 – 30 mm
a You may add grease until dimension (b)

between the idler guide and track frame
end becomes 0 mm. If the tension is still
low, the pins and bushings are worn
much. In this case, reverse or replace the
pins and bushings.
28 PC130-8
2. Decreasing tension
1) Loosen valve (1) to discharge grease, and
then tighten it.
k Do not loosen the valve more than
1 turn. If it is loosened more, it
may jump out because of the high-
pressure grease in it.
2) To check that the tension is normal, run
the engine at low idle and move the
machine forward by the length of track on
ground, then stop slowly.
3) After adjusting, check the track shoe ten-
sion again according to the above proce-
dure.
PC130-8 29
Testing and adjusting oil pressure

in work equipment, swing, and
travel circuits 1
a Testing and adjusting tools for oil pressure in
work equipment, swing, and travel circuits
1
J
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 × 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring

lower the work equipment to the ground. 2) Install nipples J2 and connect oil pressure
Then, release the residual pressure from the gauges [1] of hydraulic tester J1.
hydraulic circuit. For details, see "Releasing a Use the oil pressure gauges of 58.8
residual pressure from hydraulic circuit". MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
Testing
a The oil pressure in the work equipment, swing,
and travel circuits (pump discharge pressure)
can be checked with monitoring function of the
machine monitor, too (For details, see "Special
functions of machine monitor").
q Monitoring code: 01100 pump pressure
a Test the oil pressure in the work equipment,
swing, and travel circuits under the following
condition.
q Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operat-
ing range
1. Preparation work
1) Open the side cover of the pump room
and remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1)
and (2).
q (1): Pump discharge pressure port
(1) check plug
q (2): Pump discharge pressure port
(2) check plug
2. Testing unload pressure

1) Start the engine, set the working mode in
the power mode (P), and turn the auto-
decelerator OFF.
2) Run the engine at high idle, set all the
levers and pedals for work equipment con-
trol, swing control, and travel in neutral,
and test the oil pressure.
a The pressure tested when the unload
valve is unloaded is indicated.
30 PC130-8
3. Testing work equipment relief pressure 2) Set the working mode in the power mode
1) Start the engine and move the cylinder to (P).
be tested to the stroke end. 3) Run the engine at high idle, operate the
2) Set the working mode in the power mode travel lever and pedal to relieve the travel
(P). motor, and test the oil pressure.
3) Run the engine at high idle, operate the k Before operating the travel lever
right and left work equipment control and pedal, check the position and
levers to relieve the cylinder, and test the locking direction of the locked
oil pressure. sprocket again.
a The pressure tested when the main a The pressure tested when the main
relief valve is relieved is indicated (If relief valve of the control valve is
t he boo m is l owe r ed si ng ly, th e relieved is indicated. The travel circuit
safety-suction valve of the control is always relieved at high pressure.
valve for lowering the boom is
relieved). 6. Work after finishing test
After finishing test, remove the testing tools
4. Testing swing relief pressure and return the removed parts.
1) Start the engine, set the working mode in 3 Oil pressure pickup plug:
the power mode (P), and turn the swing 20 – 27 Nm {2.0 – 2.8 kgm}
lock switch ON.
2) Run the engine at high idle, operate the
left work equipment control lever to relieve
the swing motor, and test the oil pressure.
a The pressure tested when the swing
motor relief valve is relieved is indi-
cated.
a The swing relief pressure is lower
than the main relief pressure.
5. Testing travel relief pressure

1) Run the engine and lock the travel mecha-
nism.
k Put pin [2] between the sprocket
and track frame to lock the travel
mechanism securely.
PC130-8 31
Adjusting 5) After finishing adjustment, check again

a The unload valve and safety-suction valve for that the oil pressure is normal according to
lowering the boom cannot be adjusted. the above described test procedure.
1. Adjusting work equipment and travel relief 2. Adjusting swing relief pressure
pressure a If the swing relief pressure is abnormal,
a If the relief pressure of the work equip- adjust safety valve (7) of the swing motor
ment circuit and travel circuit is abnormal, according to the following procedure.
adjust main relief valves (3) according to
the following procedure.
q (3): Main relief valve
a Adjust only the low relief pressure of the
main relief valve. If the low relief pressure
is adjusted, the high relief pressure is set
automatically.
a The low relief pressure is the pressure
applied when the 2-stage relief solenoid
valve is turned OFF and the pilot pressure
is not applied to the selector port.
1) While fixing adjustment screw (8), loosen

locknut (9).
2) Turn adjustment screw (8) to adjust the
pressure.
a If the adjustment screw is
q Turned to the right, the set pres-
sure is increased.
q Turned to the left, the set pres-
sure is decreased.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of
adjustment screw:
1) Disconnect pilot hose (4). Approx. 6.7 MPa {Approx. 68.4 kg/cm2}
2) While fixing holder (5), loosen locknut (6). 3) While fixing adjustment screw (8), tighten
3) Turn holder (7) to adjust the set pressure. locknut (9).
a If the holder is 3 Locknut:
q Turned to the right, the set pres- 78 – 103 Nm {8 – 10.5 kgm}
sure is increased.
q Turned to the left, the set pres-
sure is decreased.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of
holder:
Approx. 20.5 MPa {Approx. 209 kg/cm2}
4) While fixing holder (5), tighten locknut (6).
3 Locknut: 49 – 58.8 Nm {5 – 6 kgm}
4) After finishing adjustment, check again

that the oil pressure is normal according to
the above described test procedure.
32 PC130-8
Testing control circuit basic 2. Install nipple K2 and connect oil pressure
pressure 1 gauge [1] of hydraulic tester K1.
a Use the oil pressure gauge of 5.9 MPa {60
a Testing tools for control circuit basic pressure kg/cm2}.
1
K
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 × 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring

Then, release the residual pressure from
the hydraulic circuit. For details, see
"Releasing residual pressure from hydrau-
lic circuit".
a Test the control circuit basic pressure under
the following condition.
q Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operating
range
1. Open the pump room side cover and remove

oil pressure pickup plug (1).
3. Start the engine, set the working mode in the

power mode (P), and turn the auto-decelerator
OFF.
4. Run the engine at high idle, set all the levers

and pedals for work equipment control, swing
control, and travel in neutral, and test the oil
pressure.

a The control circuit basic pressure may be

tested with oil pressure pickup plug (2) on the
hydraulic pump side.
a Do not adjust the relief valve for control circuit
basic pressure.
PC130-8 33

in pump PC control circuit 1
pump PC control circuit
1
L
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 × 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring

Then, release the residual pressure from 2) Install nipple L2 and connect it to oil pres-
the hydraulic circuit. For details, see sure gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
lic circuit".
Testing
a Before testing the oil pressure in the PC con-
trol circuit, check that the oil pressure in the
work equipment, swing, and travel circuits and
the basic pressure of the control circuit are nor-
mal.
a Test the oil pressure in the pump PC control
circuit under the following condition.
range
1. Testing PC valve output pressure (servo a Install nipple L2 to the inspection part
piston inlet pressure) of plug (2) and connect it to oil pres-
a Test the PC valve output pressure (servo sure gauge [1] by hose [2] of hydrau-
piston inlet pressure) and pump discharge lic tester L1.
pressure simultaneously and compare a Use the oil pressure gauges of 58.8
them. MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
and (2).
q (1): Pump discharge pressure pickup
plug
q (2): PC valve output pressure pickup
plug
3) Start the engine and move the arm cylin-

der to the IN stroke end.
(P).
34 PC130-8
5) Run the engine at high idle, operate the 2) Install nipples L2 and connect them to oil
left work equipment control lever to relieve pressure gauges [1].
the arm circuit at the IN stroke end, and a Use the oil pressure gauges of 5.9
test the oil pressure. MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
a Testing condition and method of judg- 3) Start the engine and set the working mode
ment: If the pressures are in the fol- in the power mode (P).
lowing ratio, the PC valve is normal. 4) Run the engine at high idle and low idle,
set all the levers and pedals for work
Tested oil Operation of Ratio of oil
pressure lever pressures equipment control, swing control, and
travel in neutral, and test the oil pressure
Pump discharge
1 at each speed.
pressure
Arm IN relief
PC valve output Approx. 0.6
pressure (Approx. 3/5)
a If the PC valve or the servo piston is

abnormal, the PC valve output pres-
sure (servo piston inlet pressure) is
"the same as the pump discharge
pressure" or "almost 0".
2. Testing PC-EPC valve output pressure

and remove oil pressure pickup plugs (3).
(3): PC-EPC valve output pressure pickup a Testing condition and method of judg-
plug ment: If the output pressures are in
the following ratio, the PC-EPC valve
is normal.
Operation of
Engine Output pressure
lever
All control Approx. 2.9 MPa

Low idle
levers and {Approx. 30 kg/cm2}
pedals in Approx. 0 MPa
High idle neutral {Approx. 0 kg/cm2}

PC130-8 35
Adjusting
Adjusting pump PC valve
a If the following phenomenon occurs and PC
valve (4) seems to be defective, adjust PC
valve (4) according to the following procedure.
q As the working load increases, the engine
speed lowers remarkably.
q The engine speed is normal but the work
equipment speed is low.
a The width across flats of the PC valve locknut
is 13 mm and that of the adjustment screw
(inside width) is 4 mm.
Do not turn any other locknuts or adjustment
screws since they affects the hydraulic pump
performance. 4. After finishing adjustment, check again that the
PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
pressure) is normal according to the above
described test procedure.
1. Loosen locknut (5).

a Before loosening the locknut, make
counter mark at the adjustment screw end
so that you can see the position of the
locknut before the adjustment (and you
can return the locknut to its original posi-
tion after turning it in reverse).
2. Turn adjustment screw (6) clockwise or coun-

terclockwise to adjust.
a Turn the adjustment screw
q Clockwise when the work equipment
s pee d i s low ( to i nc re ase pu mp
absorption torque) and
q Counterclockwise when the engine
speed lowers (to decrease pump
absorption torque).
3. Tighten locknut (5).

3 Locknut: 27 – 34 Nm {2.8 – 3.5 kgm}
36 PC130-8

in pump LS control circuit 1
pump LS control circuit
1
M 2 799-401-2701 Differential pressure gauge
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 × 1.25 mm)
3
07002-11023 O-ring

lower the work equipment to the ground. 2) Install nipple M3 and connect it to oil pres-
Then, release the residual pressure from sure gauge [1] of hydraulic tester M1.
the hydraulic circuit. For details, see
lic circuit".
Testing
a Before testing the oil pressure in the LS control
circuit, check that the oil pressure in the work
equipment, swing, and travel circuits and the
basic pressure of the control circuit are normal.
a Test the oil pressure in the pump LS control cir-
cuit under the following condition.
range
1. Testing LS valve output pressure (servo a Install nipple M3 to the inspection part
piston inlet pressure) of plug (2) and connect it to oil pres-
a Test the LS valve output pressure (servo sure gauge [1] by hose [2] of hydrau-
piston inlet pressure) and pump discharge lic tester M1.
pressure simultaneously and compare a Use the oil pressure gauges of 58.8
them. MPa {600 kg/cm2}.
and (2).
plug
q (2): LS valve output pressure pickup
plug
3) Start the engine and push up the track

shoe on the side to be tested with the
work equipment and prepare for running
the track shoe idle.
k Since the raised track shoe will be
run idle during test, secure a suffi-
cient working area.
PC130-8 37
4) Set the working mode in the power mode q (2): LS pressure pickup plug
(P) and set the travel speed in the High
position.
and test the oil pressure at each speed.
Then, operate the travel lever to run the
track shoe idle and test the oil pressure.
k While checking the safety around
the machine extremely, run the
track shoe pushed up idle.
a Do not operate the travel lever to the
stroke end (but stop it halfway).
2) Install nipples M3 and connect it to differ-

ential pressure gauge M2 or the oil pres-
sure gauge [1] of hydraulic tester M1.
a When using differential pressure gauge
M2:
Connect the pump discharge pres-
sure to the high pressure side (back
side) and connect the LS pressure to
the low pressure side (lower side).
Since the differential pressure gauge
needs a 12V power source, connect it
to a battery.
a When using oil pressure gauge (in M1):
a Testing condition and method of judg- Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8
ment: If the pressures are in the fol- MPa {600 kg/cm2} having the unit of
lowing ratio, the LS valve is normal. 0.98 MPa {10 kg/cm2}. Since the dif-
ferential pressure is about 3.9 MPa
Lever
{40 kg/cm 2 } at maximum, test it by
operating Travel lever
condition All levers and half stroke installing the same gauge to the
pedals in neu- position pickup plugs alternately.
tral (Travel with q The figure shows the pump discharge
Tested no load) pressure side.
oil pressure
Set mea-
Pump discharge
sured value
pressure
Almost same as 1
pressure Approx. 3/5
LS valve output
of above
pressure
pressure

2. Testing LS differential pressure

a Test the pump discharge pressure and LS
pressure (actuator load pressure) simulta-
neously and calculate the difference
between them.
and (2).
plug
38 PC130-8
3) Run the engine, push up the track shoe on Adjusting

the side to be tested with the work equip- Adjusting LS valve
ment, and prepare for running track shoe a If the LS differential pressure is abnormal,
idle. adjust the LS valve according to the following
q When testing P1 circuit: Right track procedure.
shoe q (3): Pump LS valve
q When testing P2 circuit: Left track
shoe
k Since the raised track shoe will be
run idle during test, secure a suffi-
cient working area.
(P) and set the travel speed in the High
position.
and test the oil pressure at each speed.
Then, operate the travel lever to run the
track shoe idle and test the oil pressure.
k While checking the safety around
the machine extremely, run the 1. While fixing adjustment screw (4), loosen lock-
track shoe pushed up idle. nut (5).
a Do not operate the travel lever to the
stroke end (but stop it halfway). 2. Turn adjustment screw (4) to adjust the differ-
ential pressure.
a If the adjustment screw is
q Turned to the right, the differential
pressure is increased.
q Turned to the left, the differential
pressure is decreased.
a Quantity of adjustment (LS differential
pressure) per turn of adjustment screw:
Approx. 1.1 MPa {Approx. 10.8 kg/cm2}
3. While fixing adjustment screw (4), tighten lock-

nut (5).
3 Locknut: 49 – 68.6 Nm {5 – 7 kgm}
a Testing condition and method of judg-

ment: If the pressures are in the fol-
lowing ratio, the LS valve is normal.
LS differential
Operation of levers
pressure
All control levers and pedals 2.8 ± 1.0 MPa
in neutral {28 ± 10 kg/cm2}
Travel lever moved halfway 2.2 ± 0.1 MPa
(No-load travel operation of
one side) {22.5 ± 1 kg/cm2}

tools and return the removed parts. 4. After finishing adjustment, check again that the
Insert the removed connector V5 of the LS differential pressure is normal according to
solenoid valve in its original position. the above described test procedure.
PC130-8 39
Testing solenoid valve output a Since hoses (2) – (6) are installed under
pressure 1 the control valve, remove the control valve
undercover.
a Testing tools for solenoid valve output pressure
1
799-401-3100 Adapter (Size: 02)
N 2
799-401-3200 Adapter (Size: 03)
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
3
07002-11023 O-ring
a Before testing the solenoid valve output pres-

sure, check that the control circuit basic pres-
sure is normal.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground
2. Install adapter N2 and connect the discon-
and stop the engine. Operate the control
nected hoses again.
lever several times to release the residual
pressure from the piping, and then loosen
3. Install nipple N3 and connect it to pressure
the oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly
gauge [1] of hydraulic tester N1.
to release the residual pressure from the
a Use the oil pressure gauge of 5.9 MPa {60
tank.
kg/cm2}.
a The testing tools installed to the outlet
1. Disconnect hoses (1) – (6) of the solenoid
hose of the PPC lock solenoid valve are
valves to be tested.
shown in the figure.
No. Solenoid valve to be tested
1 PPC lock solenoid valve
2 Pump merge-divider solenoid valve
3 Travel junction solenoid valve
4 Travel speed selector solenoid valve
5 Swing holding brake solenoid valve
6 2-stage relief solenoid valve
a Since hose (1) is installed under the cab,

remove the cab undercover (rear one).
4. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil

temperature to the operating range.
40 PC130-8
5. Run the engine at high idle and operate the

control levers and switches and test the pres-
sure when each solenoid valve is turned ON or
OFF.
a For the conditions for turning each sole-
noid valve ON and OFF, see the table for
functioning conditions of each solenoid
valve.
a The operating conditions of the solenoid
valves can be checked with the monitoring
function of the machine monitor (special
function of the machine monitor).
a If the output pressure of a solenoid valve
is as follows, that solenoid valve is normal.
Solenoid valve Output pressure
OFF (Demagnetized) 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Almost same as control
ON (Magnetized) basic pressure
(See standard values table)

Table for functioning conditions - PPC lock

solenoid valve
Operating condition Functioning
Work equipment lock LOCK OFF
lever RESET ON
PC130-8 41
Table for functioning conditions - 2-stage relief solenoid valve

Functioning condition Functioning
When overheat setting of the 1st stage is ON
When overheat setting of the 2nd stage is ON OFF
When all the signals for work equipment, swing and travel are OFF
When swing lock switch is ON
When travel signal is ON
ON
When working mode is L mode
When left knob switch is If signals other than swing operation only is ON
In P/ATT mode/E mode
ON If swing operation only is ON
OFF
In conditions other than above
Table for functioning conditions - travel speed shifting solenoid valve

When overheat setting of the 2nd stage is ON
When the fuel dial indicates less than 1500 rpm
When the travel speed switch is at Lo
OFF
The travel signal is OFF
If front or rear pump pressure is
When the travel speed
32.3 MPa {330 kg/cm2}
switch is at Hi The travel signal is ON
If front or rear pump pressure is
17.6 MPa {180 kg/cm2} ON
In conditions other than above
Table for functioning conditions - swing holding brake solenoid

Swing signal
When any of them is ON ON
Arm in signal
Elapsed time after failure of above condition < 5 sec ON
Other than above OFF
Table for functioning conditions - travel junction solenoid valve

Steering judgment ON ON
Other than above OFF
42 PC130-8
Functioning conditions - merge/divide solenoid valve
PC130-8 43
Testing PPC valve output a Install nipple P3 to adapter P2 and mea-

pressure 1 sure the travel PPC pressure at the valve
box elbow.
a Testing tools for PPC valve output pressure
1
P 2 799-401-3100 Adapter (Size: 02)
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
3
07002-11023 O-ring
a Test PPC valve output pressure after confirm-

ing that control circuit original pressure is nor-
mal.
1. Remove PPC oil pressure switches (1) through

(10) in the hydraulic circuits to be tested. Con- 2. Fit fitting [2] of hydraulic tester P and connect
nector numbers are shown in brackets ( ). oil pressure gauge [1].
a Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity
No. Circuit to be tested No. Circuit to be tested of 5.9 MPa {60 kg/cm2}.
1 Boom, RAISE (P06) 5 Bucket, CURL (P01) a The testing tools installed to the mounting
2 Boom, LOWER (P02) 6 Bucket, DUMP (P05) part of the boom RAISE PPC oil pressure
switch are shown in the figure.
3 Arm, IN (P04) 7 Swing, left (P07)
4 Arm, OUT (P08) 8 Swing, right (P03)
a (1) – (8) are installed to the PPC junction

block in the rear of the cab.
3. Start the engine and keep it running until the

hydraulic oil temperature rises to the operating
range.
a Turn OFF the auto-decelerator switch.
44 PC130-8
4. Test the pressure when the engine is running Adjusting play of work equipment
at high idle and the control lever of the circuit to and swing PPC valves 1
be tested is kept in the NEUTRAL position and
at the full stroke. a If the right and left work equipment levers have
a If PPC valve output pressure is at the level large play, adjust them according to the follow-
shown below, it is judged normal. ing procedure.
a The play of the lever terminal must be 0.5 – 3
Lever control Hydraulic pressure mm at a position of 200 mm from the center of
In NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} lever rotation.
Nearly equal to control
At full stroke original pressure 1. Remove the work equipment and swing PPC
(See standard value table) valve assembly.
5. Detach all the test tools, and make sure that 2. Remove bellows (1).
the machine is back to normal condition.
3. Loosen locknut (2) and tighten disc (3) until it
touches the heads of 4 pistons (4).
4. Fix disc (3) and tighten locknut (2) to the speci-

fied torque.
3 Locknut: 69 – 88 Nm {7 – 9 kgm}
5. Install bellows (1).
6. Install the work equipment and swing PPC

valve assembly.
PC130-8 45
Checking parts which cause 2. Checking arm cylinder

hydraulic drift of work 1) Stop the arm cylinder about 100 mm before
the IN stroke end and stop the engine.
equipment 1
a If the work equipment (cylinder) drifts hydrauli-
cally, check to see if the cause is on the cylin-
d e r pa c k i n g s i d e o r c o n t r o l v a l v e s i d e
1. Checking boom cylinder and bucket cylinder

1) Set the machine in the position for testing
hydraulic drift and stop the engine.
a Fill the bucket with a rated load or
with dirt and sand.
2) Operate the arm control lever in the IN

position.
q If the lowering speed is increased at
this time, the cylinder packing is
defective.
q If the lowering speed does not change
at this time, the control valve is defec-
tive.
a Operate the control lever while the
starting switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is
2) When checking the boom cylinder, set the lost, run the engine for about 5 sec-
boom control lever in the RAISE position. onds to heighten the pressure in the
When checking the bucket cylinder, set the accumulator.
bucket control lever in the CURL position. [Reference]
q If the lowering speed is increased at this Reason why the lowering speed is increased
time, the cylinder packing is defective. by the above operation when the cylinder
q If the lowering speed does not change at packing is the cause of the hydraulic drift:
this time, the control valve is defective. 1) If the machine is set in the above position
a Operate the control lever while the (where the holding pressure is applied to
starting switch is in the ON position. the bottom side), the oil leaks from the
a If the pressure in the accumulator is bottom side to the head side. Since the
lost, run the engine for about 5 sec- volume on the head side is less than that
onds to heighten the pressure in the on the bottom side by the volume of the
accumulator. rod, the pressure in the head side is
increased by the oil flowing in from the
bottom side.
2) As the pressure in the head side is
increased, it is balanced at a certain level
(which depends on the leakage), and then
the lowering speed is lowered.
3) If the circuit on the head side is opened to
the drain circuit by the above operation of
the lever (the bottom side is closed by the
check valve at this time), the oil on the
head side flows in the drain circuit. As a
result, the pressure is unbalanced and the
lowering speed is increased.
46 PC130-8
3. Checking PPC valve

While the pressure in the accumulator is high,
set the lock lever in the LOCK/FREE position
and test the lowering distance.
a Operate the control lever while the starting
switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost,
run the engine for about 5 seconds to
heighten the pressure in the accumulator.
a If there is a difference in the lowering dis-
tance between the LOCK position and
FREE position, the PPC valve is defective
(it has an internal defect).
PC130-8 47
Testing and adjusting travel deviation 1
Inspection
1. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil
temperature to the operating range and set the
machine in the travel posture.
a To set the machine in the travel posture,
extract the bucket cylinder and arm cylin-
der fully and set the boom angle to 45°.
2. Set the working mode to P and travel speed to

Lo.
3. Run up for 10 m with the engine speed at high

idle and continue travel under the same condi-
tion for 20 m and test the deviation (a).
a Install an oil pressure gauge and check
that the P1 and P2 discharge pressures of
the hydraulic pump are even.
48 PC130-8
Adjustment 2. Fixing plug (3) with a hexagonal wrench (Width

a If the machine deviates, it can be corrected by across flats: 4 mm), loosen locknut (4).
partially draining the oil discharged more from a If the locknut is sealed with a vinyl tape,
the pump through the travel deviation adjusting remove that tape.
plug. (If the travel deviation is corrected by this a Before loosening the locknut, make match
method, however, the pump discharge is marks on it and pump case.
reduced. As a result, the travel speed, work q Loosening angle of locknut: Approx. 90 –
equipment speed in compound operation, and 180°
relief pressure may lower.)
a If the machine deviates in the same direction
regardless of the travel direction, correct it
according to the following procedure. (If the
deviating direction of the machine depends on
the travel direction, the cause of deviation may
not be in the hydraulic pump. In this case,
carry out troubleshooting.)
a Only when the travel deviation is 200 mm or
less, it can be corrected by the following
method.
k If the adjusting plug is loosened more than
the adjustment limit, high-pressure oil will
spout out. Take care extremely.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground
3. Loosen plug (3) to adjust the travel deviation.
and stop the engine. Operate the control q Quantity of adjustment of deviation per
lever several times to release the residual turn of plug: 150 mm (Reference)
pressure from the piping, and then loosen a The plug is fully tightened when shipped.
the oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly Adjust the deviation by the loosening
to release the residual pressure from the angle of the plug from the fully tightened
tank. position.
a If the plug is turned together with the lock-
1. Check the deviating direction and the locations nut, tighten it fully again, then start adjust-
of travel deviation adjusting plugs (1) and (2). ment.
q (1): Right deviation adjusting plug (P1 a The plug can be loosened by 2 turns
pump) (720°) from the fully tightened position.
q (2): Left deviation adjusting plug (P2
pump) 4. Fixing plug (3) with a hexagonal wrench,
a Loosen only the plug on either side for tighten locknut (4).
3 Locknut: 2.9 – 4.9 Nm {0.3 – 0.5 kgm}
adjustment. Do not loosen the plugs on
both sides. a After tightening the locknut, seal its hole
with a vinyl tape.
5. After finishing adjustment, check travel devia-

tion again according to the procedure for
inspection described above.
PC130-8 49
Releasing residual pressure from 4) Repeat steps 2) and 3) above 2 – 3 times,

hydraulic circuit 1 and the residual pressure in the piping is
released completely.
1. Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic
tank 3. Releasing residual pressure from swing
k Since the hydraulic tank is enclosed motor circuit
and pressurized, release the residual The residual pressure in the swing motor cir-
pressure from it when removing a hose cuit can be released by performing the opera-
or a plug connected to it. tion for "Releasing residual pressure from
1) Lower the work equipment to the ground hydraulic cylinder circuit" (Operate the lever in
in a stable position and stop the engine. the swing direction only, however).
2) Loosen oil filler cap (1) of the hydraulic
tank gradually to release the air in the 4. Releasing residual pressure from travel
tank. motor circuit
Since the control valve spool of the travel
motor circuit is open, the pressure in this circuit
can be released by performing "Releasing
residual pressure from hydraulic tank".
2. Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic

cylinder circuit
k When disconnecting a pipe between a
hydraulic cylinder and the control
valve, release the residual pressure
from the piping according to the follow-
ing procedure.
1) Lower the work equipment and release the
residual pressure from the hydraulic tank.
For details, see "Releasing residual pres-
sure from hydraulic tank".
a Keep the oil filler cap of the hydraulic
tank removed.
2) Turn the starting switch ON and set the
lock lever in the FREE position, and then
operate the right and left work equipment
control levers forward, backward, to the
right, and to the left.
a The control valve is operated by the
pressure in the accumulator. The
pressure in the accumulator is used
up, however, after the control valve is
operated 2 – 3 times.
3) Run the engine at low idle for 5 seconds to
heighten the pressure in the accumulator.
a The engine does not start until the
lock lever is set in the LOCK position
once.
50 PC130-8
Testing oil leakage 1 2. Testing oil leakage from arm cylinder

1) Move the arm cylinder to the IN stroke end
a Testing tools for oil leakage and stop the engine.
Symbol Part No. Part name k Release the residual pressure from
the piping on the arm cylinder
Commercially
Q Measuring cylinder head side. For details, see Releas-
available
ing residual pressure from hydrau-
a Test the oil leakage under the following condi- lic circuit (Operate the lever in the
tion. arm IN direction only, however).
q Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operating 2) Disconnect hose (2) on the cylinder head
side and block it with a plug.
k Take care not to disconnect the
range
1. Testing oil leakage from boom cylinder hose on the cylinder bottom side.
1) Move the boom cylinder to the RAISE a Use the following part to block the
stroke end and stop the engine. hose side.
k Release the residual pressure from
07376-70522 (Plug #05)
the piping on the boom cylinder
head side. For details, see "Releas-
lic circuit" (Operate the lever in the
boom RAISE direction only, how-
ever).
2) Disconnect hose (1) on the cylinder head
hose on the cylinder bottom side.
a Use the following part to block the
hose side.
07379-00640 (Flange #06)
3) Run the engine at high idle and relieve the

arm circuit by moving the arm IN.
k Take care not to "move the arm
OUT".
4) Start testing the oil leakage 30 seconds
after relieving is started and test for 1
minute.
5) After finishing test, return the removed
parts.

boom circuit by raising the boom.
k Take care not to "lower the boom".
minute.
parts.
PC130-8 51
3. Testing oil leakage from bucket cylinder 4. Testing oil leakage from swing motor
1) Move the bucket cylinder to the CURL 1) Disconnect 2 drain hoses (4) and block
stroke end and stop the engine. the hose side with plugs.
k Release the residual pressure from a Use the following parts to block the
the piping on the bucket cylinder hose side.
head side. For details, see Releas- 07376-70315 (Plug #03)
lic circuit (Operate the lever in the
bucket CURL direction only, how-
ever).
2) Disconnect hose (3) on the cylinder head
hose on the cylinder bottom side.
hose side.
07376-70422 (Plug #04)
2) Turn the swing lock switch ON.

swing circuit by swinging.
a Start testing the oil leakage 30 sec-
onds after relieving is started and test
for 1 minute.
a After testing 1 time, swing 180°, and
then test again.
parts.

bucket circuit by curling the bucket.
k Take care not to "dump the bucket".
minute.
parts.
52 PC130-8
5. Testing oil leakage from travel motor 5) After finishing test, return the removed
1) Remove the travel motor cover. parts.
2) Run the engine, lock the travel mecha-
nism, and stop the engine.
k Put pin [1] between the sprocket
and track frame to lock the travel
mechanism securely.
3) Disconnect drain hose (5) of the travel

motor and block the hose side with a plug.
hose side.
07376-70422 (Plug #04)
4) Run the engine at high idle, relieve the

travel circuit, and test the oil leakage.
k Before operating the travel lever,
check the position and locking
direction of the locked sprocket
again.
k Wrong operation of the lever can
cause an accident. Accordingly,
make signs and checks securely.
a Start testing the oil leakage 30 sec-
onds after relieving is started and test
for 1 minute.
a Test several times, moving the motor
a little (changing the position of the
valve plate and cylinder and that of
the cylinder and piston) each time.
PC130-8 53
Bleeding air from each part 1

Air bleeding procedure
Air bleeding item
1 2 3 4 5 6
Bleeding air Checking oil
Bleeding air Bleeding air
from Starting Bleeding air level and
from swing from travel
Contents of work hydraulic engine from cylinder starting
motor motor
pump operation
• Replacing hydraulic oil q q
q q q q
• Cleaning strainer (See note) (See note)
• Replacing return filter element q o o o q
• Replacing and repairing hydraulic
pump q q q o o q
• Removing suction piping
• Replacing and repairing control
valve q q o o q
• Removing control valve piping
• Replacing and repairing cylinder
q q o o q
• Removing cylinder piping
• Replacing and repairing swing
motor q o q o q
• Removing swing motor piping
• Replacing and repairing travel
motor q o o q q
• Removing travel motor piping
• Replacing and repairing swivel joint
q o o o q
• Removing swivel joint piping
Note: Bleed air from the swing motor and travel motor only when the oil in the motor cases is drained.
1. Bleeding air from hydraulic pump 2. Starting engine

1) Loosen air bleeder (1) and check that oil When running the engine after performing step
oozes out through the air bleeder. 1, keep its speed at low idle for 10 minutes.
2) After the oil oozes out, tighten air bleeder
(1). 3. Bleeding air from cylinder
3 Air bleeder: a If a cylinder is replaced, bleed air from it
7.8 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm} before connecting the work equipment. In
a Do not use an impact wrench to particular, the boom cylinder does not
tighten the air bleeder. move to the lowering stroke end, if it is
installed to the work equipment.
1) Run the engine at low idle for about 5 min-
utes.
2) While running the engine at low idle, raise
and lower the boom 4 – 5 times.
a Stop the piston rod about 100 mm
b efo re e ac h s tr ok e en d. Do no t
relieve the oil.
3) While running the engine at high idle, per-
form step 2).
4) While running the engine at low idle, move
the piston rod to the stroke end and
relieve the oil.
5) Bleed air from the arm cylinder and bucket
cylinder according to steps 2) – 4).
54 PC130-8
4. Bleeding air from swing motor 6. Checking oil level and starting work
1) Turn the swing lock switch "ON" and run 1) Run the engine, retract the arm cylinder
the engine at low idle for 5 minutes. and bucket cylinder to the stroke ends,
a Bleed air from the swing motor by lower the work equipment to the ground,
applying the S-port pressure. and stop the engine.
2) Remove the swing motor top cover, dis-
connect hose (1) from the swing motor,
and block the hose with a plug.
a Use the following plug to block the
hose.
07379-70628 (Plug #06)
2) Check the oil level by sight gauge (4) on

the rear side of the hydraulic tank.
a If the oil level is below line L, it is
insufficient. Add oil.
a The oil level changes according to the
oil temperature. Add oil when the oil
3) Run the engine at low idle and check that level is out of the following standard
oil flows out of elbow (2). ranges.
a If no oil flows out of the elbow, per- q When oil temperature is 10 – 30°C:
form step 1) again. Between line H and line L
4) Connect hose (1) under its normal condi- q When oil temperature is 50 – 80°C:
tion. Near line H
5. Bleeding air from travel motor

1) Remove the travel motor cover and dis-
connect motor drain hose (2).
2) Run the engine at low idle and check that
oil flows out of nipple (3).
PC130-8 55
Checking cab tipping stopper 1
a Check the cab tipping stopper according to the

following procedure.
1. Remove the additional undercover from the

rear of the operator's cab.
2. Check the tightening torque of the mounting

bolt (2) of the lock plate (1).
3 Bolt (2): 98 – 123 Nm {10 – 12.5 kgm}
[Reference]
q The tightening torque of mounting bolt (4) of
cab tipping stopper (3) is different from that of
a common bolt 30 mm in diameter. Take care.
3 Bolt (4): 245 – 309 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
56 PC130-8
Installation and adjustment of Tightening torque of mirror bolt (2):

mirrors and camera 1 4.0 – 5.4 Nm {0.41 – 0.55 kgm}
Tightening torque of mirror stay bolt (3):
15 Nm {1.52 kgm}
a If the tightening torque is low, the bolts
may be dragged. If the former is too high,
the body may be broken.
1. Installation of retractable mirrors

Install retractable mirrors (a1) and (b1) as
shown in the figure.
q Retractable mirror (a1): Install at 20 mm
(from the bottom of the intermediate stay). Retract the mirror into position (C) when
Install mirror stay (1) so that the mirror will transporting the machine.
be fixed at (A) of the 3 stopping positions
where the mirror is extracted most and at q Retractable mirror (b1): Install at 65 mm
an angle of about 73° to the intermediate (from the top of the stay). Install mirror
stay. stay (4) so that the mirror will be fixed at
a If the mirrors are not installed to the cor- (A) of the 3 stopping positions where the
rect positions, they may interfere with the mirror is extracted most and at an angle of
exterior parts. about 19° to the side of the machine body.
a If the mirrors are not installed to the cor-
rect positions, they may interfere with the
exterior parts.
PC130-8 57
Tightening torque of mirror bolt (5):

4.0 – 5.4 Nm {0.41 – 0.55 kgm}
Tightening torque of mirror stay bolt (6):
15 Nm {1.52 kgm}
a If the tightening torque is low, the bolts
may be dragged. If the former is too high,
the body may be broken.
Retract the mirror into position (C) when

transporting the machine.
2. Installation of fixed mirror

Install fixed mirror (c1) as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque of mirror bolt (7):

4.0 – 5.4 Nm {0.41 – 0.55 kgm}
3. Adjustment of retractable mirrors

1) Adjust the retractable mirrors at position
A.
2) With retractable mirrors (a1) and (b1)
open, loosen mirror bolts (1) and (2) and
stay mounting bolts (3) and (4) and adjust
the mirrors so that the operator can see
the right and left rear views best which are
blind corners from the operator's seat.
a Adjust the mirror so that the operator can
see persons (or things 1 m high and about
30 cm in diameter) at the right and left rear
ends of the machine.
a Take care not to tighten stay mounting
bolts (3) and (4) (If they are tightened to
strongly, the stay may be broken since it is
made by die-casting).
58 PC130-8
3) Tighten the stay mounting bolts so that the If the image projected on the monitor deviates,
clearance to the stay mating face will be remove cover (4) and adjust installed angle (A)
even. of the rear view monitor camera.
4. Adjustment of fixed mirror

Loosen mirror bolt (3) and adjust the mirror so
that the operator can see a person at the right
front end from the operator's seat.
1) To remove cover (1), insert a flat-head

screwdriver etc. in hole (3) at the top of
cover (2) to push the inside claw and
remove the cover.
2) Remove 2 bolts (4) and remove cover (1).
5. Adjustment of rear view monitor camera
angle
Adjust the rear view monitor camera so that
the operator can see persons on the ground at
1 m around the machine from the operator's
seat.
PC130-8 59
3) Loosen camera mounting bolt (5) and

adjust the installed angle of the camera so
that the center of mounting bolt (5) will be
set to 4th scale mark (B) from the bottom.
a A part of the machine is projected on the

monitor.
4) After adjusting, tighten bolt (5).
60 PC130-8
Inspection of air conditioner 2. Cleaning of fresh air filter

Recirc/Fresh air filter 1 1) Unlock (2) at the left rear of the operator's
cab with the key (starting switch key).
If the filters are clogged, the air flow decreases and While holding cover (2) open with your
a muffled hum of the air conditioner unit is heard. hand, take filter (3) out of the cover.
2) Clean the filter with compressed air. If it is
Cleaning of air conditioner Recirc/Fresh
stained with oil or very dirty, wash it in
air filters water and neutral detergent. After wash-
k
ing, dry sufficiently and then install.
When using compressed air, put on protec- If the dirt clogging the filter cannot be
tive glasses, dust mask and other protec- removed with compressed air or water,
tive gears since dirt will scatter and it can replace the filter.
cause serious injury or death.
3) After filter (3), return it and close the cover.
Then, lock the cover with the key (starting
1. Cleaning of recirculated air filter
switch key). Take care not to forget to pull
1) Remove wing bolt (1) of the inspection out the key (starting switch key).
hole at the inside left rear bottom of the
operator's cab and remove the recircu-
lated air filter.
2) Clean the filter with compressed air. If it is
stained with oil or very dirty, wash it in
water and neutral detergent. After wash-
ing, dry sufficiently and then install.
If the dirt clogging the filter cannot be
removed with compressed air or water,
replace the filter with new one.
a Since the recirculated air filter has
directional properties, install it with
the projection side toward the front of
the machine.
a Since fresh air filter (3) has directional
properties, insert it with longer side
(L) ahead. If it is inserted with shorter
side (S) ahead, cover (2) cannot be
closed.
PC130-8 61

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
62 PC130-8
SEN04115-02
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Special functions of machine monitor ............................................................................................................. 2
PC130-8 1
Special functions of machine monitor 1

Air conditioner specification
2 PC130-8
Upper section of machine monitor (Display sec-

tion)
(a): Multi-display
a When the engine is started, the battery voltage
may lower suddenly, depending on the ambi-
ent temperature and the condition of the bat-
tery. In this case, the machine monitor goes off
for a moment. This phenomenon is not a fail-
ure, however.
Upper section of machine monitor (Switch sec-

tion)
[F1]: F1 function switch
a The function of each function switch is indi-
cated by graphic mark in the multi-display (a)
above that function switch.
a If the graphic mark of a function switch is not
displayed, that function switch is not working.
Lower section of machine monitor (Switch sec-

tion)
[1]: Numeral 1 input switch/Auto-decelerator
switch
[2]: Numeral 2 input switch/Working mode selector
switch
[3]: Numeral 3 input switch/Travel speed shifting
switch
[4]: Numeral 4 input switch/Alarm buzzer cancel
switch
[5]: Numeral 5 input switch/Wiper switch
[6]: Numeral 6 input switch/Windshield washer
switch
[7]: Numeral 7 input switch/Air conditioner or
heater switch
heater switch
heater switch
heater switch
Switch having no numerals: Air conditioner or
heater switch
a Each switch has the function indicated by
graphic mark and the function of inputting a
numeral.
a The machine monitor automatically judges
which function of each switch is currently effec-
tive, according to the display condition of multi-
display.
PC130-8 3
t Ordinary functions and special functions of machine monitor

The machine monitor has the ordinary function and special functions and displays information of various
types on the multi-display.
Some items are displayed automatically according to the internal setting of the machine monitor and the oth-
ers are displayed according to the operation of the switches.
1. Ordinary functions: Operator mode
The items in this mode are displayed ordinarily. The operator can display and set them by operating the
switches (Display and setting of some items need special operations of the switches).
2. Special functions: Service mode
The items in this mode are not displayed ordinarily. Each serviceman can display them by operating the
switches specially. This mode is used for special setting, testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
Page Page
t Operator mode (Outline) Service mode
6p 19p
A Display of KOMATSU logo 6p Monitoring 20p
A Display of inputting password 7p Mechanical Systems 25p
Abnormality
A Display of check of breaker mode 7p Electrical Systems 26p
Record
A Display of check before starting 7p Air-conditioning System 31p
A Display of warning after check before starting 7p Maintenance Record 32p
A Display of ending of maintenance interval 8p Maintenance Mode Change 33p
A Display of check of working mode and travel speed 8p Phone Number Entry 35p
A Display of ordinary screen 8p Key-on Mode 36p
A Display of end screen 8p Unit 37p
O (Special operation)
B Selection of auto-deceleration 9p With/Without Attachment 38p

Default
B Selection of working mode 9p Attachment/Maintenance Password 39p
B Selection of travel speed 10p Camera 40p
B Operation to stop alarm buzzer 10p ECO Display 41p
B Operation of windshield wiper 10p Pump Absorption Torque 42p
Adjustment
B Operation of window washer 10p Attachment Flow Adjustment 43p
B Operation of air conditioner/heater 11p Cylinder Cut-Out 44p
B Operation to display camera mode 11p No Injection 45p
B Operation to display clock and service meter 12p Fuel Consumption 47p
B Check of maintenance information 12p Terminal Status 48p
KOMTRAX
Setting and display of user mode GPS & Communication Status 49p
B 13p Settings
(Including KOMTRAX messages for user)
MODEM S/N (TH300) 50p
C Display of energy-saving guidance 14p
Display of KOMTRAX message 51p
C Display of caution monitor 14p
C Display of user code and failure code 14p
O (Special operation)
Function of checking display of LCD
D 16p
(Liquid Crystal Display)
D Function of checking service meter 16p
Function of changing attachment/maintenance
D 17p
password
4 PC130-8
a Classification of operator mode

A: Display/Function from time when starting switch is turned ON to time when screen changes to ordi-
nary screen and display after starting switch is turned OFF
B: Display/Function when switch of machine monitor is operated
C: Display/Function when certain condition is satisfied
D: Display/Function which needs special operation of switch
PC130-8 5
t Operator mode (Outline) a Display pattern of operator mode

a Only outline of the operator mode is described The contents of display from the time when
in this section. For details of contents/opera- starting switch is turned ON to time when
tion of each function/display, see the Structure, screen changes to ordinary screen depends on
function and maintenance standard, or Opera- the setting and condition of the machine.
tion and Maintenance Manual. A : When engine start lock is set effective
a The following are the displays or functions of B : When engine start lock is set ineffective
the operator mode explained in this section C : When working mode at start is set to
(including some items which need special breaker mode (B)
operations). D : When there is abnormal item in check-
before-starting items
Display pattern E : When there is maintenance item which is
A B C D E not maintained after specified interval
Display of KOMATSU logo 1 1 1 1 1
Display of inputting password 2 — — — —
Display of check before starting 3 2 3 2 2
Display of KOMATSU logo
Display of warning after check
— — — 3 — When the s tarting switch is turned ON, the
before starting
Display of ending of maintenance KOMATSU logo is displayed for 2 seconds.
interval
— — — — 3 a After the KOMATSU logo is displayed for 2
Display of check of working mode seconds, the screen changes to "Display of
4 3 4 4 4 inputting password", or "Display of check
and travel speed
Display of ordinary screen 5 4 5 5 5 before starting".
Selection of auto-deceleration
Selection of working mode
Selection of travel speed
Operation of windshield wiper
Operation of windshield washer
Operation of air conditioner
Operation to display camera mode
Operation to display clock and service meter
Check of maintenance information
Setting and display of user mode (including a The following screen may be displayed instead
KOMTRAX messages for user) of the above Display of inputting password
Display of energy-saving guidance screen.
Display of caution monitor a If this screen is displayed, call the person
Display of user code and failure code responsible to operation of KOMTRAX in your
O (Special operation) Komatsu distributor and ask for remedy.
Function of checking display of LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display)
Function of checking service meter
Function of changing attachment/maintenance pass-
word
6 PC130-8
Display of inputting password Display of check before starting

After the KOMATSU logo is displayed, the screen When the screen changes to the check-before-
to input the engine start lock password is displayed. starting screen, the check before starting is carried
a This screen is displayed only when the engine out for 2 seconds.
start lock function is set effective. a If any abnormality is detected by the check
a If the password is input normally, the screen before starting, the screen changes to "Display
changes to "Display of check before starting". of warning after check before starting" or "Dis-
a The machine monitor has some password play of ending of maintenance interval".
functions other than the engine start lock. a If no abnormality is detected by the check
Those functions are independent from one before starting, the screen changes to "Display
another. of check of working mode and travel speed".
a The monitors (3 pieces) displayed on the screen
are the items under the check before starting.
Display of check of breaker mode

When the starting switch is turned ON, if the work-
ing mode is set to the breaker mode [B], a message Display of warning after check before starting
to inform the operator of starting in the breaker If any abnormality is detected by the check before
mode is displayed on the screen. starting, the warning monitor is displayed on the
k If an attachment other than the breaker is screen.
used while the working mode is set to the a The following figure shows that the engine oil
breaker mode [B], the machine may move level monitor (a) is warning of low of engine oil
unexpectedly or may not operate normally level.
or the hydraulic components may be dam-
aged.
a After operation to check of the breaker mode is
finished, the screen changes to "Display of check
before starting".
If No is selected: Working mode is set to econ-
omy mode [E]
If Yes is selected: Working mode is set to breaker
mode [B]
PC130-8 7
Display of ending of maintenance interval Display of ordinary screen

When the check before starting is carried out, if a If the machine monitor starts normally, the ordinary
maintenance item is near or after the end of the set screen is displayed.
interval, the maintenance monitor is displayed for a Service meter (a) or a clock is displayed at the
30 seconds to urge the operator to maintenance. center upper section of the screen (The ser-
a This screen is displayed only when the mainte- vice meter or clock is selected with [F4]).
nance function is effective. The color of the a ECO gauge (b) is displayed at the right end of
maintenance monitor (yellow or red) indicates the screen (It is turned ON and OFF in the ser-
the length of the time after the maintenance vice mode).
interval.
a Set or change the maintenance function in the
service mode.
a After display of this screen is finished, the
screen changes to "Display of check of work-
ing mode and travel speed".

When the starting switch is turned OFF, the end
screen is displayed for 5 seconds.
a Another message may be displayed on the
end screen, depending on the message dis-
play function of KOMTRAX.
Display of check of working mode and travel
speed
If the check before starting is finished normally, the
screen to check the working mode and travel speed
is displayed for 2 seconds.
a After display of check of the working mode and
travel speed is finished, the screen changes to
"Display of ordinary screen".
8 PC130-8
Selection of auto-deceleration q [F4]: Move to upper working mode

While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the auto- q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to ordi-
deceleration switch is pressed, large auto-deceler- nary screen
ation monitor (a) is displayed for 2 seconds and the q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to ordi-
setting of the auto-deceleration is changed. nary screen
a Each time the auto-deceleration switch is Working mode selector switch
pressed, the auto-deceleration is turned ON q Press: Move to lower working mode
and OFF alternately. q Hold down:Confirm selection and return to
a If the auto-deceleration is turned ON, large ordinary screen
monitor (a) and auto-deceleration monitor (b) a If you do not touch any of the function
are displayed simultaneously. switches and working mode selector
a If the auto-deceleration is turned OFF, auto- switch for 5 seconds, the selection is con-
deceleration monitor (b) goes off. firmed and the screen changes to the ordi-
nary screen.
3. When the ordinary screen is displayed again,

Selection of working mode large working mode monitor (a) is displayed for
Select a working mode according to the following 2 seconds, and then the setting of the working
procedure. mode is changed.
1. While the ordinary screen is displayed, press a When large monitor (a) is displayed, the
the working mode selector switch, and the display of working mode monitor (b) is
working mode selection screen is displayed. changed, too.
a The following figure is the working mode
selection screen displayed when "With
attachment" is set (If "With attachment" is
not set in the service mode, the attach-
ment mode [ATT] is not displayed).
<Precautions for selecting breaker mode [B]>

q If breaker mode [B] is selected, both of the
control of the hydraulic pump and the setting of
the hydraulic circuit are changed.
2. Operate the function switches or working mode q If an attachment other than the breaker is
selector switch to select and confirm the work- used, the machine may move unexpectedly or
ing mode which you will use. may not operate normally or the hydraulic
Function switches components may be damaged.
q [F3]: Move to lower working mode
PC130-8 9
Selection of travel speed Operation of windshield wiper

While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the travel While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the wiper
speed shifting switch is pressed, large travel speed switch is pressed, large wiper monitor (a) is dis-
monitor (a) is displayed for 2 seconds and the set- played for 2 seconds and the windshield wiper
ting of the travel speed is changed. starts or stops.
a Each time the travel speed shifting switch is a Each time the wiper switch is pressed, the
pressed, the travel speed is changed to Lo, Hi, windshield wiper setting is changed to INT,
and Lo again in order. ON, OFF, and INT again in order.
a When large monitor (a) is displayed, the dis- a When large monitor (a) is displayed, the dis-
play of travel speed monitor (b) is changed, play of wiper monitor (b) is changed or turned
too. OFF, too.
a If the windshield wiper is turned OFF, large
monitor (a) is not displayed.

While the alarm buzzer is sounding, if the alarm
buzzer cancel switch is pressed, the alarm buzzer Operation of window washer
stops. While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the win-
a Even if the alarm buzzer cancel switch is dow washer switch is pressed, the washing liquid is
pressed, the screen does not change. splashed only while the switch is held down.
a Even if the window washer switch is pressed,
the screen does not change.
10 PC130-8
Operation of air conditioner/heater Operation to display camera mode

While the ordinary screen is displayed, press the air When a camera is installed, if [F3] is pressed, the
conditioner switch and the air conditioner adjust- multi-display changes to the camera image (Set the
ment screen is displayed. connection of the camera in the service mode).
a While the air conditioner adjustment screen is
displayed, if you do not touch any switch for 5
seconds, the screen changes to the ordinary
screen.
a Air conditioner specification
a If a caution is generated in the camera mode,

the caution monitor is displayed at the left
upper of the screen (The low hydraulic oil tem-
perature caution is not displayed there, how-
ever).
a When an error that there is a user code occurs

in the camera mode, if you do not touch any
control lever for 10 seconds, the screen
changes to the ordinary screen and displays
the error information.
PC130-8 11
Operation to display clock and service meter Check of maintenance information

While the ordinary screen is displayed, press [F4], While the maintenance monitor or ordinary screen
and section (a) changes to the service meter and is displayed, press [F5], and the maintenance table
clock alternately. screen is displayed.
a When the clock is selected, adjust the time, set
12-hour or 24-hour display, and set the sum-
mer time with the user mode function.
a To reset the time left after finishing mainte-

nance, more operations are necessary.
12 PC130-8
Setting and display of user mode [KOMTRAX message]

(Including KOMTRAX messages for user) q There are 2 types of KOMTRAX message; 1 is
While the ordinary screen is displayed, press [F6], for the user and the other is for the service.
and the user menu screen is displayed. q For user:
A message transmitted from the KOMTRAX
base station for the user. If it is received, the
message monitor is displayed on the ordinary
screen. To see the contents of the message,
operate "User Message" in the above user
menu.
q For service:
A message transmitted from the KOMTRAX
base station for the service. Even if it is
received, nothing is displayed on the ordinary
screen. To see the contents of the message,
operate "KOMTRAX message" display in the
service menu.
a There are following items in the user menu.

Breaker/Attachment Settings
User Message
Screen Adjustment
Clock Adjustment
Language
Economy Mode Adjustment
a The breaker/attachment setting menu is dis-

played only when "With attachment" is set in
the service mode.
PC130-8 13
Display of energy-saving guidance Display of user code and failure code

When the machine is set in a certain operating con- If an abnormality which displays a user code and a
dition, the energy-saving guidance screen is dis- failure code occurs on the ordinary screen or cam-
played automatically to urge the operator to the era mode screen, all the information of the abnor-
energy-saving operation. mality is displayed.
a The energy-saving guidance is displayed when (a): User code (3 digits)
the following condition is satisfied while the (b): Failure code (5 or 6 digits)
display setting is set effective in the service (c): Telephone mark
mode. (d): Telephone No.
a Condition for display: a This screen is displayed only when an abnor-
Engine is running + All levers have been in mality (failure code) for which a user code is
neutral for 5 minutes + Caution (Note) or user set occurs.
code is not generated (Note) a The telephone mark and telephone No. are
Note: Excluding hydraulic oil low temperature displayed only when the telephone No. is reg-
caution istered in the service mode.
a If any lever or pedal is operated, or [F5] is a If multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously,
pressed, the screen returns to the ordinary all the codes are displayed repeatedly in order.
screen. a Since the information of the displayed failure
code is recorded in the abnormality record in
the service mode, check the details in the ser-
vice mode.
Display of caution monitor

If an abnormality which displays a caution monitor
occurs on the ordinary screen or camera mode a When the caution monitor is also displayed,
screen, the caution monitor is displayed large for a the telephone mark is not displayed.
moment and then displayed at (a) in the screen.
a On the camera mode screen, the caution mon-
itor flashes at the left upper of the screen when
the caution is generated.
14 PC130-8
a Remedies given by displayed user codes to operator to take (The following table is an excerpt from the
Operation and Maintenance Manual)
User code Failure mode Action
When emergency pump drive switch is at the up (emergency)
E02 Pump control system error position, normal operations become possible, but have
inspection carried out immediately.
E03 Swing brake system error Have inspection carried out immediately.
Engine controller power source error
E10 Engine controller drive system circuit error Have inspection carried out immediately.
(engine stopped)
Engine controller system error Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried
E11
Output reduced to protect engine out immediately.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried
E14 Abnormality in throttle system
out immediately.
Engine sensor (coolant temperature, fuel Operations are possible, but have inspection carried out
E15
pressure, oil pressure) system error immediately.
Operations are possible, but have inspection carried out
E20 Abnormality in travel system
immediately.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection carried
E0E Network error
out immediately.
PC130-8 15
Function of checking display of LCD (Liquid Function of checking service meter

Crystal Display) To check the service meter while the starting switch
While the ordinary screen is displayed, if the follow- is turned OFF, operate the numeral input switches
ing numeral input switch and function switch are as follows. At this time, only the service meter sec-
operated as follows, all the LCD (Liquid Crystal Dis- tion displays.
play) lights up in white. q Operation of switches (simultaneous): [4] + [1]
q Operation of switches (simultaneous): [4] + [F2] a Since there is some time lag in start of the
a When finishing the operation of the switches, LCD, hold down the switches until the LCD dis-
release [F2] first. plays normally.
a If there is a display error in the LCD, only that a After the machine monitor is used continu-
part is indicated in black. ously, blue points (points which do not go off)
a The LCD panel sometimes has black points may be seen on this screen. This phenomenon
(points which are not lighted) and bright points does not indicate a failure or a defect.
(points which do not go off) for the reason of its
characteristics. If the number of the bright
points and black points does not exceed 10,
those points are not a failure or a defect.
a To return to the former screen, press the func-
tion switch.
16 PC130-8
Function of changing attachment/maintenance 3. After the New password input screen is dis-
password played, input a new password with the numeral
When changing the attachment/maintenance pass- input switches and confirm it with the function
word used for the attachment setting function and switch.
maintenance setting function, follow these proce- a Set a new password of 4 – 6 digits (If it
dures. has only 3 or less digits or has 7 or more
1. While the ordinary screen is displayed, perform digits, it is not accepted).
the following operation with the numeral input q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ordi-
switches. nary screen
q Operation of switches (While pressing [4], q [F6]: Confirm input numeral
perform the operation in order):
[4] + [5] o [5] o [5]
a This operation of the switches is not
accepted until 10 minutes pass after the
starting switch is turned on.
4. After the New password input screen is dis-

played again, input a new password again with
the numeral input switches and confirm it with
the function switch.
q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ordi-
2. After the Attachment/Maintenance PASS- nary screen
WORD screen is displayed, input the current q [F6]: Confirm input numeral
password with the numeral input switches and a If a password different from the password
confirm it with the function switch. input before is input, the message to input
q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ordi- again is displayed.
nary screen
q [F6]: Confirm input numeral
a Default password: [000000]
a If the input password is correct, the screen
changes to the next screen.
a If the input password is incorrect, the mes-
sage to input the password again is dis-
played.
PC130-8 17
5. If the screen to notify completion of setting is

displayed and then the ordinary screen is dis-
played, the password is changed successfully.
18 PC130-8
t Service mode a The items which can be selected in the

To change the operator mode to the service mode, service menu are as follows (including
perform the following operation. some items which need special opera-
This operation is always required when you use the tions).
service mode. 01 Monitoring
Mechanical Systems
1. Check of display of screen and operation of
02 Abnormality
switches Electrical Systems
Record
While the ordinary screen is displayed, perform Air-conditioning System
the following operation with the numeral input 03 Maintenance Record
switches.
04 Maintenance Mode Change
q Operation of switches (While pressing [4],
perform the operation in order): 05 Phone Number Entry
[4] + [1] o [2] o [3] Key-on Mode
a This operation of the switches is accepted Unit
only while the ordinary screen is displayed.
With/Without Attachment
06 Default Attachment/Maintenance
Password
Camera
ECO Display
Pump Absorption Torque
07 Adjustment
Attachment Flow Adjustment
08 Cylinder Cut-Out
09 No Injection
10 Fuel Consumption
Terminal Status
11 KOMTRAX
GPS & Communication Status
Settings
2. Selection of service menu MODEM S/N (TH300)
When the Service menu screen is displayed, 12 Display of service message
the service mode is selected. Select a service
menu you use with the function switches or
numeral input switches.
q [F3]: Move to lower menu
q [F4]: Move to upper menu
q [F5]: Return to ordinary screen (operator
mode)
q [F6]: Confirm selection
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the
numeral input switches to select the menu
of that code and confirm it with [F6].
PC130-8 19
Monitoring
The machine monitor can monitor the condition of
the machine in real time by receiving signals from
various switches, sensors, and actuators installed
to many parts of the machine and the information
from the controllers which are controlling switches,
etc.
1. Selecting menu
Select "Monitoring" on the service menu
screen.
3. Deciding monitoring items

After selecting monitoring items, execute moni-
toring with the function switch or numeral input
switch.
a Execution with function switch: Double-
click or hold down [F6] (about 2 seconds).
a Execution with numeral input switch: Input
[99999] and press [F6].
a When monitoring only 2 items, for exam-
ple, select them and confirm with [F6]. If
[F6] is pressed once more at this time,
2. Selecting monitoring items monitoring is executed.
After the "Monitoring selection menu screen" is a If monitoring items are selected up to the
displayed, select items to be monitored with limit number, monitoring is executed auto-
t he f u nc t i o n s wi t c h e s or nu m e r a l i np u t matically.
switches.
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen)
q [F3]: Move to lower item
q [F4]: Move to upper item
q [F5]: Reset input numeral/Return to ser-
vice menu screen
a Selection with function switches: Select an
item with [F3] or [F4] and confirm it with
[F6].
a Selection with numeral input switches:
Enter a 5-digit code, and the item of that
code is selected directly. Confirm that item
with [F6].
a If the color of the selected box changes
from yellow to red, selection of the item of
that box is confirmed.
a Up to 6 monitoring items can be selected
at a time. You may not able to set up to 6
items, however, depending on the display
form of those items.
20 PC130-8
4. Executing monitoring 6. Changing machine setting mode

After the "Executing monitoring screen" is dis- To change the setting of the working mode,
played, perform the necessary operation of the travel speed, or auto-deceleration during moni-
machine and check the monitoring information. toring, operate the corresponding switch under
a Monitoring information is indicated by the current condition, and the mode setting
value, ON/OFF, or special display. screen is displayed.
a The unit of display can be set to SI unit, While this screen is displayed, if the corre-
metric unit, or inch unit with the Initializa- sponding switch is operated further, the corre-
tion function in the service mode. sponding mode is changed.
a After finishing changing the setting, press
[F6] to return to the monitoring information
screen.
a If the setting is changed during monitoring,
the new setting is held even after the
screen returns to the ordinary screen after
monitoring is finished.
5. Holding monitoring information

The monitoring information can be held and
reset with the function switches.
q [F3]: Reset holding
q [F4]: Hold information (displayed data)
q [F5]: Return to monitoring selection menu
screen
PC130-8 21
Monitoring items table

Unit (Initial setting: ISO) Com-
Code ponent
Monitoring item (Display on screen) Remarks
No. ISO meter inch in
charge
00200 Controller model select — PUMP
00201 Machine ID — ENG
01002 Engine speed r/min rpm rpm ENG
01601 2nd eng. speed command r/min rpm rpm PUMP
01100 Pump pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07102 Travel FW L PPC pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07103 Travel FW R PPC pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07104 Travel BW L PPC pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07105 Travel BW R PPC pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07106 Blade raise PPC pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
07107 Blade lower PPC pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
04107 Coolant temperature °C °C °F ENG
04401 Hyd oil temperature °C °C °F PUMP
01300 PC-EPC sol current mA mA mA PUMP
01700 Attachment sol current mA mA mA PUMP
Measured ATT PPC pressure reducing EPC
01701 mA mA mA PUMP
current value 2
01702 mA mA mA PUMP
current value 3
01703 mA mA mA PUMP
current value 4
01704 mA mA mA PUMP
current value 5
Lever potentiometer 1 voltage (main) for
42008 V V V PUMP
service flow control
Lever potentiometer 1 voltage (sub) for
42009 V V V PUMP
Lever potentiometer 2 voltage (main) for
42010 V V V PUMP
Lever potentiometer 2 voltage (sub) for
42011 V V V PUMP
Operation amount of lever potentiometer 1 for
42012 % % % PUMP
Operation amount of lever potentiometer 2 for
42013 % % % PUMP
03200 Battery voltage V V V PUMP
03203 Battery power supply V V V ENG
04300 Battery charge vol. V V V MON
36400 Rail pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
37400 Ambient pressure kPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
18500 Charge temperature °C °C °F ENG
All items (including the
ambient pressure) are
36500 Charge pressure-abs kPa kg/cm2 psi ENG indicated by absolute val-
ues.
36700 Engine torque ratio % % % ENG
18700 Engine output torque Nm kgm lbft ENG
03000 Fuel dial pos sens volt V V V ENG
04200 Fuel level sensor volt V V V MON
04105 Coolant temp sens volt V V V ENG
04402 Hyd temp sens volt V V V PUMP
22 PC130-8

Code ponent
charge
37401 Ambient press sens volt V V V ENG
18501 Charge temp sens volt V V V ENG
36501 Charge press sens volt V V V ENG
36401 Rail pressure sens volt V V V ENG
17500 Engine power mode — ENG
31701 Throttle position % % % ENG
31706 Final throttle position % % % ENG
18600 Inject fueling command mg/st mg/st mg/st ENG
36200 Rail press command MPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
36300 Injection timing command CA CA CA ENG
37300 Fuel rate (Note 1) l/h l/h gal/h ENG
01602 2nd eng. speed command % % % PUMP
13113 Main pump absorb torque Nm kgm lbft PUMP
15900 Boom bottom pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
Swing ON•OFF PUMP
Boom lower ON•OFF PUMP
01900 Pressure switch 1 Boom raise ON•OFF PUMP
Arm curl ON•OFF PUMP
Arm dump ON•OFF PUMP
Bucket curl ON•OFF PUMP
01901 Pressure switch 2 Bucket dump ON•OFF PUMP
Attachment ON•OFF PUMP
Travel junction ON•OFF PUMP
Swing brake ON•OFF PUMP
02300 Solenoid valve 1 Merge-divide ON•OFF PUMP
2-stage relief ON•OFF PUMP
Travel speed ON•OFF PUMP
Lever switch ON•OFF PUMP
02200 Switch input 1 Swing release sw ON•OFF PUMP
Swing brake sw ON•OFF PUMP
Blade spec ON•OFF PUMP
02201 Switch input 2
Overload alarm ON•OFF PUMP
02202 Switch input 3 Key switch ON•OFF PUMP
Breaker ON•OFF PUMP
02203 Switch input 4
Quick coupler ON•OFF PUMP
Window limit sw. ON•OFF PUMP
02204 Switch input 5 P limit sw. ON•OFF PUMP
W limit sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Model select 1 ON•OFF PUMP
02209 Switch input 6 Model select 3 ON•OFF PUMP
03701 Controller output 2 Travel alarm ON•OFF PUMP
Key switch ON•OFF MON
Start ON•OFF MON
04500 Monitor input 1 Preheat ON•OFF MON
Light ON•OFF MON
Rad. lever ON•OFF MON
PC130-8 23

Code ponent
charge
Air cleaner ON•OFF MON
04501 Monitor input 2 Eng. oil level ON•OFF MON
Battery charge ON•OFF MON
04502 Monitor input 3 Swing brake sw. ON•OFF MON
F1 ON•OFF MON
F2 ON•OFF MON
Monitor function F3 ON•OFF MON
04503
switches F4 ON•OFF MON
F5 ON•OFF MON
F6 ON•OFF MON
SW1 ON•OFF MON
SW2 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 1st & 2nd SW3 ON•OFF MON
04504
row switches SW4 ON•OFF MON
SW5 ON•OFF MON
SW6 ON•OFF MON
SW7 ON•OFF MON
SW8 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 3rd & 4th SW9 ON•OFF MON
04505
row switches SW10 ON•OFF MON
SW11 ON•OFF MON
SW12 ON•OFF MON
SW13 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 5th row
04506 SW14 ON•OFF MON
switches
SW15 ON•OFF MON
20216 ECM build version — ENG
20217 ECM calibration data ver — ENG
18900 ECM internal temp °C °C °F ENG
20400 ECM serial No — ENG
20227 Monitor ass'y P/N — MON
20402 Monitor serial No — MON
20228 Monitor prog. P/N — MON
20229 Pump con ass'y P/N — PUMP
20403 Pump con serial No — PUMP
20230 Pump con. prog P/N — PUMP
a Entry order of items in table

The items are entered in the order of display on the monitoring selection menu screen.
a Unit
The display unit can be set to ISO, meter, or inch freely (Set it with unit selecting in Initialization of the
service menu).
"CA" in the display unit is an abbreviation for crankshaft angle.
"mg/st" in the display unit is an abbreviation for milligram/stroke.
a Component in charge
MON: The machine monitor is in charge of detection of monitoring information.
ENG: The engine controller is in charge of detection of monitoring information.
PUMP: The pump controller is in charge of detection of monitoring information.
Note 1: The momentary fuel consumption (Code No.: 37300) means the theoretical fuel consumption (Since
it is a theoretical value, it is a little different from the actual fuel consumption).
24 PC130-8
Abnormality Record (Mechanical Systems) 3. Information displayed on "abnormality record"

The machine monitor classifies and records the screen
abnormalities which occurred in the past or which On the "Mechanical Systems" screen, the fol-
are occurring at present into the mechanical sys- lowing information is displayed.
tems, electrical systems, and air-conditioning sys- (a) : Occurrence order of abnormalities from
tem or heater system. latest one/Total number of records
To check the mechanical system abnormality (b) : Failure code
record, perform the following procedures. (c) : Contents of trouble
(d) : Number of occurrence time (Displayable
1. Selecting menu range: 0 – 65,535 times)
Select "Abnormality Record" on the "Service (e) : Service meter reading at first occurrence
Menu" screen. (f) : Service meter reach at last occurrence
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen) (if dis-
played)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen) (if
displayed)
q [F5]: Return to abnormality record screen
a If no abnormality record is recorded, "No
abnormality record" is displayed.
a If the number of occurrence time is 1 (first
occurrence), the service meter reading at
the first occurrence and that at the last
occurrence are the same.
a If [E] is displayed on the left of a failure
code, the abnormality is still occurring or
resetting of it has not been confirmed.
a For all the failure codes that the machine
2. Selecting sub menu monitor can record, see the failure codes
After the "Abnormality Record" screen is dis- table in "Abnormality Record (Electrical
played, select "Mechanical Systems" with the Systems)".
function switches or numeral input switches.
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen
numeral input switches to select the record
a The following figure shows the display of
the air conditioner specification. The
heater specification and heaterless speci-
fication are different from each other in the
display of "03 Air-conditioning System",
which may not be displayed in the heater-
less specification.
PC130-8 25
4. Resetting abnormality record

The contents of the mechanical system abnor-
mality record cannot be reset.
Abnormality Record (Electrical Systems)

The machine monitor classifies and records the
abnormalities which occurred in the past or which
are occurring at present into the mechanical sys-
tems, electrical systems, and air-conditioning
system.
To check the electrical system abnormality record,
perform the following procedures.
3. Information displayed on "abnormality record"
1. Selecting menu screen
Select "Abnormality Record" on the "Service On the "Electrical Systems" screen, the follow-
Menu" Screen. ing information is displayed.
(a) : Occurrence order of abnormalities from
latest one/Total number of records
(b) : Failure code
(c) : Contents of trouble
(d) : Number of occurrence time (Displayable
range: 0 – 65,535 times)
(e) : Service meter reading at first occurrence
(f) : Service meter reach at last occurrence
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen) (if dis-
played)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen) (if
displayed)
2. Selecting sub menu q [F5]: Return to "abnormality record" screen
After the "Abnormality Record" screen is dis- a If no abnormality record is recorded, "No
played, select "Electrical Systems" with the abnormality record" is displayed.
function switches or numeral input switches. a If the number of occurrence time is 1 (first
q [F3]: Move to lower item occurrence), the service meter reading at
q [F4]: Move to upper item the first occurrence and that at the last
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen occurrence are the same.
q [F6]: Confirm selection a If [E] is displayed on the left of a failure
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the code, the abnormality is still occurring or
numeral input switches to select the resetting of it has not been confirmed.
record of that code and confirm it with a For all the failure codes that the machine
[F6]. monitor can record, see the failure codes
a The following figure shows the display of table.
the air conditioner specification. The
heater specification and heaterless speci-
fication are different from each other in the
display of "03 Air-conditioning System",
which may not be displayed in the heater-
less specification.
26 PC130-8
4. Resetting abnormality record 3) After the "Electrical Sys. Error Reset"

1) While the "Electrical Systems" screen is screen is displayed, operate the function
displayed, perform the following operation switches.
with the numeral input switches. q [F5]: Return to "Electrical systems"
q Operation of switches (While pressing screen (Reset mode)
[4], perform the operation in order): q [F6]: Execute reset
[4] + [1] o [2] o [3] a The following figure shows the screen
displayed when the items are reset
one by one (which is a little different
from the screen displayed when all
the items are reset together).
2) Check that the screen is set in the reset

mode, and then reset the items one by
one or together with the function switches.
a If the screen is set in the reset mode,
[CLEAR] graphic mark is indicated at 4) After the selected information or all the
[F2]. information is deleted, “Reset!” or “All
q [F2]: Reset all items Reset!” is displayed for a while, and then
q [F3]: Move to lower item “No Error” is displayed.
q [F5]: Return to abnormality record
screen
q [F6]: Reset selected item
a To reset items one by one: Select the
item to be reset with [F3] or [F4] and
press [F6].
a To reset all items together: Press [F2],
and all the items are reset, regardless
of selection of the items.
a If [E] is displayed on the left of a fail-
ure code, the resetting operation is
accepted but the information is not
reset.
PC130-8 27
Failure codes table

User Component
Failure code Trouble (Displayed on screen) Category of record
code in charge
989L00 Engine controller lock caution 1 MON Electrical system
989M00 Engine controller lock caution 2 MON Electrical system
989N00 Engine controller lock caution 3 MON Electrical system
AA10NX Air cleaner clogging MON Mechanical system
AB00KE Charge voltage low MON Mechanical system
B@BAZG Eng oil press. low ENG Mechanical system
B@BAZK Eng oil level low MON Mechanical system
B@BCNS Eng coolant overheat ENG Mechanical system
B@BCZK Eng water level low MON Mechanical system
B@HANS Hydr oil overheat PUMP Mechanical system
E10 CA111 ECM critical internal failure ENG Electrical system
E10 CA115 Eng Ne and Bkup speed sensor error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA122 Charge air press sensor high error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA123 Charge air press sensor low error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA131 Throttle sensor high error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA132 Throttle sensor low error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA144 Coolant temp. sensor high error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA145 Coolant temp. sensor low error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA153 Charge air temp. sensor high error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA154 Charge air temp. sensor low error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA155 Chg air temp high speed derate ENG Electrical system
E15 CA187 Sensor sup. 2 volt. low error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA221 Ambient air press. sensor high error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA222 Ambient air press. sensor low error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA227 Sensor sup. 2 volt. high error ENG Electrical system
CA234 Eng. overspeed ENG Mechanical system
E15 CA238 Ne speed sensor sup. volt. error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA271 IMV/PCV1 short error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA272 IMV/PCV1 open error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA322 Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA342 Calibration code incompatibility ENG Electrical system
E10 CA351 Inj. drive circuit error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA352 Sensor sup. 1 volt. low error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA386 Sensor sup. 1 volt. high error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA435 Abnormality in engine oil pressure switch ENG Electrical system
E10 CA441 Battery voltage low error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA442 Battery voltage high error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA449 Rail press. very high error ENG Electrical system
28 PC130-8
User Component
code in charge
E11 CA451 Rail press. sensor high error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA452 Rail press. sensor low error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA488 Chg air temp high torque derate ENG Electrical system
E15 CA553 Rail press. high error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA559 Rail press. low error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA689 Eng. Ne speed sensor error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA731 Eng. Bkup speed sensor phase error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA757 All persistent data lost error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA778 Eng. Bkup speed sensor error ENG Electrical system
E0E CA1633 KOMNET datalink timeout error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA2185 Throttle sens. sup. volt. high error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA2186 Throttle sens. sup. volt. low error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA2249 Rail press. very low error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA2311 Abnormality in IMV solenoid ENG Electrical system
D110KB Battery relay drive short PUMP Electrical system
E01 D19JKZ Personal code relay abnormality KOM Electrical system
D862KA GPS antenna discon KOM Electrical system
E0E DA22KK Pump solenoid power low error PUMP Electrical system
DA25KP 5V sensor 1 power abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DA26KP 5V sensor 2 power abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DA29KQ Model selection abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E0E DA2RMC CAN discon (Pump con detected) PUMP Electrical system
DAF8KB Short circuit in camera power supply MON Electrical system
DAFGMC GPS module error KOM Electrical system
E0E DAFRMC CAN discon (Monitor detected) MON Electrical system
DGH2KB Hydr oil sensor short PUMP Electrical system
DHPAMA Pump press sensor abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E20 DHSFMA Travel left forward PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E20 DHSGMA Travel right forward PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E20 DHSHMA Travel left reverse PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E20 DHSJMA Travel right reverse PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DHX1MA Overload sensor abnormality (Analog) PUMP Electrical system
DV20KB Travel alarm short circuit PUMP Electrical system
DW43KA Travel speed sol discon PUMP Electrical system
DW43KB Travel speed sol short PUMP Electrical system
E03 DW45KA Swing brake sol discon PUMP Electrical system
E03 DW45KB Swing brake sol short PUMP Electrical system
DW91KA Travel junction sol discon PUMP Electrical system
DW91KB Travel junction sol short PUMP Electrical system
DWJ0KA Merge-divider sol discon PUMP Electrical system
DWJ0KB Merge-divider sol short PUMP Electrical system
DWK0KA 2-stage relief sol discon PUMP Electrical system
PC130-8 29
User Component
code in charge
DWK0KB 2-stage relief sol short PUMP Electrical system
E02 DXA8KA PC-EPC sol discon PUMP Electrical system
E02 DXA8KB PC-EPC sol short PUMP Electrical system
DXE4KA Service current EPC discon PUMP Electrical system
DXE4KB Service current EPC short PUMP Electrical system
DY20KA Wiper working abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DY20MA Wiper parking abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DY2CKA Washer drive discon PUMP Electrical system
DY2CKB Washer drive short PUMP Electrical system
DY2DKB Wiper drive (for) short PUMP Electrical system
DY2EKB Wiper drive (rev) short PUMP Electrical system

The items are entered in the order of their failure codes (incremental order).
a User code
Attached : If the failure code is detected, the user code, failure code, and telephone No. (if regis-
tered) are displayed on the ordinary screen to notify the operator of the abnormality.
Not attached: Even if the failure code is detected, the machine monitor does not notify the operator of
the abnormality.
MON: The machine monitor is in charge of detection of abnormality.
MON2: The KOMTRAX section of the machine monitor is in charge of detection of abnormality.
ENG: The engine controller is in charge of detection of abnormality.
PUMP: The pump controller is in charge of detection of abnormality.
a Category of record
Mechanical system: Abnormality information is recorded in the mechanical system abnormality record.
Electrical system: Abnormality information is recorded in the electrical system abnormality record.
30 PC130-8
Abnormality Record (Air-conditioning System) 3. Information displayed on "abnormality record"

The machine monitor classifies and records the screen
abnormalities which occurred in the past or which On the "Air-conditioning System" screen, the
are occurring at present into the mechanical sys- following information is displayed.
tems, electrical systems, and air-conditioning (a): System/Component name
abnormalities. (b): Number of occurrence time
To check the air-conditioning abnormality record or (c): Condition (Normal or abnormal)
heater abnormality record, perform the following q [F2]: Reset abnormality record
procedures. q [F5]: Return to abnormality record screen
If [E] is displayed on the left of a condition,
1. Selecting menu the abnormality is still occurring or reset-
Select "Abnormality Record" on the "Service ting of it has not been confirmed.
Menu" screen. If CAN disconnection is displayed in Com-
munication condition, communication can-
not be carried out normally. Accordingly,
the conditions of other items are turned
OFF.
2. Selecting sub menu

After the "Abnormality Record" screen is dis-
played, select "Air-conditioning System" with
t he f u nc t i o n s wi t c h e s or nu m e r a l i np u t
switches. 4. Resetting abnormality record
q [F3]: Move to lower item While the "abnormality record" screen is dis-
q [F4]: Move to upper item played, press [F2], and the number of occur-
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen rence time of abnormality is reset. If it is
q [F6]: Confirm selection confirmed at this time that the abnormality has
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the been reset, the display changes to Normal.
numeral input switches to select the
record of that code and confirm it with
[F6].
PC130-8 31
Maintenance Record a The following items can be selected in the

The machine monitor records the maintenance maintenance record.
information of the filters, oils, etc., which the opera- 01 Engine oil change
tor can display and check by the following opera- 02 Engine oil filter change
tions. When maintenance is carried out, if the data
03 Fuel main filter change
are reset in the operator mode, the number of the
41 Fuel pre-filter change
times of maintenance is recorded in this section.
04 Hydraulic oil filter change
05 Hydraulic tank breather change
1. Selecting menu 06 Corrosion resistor change
Select "Maintenance Record" on the "Service 07 Damper case service
Menu" screen. 08 Final drive case oil change
09 Machinery case oil change
10 Hydraulic oil change
3. Items displayed on maintenance record screen

The following items are displayed.
(a) : Maintenance items
(b) : Number of times of replacement up to now
(c) : Service meter reading (SMR) at previous
replacement
2. Selecting maintenance record item

After the "Maintenance Record" screen is dis-
played, select an item to be checked with the
function switches or numeral input switches.
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen)
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen)
numeral input switches to select the item
of that code.
32 PC130-8
Maintenance Mode Change a The following items can be selected on

The operating condition for maintenance function in the Change of maintenance mode screen.
the operation mode can be set and changed with 00 Maintenance mode on/off
this menu. 01 Engine oil change int.
q Set function effective or ineffective
02 Engine oil filter change int.
q Change set replacement interval (by items)
03 Fuel main filter change int.
q Initialize all set replacement intervals
41 Fuel pre filter change int.
1. Selecting menu 04 Hyd oil filter change int.
Select of "Maintenance Mode Change" on the 05 Hyd tank breather change int.
"Service Menu" screen. 06 Corrosion resistor change int.
07 Damper case service int.
08 Final drive case oil change int.
09 Machinery case change int.
10 Hydraulic oil change int.
99 Initialize all items
3. Contents of setting of Maintenance mode on/

off
After selecting "Maintenance Mode On/Off", if
the screen is displayed, set ON or OFF with
the function switches.
q ON: Functions of all maintenance items
are set effective in operator mode
2. Selecting sub menu q OFF: Functions of all maintenance items
After the "Maintenance Mode Change" screen are set ineffective in operator mode
is displayed, select an item to change the set- q [F3]: Move to lower item
ting with the function switches or numeral input q [F4]: Move to upper item
switches. q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to Main-
q [F1]: Move to next page (screen) tenance mode change screen
q [F2]: Move to previous page (screen) q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
q [F3]: Move to lower item Maintenance mode change screen
q [F4]: Move to upper item a Even if ON/OFF of each item has been
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen set, if the above setting is changed, it is
a You may enter a 2-digit code with the applied.
numeral input switches to select the item
PC130-8 33
4. Contents of setting of each maintenance item since the start of setting, the change is
After selecting each maintenance item, if the recognized as a resetting operation.
screen is displayed, set the item with the func-
tion switches.
5. Function of initializing all items

q Initial value: Maintenance interval set in After selecting "99 Use Default Value", if the
machine monitor (Recommended by man- screen is displayed, set with the function
ufacturer and not changeable). switches.
q Set value: Maintenance interval which can
be set freely. Maintenance functions in
operator mode operate on basis of this set
time (which is increased or decreased by
50 hours).
q ON: Maintenance function of this item is
set effective in operator mode.
q OFF: Maintenance function of this item is
set ineffective in operator mode.
q [F3]: Select Reduce set value (Upper) or
OFF (Lower).
q [F4]: Select Increase set value (Upper) or
ON (Lower).
q [F5]: Cancel setting before confirmation
q If this operation is executed, the set val-
and return to Maintenance mode
ues of all the maintenance items are ini-
change screen.
tialized.
q [F6]: Confirm setting of upper or lower line.
q [F5]: Return to Maintenance mode change
a After the setting of the upper and lower
screen
lines is confirmed with [F6] and the screen
q [F6]: Execute initialization
changes to the Maintenance mode
a A while after [F6] is pressed, the initializa-
change screen with [F5], the setting is
tion completion screen is displayed. Then,
effective.
if the "Maintenance Mode Change" screen
a If the set value of an item set to "ON" is
is displayed, initialization is completed.
changed after 1 or more operating hours
34 PC130-8
Phone Number Entry a If [F6] is pressed without inputting a digit,

The telephone No. displayed when the user code/ there is not information of telephone No.
failure code is displayed in the operator mode can Accordingly, no telephone No. is displayed
be input and changed according to the following in the operator mode.
procedure.
If a telephone No. is not input with this function, no
telephone No. is displayed in the operator mode.
1. Selecting menu
Select "Phone Number Entry" on the "Service
Menu" screen.
2. Registering and changing telephone No.

After the "Phone Number Entry" screen is dis-
played, register or change the telephone No.
q [F2]: Reset all input No.
q [F3]: Move to left position (if not blank)
q [F4]: Move to right position (if not blank)
q [F5]: Reset input digit/Return to service
menu
q [F6]: Confirm input
a Up to 14 digits can be input from the left.

Input nothing in the surplus positions.
a If one of the input digits is wrong, move to
that digit (orange background) and over-
write it with the correct digit.
PC130-8 35
Default (Key-on Mode) q Mode at Previous Key-off: Final mode in

Check or change various settings related to the previous operation is displayed when key
machine monitor and machine by "Default". is ON
The function of working mode with key ON is used q [F3]: Move to lower item
to set the working mode displayed on the machine q [F4]: Move to upper item
monitor when the starting switch is turned ON. q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to
"Default" screen
1. Selecting menu q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
Select "Default" on the "Service Menu" screen. "Default" screen
a When the machine is delivered, Mode at
previous key-OFF is set.
a If "With attachment" is not set, the attach-
ment mode cannot be selected.
a While Attachment mode [ATT] is selected,
if "Without attachment" is set, Power
mode [P] is displayed when the key is
turned ON.
a If the engine is stopped while breaker
mode [B] is selected in the operator mode,
Breaker mode [B] is always displayed,
regardless of the above setting.

After the "Default" screen is displayed, select
"Key-on Mode" with the function switches or
a Select this item similarly to an item on the
"Service Menu" screen.
3. Selecting mode
After the "Key-on Mode" screen is displayed,
select the mode to be set with the function
switches.
q Power Mode: [P] is displayed when key is
ON
q Economy Mode: [E] is displayed when key
is ON
q Lifting Mode: [L] is displayed when key is
ON
q Breaker Mode: [B] is displayed when key
is ON
q Attachment Mode: [ATT] is displayed
when key is ON
36 PC130-8
Default (Unit) a When the machine is delivered, the SI unit

Check or change various settings related to the system is set.
machine monitor and machine by "Default".
The unit selecting function is used to select the unit
of the data displayed for monitoring, etc.
1. Selecting menu
Select "Default" on the "Service Menu" screen.

"Unit" with the function switches or numeral
input switches.
3. Selecting unit
After the "Unit" screen is displayed, select the
unit to be set with the function switches.
q [F3]: Move to lower unit
q [F4]: Move to upper unit
q [F5]: Cancel selection and return to
"Default" screen
q [F6]: Confirm selection and return to
"Default" screen
PC130-8 37
Default (With/Without Attachment) a When an attachment is installed, if this

Check or change various settings related to the setting is not carried out normally, the
machine monitor and machine by "Default". attachment cannot be set in the operator
The "With/Without attachment" function is used to mode. As a result, the attachment may not
set an installed or a remove attachment. work normally or the hydraulic compo-
nents may have trouble.
1. Selecting menu

"With/Without Attachment" with the function
switches or numeral input switches.
3. Selecting With/Without
After the "With/Without Attachment" screen is
displayed, select the setting with the function
switches.
q Without Attachment:
When attachment is not installed
q With Attachment:
When attachment is installed
q [F3] : Move to lower item
q [F4] : Move to upper item
q [F5] : Cancel selection and return to
Default screen
q [F6] : Confirm selection and return to
Default screen
38 PC130-8
Default (Attachment/Maintenance Password) 3. Selecting Disable/Enable

Check or change various settings related to the After the Attachment/Maintenance Password
machine monitor and machine by "Default". screen is displayed, select the setting with the
The function of setting attachment/maintenance function switches.
password is used to set the display of the password q Disable : Password screen is not dis-
screen when the functions related to the attach- played
ment and maintenance are used in the operator q Enable : Password screen is displayed
mode. q [F3] : Move to lower item
q [F4] : Move to upper item
1. Selecting menu q [F5] : Cancel selection and return to
Select "Default" on the "Service Menu" screen. "Default" screen
q [F6] : Confirm selection and return to
"Default" screen

"Attachment/Maintenance Password" with the 4. Displaying attachment/maintenance password
function switches or numeral input switches. screen
a Select this item similarly to an item on the When the following operation is performed, the
"Service Menu" screen. password screen is displayed in the operator
mode.
q Maintenance mode: The Maintenance
table screen is changed to the Mainte-
nance interval reset screen.
q User mode: On the User menu screen, the
Breaker/Attachment setting menu is
selected and the screen is changed to the
Attachment setting menu screen.
5. Changing attachment/maintenance password

The password can be changed by operating
the switches specially in the operator mode.
a See Attachment/Maintenance password
changing function in the operator mode.
a Default password: [000000]
a If the password setting is changed from
Enable to Disable, the password is reset
to the default. When Enable is set again,
be sure to set a new password.
a The attachment/maintenance password is
different from the engine start lock pass-
word.
PC130-8 39
Default (Camera) 3. Selecting camera setting

Check or change various settings related to the After the "Camera" setting screen is displayed,
machine monitor and machine by "Default". select the setting with the function switches.
The camera setting function is used to set installa- q OFF: Camera is not used
tion and removal of a camera. q Original Image: Image of connected cam-
era is displayed in origi-
1. Selecting menu nal position (as in mirror,
Select "Default" on the "Service Menu" screen. used as back monitor)
q Reverse Image: Image of connected cam-
era is displayed in reverse
position (as seen directly,
used as front or side mon-
itor)
q [F3]: Move to left item
q [F4]: Move to right item
q [F5]: Cancel setting before confirmation
and return to "Default" screen
q [F6]: Confirm selection in each line
a After "Camera" screen is displayed, cam-
era 1 can be always set.
a After confirming the setting of each line
with [F6], return to the "Default" screen
with [F5], and the setting is effective.
2. Selecting sub menu a If a camera is connected but not set nor-
After the "Default" screen is displayed, select mally with this function, the graphic mark
"Ca mer a" with the fu ncti on switc hes or of camera is not displayed at [F3] in the
numeral input switches. operator mode. Accordingly, the image of
a Select this item similarly to an item on the the camera cannot be used.
"Service Menu" Screen. a When a camera is installed, check that the
displayed image is not inverted horizon-
tally.
40 PC130-8
Default (ECO Display) a If ECO display is turned ON, ECO is dis-

Check or change various settings related to the played when the screen changes to the
machine monitor and machine by "Default". ordinary screen. Even if the energy saving
The ECO display setting function is used to set the guidance is turned ON, however, it is not
display of the ECO gauge and energy saving guid- displayed if the condition for display is not
ance. satisfied on the ordinary screen.
1. Selecting menu
a Display of ECO gauge (a)

"ECO Display" with the function switches or
a Display of energy saving guidance
3. Selecting display setting

After the "ECO Display" screen is displayed,
select the setting with the function switches.
q ON : Display ECO
q OFF: Do not display ECO
q [F3] : Move to left item
q [F4] : Move to right item
q [F5] : Cancel setting before confirmation
and return to "Default" screen
q [F6] : Confirm selection in each line
a After confirming the setting of the upper
and lower lines with [F6], return to the
"Default" screen with [F5], and the setting
is effective.
PC130-8 41
Adjustment (Pump Absorption Torque) 3. Selecting absorption torque

The operator can adjust various items related to the After the "Pump Absorption Torque" screen is
machine with the machine monitor. displayed, select a set value on the right side
The pump absorption torque function is used to with the function switches.
finely adjust the absorption torque on the hydraulic q Set value: For actual torque adjustment
pump. value, see table
q [F3]: Increase set value
1. Selecting menu q [F4]: Decrease set value
Select "Adjustment" on the "Service Menu" q [F6]: Confirm setting and return to Adjust-
screen. ment menu screen
a The 3 digits on the left side do not vary
since they are the code of this function.

After the "Adjustment" screen is displayed,
select "Pump Absorption Torque" with the func- a Relationship between set value and
tion switches or numeral input switches. torque adjustment value
a Select this item similarly to an item on the Set
"Service Menu" screen. Code Torque adjustment value
value
000 +39.2 Nm {+4 kgm}
001 +29.4 Nm {+3 kgm}
002 +19.6 Nm {+2 kgm}
003 +9.8 Nm {+1 kgm}
022 004 0 Nm {0 kgm}
005 –9.8 Nm {–1 kgm}
006 –19.6 Nm {–2 kgm}
007 –29.4 Nm {–3 kgm}
008 –39.2 Nm {–4 kgm}
42 PC130-8
Adjustment (Attachment Flow Adjustment) 3. Selecting distribution of oil flow

The operator can adjust various items related to the After the screen of "Attachment Flow Adjust-
machine with the machine monitor. ment" is displayed, select a set value on the
The function of "Attachment Flow Adjustment" is right side with the function switches.
used to finely adjust the oil flow to the attachment in q Set value: For actual distribution of flow,
compound operation. see table
1. Selecting menu q [F3]: Increase set value
Select "Adjustment" on the "Service Menu" q [F4]: Decrease set value
screen. q [F6]: Confirm setting and return to Adjust-
ment menu screen
a The 3 digits on the left side do not vary
since they are the code of this function.

After the "Adjustment" screen is displayed,
select "Attachment Flow Adjustment" with the
function switches or numeral input switches. a Relationship between set value and distri-
a Select this item similarly to an item on the bution of flow to attachment
"Service Menu" screen. Set Distribution of flow to
Code
value attachment
000 50 %
001 70 %
037
002 100 %
003 40 %
PC130-8 43
Cylinder Cut-Out
The operator can perform "Cylinder Cut-Out" oper-
ation with the machine monitor.
"Cylinder Cut-Out" operation means to run the
engine with 1 or more fuel injectors disabled electri-
cally to reduce the number of effective cylinders.
This operation is used to find out a cylinder which
does not output power normally (combustion in it is
abnormal).
1. Selecting menu
Select "Cylinder Cut-Out" on the "Service
Menu" screen.
3. Resetting Cut-Out cylinder

When changing a cylinder to be Cut-Out or
when Cylinder Cut-Out operation is finished,
select a Cut-Out cylinder to be reset with the
function switches.
a This operation may be performed while
the engine is running.
a When [F6] is pressed, if background (a) of
the selected cylinder No. becomes blue,
the cylinder is reset.
a If the machine monitor resets a Cut-Out
cylinder but the engine controller cannot
reset that Cut-Out cylinder, the background
2. Selecting cylinder to be disabled (a) of the cylinder No. becomes red.
After the "Cylinder Cut-Out" screen is dis- a The Cut-Out operation is not automatically
played, select a cylinder to be Cut-Out with the reset after the screen returns to the opera-
function switches. tor mode. Accordingly, be sure to perform
q [F1]: Move selection mark (R) to left the resetting operation after the cylinder
q [F2]: Move selection mark (R) to right cut-out operation is finished.
q [F3]: Reset holding
q [F4]: Hold 4. Function of holding displayed information
q [F5]: Return to service menu screen If [F4] is pressed during the cylinder Cut-Out
q [F6]: Confirm selection operation, the displayed information is newly
a This operation may be performed while held (c) (The real-time information is kept dis-
the engine is running. played on the left side).
a When [F6] is pressed, if background (a) of While the information is held, if [F3] is pressed,
the selected cylinder No. becomes white, the holding function is reset.
the cylinder is Cut-Out. a The holding function is effective, regard-
a If the machine monitor Cut-Out a cylinder less of setting of the reduced cylinder
but the engine controller cannot Cut-Out mode operation.
that cylinder, the background (a) of the
cylinder No. becomes yellow.
a One or more cylinders can be Cut-Out.
a In the cylinder Cut-Out operation, the
auto-deceleration function can be
selected. If the auto-deceleration is turned
ON, auto-deceleration monitor (b) is dis-
played.
44 PC130-8
[Reference] No Injection
q If a normally operating cylinder is Cut-Out, If the engine is operated after long storage of the
the following phenomena occur. machine, it may be worn or damaged because of
1) Lowering of engine speed insufficient lubrication with oil. To prevent this, the
2) Increase of final injection rate com- function to lubricate the engine before starting it by
mand (quantity) cranking it without injecting fuel is installed.
q If the engine is running near the high idle, Set the no-injection cranking while the engine is
however, the engine speed may not lower stopped.
for the reason of engine control.
q In this case, lower the engine speed with 1. Selecting menu
the fuel control dial and judge by increase Select "No Injection" on the "Service Menu"
of the injection rate command. screen.
2. Displaying check screen

If the "No injection" screen is displayed, the
machine monitor asks the operator if no injec-
tion cranking should be performed. Answer
with the function switch.
q [F5]: Do not perform (Return to Service
menu screen)
q [F6]: Perform
a While the screen is changing to the follow-
ing screen, the screen of "Communication
between controllers is being checked" is
displayed.
PC130-8 45
3. Starting no injection cranking 5. Prohibiting no injection cranking

If no injection cranking (Fuel injection in no cyl- If the operator tries to perform the no injection
inders) becomes effective, that is displayed on cranking while the engine is running, the mes-
the screen. Under this condition, crank the sage that the engine is running is displayed
engine with the starting motor. and the no injection cranking is not set effec-
a While the screen is changing to the follow- tive.
ing screen, the screen of "Setting is being a This function can be selected even while
prepared" is displayed. the engine is running. If the no injection
a Limit the cranking time to 20 seconds to cranking is performed, however, the mes-
protect the starting motor. sage of "Engine is running" is displayed
on the screen.
4. Finishing no injection cranking

After completing the no injection cranking
operation, press [F6], and finish of no injection
cranking is displayed and the screen returns to
the "Service Menu" screen automatically.
46 PC130-8
Fuel Consumption 3. Display and function during test

This function calculates the hourly fuel consump- Clock mark (a) flashes during test.
tion from the actual fuel consumption in a testing a While the fuel consumption is being
period and indicates it. tested, the operator can work with the
1. Selecting menu operator mode and other functions. Test is
Select "Fuel Consumption" on the "Service not finished until this screen is displayed
Menu" screen. again and [F1] is pressed (Even if the
starting switch is turned OFF, this function
is kept effective, although fuel consump-
tion is tested only while the engine is run-
ning).
2. Starting test
After the screen of "Fuel Consumption" is dis-
played, start test with the function switches.
q [F1]: Start
q [F2]: Clear 4. Finishing test
q [F5]: Return to Service menu screen Press [F1], and test is finished and the data
a When the screen of Fuel consumption is are displayed on the finishing date and time
displayed, if a data is indicated, it is the side.
data of the previous test. This data is not
an obstacle to new test and can be reset 5. Displaying fuel consumption
by pressing [F2]. If the test is finished, the hourly fuel consump-
a If [F1] is pressed, the data is displayed on tion calculated from the fuel consumption cal-
the starting date and time side and test culated by the engine controller and the
starts. elapsed time are displayed.
a The display unit of the fuel changes

according to the unit set with the default
(unit setting) function.
SI and meter: l/h
inch: gal/h
PC130-8 47
KOMTRAX Settings (Terminal Status) 3. Contents of display of terminal status

The setting condition and operating condition of On the "Terminal Status" screen, the following
K O MT RA X c an be c hec k ed wi th Di sp lay of items are displayed.
KOMTRAX setting. q Terminal type: Model name of KOMTRAX
Setting condition of terminal is used to check the communication MODEM
setting condition of the KOMTRAX terminal. q KOMTRAX communication: Executing con-
dition of station opening inspection
1. Selecting menu q GMT time: Greenwich Mean Time
Select "KOMTRAX Settings" on the "Service q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX settings screen
Menu" screen.

After the "KOMTRAX Settings" screen is dis-
played, select "Terminal Status" with the func-
tion switches or numeral input switches.
Service menu screen.
a The following figure shows the display when
Model TH300 KOMTRAX is installed. When
TH200 is installed, "03 IP Adress" is dis-
played.
48 PC130-8
KOMTRAX Settings (GPS & Communication Status) 3. Contents of display of GPS & communication
The setting condition and operating condition of status
KOMTRAX can be checked with "KOMTRAX Set- On the screen of "GPS & Communication Sta-
tings". tus", the following items are displayed.
GPS & communication status is used to check the q Positioning: Positioning condition of GPS
condition of positioning and communication of the q Communication: Communication environ-
KOMTRAX terminal. ment of communication MODEM and con-
necting condi tion of c ommunication
1. Selecting menu MODEM
Select "KOMTRAX Settings" on the "Service q Number of message not yet sent: Number
Menu" screen. of mails which are saved in machine mon-
itor and not transmitted yet
q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX settings screen

played, select GPS & communication status
with the function switches or numeral input
switches.
a The following figure shows the display when
Model TH300 KOMTRAX is installed. When
TH200 is installed, "03 IP Adress" is dis-
played.
PC130-8 49
KOMTRAX Setting (MODEM S/N: TH300) 3. Contents of display of Modem S/N

The setting condition and operating condition of The serial No. of TH300 Modem is displayed.
K O MT RA X c an be c hec k ed wi th Di sp lay of q [F5]: Return to KOMTRAX settings screen
KOMTRAX setting.
MODEM S/N is used to check the serial No. of the
KOMTRAX communication MODEM.
1. Selecting menu
Select "KOMTRAX Settings" on the "Service
Menu" screen.

played, select "Modem S/N" with the function
switches or numeral input switches.
50 PC130-8
Display of Service message 3. Display of message (with return mail function)

Special messages for the serviceman sent from the If a box to enter a value with the numeral keys
KOMTRAX base station (a distributor, etc.) can be is displayed under the message, enter a
checked with this function. proper number with the numeral input switches
If there is setting in a message, a return mail can be and function switches and confirm it, and the
sent by using numeral input switches. information is returned to the KOMTRAX base
station.
1. Operation to display menu q [F5]: Return to service menu screen
Select "Service message" on the service menu q [F6]: Confirm and return input value
screen. a This message is different from a message
transmitted to the operator in the operator
mode.
a Since this message is special for the ser-
viceman, the message monitor is not dis-
played when it is received as in the
operator mode.
2. Display of message (Read-only)

If there is a message, its contents are dis-
played. If there is not a message, "No mes-
sage" is displayed.
a This message is different from a message
transmitted to the operator in the operator
mode.
a Since this message is special for the ser-
viceman, the message monitor is not dis-
played when it is received as in the
operator mode.
PC130-8 51

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
52 PC130-8
SEN04116-00
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Handling voltage circuit of engine controller ................................................................................................... 2
Preparation work for troubleshooting of electrical system .............................................................................. 3
Procedure for testing diodes ........................................................................................................................... 8
Pm Clinic service ............................................................................................................................................ 9
PC130-8 1
Handling voltage circuit of engine

controller 1
1. Before disconnecting or connecting a connec-
tor between the engine controller and engine,
be sure to turn the starting switch OFF.
2. If a T-adapter is inserted in or connected to a

connector between the engine controller and
engine for troubleshooting, do not start the
engine.
a You may turn the starting switch to the
OFF or ON position but must not turn it to
the START position.
2 PC130-8
Preparation work for 3) Insert or connect troubleshooting T-adapt-

troubleshooting of electrical ers in or to connectors CM01, CM02, and
CM03 of machine monitor (4).
system 1 a Connectors CM02 and CM03 are of
a When carrying out troubleshooting of an elec- the same type. When returning them,
tric circuit related to the machine monitor, check the mark plates of the mount-
e n g i n e c o n t r o l l e r, p u m p c o n t r o l l e r, o r ing brackets and take care not to
KOMTRAX communication MODEM, expose make a wrong connection.
the related connectors according to the follow-
ing procedure.
a Disconnect and connect the connectors having
special locking mechanisms according to the
procedure shown below.
1. Machine monitor
1) Remove 2 mounting bolts and cover (1).
a One of the mounting bolts is installed
in the cover on the right of the day-
light sensor.
a While removing the mounting bolts,
disconnect connector P31 of the day-
light sensor.
a The following figure shows the model 2. Engine controller
of the arm crane specification 1) Open the engine hood.
equipped with a level. If the machine a The engine controller is mounted on
which you are working on has the arm the cooling frame (on the counter-
crane specification, remove level (2). weight side).
2) Insert or connect troubleshooting T-adapt-
ers in or to connectors CE01, CE02, and
CE03 of engine controller (5).
a Connectors CE01 and CE02 are fixed
with screws. When disconnecting
them, loosen the screws.
a When returning connectors CE01 and
CE02, tighten the screws to the spec-
ified torque.
3 Screw: 3 ± 1 Nm {0.3 ± 0.1 kgm}
2) Remove 1 mounting bolt and duct (3).
PC130-8 3
3. Pump controller a The connectors of the pump control-

1) Slide the operator's seat and seat stand to ler have a special locking mecha-
the forward end. nism. Disconnect them according to
2) Remove the 5 mounting bolts and cool & steps (a) – (c) and connect them
hot box (6). according to steps (d) – (f) as shown
a While removing the cool & hot box, below.
disconnect the drain hose. Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b)
3) Remove the 2 mounting bolts, 1 fastener, Slide lever – (c) Disconnect connec-
and magazine box (7). tor.
4) Remove the 3 mounting bolts and cover Connection: (d) Position connector –
(8). (e) Slide lever – (f) Lock.
5) Remove fuse box cover (9) and cover
(10).
a Since the underside of cover (10) is
clamped, pull it up.
6) Remove the 7 mounting bolts and cover
(11).
4. KOMTRAX communication module

1) Slide the operator's seat and seat stand to
the forward end.
2) Remove the 5 mounting bolts and cool &
hot box (6).
a While removing the cool & hot box,
disconnect the drain hose.
7) Connect the troubleshooting adapters to
3) Remove the 2 mounting bolts, 1 fastener,
connectors C01 and C02 of pump control-
and magazine box (7).
ler (12).
a Install the adapters to only the wiring
(8).
harness side.
5) Remove fuse box cover (9) and cover
(10).
a Since the underside of cover (10) is
clamped, pull it up.
(11).
4 PC130-8
7) Connect troubleshooting T-adapters to con- 6. Boost pressure and temperature sensor

nectors CK01 and CK02 of KOMTRAX (Boost press & IMT)
communication module (13). a Disconnection and connection of con-
a Cable (14) is for the communication nector
antenna. The connector of the boost pressure and
temperature sensor has a special locking
mechanism. Disconnect it according to
steps (a) – (b) and connect it according to
steps (c) – (d) as shown below.
Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b) Discon-
nect connector.
Connection: (c) Connect connector – (d)
Lock.
5. Engine Ne speed sensor (Crank sensor)

Engine Bkup speed sensor (Cam sensor)
Engine oil pressure switch (Oil pressure
switch)
a Disconnection and connection of con-
nectors
The connectors of the engine Ne speed
sens or, e ngine Bk up s peed sens or,
engine oil pressure switch have a special
locking mechanism. Disconnect them
according to steps (a) – (c) and connect
them according to steps (d) – (f) as shown
below.
Disconnection: (a) Slide lever – (b)
Unlock – (c) Disconnect connector.
Connection: (d) Connect connector – (e)
Lock – (f) Slide lever.
a Removal and installation of sensor

A deep socket is necessary for removal
and installation of the engine oil pressure
switch. See "Tools for testing, adjusting,
and troubleshooting".
PC130-8 5
7. Supply pump IMV solenoid (Fuel regulator) a Precautions for connecting connector
a Disconnection and connection of con- Take care not to connect the connector
nector reversely.
The connector of the supply pump IMV Engage lock (e) on the wiring harness side
solenoid has a special locking mecha- with triangular notch (f) on the sensor side
nism. Disconnect it according to steps (a) (Do not engage lock (e) with square guide
– (b) and connect it according to steps (c) (g) on the opposite side of triangular notch
– (d) as shown below. (f)).
nect connector.
Lock.
8. Common rail pressure sensor (Fuel rail

press)
nector
a Precautions for disconnecting connector The connector of the common rail pres-
The direction of the lock of the connector sure sensor has a special locking mecha-
varies with the tightened position of the nism. Disconnect it according to steps (a)
sensor and the lock may be in a direction – (b) and connect it according to steps (c)
in which it is difficult to reset (on the under- – (d) as shown below.
side or engine side). Disconnection: (a) Unlock – (b) Discon-
In this case, pinch the lock in direction (a) nect connector.
with bent-nose nippers [1] (commercially Connection: (c) Connect connector – (d)
available), and the lock is reset. Lock.
Since the lock clicks when it is reset, dis-
connect the connector after a click is heard.
6 PC130-8
9. Engine coolant temperature sensor (Cool-

ant temp)
nector
The connector of the engine coolant tem-
perature sensor has a special locking
mechanism. Disconnect it according to
steps (a) – (b) and connect it according to
steps (c) – (d) as shown below.
nect connector.
Lock.
a Removal and installation of sensor

A deep socket is necessary for removal
and installation of the engine coolant tem-
perature sensor. See "Tools for testing,
adjusting, and troubleshooting".
PC130-8 7
Procedure for testing diodes 1

a Test the assembled-type diode (8-pin) and the
single diode (2-pin) according to the following
procedure.
a The conductive directions of the assembled-
type diode are as follows.
2. When using analog circuit tester

1) Set the tester in the resistance range.
2) Apply the leads of the tester as explained
below and check the movement of the
pointer.
i) Apply the red (+) lead of the tester to
the anode (P) side of the diode and
a The conductive direction of the single diode is apply the black (–) lead to the cath-
indicated on the surface of the diode. ode (N) side.
ii) Apply the red (+) lead of the tester to
the cathode (N) side of the diode and
apply the black (–) lead to the anode
(P) side.
3) Judge the condition of the diode by the
movement of the pointer.
q The pointer does not move in i) but
moves in ii): The diode is normal (The
moving range (resistance) depends
on the type and selected range of the
tester, however).
q The pointer moves in both i) and ii):
The diode is defective (Internal short
circuit).
1. When using digital circuit tester q The pointer moves in neither of i) and
1) Set the tester in the diode range and ii): The diode is defective (Internal
check the indicated value. disconnection).
a When an ordinary circuit tester is
used, the voltage of the internal bat-
tery is indicated.
2) Apply the red (+) lead of the tester to the
anode (P) side of the diode and apply the
black (–) lead to the cathode (N) side and
check the indicated value.
3) Judge the condition of the diode by the
indicated value.
q The indicated value does not change:
The diode does not have conductivity
(Defective).
q The indicated value changes:
The diode has conductivity (Normal).
Note: In the case of a silicon diode, a
value in the range from 460 to 600 is indi-
cated.
8 PC130-8
Pm Clinic service 1
Model name Serial No. Service meter
T PC130-8 h
User's name Date of execution Inspector
/ /
Specifications
Main components Attachments Shoe width
Boom T Standard T ( ) T Breaker T 500 mm T( )
Arm T Standard T ( ) T( ) T 600 mm
Bucket T Standard T ( ) T( ) T 700 mm
Check of oil/coolant level
T Radiator coolant When necessary
T Machinery case oil
T Engine oil T Damper case oil
T( )
T Hydraulic oil T Final drive case oil
Ambient temperature Altitude
°C m
Operator's opinion
Result of visual inspection
Mechanical equipment system fault history Electrical equipment system fault history
989EKX times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
AB00KE times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
B@BAZG times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
B@BAZK times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
B@BCNS times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
B@HANS times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
CA234 times/1st time h/last h times/1st time h/last h
Max. range of engine coolant temperature gauge Max. range of hydraulic oil temperature gauge
PC130-8 9
Check sheet
Model Serial No. Service meter User's name Date of execution Inspector
/ /
1. Engine
Checking condition
Standard Mea-
Service limit
Good
Fuel Work- Auto-
Bad
No. Check item Operation of work Unit value for new sured
control ing decel- value
equipment machine value
dial mode eration
1 Engine speed rpm 2,090 – 2,210 2,090 – 2,210
Engine oil MAX All levers in neutral MPa 0.34 – 0.59 0.25
2
pressure {kg/cm2} {3.47 – 6.02} {2.5}
P OFF
3 Engine speed rpm 1,050 – 1,150 1,050 – 1,150
Engine oil MIN All levers in neutral MPa Min. 0.10 0.07
4
pressure {kg/cm2} {Min. 1.0} {0.7}
2. Work equipment speed

Checking condition
Standard Mea-
Service limit
Good
Fuel Work-
Bad
No. Check item Unit value for new sured
control ing Checking posture, etc. value
machine value
dial mode
1 Boom RAISE Work equipment extended fully sec 3.4 – 4.1 Max. 4.3
2 Arm IN sec 2.9 – 3.5 Max. 4.0
Boom top horizontal
3 Arm OUT sec 2.4 – 3.0 Max. 3.7
Boom top horizontal
4 Bucket CURL sec 2.4 – 2.9 Max. 3.4
MAX P Arm cylinder retracted fully
Work equipment extended fully Max. 23.3
5 Swing (5 turns) sec 25.3 – 29.3
Swing right and left Min. 31.3
One side of track LO STD sec Max. 39.6 Max. 45
Travel
6 pushed up and turned
(5 idle turns) HI STD sec Max. 22.0 Max. 25
forward and backward
3. Hydraulic drift of work equipment

Checking condition
Standard Mea-
Service limit
Good
Fuel Work-
Bad
No. Check item Unit value for new sured

control ing Checking posture, etc. value
machine value
dial mode
Boom top horizontal
Hydraulic drift of mm/
1 Engine stopped Arm cylinder retracted fully Max. 310 Max. 460
bucket tip 15 min
Bucket loaded
10 PC130-8
4. Hydraulic circuit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Checking condition
600K 600K 600K 600K 60K
Good
Bad
No. Checked part
Fuel Work-
Pump Pump Pump Pump
control ing Operation of work equipment Control
main 1 main 2 LS 1 LS 2
dial mode
Self pressure A
1 All lever in neutral — — — —
reducing valve
B B
2 Main relief valve Arm out relief — — —
C1 C1 C2 C2
3 Unload valve All levers in neutral —
Right track driven idle D1 D2

— — —
Lever moved halfway
4 LS valve
Left track driven idle D1 D2
— — —
Lever moved halfway
Swing lock E E
MAX P — — —
Swing motor Right swing relief
5
safety valve Swing lock E E
— — —
Left swing relief
Right travel lock F
— — — —
Right forward relief
Main relief valve Right travel lock F
Travel motor — — — —
Right reverse relief
6 Safety valve
Travel junction Left travel lock F
— — — —
valve Left forward relief
Left travel lock F
— — — —
Left reverse relief
Checked oil pressure Unit Standard value for new machine Service limit value
A (Control circuit basic pressure) 3.0 – 3.4 {31 – 35} 2.7 – 3.7 {28 – 35}
B (Work equipment relief pressure) 30.9 – 32.8 {315 – 335} 30.9 – 33.8 {315 – 345}
Standard value
C (Unload pressure) 1.8 – 3.8 {18 – 38} 1.8 – 3.8 {18 – 38}
D (LS differential pressure when MPa
travel lever is operated half with no {kg/cm2} 2.1 – 2.3 {21.5 – 23.5} 2.1 – 2.3 {21.5 – 23.5}
load)
E (Swing relief pressure) 28.2 – 30.2 {288 – 308} 26.7 – 30.7 {273 – 313}
F (Travel relief pressure) 33.8 – 35.8 {345 – 365} 32.8 – 36.8 {335 – 375}
* Gauge changing work: Change hoses of gauges [3] and [4].

[1] [2] [3a] [4a] [5]
Checking condition
600K 600K 600K 600K 60K
Good
Bad
No. Check item

Fuel Work-
F pump R pump F pump R pump
control ing Operation of work equipment Control
main main servo servo
dial mode
H1 H1 H2 H2
7 Servo piston MAX P Arm out relief —
Standard value
H1 : H2 = 1 : 0.6
H (Servo control pressure) —
(Oil pressure ratio)
PC130-8 11
* Gauge changing work: Change [3] and [4] to 60K and change hoses of [3], [4], and [5].
[1] [2] [3b] [4b] [5a]
Checking condition
600K 600K 60K 60K 60K
Good
Bad
No. Check item
Fuel Work-
F pump R pump F pump R pump
control ing Operation of work equipment LS-EPC
main main (F) (R)
dial mode
J1 J1
MIN — — —
P
J2 J2
— — —
J3 J3
8 PC-EPC valve E All levers in neutral — — —
MAX
J4 J4
L — — —
J5 J5
B — — —
Standard value
J1 (PC-EPC valve output pressure 1) Approx. 1.7 {Approx. 18}

MPa
{kg/cm2}
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14 PC130-8
SEN04117-02
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
40 Troubleshooting 1
Failure code table and fuse locations
Failure code table ........................................................................................................................................... 2
Fuse locations................................................................................................................................................. 6
PC130-8 1
SEN04117-02 40 Troubleshooting
Failure code table 1

User Component Category of Reference
Failure code Trouble (Displayed on screen)
code in charge record documents No.
Electrical
— 989L00 Engine controller lock caution 1 MON
system
Electrical
— 989M00 Engine controller lock caution 2 MON
system
Electrical
— 989N00 Engine controller lock caution 3 MON
system
Mechanical
— AA10NX Air cleaner clogging MON
system
Mechanical
— AB00KE Charge voltage low MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BAZG Eng oil press. low ENG
system
Mechanical
— B@BAZK Eng oil level low MON
system
Mechanical
— B@BCNS Eng coolant overheat ENG
system
Mechanical
— B@BCZK Eng water level low MON
system
Mechanical
— B@HANS Hydr oil overheat PUMP
system
Electrical
E10 CA111 ECM critical internal failure ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA115 Eng Ne and Bkup speed sensor error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA122 Charge air press sensor high error ENG
system
Electrical Troubleshooting
E11 CA123 Charge air press sensor low error ENG
system by failure code,
Electrical Part 1
E14 CA131 Throttle sensor high error ENG
system SEN04119-00
Electrical
E14 CA132 Throttle sensor low error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA144 Coolant temp. sensor high error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA145 Coolant temp. sensor low error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA153 Charge air temp. sensor high error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA154 Charge air temp. sensor low error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA155 Chg air temp high speed derate ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA187 Sensor sup. 2 volt. low error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA221 Ambient air press. sensor high error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA222 Ambient air press. sensor low error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA227 Sensor sup. 2 volt. high error ENG
system
Mechanical
— CA234 Eng. overspeed ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA238 Ne speed sensor sup. volt. error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA271 IMV/PCV1 short error ENG
system
2 PC130-8

Electrical
E10 CA272 IMV/PCV1 open error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA322 Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error ENG
system Troubleshooting
Electrical by failure code,
system Part 1
Electrical SEN04119-00
system
Electrical
system
Electrical
E10 CA342 Calibration code incompatibility ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA351 Inj. drive circuit error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA352 Sensor sup. 1 volt. low error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA386 Sensor sup. 1 volt. high error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA435 Abnormality in engine oil pressure switch ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA441 Battery voltage low error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA442 Battery voltage high error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA449 Rail press. very high error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA451 Rail press. sensor high error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA452 Rail press. sensor low error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA488 Chg air temp high torque derate ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA553 Rail press. high error ENG
system Troubleshooting
Electrical by failure code,
E15 CA559 Rail press. low error ENG
system Part 2
Electrical SEN04120-01
E15 CA689 Eng. Ne speed sensor error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA731 Eng. Bkup speed sensor phase error ENG
system
Electrical
E10 CA757 All persistent data lost error ENG
system
Electrical
E15 CA778 Eng. Bkup speed sensor error ENG
system
Electrical
E0E CA1633 KOMNET datalink timeout error ENG
system
Electrical
E14 CA2185 Throttle sens. sup. volt. high error ENG
system
Electrical
E14 CA2186 Throttle sens. sup. volt. low error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA2249 Rail press. very low error ENG
system
Electrical
E11 CA2311 Abnormality in IMV solenoid ENG
system
Electrical
— D110KB Battery relay drive short PUMP
system
Electrical
E01 D19JKZ Personal code relay abnormality MON2
system
Electrical
— D862KA GPS antenna discon MON2
system
PC130-8 3

Electrical
E0E DA22KK Pump solenoid power low error PUMP
system
— DA25KP 5V sensor 1 power abnormality PUMP
Electrical Part 2
— DA26KP 5V sensor 2 power abnormality PUMP
system SEN04120-01
Electrical
— DA29KQ Model selection abnormality PUMP
system
Electrical
E0E DA2RMC CAN discon (Pump controller detected) PUMP
system
Electrical
— DAF8KB Short circuit in camera power supply MON
system
Electrical
— DAFGMC GPS module error MON2
system
Electrical
E0E DAFRMC CAN discon (Monitor detected) MON
system
Electrical
— DGH2KB Hydr oil sensor short PUMP
system
Electrical
— DHPAMA Pump press sensor abnormality PUMP
system
Electrical
E20 DHSFMA Travel left forward PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP
system
Electrical
E20 DHSGMA Travel right forward PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP
system
Electrical
E20 DHSHMA Travel left reverse PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP
system
Electrical
E20 DHSJMA Travel right reverse PPC press sensor abnormality PUMP
system
— DHX1MA Overload sensor abnormality (Analog) PUMP
Electrical Part 3
— DV20KB Travel alarm short circuit PUMP
system SEN04121-00
Electrical
— DW43KA Travel speed sol discon PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW43KB Travel speed sol short PUMP
system
Electrical
E03 DW45KA Swing brake sol discon PUMP
system
Electrical
E03 DW45KB Swing brake sol short PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW91KA Travel junction sol discon PUMP
system
Electrical
— DW91KB Travel junction sol short PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWJ0KA Merge-divider sol discon PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWJ0KB Merge-divider sol short PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWK0KA 2-stage relief sol discon PUMP
system
Electrical
— DWK0KB 2-stage relief sol short PUMP
system
Electrical
E02 DXA8KA PC-EPC sol discon PUMP
system
E02 DXA8KB PC-EPC sol short PUMP
Electrical Part 4
— DXE4KA Service current EPC discon PUMP
system SEN04122-00
Electrical
— DXE4KB Service current EPC short PUMP
system
4 PC130-8

Electrical
— DY20KA Wiper working abnormality PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY20MA Wiper parking abnormality PUMP
system
— DY2CKA Washer drive discon PUMP
Electrical Part 4
— DY2CKB Washer drive short PUMP
system SEN04122-00
Electrical
— DY2DKB Wiper drive (for) short PUMP
system
Electrical
— DY2EKB Wiper drive (rev) short PUMP
system

The items are entered in the order of their failure codes (ascending order).
a User code
Attached : If the failure code is detected, the user code, failure code, and telephone No. (if regis-
tered) are displayed on the ordinary screen to notify the operator of the abnormality.
Not attached: Even if the failure code is detected, the machine monitor does not notify the operator of
the abnormality.
MON: The machine monitor is in charge of detection of abnormality.
MON2: The KOMTRAX section of the machine monitor is in charge of detection of abnormality.
ENG: The engine controller is in charge of detection of abnormality.
PUMP: The pump controller is in charge of detection of abnormality.
a Category of record
Mechanical system: Abnormality information is recorded in the mechanical system abnormality record.
Electrical system: Abnormality information is recorded in the electrical system abnormality record.
PC130-8 5
Fuse locations 1
Connection table of fuse box
a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box supplies power (A
switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the OFF and ON
positions).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuses and fus-
ible links to see if the power is supplied normally.
Fuse
Type of power supply Fusible link Fuse No. Destination of power
capacity
Pump resistor, light switch, swing holding brake release
1 10A
switch
2 30A Pump controller
F04
Switch power supply 3 10A Starting motor cutout relay, PPC oil pressure lock switch
(65A)
Windshield washer, cigar lighter, electrical intake air
4 10A
heater
5 10A Horn
6 10A (Spare)
7 10A Rotary lamp (If equipped)
F04
Switch power supply 8 20A Working lamp relay
(65A)
9 10A Radio, speaker, one-touch power max. switch
10 10A (Spare)
11 20A Air conditioner unit
F04 12 10A (Spare)
Switch power supply
(65A) 13 10A Relay for cab light
14 10A Optional power supply (1)
F05 16 10A Radio backup, room lamp
Constant power supply
(30A) 17 20A Machine monitor, pump controller, starting switch (B)
18 10A (Spare)
Starting switch 19 30A Engine controller
Switch power supply
ACC 20 5A Engine controller
6 PC130-8
Locations of fusible links
Location of fuse box and fuse Nos.
PC130-8 7

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
8 PC130-8
SEN04118-02
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
General information on troubleshooting
Points to remember when troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 2
Sequence of events in troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 3
Checks before troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 4
Classification and procedures for troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 5
Information in troubleshooting table................................................................................................................ 6
Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos. ........................................................................... 8
Connection table for connector pin numbers .................................................................................................11
T- branch box and T- branch adapter table ................................................................................................... 47
PC130-8 1
Points to remember when troubleshooting 1

k Stop the machine in a level place, and check that the safety pin, blocks, and parking brake are
securely fitted.
k When carrying out the operation with 2 or more workers, keep strictly to the agreed signals, and
do not allow any unauthorized person to come near.
k If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot, hot water may spurt out and cause burns,
so wait for the engine to cool down before starting troubleshooting.
k Be extremely careful not to touch any hot parts or to get caught in any rotating parts.
k When disconnecting wiring, always disconnect the negative (–) terminal of the battery first.
k When removing the plug or cap from a location which is under pressure from oil, water, or air,
always release the internal pressure first. When installing measuring equipment, be sure to con-
nect it properly.
The aim of troubleshooting is to pinpoint the basic cause of the failure, to carry out repairs swiftly, and to pre-
vent reoccurrence of the failure. When carrying out troubleshooting, and important point is of course to
understand the structure and function. However, a short cut to effective troubleshooting is to ask the operator
various questions to form some idea of possible causes of the failure that would produce the reported symp-
toms.
1. When carrying out troubleshooting, do not 4) Other maintenance items can be checked
hurry to disassemble the components. externally, so check any item that is con-
If components are disassembled immediately sidered to be necessary.
any failure occurs:
q Parts that have no connection with the fail- 4. Confirming failure
ure or other unnecessary parts will be dis- Confirm the extent of the failure yourself, and
assembled. judge whether to handle it as a real failure or
q It will become impossible to find the cause as a problem with the method of operation, etc.
of the failure. a When operating the machine to reenact
It will also cause a waste of manhours, parts, the troubleshooting symptoms, do not
or oil or grease, and at the same time, will also carry out any investigation or measure-
lose the confidence of the user or operator. For ment that may make the problem worse.
this reason, when carrying out troubleshooting,
it is necessary to carry out thorough prior 5. Troubleshooting
investigation and to carry out troubleshooting Use the results of the investigation and inspec-
in accordance with the fixed procedure. tion in Items 2 – 4 to narrow down the causes
of failure, then use the troubleshooting table or
2. Points to ask user or operator troubleshooting flowchart to locate the position
1) Have any other problems occurred apart of the failure exactly.
from the problem that has been reported? a The basic procedure for troubleshooting is
2) Was there anything strange about the as follows.
machine before the failure occurred? 1] Start from the simple points.
3) Did the failure occur suddenly, or were 2] Start from the most likely points.
there problems with the machine condition 3] Investigate other related parts or
before this? information.
4) Under what conditions did the failure
occur? 6. Measures to remove root cause of failure
5) Had any repairs been carried out before Even if the failure is repaired, if the root cause
the failure? When were these repairs car- of the failure is not repaired, the same failure
ried out? will occur again.To prevent this, always investi-
6) Has the same kind of failure occurred gate why the problem occurred. Then, remove
before? the root cause.
3. Check before troubleshooting

1) Is there any sign of irregularities of the
machine?
2) Make checks before starting day's work.
3) Make checks of other items.
2 PC130-8
Sequence of events in troubleshooting 1
PC130-8 3
Checks before troubleshooting 1
Item Criterion Remedy

1. Check of level and type of fuel — Add fuel
2. Check of fuel for foreign matter — Clean and drain
3. Check of fuel filter — Replace
4. Check of hydraulic oil level — Add fuel
Lubricating 5. Check of hydraulic oil strainer — Clean and drain
oil/Coolant 6. Check of swing machinery oil level — Add fuel
7. Check of level and type of engine oil (in oil pan) — Add fuel
8. Check of coolant level — Add coolant
9. Check of dust indicator for clogging — Clean or replace
10. Check of hydraulic oil filter — Replace
1. Check of battery terminals and wiring for loose-
— Retighten or replace
ness and corrosion
Electrical 2. Check of alternator terminals and wiring for
equipment looseness and corrosion
3. Check of starting motor terminals and wiring for
looseness and corrosion
Hydraulic/ 1. Check for abnormal noise and smell — Repair

Mechanical 2. Check for oil leakage — Repair
equipment 3. Bleeding air — Bleed air
1. Check of battery voltage (with engine stopped) 20 – 30 V Replace
2. Check of electrolyte level — Add or replace
3. Check of wires for discoloration, burn, and
— Replace
removal of cover
4. Check for released wire clamp and drooping wire — Repair
Electric,
electrical 5. Check of wires for wetness (Check connectors Disconnect the
—
equipment and terminals for wetness, in particular) connectors and dry
6. Check of fuse for disconnection and corrosion — Replace
7. Check of alternator voltage (while engine speed After operating for several
Replace
is at middle or higher) minutes: 27.5 – 29.5 V
8. Check of battery relay for operating sound (when
— Replace
starting switch is turned ON or OFF)
4 PC130-8
Classification and procedures for troubleshooting 1

Classification for troubleshooting
Mode Contents
Display of code Troubleshooting by failure code
E-mode Troubleshooting of electrical system
H-mode Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system
S-mode Troubleshooting of engine
Procedure for troubleshooting

If a phenomenon looking like a trouble occurs in the machine, select a proper troubleshooting No. according
to the following procedure, and then go to the corresponding troubleshooting section.
1. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when user code and failure code are displayed on
machine monitor:
If a user code and a failure code are displayed on the machine monitor, carry out the troubleshooting for
the corresponding "Display of code" according to the displayed failure code.
2. When electrical system error code or mechanical system error code is recorded in abnormality
record:
If a user code and a failure code are not displayed on the machine monitor, check a mechanical system
failure code and an electrical system failure code with the abnormality record function of the machine
monitor.
If a code is recorded, carry out troubleshooting for the corresponding "Display of code" according to
the recorded code.
a If an electrical system failure code is recorded, delete all the codes and reproduce them, and then
see if the trouble is still detected.
a An error code of the mechanical system cannot be deleted.
a If a trouble is displayed in the air conditioner abnormality record or heater abnormality record by the
abnormality record function, carry out the corresponding troubleshooting in E-mode.
3. When user code and failure code is not displayed and no failure code is recorded in abnormality
record:
If a user code and failure code are not displayed on the machine monitor and no failure code is recorded
in the abnormality record, a trouble that the machine cannot find out by itself may have occurred in the
electrical system or hydraulic and mechanical system.
In this case, check the phenomenon looking like a trouble again and select the same phenomenon from
the table of "Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos.", and then carry out trouble-
shooting corresponding to that phenomenon in the "E-mode", "H-mode", or "S-mode".
PC130-8 5
Information in troubleshooting table 1

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit
diagram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
User code Failure code

Display on Trouble name displayed in abnormality record machine moni-
Display on machine Trouble
machine monitor
monitor
tor
Contents of
Contents of trouble detected by machine monitor or controller
trouble
Action of
Action taken by machine monitor or controller to protect system or devices when engine con-
machine moni-
troller detects trouble
tor or controller
Problem that
Problem that appears on machine as result of action taken by machine monitor or controller
appears on
(shown above)
machine
Related infor-
Information related to detected trouble or troubleshooting
mation
Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

<Contents of description>
• Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
• Remarks on judgment
1
<Troubles in wiring harness>
• Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or wiring harness is bro-
ken.
• Ground fault
Wiring harness which is not connected to chassis ground
2 circuit is in contact with chassis ground circuit.
• Hot short
Wiring harness which is not connected to power source (24
V) circuit is in contact with power source (24 V) circuit.
• Short circuit
Independent wiring harnesses are in contact with each other
Possible causes abnormally.
and standard Possible causes of trouble
value in normal 3 (Given numbers are refer-
state ence numbers, which do not <Precautions for troubleshooting>
indicate priority) (1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-
adapter
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for trouble-
shooting, unless otherwise specified.
• If connector No. has no marks of “male” and “female”,
disconnect connector and insert T-adapters in both male
4 side and female side.
• If connector No. has marks of “male” and “female”, dis-
connect connector and connect T-adapter to only male
side or female side.
(2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (–) lead of tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise
specified.
5
• Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or wiring harness
entered on front side.
• Connect negative (–) lead to pin No. or harness entered
on rear side.
6 PC130-8
Related circuit diagram
This drawing is a part of the electric circuit diagram related to trouble-

shooting.
q Connector No.: Indicates (Model – Number of pins) and
(Color).
q “Connector No. and pin No.” from each branching/merging
point: Shows the ends of branch or source of merging within
the parts of the same wiring harness.
q Arrow ( ): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
PC130-8 7
Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos. 1

Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena looking like troubles Display
E-mode H-mode S-mode
of code
Phenomena related to user code/failure code
User code and failure code are displayed on ordinary screen of machine
1
monitor Accord-
When abnormality record is checked, failure code is displayed in ing to dis-
2
mechanical system abnormality record played
When abnormality record is checked, failure code is displayed in code
3
electrical system abnormality record
When abnormality record is checked, failure code is displayed in air
4 E-23
conditioner or heater abnormality record
Phenomena related to engine
5 Starting performance is poor S-1
6 Engine does not start (Engine does not turn) E-3 S-2
7 Engine does not pick up smoothly S-3
8 Engine stops during operations S-4
9 Engine does not rotate smoothly S-5
10 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) S-6
11 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) S-7
12 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) S-8
13 Oil becomes contaminated quickly S-9
14 Fuel consumption is excessive S-10
15 Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) S-11
16 Oil pressure drops S-12
17 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel) S-13
18 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) S-14
19 Abnormal noise is made S-15
20 Vibration is excessive S-16
21 Preheater does not operate E-4
22 Automatic warm-up system does not operate (in cold season) E-5
23 Auto-decelerator does not operate normally E-15
Phenomena related to work equipment/swing/travel
All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move or
24 E-6 H-3
cannot be locked
25 Speed or power of all work equipment, swing, and travel are low H-1
26 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls H-2 S-6
27 Working mode does not change E-16
28 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump H-4
29 Fine control mode does not function H-5
Phenomena related to work equipment
30 Speed or power of boom is low H-6
31 Speed or power of arm is low H-7
32 Speed or power of bucket is low H-8
33 Work equipment does not move in its single operation H-9
8 PC130-8
Troubleshooting
of code
34 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large H-10
35 Time lag of work equipment is large H-11
36 Power maximizing function does not operate normally E-20 H-12
Flow rate in attachment circuit cannot be adjusted (when attachment is
37 H-27
installed)
Phenomena related to compound operation
38 Work equipment loaded more is slower during compound operation H-13
Boom RAISE speed is low in compound operation of swing + boom
39 H-14
RAISE
Travel speed lowers largely during compound operation of work
40 H-15
equipment/swing + travel
Phenomena related to travel
41 Machine deviates during travel H-16
42 Travel speed is low H-17
43 Machine cannot be steered easily or steering power is low H-18
44 Travel speed does not change or it is kept low or high E-17 H-19
45 Track does not move (Only either side) H-20
46 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding E-22
Phenomena related to swing
47 Machine does not swing H-21
48 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low H-22
49 Excessive overrun when stopping swing H-23
50 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large shock H-24
51 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large sound H-25
Swing holding brake does not operate normally
52 E-21 H-26
Hydraulic drift of swing is large
Phenomena related to machine monitor
53 When starting switch turned ON, machine monitor displays nothing E-1
When starting switch turned ON (before starting engine), basic check
54 E-2
item lights up
55 Precaution lights up while engine is running E-7
56 Emergency stop item lights up while engine is running E-8
57 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally E-9
58 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally E-10
59 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally E-11
Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable
60 E-12
machine
61 Machine monitor does not display some items E-13
62 Function switch does not work E-14
63 Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped E-18
64 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate E-19
Air conditioner does not operate normally (including air conditioner
65 E-23
abnormality record)
66 While starting switch is in OFF position, service meter is not displayed E-24
67 Machine monitor cannot be set in service mode E-25
PC130-8 9
Troubleshooting
of code
68 Monitoring function does not display lever control signal normally E-26
Other phenomena
69 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally E-27
10 PC130-8
Connection table for connector pin numbers (Rev. 2009.04)
a The terms of male and female refer to the pins, while the terms of male housing and female housing
refer to the mating portion of the housing.
PC130-8 11
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15
16 PC130-8
PC130-8 17
18 PC130-8
PC130-8 19
20 PC130-8
PC130-8 21
22 PC130-8
PC130-8 23
24 PC130-8
PC130-8 25
26 PC130-8
PC130-8 27
28 PC130-8
PC130-8 29
30 PC130-8
PC130-8 31
32 PC130-8
PC130-8 33
34 PC130-8
PC130-8 35
36 PC130-8
PC130-8 37
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39
40 PC130-8
PC130-8 41
42 PC130-8
PC130-8 43
44 PC130-8
PC130-8 45
46 PC130-8
T- branch box and T- branch adapter table 1

(Rev. 2009.03)
a The vertical column indicates a part number of T-branch box or T-branch adapter while the horizontal
column indicates a part number of harness checker assembly.
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
799-601-4101
799-601-4201
Out of kit
Identification
Part No. Part name
symbol
799-601-2600 T-box (for ECONO) 21 q q q q q

799-601-3100 T-box (for MS) 37 q
799-601-3200 T-box (for MS) 37 q
799-601-3380 Plate for MS (14-pin) q
799-601-3410 Adapter for BENDIX (MS) 24 MS-24P q
799-601-3470 Case q
799-601-2710 Adapter for MIC 5 MIC-5P q q q
799-601-2720 Adapter for MIC 13 MIC-13P q q q
799-601-2730 Adapter for MIC 17 MIC-17P q q q q q q
799-601-2740 Adapter for MIC 21 MIC-21P q q q q q q
799-601-2950 Adapter for MIC 9 MIC-9P q q q q
799-601-2750 Adapter for ECONO 2 ECONO2P q q
799-601-2810 Adapter for DLI 8 DLI-8P q q
799-601-2840 Extension cable (ECONO type) 12 ECONO12P q q q
799-601-2850 Case q
799-601-4350 T-box (for DRC 60, ECONO) 60 q
799-601-4360 Case q
799-601-7010 Adapter for X (T-adapter) 1 q q
799-601-7020 Adapter for X 2 X2P q q q q
799-601-7050 Adapter for SWP 6 SW6P q q q
799-601-7060 Adapter for SWP 8 SW8P q q q
799-601-7310 Adapter for SWP 12 SW12P q
799-601-7070 Adapter for SWP 14 SW14P q q
799-601-7320 Adapter for SWP 16 SW16P q
799-601-7080 Adapter for M (T-adapter) 1 q q
799-601-7090 Adapter for M 2 M2P q q q q
PC130-8 47
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
799-601-4101
799-601-4201
Out of kit
Identification
Part No. Part name
symbol

799-601-7340 Adapter for M 8 M8P q
799-601-7140 Adapter for S 8 S8P q q q q
799-601-7150 Adapter for S (White) 10 S10P q q q q
799-601-7160 Adapter for S (Blue) 12 S12P q q q
799-601-7170 Adapter for S (Blue) 16 S16P q q q q
799-601-7330 Adapter for S (White) 16 S16PW q
799-601-7350 Adapter for S (White) 12 S12PW q
799-601-7180 Adapter for AMP040 8 A8P q
799-601-7190 Adapter for AMP040 12 A12P q q
799-601-7210 Adapter for AMP040 16 A16P q q q q
799-601-7220 Adapter for AMP040 20 A20P q q q q
799-601-7230 Short connector for X 2 — q q q q
799-601-7240 Case q q
799-601-7270 Case q
799-601-7510 Adapter for 070 10 07-10 q
799-601-7520 Adapter for 070 12 07-12 q
799-601-7530 Adapter for 070 14 07-14 q
799-601-7540 Adapter for 070 18 07-18 q
799-601-7550 Adapter for 070 20 07-20 q
799-601-7360 Adapter for relay 5 REL-5P q
799-601-7370 Adapter for relay 6 REL-6P q
799-601-7380 Adapter for JFC 2 — q
799-601-9010 Adapter for DTM 2 DTM2 q q
799-601-9020 Adapter for DT 2 DT2 q q q q
799-601-9030 Adapter for DT 3 DT3 q q
799-601-9040 Adapter for DT 4 DT4 q q q q
799-601-9050 Adapter for DT 6 DT6 q q
799-601-9060 Adapter for DT (Gray) 8 DT8GR q q
799-601-9070 Adapter for DT (Black) 8 DT8B q q
799-601-9080 Adapter for DT (Green) 8 DT8G q q
799-601-9090 Adapter for DT (Brown) 8 DT8BR q q
799-601-9110 Adapter for DT (Gray) 12 DT12GR q q
799-601-9120 Adapter for DT (Black) 12 DT12B q q
799-601-9130 Adapter for DT (Green) 12 DT12G q q
799-601-9140 Adapter for DT (Brown) 12 DT12BR q q
799-601-9210 Adapter for HD30-18 8 D18-8 q q
799-601-9310 Plate for HD30 (24-pin) q q q
799-601-9320 T-box (for ECONO) 24 q q q
48 PC130-8
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
799-601-4101
799-601-4201
Out of kit
Identification
Part No. Part name
symbol
799-601-9330 Case q
799-601-9340 Case q
799-601-9350 Adapter for DRC 40 DRC-40 q
799-601-9360 Adapter for DRC 24 DRC-24 q
799-601-9410* Socket for engine (CRI-T2) 2 G q
Adapter for engine (CRI-T2)
799-601-9420 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) PFUEL 3 A3 q q
Oil pressure sensor
Socket for engine (CRI-T2)
799-601-9430* 2 P q q
Socket for engine (CRI-T3) PCV
799-601-9440* Socket for engine (CRI-T2) 3 1,2,3 q
795-799-5520* Socket for engine (HPI-T2) 2 S q
Socket for engine (HPI-T2)
795-799-5530* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) 2 C q q
Temperature sensor
Socket for engine (HPI-T2)
795-799-5540* 2 A q q
Socket for engine (CRI-T3) TIM
795-799-5460 Cable for engine (HPI-T2) 3 — q
799-601-4110 Adapter for engine (140-T3) PIM 4 ITT3N q q
799-601-4130 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) NE, CAM 3 FCIN q q
799-601-4140 3 FCIG q q
Atomosphere pressure
799-601-4150 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) POIL 3 FCIB q q
799-601-4160 2 4160 q q
Oil pressure switch
799-601-4180 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) PEVA 3 4180 q q
799-601-4190* 3 1,2,3L q q
Commonrail pressure
799-601-4230* 4 1,2,3,4C q q
Air intake pressure/temperature
799-601-4240* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) PAMB 3 1,2,3A q q
799-601-4250* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) PIM 3 1,2,3B q q
799-601-4330* Socket for engine (CRI-T3) G 3 1,2,3,G q q
799-601-4340* 2 2,PA q q
Pump actuator
Socket for engine (CRI-T3)(95)
799-601-4380* 4 1,2,3,4T q
Air intake pressure/temperature
799-601-4260 Adapter for controller (ENG) 4 DTP4 q q
799-601-4211 Adapter for controller (ENG) 50 DRC50 q
799-601-4220 Adapter for controller (ENG) 60 DRC60 q
799-601-4390* Socket for controller (95 ENG) 60 — q
799-601-4280* Box for controller (PUMP) 121 — q
799-601-9720 Adapter for controller (HST) 16 HST16A q
799-601-9710 Adapter for controller (HST) 16 HST16B q
799-601-9730 Adapter for controller (HST) 26 HST26A q
2,
Multi-adapter for
799-601-9890 3, — q
DT2 – 4 and DTM2
4,
“*” Shows not T-adapter but socket.
PC130-8 49

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
50 PC130-8
SEN04119-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Troubleshooting by failure code, Part 1
Failure code [989L00] Engine controller lock caution 1 .................................................................................. 3
Failure code [989M00] Engine controller lock caution 2 ................................................................................. 3
Failure code [989N00] Engine controller lock caution 3.................................................................................. 4
Failure code [AA10NX] Air cleaner clogging................................................................................................... 5
Failure code [AB00KE] Charge voltage low.................................................................................................... 6
Failure code [B@BAZG] Eng oil press. low .................................................................................................... 8
Failure code [B@BAZK] Eng oil level low ....................................................................................................... 9
Failure code [B@BCNS] Eng coolant overheat ............................................................................................ 10
Failure code [B@BCZK] Eng water level low................................................................................................ 12
Failure code [B@HANS] Hydr oil overheat ................................................................................................... 14
Failure code [CA111] ECM critical internal failure ......................................................................................... 16
Failure code [CA115] Eng Ne and Bkup speed sensor error ........................................................................ 19
Failure code [CA122] Charge air press sensor high error ............................................................................ 20
Failure code [CA123] Charge air press sensor low error.............................................................................. 22
Failure code [CA131] Throttle sensor high error........................................................................................... 24
Failure code [CA132] Throttle sensor low error ............................................................................................ 26
PC130-8 1
Failure code [CA144] Coolant temp. sensor high error................................................................................. 28

Failure code [CA145] Coolant temp. sensor low error .................................................................................. 30
Failure code [CA153] Charge air temp. sensor high error ............................................................................ 32
Failure code [CA154] Charge air temp. sensor low error.............................................................................. 34
Failure code [CA155] Chg air temp high speed derate ................................................................................. 34
Failure code [CA187] Sensor sup. 2 volt. low error....................................................................................... 35
Failure code [CA221] Ambient air press. sensor high error .......................................................................... 36
Failure code [CA222] Ambient air press. sensor low error............................................................................ 38
Failure code [CA227] Sensor sup. 2 volt. high error ..................................................................................... 39
Failure code [CA234] Eng. overspeed .......................................................................................................... 40
Failure code [CA238] Ne speed sensor sup. volt. error ................................................................................ 42
Failure code [CA271] IMV/PCV1 short error ................................................................................................. 44
Failure code [CA272] IMV/PCV1 open error ................................................................................................. 45
Failure code [CA322] Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error ................................................................. 46
2 PC130-8
Failure code [989L00] Engine controller lock caution 1 1

User code Failure code Engine controller lock caution 1
Trouble
— 989L00 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• Engine controller lock is detected (Factor 1).
trouble
Action of • None in particular.
machine monitor • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
appears on • Engine cannot be started.
machine
• If this failure code is displayed after machine monitor is replaced, user password must be changed
Related
to one before replacement.
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON.
Possible causes Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

and standard
value in normal Replacement of machine
1 This trouble may be caused by replacement of machine monitor.
state monitor
Failure code [989M00] Engine controller lock caution 2 1

Trouble
— 989M00 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Engine cannot be started.
machine
• If this failure code is displayed after machine monitor is replaced, user password must be changed
Related
to one before replacement.
information

Possible causes Replacement of machine
1 This trouble may be caused by replacement of machine monitor.
and standard monitor
value in normal If this failure code is displayed while machine monitor is not
state 2 Defective machine monitor replaced, machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in
system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
PC130-8 3
Failure code [989N00] Engine controller lock caution 3 1

Trouble
— 989N00 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
trouble
Action of • Tries automatic resetting.
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related • Method of reproducing failure code: Failure code is not reproduced since system is reset automati-
information cally.

and standard If this failure code is displayed repeatedly, engine controller may be
value in normal 1 Defective engine controller defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be
state carried out.)
4 PC130-8
Failure code [AA10NX] Air cleaner clogging 1

User code Failure code Air cleaner clogging
Trouble
— AA10NX (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of air cleaner clogging switch detected clogging of air
trouble cleaner (sensor contact opened).
Action of • Displays air cleaner clogging monitor on machine monitor.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may be damaged.
machine
• Condition of air cleaner clogging switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04501 Monitor input 2)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.

Possible causes Clogging of air cleaner (when Air cleaner may be clogged. Check it for clogging and then clean
1
and standard system is normal) or replace if clogged.
value in normal If cause 1 is not detected, air cleaner clogging monitor system may
state Defective air cleaner clog-
2 be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for "E-7 Caution item
ging monitor system
flashes while engine is running" in E-mode.
PC130-8 5
Failure code [AB00KE] Charge voltage low 1

User code Failure code Charge voltage low
Trouble
— AB00KE (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• While engine is running, signal circuit of alternator detected low charge voltage (below 7.8 V).
trouble
Action of • Displays charge level monitor on machine monitor.
machine monitor • Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, battery may not be charged.
machine
Related • Signal voltage of alternator can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 04300 Charge voltage)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.

a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry
Defective alternator out troubleshooting.
1
(when system is normal) M22 (male) Engine speed Voltage
(1) – chassis ground Min. medium speed 27.5 – 29.5 V
Disconnection in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
2 (Disconnection in wiring or
Possible causes defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (11) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) – J02 – M22 (female) (1) tance
and standard
value in normal a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
state Ground fault in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
ness
3 Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (11)
(Short circuit with GND cir- Resis-
cuit) – J02 – M22 (female) (1) and circuit branch Min. 1Mz
tance
end and chassis ground
out troubleshooting.
4 Defective machine monitor CM01 Engine speed Voltage
Between (11) –
Operation Min. 7.8 V
chassis ground
6 PC130-8
Circuit diagram related
PC130-8 7
Failure code [B@BAZG] Eng oil press. low 1

User code Failure code Engine oil pressure low
Trouble
— B@BAZG (Engine controller system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of engine oil pressure switch detected low engine oil pres-
trouble sure (sensor contact opened).
Action of • Displays engine oil pressure monitor on machine monitor.
controller • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
machine
• Engine oil pressure switch signal is input to engine controller and then transmitted to machine mon-
Related
itor.
information

Possible causes Lowering of engine oil pres-
Engine oil pressure may be low. Check it and remove cause if it is
and standard 1 sure (when system is nor-
low.
value in normal mal)
state Defective engine oil pressure If cause 1 is not detected, engine oil pressure switch system may
2
switch system be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA435].
8 PC130-8
Failure code [B@BAZK] Eng oil level low 1

User code Failure code Engine oil level low
Trouble
— B@BAZK (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • When starting switch is turned ON (but engine is not started), signal circuit of engine oil level switch
trouble detected low engine oil level (sensor contact opened).
Action of • Displays engine oil level monitor on machine monitor.
Problem that
machine
• Engine oil level switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04501 Monitor Input 2)
information

Lowering of engine oil level a Check the engine oil level and add new oil.
1
(when system is normal) (If this phenomenon frequently occurs, investigate the cause.)
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
ing without turning starting switch ON.
Defective engine oil level P44 (male) Engine oil level Resistance
2 switch
(Internal disconnection) Value in normal state Max. 1 z
Between (1) –
chassis ground Value when oil level
Min. 1Mz
Possible causes is low
and standard
value in normal ness ing without turning starting switch ON.
state 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (2) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) – P44 (female) (1) tance
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON

and carry out troubleshooting.
CM02 Engine oil level Voltage
4 Defective machine monitor
Value in normal state Max. 1 V
Between (2) –
chassis ground Value when oil level
20 – 30 V
is low
PC130-8 9
Failure code [B@BCNS] Eng coolant overheat 1

User code Failure code Engine coolant overheat
Trouble
— B@BCNS (Engine controller system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of engine coolant temperature sensor detected overheating
trouble of engine coolant (above about 102°C).
Action of • Displays engine coolant temperature monitor with red on machine monitor.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may be seized.
machine
• Engine coolant temperature sensor signal is input to engine controller and then transmitted to
machine monitor.
Related
• Engine coolant temperature can be checked with monitoring function
information
(Code: 04107 Engine coolant temperature)

Overheating of engine
Possible causes Engine coolant may be overheating. Check it and remove cause if
1 coolant (when system is nor-
and standard it is overheating.
mal)
value in normal
state If cause 1 is not detected, engine coolant temperature sensor sys-
Defective engine coolant
2 tem may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for failure codes
temperature sensor system
[CA144] and [CA145].
10 PC130-8
PC130-8 11
Failure code [B@BCZK] Eng water level low 1

User code Failure code Engine water level low
Trouble
— B@BCZK (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of radiator coolant level sensor was opened (disconnected
trouble with GND).
Action of • Displays radiator coolant level monitor on machine monitor.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may overheat.
machine
• Input from the radiator coolant level sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04500 Monitor Input 1)
information

Lowering of radiator coolant
a Check the coolant level and add coolant.
1 level
(If this phenomenon frequently occurs, investigate the cause.)
(when system is normal)
Defective radiator coolant P24 (male) Radiator coolant level Resistance
2 level switch (internal discon-
nection) Value in normal state Max. 1 z
Between (1) – (2) Value when coolant
Min. 1Mz
Possible causes level is low
and standard a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
value in normal Disconnection in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
state ness
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (3) Resis-
3 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
– P24 (female) (1) tance
defective contact in connec-
tor) Wiring harness between P24 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
chassis ground tance
CM02 Radiator coolant level Voltage
Value in normal state Max. 1 V
Between (3) –
chassis ground Value when coolant
20 – 30 V
level is low
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13
Failure code [B@HANS] Hydr oil overheat 1

User code Failure code Hydraulic oil overheat
Trouble
— B@HANS (Pump controller system)
Contents of • While engine was running, signal circuit of hydraulic oil temperature sensor detected overheating of
trouble hydraulic oil (above about 102°C).
Action of • Displays hydraulic oil temperature monitor with red on machine monitor.
Problem that
appears on • If machine is operated as it is, engine may be seized.
machine
• Hydraulic oil temperature sensor signal is input to engine controller and then transmitted to machine
monitor.
Related
• Hydraulic oil temperature can be checked with monitoring function
information
(Code: 04401 Hydraulic oil temperature)

Possible causes Overheating of hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil may be overheating. Check it and remove cause if it
1
and standard (when system is normal) is overheating.
value in normal If cause 1 is not detected, hydraulic oil temperature gauge system
state Defective hydraulic oil tem-
2 may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for "E-10 Hydraulic oil
perature gauge system
temperature gauge does not work normally" in E-mode.
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15
Failure code [CA111] ECM critical internal failure 1

User code Failure code ECM critical internal failure
Trouble
E10 CA111 (Engine controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in controller.
trouble
Action of
• None in particular.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine runs normally but it may stop during operation or may not be able to start.
machine
Related
information

Check fuse or circuit breaker on machine side directly for defect.
1 Defective fuse (If fuse is broken or circuit breaker is turned OFF, circuit probably
has ground fault.)
Defective power supply cut- ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
out relay Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (55) Resis- 185 –
– (32) tance 265 z
Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (55) Resis-
Max. 1 z
– R23 (1) tance
Possible causes Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (55) Resis-
Max. 1 z
and standard – R24 (1) tance
value in normal Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (32) Resis-
state Max. 1 z
– R23 (2) tance
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (32) Resis-
harness Max. 1 z
– R24 (2) tance
defective contact in connec- Max. 1 z
tor) – T15 tance
Max. 1 z
– R23 (5) tance
Max. 1 z
– R24 (5) tance
Wiring harness between R23 (female) (3) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
battery (+) tance
Max. 1 z
battery (+) tance
16 PC130-8

Min. 1 Mz
– R23 (1) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
Ground fault in wiring har-
Possible causes 4 ness (Short circuit with GND Min. 1 Mz
and standard circuit)
value in normal Min. 1 Mz
state
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
battery (+) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, turn starting switch ON and
carry out troubleshooting.
5 Defective engine controller
CE03 Voltage
Between (3) – (1) 20 – 30 V
PC130-8 17
18 PC130-8
Failure code [CA115] Eng Ne and Bkup speed sensor error 1

User code Failure code Eng Ne and Bkup speed sensor error
Trouble
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in Ne speed sensor circuit and Bkup speed sensor circuit simultaneously.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine cannot be started (if engine has been stopped).
appears on
• Engine stops (if engine has been running).
machine
Related
information
Causes Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

Defective Ne speed sensor
1 Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA689].
system
Defective Bkup speed sen-
2 Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA778].
sor system
Possible causes Defective mount of Ne speed Check mount of Ne speed sensor directly for defect (defective
3
and standard sensor installation of sensor, indicator-ring of crankshaft, etc.)
value in normal Defective mount of Bkup Check mount of Bkup speed sensor directly for defect (defective
state 4
speed sensor installation of sensor, indicator-ring of crankshaft, etc.)
Defective connection (Wrong Check Ne speed sensor and Bkup speed sensor directly for defec-
5
connection) tive connection (wrong connection).
If causes 1 – 5 are not detected, engine controller may be defec-
6 Defective engine controller tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried
out.)
PC130-8 19
Failure code [CA122] Charge air press sensor high error 1

User code Failure code Charge air press sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in charge (boost) pressure sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge (boost) pressure (400 kPa {4.08 kg/cm2}) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Acceleration performance of engine drops.
machine
• Signal voltage of charge (boost) pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 36501 Boost pressure sensor voltage).
information

Defective sensor power sup- If failure code [CA227] is indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it
1
ply system first.
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON or
start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
Defective charge (boost) PTIM Voltage
2 pressure sensor Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
(Internal trouble)
Sensor voltage is measured with wiring harness connected.
Accordingly, if voltage is abnormal, check wiring harness and con-
troller, too, for another cause of trouble, and then judge.
Possible causes ing without turning starting switch ON.
and standard Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
value in normal ness Max. 1 z
(19) – PTIM (female) (4) tance
state 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
tor) (36) – PTIM (female) (3) tance
Max. 1 z
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ness (19) – PTIM (female) (4) and chassis ground tance
4
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
(36) – PTIM (female) (3) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
20 PC130-8

Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
(19) – PTIM (female) (4) and wiring harness Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
between ENG1 (female) (36) – PTIM tance
Short circuit in wiring har- (female) (3)
ness Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
Possible causes 5
(With another wiring har- (19) – PTIM (female) (4) and wiring harness Resis-
and standard ness) Min. 1 Mz
value in normal (female) (1)
state
Chassis ground between ENG1 (female)
(36) – PTIM (female) (3) and chassis ground Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(female) (1)
ENG1 Voltage
Between (36) – (48) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
PC130-8 21
Failure code [CA123] Charge air press sensor low error 1

User code Failure code Charge air press sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in charge (boost) pressure sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge pressure (400 kPa {4.08 kg/cm2}) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Acceleration performance of engine drops.
machine
• Signal voltage of charge (boost) pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 36501 Boost pressure sensor voltage).
information

and standard
value in normal Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA122].
state
22 PC130-8
PC130-8 23
Failure code [CA131] Throttle sensor high error 1

User code Failure code Throttle sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in fuel control dial circuit.
trouble
Action of • Sets throttle angle with signal other than fuel control dial signal and continues operation
controller (depending on each model)
Problem that
appears on • Engine speed cannot be controlled with fuel control dial.
machine
• Signal voltage of fuel control dial can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 03000 Fuel control dial voltage)
information

1
ply system first.
Defective fuel control dial P20 (male) Resistance

2
(Internal trouble) Between (1) – (3) 4.0 – 6.0 kz
Between (2) – (1) 0.25 – 5.0 kz
Between (2) – (3) 0.25 – 5.0 kz
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (27) Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
Possible causes Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (35) Resis-
and standard tor) – P20 (female) (2) tance
value in normal Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (28) Resis-
state Max. 1 z
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (27) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ness – P20 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
4
(Short circuit with GND cir- Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (35) Resis-
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
– P20 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
5 Defective engine controller CE02 Voltage
Between (35) – (28) Signal 0.5 – 4.5 V
24 PC130-8
PC130-8 25
Failure code [CA132] Throttle sensor low error 1

User code Failure code Throttle sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in fuel control dial circuit.
trouble
Action of • Sets throttle angle with signal other than fuel control dial signal and continues operation
controller (depending on each model)
Problem that
machine
• Signal voltage of fuel control dial can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 03000 Fuel control dial voltage)
information

and standard
state
26 PC130-8
PC130-8 27
Failure code [CA144] Coolant temp. sensor high error 1

User code Failure code Coolant temp. sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in coolant temperature sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes coolant temperature (90°C) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
• Signal voltage of coolant temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04105 Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage)
information

TWTR (male) Coolant temperature Resistance
Defective coolant tempera- 0°C 30 – 37 kz
1 ture sensor
25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
(Internal trouble)
Between (A) – (B) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
Disconnection in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
ness
Possible causes (47) – TWTR (female) (A) tance
and standard tor) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
value in normal Max. 1 z
(49) – TWTR (female) (B) tance
state
Ground fault in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
ness
3 Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
cuit) (49) – TWTR (female) (B) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
ENG1 (female) Coolant temperature Resistance
0°C 30 – 37 kz
25°C 9.3 – 10.7 kz
Between (47) – (49) 50°C 3.2 – 3.8 kz
80°C 1.0 – 1.3 kz
95°C 700 – 800 z
28 PC130-8
PC130-8 29
Failure code [CA145] Coolant temp. sensor low error 1

User code Failure code Coolant temp. sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in coolant temperature sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes coolant temperature (90°C) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
• Signal voltage of coolant temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04105 Engine coolant temperature sensor voltage)
information

and standard
value in normal Carry out troubleshooting failure code [CA144].
state
30 PC130-8
PC130-8 31
Failure code [CA153] Charge air temp. sensor high error 1

User code Failure code Charge air temp. sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in charge (boost) temperature sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge (boost) temperature (intake air temperature) (70°C) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
• Signal voltage of charge (boost) temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 18501 Boost temperature sensor voltage)
information

Intake air
PTIM (male) Resistance
temperature
Defective charge (boost) 0°C 29 – 36 kz
1 temperature sensor
25°C 9 – 11 kz
(Internal trouble) Between (2) – (1)
40°C 4.9 – 5.8 kz
100°C 600 – 700 z
Between (2) –
All range Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Disconnection in wiring ing without turning starting switch ON.
Possible causes harness
and standard 2 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
value in normal defective contact in connec-
state tor) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
Ground fault in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
3
cuit) Min. 1 Mz
Intake air
ENG1 (female) Resistance
temperature
4 Defective engine controller 0°C 29 – 36 kz
25°C 9 – 11 kz
Between (11) – (48)
40°C 4.9 – 5.8 kz
100°C 600 – 700 z
32 PC130-8
PC130-8 33
Failure code [CA154] Charge air temp. sensor low error 1

User code Failure code Charge air temp. sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in charge (boost) temperature sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge (boost) temperature (intake air temperature) (70°C) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
• Signal voltage of charge (boost) temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 18501 Boost temperature sensor voltage)
information

and standard
value in normal Carry out troubleshooting failure code [CA153].
state
Failure code [CA155] Chg air temp high speed derate 1

User code Failure code Charge air temperature high speed derate
Trouble
Contents of • Temperature signal of charge (boost) pressure/temperature sensor exceeded control upper temper-
trouble ature limit.
Action of
• Limits output and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
• Engine output lowers.
appears on
• Engine stops.
machine
• Charge (boost) temperature can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 18500 Boost temper-
Related
ature)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine

Cooling performance of aftercooler may be low. Check following
points directly.
Lowering of cooling perfor-
1 • Looseness and breakage of fan belt.
Possible causes mance of aftercooler
• Insufficiency of cooling air
and standard • Clogging of aftercooler fins
value in normal
state Abnormal rise of turbo- Outlet temperature of turbocharger may be abnormally high.
2
charger outlet temperature Check related parts directly.
out.)
34 PC130-8
Failure code [CA187] Sensor sup. 2 volt. low error 1

User code Failure code Sensor sup. 2 volt. low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in sensor power supply 2 (5 V) circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Possible causes Causes Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

and standard
state
PC130-8 35
Failure code [CA221] Ambient air press. sensor high error 1

User code Failure code Ambient air press. sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in ambient pressure sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of • Sets atmospheric pressure sensor to default value (52.44 kPa {0.53 kg/cm2}) and continues opera-
controller tion.
Problem that
appears on • Output drops.
machine
• Signal voltage of ambient pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 37401 Ambient pressure sensor voltage)
information

1
ply system first.
PAMB Voltage
Defective atmospheric pres-
2 sure sensor
(Internal trouble) Between (2) – (1) Signal 0.3 – 4.7 V
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
and standard ness Max. 1 z
(36) – PAMB (female) (3) tance
value in normal 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
state defective contact in connec- Max. 1 z
tor) (20) – PAMB (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
(48) – PAMB (female) (1) tance
Resis-
(36) – PAMB (female) (3) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
Ground fault in wiring har- tance
ground
ness
cuit) (20) – PAMB (female) (2) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
Resis-
(48) – PAMB (female) (1) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
36 PC130-8

(36) – PAMB (female) (3) and wiring har- Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ness between ENG1 (female) (20) – PAMB tance
Short circuit in wiring har- (female) (2)
5
(With another wiring har- (36) – PAMB (female) (3) and wiring har- Resis-
Possible causes Min. 1 Mz
ness) ness between ENG1 (female) (48) – PAMB tance
and standard
value in normal (female) (1)
state Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
(20) – PAMB (female) (2) and wiring har- Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
ness between ENG1 (female) (48) – PAMB tance
(female) (1)
or start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
6 Defective engine controller ENG1 Voltage
Between (36) – (48) 4.75 – 5.25 V
Between (20) – (48) 0.3 – 4.7 V
PC130-8 37
Failure code [CA222] Ambient air press. sensor low error 1

User code Failure code Ambient air press. sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in ambient pressure sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Sets oil pressure to default value (52.44 kPa {0.53 kg/cm2}) and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
machine
• Signal voltage of ambient pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 37401 Ambient pressure sensor voltage)
information

and standard
state
38 PC130-8
Failure code [CA227] Sensor sup. 2 volt. high error 1

User code Failure code Sensor sup. 2 volt. high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in sensor power supply 2 (5 V) circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

Possible causes a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and standard and carry out troubleshooting.
value in normal 1 Defective engine controller
state CE02 Voltage
Between (26) – (22) 4.75 – 5.25V
PC130-8 39
Failure code [CA234] Eng. overspeed 1

User code Failure code Eng. overspeed
Trouble
— CA234 (Engine controller system)
Contents of
• Engine speed is above operating range.
trouble
Action of
• Limits fuel injection rate until engine speed lowers to operating range.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine speed fluctuates.
machine
• Engine speed can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01002 Engine speed)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Run engine at high idle.

Possible causes 1 Defective related system If another failure code is indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it.
and standard 2 Improper way of use Way of use may be improper. Teach proper way of use to operator.
value in normal
If causes 1 and 2 are not detected, engine controller may be defec-
state
out.)
40 PC130-8
PC130-8 41
Failure code [CA238] Ne speed sensor sup. volt. error 1

User code Failure code Ne speed sensor sup. volt. error
Trouble
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in Ne speed sensor power supply (5 V) circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Controls Ne speed sensor with signals of Bkup speed sensor.
controller
Problem that
• Running engine stops (when Bkup speed sensor is also abnormal).
appears on
• Stopped engine cannot be started (when Bkup speed sensor is also abnormal).
machine
Related
information

Disconnect devices
Defective Ne speed sensor at right in order. If
1 error code disap-
(Internal trouble)
pears when a device Ne speed sensor NE connector
is disconnected, that
device has a defect
in it.
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (26) – NE (female) (3) tance
nector) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Possible causes
Max. 1 z
and standard (44) – NE (female) (2) tance
state ing without turning starting switch ON.
3 ness (Short circuit with GND Min. 1 Mz
(26) – NE (female) (3) and chassis ground tance
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
Short circuit in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
4 ness (with another wiring Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
harness) Resis-
(26) – NE (female) (3) and between ENG1 Min. 1 Mz
tance
(female) (44) – NE (female) (2)
ENG1 Voltage
Between (26) – (44) 4.75 – 5.25 V
42 PC130-8
PC130-8 43
Failure code [CA271] IMV/PCV1 short error 1

User code Failure code IMV/PCV1 short error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is short circuit in IMV circuit of supply pump.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

Defective supply pump IMV PREG (male) Resistance
1
(Internal trouble) Between (1) – (2) 2.3 – 5.3 z
Between (1), (2) – chassis
Min. 1 Mz
ground
ness Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
2 Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- (10) – PREG (female) (1) tance
Possible causes cuit) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
and standard Min. 1 Mz
(14) – PREG (female) (2) tance
value in normal
state a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
Hot short (Short circuit with Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) (10)
3 Voltage Max. 1V
24V circuit) in wiring harness – PREG (female) (1) and chassis ground
Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) (14)
Voltage Max. 1V
– PREG (female) (2) and chassis ground
Between (10) – (14) 2.3 – 5.3 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
44 PC130-8
Failure code [CA272] IMV/PCV1 open error 1

User code Failure code IMV/PCV1 open error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is disconnection in IMV circuit of supply pump.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

Defective supply pump IMV PREG (male) Resistance
1
(Internal disconnection) Between (1) – (2) 2.3 – 5.3 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
ness
Possible causes defective contact in connec-
tor) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
and standard Max. 1 z
value in normal
state a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
ness Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) (10) Resis-
3 Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- – PREG (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
cuit) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) (14) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
– PREG (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Between (10) – (14) 2.3 – 5.3 z
Between (10) (14) – chassis
Min. 1 Mz
ground
PC130-8 45
Failure code [CA322] Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error 1

User code Failure code Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is disconnection or short circuit in injector #1 circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Output drops.
appears on
• Rotation is unstable.
machine
Related
information

Defective injector #1 CN1 (male) Resistance
1
(Internal trouble) Between (1) – (2) 0.4 – 1.1 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
ness
(57) – CN1 (female) (2) tance
tor) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Possible causes Max. 1 z
and standard
ness Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
3 Min. 1 Mz
(Short circuit with GND cir- (57) – CN1 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
cuit) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(53) – CN1 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Defective injector or wiring If another failure code for injector abnormality is displayed, carry
4
harness of another cylinder out troubleshooting for it.
Between (57) – (53) 0.4 – 1.1 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
46 PC130-8
PC130-8 47

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Output drops.
appears on
machine
Related
information

Defective injector #3 (Inter- CN3 (male) Resistance
1
nal trouble) Between (1) – (2) 0.4 – 1.1 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (55) – CN3 (female) (2) tance
and standard
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
4
Between (55) – (59) 0.4 – 1.1 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
48 PC130-8
PC130-8 49

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Output drops.
appears on
machine
Related
information

1
Min. 1 Mz
ground
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
4
Between (45) – (58) 0.4 – 1.1 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
50 PC130-8
PC130-8 51

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Output drops.
appears on
machine
Related
information

1
Min. 1 Mz
ground
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
4
Between (56) – (51) 0.4 – 1.1 z
Min. 1 Mz
ground
52 PC130-8
PC130-8 53

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
54 PC130-8
SEN04120-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Failure code [CA342] Calibration code incompatibility.................................................................................... 3
Failure code [CA351] Inj. drive circuit error..................................................................................................... 4
Failure code [CA352] Sensor sup. 1 volt. low error ........................................................................................ 7
Failure code [CA386] Sensor sup. 1 volt. high error ....................................................................................... 8
Failure code [CA435] Abnormality in engine oil pressure switch .................................................................. 10
Failure code [CA441] Battery voltage low error .............................................................................................11
Failure code [CA442] Battery voltage high error ........................................................................................... 12
Failure code [CA449] Rail press. very high error .......................................................................................... 13
Failure code [CA451] Rail press. sensor high error ...................................................................................... 14
Failure code [CA452] Rail press. sensor low error ....................................................................................... 16
Failure code [CA488] Chg air temp high torque derate ................................................................................ 17
Failure code [CA553] Rail press. high error.................................................................................................. 18
Failure code [CA559] Rail press. low error ................................................................................................... 19
Failure code [CA689] Eng. Ne speed sensor error ....................................................................................... 22
Failure code [CA731] Eng. Bkup speed sensor phase error......................................................................... 24
Failure code [CA757] All persistent data lost error ....................................................................................... 25
PC130-8 1
Failure code [CA778] Eng. Bkup speed sensor error.................................................................................... 26

Failure code [CA1633] KOMNET datalink timeout error ............................................................................... 28
Failure code [CA2185] Throttle sens. sup. volt. high error............................................................................ 30
Failure code [CA2186] Throttle sens. sup. volt. low error ............................................................................. 32
Failure code [CA2249] Rail press. very low error.......................................................................................... 32
Failure code [CA2311] Abnormality in IMV solenoid ..................................................................................... 33
Failure code [D110KB] Battery relay drive short ........................................................................................... 34
Failure code [D19JKZ] Personal code relay abnormality .............................................................................. 36
Failure code [D862KA] GPS antenna discon ................................................................................................ 38
Failure code [DA22KK] Pump solenoid power low error ............................................................................... 40
Failure code [DA25KP] 5V sensor 1 power abnormality ............................................................................... 42
Failure code [DA26KP] 5V sensor 2 power abnormality ............................................................................... 45
Failure code [DA29KQ] Model selection abnormality.................................................................................... 46
2 PC130-8
Failure code [CA342] Calibration code incompatibility 1

User code Failure code Calibration code incompatibility
Trouble
Contents of
• Incompatibility of data occurred in engine controller.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Continues normal operation.
appears on
• Engine stops or does not start.
machine
Related
information

and standard 1 Defect in related system If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it.
value in normal Engine controller may be defective. (Troubleshooting cannot be
state 2 Defective engine controller
carried out.)
PC130-8 3
Failure code [CA351] Inj. drive circuit error 1

User code Failure code Inj. drive circuit error
Trouble
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in injector drive circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Limits output and continues operation (Limits common rail pressure).
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

If another failure code (code of abnormality in injector system) is
1 Defective related system
indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it.
Check fuse or circuit breaker on machine side directly for defect.
2 Defective fuse (If fuse is broken or circuit breaker is turned OFF, circuit probably
has ground fault.)
Defective power supply cut- ing without turning starting switch ON.
3
out relay Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (55) Resis- 185 –
– (32) tance 265 z
Max. 1 z
Possible causes – R23 (1) tance
and standard Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (55) Resis-
Max. 1 z
value in normal – R24 (1) tance
state Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (32) Resis-
Max. 1 z
– R23 (2) tance
Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (32) Resis-
harness Max. 1 z
– R24 (2) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CE03 (female) (1) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) – T15 tance
Max. 1 z
– R23 (5) tance
Max. 1 z
– R24 (5) tance
Max. 1 z
battery (+) tance
Max. 1 z
battery (+) tance
4 PC130-8

Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes 5 ness (Short circuit with GND Min. 1 Mz
and standard circuit)
value in normal Min. 1 Mz
state
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
CE03 Voltage
Between (3) – (1) 20 – 30 V
PC130-8 5
6 PC130-8
Failure code [CA352] Sensor sup. 1 volt. low error 1

User code Failure code Sensor sup. 1 volt. low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in sensor power supply 1 (5 V) circuit.
trouble
• Operates Bkup speed sensor with signals of Ne speed sensor.
• Sets atmospheric pressure sensor to default value (52.44 kPa {0.53 kg/cm2}) and continues opera-
Action of
tion.
controller
• Fixes charge pressure sensor value (400 kPa {4.08 kg/cm2}) and continues operation.
Problem that
machine
Related
information

and standard
state
PC130-8 7
Failure code [CA386] Sensor sup. 1 volt. high error 1

User code Failure code Sensor sup. 1 volt. high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in sensor power supply 1 (5 V) circuit.
trouble
• Operates Bkup speed sensor with signals of Ne speed sensor.
• Sets atmospheric pressure sensor to default value (52.44 kPa {0.53 kg/cm2}) and continues opera-
Action of
tion.
controller
• Fixes charge pressure sensor value (400 kPa {4.08 kg/cm2}) and continues operation.
Problem that
machine
Related
information

1 Defective related system If another failure code is indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it.
Bkup speed sensor CAM connector
Disconnect devices
at right in order. If Atmospheric
Defective sensor (Internal PAMB connector
2 error code disap- pressure sensor
trouble)
pears when a device Charge pressure
is disconnected, that PTIM connector
sensor
device has a defect
Common rail
in it. PFUEL connector
pressure sensor
ness
(36) – each sensor (female) tance
Possible causes tor) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
and standard (48) – each sensor (female) tance
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
Resis-
ness (36) – each sensor (female) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
4 tance
(Short circuit with GND cir- ground
cuit) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
Resis-
(48) – each sensor (female) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
5
(With another wiring har- (36) – each sensor (female) and Resis-
ness) Min. 1 Mz
Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) tance
(48) – each sensor (female)
ENG1 Voltage
Between (36) – (48) 4.75 – 5.25V
8 PC130-8
PC130-8 9
Failure code [CA435] Abnormality in engine oil pressure switch 1

User code Failure code Abnormality in engine oil pressure switch
Trouble
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in engine oil pressure switch signal circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine oil pressure switch-based engine protection function does not function.
appears
• Engine oil pressure monitor does not display normally.
on machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch or start engine.
information

Defective engine oil pressure ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
switch POIL (male) Resistance
Between (1) – chassis ground Max. 1 z
Possible defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) (32) – POIL (female) (1) tance
causes and
standard value a Troubleshoot with starting switch OFF, then carry out trouble-
in normal state shooting without turning starting switch ON.
Short circuit in wiring harness Wiring harness among all pins between
3
(With another wiring harness) ENG1 (female) (32) – ENG1 (female) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(With all connectors of wiring harness distance
connected)
Between (32) – chassis ground Max. 1 z
10 PC130-8
Failure code [CA441] Battery voltage low error 1

User code Failure code Battery voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in controller power supply voltage circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine continues operation normally, but it may stop during operation or may not be able to start.
machine
Related
information

and standard
state
PC130-8 11
Failure code [CA442] Battery voltage high error 1

User code Failure code Battery voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in controller power supply voltage circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

and standard
state
12 PC130-8
Failure code [CA449] Rail press. very high error 1

User code Failure code Rail press. very high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Common rail pressure sensor circuit detected abnormally high pressure (level 2).
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
• Common rail pressure can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 36400 Common rail pressure)
information

and standard
state
PC130-8 13
Failure code [CA451] Rail press. sensor high error 1

User code Failure code Rail press. sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in common rail pressure sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
• Signal voltage of common rail pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 36401 Common rail pressure sensor voltage)
information

Defective sensor power sup- If failure code [CA352] or [CA386] is indicated, carry out trouble-
1
ply system shooting for it first.
PFUEL Voltage
Defective common rail pres-
2 sure sensor
(Internal trouble) Between (2) – (1) Signal 0.25 – 4.6 V
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
and standard ness Max. 1 z
(36) – PFUEL (female) (3) tance
value in normal 3 (Disconnection in wiring or
state defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) (29) – PFUEL (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
(48) – PFUEL (female) (1) tance
Resis-
(36) – PFUEL (female) (3) and chassis Min.1 Mz
ground
ness
cuit) (29) – PFUEL (female) (2) and chassis Min.1 Mz
tance
ground
Resis-
(48) – PFUEL (female) (1) and chassis Min.1 Mz
tance
ground
14 PC130-8

(36) – PFUEL (female) (3) and Resis-
Min.1 Mz
wiring harness between ENG1 (female) (29) tance
Short circuit in wiring har- – PFUEL (female) (2)
5
(With another wiring har- (36) – PFUEL (female) (3) and Resis-
Possible causes Min.1 Mz
ness) wiring harness between ENG1 (female) (48) tance
and standard
value in normal – PFUEL (female) (1)
state Wiring harness between ENG1 (female)
(29) – PFUEL (female) (2) and Resis-
Min.1 Mz
– PFUEL (female) (1)
6 Defective engine controller ENG1 Voltage
Between (36) – (48) 4.75 – 5.25 V
Between (29) – (48) 0.25 – 4.6 V
PC130-8 15
Failure code [CA452] Rail press. sensor low error 1

User code Failure code Rail press. sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in common rail pressure sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
• Signal voltage of common rail pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 36401 Common rail pressure sensor voltage)
information

and standard
state
16 PC130-8
Failure code [CA488] Chg air temp high torque derate 1

User code Failure code Charge air temperature high torque derate
Trouble
Contents of • Temperature signal of boost pressure/temperature sensor exceeded control upper temperature
trouble limit.
Action of
• Limits output and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine output lowers.
machine
Related • Boost temperature can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 18500 Boost temperature)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.

Cooling performance of aftercooler may be low. Check following
points directly.
Lowering of cooling perfor-
1 • Looseness and breakage of fan belt.
Possible causes mance of aftercooler
• Insufficiency of cooling air
and standard • Clogging of aftercooler fins
value in normal
state Abnormal rise of turbo- Outlet temperature of turbocharger may be abnormally high.
2
charger outlet temperature Check related parts directly.
out.)
PC130-8 17
Failure code [CA553] Rail press. high error 1

User code Failure code Rail press. high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Common rail pressure sensor circuit detected abnormally high pressure (level 1).
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

Check fuel used directly
2 Use of improper fuel
(for high viscosity).
Defective electrical system of Common rail pressure sensor may have electric trouble. Carry out
Possible causes 3
common rail pressure sensor troubleshooting for failure code [CA451].
and standard
value in normal Defective mechanical system
state 4 of common rail pressure sen- Check mechanical system of common rail pressure sensor directly.
sor
Check overflow valve directly for broken spring, worn seat, and
5 Defective overflow valve
stuck ball.
6 Clogging of overflow piping Check overflow piping directly for clogging.
7 Defective pressure limiter Check pressure limiter directly for mechanical defect.
18 PC130-8
Failure code [CA559] Rail press. low error 1

User code Failure code Rail press. low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Supply pump does not feed fuel (level 1).
trouble
Action of
• Limits common rail pressure.
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

2 Use of improper fuel Check fuel used directly (for high viscosity).
3 Clogging of fuel filter a If a fuel filter is clogged, replace it.
a For contents of troubleshooting, see Note 1. For check of pres-
sure in fuel low-pressure circuit, see Testing and adjusting,
Defective low-pressure cir- "Testing fuel pressure".
4
cuit device Pressure in fuel low-pressure cir-
-49 – 0 kPa
cuit
{-0.5 – 0 kg/cm2}
(At high idle or rated load)
Defective electrical system of Supply pump IMV may have electric trouble. Carry out trouble-
5
supply pump IMV shooting for following failure codes [CA271], [CA272].
Defective common rail pres- Common rail pressure sensor may be defective. Check wiring har-
6
sure sensor ness for damage.
Possible causes
and standard a For testing of leakage from pressure limiter, see Testing and
adjusting, "Testing leakage from pressure limiter and return
value in normal
rate from injector".
state 7 Defective pressure limiter
Leakage from pressure limiter Max. 20 cc/min (*)
*: A limit value is the value mentioned above, but a standard
value in normalcy is "0 cc/min. (no leak)".
a For testing of return rate (spill) from injector, see Testing and
adjusting, "Testing leakage from pressure limiter and return
rate from injector".
Speed at rated operation Return (Spill) limit from injector
8 Defective injector 1,600 rpm 190 cc/min

1,700 rpm 200 cc/min
9 Defective supply pump If causes 1 – 8 are not detected, supply pump may be defective.
<How to use check sheet>
Carry out the above troubleshooting and take a record of the contents of the attached “Check sheet for no-
pressure feed“.
Note 1: Check the low-pressure circuit parts for the following items.
1) Fuel level
2) Clogging of fuel tank breather
3) Sticking and wear of feed pump and clogging of filter
4) Leakage through and clogging of low-pressure fuel piping
5) Clogging of fuel filter
6) Replace the fuel filters when trouble doesn’t cancel it even if clogging is checked.
PC130-8 19
Check sheet for no-pressure feed
Model Work No.

Machine serial No. # Date of check / /
Engine Service meter h
Engine serial No. # Worker's name
A. Visual check Good NG

1 Fuel leakage to outside
2 Clogging of fuel tank breather
B. Check with machine monitor (Fault history function, monitoring function, and reduced cylinder mode function) Good NG
3 Check of failure code / / / /
Check of monitoring information
Standard value
Code Displayed item Checking condition Unit Measured value Good NG
(Reference value)
Low idle rpm 1,100 ± 50
*1 Engine speed High idle rpm 2,150 ± 60
Equivalent to rating rpm 2,200
Low idle % 0
*2 Throttle opening degree
High idle % 100
*3 Fuel injection command Equivalent to rating mm3 — — —
4 Common rail pressure

*4 Equivalent to rating MPa
command
Common rail fuel
*5 Equivalent to rating MPa
pressure
Low idle CA — — —
Fuel injection timing
*6 High idle CA — — —
command
Equivalent to rating CA — — —
*7 Boost pressure Equivalent to rating kPa — — —
Engine coolant
*8 Low idle °C — — —
temperature
*9 Fuel temperature Low idle °C — — —
Check of reduced cylinder mode operation (Engine speed)
Standard value
Function Reduced cylinder Checking condition Unit Measured value Good NG
(Reference value)
5 No. 1 cylinder Low idle rpm — — —
No. 2 cylinder Low idle rpm — — —
*10
C. Check of fuel circuit pressure Standard value

Checking condition Unit Measured value Good NG
(Reference value)
MPa -49 – 0 kPa
6 Fuel low-pressure circuit pressure High idle or rated load
{kg/cm2} {-0.5 – 0 kg/cm2}
D. Check of strainers and filters Good NG

7 Visual check of fuel filter
E.Check of leakage and return rate Standard value

Checking condition Unit Measured value Good NG
(Reference value)
8 Leakage through pressure limiter Equivalent to rating cc/min Max. 20 (*)
Equivalent to rating 1,600 rpm cc/min 190
Equivalent to rating 1,700 rpm cc/min 200 Speed:
9 Return rate from injector Equivalent to rating 1,800 rpm cc/min 210
Equivalent to rating 1,900 rpm cc/min 220 Return rate:
Equivalent to rating 2,000 rpm cc/min 230
20 PC130-8
*1 – *10:
See Testing and adjusting, "Special functions of machine monitor", Monitoring items table.
*: A limit value is the value mentioned above, but a standard value in normalcy is "0 cc/min. (no leak)".
Rating or equivalent:
Relieve the circuit under the following condition.
1) Engine: Full throttle
2) Mode: P
3) Boom: Raise
PC130-8 21
Failure code [CA689] Eng. Ne speed sensor error 1

User code Failure code Eng. Ne speed sensor error
Trouble
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in engine Ne speed sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Operates with signals of Bkup speed sensor.
controller
Problem that
• Running engine stops (when Bkup speed sensor is also abnormal).
appears on
machine • Stopped engine cannot be started (when Bkup speed sensor is also abnormal).
Related
information

1
ply system first.
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
(26) – NE (female) (3) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) (44) – NE (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
(42) – NE (female) (1) tance
Min.1 Mz
ness (26) – NE (female) (3) and chassis ground tance
3
cuit) Min.1 Mz
Possible causes Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Min.1 Mz
and standard (42) – NE (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
(26) – NE (female) (3) and Resis-
Min.1 Mz
Short circuit in wiring har- – NE (female) (2)
4
(With another wiring har- (26) – NE (female) (3) and Resis-
ness) Min.1 Mz
– NE (female) (1)
(44) – NE (female) (2) and Resis-
Min.1 Mz
– NE (female) (1)
Defective mount of sensor or Check Ne speed sensor directly for defective mount (defective
5 defective rotation sensing clearance) or check rotation sensing part (crankshaft pulley)
part directly for defect.
If causes 1 – 5 are not detected, engine Ne speed sensor may be
Defective engine Ne speed
6 defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be
sensor
carried out.)
22 PC130-8

and standard If causes 1 – 6 are not detected, engine controller may be defec-
value in normal 7 Defective engine controller tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried
state out.)
PC130-8 23
Failure code [CA731] Eng. Bkup speed sensor phase error 1

User code Failure code Eng. Bkup speed sensor phase error
Trouble
Contents of
• Engine Bkup speed sensor circuit detected abnormality in phase.
trouble
Action of
• Controls with signals of engine Ne speed sensor.
controller
Problem that
• Running engine stops (when Ne speed sensor is also abnormal).
appears on
machine • Stopped engine cannot be started (when Ne speed sensor is also abnormal).
Related
information

Possible causes
Defective engine Ne speed Engine Ne speed sensor may be defective. Carry out trouble-
and standard 1
sensor system shooting for failure code [CA698].
value in normal
state Defective engine Bkup Engine Bkup speed sensor may be defective. Carry out trouble-
2
speed sensor system shooting for failure code [CA778].
24 PC130-8
Failure code [CA757] All persistent data lost error 1

User code Failure code All persistent data lost error
Trouble
Contents of
• All data in engine controller are lost.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

and standard
state
PC130-8 25
Failure code [CA778] Eng. Bkup speed sensor error 1

User code Failure code Eng. Bkup speed sensor error
Trouble
Contents of
• Abnormality occurred in engine Bkup speed sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Operates with signals of Ne speed sensor.
controller
Problem that
• Running engine stops (when Ne speed sensor is also abnormal).
appears on
machine • Stopped engine cannot be started (when Ne speed sensor is also abnormal).
Related
information

Defective sensor power sup- If failure code [CA187] or [CA227] is indicated, carry out trouble-
1
ply system shooting for it first.
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
ness Max. 1 z
(36) – CAM (female) (3) tance
defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
tor) (48) – CAM (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
(37) – CAM (female) (1) tance
Min.1 Mz
ness (36) – CAM (female) (3) and chassis ground tance
3
cuit) Min.1 Mz
(48) – CAM (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Possible causes Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Min.1 Mz
and standard (37) – CAM (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Resis-
(36) – CAM (female) (3) and between ENG1 Min.1 Mz
Short circuit in wiring har- tance
(female) (48) – CAM (female) (2)
ness
(With another wiring har- Resis-
ness) (36) – CAM (female) (3) and between ENG1 Min.1 Mz
tance
Resis-
(48) – CAM (female) (2) and between ENG1 Min.1 Mz
tance
Defective mount of sensor or Check Bkup speed sensor directly for defective mount (defective
5 defective rotation sensing clearance) or check rotation sensing part (in supply pump) directly
part for defect.
If causes 1 – 5 are not detected, engine Bkup speed sensor may
Defective engine Bkup
6 be defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be
speed sensor
carried out.)
out.)
26 PC130-8
PC130-8 27
Failure code [CA1633] KOMNET datalink timeout error 1

User code Failure code KOMNET datalink timeout error
Trouble
E0E CA1633 (Engine controller system)
Contents of • Engine controller detected communication error in KOMNET communication circuit between pump
trouble controller and machine monitor.
Action of • Continues operation in default mode.
Problem that
• Information may not transmitted normally by KOMNET communication and machine may not oper-
appears on
ate normally. (Trouble phenomenon depends on failed section.)
machine
Related
information

Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (8),
Resis-
ness (Disconnection in wiring (9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Max. 1 z
1 tance
or defective contact in con- (1), – K02 (female) (A)
nector) Wiring harness between CM02 (female)
Resis-
(10) – CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) Max. 1 z
tance
(21), – K02 (female) (B)
Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (8),
(9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Resis-
Ground fault in wiring har- Min. 1 Mz
(1), – K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3) and tance
2 ness (Short circuit with GND
chassis ground
circuit)
Wiring harness between CM02 (female)
Possible causes (10) – CP01 (female) (64), – CE02 (female) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
and standard (21), – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10) tance
value in normal and chassis ground
(9) – CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) Max.
Voltage
Hot short (Short circuit with (1), – K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3) and 5.5 V
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness chassis ground
Voltage
(21), – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10) 5.5 V
and chassis ground
Defective CAN terminal ing without turning starting switch ON.
4 resistance (Internal short cir-
K02 (male) Resistance
cuit or disconnection)
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 z
out.)
28 PC130-8
PC130-8 29
Failure code [CA2185] Throttle sens. sup. volt. high error 1

User code Failure code Throttle Sens. sup. volt. high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in throttle sensor power supply (5 V) circuit.
trouble
Action of • Sets throttle angle with signal other than throttle sensor signal and continues operation (depending
controller on each model).
Problem that
machine
Related
information

Disconnect devices
Defective fuel control dial at right in order. If
1 error code disap-
(Internal trouble)
pears when a device Fuel control dial P20 connector
is disconnected, that
device has a defect
in it.
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (27) Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- – P20 (female) (1) tance
nector) Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (28) Resis-
Possible causes
Max. 1 z
and standard – P20 (female) (3) tance
3 ness (Short circuit with GND Min.1 Mz
circuit)
Min.1 Mz
4 ness (with another wiring Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (27)
harness) Resis-
– P20 (female) (1) and between CE02 Min.1 Mz
tance
(female) (28) – P20 (female) (3)
CE02 Voltage
Between (27) – (28) 4.75 – 5.25 V
30 PC130-8
PC130-8 31
Failure code [CA2186] Throttle sens. sup. volt. low error 1

User code Failure code Throttle sens. sup. volt. low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in throttle sensor power supply (5 V) circuit.
trouble
Action of • Sets throttle angle with signal other than throttle sensor signal and continues operation (depending
controller on each model).
Problem that
machine
Related
information

and standard
state
Failure code [CA2249] Rail press. very low error 1

User code Failure code Rail press. very low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Supply pump does not feed fuel (level 2).
trouble
Action of
• Limits common rail pressure.
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

and standard
state
32 PC130-8
Failure code [CA2311] Abnormality in IMV solenoid 1

User code Failure code Abnormality in IMV solenoid
Trouble
Contents of
• Resistance in supply pump actuator is abnormally high or low.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears • Engine output drops.
on machine
Related
information

Defective supply pump PREG (male) Resistance
2
actuator
Between (1) – (2) Max. 1 z
Between (2) – chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
ness
Possible 3 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
causes and defective contact in connec-
standard value tor) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
in normal state (14) – PREG (female) (2) tance
Ground fault in wiring harness
4
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between ENG1 (female) Resis-
(14) – PREG (female) (2) and chassis Min.1 Mz
tance
ground
5 Defective engine controller ENG1 (female) Resistance
Between (10) – (14) Max. 1 z
PC130-8 33
Failure code [D110KB] Battery relay drive short 1

User code Failure code Battery relay drive short
Trouble
— D110KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to battery relay drive circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to battery relay drive circuit OFF.
controller • Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Engine does not stop.
machine
Related
information

Battery relay Resistance
Defective battery relay
1 Between BR (terminal BR) –
(Internal defect) There is continuity
RE (terminal E)
Between BR (terminal BR) –
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Possible causes
value in normal ness
state 2 Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
cuit) (108) – D01 – J01 – R02 (terminal BR) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
chassis ground
Turn starting switch
3 Defective pump controller CP02 (female) Voltage
OFF.
Between (108) – 20 – 30 V
ON o OFF
chassis ground (4 – 7 sec.)
34 PC130-8
PC130-8 35
Failure code [D19JKZ] Personal code relay abnormality 1

User code Failure code Personal code relay abnormality
Trouble
E01 D19JKZ (KOMTRAX system in machine monitor)
Contents of
• Disconnection or short circuit was detected in personal code relay circuit.
trouble
• None in particular (when disconnection is detected).
• Turns output to personal code relay OFF (when short circuit is detected).
Action of
• If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself (when disconnection is detected).
controller
• Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF
(when disconnection is detected).
Problem that
appears on
machine
• This failure code is displayed only when engine lock function is effective.
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON (Disconnection). Trouble cannot be
information
reproduced on machine (Short circuit).

1 Defective fuse No. 3 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault (See cause 4).
ing without turning starting switch ON. (Troubleshooting for
relay unit)
R07 (male) Resistance
Defective personal code Between (1) – (2) (300 – 600 z)
2 relay (Internal disconnection a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
or short circuit) and carry out troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting by replace-
ment)
Replace personal code relay (R07) with another relay and perform
reproducing operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time,
Possible causes replaced relay is defective.
value in normal ing without turning starting switch ON.
Disconnection in wiring har-
state
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between F01 (3) – R07 Resis-
3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (female) (1) tance
nector) Wiring harness between R07 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
CM01 (female) (6) tance
Wiring harness between F01 (3) – R07 Resis-
(female) (1) and chassis ground tance
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
CM01 (female) (6) and chassis ground tance
If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, machine monitor (KOMTRAX)
Defective machine monitor
5 may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting can-
(KOMTRAX section)
not be carried out.)
36 PC130-8
PC130-8 37
Failure code [D862KA] GPS antenna discon 1

User code Failure code GPS antenna disconnection
Trouble
— D862KA (KOMTRAX system in machine monitor)
Contents of
• Disconnection was detected in GPS antenna circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • GPS cannot measure position.
machine
Related
information

and standard Possible causes are defective GPS antenna, disconnection or
value in normal Defective GPS antenna or
1 short circuit in antenna cable, and defective connection of antenna
state antenna cable
cable connector (GPS).
Configuration drawing
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39
Failure code [DA22KK] Pump solenoid power low error 1

User code Failure code Lowering of solenoid power supply voltage
Trouble
E0E DA22KK (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Solenoid power supply voltage of controller is below 20 V.
trouble
• While this failure code is displayed, detection of failure codes (disconnection/short circuit) of all the
Action of
solenoid systems is stopped.
controller
• Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Since no solenoid valve is driven normally, machine does not operate normally.
machine
Related
information

1 Defective fuse F01 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See Cause 3.)
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring (116), (118), (121) – F01-2 tance
2
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between F01-1A – F04 Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
(male) (2) tance
Wiring harness between F04 (male) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
R03A tance
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
Resis-
state (116), (118), (121) – F01-2 and chassis Min. 1 Mz
ground
circuit) Wiring harness between F01-1A – F04
Resis-
(male) (2), – circuit branch end and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
Min. 1 Mz
R03A and chassis ground tance
4 Defective pump controller CP01 (female), CP02 (female) Voltage
Between CP02 (116), (118),
20 – 30 V
(121) – CP01 (2), (5)
40 PC130-8
PC130-8 41
Failure code [DA25KP] 5V sensor 1 power abnormality 1

User code Failure code 5V sensor power supply output 1 abnormality
Trouble
— DA25KP (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Voltage of 5V sensor power supply output 1 circuit is below 2.5 V or above 6.0 V.
trouble
Action of • Turns output of 5V sensor power supply output 1 OFF.
Problem that • Automatic gear shifting function does not work (pump pressure sensor system).
appears on • Auto-decelerator keeps working and is not reset or fine control performance of work equipment is
machine lowered (PPC pressure sensor system).
Related
information

a Disconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn start-
ing switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Bucket DIGGING
P01
PPC pressure switch
Boom DOWN PPC
P02
pressure switch
Swing RIGHT PPC
P03
pressure switch
Disconnect sensors at right in Arm DIGGING PPC

P04
Defective pressure sensor order and carry out operation to pressure switch
1
(Internal short circuit) reproduce trouble. If "E" of fail- Bucket DUMP PPC
P05
ure code goes off when a sensor pressure switch
is disconnected, that sensor is Boom UP PPC
defective. P06
pressure switch
Swing LEFT PPC
P07
pressure switch
Possible causes
Arm DUMP PPC
and standard P08
pressure switch
value in normal
state Pump pressure
P25
sensor
Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (73)
– P01 (female) (2) and chassis ground Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
[Bucket DIGGING PPC pressure switch sys- tance
tem]
Resis-
Ground fault in wiring har- – P02 (female) (2) and chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
tance
2 ness (Short circuit with GND [Boom DOWN PPC pressure switch system]
circuit) Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (16)
Min. 1 Mz
[Swing RIGHT PPC pressure switch sys- tance
tem]
Min. 1 Mz
[Arm DIGGING PPC pressure switch sys- tance
tem]
42 PC130-8

Min. 1 Mz
[Bucket DUMP PPC pressure switch sys- tance
tem]
Resis-
– P06 (female) (2) and chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
tance
[Boom UP PPC pressure switch system]
2 ness (Short circuit with GND Resis-
circuit) tance
[Swing LEFT PPC pressure switch system]
Resis-
tance
[Arm DUMP PPC pressure switch system]
Resis-
tance
[Pump pressure sensor system]
– P01 (female) (2) and chassis ground
Voltage Max. 1 V
[Bucket DIGGING PPC pressure switch sys-
tem]
Possible causes – P02 (female) (2) and chassis ground Voltage Max. 1 V
and standard [Boom DOWN PPC pressure switch system]
value in normal Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (16)
state – P03 (female) (2) and chassis ground
Voltage Max. 1 V
[Swing RIGHT PPC pressure switch sys-
tem]
Voltage Max. 1 V
[Arm DIGGING PPC pressure switch sys-
Hot short (Short circuit with tem]
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness
Voltage Max. 1 V
[Bucket DUMP PPC pressure switch sys-
tem]
– P06 (female) (2) and chassis ground Voltage Max. 1 V
[Boom UP PPC pressure switch system]
[Swing LEFT PPC pressure switch system]
[Arm DUMP PPC pressure switch system]
[Pump pressure sensor system]
If causes 1 – 3 are not detected, pump controller may be defective.
4 Defective pump controller
(Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
PC130-8 43
44 PC130-8
Failure code [DA26KP] 5V sensor 2 power abnormality 1

User code Failure code 5V sensor power supply output 2 abnormality
Trouble
— DA26KP (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Voltage of 5V sensor power supply output 2 circuit is below 2.5 V or above 6.0 V.
trouble
Action of • Turns output of 5V sensor power supply output 2 OFF.
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

circuit) Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (8) Resis-
Possible causes Min. 1 Mz
– A08 (female) (7) and chassis ground tance
and standard
value in normal a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
state Hot short (Short circuit with and carry out troubleshooting.
2
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (8)
Voltage Max. 1 V
– A08 (female) (7) and chassis ground
PC130-8 45
Failure code [DA29KQ] Model selection abnormality 1

User code Failure code Model selection abnormality
Trouble
— DA29KQ (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Model code signal for model which is not registered in controller is input.
trouble
Action of • Changes input model code to code of default model (PC120) and continues control.
Problem that
appears on • Since control is carried out on assumption that model is PC120, no particular problem occur.
machine
• Model code of pump controller can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code: 00200 Controller model code)
Related
• Condition of model selection signal can be checked with monitoring function.
information
(Code: 02209 Switch input 6)

Defective model selection
1 connector (Internal discon- S30 (female) Resistance
nection or short circuit) Between (3), (4), (7) – (8) Min. 1 Mz
Between (1), (2) – (8) Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (21) Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring – S30 (male) (2) tance
2
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (40) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
– S30 (male) (1) tance
Wiring harness between S30 (male) (8) – Resis-
J05 – chassis ground (T07) tance
and standard
Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (77) Resis-
– S30 (male) (3) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
CP01 (female) Resistance
4 Defective pump controller Between (39), (58), (77) – chas-
Min. 1 Mz
sis ground
Max. 1 z
ground
46 PC130-8
PC130-8 47

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
48 PC130-8
SEN04121-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Failure code [DA2RMC] CAN discon (Pump controller detected)................................................................... 4
Failure code [DAF8KB] Short circuit in camera power supply ........................................................................ 6
Failure code [DAFGMC] GPS module error.................................................................................................... 8
Failure code [DAFRMC] CAN discon (Monitor detected).............................................................................. 10
Failure code [DGH2KB] Hydr oil sensor short .............................................................................................. 12
Failure code [DHPAMA] Pump press sensor abnormality............................................................................. 14
Failure code [DHSFMA] Travel left forward PPC press sensor abnormality ................................................. 16
Failure code [DHSGMA] Travel right forward PPC press sensor abnormality .............................................. 18
Failure code [DHSHMA] Travel left reverse PPC press sensor abnormality ................................................ 20
Failure code [DHSJMA] Travel right reverse PPC press sensor abnormality ............................................... 22
Failure code [DHX1MA] Overload sensor abnormality (Analog)................................................................... 24
Failure code [DV20KB] Travel alarm short circuit ......................................................................................... 25
Failure code [DW43KA] Travel speed sol discon.......................................................................................... 26
Failure code [DW43KB] Travel speed sol short ............................................................................................ 27
Failure code [DW45KA] Swing brake sol discon........................................................................................... 28
Failure code [DW45KB] Swing brake sol short ............................................................................................. 30
PC130-8 1
Failure code [DW91KA] Travel junction sol discon ....................................................................................... 32

Failure code [DW91KB] Travel junction sol short.......................................................................................... 34
Failure code [DWJ0KA] Merge-divider sol discon......................................................................................... 36
Failure code [DWJ0KB] Merge-divider sol short ........................................................................................... 38
Failure code [DWK0KA] 2-stage relief sol discon ......................................................................................... 40
Failure code [DWK0KB] 2-stage relief sol short............................................................................................ 42
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
Failure code [DA2RMC] CAN discon (Pump controller detected) 1

User code Failure code CAN disconnection (Pump controller detected)
Trouble
E0E DA2RMC (Pump controller system)
Contents of • Pump controller detected communication error in CAN communication circuit between machine
trouble monitor and engine controller.
Action of • Continues operation with information of CAN communication just before detection of error.
Problem that
• Information may not be transmitted normally by CAN communication and machine may not operate
appears on
normally. (Trouble phenomenon depends on failed section.)
machine
Related
information

Resis-
1 tance
Resis-
tance
(21), – K02 (female) (B)
chassis ground
circuit)
(21), – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10) tance
state
Voltage
3
Voltage
(21), – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10) 5.5 V
and chassis ground
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 z
4 PC130-8
PC130-8 5
Failure code [DAF8KB] Short circuit in camera power supply 1

User code Failure code Short circuit in camera power supply
Trouble
— DAF8KB (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • Output power supply voltage (Rating: 8 V) from machine monitor to camera is below 6.0 V or above
trouble 10 V.
Action of • Turns output power supply voltage (Rating: 8 V) to camera OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Camera image is not displayed on monitor screen.
machine
Related
information

a Disconnect camera with starting switch OFF, then turn starting
Defective camera (Internal switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
1
short circuit) Disconnect camera and perform failure reproduction operation. If
failure code disappears at this time, camera is defective.
switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Ground fault in wiring har- (Disconnect camera and check that it is not defective in
2 ness (Contact with GND cir- advance.)
Possible causes
cuit)
and standard Between CM05 (female) (1) – CAMERA
value in normal Voltage Min. 6 V
(female) (F) wiring harness and ground
state
switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Hot short (Contact with 24V (Disconnect camera and check that it is not defective in
3 advance.)
circuit) in wiring harness
Between CM05 (female) (1) – CAMERA
Voltage Max. 10 V
(female) (F) wiring harness and ground
If causes 1 – 3 are not detected, machine monitor may be defec-
4 Defective machine monitor tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried
out.)
6 PC130-8
PC130-8 7
Failure code [DAFGMC] GPS module error 1

User code Failure code GPS module operation error
Trouble
— DAFGMC (KOMTRAX system in machine monitor)
Contents of • Position data is not sent from GPS module (in machine monitor) to KOMTRAX communication
trouble MODEM in 50 seconds after KOMTRAX is started.
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related • Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON (At least 50 seconds after starting
information switch is turned ON).

and standard
value in normal GPS module of machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble
state is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
8 PC130-8
PC130-8 9
Failure code [DAFRMC] CAN discon (Monitor detected) 1

User code Failure code CAN disconnection (Monitor detected)
Trouble
E0E DAFRMC (Machine monitor system)
Contents of • Machine monitor detected communication error in CAN communication circuit between pump con-
trouble troller and engine controller.
Action of
• If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
machine monitor
Problem that
• Information may not be transmitted normally by CAN communication and machine may not operate
appears on
normally. (Trouble phenomenon depends on failed section.)
machine
Related
information

Resis-
1 tance
Resis-
tance
(21), – K02 (female) (B)
chassis ground
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
and standard (21), – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10) tance
Voltage
3
Voltage
(21), – K02 (female) (B), – N08 (male) (10) 5.5 V
and chassis ground
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 z
out.)
10 PC130-8
PC130-8 11
Failure code [DGH2KB] Hydr oil sensor short 1

User code Failure code Hydraulic oil temperature sensor short
Trouble
— DGH2KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Ground fault was detected in hydraulic oil temperature sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of • Controls pump in normal mode (as when hydraulic oil temperature is 20°C to below 95°C).
controller (Overheat prevention function does not work.)
Problem that
• While hydraulic oil temperature rises normally, hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not move from
appears on
top of white range (bottom of green range).
machine
• Signal voltage of hydraulic oil temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04402 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor voltage)
information

Defective hydraulic oil tem-
1 perature sensor (Internal dis- P22 (male) Resistance
connection or short circuit) Between (1) – (2) 3.5 – 90 kz
Possible causes
and standard Ground fault in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 2 ness (Short circuit with GND
state circuit) Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (29) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
3 Defective pump controller CP01 (female) Resistance
Between (29) – (46) 3.5 – 90 kz
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13
Failure code [DHPAMA] Pump press sensor abnormality 1

User code Failure code Pump pressure sensor abnormality
Trouble
— DHPAMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage of pump pressure sensor circuit is below 0.3 V or above 4.4 V.
trouble
Action of • Fixes pump pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
• Automatic gear shifting function does not work.
appears on
• Straight travel performance or steering performance lowers.
machine
a If 5V circuit (3) and ground circuit (1) of pressure sensor are connected inversely, pressure sensor
Related will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
information • Pump pressure can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 01100 Pump pressure)
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON or start engine.

Defective 5V sensor power a If failure code [DA25KP] is also displayed, carry out trouble-
1
supply 1 system shooting for it first.
or start engine and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
P25 Voltage
Defective pump pressure
2 Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
sensor (Internal defect)
Between (2) – (1) Signal 0.3 – 4.5 V
If voltage is abnormal, check failure code. (If "E" of failure code
goes off at this time, pump pressure sensor is defective.)
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (18) Resis-
ness (Disconnection in wiring – P25 (female) (1) tance
value in normal 3
state nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
Hot short (Short circuit with and carry out troubleshooting.
5
Voltage Max. 1 V
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15
Failure code [DHSFMA] Travel left forward PPC press sensor

abnormality 1
User code Failure code Travel left forward PPC pressure sensor abnormality
Trouble
E20 DHSFMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage of travel left forward PPC pressure sensor circuit is below 0.3 V or above 4.5 V.
trouble
Action of • Fixes travel left forward PPC pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
• Automatic decelerator cannot be reset.
appears on
• Travel left forward performance lowers.
machine
will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
Related
• Travel left forward PPC pressure can be checked with monitoring function.
information
(Code: 07102 Travel left forward PPC pressure)

Defective 5V sensor power If failure code [DA25KP] is also displayed, carry out troubleshoot-
1
supply 1 system ing for it first.
P11 Voltage
Defective travel left forward Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
2 PPC pressure sensor (Inter- Between (2) – (1) Signal 0.3 – 4.5 V
nal defect)
If voltage is abnormal, replace travel left forward PPC pressure
sensor with another PPC pressure sensor and check failure code.
(If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, travel left forward PPC
pressure sensor is defective.)
and standard Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (18) Resis-
state 3
nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
5
Voltage Max. 1 V
16 PC130-8
PC130-8 17
Failure code [DHSGMA] Travel right forward PPC press sensor

abnormality 1
User code Failure code Travel right forward PPC pressure sensor abnormality
Trouble
E20 DHSGMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage of travel right forward PPC pressure sensor circuit is below 0.3 V or above 4.5 V.
trouble
Action of • Fixes travel right forward PPC pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
appears on
• Travel right forward performance lowers.
machine
Related
• Travel right forward PPC pressure can be checked with monitoring function.
information
(Code: 07103 Travel right forward PPC pressure)

1
P09 Voltage
Defective travel right forward Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
nal defect)
If voltage is abnormal, replace travel right forward PPC pressure
(If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, travel right forward PPC
state 3
nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
5
Voltage Max. 1 V
18 PC130-8
PC130-8 19
Failure code [DHSHMA] Travel left reverse PPC press sensor

abnormality 1
User code Failure code Travel left reverse PPC pressure sensor abnormality
Trouble
E20 DHSHMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage of travel left reverse PPC pressure sensor circuit is below 0.3 V or above 4.5 V.
trouble
Action of • Fixes travel left reverse PPC pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
appears on
• Travel left reverse performance lowers.
machine
Related
• Travel left reverse PPC pressure can be checked with monitoring function.
information
(Code: 07104 Travel left reverse PPC pressure)

1
P12 Voltage
Defective travel left reverse Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
nal defect)
If voltage is abnormal, replace travel left reverse PPC pressure
(If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, travel left reverse PPC
state 3
nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
5
Voltage Max. 1 V
20 PC130-8
PC130-8 21
Failure code [DHSJMA] Travel right reverse PPC press sensor

abnormality 1
User code Failure code Travel right reverse PPC pressure sensor abnormality
Trouble
E20 DHSJMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage of travel right reverse PPC pressure sensor circuit is below 0.3 V or above 4.5 V.
trouble
Action of • Fixes travel right reverse PPC pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
appears on
• Travel right reverse performance lowers.
machine
Related
• Travel right reverse PPC pressure can be checked with monitoring function.
information
(Code: 07105 Travel right reverse PPC pressure)

1
P10 Voltage
Defective travel right reverse Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.5 – 5.5 V
nal defect)
If voltage is abnormal, replace travel right reverse PPC pressure
(If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, travel right reverse PPC
state 3
nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
5
Voltage Max. 1 V
22 PC130-8
PC130-8 23
Failure code [DHX1MA] Overload sensor abnormality (Analog) 1

User code Failure code Overload sensor (Analog)
Trouble
— DHX1MA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Monitor which is not set to be displayed (Overload alarm monitor) is displayed.
trouble
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON.
information

and standard
value in normal Pump controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, trou-
state bleshooting cannot be carried out.)
24 PC130-8
Failure code [DV20KB] Travel alarm short circuit 1

User code Failure code Travel alarm short circuit
Trouble
— DV20KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed in the travel alarm circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
trouble
• Power to the travel alarm circuit is switched OFF.
Action of
• Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normalcy,
controller
unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • The travel alarm does not sound.
machine
Related • Operation of the travel alarm (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
information (Code: 03701 Controller output 2)

a Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and
keep the engine running during the troubleshooting.
M14 (female) Travel lever Voltage
Travel alarm defective
1 Neutral Max. 1 V
(Internal defect) Between (1) and (2)
Operated 20 – 30 V
If the above voltage is normal but the travel alarm does not oper-
Possible causes ate, the travel alarm is defective.
and standard a Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and
value in normal Grounding fault of wiring har- hold it in the OFF position during the troubleshooting.
state ness
2
(Contact with grounding cir- Between wiring harness between CP02 Resis-
cuit) (female) (107) and M14 (female) (1) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
grounding
a Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and
keep the engine running during the troubleshooting.
3 Pump controller defective CP02 Travel lever Voltage
Between (107) – Neutral Max. 1 V
chassis ground Operated 20 – 30 V
PC130-8 25
Failure code [DW43KA] Travel speed sol discon 1

User code Failure code Travel speed solenoid system disconnection
Trouble
— DW43KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to travel speed shifting solenoid was turned ON, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • None in particular. (Since no current flows, solenoid does not operate.)
Problem that
• Speed is low at High travel speed position (Machine monitor is set to High but actual speed is about
appears on
Middle).
machine
• Operating condition of travel speed shifting solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 02300 Solenoid 1)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine + Set travel speed to High + Operate travel lever.

Defective travel speed shifting without turning starting switch ON.
1 ing solenoid (Internal discon-
V04 (male) Resistance
nection)
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes Disconnection in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
and standard ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (87) Resis-
value in normal 2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- – V04 (female) (2) tance
state nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V04 (female) (1) tance
Between (87) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
26 PC130-8
Failure code [DW43KB] Travel speed sol short 1

User code Failure code Travel speed solenoid system short
Trouble
— DW43KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to travel speed shifting solenoid was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to travel speed shifting solenoid OFF.
Problem that
• Speed is low at High travel speed position (Machine monitor is set to High but actual speed is about
appears on
Middle).
machine
• Operating condition of travel speed shifting solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine + Set travel speed to High + Operate travel lever.

Defective travel speed shift-
1 ing solenoid (Internal discon- V04 (male) Resistance
nection) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
state Min. 1 Mz
– V04 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Between (87) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
PC130-8 27
Failure code [DW45KA] Swing brake sol discon 1

User code Failure code Swing holding brake solenoid system disconnection
Trouble
E03 DW45KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of • When output to swing holding brake solenoid was turned OFF, disconnection was detected in cir-
trouble cuit.
Problem that
appears on • Machine cannot swing (Swing holding brake is not reset).
machine
• If solenoid and wiring harness are normal, operator can swing machine by setting swing holding
brake release switch in release position (Swing holding brake does not work, however, when
machine stops).
Related • Keep swing lock switch in OFF position and swing holding brake release switch in release position
information during troubleshooting.
• Operating condition of swing holding brake solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.

Defective swing holding ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 brake solenoid (Internal dis-
connection)
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Defective assembled-type ing without turning starting switch ON.
2 diode D01 (Internal discon-
D01 (male) Digital circuit tester Continuity
nection)
Between (7) – (3) Diode mode There is continuity
Defective swing lock switch S04 (male) Swing lock switch Resistance
3
(Internal disconnection)
OFF Max. 1 z
Possible causes Between (3) – (4)
ON Min. 1 Mz
and standard
Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- (101) – D01 (female) (7) tance
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between D01 (female) (3) – Resis-
4 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- J02 – S04 (female) (3) tance
nector) Wiring harness between S04 (female) (4) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
V05 (female) (2) tance
Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V05 (female) (1) tance
5 Defective pump controller CP02 (female) Disconnect D01 and Resistance

connect pins (3) and
Between (101) – (7) on female side 20 – 60 z
(115), (117), (120) directly.
28 PC130-8
PC130-8 29
Failure code [DW45KB] Swing brake sol short 1

User code Failure code Swing holding brake solenoid system short
Trouble
E03 DW45KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to swing holding brake solenoid was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to swing holding brake solenoid OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Machine cannot swing (Swing holding brake is not reset).
machine
• If solenoid and wiring harness are normal, operator can swing machine by setting swing holding
brake release switch in release position (Swing holding brake does not work, however, when
machine stops).
Related • Keep swing lock switch in OFF position and swing holding brake release switch in release position
information during troubleshooting.
• Operating condition of swing holding brake solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine + Swing with left work equipment control lever.

Defective swing holding
1 brake solenoid (Internal short V05 (male) Resistance
circuit or ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes Ground fault in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
and standard ness (Disconnection in wiring
2 Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
value in normal or defective contact in con- Resis-
nector) (101) – D01 – J02 – S04 – V05 (female) (2), Min. 1 Mz
state tance
– S25 (female) (14) and chassis ground
3 Defective pump controller Disconnect D01 and
Between (101) –
connect pins (3) and 20 – 60 z
(115), (117), (120)
(7) on female side
Between (101) – directly. Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
30 PC130-8
PC130-8 31
Failure code [DW91KA] Travel junction sol discon 1

User code Failure code Travel junction solenoid system disconnection
Trouble
— DW91KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to travel junction solenoid was turned ON, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Machine is not steered easily during travel.
machine
• Operating condition of travel junction solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine + Steer machine with right and left travel levers.

Defective travel junction ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 solenoid (Internal disconnec-
tion)
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
and standard ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
or defective contact in con- (110) – V03 (female) (2) tance
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V03 (female) (1) tance
Between (110) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
32 PC130-8
PC130-8 33
Failure code [DW91KB] Travel junction sol short 1

User code Failure code Travel junction solenoid system short
Trouble
— DW91KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to travel junction solenoid was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to travel junction solenoid OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Machine is not steered easily during travel.
machine
• Operating condition of travel junction solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine + Steer machine with right and left travel levers.

Defective travel junction
1 solenoid (Internal short cir- V03 (male) Resistance
cuit or ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
circuit) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
state Min. 1 Mz
(110) – V03 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Between (110) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
34 PC130-8
PC130-8 35
Failure code [DWJ0KA] Merge-divider sol discon 1

User code Failure code Merge-divider solenoid disconnection
Trouble
— DWJ0KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When merge-divider EPC solenoid was driven, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • None in particular (Since no current flows, solenoid does not operate).
Problem that
appears on • Single operation speed of work equipment and swing is high in lifting mode (L).
machine
Related
information

Defective merge-divider EPC ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 solenoid (Internal disconnec-
tion)
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V02 (female) (1) tance
Between (112) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
36 PC130-8
PC130-8 37
Failure code [DWJ0KB] Merge-divider sol short 1

User code Failure code Merge-divider solenoid short
Trouble
— DWJ0KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When merge-divider EPC solenoid was driven, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to merge-divider EPC solenoid OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Single operation speed of work equipment and swing is high in lifting mode (L).
machine
Related
information

Defective merge-divider EPC
1 solenoid (Internal short cir- V02 (male) Resistance
cuit or ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
state Min. 1 Mz
Between (112) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39
Failure code [DWK0KA] 2-stage relief sol discon 1

User code Failure code 2-stage relief solenoid disconnection
Trouble
— DWK0KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to 2-stage relief solenoid is turned OFF, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Problem that
• Power maximizing function does not work.
appears on
• Travel power is low.
machine
• Operating condition of 2-stage relief solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set machine in mode other than (L).

Defective 2-stage relief sole- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
noid (Internal disconnection) V06 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V06 (female) (1) tance
Between (109) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
40 PC130-8
PC130-8 41
Failure code [DWK0KB] 2-stage relief sol short 1

User code Failure code 2-stage relief solenoid short
Trouble
— DWK0KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to 2-stage relief solenoid is turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to 2-stage relief solenoid OFF.
Problem that
• Power maximizing function does not work.
appears on
• Travel power is low.
machine
• Operating condition of 2-stage relief solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set machine in working mode (L).

Defective 2-stage relief sole-
1 noid (Internal short circuit or V06 (male) Resistance
ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
state Min. 1 Mz
Between (109) – (115), (117),
20 – 60 z
(120)
42 PC130-8
PC130-8 43

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
44 PC130-8
SEN04122-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Failure code [DXA8KA] PC-EPC sol discon ................................................................................................... 2
Failure code [DXA8KB] PC-EPC sol short...................................................................................................... 4
Failure code [DXE4KA] Service current EPC discon ...................................................................................... 6
Failure code [DXE4KB] Service current EPC short ........................................................................................ 8
Failure code [DY20KA] Wiper working abnormality ...................................................................................... 10
Failure code [DY20MA] Wiper parking abnormality ...................................................................................... 12
Failure code [DY2CKA] Washer drive discon ............................................................................................... 14
Failure code [DY2CKB] Washer drive short.................................................................................................. 16
Failure code [DY2DKB] Wiper drive (for) short ............................................................................................. 18
Failure code [DY2EKB] Wiper drive (rev) short ............................................................................................ 20
PC130-8 1
Failure code [DXA8KA] PC-EPC sol discon 1

User code Failure code PC-EPC solenoid system disconnection
Trouble
E02 DXA8KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When PC-EPC solenoid was driven, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • If pump load increases, engine speed lowers largely and engine may stall.
machine
• Drive current of PC-EPC solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01300 PC-EPC solenoid current)
information

Defective PC-EPC solenoid ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal disconnection) V11 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 z
Emergency pump
S25 (male) Resistance
Defective emergency pump drive switch
2 drive switch (Internal discon- Normal Max. 1 z
nection) Between (3) – (2)
Emergency Min. 1 Mz
Normal Max. 1 z
Between (6) – (5)
Possible causes Emergency Min. 1 Mz
and standard
value in normal
state
Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- – S25 (female) (3) tance
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between S25 (female) (2) – Resis-
3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- V11 (female) (1) tance
nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – S25 (female) (6) tance
Wiring harness between S25 (female) (5) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
Between (96) – (115), (117),
7 – 14 z
(120)
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
Failure code [DXA8KB] PC-EPC sol short 1

User code Failure code PC-EPC solenoid system short
Trouble
E02 DXA8KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When PC-EPC solenoid was driven, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to PC-EPC solenoid OFF.
Problem that
appears on • If pump load increases, engine speed lowers largely and engine may stall.
machine
• Drive current of PC-EPC solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01300 PC-EPC solenoid current)
information

Defective PC-EPC solenoid
1 (Internal short circuit or V11 (male) Resistance
Defective emergency pump Emergency pump
S25 (male) Resistance
2 drive switch (Internal short drive switch
circuit or ground fault) Between (2), (3) – (4) Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes
Between (2), (3) – Normal
value in normal chassis ground
3 ness (Contact with GND cir- Min. 1 Mz
– S25 (female) (3) and chassis ground tance
cuit)
Min. 1 Mz
V11 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Between (96) – (115), (117),
7 – 14 z
(120)
4 PC130-8
PC130-8 5
Failure code [DXE4KA] Service current EPC discon 1

User code Failure code Service current EPC solenoid disconnection
Trouble
— DXE4KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When service EPC solenoid was driven, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • Attachment does not operate.
machine
• Drive current of service EPC solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01700 Service solenoid current)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set in attachment mode (ATT).

Defective service EPC sole- ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
noid (Internal disconnection) V30 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 z
and standard ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (97) Resis-
or defective contact in con- – V30 (female) (1) tance
Max. 1 z
(115), (117), (120) – V30 (female) (2) tance
Between (97) – (115), (117),
7 – 14 z
(120)
6 PC130-8
PC130-8 7
Failure code [DXE4KB] Service current EPC short 1

User code Failure code Service current EPC solenoid short
Trouble
— DXE4KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When service EPC solenoid was driven, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to service EPC solenoid OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Attachment does not operate.
machine
• Drive current of service EPC solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01700 Service EPC solenoid current)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set in attachment mode (ATT).

Defective service EPC sole-
1 noid (Internal short circuit or V30 (male) Resistance
state Min. 1 Mz
– V30 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Between (97) – (115), (117),
7 – 14 z
(120)
8 PC130-8
PC130-8 9
Failure code [DY20KA] Wiper working abnormality 1

User code Failure code Wiper working abnormality
Trouble
— DY20KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When windshield wiper works, W signal of working ends is not input.
trouble
Action of • Turns working output to wiper motor OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Wiper motor does not work.
machine
• Condition of W contact signal of wiper working area can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set wiper switch to INT or ON.

M05 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
Defective wiper motor (Inter-
1 Operating range top Max. 1 z
nal disconnection)
Between (6) – (5) Other than operating
Min. 1 Mz
range top
Between (1) – (3) All range Max. 20 z
Disconnection in wiring har- – M05 (male) (6) tance
and standard
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between M05 (male) (5) – Resis-
state or defective contact in con- J04 – chassis ground (T05, T06) tance
nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) (114) Resis-
Max. 1 z
– M05 (male) (1) tance
Max. 1 z
CP01 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
3 Defective pump controller Operating range top Max. 1 z
Between (56) –
chassis ground Other than operating
Min. 1 Mz
range top
10 PC130-8
PC130-8 11
Failure code [DY20MA] Wiper parking abnormality 1

User code Failure code Wiper parking abnormality
Trouble
— DY20MA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When windshield wiper parks, P signal of storage area is not input.
trouble
Action of • Turns parking output to wiper motor OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Wiper motor does not park.
machine
• Condition of P contact signal of wiper parking area can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set wiper switch to INT/ON to OFF.

Defective wiper motor (Inter- M05 (female) Wiper blade Resistance

1
nal disconnection) Storage area Max. 1 z
Between (4) – (5)
Working area Min. 1 Mz
Disconnection in wiring har- – M05 (male) (4) tance
and standard
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between M05 (male) (5) – Resis-
state or defective contact in con- J04 – chassis ground (T05, T06) tance
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
CP01 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
Between (75) – Storage area Max. 1 z
chassis ground Working area Min. 1 Mz
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13
Failure code [DY2CKA] Washer drive discon 1

User code Failure code Window washer drive system disconnection
Trouble
— DY2CKA (Pump controller system)
Contents of • When output to window washer drive system was turned OFF (when ground circuit was connected),
trouble disconnection was detected in circuit.
Action of • None in particular (Since no current flows, washer motor does not operate).
Problem that
appears on • Window washer does not operate.
machine
Related
information

1 Defective fuse No. 4 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See cause 5.)
Defective washer motor M06A (male) Resistance
2 (Internal short circuit or
Min. 1 Mz
ground
3 diode D02 (Internal short cir-
D02 (female) Continuity (Resistance)
cuit)
Between (3) – (7) No continuity (Min. 1 Mz)
Disconnection in wiring har-
and standard
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between F01 (4) – J03 – Resis-
or defective contact in con- M06A (female) (1) tance
state
Max. 1 z
– J04 – M06A (female) (2) tance
Wiring harness between F01 (4) – J03 –
Ground fault in wiring har- Resis-
M06A (female) (1), – D02 (female) (3) and Min. 1 Mz
5 ness (Short circuit with GND tance
chassis ground
circuit)
Resis-
– J04 – M06A (female) (2), – D02 (female) Min. 1 Mz
tance
(7) and chassis ground
CP01 (female) Voltage
Between (3) – chassis ground 20 – 30 V
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15
Failure code [DY2CKB] Washer drive short 1

User code Failure code Window washer drive system short
Trouble
— DY2CKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of • When output to window washer drive system was turned ON (ground circuit was disconnected),
trouble short circuit was detected in circuit.
Action of • Turns output to washer motor OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Window washer does not operate.
machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Turn washer switch ON.
information

Defective washer motor ing without turning starting switch ON.
1
(Internal short circuit) M06A (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 5 – 20 z
Possible causes
and standard a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
value in normal and carry out troubleshooting.
Hot short (Short circuit with
state 2
– J04 – M6A (female) (2), – D02 (female) (7) Voltage Max. 1 V
and chassis ground
If causes 1 and 2 are not detected, pump controller may be defec-
3 Defective pump controller tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried
out.)
16 PC130-8
PC130-8 17
Failure code [DY2DKB] Wiper drive (for) short 1

User code Failure code Wiper motor drive forward system short
Trouble
— DY2DKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to wiper motor drive forward side was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to wiper motor drive forward side OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper does not operate.
machine
Related
information

1 nal short circuit or ground M05 (female) Resistance
fault) Between (3) – (1) There is continuity
Possible causes
and standard Between (3) – chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
(119) – M05 (male) (3) and chassis ground tance
out.)
18 PC130-8
PC130-8 19
Failure code [DY2EKB] Wiper drive (rev) short 1

User code Failure code Wiper motor drive reverse system short
Trouble
— DY2EKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When output to wiper motor drive reverse side was turned ON, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to wiper motor drive reverse side OFF.
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper does not operate.
machine
Related
information

1 nal short circuit or ground M05 (female) Continuity/Resistance
fault) Between (1) – (3) There is continuity
Possible causes
and standard Between (1) – chassis ground Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
(114) – M05 (male) (1) and chassis ground tance
out.)
20 PC130-8
PC130-8 21

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
22 PC130-8
SEN04123-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Troubleshooting of electrical system
(E-mode)
Before carrying out troubleshooting of electrical system ................................................................................ 3
Information in troubleshooting table................................................................................................................ 5
E-1 When starting switch turned ON, machine monitor displays nothing ....................................................... 6
E-2 When starting switch turned ON (before starting engine), basic check item lights up.............................. 8
E-3 Engine does not start (Engine does not turn) ..........................................................................................11
E-4 Preheater does not operate.................................................................................................................... 14
E-5 Automatic warm-up system does not operate (in cold season).............................................................. 16
E-6 All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move or cannot be locked ........................... 18
E-7 Precaution lights up while engine is running .......................................................................................... 20
E-8 Emergency stop item lights up while engine is running.......................................................................... 25
E-9 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally ............................................................. 26
E-10 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally................................................................ 27
E-11 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally ........................................................................................ 29
E-12 Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable machine .................................. 31
PC130-8 1
E-13 Machine monitor does not display some items..................................................................................... 31

E-14 Function switch does not work ............................................................................................................. 31
E-15 Auto-decelerator does not operate normally ........................................................................................ 32
E-16 Working mode does not change ........................................................................................................... 33
E-17 Travel speed does not change ............................................................................................................. 34
E-18 Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped.......................................................................................................... 35
E-19 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate.......................................................................... 36
E-20 Power maximizing function does not operate normally ........................................................................ 40
E-21 Swing holding brake does not operate normally................................................................................... 42
E-22 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding...................................................................... 44
E-23 Air conditioner does not operate normally (including air conditioner abnormality record) .................... 45
E-24 While starting switch is in OFF position, service meter is not displayed .............................................. 57
E-25 Machine monitor cannot be set in service mode .................................................................................. 57
E-26 Monitoring function does not display lever control signal normally....................................................... 58
E-27 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally..................................................................................... 74
2 PC130-8
Before carrying out troubleshooting of electrical system 1

Connection table of fuse box
a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box supplies power (A
switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is in the OFF and ON
positions).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuses and fus-
ible links to see if the power is supplied normally.
Fuse
Type of power supply Fusible link Fuse No. Destination of power
capacity
Pump resistor, light switch, swing holding brake release
1 10A
switch
2 30A Pump controller
F04
Switch power supply 3 10A Starting motor cutout relay, PPC oil pressure lock switch
(65A)
Windshield washer, cigar lighter, electrical intake air
4 10A
heater
5 10A Horn
6 10A (Spare)
7 10A Rotary lamp (If equipped)
F04
Switch power supply 8 20A Working lamp relay
(65A)
9 10A Radio, speaker, one-touch power max. switch
10 10A (Spare)
11 20A Air conditioner unit
F04 12 10A (Spare)
Switch power supply
(65A) 13 10A Relay for cab light
F05 16 10A Radio backup, room lamp
Constant power supply
(30A) 17 20A Machine monitor, pump controller, starting switch (B)
18 10A (Spare)
Starting switch 19 30A Engine controller
Switch power supply
ACC 20 5A Engine controller
PC130-8 3
Locations of fusible links
Location of fuse box and fuse Nos.
4 PC130-8
Information in troubleshooting table 1

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit
diagram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
Trouble Trouble which occurred in the machine
Related
Information related to detected trouble or troubleshooting
information

<Contents of description>
• Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
• Remarks on judgment
1
<Troubles in wiring harness>
• Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or wiring harness is
broken.
• Ground fault
Wiring harness which is not connected to chassis ground
circuit is in contact with chassis ground circuit.
• Hot short
Wiring harness which is not connected to power source (24
2 V) circuit is in contact with power source (24 V) circuit.
• Short circuit
Independent wiring harnesses are in contact with each other
Possible causes
Possible causes of trouble abnormally.
and standard
value in normal (Given numbers are refer- <Precautions for troubleshooting>
state ence numbers, which do 1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-
not indicate priority) adapter
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for trouble-
shooting, unless otherwise specified.
3 • If connector No. has no marks of “male” and “female”,
disconnect connector and insert T-adapters in both male
side and female side.
• If connector No. has marks of “male” and “female”, dis-
connect connector and connect T-adapter to only male
side or female side.
2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (–) lead of tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise
specified.
4
• Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or wiring harness
entered on front side.
• Connect negative (–) lead to pin No. or harness entered
on rear side.
Related circuit diagram
This drawing is a part of the circuit diagram related to troubleshooting.

• Connector No.: Indicates (Model – Number of pins) and (Color).
• “Connector No. and pin No.” from each branching/merging point:
Shows the ends of branch or source of merging within the parts of the
same wiring harness.
• Arrow ( ): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
PC130-8 5
E-1 When starting switch turned ON, machine monitor displays nothing 1
Trouble • When starting switch turned ON, machine monitor displays nothing.
• When starting switch is turned ON, machine monitor displays KOMATSU logo, screen to input pass-
word (if set), screen to check breaker mode (if set), screen of check before starting, screen to check
Related infor-
working mode and travel speed, and ordinary screen in order.
mation
• When the engine is started, the battery voltage may lower suddenly, depending on the ambient tem-
perature and the condition of the battery.

1 Low charge level of battery Electrolyte specific gravity
Battery voltage (2 pieces)
(1 piece)
Min. 24 V Min. 1.26
Defective fusible link F05 or If fusible link or fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault.
2
fuse No. 17 (See Cause 5.)
Wrong connection of connec- Machine monitor connector may be connected wrongly. Check it
3
tor directly. (Check mounting bracket plate with connector.)
Wiring harness between battery (–) – chas- Resis-
Max. 1 z
sis ground tance
Wiring harness between battery (+) – R04 – Resis-
Max. 1 z
F05 (male) (1) tance
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F05 (male) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring F01-16D tance
4
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between F01-17 – J06 – Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
CM01 (female) (1), (2) tance
Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (3), Resis-
Max. 1 z
Possible causes (4) – chassis ground (T05) tance
and standard Wiring harness between F01-17 – J06 – Resis-
H15 (female) (1) tance
state Wiring harness between H15 (female) (5) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
J03 – CM01 (female) (14) tance
Wiring harness between battery (+) – R04 – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
F05 (male) (1) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
Ground fault in wiring har- F01-16D and chassis ground tance
5 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between F01-17 – J06 – Resis-
circuit) Min. 1 Mz
CM01 (female) (1), (2) and chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between F01-17 – J06 – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
H15 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (5) –
Resis-
J03 – CM01 (female) (14) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch OFF
and ON and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
CM01 Starting switch Voltage
6 Defective machine monitor Between
OFF 20 – 30 V
(1), (2) – (3), (4)
Between
ON 20 – 30 V
(14) – (3), (4)
6 PC130-8
PC130-8 7
E-2 When starting switch turned ON (before starting engine), basic

check item lights up 1
Trouble (1) Radiator coolant level monitor lights up red.
• Although radiator coolant level monitor is basic check item, it is also checked while engine is running.
Related infor- (If monitor lights up red while engine is running, carry out this troubleshooting, too.)
mation • Condition of radiator coolant level switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.

Lowering of radiator coolant
Coolant level in radiator sub tank may be low. Check it and add
1 level (When system is nor-
coolant if necessary.
mal)
Defective radiator coolant Sub tank coolant
P24 (male) Resistance
2 level switch (Internal discon- level
nection) Between
Max. 1 z
Between (1) – (2) FULL – LOW
Possible causes Below LOW Min. 1 Mz

value in normal Disconnection in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
state ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (3) Resis-
3 Max. 1 z
nector) Wiring harness between P24 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
chassis ground (T10) tance
Sub tank coolant
CM02 Voltage
4 Defective machine monitor level
Between
Between (3) – Max. 1 V
FULL – LOW
chassis ground
Below LOW 20 – 30 V
8 PC130-8
PC130-8 9
Trouble (2) Engine oil level monitor lights up red.

Related infor- • Condition of engine oil level switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code: 04501 Monitor input 2)

Lowering of engine oil level
1 Engine oil level may be low. Check it and add oil if necessary.
(When system is normal)
Defective engine oil level
2 switch (Internal disconnec- P44 (male) Engine oil level Resistance
tion) Between (1) – Between H – L Max. 1 z
Possible chassis ground Below L Min. 1 Mz
causes and
standard value Disconnection in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshoot-
in normal state ness (Disconnection in wiring ing without turning starting switch ON.
3
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (2) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
4 Defective machine monitor CM02 Engine oil level Voltage
Between (2) – Between H – L Max. 1 V
chassis ground Below L 20 – 30 V
10 PC130-8
E-3 Engine does not start (Engine does not turn) 1

Trouble • Engine does not start (Engine does not turn).
• Engine starting circuit has following 2 start lock mechanisms.
Related
1) Start lock with password of machine monitor
information
2) Start lock with lock lever

1 Low charge level of battery Electrolyte specific gravity
Battery voltage (2 pieces)
(1 piece)
Min. 24 V Min. 1.26
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch
OFF and turn it to START and carry out troubleshooting in each
Defective starting switch case.
3 H15 (male) Starting switch Resistance
OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (4)
START Max. 1 z
Defective lock lever switch S14 (female) Lock lever Resistance
4
Free Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (3)
Lock Max. 1 z
Defective starting motor cut-
out relay R06 or R07 (Inter- R06 (male), R07 (male) Resistance
Possible causes 5
and standard nal disconnection or short Between (1) – (2) 300 – 600 z
value in normal circuit) Between (3) – (4) Max. 1 z
state Between (3) – (5) Min. 1 Mz
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch to
START and carry out troubleshooting.
Safety relay terminal Voltage
Between B – E Power supply 20 – 30 V
Between R
Generation input Max. 1 V
Defective starting motor (R19-2) – E
6
safety relay (Internal defect) Between S
Starting input 20 – 30 V
(R19-1) – E
Between C (R28) – E Starting output 20 – 30 V
If power supply, generation input, and starting input are normal but
starting output is not normal, starting motor safety relay is defec-
tive.
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch to
START and carry out troubleshooting.
Starting motor terminals Voltage
Between B – chassis
Defective starting motor Power supply 20 – 30 V
7 ground
(Internal defect)
Between C –
Starting input 20 – 30 V
chassis ground
If power supply and starting input are normal but starting motor
does not turn, starting motor is defective.
PC130-8 11

Defective alternator (Internal
8 Alternator Voltage
short circuit)
Between L –
Generation output Max. 1 V
chassis ground
Wiring harness between H15 (male) (4) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
J01 – R06 (female) (5) tance
Max. 1 z
R07 (female) (4) tance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between starting motor
Resis-
Disconnection in wiring har- safety relay B (R29) – heater relay (R15) – Max. 1 z
tance
ness (Disconnection in wiring battery relay M
9
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between starting motor Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
safety relay E – chassis ground tance
Resis-
safety relay C (R28) – starting motor C Max. 1 z
tance
(M17)
Wiring harness between F01-3 – S14 (male) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(1) tance
Possible causes Wiring harness between S14 (male) (3) – Resis-
value in normal
state Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between H15 (male) (4) –
Resis-
J01 – R06 (female) (5) – circuit branch end Min. 1 Mz
tance
and chassis ground
Min. 1 Mz
R07 (female) (4) and chassis ground tance
Min. 1 Mz
Ground fault in wiring har- R19 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
10 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between starting motor
circuit) Resis-
safety relay B (R29) – heater relay (R15) – Min. 1 Mz
tance
battery relay M and chassis ground
Resis-
safety relay C (R28) – starting motor C Min. 1 Mz
tance
(M17) and chassis ground
Wiring harness between F01-3 – S14 (male) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(1) and chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (3) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
R06 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
11
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between R19 (female) (2) –
J02 – alternator L – circuit branch end and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13
E-4 Preheater does not operate 1

Trouble (1) When starting switch is turned to HEAT position, preheating monitor does not light up or flash.
• Preheater monitor lights up when starting switch is turned to HEAT and starts flashing about 30 sec-
onds after to notify completion of preheating (It stops flashing about 10 seconds after).
Related • If engine coolant temperature is below 20°C, automatic warm-up system operates and preheating
information monitor lights up for up to 30 seconds.
• Condition of starting switch (preheating) signal can be checked with the monitoring function.

a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch OFF
and turn it to HEAT and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
Defective starting switch H15 (female) Starting switch Resistance
1
OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (3)
HEAT Max. 1 z
Possible causes
and standard Disconnection in wiring har- a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting
ness (Disconnection in wiring without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 2
state or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between CM01 (female) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
(16) – J02 – H15 (female) (3) tance
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch OFF
and turn it to HEAT and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
3 Defective machine monitor CM01 Starting switch Voltage
Between (16) – OFF Max. 1 V
chassis ground HEAT 20 – 30 V
(2) When starting switch is turned to HEAT position, intake air heater mounting part does not become
Trouble
warm.
Related • Check that engine can be turned with starting motor (If engine cannot be turned, carry out trouble-
information shooting for E-1 Engine does not start (Engine does not turn)).

a Prepare with starting switch OFF (with wiring harness con-
nected), then keep starting switch OFF and turn it to HEAT and
carry out troubleshooting in each case.
Defective heater relay (Inter- Continuity/Resis-
1 Heater relay Starting switch
nal disconnection) tance
Between R17 –
OFF There is continuity
chassis ground
Between R15 – R16 HEAT Max. 1 z
a Prepare with starting switch OFF (with wiring harness con-
nected), then turn starting switch to HEAT and carry out trou-
Possible causes bleshooting in each case.
and standard
Defective intake air heater M23 Starting switch Voltage
value in normal 2
state (Internal disconnection) Between terminal –
HEAT 20 – 30 V
chassis ground
If voltage is normal but heater mounting part does not become
warm, intake air heater is defective.
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between H15 (female) (3) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring J02 – heater relay R17 tance
3
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between battery relay R03A Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
– heater relay contact terminal (R15) tance
Wiring harness between heater relay R16 – Resis-
Max. 1 z
intake air heater M23 tance
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15
E-5 Automatic warm-up system does not operate (in cold season) 1
Trouble • Automatic warm-up system does not operate (in cold season).
Related • When engine coolant temperature is below 50°C automatic warm-up system raises engine low idle
information speed to 1,300 rpm.

a Turn starting switch ON or start engine and carry out trouble-
shooting.
Engine coolant Coolant temperature
Monitoring code
temperature level
105°C 6 (a: Red)
Possible causes 102°C 5 (a: Red)

Defective engine coolant 04107
and standard 1 100°C 4 (a: Blue)
temperature signal system Engine coolant
value in normal 85°C 3 (a: Blue)
state temperature
60°C 2 (a: Blue)
30°C 1 (a: White)
If level of coolant temperature gauge is different from actual cool-
ant temperature, carry out troubleshooting for E-9 Engine coolant
temperature gauge does not indicate normally.
If cause 1 is not detected, engine controller may be defective.
Engine coolant temperature gauge and engine

coolant temperature monitor
16 PC130-8
PC130-8 17
E-6 All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move or
cannot be locked 1
Trouble (1) All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism do not move.
Related
information

2
Lock Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Free Max. 1 z
Defective PPC lock solenoid
3 (Internal disconnection or V01 (male) Resistance
short circuit) Between (1) – (2) 20 – 60 z
Possible causes
4 diode D01 (Internal short cir-
and standard D01 (male) Resistance (Continuity)
cuit)
value in normal Between (4) – (8) Min. 1 Mz (No continuity)
state
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-3 – S14 (male) Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring (1) tance
5
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) – Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between V01 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between F01-3 – S14 (male) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
6 ness (Short circuit with GND (1), – circuit branch end and chassis ground tance
circuit) Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) –
Resis-
V01 (female) (2), – D01 (female) (4) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
chassis ground
18 PC130-8
Trouble (2) All work equipment, swing, and travel mechanism cannot be locked.
Related
information

1
Possible causes (Internal short circuit)
Lock Min. 1 Mz
and standard Between (1) – (2)
value in normal Free Max. 1 z
2
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) –
V01 (female) (2), – D01 (female) (4) and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
PC130-8 19
E-7 Precaution lights up while engine is running 1

Trouble (1) Charge level monitor lights up red.
Related • Signal voltage of alternator can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04300 Charge voltage)

Defective generation by out troubleshooting.
1 alternator (when system is M22 (male) Engine speed Voltage
normal) Between (1) –
Middle or higher 27.5 – 29.5 V
chassis ground
ness (Disconnection in wiring ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
Possible causes or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between CM01 (female) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
and standard (11) – J02 – M22 (female) (1) tance
3 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between CM01 (female)
circuit) Resis-
(11) – J02 – M22 (female) (1), – circuit Min. 1 Mz
tance
branch end and chassis ground
4 Defective machine monitor CM01 Engine Voltage
Between (11) –
Running Min. 7.8 V
chassis ground
20 PC130-8
PC130-8 21
Trouble (2) Fuel level monitor lights up red.

Related infor- • Signal voltage of fuel sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code: 04200 Fuel sensor voltage)

Possible causes Low fuel level (when system Fuel level may be low (below about 36 l). Check it and add fuel if
1
and standard is normal) necessary.
value in normal If cause 1 is not detected, fuel level gauge system may be defec-
state Defective fuel level gauge
2 tive. Carry out troubleshooting for E-11 Fuel level gauge does not
system
indicate normally.
Trouble (3) Air cleaner clogging monitor lights up red.

Related infor- • Condition of signal of air cleaner clogging switch can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code: 04501 Monitor input 2)

Clogging of air cleaner (when Air cleaner may be clogged. Check it, then clean or replace if nec-
1
system is normal) essary.
P23 (male) Air cleaner Resistance
Defective air cleaner clog- When normal
2 ging switch (Internal discon- (Air intake Max. 1 z
nection) resistance: *1)
Between (1) – (2)
When clogged
(Air intake Min. 1 Mz
resistance: *2)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (4) Resis-
3 Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
CM02 Air cleaner Voltage
When normal
4 Defective machine monitor (Air intake Max. 1 V
Between (4) – resistance: *1)
chassis ground When clogged
(Air intake 20 – 30 V
resistance: *2)
*1: Min. –3,430 Pa {Min. –350 mmH2O}

*2: –7,470 ± 490 Pa {–762 ± 50 mmH2O}
22 PC130-8
PC130-8 23
Trouble (4) Engine coolant temperature monitor lights up white.

• Signals of engine coolant temperature sensor are input to engine controller and then transmitted to
Related infor- machine monitor through communication system.
mation • Engine coolant temperature can be checked with monitoring function.

If monitor lights up white, engine coolant temperature may be low
Insufficient warm-up of
Possible causes (below about 30°C). Warm up engine.
1 machine (when system is
and standard • Lighting up white: Engine coolant temperature is low.
normal)
value in normal • Lighting up blue: Engine coolant temperature is proper.
state If cause 1 is not detected, engine coolant temperature gauge sys-
2 tem may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for E-9 Engine
temperature gauge system
coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally.
Trouble (5) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor lights up white.

• Signals of hydraulic oil temperature sensor are input to pump controller and then transmitted to
Related infor- machine monitor through communication system.
mation • Hydraulic oil temperature can be checked with monitoring function.

If monitor lights up white, hydraulic oil temperature may be low
Insufficient warm-up of
Possible causes (below about 20°C). Warm up engine.
1 machine (when system is
and standard • Lighting up white: Hydraulic oil temperature is low.
normal)
value in normal • Lighting up blue: Hydraulic oil temperature is proper.
state If cause 1 is not detected, hydraulic oil temperature gauge system
2 may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for E-10 Hydraulic oil
24 PC130-8
E-8 Emergency stop item lights up while engine is running 1

Trouble (1) Engine coolant temperature monitor lights up red.
Related machine monitor through communication system.
information • Engine coolant temperature can be checked with monitoring function.

If monitor lights up red, engine coolant temperature may be high
(above about 102°C). Cool down engine coolant (Run engine at
low idle).
Possible causes Overheating of engine cool- • Lighting up red: Engine coolant temperature is high
1 (overheating).
and standard ant (when system is normal)
value in normal • Lighting up blue: Engine coolant temperature is proper.
state Carry out troubleshooting for S-14 Coolant temperature becomes
too high (overheating).
If cause 1 is not detected, engine coolant temperature gauge sys-
2 tem may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for E-9 Engine
temperature gauge system
coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally.
Trouble (2) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor lights up red.

information • Hydraulic oil temperature can be checked with monitoring function.

If monitor lights up red, hydraulic oil temperature may be high
(above about 102°C). Cool down hydraulic oil (Run engine at low
Possible causes Overheating of hydraulic oil
1 idle).
and standard (when system is normal)
• Lighting up red: Hydraulic oil temperature is high (overheating).
value in normal
• Lighting up blue: Hydraulic oil temperature is proper.
state
If cause 1 is not detected, hydraulic oil temperature gauge system
2 may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for E-10 Hydraulic oil
Trouble (3) Engine oil pressure monitor lights up red.

Related • Signals of engine oil pressure switch are input to engine controller and then transmitted to machine
information monitor through communication system.

Possible causes Lowering of engine oil pres-
Engine oil pressure may be low. If it is low, carry out troubleshoot-
and standard 1 sure (when system is nor-
ing for S-12 Oil pressure lowers.
value in normal mal)
state Defective engine oil pressure If cause 1 is not detected, engine oil pressure gauge system may
2
switch system be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA435].
PC130-8 25
E-9 Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally 1

(1) While engine coolant temperature is rising normally, temperature gauge does not rise from white
Trouble range (C).
(2) While engine coolant temperature is stabilized normally, temperature gauge rises to red range (H).

Possible causes If cause 1 is not detected, engine coolant temperature sensor sys-
and standard 1 tem may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for failure codes
temperature sensor system
value in normal [CA144] and [CA145].
state If cause 1 is not detected, machine monitor may be defective.
(3) Display of coolant temperature gauge is different from actual engine coolant temperature.
Trouble (4) Display of engine coolant temperature gauge is different from display of engine coolant tempera-
ture monitor.

shooting.
Engine coolant Coolant temperature Color of monitor light
Possible causes temperature level (a)
and standard 105°C 6
value in normal 1 Defective machine monitor Red
102°C 5
state
100°C 4
85°C 3 Blue
60°C 2
30°C 1 White
Engine coolant temperature gauge and engine

coolant temperature monitor
26 PC130-8
E-10 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not indicate normally 1

(1) While hydraulic oil temperature is rising normally, temperature gauge does not rise from white
Trouble range (C).
(2) While hydraulic oil temperature is stabilized normally, temperature gauge rises to red range (H).

1 perature sensor (Internal dis- P22 (male) Resistance
connection or short circuit) Between (1) – (2) 3.5 – 90 kz
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (29) Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
state Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Between (29) – (46) 3.5 – 90 kz
out.)
PC130-8 27
(3) Display of hydraulic oil temperature gauge is different from actual hydraulic oil temperature.
Trouble (4) Display of hydraulic oil temperature gauge is different from display of hydraulic oil temperature
monitor.

shooting.
Hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil temper- Color of monitor light
Possible causes temperature ature level (a)
and standard 105°C 6
value in normal 1 Defective machine monitor Red
102°C 5
state
100°C 4
85°C 3 Blue
40°C 2
20°C 1 White
Hydraulic oil temperature gauge and hydraulic

oil temperature monitor
28 PC130-8
E-11 Fuel level gauge does not indicate normally 1

(1) While fuel is added, fuel level gauge does not rise from red range (E).
Trouble
(2) While fuel level is low, fuel level gauge does not lower from green range top (F)
Related • Signal voltage of fuel level sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04200 Fuel level sensor voltage)

Defective fuel level sensor
1 (Internal disconnection or P21 (male) Fuel level Resistance
short circuit) Between (1) – FULL 7 – 11 z
chassis ground EMPTY 85 – 95 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (9) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
Possible causes
state circuit) Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (9) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CM01 (female) (9)
Voltage Max. 1 V
5 Defective machine monitor CM01 (female) Fuel level Resistance
Between (9) – FULL 7 – 11 z
chassis ground EMPTY 85 – 95 z
PC130-8 29
(3) Display of fuel level gauge is different from actual fuel level.
Trouble
(4) Display of fuel level gauge is different from display of fuel level monitor.
Related • Signal voltage of fuel level sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04200 Fuel level sensor voltage)

shooting.
Reading of fuel level Color of monitor light
Quantity of fuel
Possible causes gauge (a)
and standard 198 l 6
value in normal 1 Defective machine monitor 148 l 5
state
123 l 4 Blue
84 l 3
66 l 2
36 l 1 Red
Fuel level gauge and fuel level monitor
30 PC130-8
E-12 Contents of display by machine monitor are different from

applicable machine 1
Trouble Contents of display by machine monitor are different from applicable machine.
Related
information

a Turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting (with
Possible causes monitoring function).
and standard 1 Defective model code signal
Monitoring code Normal display
value in normal
state 00200 Controller model code PC120-a
If cause 1 is not detected, machine monitor may be defective.
E-13 Machine monitor does not display some items 1

Trouble • Machine monitor does not display some items.
• The LCD panel sometimes has black points (points which are not lighted) and bright points (points
Related
which do not go off) for the reason of its characteristics. If the number of the bright points and black
information
points does not exceed 10, those points are not a failure or a defect.

a Turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Possible causes
Defective machine monitor When following switches are operated, if all LCD panel is lighted
and standard 1
(LCD panel) up (all surface becomes white), LCD panel is normal.
value in normal
state • Operation of switches: [4] + [F2] (Press simultaneously)
Defective machine monitor If cause 1 is not detected, machine monitor may be defective.
2
(body) (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
E-14 Function switch does not work 1

Trouble • Function switch does not work.
Related • Condition of signal of function switch can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04503 Monitor function switch)

and standard
value in normal Machine monitor may be defective.
state (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
PC130-8 31
E-15 Auto-decelerator does not operate normally 1

(1) When auto-decelerator switch is operated, auto-decelerator monitor does not light up or does not
Trouble
go off.
Related • Condition of signal of auto-decelerator switch can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04504 Monitor 1st, 2nd line switches)

and standard
value in normal Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
state troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
Trouble (2) Auto-decelerator is not operated or reset with lever.

Related • Set speed of auto-decelerator is 1,400 rpm. If fuel control dial is not set above this speed, auto-
information decelerator is not operated or reset.

a Start engine and carry out troubleshooting (with monitoring
function).
Monitoring code Item Normal display
Swing
Boom down When lever is
01900 operated: ON
Boom up
Pressure switch 1 When lever is in
Defective PPC pressure sig- Arm digging neutral: OFF
1
nal Arm dump
Possible causes
and standard Bucket digging When lever is
value in normal 01901 Bucket dump operated: ON
state Pressure switch 2 When lever is in
Service neutral: OFF
If display of monitoring is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting for
E-26 Monitoring function does not display lever control signal nor-
mally.
If cause 1 is not detected, pump controller may be defective.
If cause 1 is not detected, engine controller may be defective.
32 PC130-8
E-16 Working mode does not change 1

Trouble (1) When working mode switch is operated, working mode selection screen is not displayed.
Related • Condition of signal of working mode switch can be checked with monitoring function.

and standard
Trouble (2) When working mode is changed, setting of engine and hydraulic pump is not changed.
Related
information

Possible causes
Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
and standard 1 Defective machine monitor
troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
value in normal
state Pump controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
PC130-8 33
E-17 Travel speed does not change 1

Trouble (1) When travel speed switch is operated, travel speed monitor does not change.
Related • Condition of signal of travel speed switch can be checked with monitoring function.

and standard
Trouble (2) When travel speed is shifted, actual travel speed does not change.
Related
• If cause 1 occurs, actual travel speed does not lower when travel speed is shifted to Lo.
information

Possible causes 1
and standard Voltage Max. 1 V
– V04 (female) (2)
value in normal
state If cause 1 is not detected, machine monitor may be defective.
34 PC130-8
E-18 Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped 1

Trouble • Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped.
Related • Condition of signal of alarm buzzer cancel switch can be checked with monitoring function.

and standard
PC130-8 35
E-19 Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate 1

Trouble (1) When wiper switch is operated, wiper monitor does not light up or go off.
Related • Condition of wiper switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.

and standard
Trouble (2) When wiper switch is operated, wiper does not operate.
Related • Condition of window rear limit switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 02204 Switch input 5)

W03 (male) Front window Resistance
Defective window rear limit
1 When installed to
switch (Internal short circuit) Min. 1 Mz
front
Between (1) – (2)
When retracted to
Max. 1 z
rear
Defective wiper motor (Inter- ing without turning starting switch ON.
2
nal disconnection) M05 (female) Continuity
Between (1) – (3) There is continuity
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Possible causes 3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (119) – M05 (male) (3) tance
and standard nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
state (114) – M05 (male) (1) tance
circuit) CP01 (female) (57) – W03 (female) (1) and Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground tance
CP01 (female) Front window Resistance
Defective pump controller
(Rear limit switch system) When installed to
Min. 1 Mz
Between (57) – front
5 chassis ground When retracted to
Max. 1 z
rear
Defective pump controller ing without turning starting switch ON.
(Wiper motor system) CP02 (female) Continuity
Between (119) – (114) There is continuity
36 PC130-8
PC130-8 37
Trouble (3) When window washer switch is operated, window washer does not operate.
Related • Condition of window washer switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.

and standard
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39
E-20 Power maximizing function does not operate normally 1

(1) When left knob switch is pressed, one-touch power maximizing monitor is not displayed.
Trouble
(2) When left knob switch is pressed, work equipment power is not increased.
• One-touch power maximizing function does not work when working mode is not power mode (P) or
Related infor- economy mode (E).
mation • Condition of left knob switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.

Defective left knob switch S11 (male) Left knob switch Resistance
2
Released Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Pressed Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between F01-9 – S11 Resis-
3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (female) (1) tance
Possible causes nector) Wiring harness between S11 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
and standard CP01 (female) (41) tance
Wiring harness between F01-9 – S11 Resis-
(female) (1) and chassis ground tance
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
CP01 (female) (41) and chassis ground tance
5 Defective pump controller CP01 (female) Left knob switch Resistance
Between (41) – Released Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground Pressed Max. 1 z
Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
40 PC130-8
Trouble (3) When left knob switch is released, work equipment power does not return to normal level.
Related infor- • Condition of left knob switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
mation (Code: 02200 Switch input 1)

Possible causes and carry out troubleshooting.
and standard 1
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
value in normal Voltage Max. 1 V
state (109) – V06 (female) (2)
PC130-8 41
E-21 Swing holding brake does not operate normally 1

Trouble (1) When swing lock switch is operated, swing lock monitor does not light up or go off.
• Condition of swing lock switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Machine monitor system code: 04502 Monitor input 3)
information
(Pump controller system code: 02200 Switch input 1)

Defective swing lock switch ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 (Internal disconnection or S04 (male) Swing lock switch Resistance
short circuit) OFF Min. 1 Mz
Between (5) – (6)
ON Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (5) Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
Possible causes or defective contact in con- – J02 – S04 (female) (5) tance
and standard nector) Wiring harness between S04 (female) (6) – Resis-
3 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between CM02 (female) (5)
circuit) Resis-
– J02 – S04 (female) (5), – CP01 (female) Min. 1 Mz
tance
(19) and chassis ground
4 Defective machine monitor CM02 Swing lock switch Voltage
Between (5) – OFF 20 – 30 V
chassis ground ON Max. 1 V
(2) When swing lock switch is turned ON, swing lock does not operate. (Hydraulic drift of swing occurs
Trouble
on slope.)
Related
information

Defective swing lock switch S04 (male) Swing lock switch Resistance
1
(Internal short circuit)
OFF Max. 1 z
Between (3) – (4)
ON Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes Defective swing holding Swing holding brake
and standard 2 brake release switch (Inter- S25 (male) Resistance
release switch
value in normal nal short circuit)
Lock Min. 1 Mz
state Between (13) – (14)
Release Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between D01 (female) (3) –
Hot short (Short circuit with J02 – S04 (female) (3), – S25 (female) (14) Voltage Max. 1 V
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness and chassis ground
Wiring harness between S04 (female) (4) –
V03 (female) (1), – D03 (female) (3) and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
42 PC130-8
PC130-8 43
E-22 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding 1
• Alarm does not sound during travel.
Trouble
• Alarm does not stop sounding while machine is stopped.
Related
information

ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
1 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (107) – M14 (female) (1) tance
Possible causes nector) Wiring harness between CP02 (female) Resis-
Max. 1 z
and standard (115) (117) (120) – M14 (female) (2) tance
2 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between CP02 (female)
circuit) Resis-
(107) – M14 (female) (1) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
Defective travel alarm (Inter-
3 If causes 1, 2 are not detected, travel alarm is defective.
nal defect)
44 PC130-8
E-23 Air conditioner does not operate normally (including air

conditioner abnormality record) 1
Trouble (1) When air conditioner switch is operated, air conditioner control screen is not displayed.
Related • Condition of air conditioner switch signal can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code: 04505 Monitor 3rd, 4th line switches, 04506 Monitor 5th line switch)

and standard
Trouble (2) When air conditioner switch is operated, air conditioner does not operate at all.
Related
information

If fuse in unit is broken, circuit in unit probably has ground fault.
2 Defective fuse in unit
(See cause 4.)
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between F01-11 – fuse in Resis-
3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- unit – ACW (wiring side) (6) tance
nector) Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(16) – chassis ground (T07) tance
value in normal 4 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between F01-11 – fuse in
state circuit) Resis-
unit – ACW (wiring side) (6), – circuit branch Min. 1 Mz
tance
Defective air conditioner con- ACW (wiring side) Voltage
5
troller Between (6) – (16) 20 – 30 V
If above voltage is normal, air conditioner controller may be defec-
tive.
out.)
PC130-8 45
Trouble (3) Air does not come out (Air flow is insufficient).
Related
information

ing without turning starting switch ON (coil side).
Between (1) – (3) 140 – 340 z
Defective blower relay (Inter-
1
nal disconnection) a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and carry out troubleshooting (contact side).
R20 Air conditioner switch Voltage
Between (4) –
Air blow position 20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Defective power transistor
2 Fan switch If air flow changes according to
(Internal defect)
Operate between Low and operation of fan switch, power
Medium and High. transistor is normal.
Defective blower motor MB (wiring side) Air conditioner switch Voltage
Possible causes 3
and standard (Internal defect) Between (1) – (2) Air blow position 20 – 30 V
value in normal If above voltage is normal and blower motor does not revolve,
state blower motor is defective.
Wiring harness between F01-11 – fuse in Resis-
Max. 1 z
unit – R20 (female) (1) tance
Max. 1 z
ACW (wiring side) (36) tance
Wiring harness between F01-11 – R20 Resis-
Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- (female) (5) tance
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between R20 (female) (4) – Resis-
4 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- MB (wiring side) (1) tance
nector) Wiring harness between MB (wiring side) (2) Resis-
Max. 1 z
– PTR (wiring side) (3) tance
Wiring harness between PTR (wiring side) Resis-
Max. 1 z
(1) – chassis ground (T07) tance
Max. 1 z
(2) – ACW (wiring side) (8) tance
Max. 1 z
46 PC130-8

Min. 1 Mz
ACW (wiring side) (36) and chassis ground tance
Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between R20 (female) (4) – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
5 ness (Short circuit with GND MB (wiring side) (1) and chassis ground tance
Possible causes circuit) Wiring harness between MB (wiring side) (2) Resis-
– PTR (wiring side) (3) and chassis ground tance
value in normal
Wiring harness between PTR (wiring side)
state Resis-
(2) – ACW (wiring side) (8) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
If causes 1 – 5 are not detected, air conditioner controller may be
Defective air conditioner con-
troller
carried out.)
If causes 1 – 5 are not detected, air conditioner system may be
Defective air conditioner sys-
7 defective. See Machine Component Volume of Shop Manual, Air
tem
conditioner, Troubleshooting.
PC130-8 47
Trouble (4) Air is not cooled (Cooling performance is insufficient).

Related
information

ing without turning starting switch ON (coil side).
Between (1) – (3) 140 – 340 z
Defective compressor relay
1
(Internal disconnection) a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and carry out troubleshooting (contact side).
R21 Air conditioner switch Voltage
Between (2) –
Cooling position 20 – 30 V
chassis ground
Internal air sensor may be defective. Carry out troubleshooting for
2 Defective internal air sensor
Abnormality in internal air sensor.
Defective high and low pres- High and low pressure switches may be defective. Carry out trou-
3
sure switches bleshooting for “Abnormality in refrigerant”.
Defective compressor clutch
4 Compressor clutch may be defective. Check it directly.
(Internal defect)
Defective compressor (Inter-
5 Compressor may be defective. Check it directly.
nal defect)
and standard ing without turning starting switch ON.
value in normal
Wiring harness between F01-11 – fuse in Resis-
state Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- unit – R21 (female) (1) tance
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between R21 (female) (3) – Resis-
6 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- ACW (wiring side) (35) tance
nector) Wiring harness between F01-11 – R21 Resis-
Max. 1 z
(female) (4) tance
Max. 1 z
M34 (female) (1) tance
ACW (wiring side) (35) and chassis ground tance
circuit)
Min. 1 Mz
M34 (female) (1) and chassis ground tance
troller
carried out.)
If causes 1 – 7 are not detected, air conditioner system may be
Defective air conditioner sys-
9 defective. See Machine Component Volume of Shop Manual, Air
tem
conditioner, Troubleshooting.
48 PC130-8
(5) Air conditioner abnormality record: Communication condition “CAN disconnection”, Communica-
Trouble
tion condition “Abnormal”
• While abnormality in communication is being detected, “CAN disconnection” is displayed.
• If abnormality in communication has been detected and reset, “Abnormality” is displayed.
Related
• If “CAN disconnection” is displayed as communication condition, communication cannot be carried
information
out normally. Accordingly, condition of other items is not displayed.
• Method of reproducing abnormality record: Turn starting switch ON.

ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between N10 (female) (1) – Resis-
1 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- CM02 (female) (8), (9) tance
nector) Wiring harness between N10 (female) (2) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
CM02 (female) (10) tance
Wiring harness between N10 (female) (1) –
CM02 (female) (8), (9), – CP01 (female) Resis-
(45), – CE02 (female) (1), – K02 (female) tance
(A), – N08 (male) (3) and chassis ground
circuit)
CM02 (female) (10), – CP01 (female) (64), – Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
CE02 (female) (21), – K02 (female) (B), – tance
N08 (male) (10) and chassis ground
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state N10 (female) (1) – CM02 (female) (8), (9), –
CP01 (female) (45), – CE02 (female) (1), –
Voltage Max. 5.5 V
Hot short (Short circuit with K02 (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3) and
3
CM02 (female) (10), – CP01 (female) (64), –
Voltage Max. 5.5 V
CE02 (female) (21), – K02 (female) (B), –
N08 (male) (10) and chassis ground
Between (A) – (B) 47 – 67 z
troller
carried out.)
out.)
PC130-8 49
Trouble (6) Air conditioner abnormality record: Setting condition “Abnormality”

• If setting of air conditioner controller model is different from setting of machine monitor model,
“Abnormality” is displayed.
Related
information
out normally. Accordingly, this condition is not displayed.
• Method of reproducing abnormality record: Turn starting switch ON.

Possible causes
Defective air conditioner con- Air conditioner controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in
and standard 1
troller system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
value in normal
state Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system,
Trouble (7) Air conditioner abnormality record: Internal air sensor “Abnormality”
Related out normally. Accordingly, this condition is not displayed.
information • Method of reproducing abnormality record: Turn starting switch ON + Turn air conditioner (A/C)
switch ON.

Defective internal air sensor ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 (Internal disconnection or
THI (device side) Resistance
short circuit)
Between (1) – (2) 300 z – 430 kz
ness (Disconnection in wiring Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side) Resis-
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (11) – THI (wiring side) (2) tance
(27) – THI (wiring side) (1) tance
and standard
value in normal
state
3 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
circuit) Resis-
(11) – THI (wiring side) (2) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
(11) – THI (wiring side) (2) and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
ground
troller
carried out.)
50 PC130-8
Trouble (8) Air conditioner abnormality record: External air sensor “Unused”
• External air sensor is not used in air conditioner system of this machine.
Related
information
out normally. Accordingly, this condition is not displayed.

and standard
value in normal Since external air sensor is not used in air conditioner system of
1 Normal display
state this machine, above display is normal.
Trouble (9) Air conditioner abnormality record: Air flow sensor “Abnormality”
switch ON.

Defective air flow sensor ing without turning starting switch ON.
1 (Internal disconnection or
THF (device side) Resistance
short circuit)
Between (1) – (2) 100 z – 115 kz
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (12) – THF (wiring side) (2) tance
and standard (27) – THF (wiring side) (1) tance
3 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
circuit) Resis-
(12) – THF (wiring side) (2) and chassis Min. 1 Mz
tance
ground
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
Voltage Max. 1 V
(12) – THF (wiring side) (2)
troller
carried out.)
PC130-8 51
Trouble (10) Air conditioner abnormality record: Daylight sensor “Abnormality”

switch ON.

Defective daylight sensor
1 Daylight sensor may be defective.
(Internal defect)
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (36) – P31 (female) (1) tance
Max. 1 z
(15) – P31 (female) (2) tance
Possible causes Ground fault in wiring har- Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
and standard Resis-
3 ness (Short circuit with GND (3) – P31 (female) (1), – circuit branch end Min. 1 Mz
value in normal tance
circuit) and chassis ground
state
Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side) Resis-
Min. 1 Mz
(15) – P31 (female) (2) and chassis ground tance
Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
4 (3) – P31 (female) (1), – circuit branch end Voltage Max. 1 V
24V circuit) in wiring harness
and chassis ground
Wiring harness between ACW (wiring side)
Voltage Max. 1 V
(15) – P31 (female) (2) and chassis ground
troller
carried out.)
52 PC130-8
Trouble (11) Air conditioner abnormality record: Air outlet damper “Abnormality”
switch ON.

Defective air outlet servo-
1 Air outlet servomotor may be defective.
motor (Internal defect)
Wiring harness between MV1 (wiring side) Resis-
Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between MV1 (wiring side) Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring (3) – ACW (wiring side) (27) tance
2
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between MV1 (wiring side) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MV1 (wiring side)
Resis-
(1) – ACW (wiring side) (3), – circuit branch Min. 1 Mz
tance
Possible causes Ground fault in wiring har- Resis-
and standard 3 ness (Short circuit with GND tance
ground
value in normal circuit)
state Wiring harness between MV1 (wiring side)
Resis-
tance
ground
Resis-
tance
ground
(1) – ACW (wiring side) (3), – circuit branch Voltage Max. 1 V
Hot short (Short circuit with (5) – ACW (wiring side) (9) and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness ground
(6) – ACW (wiring side) (24) and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
ground
ground
troller
carried out.)
PC130-8 53
Trouble (12) Air conditioner abnormality record: A/M damper “Abnormality”

switch ON.

Defective air mix servomotor
1 Air mix servomotor may be defective.
(Internal defect)
Wiring harness between MAM (wiring side) Resis-
Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between MAM (wiring side) Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring (3) – ACW (wiring side) (3) tance
2
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between MAM (wiring side) Resis-
nector) Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MAM (wiring side)
Resis-
(3) – ACW (wiring side) (3), – circuit branch Min. 1 Mz
tance
Possible causes Ground fault in wiring har- Resis-
and standard 3 ness (Short circuit with GND tance
ground
value in normal circuit)
state Wiring harness between MAM (wiring side)
Resis-
tance
ground
Resis-
tance
ground
(3) – ACW (wiring side) (3), – circuit branch Voltage Max. 1 V
Hot short (Short circuit with (5) – ACW (wiring side) (2) and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
4
24V circuit) in wiring harness ground
ground
ground
troller
carried out.)
54 PC130-8
Trouble (13) Air conditioner abnormality record: Refrigerant “Abnormality”

switch ON.

Insufficient refrigerant (gas)
1 Refrigerant (gas) may be insufficient. Check it directly.
(when system is normal)
Defective high and low pres- ing without turning starting switch ON.
2 sure switches (Internal dis-
P17 (male) Resistance
connection)
Possible causes Between (1) – (2) Max. 1 z
value in normal ing without turning starting switch ON.
state Disconnection in wiring har-
3 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- (4) – P17 (female) (1) tance
Max. 1 z
troller
carried out.)
PC130-8 55
56 PC130-8
E-24 While starting switch is in OFF position, service meter is not displayed1
Trouble • When starting switch is turned OFF, service meter is not displayed.
• While starting switch is at OFF position, if following switches are operated, service meter is dis-
Related
played at top center of screen.
information
Operation of switches: [4] + [1] (Press simultaneously)

When starting switch is turned ON, if machine monitor displays
Possible causes
Defective backup power sup- nothing, backup power supply system may be defective. In this
and standard 1
ply system case, carry out troubleshooting for “E-1 When starting switch
value in normal
turned ON, machine monitor displays nothing”.
state
E-25 Machine monitor cannot be set in service mode 1

Trouble • Machine monitor cannot be set in service mode.
Related • If following switches are operated, machine monitor is set in service mode.
information Operation of switches: [4] + [1] o [2] o [3] (While pressing [4], press other switches in order)

and standard
PC130-8 57
E-26 Monitoring function does not display lever control signal normally 1
Trouble (1) Boom raise operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.
Related
• Monitoring code: 01900 Pressure switch 1
information

Defective boom raise PPC Right work equip-
1 pressure switch (Internal dis- P06 (male) Resistance
ment control lever
connection or short circuit)
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Boom raise Max. 1 z
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
state 3 ness (Short circuit with GND
Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Right work equip-
ment control lever
Between (53) – chas- Neutral Min. 1 Mz
sis ground Boom raise Max. 1 z
58 PC130-8
PC130-8 59
Trouble (2) Boom lower operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.
Related
information

Defective boom lower PPC Right work equip-
ment control lever
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Boom lower Max. 1 z
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Right work equip-
ment control lever
sis ground Boom lower Max. 1 z
60 PC130-8
PC130-8 61
Trouble (3) Arm curl operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.
Related
information

Defective arm curl PPC pres- Left work equipment
1 sure switch (Internal discon- P04 (male) Resistance
control lever
nection or short circuit)
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Arm curl Max. 1 z
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Left work equipment
control lever
sis ground Arm curl Max. 1 z
62 PC130-8
PC130-8 63
Trouble (4) Arm out operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.
Related
information

Defective arm out PPC pres- Left work equipment
1 sure switch (Internal discon- P08 (male) Resistance
control lever
nection or short circuit)
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Arm out Max. 1 z
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Left work equipment
control lever
Between (15) – Neutral Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground Arm out Max. 1 z
64 PC130-8
PC130-8 65
Trouble (5) Bucket curl operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.
Related
information

Defective bucket curl PPC Right work equip-
ment control lever
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Bucket curl Max. 1 z
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Right work equip-
ment control lever
sis ground Bucket curl Max. 1 z
66 PC130-8
PC130-8 67
Trouble (6) Bucket dump operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.
Related
information

Defective bucket dump PPC Right work equip-
ment control lever
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Bucket dump Max. 1 z
2 Max. 1 z
and standard
Min. 1 Mz
4
Voltage Max. 1 V
Right work equip-
ment control lever
sis ground Bucket dump Max. 1 z
68 PC130-8
PC130-8 69
Trouble (7) Swing operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.

Related
information

Defective swing PPC pres- P03 (male) Left work equipment
Resistance
1 sure switch (Internal discon- P07 (male) control lever
nection or short circuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2) Swing left
Max. 1 z
Swing right
2 Max. 1 z
or defective contact in con- – P03 (female) (2) or P07 (female) (2) tance
nector) Wiring harness between P03 (female) (1) or Resis-
Max. 1 z
P07 (female) (1) – chassis ground (T10) tance
Possible causes
value in normal Ground fault in wiring har- ing without turning starting switch ON.
state 3 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (16)
circuit) Resis-
– P03 (female) (2) or P07 (female) (2) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
chassis ground
4
– P03 (female) (2) or P07 (female) (2) and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
Left work equipment
5 Defective pump controller control lever
Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (16) – chas-
Swing left
sis ground Max. 1 z
Swing right
70 PC130-8
PC130-8 71
Trouble (8) Service operation is not displayed normally by monitoring function.

Related
information

Defective service front PPC
1 pressure switch (Internal dis- P14 (male) Service pedal Resistance
connection or short circuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Forward Max. 1 z
Defective service rear PPC
2 pressure switch (Internal dis- P15 (male) Service pedal Resistance
connection or short circuit) Neutral Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) – (2)
Reverse Max. 1 z
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (52) Resis-
Max. 1 z
ness (Disconnection in wiring – P14 (female) (2), – P15 (female) (2) tance
Possible causes 3
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between P14 (female) (1) – Resis-
and standard nector) Max. 1 z
value in normal
state Wiring harness between P15 (female) (1) – Resis-
Max. 1 z
4 ness (Short circuit with GND Wiring harness between CP01 (female) (52)
circuit) Resis-
– P14 (female) (2), – P15 (female) (2) and Min. 1 Mz
tance
chassis ground
5
– P14 (female) (2), – P15 (female) (2) and Voltage Max. 1 V
chassis ground
6 Defective pump controller CP01 (female) Service pedal Resistance
Between (52) – Neutral Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground Forward or reverse Max. 1 z
72 PC130-8
PC130-8 73
E-27 KOMTRAX system does not operate normally 1

Trouble • KOMTRAX system does not operate normally.
• If KOMTRAX system administrator makes request for checking system on machine side for trouble,
Related carry out following troubleshooting.
information • Even if KOMTRAX system has trouble, it does not particularly appear on machine.
• Carry out all troubleshooting on service menu screen of machine monitor.

a Turn starting switch ON and check “Terminal status” screen.
1 Defective communication 1 Check item Normal display
KOMTRAX communication Open
a Turn starting switch ON and check “GPS & Communication
Status” screen.
Check item Normal display
N ###,##,## (Latitude)
2 Defective GPS
Positioning E ###,##,## (Longitude)
In positioning
Possible causes If latitude and longitude are not displayed in 5 minutes on open
and standard ground, notify KOMTRAX service hot line.
value in normal a Turn starting switch ON and check “GPS & Communication
state Status” screen.
Defective communication Satellite in View –

3 Communication
environment No Satellite in View
If Communication Status does not display “Satellite in View” for 15
minutes when the machine stays outdoor where can view sky,
check if connector of TH300 or antenna on top of the cab are prop-
erly connected.
a Turn starting switch ON and check “GPS & Communication
Status” screen.
4 Defective communication 2
Number of message not yet sent 0 – 60 (Normally 0)
a Select “Terminal Status” from “12 Display of a Select “GPS & Communication Status” from
KOMTRAX setting” in the service menu of the “12 Display of KOMTRAX setting” in the ser-
machine monitor. vice menu of the machine monitor.
74 PC130-8
PC130-8 75

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
76 PC130-8
SEN04124-00
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Troubleshooting of hydraulic and
mechanical system (H-mode)
Information contained in troubleshooting table ............................................................................................... 3
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems ...................................................................................... 4
H-1 Speed or power of all work equipment, swing, and travel are low ........................................................... 6
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls............................................................................................ 7
H-3 No work equipment, travel and swing move ............................................................................................ 8
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump............................................................................. 8
H-5 Fine control mode does not function ........................................................................................................ 9
H-6 Speed or power of boom is low .............................................................................................................. 10
H-7 Speed or power of arm is low..................................................................................................................11
H-8 Speed or power of bucket is low ............................................................................................................ 12
H-9 Work equipment does not move in its single operation.......................................................................... 13
H-10 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large ............................................................................................ 14
H-11 Time lag of work equipment is large..................................................................................................... 15
H-12 Power maximizing function does not operate normally........................................................................ 15
PC130-8 1
H-13 Work equipment loaded more is slower during compound operation .................................................. 16
H-14 Boom RAISE speed is low in compound operation of swing + boom RAISE....................................... 16
H-15 Travel speed lowers largely during compound operation of work equipment/swing + travel ............... 17
H-16 Machine deviates during travel............................................................................................................. 18
H-17 Travel speed is low............................................................................................................................... 19
H-18 Machine cannot be steered easily or steering power is low ................................................................. 20
H-19 Travel speed does not change or it is kept low or high ........................................................................ 21
H-20 Track does not move (Only either side)................................................................................................ 21
H-21 Machine does not swing....................................................................................................................... 22
H-22 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low ............................................................................................ 23
H-23 Excessive overrun when stopping swing.............................................................................................. 24
H-24 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large shock ............................................................... 25
H-25 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large sound ............................................................... 25
H-26 Hydraulic drift of swing is large............................................................................................................. 26
H-27 Flow rate in attachment circuit cannot be adjusted .............................................................................. 27
2 PC130-8
Information contained in troubleshooting table 1

a Troubleshooting table collectively carry the following information. Carry out troubleshooting work after
fully grasping their contents.
Trouble Phenomena occurring on machine
Related
Information on occurred failures and troubleshooting
information
2
Possible causes Cause for presumed
and standard failure <Contents>
value in normal (The attached No. for • The standard values in normalcy by which to judge "good"
3
state filing and reference or "no good" about presumed causes.
purpose only. It does not • References for making judgement of "good" or "no good"
stand for any priority)
4
PC130-8 3
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems 1
4 PC130-8
a This is a system chart that has been drawn up by simplifying the whole hydraulic circuit chart. Use it as
a reference material when troubleshooting the hydraulic and mechanical systems.
PC130-8 5
H-1 Speed or power of all work equipment, swing, and travel are low 1
Trouble • Speed or power of all work equipment, swing, and travel are low.
Related
• Conduct the troubleshooting in working mode P.
information

a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
1 Malfunction of unload valve Control levers Unload pressure
2.8 ± 1.0 MPa
All levers in NEUTRAL
{28 ± 10 kg/cm2}
Control lever Main relief pressure
Defective adjustment or +2.0
2 operation of main relief valve 34.8 –1.0 MPa
Arm relieved in IN direction +20
{355 –10 kg/cm }
2
(power-up mode)
If the oil pressure cannot be set normally by adjustment, the main
relief valve may be malfunction or may have an internal defect.
Check the main relief valve directly.
Malfunction of self-pressure
3 Control levers Control circuit basic pressure
reducing valve
3.2 ± 0.5 MPa
{33 ± 5 kg/cm2}
Possible causes running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
and standard
value in normal Measured oil Measurement
Oil pressure ratio
state pressure conditions
Pump discharge
Defective adjustment or Swing lock: ON 1
4 pressure
operation of PC valve Arm: Relieved in IN
PC valve output direction Approx. 0.6
If the oil pressure cannot be set normally by adjustment, the PC
valve may be malfunction or may have an internal defect. Check
the PC valve directly.
Oil pressure ratio
Measured oil
pressure All levers in Bucket curled
NEUTRAL (Lever at stroke end)
Pump discharge
1
Defective adjustment or pressure Almost same
5
operation of LS valve LS valve output pressure Approx. 0.6
If the oil pressure cannot be set normally by adjustment, the LS
the LS valve directly.
6 Malfunction of servo piston The servo piston may have malfunction. Check it directly.
If there is none of the causes listed above, the piston pump may
7 Piston pump defective have problems of lowering of performance, malfunction, internal
defect, etc.
6 PC130-8
H-2 Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls 1

Trouble • Engine speed sharply drops or the engine stalls.
Related
information

Control lever Main relief pressure
Defective adjustment or +2.0
1 operation of main relief valve 34.8 –1.0 MPa
Arm relieved in IN direction
+20
(power-up mode) {355 –10 kg/cm }
2
If the oil pressure cannot be set normally by adjustment, the main

relief valve may be malfunction or may have an internal defect.
Check the main relief valve directly.
Measured oil Measurement
Oil pressure ratio
pressure conditions
Pump discharge
Defective adjustment or Swing lock: ON 1
2 pressure
Possible causes operation of PC valve Arm: Relieved in IN
and standard PC valve output direction Approx. 0.6
value in normal pressure (Approx. 3/5)
state If the oil pressure cannot be set normally by adjustment, the PC
the PC valve directly.
Oil pressure ratio
Measured oil
pressure All levers in Bucket curled
NEUTRAL (Lever at stroke end)
Pump discharge
1
Defective adjustment or pressure Almost same
3
operation of LS valve LS valve output pressure Approx. 0.6
If the oil pressure cannot be set normally by adjustment, the LS
the LS valve directly.
Orifice or filter in servo The orifice or filter in the pump servo equipment is suspected of
4
equipment clogged clogging. Check the equipment itself.
5 Malfunction of servo piston The servo piston may have malfunction. Check it directly.
PC130-8 7
H-3 No work equipment, travel and swing move 1

Trouble • No work equipment, travel and swing move.
Related
• Set the working mode at P mode for the troubleshooting.
information

a Stop engine for preparations. Start troubleshooting at engine
high idle.
Work equipment lock lever Solenoid output pressure
Malfunction of PPC lock
1 0 MPa
solenoid valve Locked
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Released
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Possible causes
and standard a Stop engine for preparations. Start troubleshooting at engine
value in normal high idle.
Malfunction of self reducing
state 2 Control lever Control circuit source pressure
pressure valve
All control levers in 3.2 ± 0.5 MPa
NEUTRAL position {33 ± 5 kg/cm2}
The piston pump is suspected of malfunction or an internal failure.
Diagnose it in the following manner.
3 Piston pump defective
• Remove the main oil pressure measurement plug and crank the
engine. If oil flows out, it is in normal condition.
It is presumed that the pump shaft does not rotate due to some
4 Damper defective
internal failure of the dumper. Check the damper itself.
H-4 Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump 1

Trouble • An abnormal noise is heard from around the hydraulic pump.
Related
—
information

1 Hydraulic oil level lowered Make a visual check.
2 Quality of hydraulic oil bad Air may have get mixed with the oil. Make a visual check.
Possible causes It is presumed that the breather in the cap of hydraulic tanks is
Hydraulic tank cap breather
and standard 3 clogged, thereby causing negative pressure inside the tank. Make
clogged
value in normal a visual check.
state It is presumed that the strainer in the hydraulic tank is clogged,
Hydraulic tank strainer
4 thereby causing negative pressure in the suction circuit. Make a
clogged
visual check.
The piston pump is suspected of an internal failure. Check the
5 Piston pump defective
pump itself.
8 PC130-8
H-5 Fine control mode does not function 1

Trouble • Fine control mode does not function.
Related
information

The orifice in the LS circuit is presumed to be clogged. Check the
1 Orifice in LS circuit clogged
orifice itself.
high idle.
Oil pressure ratio
Oil pressure to be At bucket CURL
measured All control levers in
Possible causes (Control lever full
NEUTRAL
and standard stroke)
value in normal Defective adjustment or mal-
2 Pump delivery
state function of LS valve 1
pressure Nearly equal oil
LS valve output pressure Approx. 0.6
If the oil pressure does not return to normalcy even after the adjust-
ment, malfunction of the LS valve or its internal failure is sus-
pected. In that case, check the valve itself.
Malfunction of the servo piston is suspected. Check the piston
3 Malfunction of servo piston
itself.
PC130-8 9
H-6 Speed or power of boom is low 1

Trouble • Speed or power of boom is low.
Related
information

Right work equipment control
Malfunction of right PPC PPC valve output pressure
1 lever
valve (boom circuit)
NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Boom RAISE position Above 2.7 MPa
Boom LOWER position {Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of pump merge- Control levers Solenoid output pressure
2
divider solenoid valve All levers in NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Position for travel only 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
(On either or both sides) {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of pump merge- The pump merge-divider valve of the control valve may have a
3
divider valve malfunction. Check it directly.
Possible causes The spool of the boom control valve may have a malfunction.
Malfunction of boom control
and standard 4 Check it directly (Including stroke limiting mechanism on RAISE
valve (spool)
value in normal side).
state Malfunction of boom control
The pressure compensation valve of the boom control valve may
5 valve (pressure compensa-
have a malfunction. Check it directly.
tion valve)
Malfunction of boom control The lock valve of the boom control valve may have a malfunction.
6
valve (lock valve) Check it directly.
Malfunction or defective The safety-suction valve of the boom control valve (on the head
7 sealing of boom control valve side) may have a malfunction or its sealing may be defective.
(safety-suction valve) Check it directly.
Malfunction or defective The suction valve of the boom control valve (on the bottom side)
8 sealing of boom control valve may have a malfunction or its sealing may be defective. Check it
(suction valve) directly.
Malfunction or defective
The centralized safety-suction valve of the control valve may have
9 sealing of centralized safety-
a malfunction or its sealing may be defective. Check it directly.
suction valve
10 Boom cylinder defective
Boom cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in RAISE direction 15 cc/min
10 PC130-8
H-7 Speed or power of arm is low 1

Trouble • Speed or power of arm is low.
Related
information

Left work equipment control
Malfunction of left PPC valve PPC valve output pressure
1 lever
(arm circuit)
Arm IN position Above 2.7 MPa
Arm OUT position {Above 28 kg/cm2}
2
Possible causes Malfunction of pump merge- The pump merge-divider valve of the control valve may have a
and standard 3
divider valve malfunction. Check it directly.
value in normal
The spool of the arm control valve may have a malfunction. Check
state Malfunction of arm control
4 it directly (Including stroke limiting mechanisms on IN side and
valve (spool)
OUT side).
Malfunction of arm control
The pressure compensation valve of the arm control valve may
tion valve)
Malfunction or defective The safety-suction valves of the arm control valve (on the bottom
6 sealing of arm control valve side and head side) may have a malfunction or their sealing may
(safety-suction valves) be defective. Check them directly.
suction valve
8 Arm cylinder defective
Arm cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in IN direction 15 cc/min
PC130-8 11
H-8 Speed or power of bucket is low 1

Trouble • Speed or power of bucket is low.
Related
information

Malfunction of right PPC PPC valve output pressure
1 lever
valve (bucket circuit)
Bucket CURL position Above 2.7 MPa
Bucket DUMP position {Above 28 kg/cm2}
2
Possible causes
and standard Malfunction of pump merge- The pump merge-divider valve of the control valve may have a
3
value in normal divider valve malfunction. Check it directly.
state Malfunction of bucket control The spool of the bucket control valve may have a malfunction.
4
valve (spool) Check it directly.
Malfunction of bucket control
The pressure compensation valve of the bucket control valve may
tion valve)
Malfunction or defective The safety-suction valves of the bucket control valve (on the bot-
6 sealing of bucket control tom side and head side) may have a malfunction or their sealing
valve (safety-suction valves) may be defective. Check them directly.
suction valve
8 Bucket cylinder defective
Bucket cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in CURL direction 15 cc/min
12 PC130-8
H-9 Work equipment does not move in its single operation 1

(1) The boom does not move when operated indepen-
dently.
• Work equipment does not move in its sin- (2) The arm does not move when operated indepen-
Trouble
gle operation dently.
(3) The bucket does not move when operated inde-
pendently.
Related
information

high idle.
Possible causes Work equipment control lever PPC valve output pressure
and standard 1 Malfunction of PPC valve
value in normal NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
state Above 2.7 MPa
Operation
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of work equip- The spool in the work equipment control valve is presumed to mal-
2
ment control valve (spool) function. Check the valve itself.
PC130-8 13
H-10 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large 1

Trouble • Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large. (1) Hydraulic drift of boom is large.
Related
information

Possible causes 1 Boom cylinder defective
Boom cylinder Leakage from cylinder
and standard
value in normal Relieved in RAISE direction 15 cc/min
state Defective sealing of boom Sealing of the lock valve of the boom control valve may be defec-
2
control valve (lock valve) tive. Check it directly.
Defective sealing of central- Sealing of the centralized safety-suction valve of the control valve
3
ized safety-suction valve may be defective. Check it directly.
Trouble • Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large. (2) Hydraulic drift of arm is large.
Related
information

1 Arm cylinder defective
Arm cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Possible causes
Relieved in IN direction 15 cc/min
and standard
value in normal Defective sealing of arm con- Sealing of the spool of the arm control valve may be defective.
2
state trol valve (spool) Check it directly.
Defective sealing of arm con- Sealing of the suction valve of the arm control valve (on the bottom
3
trol valve (suction valve) side) may be defective. Check it directly.
4
Trouble • Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large. (3) Hydraulic drift of bucket is large.
Related
information

1 Bucket cylinder defective
Bucket cylinder Leakage from cylinder
Possible causes
Relieved in CURL direction 15 cc/min
and standard
value in normal Defective sealing of bucket Sealing of the spool of the bucket control valve may be defective.
2
state control valve (spool) Check it directly.
Defective sealing of bucket Sealing of the suction valve of the bucket control valve (on the bot-
3
control valve (suction valve) tom side) may be defective. Check it directly.
4
14 PC130-8
H-11 Time lag of work equipment is large 1

Trouble • Time lag of work equipment is large.
Related
information

Possible causes Malfunction of control valve
The regeneration valve of the control valve may have a malfunc-
and standard 1 (regeneration valve) [Boom
tion. Check it directly.
value in normal and arm]
state Malfunction of control valve The suction valve of the control valve (on the head side) may have
2
(suction valve) a malfunction. Check it directly.
H-12 Power maximizing function does not operate normally 1

Trouble • Power maximizing function does not operate normally.
Related
• Carry out all troubleshooting in power mode (P) of working mode.
information

a Prepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idle and
2-stage relief solenoid valve
Possible causes Swing lock switch
Malfunction of 2-stage relief output pressure
and standard 1
solenoid valve 0 MPa
value in normal OFF
state {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
ON
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of main relief
2 Main relief valve may have malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
PC130-8 15
H-13 Work equipment loaded more is slower during compound

operation 1
Trouble • Work equipment loaded more is slower during compound operation.
Related
—
information

The pressure compensation valve of the work equipment loaded
less may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
Compound operation More loaded side Less loaded side
Boom RAISE +
Boom Arm
Possible causes Arm IN
and standard Malfunction of pressure com- Boom RAISE +
value in normal Arm Boom
1 pensation valve of work Arm OUT
state equipment loaded less Boom RAISE +
Boom Bucket
Bucket CURL
Arm IN +
Arm Bucket
Bucket CURL
Boom LOWER +
Arm Boom
Arm OUT
H-14 Boom RAISE speed is low in compound operation of swing +

boom RAISE 1
Trouble • Boom RAISE speed is low in compound operation of swing + boom RAISE.
Related • If the speed of single operation of the boom RAISE speed is slow, conduct troubleshooting for H-6
information first.

and standard
value in normal Malfunction or defective The LS selector valve of the control valve may have a malfunction
1
state sealing of LS selector valve or its sealing may be defective. Check it directly.
16 PC130-8
H-15 Travel speed lowers largely during compound operation of work

equipment/swing + travel 1
Trouble • Travel speed lowers largely during compound operation of work equipment/swing + travel.
Related
information

1
Possible causes Malfunction of pump merge- The pump merge-divider valve may have a malfunction. Check it
and standard 2
divider valve directly.
value in normal
Malfunction of work equip-
state The pressure compensation valve of the work equipment control
3 ment control valve (pressure
valve may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
compensation valve)
Malfunction of swing control
The pressure compensation valve of the swing control valve may
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control
The pressure compensation valve of the travel control valve may
tion valve)
PC130-8 17
H-16 Machine deviates during travel 1

Trouble • Machine deviates during travel.
Related
information

reducing valve
3.2 ± 0.5 MPa
{33 ± 5 kg/cm2}
Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of travel PPC
2 Above 2.7 MPa
valve Forward or reverse position
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Difference in above output Below 0.4 MPa
between both sides {Below 4 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of pump merge- Travel lever Solenoid valve output pressure
3
divider valve All levers in NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Possible causes Malfunction of travel junction Travel lever Solenoid valve output pressure
and standard 4
solenoid valve All levers in NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
value in normal
Position for travel only on 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
state
either side {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
2.8 ± 1.0 MPa
{28 ± 10 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of pump merge- The pump merge-divider valve may have a malfunction. Check it
6
Malfunction of travel junction
7 The travel junction valve may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
Malfunction of travel control The spool of the travel control lever may have a malfunction.
8
lever (spool) Check it directly.
9 Travel motor defective
Travel lever Leakage from travel motor
Travel circuit relieved Below 1.7 l/min
The final drive may have a defect in it. Check it directly. (It may be
10 Final drive defective checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating, metal chips in
drain oil, etc.)
Defective adjustment of
Adjust travel deviation adjustment plug. For details, see Testing
11 travel deviation adjustment
and adjusting, "Testing and adjusting travel deviation".
plug
18 PC130-8
H-17 Travel speed is low 1

Trouble • Travel speed is low.
Related
information

reducing valve
3.2 ± 0.5 MPa
{33 ± 5 kg/cm2}
Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
Malfunction of travel PPC
2 Above 2.7 MPa
valve Forward or reverse position
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Difference in above output Below 0.4 MPa
between both sides {Below 4 kg/cm2}
3
Possible causes (On either or both sides) {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
and standard a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
value in normal running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
state
2.8 ± 1.0 MPa
{28 ± 10 kg/cm2}
5
6
The pressure compensation valve of the travel control lever may
7 lever (pressure compensa-
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control The suction valve of the travel control lever may have a malfunc-
8
lever (suction valve) tion. Check it directly.
drain oil, etc.)
PC130-8 19
H-18 Machine cannot be steered easily or steering power is low 1

Trouble • Machine cannot be steered easily or steering power is low.
Related
information

Malfunction of travel PPC Travel lever PPC valve output pressure
1
valve In NEUTRAL on both sides 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Above 2.7 MPa
Operated on either side
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
2
Malfunction of travel junction Travel lever Solenoid valve output pressure
3
solenoid valve All levers in NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Possible causes
Position for travel only on 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
and standard
either side {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
value in normal
state Malfunction of hydraulic The check valve of the hydraulic pump may have a malfunction or
4
pump (check valve) its sealing may be defective. Check it directly.
Malfunction of hydraulic The shuttle valve of the hydraulic pump may have a malfunction or
5
pump (shuttle valve) its sealing may be defective. Check it directly.
6
Malfunction of travel junction
7 The travel junction valve may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
valve
8
The pressure compensation valve of the travel control lever may
9 lever (pressure compensa-
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control The suction valve of the travel control lever may have a malfunc-
10
lever (suction valve) tion. Check it directly.
The safety and check valve of the travel motor may have a mal-
Malfunction of travel motor function. Check it directly. (It may be checked by exchanging the
11
(safety and check valve) front and rear motors or the right and left motors and checking
change of the phenomenon.)
20 PC130-8
H-19 Travel speed does not change or it is kept low or high 1

Trouble • Travel speed does not change or it is kept low or high.
Related
information

Possible causes Solenoid valve output
Malfunction of travel speed Travel speed Travel lever
and standard 1 pressure
selector solenoid valve
value in normal Lo In NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
state
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Hi Operated
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel motor The speed-changer unit of the travel motor may have a malfunc-
2
(speed-changer unit) tion. Check it directly.
H-20 Track does not move (Only either side) 1

Trouble • Track does not move (only either side).
Related
information

Defective seat of travel con- The suction valve seat of the travel control lever may be defective.
1
trol valve (suction valve) Check it directly.
Defective seat of travel con-
The safety and check valve seat of the travel control lever may be
2 trol valve (safety and check
defective. Check it directly.
valve)
Possible causes Malfunction of travel motor The counterbalance valve of the travel motor may have a malfunc-
and standard 3
(counterbalance valve) tion. Check it directly.
value in normal
state a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
drain oil, etc.)
PC130-8 21
H-21 Machine does not swing 1

Trouble • Machine does not swing. (1) Machine does not swing in either direction.
Related
information

Malfunction of swing holding Solenoid valve output pressure
1 lever
brake solenoid valve
In NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Operated for swing
Possible causes {29 – 35 kg/cm2}
and standard Malfunction of swing motor The holding brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction.
value in normal 2
(holding brake) Check it directly.
state
3 Swing motor defective Left work equipment control
Leakage from swing motor
lever
Swing circuit relieved Below 6 l/min
The swing machinery may have a defect in it. Check it directly. (It
4 Swing machinery defective may be checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating, metal
chips in drain oil, etc.)
Trouble • Machine does not swing. (2) Machine does not swing in only one direction.
Related
information

Malfunction of swing PPC PPC valve output pressure
1 lever
valve
Above 2.7 MPa
Operated for swing
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Possible causes
and standard Malfunction of swing control The spool of the swing control valve may have a malfunction.
2
value in normal valve (spool) Check it directly.
Defective adjustment or mal- Left work equipment Swing relief pressure
Swing lock switch
3 function of swing motor control lever (Pump pressure)
(safety valve) Swing circuits
29.2 ± 1.5 MPa
ON relieved (separately
{298 ± 15 kg/cm2}
on both sides)
Defective sealing of swing Sealing of the suction valve of the swing motor may be defective.
4
motor (suction valve) Check it directly.
22 PC130-8
H-22 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low 1

(1) Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in both
Trouble • Swing acceleration or swing speed is low.
directions.
Related
information

Malfunction of swing control
The pressure compensation valve of the swing control valve may
tion valve)
Malfunction of swing motor The holding brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction.
2
Possible causes (holding brake) Check it directly.
and standard a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
value in normal running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
state 3 Swing motor defective Left work equipment control
Leakage from swing motor
lever
(2) Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in only

Trouble • Swing acceleration or swing speed is low.
one direction.
Related
information

1 lever
valve
Above 2.7 MPa
Operated for swing
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing control The spool of the swing control valve may have a malfunction.
Possible causes 2
and standard
value in normal a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
state running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
Swing lock switch
(safety valve) Swing circuits +1.5
29.2 –2.5 MPa
ON relieved (separately +15
on both sides) {298 –25 kg/cm }
2
4
Malfunction of swing motor Sealing of the reverse prevention valve of the swing motor may be
5
(reverse prevention valve) defective. Check it directly.
PC130-8 23
H-23 Excessive overrun when stopping swing 1

(1) Overrun of upper structure is large in both direc-
Trouble • Excessive overrun when stopping swing.
tions.
Related
information

Possible causes a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
and standard running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
value in normal 1 Swing motor defective Left work equipment control
state Leakage from swing motor
lever
(2) Overrun of upper structure is large in only one

Trouble • Excessive overrun when stopping swing.
direction.
Related
information

1 lever
valve
Above 2.7 MPa
Operated for swing
{Above 28 kg/cm2}
The swing PPC slow return valves may be clogged. Check them
Clogging of swing PPC slow
2 directly. (They may be checked by exchanging with each other
return valves
Possible causes and checking change of the phenomenon.)
and standard Malfunction of swing control The spool of the swing control valve may have a malfunction.
value in normal 3
Swing lock switch
(safety valve) Swing circuits +1.5
29.2 –2.5 MPa
ON relieved (separately +15
{298 –25 kg/cm }
2
on both sides)
5
Malfunction of swing motor Sealing of the reverse prevention valve of the swing motor may be
6
(reverse prevention valve) defective. Check it directly.
24 PC130-8
H-24 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large shock 1

Trouble • When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large shock.
Related
information

1 lever
Possible causes valve
and standard
value in normal Above 2.7 MPa
Operated for swing
state {Above 28 kg/cm2}
The swing PPC slow return valves may have a malfunction. Check
Malfunction of swing PPC
2 them directly. (They may be checked by exchanging with each
slow return valves
other and checking change of the phenomenon.)
Malfunction of swing motor The safety valve of the swing motor may have malfunction. Check
3
(safety valve) it directly.
H-25 When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large sound 1

Trouble • When upper structure stops swinging, it makes large sound.
Related
information

Malfunction of back pres- The back pressure check valve may have a malfunction. Check it
1
sure check valve directly.
Malfunction of swing motor The swing motor (safety valves) may have a malfunction. Check
Possible causes 2
(safety valve) the valves directly.
and standard
value in normal The swing motor (suction valves) may have a malfunction. Check
Malfunction of swing motor
state 3 the valves directly. (They may be checked by exchanging with
(suction valves)
each other and checking change of the phenomenon.)
PC130-8 25
H-26 Hydraulic drift of swing is large 1

Trouble • Hydraulic drift of swing is large. (1) When swing holding brake is operated
• If the swing lock switch is turned ON or the swing holding brake release switch is in the normal posi-
Related
tion, the swing holding brake operates and the disc brake holds the upper structure.
information

Possible causes Malfunction of swing holding Solenoid valve output pressure
1 lever
and standard brake solenoid valve
value in normal In NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
state 2.84 – 3.43 MPa
Operated for swing
{29 – 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction or internal defect
The holding brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction or
2 of swing motor (holding
an internal defect. Check it directly.
brake)
Trouble • Hydraulic drift of swing is large. (2) When swing holding brake is released
• If the swing holding brake release is in the emergency position, the swing holding brake is released
Related
and the upper structure is held with only hydraulic pressure.
information

Defective sealing of swing Sealing of the spool of the swing control valve may have a mal-
1
control valve (spool) function. Check it directly.
The safety valves of the swing motor may have a malfunction.
Defective sealing of swing
Possible causes 2 Check them directly. (They may be checked by exchanging with
motor (safety valve)
and standard each other and checking change of the phenomenon.)
value in normal The suction valves of the swing motor may have a malfunction.
state Defective sealing of swing
3 Check them directly. (They may be checked by exchanging with
motor (suction valve)
each other and checking change of the phenomenon.)
The reverse prevention valve of the swing motor may have a mal-
4 sealing of swing motor
function or its sealing may be defective. Check it directly.
(reverse prevention valve)
26 PC130-8
H-27 Flow rate in attachment circuit cannot be adjusted 1

When attachment is installed
Trouble • Flow rate in attachment circuit cannot be adjusted.
• If an attachment is installed, the flow rate in the service circuit changes according to the selected
Related working mode.
information • How to adjust the flow rate in modes B and ATT is different from that in mode B. For details, see
Operation manual.

Malfunction of attachment
The attachment flow rate adjustment EPC valve may have a mal-
1 flow rate adjustment EPC
function. Check it directly.
valve
Possible causes a Keep the engine stopped for the preparations, and keep it
and standard running at high idle during the troubleshooting.
value in normal Wiring harness PPC valve output
state Service pedal
Malfunction of service PPC connector pressure
2
valve Disconnect connec- In NEUTRAL 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
tor V30 of attachment
flow rate adjustment Above 2.7 MPa
Operated
EPC valve. {Above 28 kg/cm2}
PC130-8 27

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
28 PC130-8
SEN04125-02
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode)
Method of using troubleshooting chart............................................................................................................ 4
S-1 Starting performance is poor .................................................................................................................... 8
S-2 Engine does not start ............................................................................................................................... 9
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly.......................................................................................................... 12
S-4 Engine stops during operations .............................................................................................................. 13
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly ............................................................................................................ 14
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) ..................................................................................................... 15
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion).................................................................................. 16
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) ...................................................................... 17
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ......................................................................................................... 18
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive............................................................................................................. 19
S-11 Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) ................................................... 20
S-12 Oil pressure drops ................................................................................................................................ 21
S-13 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel)................................................................................................. 22
S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) ......................................................................... 23
PC130-8 1
S-15 Abnormal noise is made ....................................................................................................................... 24

S-16 Vibration is excessive ........................................................................................................................... 25
2 PC130-8
PC130-8 3
Method of using troubleshooting chart 1

The troubleshooting chart consists of the "questions", "check items", "causes", and "troubleshooting" blocks.
The questions and check items are used to pinpoint high probability causes by simple inspection or from
phenomena without using troubleshooting tools.
Next, troubleshooting tools or direct inspection are applied to check the narrowed causes in order from the
most probable one to make final confirmation according to the troubleshooting procedure.
Questions
Items to be drawn from the user or operator. They correspond to A and B in the chart on the right. The
items in A are basic ones. The items in B can be drawn from the user or operator, depending on their
level.
Check items
Simple check items used by the serviceman to narrow the causes. They correspond to C in the chart on
the right.
Causes
Items to be narrowed from the questions and check items. The serviceman narrows down the probable
causes from A, B, and C.
Troubleshooting
Items used to find out the true cause by verifying the narrowed causes finally in order from the most
probable one by applying troubleshooting tools or direct inspection.
Items listed in the [Questions] and [Check items] and related to the [Causes] are marked with E, Q, and w.
E : Causes to be referred to for questions and check items
Q : Causes related to questions and check items
w : Causes highly probable among ones marked with Q
a When narrowing the "causes", apply the items marked with w before those marked with Q.
When narrowing the causes, do not apply the items marked with E. (If no items have other marks and
the causes cannot be narrowed, however, you may apply them.)
4 PC130-8
PC130-8 5
<Example of troubleshooting> Exhaust gas is black

Let us assume that a trouble of "Exhaust gas is black" occurred and we checked the [Questions] and [Check
items] and found the following 3 items to be the causal symptoms; [Exhaust gas slowly became black],
[Power slowly became weaker], and [Dust indicator is lighting red].
6 PC130-8
There is a causal relationship between 3 items in the [Questions] and [Check items] sections and 5 items in
the [Causes] section.
The method of pinpointing the "cause" from the causal relationship and approaching the "troubleshooting" is
explained according to Step 1 – Step 3 shown below.
PC130-8 7
S-1 Starting performance is poor 1

General causes why starting performance is poor Causes
q Defective electrical system
Leaking or clogged fuel piping, entry of air

Clogged air breather hole of fuel tank cap
Defective contact of valve and valve seat
Defective alternator (generator section)

q Insufficient supply of fuel
Defective alternator (regulator section)

q Insufficient intake of air
Stuck, seized supply pump plunger
Defective intake air heater system
Defective or deteriorated battery

q Improper selection of fuel
a The common rail fuel injection system (CRI) controls the
Clogged air cleaner element
Worn piston ring, cylinder

fuel injection timing electrically. Accordingly, even if the
starting operation is carried out, the engine may not start
until the crankshaft revolves 2 turns at maximum. This phe-
Clogged fuel filter
Defective injector
nomenon does not indicate a trouble, however.
Confirm recent repair history

Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E E E
Became worse gradually Q w w Q
Starting performance
Engine starts easily when warm w w
Questions
Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q Q

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and
Maintenance Manual w w Q Q
Oil must be added more frequently w

When engine is preheated or when temperature is low, preheating monitor does not w
indicate normally
During operation, charge level monitor indicates abnormal charge w w
Dust indicator is red w
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged w
Fuel is leaking from fuel piping w Q
When priming pump is operated, it makes no reaction or it is heavy w Q
Starting motor cranks engine slowly w
If air bleeding plug of fuel filter is removed, fuel does not
While engine is cranked w
flow out
with starting motor,
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills w
Check items
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of w

some cylinders is low
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular Q Q w
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular) Q w Q
Blow-by gas is excessive w
Inspect air cleaner directly q

When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low q q
When air is bled from fuel system, air comes out q
Inspect fuel filter directly q
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)” indicated q
by code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not
q
change
When starting switch is turned to HEAT, intake air heater mount does not become warm q
Is voltage 20 – 30 V between alternator terminal B and terminal E with Yes q

engine at low idle? No q
When specific gravity of electrolyte and voltage of battery are measured, they are low q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Clean
Remedy
*1: Displayed failure codes [CA559] and [CA2249]
8 PC130-8
S-2 Engine does not start 1

a) Engine does not turn Causes
Defective connection of battery terminal
Defective starting motor (motor section)

General causes why engine does not turn
q Seized parts inside engine
o See “S-4 Engine stops during operations”
Defective or deteriorated battery
Defective steering circuit wiring

q Defective electrical system
q Defective hydraulic pump
Broken flywheel ring gear
Defective hydraulic pump

Defective starting switch
Defective battery relay
Defective safety relay

Questions
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E E
Condition of horn when Horn does not sound Q Q w

starting switch is turned ON Horn volume is low w
Battery electrolyte is low w
Battery terminal is loose w
When starting switch is turned ON, there is no operating sound from battery relay Q w
When starting switch is turned to START, starting pinion does not move out Q Q w
Check items
Speed of rotation is low w

When starting switch is Makes grating noise w w
turned to START, starting
pinion moves out, but Soon disengages again w
Makes rattling noise and does not turn Q Q Q Q
Inspect flywheel ring gear directly q

Carry out troubleshooting

There is not voltage (20 – 30 V) between battery relay q
terminal B and terminal E
Troubleshooting
on H-mode
on E-mode
When terminal B and terminal C of starting switch are
q
connected, engine starts
Turn starting switch OFF,
When terminal B and terminal C at safety relay outlet are q
connect cord, and carry out
connected, engine starts
troubleshooting at ON
Even if terminal B and terminal C at safety relay outlet are
q
connected, engine does not start
When terminal at safety switch and terminal B at starting
q
motor are connected, engine starts
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Remedy — —
PC130-8 9
b) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out Causes
Defective operation of overflow valve (Does not close)

General causes why engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes
out
q Fuel is not being supplied
q Supply of fuel is extremely small

q Improper selection of fuel (particularly in winter)
Defective common rail pressure limiter

Seized, abnormally worn feed pump

Defective supply pump MPROP
Broken supply pump shaft
Insufficient fuel in tank
Defective fuel injector

Use of improper fuel
Clogged fuel filter

Questions
Exhaust smoke suddenly stopped coming out (when starting again) w Q w w E

Fuel other than specified one is used w
Non-specified fuel is being used w
Maintenance Manual w E Q
When fuel tank is inspected, it is found to be empty w

Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained Q E E E
When fuel filter is removed, there is not fuel in it w w
w
Check items
Fuel is leaking from fuel piping

While engine is cranked with flow out Q Q w Q
starting motor,
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills Q w w w Q

Inspect feed pump directly q
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)”

indicated by code q q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “Abnormality in supply pump IMV (*2)” indicated
by code q
Inspect overflow valve directly q

Engine can be started in reduced cylinder mode q
Fuel flows out when pressure limiter return piping is disconnected q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Add
Remedy

10 PC130-8
c) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start Causes
Worn dynamic valve system (Valve, rocker lever, etc.)

(fuel is being injected)
Defective coolant temperature sensor, wiring harness

General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but engine does
not start
Leaking or clogged fuel system, entry of air

q Lack of rotating force due to defective electrical system

Defective intake air heater system

Clogged injector, defective spray
Defective, deteriorated battery

Clogging of fuel filter

Use of improper fuel
Suddenly failed to start w w Q
Questions
Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q

Maintenance Manual w w

When engine is preheated or when temperature is low, preheating monitor does not w
indicate normally
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged Q
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained w
When fuel filter is removed, there is not fuel in it w
Fuel is leaking from fuel piping w
Starting motor cranks engine slowly w
When engine is cranked, abnormal sound is generated around cylinder head w
Check items

While engine is cranked with flow out Q w
starting motor,
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of
w

Inspect dynamic valve system directly q
When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low q
q
Troubleshooting
When air is bled from fuel system, air comes out

Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)” indicated
q
by code
Engine can be started in reduced cylinder mode q
Coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally q
When starting switch is turned to HEAT, intake air heater mount does not become warm q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Remedy
PC130-8 11
S-3 Engine does not pick up smoothly 1

General causes why engine does not pick up smoothly Causes
Seized turbocharger, interference of turbocharger

q Defective condition of fuel injection

q Controller is controlling in derate mode

(limiting injection rate (output) because of an error in electrical system)
Clogged injector, defective spray


Improper valve clearance

Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E E E E
Questions
Engine pick-up suddenly became worse w Q Q Q

Non-specified fuel is being used w w w
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance
Manual w w

Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some Q w
cylinders is low
Blue under light load w
Color of exhaust gas is
w Q w w
Check items
Black
When engine is cranked, interference sound is generated around turbocharger w
High idle speed under no load is normal, but speed suddenly drops when load is applied Q w
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular) Q Q Q

q
Troubleshooting
Inspect valve clearance directly

When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)” indicated by
q
code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not change q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy
12 PC130-8
S-4 Engine stops during operations 1

General causes why engine stops during opera- Causes
tions
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker arm, etc.)
Broken auxiliary equipment (pump, compressor, etc.)

q Internal parts of engine seized
Defective engine controller power supply wiring

q There is overheating

q Defective hydraulic pump
Broken, seized piston, connecting rod

Broken, seized crankshaft bearing
Clogging feed pump gauze filter
Defective starting switch wiring

Leaking, clogged fuel piping
Broken, seized feed pump

Broken supply pump shaft
Defective hydraulic pump

Broken, seized gear train

Abnormal noise was heard and engine
w w w w Q w Q w w
stopped suddenly
w Q Q
Questions
Condition when engine Engine overheated and stopped

stopped
Engine stopped slowly w Q Q Q Q
There was hunting and engine stopped w Q Q Q Q Q Q
Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q Q Q
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation
w w
and Maintenance Manual
Fuel level monitor indicates low level w
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained w w
Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained w w Q Q
Check items
Does not turn at all w w

When engine is cranked by Turns in opposite direction w
hand Moves by amount of gear backlash w w
Supply pump shaft does not turn w
Engine turns, but stops when load is applied to machine w

Inspect piston, connecting rod directly q
Inspect crankshaft bearing directly q
on applicable machine
Inspect gear train directly q

Troubleshooting

Inspect feed pump gauge filter directly q
Inspect feed pump directly q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply q q
pump (*1)” indicated by code
Engine rotates when pump auxiliary equipment (pump, compressor,
q
etc.) is removed
Check controller power supply wiring q
Check starting switch wiring q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Clean
Clean
Add
Remedy
PC130-8 13
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly 1

General causes why engine does not rotate smoothly Causes
q Air in fuel system
Clogged injector, defective spray (dirt in injector)

Defective speed sensor (Error at degree that it is not indicated)
Defective Bkup speed sensor, wiring harness

q
Defective Ne speed sensor, wiring harness


Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E
Q Q
Questions
Occurs at a certain speed range

Occurs at low idle Q Q Q Q Q
Hunting
Occurs even when speed is raised Q Q Q
Occurs on slopes w
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Manual w
Check items
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained Q


Troubleshooting

Carry out troubleshooting according to “Abnormality in Ne speed sensor (*1)” indicated by code q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “Abnormality in Bkup speed sensor (*2)” indicated by code q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Add
Remedy
*1: Displayed failure code [CA689]

*2: Displayed failure code [CA778]
14 PC130-8
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) 1

General causes why engine lacks output Causes

Air leakage from air intake piping and aftercooler
Clogged injector, defective spray (dirt in injector)
Defective boost pressure sensor, wiring harness

Defective installation of boost pressure sensor
Defective drive of injector (signal, solenoid)



o See “S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too
Leaking, clogged fuel piping

high (Overheating)“

Clogged fuel spill piping


(limiting injection rate (output) because of an
error in electrical system)
(air leakage)
Suddenly Q w Q Q Q Q
Questions
Power was lost

Gradually Q Q Q Q Q Q
Non-specified fuel is being used Q Q Q
w w
Maintenance Manual
Oil must be added more frequently Q Q
Dust indicator is red w w
Output becomes insufficient after short stop of operation w
Black w w
w w
w
Check items
When engine is cranked, interference sound is generated around turbocharger

High idle speed is too high Q
High idle speed under no load is normal, but speed suddenly drops when load is applied Q w Q Q
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular w w Q Q w
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular) Q Q Q Q Q
Blow-by gas is excessive w w

Inspect air intake piping directly q
When boost pressure is measured, it is found to be low q q q
Inspect valve clearance directly q
Troubleshooting
Inspect fuel piping q

Inspect spill port check valve directly q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)”
q
indicated by code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does
not change q q
Inspect charge pressure sensor mount directly q

Carry out troubleshooting according to “Abnormality in charge pressure sensor (*2)”
q
indicated by code
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Remedy

PC130-8 15
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) 1

General causes why exhaust smoke is black Causes
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head



o See “S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high
(Overheating)“

Improper fuel injection pressure

(limiting injection rate (output) because of an error in

Crushed, clogged muffler
Abnormally worn injector

Improper injection timing
electrical system)
Clogged, seized injector

Suddenly became black w w Q Q Q
w Q Q
Questions
Color of exhaust gas is Gradually became black

Suddenly w Q Q Q
Power was lost
Gradually Q Q Q Q
Muffler is crushed w
Air leaks between turbocharger and cylinder head, clamp is loosened w
Engine is operated in low-temperature mode at normal temperature Q Q Q
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some Q w
cylinders is low
Check items

Torque converter stall speed or pump relief speed is high (Fuel is injected excessively) Q
Exhaust noise is abnormal Q w Q
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular Q Q Q Q Q w
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, abnormally much fuel spills w

When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is fount to be heavy q
Troubleshooting
Inspect valve clearance directly q

When muffler is removed, exhaust sound improves q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)” indicated by
q q
code
Carry out troubleshooting according to “Abnormality in coolant temperature sensor (*2)”
q
indicated by code
Confirm with monitoring function q q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Remedy

16 PC130-8
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) 1

General causes why oil consumption is excessive Causes
q Abnormal consumption of oil
Turbocharger
Oil leakage from oil pan, cylinder head, etc.

Worn, damaged valve (stem, guide, seal)
q Long-time operation of engine at low idle or high idle
(Do not run engine at idle for more than 20 minutes
Dust sucked in from intake system

continuously)
Clogged breather, breather hose

q External leakage of oil
Oil leakage from oil drain plug

Worn, damaged rear oil seal
q Wear of pats in lubrication system
Oil leakage from oil cooler
Oil leakage from oil piping

Worn seal at turbine end
Worn seal at blower end
Oil leakage from oil filter

Broken piston ring
Broken oil cooler

E E E E
Questions
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period

Oil consumption suddenly increased w Q
Oil must be added more frequently w Q
Oil becomes contaminated quickly Q Q w
Outside of engine is dirty with oil w w w w w
There are loose piping clamps in intake system w
Inside of turbocharger intake outlet pipe is dirty with oil w
Inside of turbocharger exhaust outlet pipe is dirty with oil Q w
Check items
There is oil in coolant w

Oil level in clutch chamber or damper chamber is high w
Exhaust smoke is blue under light load w w
Excessive Q Q w w
Amount of blow-by gas
None w
When intake manifold is removed, dust is found inside q

When intake manifold is removed, inside is found to be dirty abnormally q
Troubleshooting
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft q q

Check breather and breather hose directly q
Inspect rear oil seal directly q
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage q q
There is external leakage of oil from engine q q q q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Clean
Remedy
PC130-8 17
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly 1

General causes why oil becomes contaminated quickly Causes
q Entry of exhaust gas into oil due to internal wear
Clogged turbocharger lubrication drain tube

Defective seal at turbocharger turbine end
q Clogging of lubrication passage
q Use of improper fuel
q Use of improper oil
Clogged breather, breather hose

q Operation under excessive load
Defective oil filter safety valve

Worn valve, valve guide
Exhaust smoke is bad

Clogged oil cooler
Clogged oil filter
Questions

Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained Q Q w
Inside of exhaust pipe is dirty with oil w
Engine oil temperature rises quickly w
Check items

Black w
Excessive Q Q w Q
Amount of blow-by gas
None w
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft q

Troubleshooting
Check breather and breather hose directly q
See S-7
Inspect oil cooler directly q
Inspect oil filter directly q
Spring of oil filter safety valve is hitched or broken q
Inspect turbocharger lubrication drain tube directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Clean
Remedy —
18 PC130-8
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive 1

General causes why fuel consumption is excessive Causes
q Leakage of fuel

q Defective condition of fuel injection (fuel pressure, injection timing)
q Excessive injection of fuel
Fuel leakage from fuel filter, piping, etc.
Defective common rail pressure

Fuel leakage inside head cover
Defective supply pump plunger
Defective operation of injector

Defective feed pump oil seal
Defective spray by injector
Improper injection timing

E E E
Questions

More than for other machines of same model Q Q Q Q
Condition of fuel
Gradually increased Q Q
consumption
Suddenly increased Q Q
There is external leakage of fuel from engine w
Combustion is irregular w
Engine oil level rises and oil smells of diesel fuel w w
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some w
cylinders is low
Check items
Low idle speed is high Q

Torque converter stall speed or pump relief speed is high Q
Black Q Q Q Q
White Q
Remove head cover and inspect directly q

Inspect feed pump oil seal directly q
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting according to “No-pressure feed by supply pump (*1)” indicated by code q
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, much fuel spills q
Carry out troubleshooting according to “Abnormality in coolant temperature sensor (*2)” indicated
by code q
Confirm with monitoring function q q

Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Remedy

PC130-8 19
S-11 Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes
down) 1
General causes why oil is in coolant Causes
q Internal leakage in lubrication system
Broken cylinder head, head gasket

q Internal leakage in cooling system
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring

Cracks inside cylinder block
Holes caused by pitting
E E
Questions

Suddenly rose Q Q
Oil level
Gradually rose Q Q
Hard water is being used as coolant Q Q
Oil level has risen and oil is milky Q Q w
Check
items
There are excessive air bubbles in radiator, coolant spurts back w
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage q

shooting
Trouble-
Inspect cylinder block directly q q

Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
20 PC130-8
S-12 Oil pressure drops 1

General causes why oil pressure drops Causes
q Leakage, clogging, wear or lubrication system
Leaking, crushed, clogged hydraulic piping

Defective oil level sensor, wiring harness
q Defective oil pressure control
q Selection of oil by the temperature etc. specified in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual is not observed.
Clogged, broken pipe in oil pan

q Deterioration of oil due to overheating
Clogged strainer in oil pan
Defective regulator valve

Worn journal of bearing
Lack of oil in oil pan
Defective oil pump

Coolant, fuel in oil
Clogged oil filter

Questions
Oil pressure monitor indicates low oil pressure Q w

Non-specified oil is being used Q Q
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance w
Manual
Indicates pressure drop at low idle w
Oil pressure monitor Indicates pressure drop at low, high idle Q w w w Q

(if installed) Indicates pressure drop on slopes w
Sometimes indicates pressure drop w Q
Oil level monitor indicates oil level drop w w
Oil level in oil pan is low w
External hydraulic piping is leaking, crushed w
Check items
Oil is milky or smells of diesel oil w

Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained w
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained w Q
Metal particles are found in oil filter q

Troubleshooting
Inspect oil pan strainer, pipe directly q q

See S-13
Oil pump rotation is heavy, there is play in oil pump q

Valve and spring of regulator valve are fatigued, damaged q
Inspect oil filter directly q
If oil level sensor is replaced, oil level monitor indicates normally q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Add
Remedy —
PC130-8 21
S-13 Oil level rises (Entry of coolant or fuel) 1

General causes why oil level rises Causes
q Coolant in oil (milky)
Defective seal of auxiliary equipment (pump, compressor)

q Fuel in oil (smells diluted diesel fuel)
a If oil is in coolant, carry out troubleshooting for “S-11 Oil is in coolant”
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring

Worn, damaged rear oil seal
Cracks inside cylinder block
Defects in supply pump

Broken injector, O-ring
Questions

Fuel must be added more frequently w w
Coolant must be added more frequently Q Q
There is oil in coolant Q Q Q Q w
Oil smells of diesel fuel w w
Oil is milky Q Q
When engine is started, drops of water come from muffler Q
When radiator cap is removed and engine is run at low idle, an abnormal number of bubbles appears, w Q
Check items
or coolant spurts back

Exhaust smoke is white Q
Oil level in damper chamber is low w
Oil level in hydraulic tank is low w

Remove injector and inspect O-ring. q
Troubleshooting
Inspect cylinder block, liner directly q q

Inspect rear oil seal directly q
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage q
Remove and inspect supply pump directly q
Inspect seal of auxiliary equipment directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
22 PC130-8
S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) 1

General causes why coolant temperature becomes too high Causes
q Lack of cooling air (deformation, damage of fan)
Defective radiator cap (pressure valve)
Defective coolant temperature gauge

q Drop in heat dissipation efficiency
Defective operation of thermostat
Slipping fan belt, worn fan pulley

q Problem in coolant circulation system
Rise in hydraulic oil temperature

Clogged, crushed radiator fins
Clogged, broken oil cooler
Clogged radiator core

Broken water pump
Lack of coolant
Questions
Sudden overheated Q w Q
Condition overheating
Always tends to overheat Q w w Q
Rises quickly Q w
Coolant temperature gauge
Does not go down from red range w
Radiator coolant level monitor indicates drop of coolant level w
Engine oil level has risen, oil is milky w Q
Fan belt tension is low w
When fan pulley is turned, it has play w
Milky oil is floating on coolant w
There are excessive air bubbles in radiator, coolant spurts back w
w
Check items
When light bulb is held behind radiator core, no light passes through
Radiator shroud, inside of underguard side are clogged with dirt or mud w w
Coolant is leaking because of cracks in hose or loose clamps w
Coolant flows out from radiator overflow hose w
Fan belt whines under sudden acceleration w
Hydraulic oil temperature enters red range faster than engine coolant w
temperature

Inspect cylinder liner directly q
Inspect oil cooler directly q

q
Troubleshooting
Temperature difference between upper and lower tanks of radiator is large

on H-mode
When operation of thermostat is carried out, it does not open at cracking

temperature q
Temperature difference between upper and lower tanks of radiator is slight q

Inspect radiator core directly q
When operation of radiator cap is carried out, its cracking pressure is low q
Inspect fan belt, pulley directly q
When coolant temperature is measured, it is found to be normal q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Add
Remedy —
PC130-8 23
S-15 Abnormal noise is made 1

General causes why abnormal noise is made Causes
q Abnormality due to defective parts
Deformed cooling fan, loose fan belt, interference of fan belt

Defective inside of muffler (dividing board out of position)
q Abnormal combustion
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head

q Air sucked in from intake system
Improper fuel injection timing (abnormality in coolant

a Judge if the noise is an internal noise or an external
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever)

Interference of turbocharger, seized turbocharger
temperature sensor, boost temperature sensor)

noise before starting troubleshooting.
a The engine is operated in the low-temperature mode
while it is not warmed up sufficiently. Accordingly, the
Excessive wear of piston ring, cylinder

engine sound becomes a little larger. This does not indi-
cate abnormality, however.
a When the engine is accelerated, it is operated in the
Improper gear train backlash

acceleration mode and its sound becomes a little larger
Removed, seized bushing

Clogged, seized injector

for up to about 3 seconds. This does not indicate abnor-
Dirt caught in injector

mality, however.

Degree of use of machine Operated for long period E
Questions
Gradually occurred Q Q
Condition of abnormal noise
Suddenly occurred Q Q Q
Non-specified fuel is being used Q
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained w w
Air leaks between turbocharger and cylinder head w
When engine is cranked, abnormal sound is generated around cylinder head w w
When engine is cranked, beat noise is generated around muffler w
Check items

some cylinders is low w Q

Black Q w Q
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular w
Abnormal noise is loud when engine is accelerated Q Q Q Q
When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy q

When muffler is removed, abnormal noise disappears q
q
Troubleshooting
Inspect valve clearance directly

Inspect gear train directly q q
Inspect fan and fan belt directly q
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does q q
not change
Abnormal noise is heard only when engine is started q
Confirm with monitoring function q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Remedy
24 PC130-8
S-16 Vibration is excessive 1

General causes why vibration is excessive Causes
q Defective parts (abnormal wear, breakage)
Improper fuel injection timing (abnormality in coolant temperature

q Misalignment between engine and chassis
q Abnormal combustion
a If abnormal noise is made and vibration is excessive, carry out trouble-
shooting for “S-15 Abnormal noise is made”, too.
Stuck dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever)
Loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushions

Worn main bearing, connecting rod bearing
Broken output shaft, parts in damper

sensor, boost temperature sensor)
Improper gear train backlash
Worn camshaft bushing
E E E
Questions

Suddenly increased Q Q
Condition of vibration
Gradually increased Q Q Q
Non-specified oil is being used Q Q
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained w w
Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained w w
Oil pressure is low at low idle Q Q
Check items
Vibration occurs at mid-range speed Q Q

Vibration follows engine speed Q Q Q
Exhaust smoke is black w Q

Inspect main bearing and connecting rod bearing directly q
Troubleshooting
Inspect gear train directly q

Inspect camshaft bushing directly q
Confirm with monitoring function q
Inspect engine mounting bolts and cushions directly q
Inspect output shaft or inside of damper directly q
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy
PC130-8 25

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
26 PC130-8
SEN04126-02
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
50 Disassembly and assembly1

General information on disassembly and
assembly
How to read this manual ................................................................................................................................. 2
Coating materials list....................................................................................................................................... 4
Special tool list ................................................................................................................................................ 7
Sketch of special tool .....................................................................................................................................11
PC130-8 1
SEN04126-02 50 Disassembly and assembly
How to read this manual 1

(Rev. 2008.12)
1. Removal and installation of assemblies
Special tools Removal

q The special tools necessary for the q The [Removal] section contains procedures
removal and installation work are indi- and precautions for implementing the work,
cated by symbols as A1 ••• X1 and their know how and the amount of oil or coolant to
part Nos., part names, and quantity are be drained.
described in the table. q The common tools necessary for the removal
q In the special tools table, the following work are indicated [1], [2] ••• and their part
information is described, as well as the Nos ., pa rt nam es, and qu anti ty ar e n ot
above items. described.
1) Necessity q Various symbols used in the Removal Section
t : Special tools that cannot be substituted are explained and listed below.
and should always be used (installed). k : This mark indicates safety-related precau-
q : Special tools that will be useful if avail- tions that must be followed when imple-
able and are substitutable with com- menting the work.
mercially available tools. a: Know-how or precautions for work
2) Distinction of new and existing special [*1] : This mark shows that there are instructions or
tools precautions for installing parts.
N: Tools newly developed for this 6 : This mark shows the amount of oil or coolant
model. They respectively have a to be drained.
new part number. 4 : Weight of part or component
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers.
They are remodeled from already
available tools for other models.
Installation
Blank: Tools already available for other
models. They can be used without q Except where otherwise instructed, installation
any modification. of parts is done in the reverse order of removal.
q Instructions and precautions for installing parts
3) Circle mark Q in sketch column:
are shown with [*1] mark in the Installation
q The sketch of the special tool is pre-
Section, identifying which step the instructions
sented in the section of "Sketches of
are intended for.
special tools".
q The common tools necessary for the installa-
q Part No. of special tools starting with
tion work are indicated [1], [2] ••• and their part
79 T- - :
* *** ****
means that they are not available
Nos ., pa rt nam es, and qu anti ty ar e n ot
described.
from Komatsu in Japan (i.e. must be q Marks shown in the Installation Section stand
made locally). for the following.
k : Precautions related to safety in execution
of work.
a : This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
2 : Type of coating material
3 : Tightening torque
5 : Quantity of oil or coolant to be added
Sketches of special tools

q Various special tools are illustrated for the con-
venience of local manufacture.
2 PC130-8
2. Disassembly and assembly of assemblies Disassembly

q In Disassembly section, the work procedures,
Special tools precautions and know-how for carrying out
q The special tools necessary for the disas- those procedures, and quantity of the oil and
sembly and assembly work are indicated coolant drained are described.
by symbols as A1 ••• X1 and their part q The common tools necessary for the disas-
Nos ., par t na me s, a nd q ua nti ty ar e sembly work are indicated [1], [2] ••• and their
described in the table. part Nos., part names, and quantity are not
q In the special tools table, the following described.
information is described, as well as the q The meanings of the symbols used in Disas-
above items. sembly section are as follows.
1) Necessity k : This mark indicates safety-related precau-
t : Special tools that cannot be substituted tions that must be followed when imple-
and should always be used (installed). menting the work.
q : Special tools that will be useful if avail- a : Know-how or precautions for work
able and are substitutable with com- 6: Quantity of oil or coolant drained
mercially available tools.
2) Distinction of new and existing special
tools
N : Tools newly developed for this Assembly
model. They respectively have a q In Assembly section, the work procedures, pre-
new part number. cautions and know-how for carrying out those
R : Tools with upgraded part numbers. procedures, and quantity of the oil and coolant
They are remodeled from already added are described.
available tools for other models. q The common tools necessary for the assembly
Blank : Tools already available for other work are indicated [1], [2] ••• and their part Nos.,
models. They can be used without part names, and quantity are not described.
any modification. q The meanings of the symbols used in Assem-
3) Circle mark Q in sketch column: bly section are as follows.
q The sketch of the special tool is pre- k : Precautions related to safety in execution
sented in the section of "Sketches of of work
special tools". a : This mark gives guidance or precautions
q Part No. of special tools starting with when doing the procedure.
79 T- - : 2 : Type of coating material
* *** ****
means that they are not available 3 : Tightening torque
from Komatsu in Japan (i.e. must be 5 : Quantity of oil or coolant to be added
made locally).
Sketches of special tools
q Various special tools are illustrated for the con-
venience of local manufacture.
PC130-8 3
Coating materials list 1

(Rev. 2009.02)
a The recommended coating materials such as adhesives, gasket sealants, and greases used for disas-
sembly and assembly are listed below.
a For coating materials not listed below, use the equivalent of products shown in this manual.
Cate- Komatsu
Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory code
• Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber cush-
LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube
ions, and cork plugs from coming out.
• Used for plastic (except polyethylene,
polypropylene, tetrafluoroethylene and vinyl
20 g Polyethylene
LT-1B 790-129-9050 chloride), rubber, metal, and non-metal parts
(2 pcs.) container
which require immediate and strong adhe-
sion.
Polyethylene • Features: Resistance to heat and chemicals.
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g
container • Used to fix and seal bolts and plugs.
790-129-9060
Adhesive: 1 kg • Used to stick and seal metal, glass, and plas-
LT-3 (Set of adhesive Can
Hardener: 500 g tics.
and hardener)
Adhesive
Polyethylene
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g • Used to seal plugs.
container
Holtz MH 705 790-129-9120 75 g Tube • Heat-resistant seal used to repair engines.
• Quick-setting adhesive.
ThreeBond Polyethylene • Setting time: Within 5 sec. to 3 min.
790-129-9140 50 g
1735 container • Used mainly to stick metals, rubbers, plastics,
and woods.
• Quick-setting adhesive.
• Quick-setting type.
Aron-alpha Polyethylene
790-129-9130 2g (max. strength is obtained after 30 minutes)
201 container
• Used mainly to stick rubbers, plastics, and
metals.
• Features: Resistance to heat and chemicals.
Loctite Polyethylene
79A-129-9110 50 cc • Used for fitted portions used at high tempera-
648-50 container
tures.
• Used to seal various threaded portions, pipe
Polyethylene joints, and flanges.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg
container • Used to seal tapered plugs, elbows, and nip-
ples of hydraulic piping.
• Features: Silicon-based heat and cold-resis-
tant sealant.
Gasket sealant
LG-6 790-129-9160 200 g Tube • Used to seal flange surfaces and threaded
portions.
• Used to seal oil pan, final drive case, etc.
• Features: Silicon-based quick-setting sealant.
LG-7 790-129-9170 1 kg Tube • Used to seal flywheel housing, intake mani-
fold, oil pan, thermostat housing, etc.
• Features: Silicon-based, heat and cold-resis-
LG-8
tant, vibration-resistant, impact-resistant seal-
ThreeBond 419-15-18131 100 g Tube
ant.
1207B
• Used to seal transfer case, etc.
4 PC130-8
Cate-
Komatsu code Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory
• Used for rough surfaces such as the circle gear
LG-9 top seal which does not need to be clamped,
ThreeBond 790-129-9310 200 g Tube water resistance of the clearance at the welded
1206D area, etc.
• Can be coated with paint.
Gasket sealant
LG-10 • Used as lubricant/sealant when the radiator

ThreeBond 790-129-9320 200 g Tube hoses are inserted.
1206E • Can be coated with paint.
LG-11 • Feature: Can be used together with gaskets.
ThreeBond 790-129-9330 200 g Tube • Used for covers of the transmission case and
1121 steering case etc.
ThreeBond
790-129-9090 100 g Tube • Gasket sealant used to repair engine.
1211
• Used to prevent scuffing and seizure of press-fit-
ted portions, shrink-fitted portions, and threaded
LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube
portions.
Molybdenum
• Used to lubricate linkages, bearings, etc.

lubricant
disulfide
• Spray type
• Thin molybdenum disulphide films are made on
metal surfaces to prevent the metals from scuff-
— 09995-00250 190 g Can
ing each other.
• Applicable for the propeller shaft splines, needle
bearings, pins and bolts of various links, etc.
• Feature: Seizure and scuffing prevention com-
prevention
compound
Seizure
pound with metallic super-fine-grain, etc.

LC-G
— — Can • Used for the mounting bolt in the high tempera-
NEVER-SEEZ
ture area of the exhaust manifold and the turbo-
charger, etc.
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
SYG2-400LI-A
G2-LI • Feature: Lithium grease with extreme pressure
SYG2-160LI
G0-LI Various Various lubrication performance.
SYGA-160CNLI
*: For cold district • General purpose type.
SYG0-400LI-A (*)
SYG0-160CNLI
(*)
• Used for parts under heavy load.
Caution:
Molybdenum SYG2-400M 400 g x 10 Bellows-type • Do not apply grease to rolling bearings like
disulfide grease SYG2-400M-A 400 g x 20 container swing circle bearings, etc. and spline.
Grease
LM-G (G2-M) SYGA-16CNM 16 kg Can • The grease should be applied to work equipment
pins at their assembly only, not applied for
greasing afterwards.
• Seizure resistance, heat resistance and water
Hyper White SYG2-400T-A
400 g Bellows-type resistance higher than molybdenum disulfide
Grease G2-T, SYG2-16CNT
container grease.
G0-T (*) SYG0-400T-A (*)
16 kg Can • Not conspicuous on machine since color is
*: For cold district SYG0-16CNT (*)
white.
Biogrease SYG2-400B
G2-B, G2-BT (*) SYGA-16CNB 400 g Bellows-type • Since this grease is decomposed by natural bac-
*: For use at high SYG2-400BT (*) container teria in short period, it has less effects on micro-
temperature and SYGA-16CNBT 16 kg Can organisms, animals, and plants.
under high load (*)
PC130-8 5
Cate-
Komatsu code Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory
• Feature: Silicone grease with wide using tem-
G2-S perature range, high resistance to thermal-oxi-
ThreeBond — 200 g Tube dative degradation and performance to prevent
1855 deterioration of rubber and plastic parts.
Grease
• Used for oil seals of the transmission, etc.

• Feature: Urea (organic system) grease with heat
G2-U-S resistance and long life. Enclosed type.
427-12-11871 2 kg Can
ENS grease • Used for rubber, bearing and oil seal in damper.
Caution: Do not mix with lithium grease.
SUNSTAR • Used as primer for cab side.
Glass
PAINT PRIMER 20 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
container
580 SUPER facture)
SUNSTAR 417-926-3910
• Used as primer for glass side.
GLASS Glass
20 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
PRIMER 580 container
facture)
Adhesive for cab glass

SUPER
• Used as primer for painted surface on cab
SUNSTAR
Glass side.
Primer
PAINT PRIMER 22M-54-27230 20 ml

container (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
435-95
facture)
• Used as primer for black ceramic-coated
SUNSTAR
surface on glass side and for hard polycar-
GLASS
22M-54-27240 150 ml Can bonate-coated surface.
PRIMER
(Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
435-41
facture)
SUNSTAR • Used as primer for sash (Almite).
Glass
SASH PRIMER 22M-54-27250 20 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
container
GP-402 facture)
SUNSTAR • “S” is used for high-temperature season
PENGUINE and “W” for low-temperature season as
Polyethylene
SEAL 580 417-926-3910 320 ml adhesive for glass.
container
SUPER “S” or (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
“W” facture)
Adhesive
• Used as adhesive for glass.

Sika Japan, Polyethylene
20Y-54-39850 310 ml (Using limit: 6 months after date of manu-
Sikaflex 256HV container
Adhesive for cab glass
facture)
SUNSTAR Ecocart • Used as adhesive for glass.
PENGUINE 22M-54-27210 320 ml (Special (Using limit: 6 months after date of manu-
SUPER 560 container) facture)
SUNSTAR • Used to seal joints of glass parts.
Polyethylene
PENGUINE 417-926-3920 320 ml (Using limit: 4 months after date of manu-
container
SEAL No. 2505 facture)
Caulking material
SEKISUI • Used to seal front window.

Polyethylene
SILICONE 20Y-54-55130 333 ml (Using limit: 6 months after date of manu-
container
SEALANT facture)
• Used to seal joint of glasses.
GE TOSHIBA
Translucent white seal.
SILICONES 22M-54-27220 333 ml Cartridge
(Using limit: 12 months after date of manu-
TOSSEAL 381
facture)
6 PC130-8
Special tool list 1

a Tools with part number 79QT-QQQ-QQQQ cannot be supplied (they are items to be locally manufactured).
a Necessity : t . . . . . . Cannot be substituted, must always be installed (used).
: q . . . . . . Extremely useful if available or, can be substituted with commercially available
part.
a New/Remodel: N. . . . . . Tools with new part numbers, newly developed for this model.
: R. . . . . . Tools with upgraded part numbers, remodeled from items already available for
other models.
: Blank . . Tools already available for other models, can be used without any modification
a Tools marked with Q in the Sketch column are tools introduced in the sketches of the special (See Sketch-
es of special tools).
New/remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Component Part No. Part Name Nature of work, remarks
Sketch
bol
Q’ty
790-101-5201 Push tool (Kit) t 1
795T-221-1010 Plate 1
Engine front oil seal 1 Instllation front oil seal
790-101-5221 • Grip 1
01010-51225 • Bolt 1
Engine rear oil seal A 2 795-931-1100 Seal puller assembly q 1 Removal rear oil seal
790-101-5401 Push tool (Kit) t 1
795T-221-1020 Plate 1
Engine rear oil seal 3 Instllation rear oil seal
790-101-5421 • Grip 1
01010-51240 • Bolt 1
796-460-1210 Oil stopper q 1 Stop oil supply from hydraulic
Hydraulic oil tank D
795-799-1131 Adapter q 1 tank
1 790-201-2750 Spacer t 1 Removal split collar

790-101-5201 Push puller (Kit) q 1
790-101-2510 • Block 1
790-101-2550 • Leg 1
790-101-2560 • Nut 2
2 Removal bearing
790-101-2570 • Plate 4
790-101-3101 Bearing puller q 1
790-101-4200 Puller q 1
(294 kN {30 ton})
Swing machinery F 790-101-1102 Hydraulic oil pump q 1
790-101-5401 Push tool (Kit) (C) q 1 Instllation Bearing outer race
790-101-5461 • Plate 1 For main bearing
3 790-101-5441 • Plate 1 For sub bearing
790-101-5421 • Grip 1
01010-51240 • Bolt 1
4 790-201-2850 Spacer t 1
Instllation Bearing inner race
5 790-201-2750 Spacer t 1
796T-426-1140 Push tool t 1 Q
6 Instllation oil seal
790-201-2680 Plate q 1
PC130-8 7
New/remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Sketch
bol
Q’ty
1 791-675-1510 Installer t 1 Application of floating seal
791-600-2001 Compressor (A) 1
or t
791-685-8006 Compressor (B) 1
791-635-3160 Extension t 1
2 790-201-2770 t 1 Compression of spring
• Spacer
Cylinder
790-101-1600 (686 kN {70 ton}) t 1
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
Disassembly, assembly 790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1
of idler recoil spring L
790-201-1590 • Plate 1
3 (Periphery ø74) Press fit of piston dust seal
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1702 Push tool kit t 1
790-201-1781 • Push tool 1
4 Press fit of bushing
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
1 796T-430-1210 Push tool t 1 N Q Installation of floating seal ø88
Disassembly, assembly M 2 796T-430-1220 Installer t 1 N Q Filling oil and checking of air
of track roller
3 791-601-1000 Oil pump q 1 leak
Remover and
791-620-3000 installer t 1
791-635-3110 • Frame 1
791-635-3120 • Support 1
791-635-3130 • Nut 1
791-635-3140 • Screw 1
791-635-3150 • Hook 1
791-635-3160 • Extention 1
791-635-3170 • Nut 1
Expansion, installation
of track shoe R Removal and pressfit of mas-
791-635-3180 • Screw 1 ter pin
791-635-3190 • Screw (for fixation) 1
791-635-3210 • Pilot 1
791-630-3220 • Adapter 1
791-620-3260 • Pin pusher 1
796T-432-1010 Guide t 1 N Q
790-101-1300 Cylinder
or (980 kN {100 ton}) t 1
Cylinder
790-101-1600 (686 kN {70 ton})
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
790-101-2501 Push puller q 1
Disassembly of center 790-101-2510 1 Disconnection of rotor from
swivel joint T 1 • Block shaft
790-101-2520 • Screw 1
8 PC130-8
New/remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Sketch
bol
Q’ty
790-101-2540 • Washer 1
791-112-1180 • Nut 1
790-101-2630 • Leg 2 Disconnection of rotor from
1 shaft
790-101-2570 • Washer 4
790-101-2560 • Nut 2
Disassembly of center
swivel joint T 791-112-2650 2
• Adapter
Installation of bushing (inside)
2 796T-416-1010 Push tool t 1 N Q of travel PPC valve
Installation of bushing (out-

3 796T-416-1030 Push tool t 1 N Q side) of travel PPC valve
Installation of pin of travel PPC

4 796T-416-1020 Push tool t 1 N Q valve
790-502-1003 Repair stand t 1 Disassembly, assembly of cyl-

1 inder
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
790-102-4300 Wrench assembly t 1 Removal, installation of
2 piston
790-201-4310 Pin t 1
790-201-1702 Push tool (Kit) t 1
790-201-1791 • Push tool 1 Press fit of bucket cylinder roll
790-101-5021 • Grip 1 bushings
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1702 Push tool (Kit) t 1
790-201-1811 • Push tool 1 Press fit of boom cylinder roll
3 bushings
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1702 Push tool (Kit) t 1
790-201-1821 • Push tool 1 Press fit of arm and blade cyl-
Disassembly, assembly 790-101-5021 • Grip 1 inder roll bushings
of hydraulic cylinder U
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1
790-201-1610 • Push tool 1 Press fit of bucket cylinder
790-101-5021 • Grip 1 dust seal
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1
790-201-1620 • Push tool 1 Application of boom cylinder
4
790-101-5021 • Grip 1 dust seal
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1
790-201-1630 • Push tool 1 Application of arm and blade
790-101-5021 • Grip 1 cylinder bushing
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
5 790-720-1000 Expander t 1 Extension of piston ring
PC130-8 9
New/remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Sketch
bol
Q’ty
796-720-1660 Ring t 1 Bucket cylin-
Removal,
Disassembly, assembly der
of hydraulic cylinder U 6 Arm, boom, installation of
07281-01159 Clamp t 1 blade cylinder piston ring
792-785-1100 Remover t 1
792-785-1110 • Sleeve 1
792-785-1120 • Plate 1
792-900-1530 • Screw 1
Removal, installation,
of work equipment and V 1 01803-13034 • Nut 1 Removal of boom foot pin
boom 01643-33080 • Washer 1
796-270-1110 • Adapter 1
Puller
790-101-4000 (490 kN {50 ton}) t 1
790-101-1102 Pump t 1
1 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) t 2 Removal and installation of
Operator’s cab glass X operator's cab glass (stuck
(stuck glass) 2 20Y-54-13180 Adapter t 2 glass)
10 PC130-8
Sketch of special tool 1

Note: Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these
sketches.
F6 Push tool
a Unless otherwise specified, there shall be no burrs or flushes at the corner.
M1 Push tool
PC130-8 11
sketches.
M2 Installer
R Guide
12 PC130-8
sketches.
T2 Push tool
T3 Push tool
PC130-8 13
sketches.
T4 Push tool
14 PC130-8
PC130-8 15

© 2009 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
16 PC130-8
SEN04127-01
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Engine and cooling system
Removal and installation of fuel supply pump assembly ................................................................................ 2
Removal and installation of fuel injector assembly ......................................................................................... 5
Removal and installation of front oil seal ........................................................................................................ 8
Removal and installation of rear oil seal ....................................................................................................... 10
Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly .................................................................................... 13
Removal and installation of radiator assembly ............................................................................................. 23
Removal and installation of aftercooler assembly......................................................................................... 25
Removal and installation of work equipment oil cooler assembly ................................................................. 27
Removal and installation of engine and work equipment pump assembly ................................................... 29
Removal and installation of fuel tank assembly ............................................................................................ 37
PC130-8 1
Removal and installation of fuel

supply pump assembly 1
Removal
k Disconnect the cable from the negative (–)
terminal of the battery.
1. Open fuel drain valve (1) and drain the fuel.

a Open the fuel tank cap in advance.
6 Fuel tank: 247 l
8. Loosen sleeve nuts (10) and (11) and remove

high-pressure pipe (12). [*2]
9. Remove the pin and disconnect spill hose (13).
10. Remove joint bolts (14), (15) and (16) and fuel
tubes (17) and (18). [*3]
a Joint bolt (16) is fixing fuel tube (18) to
under supply pump (25).
2. Open and lock engine hood (2).
3. Remove bracket (3).
4. Disconnect connector PREG (4).
5. Disconnect wiring clamps (5), (6) and (7).
6. Disconnect fuel hose (8) from the supply

pump.
7. Remove 2 boots (9) from the common rail and

supply pump. [*1]
2 PC130-8
11. Removal of supply pump and pump holder 12. Remove the supply pump assembly from the
assembly pump holder according to the following proce-
1) Remove 4 mounting bolts (19) from the dure.
gear case side. 1) Loosen nut (22) and pull out supply pump
2) Fully loosen mounting bolts (20) on the gear (23) with gear puller [1] [*5]
pump holder side. [*4] a Fully loosen the nut and keep it
a Mounting bolts (20) cannot be installed to the shaft until the supply
removed from between the supply pump gear is pulled out.
pump and pump holder at this time.
3) Remove supply pump and pump holder
assembly (21).
2) Remove 3 nuts (24) and remove supply

pump (25) from pump holder (26).
a The following figure shows locations
(a) of mounting bolts (19).
a The following figure shows locations

(b) of mounting bolts (24).
PC130-8 3
Installation
q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of
removal.
[*1]
a Set the boot slit facing outward and downward.
a The boot is designed with fire safety to prevent
fuel from splashing onto the hot engine if fuel
leaks.
[*2]
k Never bend a high-pressure pipe for the
convenience sake.
k The clamp used for fixing a high-pressure
pipe must be a genuine Komatsu part and it
must be tightened to the specified torque.
k Be sure to install the boot to the sleeve nut
after installing the high-pressure pipe.
a Before installing a high-pressure pipe, confirm
the following points. If any abnormality was
found, replace it with new one. Otherwise,
leakage of fuel can result.
q No visible striations (b) or patchy dents (c) in
the taper seal portion of the connection ( (a)
portion: area 2 mm inside the tip).
q No deformation in portion (d) (at the end of the
taper seal portion: 2 mm inside the tip).
3 Sleeve nut (10) on the common rail side:

25.5 – 29.4 Nm {2.6 – 3.0 kgm}
3 Sleeve nut (11) on the supply pump side:
18 – 23 Nm {1.9 – 2.3 kgm}
[*3]
3 Joint bolts (14) and (15):
24.5 – 34.3 Nm {2.5 – 3.51 kgm}
3 Joint bolt (16):

19.6 – 29.4 Nm {2.0 – 3.0 kgm}
[*4]
a For mounting bolt (20), install M6 bolt with LT-
2A.
[*5]
3 Pump gear mount nut:
65 – 75 Nm {6.6 – 7.6 kgm}
4 PC130-8
Removal and installation of fuel 3. Removal of the high-pressure pipe

a The following indicates the removal of
injector assembly 1 injector assembly of cylinder No. 1 for
example.
Removal
k
1) Remove clamp (3) from the high-pressure
Disconnect the cable from the negative (–)
pipe.
2) Remove boot (4) from the injector and
common rail sides. [*1]
a Open the fuel tank cap in advance.
6 Fuel tank: 247 l
3) Remove injector wiring connector (5).

Connector No.
Cylinder No. 1: CN1
2. Open and lock engine hood (2). Cylinder No. 2: CN2
Cylinder No. 3: CN3
Cylinder No. 4: CN4
4) Remove pin (6) and disconnect spill hose
(7).
5) Loosen sleeve nut (8) both on the injector
side and common rail side and remove
high-pressure pipe (9). [*2]
PC130-8 5
4. Removal of injector assembly Installation

1) Remove holder mounting bolt (10) and q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of
remove holder (11). [*3] removal.
2) Remove injector assembly (12). [*4]
[*1]
a Set the boot slit facing outward and downward.
a The boot is designed with fire safety to prevent
fuel from splashing onto the hot engine if fuel
leaks.
[*2]
k Never bend a high-pressure pipe for the
convenience sake.
k The clamp used for fixing a high-pressure
pipe must be a genuine Komatsu part and it
must be tightened to the specified torque.
k Be sure to install the boot to the sleeve nut
after installing the high-pressure hose.
a Before Installing a high-pressure pipe, confirm
the following points. If any abnormality was
found, replace it with new one. Otherwise,
leakage of fuel can result.
q No visible striations (b) or patchy dents (c) in
the taper seal portion of the connection ( (a)
portion: area 2mm inside the tip).
q No deformation in portion (d) (at the end of the
taper seal portion: 2 mm inside the tip).
3 Sleeve nut (8):

25.5 – 29.4 Nm {2.6 – 3.0 kgm}
[*3]
3 Holder mounting bolt (10):
27 – 30 Nm {2.8 – 3.1 kgm}
6 PC130-8
[*4]
q When reusing injector, always replace Oring
(13) and gasket (14) with new ones.
PC130-8 7
Removal and installation of front 7. Remove front oil seal (9).

oil seal 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
bol
Q'ty
790-101-5201 Push tool (kit) t 1
795T-221-1010 Plate 1
A 1
790-101-5221 • Grip 1
01010-51225 • Bolt 1
Removal
1. Remove the engine assembly, referring to
"Removal and installation of engine assembly."
2. Remove alternator mounting bolt (1).
3. Loosen fan belt adjust bolt (2) and remove fan

belt (3). [*1]
4. Remove engine speed sensor connector (4).
5. Remove speed sensor mounting bolt (5) and

remove speed sensor (6). [*2]
6. Remove crankshaft pulley mounting bolt (7)

and remove crankshaft pulley (8). [*3]
8 PC130-8
Installation
1. Use tool A1 (outside diameter of 80 mm) to
press front oil seal (9) in gear case (10).
1) Check the crankshaft end corner and the
oil seal lip sliding surface for flaws, burrs,
scars, or rust, before installing the oil seal.
2) Fill about 2 cc of grease to between the oil
seal lips.
2 Front oil seal: grease (G2-LI)
2. Install the crankshaft pulley.

a Align key (a) of crankshaft (11) with key
groove (b) of crankshaft pulley (8) and
install the pulley.
3. For the rest of the installation work, carry out

the installation in the reverse order of removal.
[*1]
Confirm the direction of the fan.
[*2]
2 Speed sensor mounting bolt (5):
7.0 – 11 Nm {0.7 – 1.1 kgm}
[*3]
2 Crankshaft pulley mounting bolt (7):
343 – 402 Nm {35 – 41 kgm}
PC130-8 9
Removal and installation of rear 2) Temporarily lift flywheel (3).

3) Remove 7 flywheel mounting bolts (4)
oil seal 1 except one. [*2]
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
bol
Q'ty
Seal puller assem-
2 795-931-1100 q 1
bly
790-101-5401 • Push tool (kit) t 1
A
795T-221-1020 Plate 1
3
790-101-5421 • Grip 1
01010-51240 • Bolt 1
4) Loosen flywheel mounting bolt (4).
k Leave 3 threads or 4 engaged to
Removal prevent the flywheel from suddenly

k
shooting out in the following pro-
Disconnect the negative (–) terminal of the
cedure.
battery beforehand.
5) Pull out the flywheel by prying with a bar,
etc.
1. Remove the work equipment pump assembly,
6) Checking that flywheel (3) is manually
referring to "Removal and Installation of Work
removable, remove the flywheel mounting
Equipment Pump Assembly."
bolt (4).
7) Lift flywheel (3) and remove it.
2. Removal of the flywheel
1) Remove coupling mounting bolt (1) and 4 Flywheel: 25 kg
remove coupling (2). [*1]
10 PC130-8
3. Removal of the rear oil seal Installation

1) Screw the tip of tool A2 into the metal ring 1. Rear oil seal mounting procedure
of seal (5) and pull it out with the impact of Use tool A3 (outside diameter of 120 mm) to
a slide hammer [1]. install rear oil seal to flywheel housing.
a For the ease of pulling out the seal, a Fill about 3 cc of grease to between the
slightly hammer it in to unfasten it rear oil seal lips.
from the housing before pulling it out. 2 Front oil seal: grease (G2 – LI)
a Do not use a drill as chips may enter
the engine.
2. For the following installation work, carry out the

installation in the reverse order of removal.
(Photo shows work on a single unit of engine, but
the procedures are the same.) [*1]
3 Coupling mounting bolt:
98 – 122.6 Nm (10 – 12.5 Kgm)
[*2]
q Tighten the flywheel mounting bolts according
to the following procedure:
1) Apply engine oil EO#30 to the bolt threads.
2 Mounting bolt threads:
Engine oil (EO30)
2) Tighten the bolts in the order of 1 to 6 as
shown in the diagram (CPP14824).
3) Tighten the bolts each in two actions by
applying torque as specified in the order of
item 2) above.
3 Mounting bolt:
Unit: Nm{kgm}
procedure target range
1st time 88.2 {9.0} 58.7 – 117.7 {6.0 – 12.0}
2nd time 191.3 {19.5} 186.4 – 196.2 {19.0 – 20.0}
PC130-8 11
[*3]
q Measuring radial runout of flywheel
1) Install dial gauge [2] to the flywheel hous-
ing.
2) Set the probe of the dial gauge at right
angles to the spigot joint (a) or the outer
periphery of the flywheel.
3) Rotate the crank shaft one full turn and
measure the difference of the maximum
values of runout of the needle.
a Check that the position of needle
remains in its original position after
the flywheel is rotated one full turn.
Radial runout: Max. 0.15 mm
q Measuring face runout of flywheel

1) As with the measurement of radial runout,
set the probe of the dial gauge at right
angles to end face (b) close to the outer
periphery of the flywheel.
a For measurement, move the crank
shaft forward or backward to prevent
error caused by an end play.
2) Rotate the crank shaft one full turn and
measure the difference of the maximum
values of runout of the needle.
Face runout: Max. 0.25 mm
12 PC130-8
Removal and installation of 4. Disconnect air conditioner compressor accord-

ing to the following procedure.
cylinder head assembly 1 1) Disconnect air conditioner hose clamp (6).
Removal

a After starting draining the fuel, open the
fuel filler cap.
6 Fuel tank: 247 l
2) Disconnect wiring connector AC02 (7).

3) Remove air conditioner compressor drive
belt protective cover (8).
4) Loosen air conditioner compressor mount-

ing bolt (9) and drive belt adjustment bolt
(10) and remove drive belt (11). [*1]
5) Remove air conditioner compressor mount-
ing bolt (9) and air conditioner compressor
belt tension adjustment bolt (10) and dis-
connect air conditioner compressor assem-
3. Remove covers (3) – (5). bly (12).
a Move the air conditioner compressor
assembly aside and bind it with a
rope, etc. so that it will not be an
obstacle.
PC130-8 13
5. Remove the muffler assembly according to the 8) Lift off muffler assembly (23) and bracket
following procedure. together.
1) Remove bracket assembly (13).
2) Remove bracket (14).
3) Remove 4 upper mounting bolts (15) and
2 partition plate mounting bolts (16) and
remove frame (17) and bracket (18)
together.
4) Remove side covers (19) and (20).
a Remove mounting bolt (19a) of side
cover (19), too.
5) Remove partition plate (21).
6) Remove clamp (22a) between the turbo-
charger and muffler. [*2]
6. Disconnect heater hose clamps (24) and (25).

a Disconnect clamp (25) and bracket (26)
together.
7. Disconnect air hose (27) from air intake con-

nector (28). [*3]
a Make marks at the hose end and tube so
that it can be reconnected correctly.
8. Remove brackets (29) and (29a) and partition

plates (30) and (31).
7) Remove 4 muffler assembly bracket

mounting bolts (22).
14 PC130-8
9. Remove the turbocharger assembly according 6) Disconnect turbocharger lubrication inlet

to the following procedure. tube (39) from the turbocharger. [*7]
1) Disconnect blow-by hose (32) from cylin- 7) Disconnect turbocharger lubrication return
der head cover (33). tube (40) from the turbocharger.
2) Remove 3 nuts (34) and cylinder head
cover (33). [*4]
a When removing nut (34), take care
that the packing sticking to the head
cover will not fall.
8) Remove 6 inside mounting bolts, leaving 2

exhaust manifold mounting bolts (41) on
the right and left sides. [*8]
9) Sling turbocharger and exhaust manifold
assembly (42) and remove remaining 2
3) Remove protective cover (35). mounting bolts (41).
4) Disconnect connector (36) between the
turbocharger and air cleaner from the tur-
bocharger. [*5]
10) Lift off turbocharger and exhaust manifold

assembly (42).
4 Turbocharger and exhaust manifold
5) Remove 3 mounting bolts (37) and discon- assembly: 15 kg
nect air connector (38) from the turbo-
charger. [*6]
PC130-8 15
10. Remove the air intake connector and electrical 11. Disconnect injector wiring connectors CN1 –
intake air heater according to the following pro- CN4 (52) and boost pressure sensor connector
cedure. [*9] PTIM (53).
1) Disconnect electrical intake air heater
cable (43). 12. Disconnect 3 wiring clamps (54).
2) Remove 4 mounting bolts (44) – (47) and
air intake connector (48).
a Since oil level gauge (49) is also tight-
ened with bolt (44), bind the discon-
nected oil level gauge with a string,
etc. so that it will not be an obstacle.
a Ground cable (50) is also tightened
with bolt (45).
13. Remove the high-pressure pipe according to

1) Disconnect coolant temperature sensor
wiring clamp (55).
2) Remove spill hose mounting pin (56) and
disconnect spill hose (57).
3) Remove 2 high-pressure pipe clamps
(58).
3) Remove electrical intake air heater 4) Remove 8 boots (59) from injector (60)
assembly (51). and common rail (61). [*10]
5) Loosen the sleeve nuts and remove 4
high-pressure pipes (62). [*11]
16 PC130-8
14. Remove 8 air intake manifold mounting bolts 3) Remove alternator belt (72). [*14]
(63) and air intake manifold (64). [*12] a Bolt (a) is tightening the water pump.
Remove it when removing the water
pump. (See 9).)
15. Remove the injector assembly according to the

following procedure. [*13]
1) Remove 4 injector mounting bolts (65) and 4) Disconnect coolant temperature sensor
4 holders (66). TWTR (73).
2) Remove injector assembly (67). 5) Disconnect radiator upper hose (74),
heater hoses (75) and (76), and radiator
lower hose (77) from the water pump.
[*15]
a Heater hose (76) and radiator lower
hose (77) are removed together.
6) Remove fan guard (78).
7) Remove 6 fan pulley mounting bolts (79).
8) Remove fan and pulley assembly (80).
a Place fan and pulley assembly (80)
down.
16. Remove the water pump according to the fol-

lowing procedure.
1) Loosen alternator mounting bolts (68) and
(69).
2) Loosen locknut (70) of the alternator belt
tension adjustment bolt and fully loosen
alternator belt tension adjustment bolt (71)
until the alternator belt can be removed.
PC130-8 17
9) Remove 4 water pump mounting bolts 18. Remove the cylinder head assembly according
(82). to the following procedure.
a Among mounting bolts (82), one (a) is 1) Pull out 8 push rods (89).
tightening the alternator mounting 2) Remove 17 cylinder head mounting bolts
bracket, too. (See the figure in step (90). [*19]
3.) [*16]
10) Remove water pump (83).
3) Lift off cylinder head (91).

4 Cylinder head assembly: 30 kg
17. Remove the rocker arm assembly according to
1) Loosen locknut (84) and fully loosen
adjustment screw (85). [*17]
a Loosen the intake and exhaust
adjustment screws of all the cylin-
ders.
2) Remove 3 mounting bolts (86) and 5
mounting bolts (87) and remove rocker
arm assembly (88). [*18]
a Record the locations of mounting
bolts (86).
18 PC130-8
Installation [*5]
q Carry out installation in the reverse order to 3 Air hose clamp bolt:
removal. 10.5 ± 0.5 Nm {107 ± 5 kgm}
[*1] [*6]
a For adjustment of the air conditioner compres- a If air hose (92) was disconnected from air con-
sor belt tension, see "Testing and adjusting air nector (38), install the MIKALOR clamp
conditioner compressor belt tension". according to the following procedure.
a Use a new MIKALOR clamp.
[*2] a Align the hose to the original position
q Install the clamp mounting bolts between the
(marking position).
turbocharger and muffler according to the fol-
lowing procedure. a Reference
3 Clamp mounting bolt: Depth of insertion: 65 mm (aftercooler side)
1st time: 39.2 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm} a Set the bridge (BR) under the clamp bolt
2nd time: and lap it over band (BD) at least (b)
68.6 – 122.5 Nm {7 – 12.5 kgm} reaches 5 mm.
[*3] a Do not use an impact wrench, when
a Use a new MIKALOR clamp. tighten the clamp.
a Align the hose to the original position (marking 2 Clamp bolt (BC): Lubricanting oil
position). (THREE-BOND PANDO 18B)
a Reference
Depth of insertion: 80 mm (aftercooler side) q When reusing the hose
a Set the bridge (BR) under the clamp bolt and a Install the clamp to the clamp mark
lap it over band (BD) at least (b) reaches 5 made on the hose.
mm. 3 Tighten to torque of at least 6
a Do not use an impact wrench, when tighten the Nm {0.6kgm}
clamp.
2 Clamp bolt (BC): Lubricanting oil (THREE-
q When using a new hose
a Tighten until dimention (BDG) is 0 – 3
BOND PANDO 18B)
mm.
q When reusing the hose
a Install the clamp to the clamp mark made
on the hose.
3 Tighten to torque of at least 6 Nm
{0.6kgm}
mm.
[*4]
q When installing the head cover, observe the
following precautions.
a Fit the O-ring to the head cover.
a When installing the head cover mounting
nuts and washers, check that the packing
is fitted to the head cover.
a Check that the packing is free of damage.
3 Cylinder head cover mounting nut:
7.84 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}
PC130-8 19
[*7] [*11]
3 Lubrication inlet hose mounting nut: q Precautions for installing high-pressure pipe
9.8 – 12.7 Nm {1.0 – 1.3 kgm} k Do not bend the high-pressure pipe to col-
lect before installing.
[*8] k Be sure to use the genuine high-pressure
q Installation procedure for exhaust manifold pipe clamps and observe the tightening
1) Install the guide bolts to the cylinder head torque.
and set the gasket. a Before installing the high-pressure pipe, check
a Set the gasket with the side of stamp it for the following defects. If there is any of
of "6205" on the manifold side. these defects, it can cause fuel leakage.
2) Install the exhaust manifold and tighten Accordingly, replace the high-pressure pipe.
the mounting bolts. q Check the taper seal of the connecting
3 Exhaust manifold mounting bolt: part (Part (j): Part of 2 mm from the end)
34.3 – 53.9 Nm {3.5 – 5.5 kgm} for visible lengthwise slit (k) and dent (l).
[*9] q Check part (m) (End of the taper seal: Part
q When installing air intake connector (48) and at 2 mm from the end) for stepped-type
electrical intake air heater assembly (45), wear (fatigue) which your nail can feel.
observe the following precautions.
a When installing air intake connector (48)
and electrical intake air heater (51),
replace the gasket with new one.
a When installing air intake connector
mounting bolt (44), tighten oil level gauge
(49), too.
a When installing air intake connector
mounting bolt (45), tighten ground cable
(50), too.
a If ground cable (50) was removed from
electrical intake air heater (51), install it to
electrical intake air heater (51) by tighten-
3
ing ground cable mounting bolt (93) to the
Sleeve nut:
following torque.
3 Ground cable mounting bolt:
25.5 – 29.4 Nm {2.6 – 3.0 kgm}
4.9 – 5.9 Nm {0.5 – 0.6 kgm}
[*12]
a Before installing the air intake manifold, apply
gasket sealant to it.
Apply gasket sealant in a string of about 1 mm
in diameter.
2 Mounting face: Gasket sealant (LG-7)
[*10]
k After installing the high-pressure pipe, be
sure to install the boot to the sleeve nut.
k Direct the slits of the boot out and down.
a The boot is installed so that fuel will not spout
over the hot parts of the engine and catch fire
when it leaks for some reason.
20 PC130-8
[*13] [*17] [*18]

q Installation procedure for injector a Before installing rocker arm assembly (88),
1) Install seal (94) to injector (67). loosen locknut (84) and fully loosen adjustment
2) Install copper gasket (95) to injector (67). screw (85).
3) Insert injector (67) in the cylinder head. a When installing rocker arm assembly (88),
4) Install holder (66) to injector (67). check that the adjustment screw ball is fitted in
5) Tighten holder (66) with injector mounting the push rod socket and tighten the mounting
bolt (65). bolts alternately.
a Check that holder (66) is installed a When installing 3 rocker arm mounting bolts
securely to groove (b) of injector (67) (86), check their locations.
and then tighten the bolt. 3 Rocker arm mounting bolts (86), (87):
3 Holder mounting bolt: 19.6 – 29.4 Nm {2.0 – 3.0 kgm}
27 – 30 Nm {2.8 – 3.1 kgm} q For adjustment of the valve clearance, see
Testing and adjusting, "Adjusting valve clear-
ance".
[*14]
a For adjustment of the alternator belt tension,
see "Testing and adjusting alternator belt ten-
sion".
[*15]
3 Radiator hose clamp bolt:
(Both upper and lower hoses)
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*16]
q Tighten water pump mounting bolt (a) to install
alternator mounting bracket (96), too.
PC130-8 21
[*19]
q Tightening procedure for cylinder head mount-
ing bolts
Apply molybdenum disulfide lubricant (LM-P)
to the threaded parts of the cylinder head
mounting bolts and tighten the bolts in the
order shown in the figure according to the fol-
lowing procedure.
3 Cylinder head mounting bolt:
1st time: 68.6 ± 9.8 Nm {7.0 ± 1.0 kgm}
2nd time: 107.8 ± 4.9 Nm {11.0 ± 0.5 kgm}
3rd time: Make marks on bolt head and
cylinder head and tighten 90
degrees (+30/0 degrees).
a After tightening, make 1 punch mark (n) on
each bolt head to indicate the number of tight-
ening time.
a If there are 5 punch marks on a bolt, do not
reuse that bolt but replace it.
Meaning of marks in drawings

F denotes the front of the engine.
R denotes the rear of the engine.
(b) denotes a bolt for plastic-region angle tight-
ening.
p1 denotes a mark on the cylinder head.

p2 denotes a mark on the bolt head.
22 PC130-8
Removal and installation of 5. Open engine hood (6) and lock it.
radiator assembly 1
Removal
k Stop the machine on a level place and
lower it to the ground. Stop the engine and
set the lock lever to locked position.
k Disconnect the negative (–) terminal of the
battery beforehand.
1. Remove lower cover (1).
6. Disconnect radiator overflow hose (7).
7. Disconnect radiator upper hose (8). [*3]
8. Remove 3 plate mounting bolts (9) and remove

plate (10).
2. Open the coolant drain valve (2) to drain. [*1]

6 Coolant: 13.9 l
3. Remove 2 mounting bolts (4) of plate (3) and

remove the cover.
4. Disconnect radiator lower hose (5). [*2]
9. Remove 2 radiator mounting bolts (11). [*4]
PC130-8 23
10. Lift radiator assembly (12) and remove it. [*5] Installation
4 Radiator assembly: 12 kg q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of
removal.
[*1]
5 Coolant: 13.9 l
[*2] [*3]
3 Radiator hose clamp bolt:
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
[*4]
3 Mounting bolt: 44 ± 9.8 Nm {4.5 ± 1.0 kgm}
[*5]
a When installing the radiator assembly, align
the convex portion (a) on the bottom of the
radiator assembly with the concave portion (b)
on the machine.
24 PC130-8
Removal and installation of 4. Loosen 2 clamps (6) and disconnect the air
aftercooler upper hose (7). [*1] [*2]
aftercooler assembly 1
5. Remove 3 mounting bolts (8) and remove plate
Removal
k
(9).
battery beforehand.
6. Remove 2 air aftercooler mounting bolts (10).
2. Remove 2 mounting bolts (2) and disconnect

the air aftercooler lower hose (3).
3. Remove 2 mounting bolts (4) and remove plate

(5).
7. Pull out air aftercooler (11). [*3]

a Take care not to damage sponge around
the aftercooler.
PC130-8 25
Installation [*2]
q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of If air aftercooler upper hose was disconnected by
removal. losening its clamp. Install the MIKALOR clamp
[*1] a Use a new clamp.
a Take care not to damage sponge on the sides a Align the hose to the original position (marking
when installing the aftercooler. position).
a Reference
a When installing the radiator assembly, align Depth of insertion: 85 mm
the convex portion (a) on the bottom of the air a Set the bridge (BR) under the clamp bolt and
aftercooler with the concave portion (b) on the lap it over band (BD) at least (b) reaches 5
machine. mm.
a Do not use an impact wrench, when tighten the
clamp.
BOND PANDO 18B)
on the hose.
{0.6kgm}
mm.
[*3]
26 PC130-8
Removal and installation of work 3. Open the rear left inspection window and
remove 2 mounting bolts (3).
equipment oil cooler assembly 1
4. Disconnect tube (4) under the oil cooler.
Removal
k Stop the machine on a level ground, lower
the work equipment to the ground, stop the
engine, and set the lock lever in the lock
position.
k Loosen the hydraulic tank cap gradually to
release the pressure in the hydraulic tank.
a Put tags to the pipings to prevent a mistake in
re-connecting them.
1. Remove undercover (1).
5. Remove 2 tube mounting bolts (5) above the

oil cooler and disconnect tube (6) above the oil
cooler. [*2]
6. Remove oil cooler mounting bolts (7).
7. Remove 2 nut mounting bolts (8).
2. Loosen drain plug (2) of the oil cooler outlet

tube and drain the oil in the piping. [*1]
8. Remove 2 mounting bolts (9) on the side of the

oil cooler. [*3]
PC130-8 27
9. Pull out oil cooler assembly (10). Installation

q Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
[*1]
3 Hydraulic oil drain plug:
58.8 – 78.5 Nm {6.0 – 8.0 kgm}
5 Hydraulic tank: 69 l
[*2] – [*6]
10. Remove the following mounting bolts and

divide the oil cooler.
1) 2 upper oil cooler piping mounting bolts
(11)
2) 2 upper mounting bolts (12) of oil cooler
side bracket on each side [*4]
3) 2 lower oil cooler piping mounting bolts

(13) [*5]
4) 2 lower mounting bolts (14) of oil cooler
side bracket on each side [*6]
28 PC130-8
Removal and installation of 2. Loosen hydraulic oil drain plug (5) and drain
engine and work equipment pump the hydraulic oil. [*1]
assembly 1 (Specified quantity of oil): 145 l
Removal
position.
re-connecting them.
1. Remove hydraulic tank undercover (1), radia-

tor undercover (2), engine undercover and 1) Open fuel drain valve (6) and drain the
work equipment undercover (4). fuel. [*2]
a After starting draining the fuel, open
the fuel filler cap.
6 When fuel tank is full: 247 l
PC130-8 29
4. Remove covers (8) – (10). 10. Remove brackets (20) and (20a) and partition
plates (21) and (22).
5. Remove bracket assembly (11).

11. Disconnect the air conditioner compressor
6. Remove bracket (12). according to the following procedure.
1) Disconnect air conditioner hose clamp
7. Remove 4 upper mounting bolts (13) and 2 (23).
partition plate mounting bolts (14) and remove
frame (15) and bracket (16) together.
8. Remove side covers (17) and (18).

a Remove mounting bolt (17a) of side cover
(17), too.
9. Remove partition plate (19).
2) Disconnect wiring connector AC02 (24).

3) Remove air conditioner compressor belt
protective cover (25).
30 PC130-8
4) Loosen air conditioner compressor mount- 6) Disconnect radiator lower hose (38) from
ing bolt (26) and drive belt adjustment bolt the water pump. [*8]
(27) and remove drive belt (28). [*3] a Since heater hose (39) is connected
5) Remove air conditioner compressor to radiator lower hose (38), discon-
mounting bolt (26) and air conditioner nect them together.
compressor belt tension adjustment bolt
(27) and disconnect air conditioner com-
pressor assembly (29).
a Move the air conditioner compressor
assembly aside and bind it with a
rope, etc. so that it will not be an
obstacle.
12. Disconnect the hoses according to the follow-

ing procedure.
1) Disconnect radiator upper hose (30) from
the radiator. [*4]
2) Disconnect aftercooler upper hose (31)
from the aftercooler. [*5]
3) Disconnect 2 heater hose clamps (32) and
disconnect heater hose (34) from water
pump (35).
4) Disconnect hose (36) between the turbo-
charger and air cleaner from the turbo-
charger. [*6]
5) Disconnect connector (37) of the hose
between the turbocharger and aftercooler
from the turbocharger. [*7]
PC130-8 31
13. Disconnect wirings according to the following 4) Disconnect electrical intake air heater wir-
procedure. ing M23 (46).
1) Disconnect engine controller wiring con-
nectors ENG1 (40), CE02 (41) and CE03
(42).
2) Disconnect ground cable (43) from engine
controller mounting bracket (44).
3) Disconnect ENG1 connector wiring clamp
mounting bracket (45) and ENG1 connec-
tor wiring clamp together from engine con-
troller mounting bracket (43).
a The wiring of connector ENG1 (40) is
tightened with wiring clamp mounting
bracket (45).
a The wiring clamp of connector CE02
(41) and CE03 (42) and controller
5) Disconnect starting motor wirings M20
mounting bracket (44) are tightened
(47) and M17 (48). [*9]
with wiring clamp bracket (45). 6) Disconnect starting motor wiring clamp
(49).
a Starting motor wiring M20 (47) is a
pair of wire tightened together.
a Starting motor wiring M17 (48) can be
disconnected more easily from under-
side of the engine.
7) Disconnect engine oil pan oil temperature
sensor connector (50).
a Disconnect oil temperature sensor
connector (50) from underside of the
engine.
32 PC130-8
8) Disconnect alternator wirings M21 (51) 16. Remove the fan assembly according to the fol-
and M22 (52). [*10] lowing procedure.
a Alternator wiring M22 (52) is a pair of 1) Loosen alternator mounting bolts (58) and
wire tightened together. (59).
9) Disconnect 2 wiring clamps (53). 2) Fully loosen alternator belt tension adjust-
ment bolt (61) until the alternator belt can
be removed.
a Do not loosen double nut (60).
3) Remove alternator belt (62). [*11]
14. Disconnect fuel hoses (54) and (55) from fuel

supply pump (56).
15. Disconnect fuel hose clamp (57).

4) Remove fan guard (63).
5) Remove fan pulley mounting bolt (64) and
remove fan and pulley assembly (65).
a Place the removed fan and pulley
assembly down.
PC130-8 33
17. Remove the piping and wiring around the work 6) Disconnect fuel filter (73) from bracket
equipment pump according to the following (74).
procedure. 7) Disconnect fuel prefilter (75) and bracket
1) Disconnect hoses (66) and (67). (74) together from the frame.
2) Disconnect attachment filter (68) and 8) Disconnect engine oil filter (76) and
bracket together. bracket together from the frame.
3) Disconnect damper case oil supply hose
(69).
4) Disconnect hydraulic oil filter (70).
a The damper case oil supply hose
bracket is tightened with 2 mounting
bolts (69a), too.
9) Disconnect 5 hydraulic hoses (77) – (81).

10) Disconnect suction hose (82) and elbow
(82a) together from the pump. [*12]
5) Disconnect connectors V11 (71) and P22

(72).
18. Remove 4 engine mounting bolts (83). [*13]

a Remove ground cable (84) installed to the
front right mounting bolt.
34 PC130-8
19. Lift off engine and work equipment pump Installation

assembly (85). q Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
[*1]
(Specified quantity of oil): 145 l
a Start the engine, check the oil level, and add
new oil if necessary.
[*2]
5 Fuel tank: 247 l
[*3]
a For adjustment of the air conditioner compres-
sor belt tension, see "Testing and adjusting air
conditioner compressor belt tension".
[*4] [*8]
3 Radiator hose clamping bolt:
8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {0.9 ± 0.05 kgm}
PC130-8 35
[*5] [*7]
If air hose was disconnected from air connector of a If air hose (84) was disconnected from air con-
air intake manifold, install the MIKALOR clamp nector (35), install the MIKALOR clamp
according to the following procedure. according to "[*5] Installation procedure for
a Use a new clamp. MIKALOR clamp".
a Align the hose to the original position (marking Depth of insertion: 65 mm
position).
a Reference
Depth of insertion: 85 mm
a Set the bridge (BR) under the clamp bolt and
lap it over band (BD) at least (b) reaches 5
mm.
clamp.
BOND PANDO 18B)
on the hose.
{0.6kgm}
[*9]
q When using a new hose 3 Starting motor wiring terminal mounting bolt:
a Tighten until dimention (BDG) is 7 – 10 (M17) 2.6 – 6.6 Nm {0.27 – 0.68 kgm}
mm. (aftercooler side) 0 – 3 mm. (turbo- (M20) 17.7 – 24.5 Nm {1.8 – 2.5 kgm}
charger side)
[*10]
3 Alternator wiring terminal mounting bolt:
(M21) 5.9 – 9.9 Nm {0.6 – 1.0 kgm}
[*11]
a For adjustment of the alternator belt tension,
see "Testing and adjusting alternator belt ten-
sion".
[*12]
a If hose (82) was disconnected from elbow
(82a), install the MIKALOR clamp according to
q Tighten the clamp on the inside of the
[*6] hose first and then tighten the clamp on
3 Air hose clamping bolt: the hose side (elbow side).
10.5 ± 0.5 Nm {107 ± 5 kgm} q Then, referring to "[*5] Installation proce-
dure for MIKALOR clamp", tighten the
hose clamp.
[*13]
3 Engine mounting bolt: LT2
Engine mounting bolt:
235 – 285 Nm {23.5 – 29.5 kgm}
Target: 279.6 Nm {28.5 kgm}
36 PC130-8
Removal and installation of fuel

tank assembly 1
Removal
position.
1. Open the rear right inspection cover and open

drain valve (1) to drain the fuel. [*1]
6 Fuel (When tank is full): 247 l
4. Remove fuel level sensor connector P21 (10).

2. Remove handrail mounting bolts (2), (3) and
(4), 2 pieces each, and remove handrail (5).
a To remove mounting bolts (4), open cover
(6).
3. Remove 2 cover upper mounting bolts (7) and

2 cover lower mounting bolts (9) and remove
cover (8).
5. Disconnect hose clamp (10).
6. Disconnect fuel return hose (11).
PC130-8 37
7. Remove fuel tank undercover (12). Installation

removal.
[*1]
5 Fuel tank: 247 l
[*2]
a When installing the 2 bolts on the hydraulic
tank side, install the height adjustment shims,
too.
3 Fuel tank mounting bolt:
235 – 285 Nm {23.5 – 29.5 kgm}
8. Disconnect 2 fuel hoses (13) and (14).
9. Remove 4 fuel tank mounting bolts (15). [*2]

a Height adjustment shims (16) are installed
to the 2 bolts on the hydraulic tank side.
10. Lift off fuel tank assembly (17).

4 Fuel tank assembly: 120 kg
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
40 PC130-8
SEN04128-01
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Power train
Removal and installation of travel motor and final drive assembly ................................................................. 2
Disassembly and assembly of travel motor and final drive assembly............................................................. 4
Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly ................................................... 41
Disassembly and assembly of swing machinery assembly .......................................................................... 43
Removal and installation of swing circle assembly ....................................................................................... 49
PC130-8 1
Removal and installation of travel 4. Remove all travel motor and final mounting
bolts (4), except 1.
motor and final drive assembly 1
Removal
1. Remove sprocket.
For details, see "Removal and installation of
sprocket".
k Lower the work equipment completely to

the ground and stop the engine. Then
loosen the oil filler cap slowly to release the
pressure inside the hydraulic tank.
2. Disconnect 4 mounting bolts (1) and remove

travel motor cover (2).
5. Sling the travel motor and final drive assembly
(5) and remove mounting bolt.
6. Lift off travel motor and final drive assembly.

[*1]
a Be extremely careful not to damage the
nipple tool surface of the hose mount.
4 Travel motor and final drive assembly:
150 kg
3. Disconnect 4 travel motor hoses (2).
2 PC130-8
Installation
removal.
[*1]
2 Thread of travel motor and final drive
assembly mounting bolt :
Thread tightener (LT-2)
3 Travel motor and final drive assembly
mounting bolt :
235 – 285 Nm {23.5 – 29.5 kgm}
a Bleed the air from the travel motor.
For details, see Testing and adjusting,
"Bleeding air from travel motor".
q Refilling with oil (hydraulic tank)

a Add oil through the oil filler to the specified
level.
Run the engine to circulate the oil through
the system. Then check the oil level
again.
PC130-8 3
Disassembly and assembly of travel motor and final drive assembly 1

Component parts
4 PC130-8
PC130-8 5
6 PC130-8
List of part name

No. Part name No. Part name
1 Hub 161 Piston
2 Spindle 162 Shoe
3 Carrier A 167 Pivot
4 Sun gear A 171 Dowel pin
5 Planetary gear A 185 Spring
6 Pin 201 Valve seat
7 Carrier B 202 Valve
8 Sun gear B 203 Relief valve
9 Planetary gear B 204 Collar
10 Pin 205 Plug
11 Thrust washer A 206 Spring
12 Thrust washer B 207 O-ring
13 Thrust plate 208 Ring
14 Cover 209 O-ring
15 Coupling 210 Ring
16 Pin 211 O-ring
17 Pin 212 O-ring
22 Lock washer 213 Shim
23 Shim 301 Rear flange
24 Ball bearing 323 Spool
27 Bearing 324 Plug
28 Bearing 325 Spring retainer
29 Floating seal 326 Plug
30 Plug 327 Valve
31 O-ring 328 Spring
32 O-ring 329 Orifice
33 O-ring 330 Spring
34 Dowel pin 331 O-ring
35 Hexagonal socket head bolt 336 O-ring
36 Ring 341 Dowel pin
102 Shaft 343 Hexagonal socket head bolt
103 Swash plate 352 Plug
104 Cylinder block 353 Seal ball
105 Piston 354 Hexagonal socket head plug
106 Shoe 357 Plug
107 Retainer plate 358 O-ring
108 Thrust ball 359 O-ring
109 Timing plate 363 Spool
110 Washer 366 Spring
112 Piston 376 Orifice
113 Spring 377 Filter
114 Spring 378 Seal ball
115 Disc 379 Plug
116 Plate 380 Plug
132 Oil seal 381 Piston
135 O-ring 383 O-ring
139 O-ring 384 Hexagonal socket head plug
145 THS snap ring 396 Hexagonal socket head plug
149 Ball bearing 398 Hexagonal socket head plug
150 Ball bearing 399 Plate
151 Needle
PC130-8 7
Outline of maintenance
1. Tools
1) Common tools
No. Part name Model/Dimension Q'ty
2.5 (M5), 3 (M6), 4 (NPTF 1/16), 5 (PF 1/8), 6 (PF 1/4),
1 Hexagonal wrench 1 each
8 (M10, PF 3/8), 10 (M12, PF 1/2)
2 Socket wrench handle Gourd-shaped 1
Dial type: 50 N
Dial type: 100 N
3 Torque wrench 1 each
Dial type: 300 N
Dial type: 560 N
4 Torque wrench adapter – 1 each
5 Socket wrench Width across flats: 24,41 mm 1
6 Extension bar 150 mm 1
7 Hammer Various 1 each
8 Plastic hammer L: 400 mm 1
9 Flat-head screwdriver L: 50, 150 mm 1 each
10 Snap ring pliers For shaft and hole 1 each
11 Pliers 200 mm 1
Lifting load: Min. 2,940 N {300 kg} 1 set
Eyebolt (M16) (2)
12 Sling Eyebolt (M12) (3)
Eyebolt (PF 1/2) (2)
Wire with hook (1)
13 Container Common vat, W450 x D300 x H120 mm 2
14 Leather gloves – 1 pair
2) Bolts
No. Part name Model/Dimension Q'ty
1 Hexagonal socket head bolt M12 (P1.5 x 40 mm) 2
3) Materials
Use/Part No. Part name Model/Dimension Q'ty
Disassembly and assembly Common work stand – 1
Washing of parts Washing tank Prewashing and finish washing 1
(24) Press performance: Min. 9,800 N {1,000 kg}
24, 104, 149 Press stand (104) Press performance: Min. 1,960 N {200 kg} 1
(149) Press performance: Min. 1,960 N {200 kg}
Heating temperature: Min. 100 °C
149 Heating tank 1
Capacity: Min. 500 x 500 x 500
Drying of cleaned parts Compressed air Air pressure: 0.29 – 0.49 MPa {3 – 5 kg/cm2} –
8 PC130-8
4) Tools to be manufactured Push tool [4]

Work stand [1] q Used to press fit oil seal (132) to spin-
q Used to fix the travel motor for disas- dle (2).
sembly and assembly.
Jig [5]
No. 1 holder [2] q Used to install lock washer [22] to the
q Used to install spring (114), washer groove of spindle [2].
(110), and snap ring (145) to cylinder
block (104).
q Used to remove spring (114) from cyl-
inder block (104).
Push tool [6]

q Used to press fit ball bearing (24) to
hub (1).
No. 2 holder [3]

q Used to remove ball bearing (149)
from shaft (102).
PC130-8 9
Steel bar [7] No. 1 mounting jig [10]

q Used to remove ball bearing (24) from q Used to install floating seal (29) to
hub (1). hub (1).
Eyebolt [8] No. 2 mounting jig [11]

q Used to sling the travel motor, spindle q Used to install floating seal (29) to
(2), and hub (1). hub (1) and spindle (2).
Use Dimension (A)
Hub M16
Hub M10
Spindle M16
Travel motor M16
No. 3 mounting jig [12]

q Used to install floating seal (29) to
spindle (2).
Spatula [9]
q Used to remove timing plate (109)
from rear flange (301).
10 PC130-8
Pin punch [13]

q Used to remove the outer race from
ball bearing (24).
PC130-8 11
2. Tightening torque
Part Nominal size of Width across
Part name Q'ty Torque (Nm {kgm})
No. part flats (mm)
30, 357 Plug PF 1/2 10 4 98.1 ± 19.6 {10.0 ± 2.0}
35 Hexagonal socket head bolt M10 (P1.5) 8 12 66.7 ± 3.92 {6.8 ± 0.4}
203 Sleeve PF 1/2 24 (Socket) 2 98.1 ± 19.6 {10.0 ± 2.0}
205 Plug PF 1/4 6 2 29.4 ± 4.90 {3.0 ± 0.5}
324 Plug M36 (P1.5) 41 (Socket) 2 441 ± 39.2 {45.0 ± 4.0}
343 Hexagonal socket head bolt M12 (P1.75) 10 10 102 ± 15.7 {10.4 ± 1.6}
352 Plug PF 1/8 5 3 12.3 ± 2.45 {1.25 ± 0.25}
354 Hexagonal socket head bolt NPTF 1/16 4 5 9.81 ± 1.96 {1.0 ± 0.2}
380 Plug PF 3/8 8 2 58.8 ± 9.81 {6.0 ± 1.0}
396 Hexagonal socket head bolt PT 1/4 6 2 29.4 ± 4.90 {3.0 ± 0.5}
398 Hexagonal socket head bolt PT 1/8 5 5 12.3 ± 2.45 {1.25 ± 0.25}
3. Weight table
Part No. Part name Weight (kg)
— Travel motor assembly 150
1 Hub 50
2 Spindle 30
3 Others Carrier (A) assembly 15
7 Others Carrier (B) assembly 25
301 Others Rear flange assembly 15
12 PC130-8
Disassembly a For the part Nos. not shown in the figures, see
Preparatory items "Component parts".
1. Preparation before disassembly 1. Washing of travel motor assembly
1) Preparation of work stand 1) Install two eyebolts [8] to the mounting bolt
q Prepare a work stand for disassembly holes of spindle (2).
and assembly of the travel motor. a Install two eyebolts [8] to symmetrical
q Use a work stand so strong that you positions.
can disassemble, assemble, and
place the internal parts of the travel
motor on it.
q Spread a rubber or vinyl sheet on the
work stand.
2) Prepare the tools and materials described
in the previous pages.
2. General precautions for work

k The disassembled internal parts are
oiled and slippery.
Accordingly, take care of handling
them not to injure yourself or damage
them by dropping them. 2) Sling the travel motor assembly and carry
k Flammable material such as kerosene it to the washing tank.
is used to wash the parts. Since it is 4 Travel motor assembly: 150 kg
highly inflammable and can cause a 3) Using a brush, wash the travel motor
fire or a burn, handle it with extreme assembly with a brush thoroughly.
care. a Wash the area between hub (1) and
1) Before disassembling, well understand the spindle (2) (mounting portion of the
inspection items and detected troubles, floating seal) thoroughly since there is
and then work according to the given dirt and sand there.
working procedure.
2) Since each part is manufactured very pre-
cisely, take care of handling them.
Do not hit the parts against each other or
drop them.
3) Never remove the parts forcibly or prying
them. If you do so, the parts may have
burrs and may be broken, and that can
make assembly impossible and lower the
performance.
4) If the parts are left as disassembled, they
may be rusted by moisture and dirt.
When leaving them disassembled, be
sure to take measures to protect them
from rusting and dirt.
5) When disassembling, put match marks on
the matching portions of the parts.
6) During the disassembly, arrange and store
the removed parts neatly to protect them
against damage and loss.
7) Once you remove the seals, do not reuse
them but replace with new ones.
8) A typical model is used for the illustrations
in the following explanation. Even if your
machine is partly different from the
machine indicated for those illustrations,
its assembling procedure is the same.
PC130-8 13
2. Setting travel motor

1) Sling the travel motor assembly and set it
onto the work stand [1].
a While aligning the bolt holes of hub
(1) with those of work stand [1], set
the travel motor assembly.
4. Removal of cover
1) Turn over the travel motor assembly to set
the final drive side up.
2) Remove bolts (35). Since the mating faces
of cover (14) and hub (1) are coated with
sealing material, put a bar to the under-
2) Install the two hexagonal socket head side of the overhang of cover (14) and hit
bolts to symmetrical positions. it up obliquely to remove the cover.
k Securely tighten the two hexagonal k When the cover is hit up obliquely,
(38) socket head bolts (to prevent it may jump and fall.Take care that
the travel motor assembly from the cover will not fall onto your
falling off the work stand when it is foot.
turned over).
3) Install eyebolts [8] to ports (k) and lift up

3. Draining oil in final drive case and remove cover (14) from the hub (1).
1) Set the travel motor assembly on its side
with the drain plug down.
2) Loosen plug (30) of the oil filler port to
release the internal pressure of the case
and then tighten it lightly. (See "Compo-
nent parts")
a If the case is pressurized, oil may
spout out when the drain plug is loos-
ened.
3) If the drain does not flow out well, loosen
the drain plug gradually.
a Remove O-ring (31) of plug (30) and
do not reuse it. (See "Component
parts")
a Set the oil container under the travel
motor to receive the oil.
6 Final drive case: 2.1 l
14 PC130-8
5. Removal of sun gear A 6. Removal of coupling

1) After removing thrust plate (13), remove 1) Remove coupling (15) from shaft (102).
sun gear A (4). (See "Component parts")
7. Removal of sun gear B

1) Install eyebolts [8] to the lifting taps (3
places) of carrier B (7) and remove the
carrier assembly.
4 Carrier assembly: 25 kg
a Set the center axes of the hub and
carrier assembly vertically and lift up
the carrier assembly slowly so that
the internal teeth of the hub will not be
damaged by the end of planetary
gear B (9). (See "Component parts")
2) Remove sun gear B (8) from carrier B (7).

places) of carrier A (3) and remove the
carrier assembly.
carrier assembly vertically and lift up
the carrier assembly slowly so that
the internal teeth of the hub will not be
damaged by the end of planetary
gear A (5). (See "Component parts")
8. Removal of lock washers

1) Fix hub (1) to work stand [1] by using hex-
agonal socket head bolts.
PC130-8 15
2) Put a flat-head screwdriver in the clear- 10. Removal of floating seal

ance between 2 lock washers (22) and hit 1) Hold the inside of floating seal (29) with
it dow n obliquely w ith a hammer to your fingers and remove it up.
remove the lock washers. a When removing the floating seal, put
on gloves to protect your fingers from
the edge of the floating seal.
a If the floating seal is stuck with mud,
etc., pry it up with a flat-head screw-
driver, etc.
9. Removal of hub
1) Remove the hexagonal socket head bolts
that fix hub (1) to work stand [1].
2) Install eyebolts [8] to hub (1) and sling the
hub.
4 Hub (1): 50 kg 11. Removal of ball bearing
a Sling the hub gradually and slowly in 1) To remove ball bearing (24), apply pin
parallel with the axis of spindle (2). punch [13] lightly at three to four places on
k If the hub is slung obliquely, a the periphery of the outer race.
large force is required and the a If the inner race is hit, the rolling sur-
sling or an eyebolt may be broken face of the ball bearing is damaged
and that is dangerous. Accord- and the ball bearing cannot be
ingly, do not sling the hub forcibly reused. Accordingly, do not hit the
but sling it by using a press, etc. inner race unless you are replacing
the ball bearing.
a Spread a rubber mat under ball bear-
ing (24) which falls when the outer
race is released from hub (1).
16 PC130-8
12. Removal of rear flange 4) Remove two relief valve assemblys (18).
1) Turn over the travel motor assembly to set a Do not reuse removed O-rings (207),
the travel motor side up. (209), and (212) and rings (208) and
a The following work is preparatory (210). (See "Component parts")
work for disassembling of the inside
components of the rear flange.
a Loosen the plug to a degree that you
can rotate it by hand.
a When not disassembling the inside
components of the rear flange, do not
loosen the plug.
2) Loosen two plugs (324).
a Since spring (328) is still compressed
after plugs (324) are loosened, the
plugs and spring may jump out. Take
care. (See "Component parts")
5) Remove ten hexagonal socket head bolts

(343) from rear flange (301).
6) Remove rear flange (301) from spindle
(2).
a Lift up rear flange (301) straight
slowly with both hands to remove.
a If you pry off or hit rear flange (301),
timing plate (109) may fall to be dam-
aged. Take care. (See "Component
parts")
3) Loosen two plugs (380), two plugs (352),

and plug (357).
7) Remove two dowel pins (34) from spindle

(2).
PC130-8 17
8) Remove two O-rings (33) and O-ring (32) 3) Remove ball bearing (150) from rear
from spindle (2). flange (301).
a Do not reuse removed O-rings (32)
and (33).
4) Remove dowel pin (341) from rear flange

(301).
13. Disassembly of rear flange
1) Set rear flange (301) on the work stand so
that mating face (a) to the spindle faces
top.
2) Remove timing plate (109) from rear
flange (301).
a If timing plate (109) is stuck because
of the oil, put spatula [9] in the groove
on the rear flange (301) to remove.
(See "Tools 4) Tools to be manufac-
tured")
a If you use a sharp tool such as a flat-
head screwdriver, you may scratch
mating face (a). Accordingly, do not
14. Disassembly of brake valve
use such a tool.
1) Remove two plugs (324) from rear flange
(301).
18 PC130-8
2) Remove two spring retainers (325) and 3) Remove spring (366) and spool (363) from
two springs (328) from rear flange (301). rear flange (301). (See "Component
3) Remove spool (323) from rear flange parts")
(301).
a If rear flange (301) is inclined, spool
(323) comes out. Pick the end of the
spool to remove.
16. Disassembly of piston

(301).
2) Remove two O-rings (383) from two plugs
4) Remove two O-rings (336) from two plugs (380). (See "Component parts")
(324). a Do not reuse removed O-rings (383).
a Do not reuse removed O-rings (336).
3) Remove piston (381) from rear flange

15. Disassembly of 2nd travel speed selector (301).
spool
1) Remove plug (357) from rear flange (301).
2) Remove O-ring (359) from plug (357).
a Do not reuse removed O-ring (359).
(See "Component parts")
PC130-8 19
17. Disassembly of seal ball

(301).
2) Remove two O-rings (358) from two plugs
(352). (See "Component parts")
a Do not reuse removed O-rings (358).
3) Remove two seal balls (353) from rear

flange (301).
a If the seal balls cannot be removed
easily, use a magnet.
19. Disassembly of travel motor

1) Turn spindle (2) 90 degrees to set it in the
horizontal position.
a Prepare a container to receive the oil
that will flow out of spindle (2).
2) Drain the oil from spindle (2).
3) Remove four plates (116) and three discs
(115) from spindle (2).
18. Disassembly of parking brake

1) Supply compressed air through parking
brake oil passage (b) of spindle (2) to take
out piston (112).
k If compressed air is blown sud-
denly, piston (112) jumps out, and
that is dangerous. Accordingly,
blow compressed air gradually.
Place protective cover (19) for
safety in advance.
2) Remove O-rings (135) and (139) from pis-
ton (112).
a Do not reuse removed O-rings (135)
and (139).
20 PC130-8
4) Rotate cylinder block (104) two to three 7) Remove nine piston assemblies (pistons
turns alternately to separate swash plate (105) and shoes (106)) from retainer plate
(103) and shoe (106) which are stuck to (107).
each other because of the oil. (See "Com-
ponent parts")
5) Remove cylinder block (104) from shaft
(102).
a Take care that the parts (piston (105),
shoe (106), etc.) in cylinder block
(104) do not come off and fall into
spindle (2) because of sticking of
swash plate (103) and shoe (106).
8) Remove thrust ball (108) from cylinder

block (104).
6) Remove piston assemblies (pistons (105)

and shoes (106)) and retainer plate (107)
together from cylinder block (104).
a Hold and remove retainer plate (107)
with both hands.
a Since piston (105) and shoe (106) are
9) Remove three needles (151) from cylinder
joined by drawing the shoe over the
block (104).
spherical portion of the piston.
a Replace piston (105) and shoe (109)
together always. (Hereinafter, this
assembly is referred to as the piston
assembly)
PC130-8 21
20. Removal of spring in cylinder block 4) Remove THS snap ring (145), washer
1) Set cylinder block (104) on the press (110), spring (114), and washer (110) from
stand. cylinder block (104). (See "Component
a Remove spring (114) only when parts")
replacing it.
a When removing spring (114), align
No. 1 holder [2] with washer (110) and
take care not to scratch cylinder block
(104).
a Before working, cover cylinder block
(104) with vinyl sheet (20) for protec-
tion.
2) Set No. 1 holder [2] to upper washer (110)
and secure it with the press.
3) Remove THS snap ring (145) from the
snap ring groove of cylinder block (104).
k If the press is released suddenly,
spring (114) jumps out, and that is
21. Removal of swash plate
dangerous. Accordingly, release
1) Turn spindle (2) 90 degrees to set it in the
the press gradually.
horizontal position and remove swash
plate (103) from shaft (102).
a When removing swash plate (103),
pivot (167) may stick to it. Take care
that the pivot will not fall. (See "Com-
ponent parts")
2) Remove shaft (102) from spindle (2).

a At this time, remove ball bearing
(149), too. (See "Component parts")
a Shaft (102) can be removed easily by
hitting it lightly from the final drive
side with a plastic hammer.
3) Remove two pivots (167) and two dowel
pins (171) from spindle (2). (See "Compo-
nent parts")
22 PC130-8
23. Removal of spindle component parts

1) Remove shim (23) from spindle (2).
4) Remove spring (185) and 2nd travel

speed selection piston assembly (piston
(161) and shoe (162)) from spindle (2). 2) Remove floating seal (29) from spindle
(See "Component parts") (2).
22. Removal of ball bearing 3) Remove oil seal (132) from spindle (2).
a Remove the ball bearing only when a Do not reuse removed floating seal
replacing it. (29) and oil seal (132). (See "Compo-
1) Set No. 2 holder [3] on the press stand nent parts")
and set shaft (102) in it.
2) Push out shaft (102) from ball bearing
(149) with the press.
a Do not reuse ball bearing (149).
PC130-8 23
24. Rough washing of parts

1) Separate hub (1), spindle (2), cover (14),
and rear flange (301) from the other parts
(hereinafter, referred to as the internal
parts). (See "Component parts")
2) Put hub (1), spindle (2), cover (14), and
rear flange (301) in the washing tank and
wash them.
a Wash each part thoroughly since they
are coated with dirt and sand.
3) Put the internal parts in the prewashing
tank containing kerosene and wash them
k Flammable material such as kero-
sene is used to wash the parts.
Since it is highly inflammable and
can cause a fire or a burn, handle it
with extreme care.
a If you wash the parts immediately
after putting them in the oil, they may
be scratched. Leave them in the oil
until the dirt, oil, grease, etc. are sep-
arated, and then wash.
25. Finish washing

1) Put each part in the finish washing tank
containing kerosene and wash them to
their inside while rotating them slowly.
2) Wipe off the kerosene from each part with
clean cloths.
3) Dry the inside of hub (1) and spindle (2) by
blowing air against them in a clean and
dry place.
4) Dry the travel motor parts and gears natu-
rally in a clean and dry place.
a After drying the parts, apply power
train oil (TO30) to them.
24 PC130-8
Maintenance standard
When disassembling and testing the travel motor, service it according to the following standard. Take care
not to scratch the moving parts and sliding parts since they are precision parts.
1. Handling of seals
Once you remove the seals (O-ring, oil seal, and floating seal), replace them with new ones, regardless
of the damage on them.
2. Maintenance standard for worn parts

1) Replace all the parts having extreme visible damage with new ones.
2) Replace all the parts having the following problems (phenomena) with new ones.
Permissible
Part No. Part name Phenomenon Standard value
deviation
• There is serious damage on outside.
1 Hub • Tooth surface of ring gear is pitted. — —
• There is abnormal wear such as galling.
• There is serious damage on outside.
2 Spindle — —
• There is abnormal wear such as galling.
3, 7 Others Carrier assembly • There is abnormal wear such as galling. — —
4 Sun gear A • Tooth surface is pitted.
8 Sun gear B • Rolling surface of bearing is flaked. — —
5 Planetary gear A
9 Planetary gear B
• There is impression.
24 Ball bearing • Rolling surface of ball bearing is flaked. — —
• Worn unevenly.
301 Rear flange • There are scratches on sliding surface of — —

spools (323) and (363) and piston (381).
• Contact surface against oil seal (132) is worn.
102 Shaft — —
• Spline portion is worn.
103 Swash plate • Parts are seized. — —
• Spline portion is worn.
104 Cylinder block • Inside wall of cylinder is worn excessively. — —
• Sliding surface against timing plate (109) is
scratched and worn unevenly.
• There is clearance between piston (105) and
105 Piston assembly Clearance: Clearance:
shoe (106) in axial direction.
106 (Piston + Shoe) 0.05 mm 0.15 mm
• Shoe (106) is worn abnormally and unevenly.
• Sliding surface against shoe (106) is worn
unevenly.
107 Retainer plate — —
• Sliding surface against thrust ball (108) is
scratched and worn unevenly.
108 Thrust ball • Spherical sliding surface against retainer — —

plate (107) is worn unevenly.
109 Timing plate • Sliding surface is seized and worn unevenly. — —
• Both end faces are worn unevenly. Braking torque: Braking torque:
115 Disc
• Specified torque is not obtained. Min. Min.
116 Plate
• Parts are seized. 206 Nm {21.0 kgm} 206 Nm {21.0 kgm}
105 Piston • There is scratch on outside surfaces. — —
PC130-8 25
Permissible
Part No. Part name Phenomenon Standard value
deviation
• There is impression.
149
Ball bearing • Rolling surface of bearing is flaked. — —
150
• Parts are worn.
2nd speed selec-
161 tion piston • Outside surface is worn abnormally.
— —
162 assembly • Shoe is worn abnormally and unevenly.
(Piston + Shoe)
323 • Outside surface is worn unevenly.
Spool — —
363 • There is scratch on outside surfaces.
381 Piston • There is scratch on outside surfaces. — —
26 PC130-8
Assembly 3. Assembly procedure

q Perform installation in the reverse order to a When assembling after replacing some
removal parts, the preload on the bearing must be
adjusted. Accordingly, ensure that the fol-
Preparatory items lowing parts are replaced with new ones.
1. Preparation before assembly Hub (1)
Prepare the tools and materials similarly to the Spindle (2)
preparatory items in "Disassembly". Ball bearing (24)
a When assembling after replacing the
2. General precautions for work above parts, be sure to use the parts that
1) Observe Disassembly, "2. General pre- "have been adjusted independently". Use
cautions for work". of unadjusted parts can cause malfunction
2) Before assembling, wash all the parts to and early breakage of the travel motor.
remove metal chips and foreign matter, Take care.
and check that they are free from a burr, a
scratch, etc. If any part has a burr or a
scratch, remove it by using an oilstone.
3) Do not reuse the O-rings, oil seals and
floating seals but replace them with new
ones.
4) Pass a tap (M10, P1.5) through the
threaded holes of hub (1) to remove the
remaining adhesive.Then, wash and
degrease the threaded holes and dry them
by blowing compressed air. Replace hex-
agonal socket head bolt (35) with a new
one.
5) When installing the O-rings, oil seals, and
floating seals, apply a little amount of
grease to them, and then install them
carefully so that they are not damaged.
6) Be sure to apply power train oil (TO30) to
the moving parts and sliding parts of the
travel motor before assembly.
7) When assembling, do not put on cloth
gloves.
(Prevent malfunction caused by entry of a
fiber of cloth gloves.)
8) Tighten the bolts and plugs according to
"Tightening torque table".
9) Immediately after completing assembly,
install plugs to all the ports to prevent
entry of dirt.
10) A typical model is used for the illustrations
in the following explanation. Even if your
machine is partly different from the
machine indicated for those illustrations,
its assembling procedure is the same.
PC130-8 27
1. Assembly of hub 2. Assembly of spindle assembly

1) Set hub (1) to cylinder (21) on the press 1) Apply grease to the O-ring of floating seal
stand. (29) and install it to spindle (2).
2) Install ball bearing (24) to hub (1) and 2 O-ring: Grease (G2-LI)
press fit it by using push tool [6]. a Remove the O-ring and apply grease
3) Reverse hub (1) and install ball bearing thinly all over its surface.
(24) on the opposite side similarly. 2) Set No. 3 mounting jig [12] and No. 2
a When installing ball bearing (24), mounting jig [11] to spindle (2) in order
check its direction. and push in No. 2 mounting jig [11] until it
touches No. 3 mounting jig [12].
a Remove No. 3 mounting jig [12] and
No. 2 mounting jig [11].
a Check that the parallelism between
the end face of spindle (2) and the
sealing face of floating seal (29) is 1
mm or below.
4) Apply grease to the O-ring of floating seal

(29) and install it to hub (1).
2 O-ring: Grease (G2-LI)
a Remove the O-ring and apply grease
thinly all over its surface.
5) Set No. 1 mounting jig [10] and No. 2
mounting jig [11] to hub (1) in order and
push in No. 2 mounting jig [11] until it 3) Install 2 eyebolts [8] to the mounting bolt
touches No. 1 mounting jig [10]. holes of spindle (2).
a Remove No. 1 mounting jig [10] and a Install 2 eyebolts [8] to symmetrical
No. 2 mounting jig [11]. positions.
a Check that the parallelism between 4) Sling spindle (2) and install it to the work
the end face of hub (1) and the seal- stand so that hexagonal socket head bolts
ing face of floating seal (29) is 1 mm (37) will be positioned symmetrically.
or below. 4 Spindle (2): 30 kg
a Securely tighten the two hexagonal
socket head bolts (to prevent the
travel motor assembly from falling off
the work stand when it is reversed).
28 PC130-8
3. Adjustment of preload on bearing 4) Install shim (23) to spindle (2).

a If hub (1), ball bearing (24), and spindle
(2) were replaced, adjust the preload on
the bearing. (See "Component parts")
1) If the preload is not proper, the ball bear-
ing may be broken in a short time. Install
lock washer (22) to spindle (2) temporarily
and measure dimension (c).
4. Installation of hub
1) Sling and lower hub (1) while aligning it
with spindle (2) and press fit it into ball
bearing (24). (See "Component parts")
4 Hub (1): 50 kg
2) Fix hub (1) to work stand [1] by using hex-
agonal socket head bolts.
2) Measure assembly width (d) of ball bear- 3) Lightly hit ball bearing (24) on the final
ing (24). drive side to prevent it from floating. (See
a Before measuring, rotate hub (1) and "Component parts")
ball bearing (24) to prevent them from
floating.
3) Select shim (23) from the following table

so that clearance (e) will be +0.13 to +0.17
mm.
q Clearance (e) = Dimension (c) – (d)
Symbol Thickness (mm) Symbol Thickness (mm)
A 0.9 G 1.5
B 1.0 H 1.6
C 1.1 I 1.7
D 1.2 J 1.8
E 1.3 K 1.9
F 1.4 L 2.0
PC130-8 29
4) Turn over the work stand and install lock 5. Assembly of parts inside spindle
washer (22) to the groove of spindle (2). 1) Use push tool [4] to press fit oil seal (132)
to spindle (2).
2 Lip of oil seal (132):
Grease (G2-LI)
a When installing oil seal (132), check
the direction it faces.
5) Using jig [5], push lock washer (22) into

the groove of spindle (2).
a Push in lock washer (22) sufficiently
so that carrier B (7) will not interfere
with it when carrier B (7) is installed.
(See "Component parts") 2) Install two dowel pins (171) to the holes of
6) Remove the hexagonal socket head bolts spindle (2). (See "Component parts")
that fix hub (1) to the work stand. (See 3) Install two pivots (167) to dowel pins
"Component parts") (171). (See "Component parts")
7) Rotate hub (1) two to three turns. 2 Hemisphere of pivot (167):
a Perform this step to fit the sliding sur- Grease (G2-LI)
face of floating seal (29) and prevent 4) Install spring (185) to the piston assembly
oil leakage. (See "Component parts") (piston (161) and shoe (162)). (See "Com-
8) Turn over the work stand to set the travel ponent parts")
motor side up. 2 Spring (185): Grease (G2-LI)
5) Apply power train oil (TO30) to the sliding
part of piston assembly and install it to the
piston hole of spindle (2).
6) Install two dowel pins (171) to the pin
holes on the rear flange mating face of
spindle (2). (See "Component parts")
30 PC130-8
6. Installation of shaft
1) Heat ball bearing (149) in the heating tank
and press fit it to shaft (102).
Heating of ball bearing (149):
10 minutes at 100 ± 10°C
k When heating and installing ball
bearing (149), be sure to put on
leather gloves to avoid getting
burnt.
7. Assembly of cylinder block

1) Install washer (110), spring (114), washer
(110) and THS snap ring (145) to cylinder
block (104) in order.
a Face the acute angle side of washer
(110) on the THS snap ring (145) side
upward.
a Face the acute angle side of THS
snap ring (145) upward. (See "Com-
2) Turn the travel motor assembly 90 ponent parts")
degrees to set it horizontally and install 2) Set cylinder block (104) on the press
shaft (102) to spindle (2). stand.
3) Set No. 1 holder [2] to upper washer (110)
and secure it with the press.
4) Install THS snap ring (145) to the snap
ring groove of cylinder block (104).
k If the end of the snap ring pliers
comes off the hole of THS snap
ring (145), THS snap ring (145)
jumps out, and that is dangerous.
Use care for the installation.
a When pressing spring (114), align No.
1 holder [2] with washer (110) and
take care not to scratch cylinder block
(104).
a Before working, cover cylinder block
3) Press fit shaft (102) into ball bearing (149)
(104) with vinyl sheet (20) for protec-
with the press.
tion.
a When installing shaft (102), take care
not to damage the lip of oil seal (132)
installed before.
a Damage of the lip of oil seal (132) can
cause oil leakage and early breakage
of the travel motor. (See "Component
parts")
4) Install swash plate (103) to shaft (102).
2 Mating faces of spindle (2) and
swash plate (103): Grease (G2-LI)
a Install two pivots (167) while aligning
them with the mounting holes of the
swash plate (103). (See "Component
parts")
PC130-8 31
2) Install thrust ball (108) to cylinder block

(104).
3) Install nine piston assemblies (pistons

(105) and shoes (106)) to retainer plate
(107).
a After installing, soak all the parts in
power train oil (TO30).
8. Assembly of travel motor

1) Install three needles (151) to cylinder
block (104).
4) Install piston assemblies (pistons (105)

and shoes (106)) and retainer plate (107)
together to cylinder block (104).
a Hold and install retainer plate (107)
with both hands.
a Securely contact the retainer plate
(107) with the spherical portion of
thrust ball (108). (See "Component
parts")
32 PC130-8
5) Install cylinder block (104) to shaft (102).

a Install cylinder block (104) while
matching it to the spline of shaft
(102).
3) Install O-rings (135) and (139) to piston

(112).
2 O-rings (135) and (139):
Grease (G2-LI)
6) After installing cylinder block (104), rotate 4) Install piston (112) to spindle (2).
cylinder block (104) by hand and check for a If piston (112) does not enter easily,
play between cylinder block (104) and hit it lightly with a plastic hammer.
shaft (102). a When installing the piston, take care
a If there is play, check. not to damage O-rings (135) and
a After installing cylinder block (104), (139).
do not lift it up. (If the cylinder block is
lifted up, thrust ball (108) comes off
and the motor does not rotate nor-
mally.) (See "Component parts".)
10. Assembly of 2nd travel speed selector

spool
1) Install spring (366) and spool (363) to rear
flange (301). (See "Component parts")
9. Assembly of parking brake 2) Install O-ring (359) to plug (357). (See
1) Turn the travel motor assembly 90 "Component parts")
degrees to set the travel motor side up. 2 O-ring (359): Grease (G2-LI)
2) Install discs (115) and plates (116) alter-
nately to cylinder block (104). (See "Com-
ponent parts")
a Soak discs (115) in power train oil
(TO30) in advance.
PC130-8 33
3) Install plug (357) to rear flange (301) and 12. Assembly of piston portion
fasten them partially. 1) Install two O-rings (383) to two plugs
2 O-ring (383): Grease (G2-LI)
2) Install piston (381) to rear flange (301).
11. Assembly of seal ball portion

1) Install two O-rings (358) to two plugs
2 O-ring (358): Grease (G2-LI) 3) Install two plugs (380) to rear flange (301).
2) Install two seal balls (353) to rear flange
(301).
13. Assembly of brake valve portion

1) Install the spool (323) to rear flange (301).
3) Install two plugs (352) to rear flange (301). 2 Spool (323):
Power train oil (TO30)
a Insert spool (323) carefully in the
spool hole of rear flange (301).
a When spool (323) is inserted, if spool
(323) or spool hole of rear flange
(301) is scratched, oil may leak and
travel motor performance may be
decreased.
2) Install two O-rings (336) to two plugs
(342).
2 O-ring (336): Grease (G2-LI)
3) Install two washers (325) and two springs
(328) to two plugs (324).
34 PC130-8
14. Assembly of rear flange

1) Install ball bearing (150) to rear flange
(301).
2 Ball bearing (150): Grease (G2-LI)
2) Install dowel pin (341) to the pin hole of

rear flange (301).
4) Tighten two plugs (324) into rear flange

(301).
a When tightening plugs (324), take
care that spring (328) is not deformed.
3) Install timing plate (109) to rear flange

(301) by using the dowel pin as a guide.
2 Mating faces of rear flange (301)
and timing plate (109):
Grease (G2-LI)
a Check that timing plate (109) and rear
flange (301) are stuck with the
grease.
a Perform this step to prevent timing
plate (109) from falling when rear
flange (301) is installed to spindle (2).
PC130-8 35
4) Install ten springs (113) to rear flange 3) Install two dowel pins (34) to spindle (2).
(301).
2 Spring (113): Grease (G2-LI)
a Apply the grease sufficiently to pre-
vent the springs from falling when the
rear flange is installed.
4) Install rear flange (301) to spindle (2).

a Install rear flange (301) while match-
ing installation hole on rear flange to
dowel pins (34) (See "Component
parts")
15. Installation of rear flange 5) Lightly tighten ten hexagonal socket head
1) Install two O-rings (33) and O-ring (32) to bolts (343) into spindle (2).
spindle (2).
a Do not apply grease to O-rings (32)
and (33). (If grease is applied, it may
ooze out through the mating faces of
rear flange (301) and spindle (2) dur-
ing operation and you may mistake it
for oil leakage.) (See "Component
parts".)
2) Supply oil to spindle (2).
5 In spindle (2) (Power train oil):
1.0 l (TO30)
6) Tighten ten hexagonal socket head bolts

(343) to rear flange (301).
3 Hexagon socket head bolt (343):
102 ± 15.7 Nm {10.4 ± 1.6 kgm}
36 PC130-8
7) Tighten two plugs (324). 17. Assembly of sun gear B

3 Plug (324): 1) Reverse work stand to set the final drive
44.1 ± 3.92 Nm {45.0 ± 4.0 kgm} side up.
2) Install sun gear B (8) to carrier B (7). (See
"Component parts")
places) of carrier B (7), and sling and
install the carrier assembly.
4 Carrier assembly: 25 kg
carrier assembly vertically and lift
down the carrier assembly slowly so
that the internal teeth of the hub will
not be damaged by the end of plane-
tary gear B (9). See "Component
parts")
8) Tighten two plugs (380), two plugs (352)
and plug (357).
3 Plug (380):
58.8 ± 9.81 Nm {6.0 ± 1.0 kgm}
3 Plug (352):
12.3 ± 2.45 Nm {1.25 ± 0.25 kgm}
3 Plug (357):
98.1 ± 19.6 Nm {10.0 ± 2.0 kgm}
a Install the carrier so that planetary

gear B (9) and port (f) of rear flange
(301) are shown in the following fig-
ure.
Port (f): For hydraulic piping
Hole (g):
For 2nd travel speed selection piston
16. Installation of relief valve assembly

1) Tighten two relief valve assemblies (18).
3 Relief valve assembly (18):
98.1 ± 19.6 Nm {10.0 ± 2.0 kgm}
PC130-8 37
18. Installation of coupling 2) Install sun gear A (4) while matching it

1) Install coupling (15) to shaft (102). (See with the spline of coupling (15). (See
"Component parts") "Component parts")
a If sun gear A (4) cannot be installed
because of interference with the tooth
tips of planetary gear A (5), lift up car-
rier assembly slowly until sun gear B
(8) is disconnected from the gear cou-
pling, and then install sun gear A (4).
19. Assembly of sun gear A

places) of carrier A (3), and sling and
install the carrier assembly.
carrier assembly vertically and lift
down the carrier assembly slowly so
that the internal teeth of the hub will 3) Install thrust plate (13) to carrier A (3).
not be damaged by the end of plane-
tary gear A (5).
20. Installation of cover

1) Apply liquid adhesive to mating face (h) of
hub (1) against cover (14).
2 Mating face (h): Adhesive (LOC-
TITE No. 515 or equivalent)
a Apply liquid adhesive continuously.
38 PC130-8
2) Install eyebolts [8] to ports (k) and install 2) Tighten three plugs (30).
cover (14) to hub (1) while matching the 3 Plug (30):
bolt holes. 98.1 ± 19.6 Nm {10.0 ± 2.0 kgm}
3) Tighten hexagonal socket head bolts (35). 22. Removal of travel motor
2 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LOC- 1) Turn over the travel motor assembly to set
TITE No. 242 or equivalent) the travel motor side up.
3 Mounting bolt: 2) Remove the mounting bolts of the travel
66.7 ± 3.92 Nm {6.8 ± 0.4 kgm} motor from work stand [1]. (See "Compo-
nent parts")
3) Install eyebolts [8] to the threaded holes of
spindle (2) and lift off the travel motor
assembly.
4 Travel motor assembly: 150 kg
21. Adding oil

1) Add oil through oil filler port (j).
5 Final drive case: 2.1 l
PC130-8 39
Performance check test

q After completing the service of the travel motor, perform the performance check test according to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Necessary tools
No. Part name Q'ty
1 Pressure gauge (3.43 MPa {35 kg/cm }) 2 2
2 Measuring cylinder (5 l) 1
3 Stopwatch 1
2. Test procedure
Installation of Install the travel motor to the machine and connect the piping.
1) travel motor Do not install the tracks.
and piping [To perform performance test of travel motor (no-load operation)]
a Connect the piping so that you can install the pressure gauge (to the main circuit)
and measure the draining rate from the hydraulic motor.
a Do not install the travel motor by hitting it with a hammer, etc. but install it carefully
by using the bolt holes.
Rotation Operating
Selection Travel motor speed Pressure
direction time
Running-in of
2) Low speed 10 rpm Min. 1 minute
travel motor
No load Left/Right in each
High speed 20 rpm direction
Performance
3) check test of
travel motor
Running-in before test ---- Perform running-in until the temperature increases as follows.
1] • Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 – 55 °C
• External temperature of hub of reduction gear unit: 40 – 80 °C
Check test --------- Measure the following items at low speed and judge the result.
2] Criteria acceptance: Difference in travel motor drive pressure ----- Max. 1.57 MPa {16 kg/cm2}/10 rpm
Draining rate from hydraulic motor: Max. 1.2 l/min/10 rpm
Accepted Rejected
Install tracks Disassemble and adjust again
40 PC130-8
Removal and installation of swing 3. Disconnect hoses (3) – (7).

motor and swing machinery
assembly 1
Removal
k Park the machine on a level place and lower
the work equipment stably to the ground.
Stop the engine and set the lock lever to
locked position.
k Release the remaining pressure from the
hydraulic circuit, referring to "Bleeding
residual pressure from hydraulic circuit" in
"Testing and adjusting."
battery beforehand. 4. Remove mounting bolts (8).
a Put tags to the disconnected hoses to pre-

vent a mistake in re-connecting them.
5. Using forcing screw [1], disconnect swing

motor and swing machinery assembly (9) from
the machine.
2. Loosen hydraulic oil drain plug (2) and drain

the hydraulic oil.
PC130-8 41
6. Lift and remove swing motor and swing Installation

machinery assembly (10). q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of
a Lift the assembly carefully to prevent inter- removal.
ference with the surrounding hoses.
4 Swing motor and swing machinery q Refilling oil (Hydraulic tank)
assembly: 95 kg a Fill oil up to the specified level, start the
engine to circulate oil in the pipe and
check the oil level again.
q Bleeding air
a Bleed air from the piping, referring to
"Bleeding air from each part" in Testing
and adjusting.
[*1]
3 Wing machinery mounting bolt:
303.8 – 362.6 Nm {31 – 37 kgm}
42 PC130-8
Disassembly and assembly of

swing machinery assembly 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Sym-
Necessity
Part No. Part name
bol
Sketch
Q'ty
1 790-201-2750 Spacer t 1
790-101-5201 Push puller (Kit) q 1
790-101-2510 • Block 1
4) Disconnect swing motor assembly (3)
790-101-2550 • Leg 1
using forcing screw [1].
790-101-2560 • Nut 2 5) Lift and remove swing motor assembly (3).
2 790-101-2570 • Plate 4
790-101-3101 Bearing puller q 1
Puller
790-101-4200 q 1
(294 kN {30 ton})
Hydraulic oil
F 790-101-1102 q 1
pump
790-101-5401 Push tool (Kit) (C) q 1
790-101-5461 • Plate 1
3 790-101-5441 • Plate 1
790-101-5421 • Grip 1
01010-51240 • Bolt 1
4 790-201-2850 Spacer t 1 3. Carrier No. 1 and Sun gear No. 2 assembly
5 790-201-2750 Spacer t 1
1) Remove sun gear No. 1 (4).
2) Remove carrier No. 1 and sun gear No. 2
796T-426-1140 Push tool t 1 Q assembly (5).
6
790-201-2680 Plate q 1
Disassembly
1. Oil drain
Remove the drain plug and drain oil from the
swing machinery.
6 Swing machinery case: 2.5 l
2. Swing motor assembly

1) Remove oil level pipe (1).
2) Remove 15 swing motor mounting bolts
(2).
PC130-8 43
3) Sub-disassembly of carrier No. 1 and sun 3) Sub-disassembly of carrier No. 2 assem-

gear No. 2 assembly bly.
1] Remove snap ring (6) and remove 1] Press pin (19) in and punch out shaft
thrust washer (7), gear (8), bearing (20) from carrier (21).
(9) and thrust washer (10). a Remove the shaft, then remove
pin (19).
2] Remove thrust washer (22), gear
(23), bearing (24) and thrust washer
(25).
2] Drive pin (11) in and punch out shaft

(12).
a Remove the shaft, then remove
pin (11).
3] Remove snap ring (13) and remove 6. Retainer and collar
sun gear No. 2 (14) from carrier (15). 1) Remove retainer (26).
2) Set the shaft and case assembly to the
press, and push 2-piece collar (27) using
a push tool to press bearing (28).
3) Remove 2-piece collar (27).
4. Ring gear
Remove ring gear (16).
5. Carrier No. 2 assembly

1) Remove spacer (17).
2) Remove carrier No. 2 assembly (18).
44 PC130-8
7. Shaft assembly 2) Use puller [4] to remove bearing outer

1) Set the shaft and case assembly (29) to races (36) and (37) from case (35).
block [2], and remove shaft assembly (30)
with the press using push tool [3].
2) Remove bearing (28).
3) Use tool F2 to remove bearing (31) and

collar (32) from shaft (33).
8. Oil seal and bearing outer race

1) Remove oil seal (34) from case (35).
PC130-8 45
Assembly 5) Install 2-piece collar (27).

1. Bearing outer race 6) Screw in bolt (12 mm, P=1.75) to the
Use push tool F3 to press outer races (36) and case. Using push-pull scale [5] to measure
(37) to case (35). the tangential force in the direction of rota-
tion.
a Tangential force: Max. 176.4 N {18kg}
a Tangential force refers to a maximum
value at the start of rotation.
2. Shaft assembly
1) Install O-ring to inside collar (32) and
install to shaft (33).
2) Use push tool F4 to press bearing (31)
with the press. 3. Oil seal
Using tool F6 to press oil seal (34).
a Replace the oil seal with a new one.
2 Circumference of oil seal: LG-6
a Be careful not to allow LG-6 to attach to
the lip and shaft.
2 Oil seal lip portion: Grease (G2-LI)
3) Set case (38) to shaft assembly (30).

4) Use push tool F5 to press bearing (28)
with the press to the position where the 2-
piece collar can be entered.
a Press-fit force: 11,760 N {1,200kg}
a Press the bearing gradually by rotat-
ing the case. 4. Retainer
Install retainer (26).
46 PC130-8
5. Carrier No. 2 assembly

1) Sub-disassembly of carrier No. 2 assem-
bly
1] Assemble bearing (24) to gear (23).
2] Install thrust washer (22) and (25)
and set gear assembly to carrier (21).
6. Ring gear
Install O-ring (39) to the shaft and case assem-
bly, and install ring gear (16).
3] Align the shaft to the carrier pin hole

position, and install shaft (20) by
lightly hammering with a plastic ham-
mer, etc.
a Install the shaft by turning the
planetary gear. Be careful not to
damage the thrust washer.
4] Insert pin (19).
a Insert the pin, then caulk the pin
of the carrier.
7. Carrier No. 1 and sun gear No. 2 assembly
1) Sub-disassembly of carrier No. 1 and sun
gear No. 2 assembly
1] Install carrier No. 1 (15) to sun gear
No. 2 (14) and Install snap ring (13).
2] Align the shaft to the carrier pin hole
position, and install shaft (12) by
lightly hammering with a plastic ham-
mer, etc.
3] Insert pin (11).
a Insert the pin, then caulk the pin
of the carrier.
a Check that difference (a) between
2) Install carrier No. 2 assembly (18) to the the shaft and carrier is 0.2 mm or
shaft and case assembly. less.
3) Install spacer (17).
PC130-8 47
4] Install thrust washer (10), bearing (9), 8. Swing motor assembly

gear (8) and thrust washer (7), and 1) Install swing motor assembly (4).
install snap ring (6). 2) Install 15 swing motor mounting bolts (3).
a Use new snap ring. 3 Swing motor mounting bolt:
a ?hen installing the snap ring, do 98 – 122.5 Nm {10 – 12.5 kgm}
not allow the mating space to 3) Install hose (2).
expand wider than 11 mm to pre- 4) Install oil level pipe (1).
vent the snap ring from deform-
ing.
a After installation, check that the
snap ring is firmly in place.
9. Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug, and refill engine oil
E030 from the oil filler port.
5 Swing machinery case: 2.5 l
2) Install carrier No. 1 and sun gear No.2
assembly (5) to the shaft case assembly.
3) Install sun gear No. 1 (4).
48 PC130-8
Removal and installation of swing Installation

circle assembly 1
q Installation is performed in the opposite way to
Removal removal.
k Gradually loosen the hydraulic oil tank cap
to bleed the air from the tank after ground- [*1]
2 Swing circle mounting bolt:
ing the work equipment and stopping the
engine and lock the safety lock lever. Liquefied adhesive (LT-2)
3 Swing circle mounting bolt :
1. Remove the revolving frame assembly by 245 – 308.9 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
referring to "Removal of revolving frame
assembly". [*2]
a Lift swing circle assembly (1) and install it on
2. Temporarily lift swing circle assembly (1) to the track frame with the inner wheel soft zone
remove the 38 mounting bolts. [*1] "S" symbol (a) of the inner race facing the right
side of the body as shown in the figure.
2 Amount of circle grease sealed: 9.1 l
3. Remove swing circle assembly (1). [*2]
4 Swing circle assembly : 155 kg
grease (G2-LI)
PC130-8 49

© 2010 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
50 PC130-8
SEN04129-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Undercarriage and frame
Disassembly and assembly of track roller....................................................................................................... 2
Disassembly and assembly of idler assembly ................................................................................................ 5
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring .................................................................................................... 8
Spreading and installation of track shoe assembly ........................................................................................11
Removal and installation of sprocket ............................................................................................................ 13
Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly ................................................................................. 14
Removal and installation of counterweight assembly ................................................................................... 16
PC130-8 1
Disassembly and assembly of 3. Pull out roller (4) from shaft (5).
a It is filled with 75 – 85 cc of oil, so drain the
track roller 1 oil at this point or lay a cloth to prevent the
area from becoming dirty.
Special tools
New/Remodel
4. Remove floating seal (6) (on opposite side)
from roller (4) and shaft (5).
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol
Q'ty
1 796T-430-1210 Push tool t 1 N Q
M 2 796T-430-1220 Installer t 1 N Q
3 791-601-1000 Oil pump Q 1
Disassembly
1. Remove pin (1), then remove collar (2).
5. Remove collar (8) from shaft (5).
6. Remove bushings (9) and (10) from roller (4).
2. Remove floating seal (3) from collar (2) and

roller (4).
2 PC130-8
Assembly 6. Turn over roller (4) and shaft (5) assembly.

1. Using tool M1, press fit bushings (9) and (10)
to roller (4). 7. Using tool M2, install floating seal (3) to collar
(2).
2. Assemble collar (8) to shaft (5). a For details of the precautions when install-
ing floating seals (3a) and (3c), see the
3. Using tool M2, install floating seal (6) to shaft precautions marked a for Step 3.
(5).
a When assembling the floating seal, clean
the contact surface of O-ring (6c) and
floating seal (6a), remove all grease and
oil, and dry it. Make sure that no dirt or
dust sticks to the contact surface of the
floating seal.
8. Assemble collar (2) to shaft (5), and install pin

(1).
4. Using tool M2, install floating seals (6) and

(3) to roller (4).
a For details of the precautions when install-
ing floating seals (6b) and (6d), and (3b)
and (3d), see the precautions marked a
for Step 3.
5. Assemble shaft (5) to roller (4).

9. Using tool M3, apply standard pressure to
roller oil filler port and check air leakage.
a Standard pressure: 0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm²}
a Method of checking:
The standard pressure shall be main-
tained for 10 seconds and the indicator of
the gauge shall not go down.
PC130-8 3
10. Using tool M3, fill track roller assembly with oil,
then tighten plug (11).
5 Track roller oil:
145 – 155 cc (EO30-DH)
3 Plug: 15 ± 5 Nm {1.5 ± 0.5 kgm}
(P: To oil pump, T: To tank)
4 PC130-8

idler assembly 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
bol
Q'ty
L 1 791-675-1510 Installer t 1
M 3 791-601-1000 Oil pump q 1
Disassembly 5. Remove dowel pin (8), then remove support

1. Remove dowel pin (1), then remove support (7) from shaft (5).
(2).
6. Remove bushings (9) and (10) from idler (4).
2. Remove floating seal (3) from support (2) and
idler (4).
3. Pull out idler (4) from shaft (5) and support

assembly (7).
a It is filled with approx. 90 cc of oil, so drain
the oil at this point or lay a cloth to prevent
the area from becoming dirty.
4. Remove floating seal (6) (on opposite side)

from idler (4) and shaft (5) and support assem-
bly (7).
PC130-8 5
Assembly 4. Assemble shaft (5) and support assembly (7)

1. Press fit bushings (9) and (10) to idler (4). to idler (4).
2. Fit O-ring and install support (7) to shaft (5) 5. Using tool L1, install floating seal (3) to idler (4)
with dowel pin (8). and support (2).
a Coat the sliding surface of the floating seal
3. Using tool L1, install floating seal (6) to idler (4) with oil, and be careful not to let any dirt or
and shaft (5) and support assembly (7). dust get stuck to it.
a Coat the sliding surface of the floating seal a Remove all grease and oil from the con-
with oil, and be careful not to let any dirt or tact surface of the O-ring and the floating
dust get stuck to it. seal.
a Remove all grease and oil from the con-
tact surface of the O-ring and the floating
seal.
6 PC130-8
6. Install O-ring, then install support (2) with 8. Using tool M3 fill track roller assembly with oil,
dowel pin (1). then tighten plug (11).
5 Track roller oil:
145 – 155 cc (EO30-DH)
3 Plug: 15 ± 5 Nm {1.5 ± 0.5 kgm}
(P: To oil pump, T: To tank)
7. Using tool M3 apply standard pressure to roller

oil filler port and check air leakage.
a Standard pressure: 0.1 MPa {1 kg/cm2}
a Method of checking:
The standard pressure shall be main-
tained for 10 seconds and the indicator of
the gauge shall not down.
PC130-8 7
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring 1
Special tools
Disassembly
New/Remodel
1. Remove lock plate (1), then remove seat (2)

Necessity
Sym- and valve (3).

Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol
a Do not remove grease fitting (17) from the
Q'ty
valve (3).
791-600-2001 Compressor (A) 1
or t 2. Remove yoke piston assembly (5) from recoil
791-685-8006 Compressor (B) 1 spring assembly (4).
791-635-3160 Extension t 1
2 3. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly (4)
790-201-2770 • Spacer t 1
1) Set recoil spring assembly (4) to tool L2.
790-101-1600
Cylinder
t 1 k The recoil spring is under large
(686 kN {70 ton}) installed load, so be sure to set the
790-101-1102 Pump t 1 tool properly. Failure to do this is
790-201-1500 Push tool kit q 1 dangerous.
L a Installed load of spring:
• Plate
790-201-1590 1 84,300 N {8,600 kg}
3 (outside: ø75)
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1702 Push tool kit t 1
780-201-1780 • Push tool 1
4
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
8 PC130-8
2) Apply hydraulic pressure slowly to com-

press spring, then remove nut (6).
a Compress the spring to a point where
the nut becomes loose.
a Release the hydraulic pressure slowly
to remove the spring tension.
3) Remove pilot (8), and spring (7).
4) Remove snap ring (10), dust seal (11) and
bush (12) from cylinder (9).
4. Disassembly of yoke piston (5) assembly

1) Remove snap ring (14), then remove U-
packing (15).
2) Remove wear ring (16) from yoke piston
(13).
PC130-8 9
Assembly
1. Assembly of yoke piston assembly

1) Assemble wear ring (16) to yoke piston
(13).
2) Assemble U-packing (15) and secure with
snap ring (14).
2. Assembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Using tool L4, press fit bush (12) to cylin-
der (9).
2) Using tool L3, press fit dust seal (11) to
cylinder (9).
5) Remove recoil spring assembly (4) from

tool L2.
3. Assemble yoke piston assembly (5) to recoil

spring assembly (4).
2 Yoke piston sliding portion wear ring :
Grease (G2-LI)
4. Fit valve (3) and seat (2), and secure with lock
plate (1).
a Install the valve so that the direction of the
3) Assemble cylinder (9) and pilot (8) to fitting (17) is to the outside.
spring (7), and set to tool L2.
4) Apply hydraulic pressure slowly to com- 5. Fill inside of cylinder with a approximately 120
press spring, and tighten nut (6) so that cc of grease.
installed length of spring is dimension 2 Inside cylinder: Grease (G2-LI)
(a).
a Installed length (a) of spring: 390 mm
10 PC130-8
Spreading and installation of

track shoe assembly 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol
Q'ty
Remover and
791-620-3000 t 1
installer
791-635-3110 • Frame 1
791-635-3160 • Extension 1 3. Remove 2 shoes (4) above and in front of the
791-635-3170 • Nut 1 master pin. [*1]
791-635-3180 • Screw 1
• Screw
791-635-3190 1
(for fixing)
R 791-635-3210 • Pilot 1
791-630-3220 • Adapter 1
791-620-3260 • Pin pusher 1
796T-432-1010 Guide t 1 N Q
Cylinder
790-101-1300
(980kN {100ton})
or t 1
Cylinder
790-101-1600
(686kN {70ton})
791-101-1102 Pump t 1
4. Using tool R, pull out the master pin. [*2]
Spreading 5. Using tool R, pull out the temporary pin and

remove the dust seal. Move the machine in
1. Move master pin (1) to above the idler (2).
reverse to spread track shoe assembly (5).
[*3]
2. Lower the work equipment to the ground and

loosen lubricator (3) to decrease the track
shoe tension. [*1]
k Since the internal pressure of the
adjustment cylinder is very high, do
not loosen the lubricator more than 1
turn. If the grease does not come out
sufficiently, move the machine forward
and in reverse.
PC130-8 11
Installation
removal.
[*1]
a Adjust the track shoe tension. For detail, see
Testing and adjusting, "Testing and adjusting
track shoe tension".
[*2]
a Using tool R, press fit the master pin so that its
projection will be dimension (a).
Projection (a) of master pin: 3 ± 2 mm
[*3]
a When installing the dust seal, apply grease
(G2-LI-1) to its contact face to the bushing.
a When press fitting the master pin, apply
grease (G2-LI-1) to the inside of the master
bushing.
a If the rubber part of the road liner specification
(rubber pad type) is worn and broken to dam-
age the mounting bolt heads, replace the shoe
with new one immediately. If the bolt heads
are crushed, the bolts cannot be removed.
12 PC130-8
Removal and installation of Installation

sprocket 1 q Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
Removal
[*1]
2
1. Expand the track shoe assembly. For details,
see Expansion of track shoe assembly. Threads of sprocket mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Sprocket mounting bolt:
2. Swing the work equipment by 90° and push up
the machine with it, and then set blocks [1] 323.6 – 362.8 Nm {33 – 37 kgm}
between the track frame and track shoe.
3.Remove the 15 mounting bolts and lift off

sprocket (1). [*1]
4 Sprocket: 35 kg
PC130-8 13
Removal and installation of 6. Disconnect hoses (6) – (12) from center swivel
joint.
revolving frame assembly 1
7. Disconnect plate (13) from revolving frame.
Removal
battery.
1. Remove the work equipment assembly by

referring to "Removal of work equipment
assembly".
2. Disconnect boom cylinder hoses (1) and (2).

a Be sure to apply the blind plug to the dis-
connected hose.
3. Temporarily lift the boom cylinder to remove
pins (3) on the bottom.
a Check the number and position of the
shims mounted. [*1] 8. Remove mounting bolts (14), leaving one each
at front and rear. [*2]
4. Lift boom cylinder assembly (4) to remove it.

4 Boom cylinder assembly: 110 kg 9. Lift revolving frame assembly (16) to loosen
remaining bolts (15).
5. Remove operator cab assembly (5) by refer- a Carefully remove the remaining bolts by
ring to "Removal of operator cab assembly". balancing them using the crane.
a Carefully lift and remove them to prevent
them from coming in contact with the cen-
ter swivel joint or other parts.
4 Revolving frame assembly: 6,100 kg
14 PC130-8
Installation
q Installation is performed in the opposite way to
removal.
[*1]
2 Surface inside bushing during pin assembly:
Hyper white grease (G2-T)
2 Greasing after pin assembly:
Hyper white grease (G2-T)
k Never put your finger in the pin hole when

adjusting the position.
a Adjust the clearance between the mount on
the boom cylinder bottom and the frame using
the shims so that it becomes 1mm or less.
[*2]
2 Swing circle contacting face:
Liquefied gasket (LG-1)
2 Revolving frame mounting bolt screw:
Liquefied adhesive (LT-2)
3 Revolving frame mounting bolt:
245 – 308.9 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
(Tuget: 279.3 Nm {28.5 kg})
q Supplying oil (hydraulic oil tank)

Supply oil from the oil filler port to the specified
level, start the engine to circulate oil in the pip-
ing and recheck the oil level.
q Bleeding air
Bleed the air. For details , see Testing and
adjusting, "Bleeding air from each part".
PC130-8 15
Removal and installation of 4. Sling the counterweight and remove 4 mount-

ing bolts (4). [*1]
counterweight assembly 1
Removal
k Stop the machine on a level ground, stop
the engine, and lower the work equipment
to the ground.
5. Lift off counterweight assembly (5).

a Move the counterweight backward at first
so that it will not interfere with the machine
and then lift it up.
4 Counterweight assembly (PC120-8):
2,300 kg
4 Counterweight assembly (PC130-8):
2,500 kg
2. Remove cover (2).
3. Disconnect monitor camera wiring connector

A40 (3).
16 PC130-8
Installation
removal.
[*1]
2 Counterweight mounting bolt:
Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Counterweight mounting bolt:
1,177 – 1,470 Nm {120 – 150 kgm}
Target: 1,324 Nm {135 kgm}
PC130-8 17

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
18 PC130-8
SEN04130-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Hydraulic system
Removal and installation of center swivel joint assembly ............................................................................... 2
Disassembly and assembly of center swivel joint assembly........................................................................... 4
Removal and installation of hydraulic tank assembly...................................................................................... 5
Removal and installation of work equipment pump assembly ........................................................................ 8
Removal and installation of control valve assembly ..................................................................................... 12
Disassembly and assembly of control valve assembly ................................................................................. 16
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment PPC valve assembly .......................................................... 28
Disassembly and assembly of travel PPC valve assembly........................................................................... 30
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder assembly ......................................................................... 33
PC130-8 1
Removal and installation of center 3. Disconnect hoses (3) – (8) between travel
motor and swivel joint.
swivel joint assembly 1
4. Remove elbow (9).
Removal
5. Disconnect drain hose (10), (11).
6. Disconnect hoses (12) – (15) between control
position.
k
valve and swivel joint.
k
7. Disconnect hose (16) from solenoid valve.
Loosen the hydraulic tank cap gradually to
8. Remove plate (17).
re-connecting them.
9. Disconnect hoses (for changing the speed)

(18) and (19) between both travel motors and
swivel joint.
the hydraulic oil. [*1]
2 PC130-8
10. Remove mounting bolts and lift off center Installation

swivel joint assembly (20). [*1] q Installation is performed in the opposite way to
a Sling the joint assembly temporarily, then removal.
remove the bolts.
4 Center swivel joint assembly: 30 kg [*1]
2 Mounting bolt screw:
Liquefied adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt:
98.1 – 123.0 Nm {10.0 – 12.5 kgm}
q Bleeding air
Bleed air from the swing motor. For details,
see Testing and adjusting, "Bleeding air from
each part".
PC130-8 3

center swivel joint assembly 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol
Q'ty
790-101-2501 Push puller q 1
790-101-2510 • Block 1
790-101-2520 • Screw 1
790-101-2540 • Washer 1
Assembly
T1 791-112-1180 • Nut 1 1. Fit slipper seals (7) and O-rings (6) to swivel
790-101-2630 • Leg 2 rotor.
790-101-2570 • Washer 4
2. Set swivel shaft (5) to block, then fit it by using
790-101-2560 • Nut 2 push tool and hitting swivel rotor (4) lightly with
plastic hammer.
2 Contact surfaces of rotor and shaft
791-112-2650 • Adapter 2
: Grease (G2-LI)
Disassembly a When installing the rotor, take care not to
1. Remove cover (1). damage the slipper seals and O-rings.
2. Remove snap ring (2). 3. Install ring (3) and secure with snap ring (2).
3. Using tool T1, pull out swivel rotor (4) and ring 4. Fit O-ring and install cover (1).
(3) from swivel shaft (5). 3 Swivel joint mounting bolt :
31.3 ± 2.9 Nm {3.2 ± 0.3 kgm}
4. Remove O-rings (6) and slipper seals (7) from
swivel shaft (5).
4 PC130-8
Removal and installation of 3. Remove the exterior parts according to the fol-
lowing procedure.
hydraulic tank assembly 1 1) Remove handrail mounting bolts (3), (4)
and (5), 2 pieces each, and remove
Removal
k
handrail (6).
Stop the machine on a level ground, lower
a To remove mounting bolts (5), open
cover (7).
2) Remove 2 cover upper mounting bolts (8)
position.
k
and 2 cover lower mounting bolts (9) and
remove cover (10).
k
3) Remove tool box mounting bolt (11) and
Loosen the hydraulic tank cap gradually to
move tool box (12) forward.
4) Remove fuel tank side cover (13).
5) Open and lock engine hood (14).

the hydraulic oil. [*1]
PC130-8 5
6) Remove covers (15) – (18).
4. Disconnect return hose (30).

7) Remove brackets (19) and (20).
8) Remove partition plates (21) and (22). 5. Remove work equipment pump suction hose
(31).
a Disconnect elbow (31a) from the pump.
[*2]
a Make marks at the hose end and tube so
that it can be reconnected correctly.
9) Remove bracket (23).
6. Disconnect 6 hoses (32) – (37).
10) Remove engine oil filter (24) and bracket

(25) together.
11) Remove fuel prefilter (26), fuel filter (27)
and bracket (28) together.
12) Remove bracket assembly (29).
6 PC130-8
7. Remove 4 hydraulic tank mounting bolts (38). Installation

[*3] q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of
removal.
[*1]
3 Drain plug (1): 58.8 – 78.4 Nm {6 – 8kgm}
Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm}
5 Hydraulic oil tank: 90 l
(Capacity: 145 l)
[*2]
a Align the hose to the original position (marking
position).
a Reference
8. Lift off hydraulic tank assembly (39). Depth of insertion
q Hydraulic oil tank side: 92 mm
q Work equipment pump side: 85 mm
mm.
clamp.
BOND PANDO 18B)
on the hose.
{0.6kgm}
a Sling the hydraulic tank assembly, pull it to
this side, and remove it by swinging it
diagonally.
4 Hydraulic tank assembly : 100 kg
mm.
[*3]
3 Hydraulic oil tank mounting bolt (27):

235 – 285 Nm {23.5 – 29.5 kgm}
PC130-8 7
Removal and installation of work 4. Remove covers (4) and (5).

equipment pump assembly 1
Removal
position.
a Prepare an oil receiving pan under the work
equipment pump.
a Put tags to the pipings to prevent a mistake in 5. Remove bracket assembly (6).
re-connecting them.
6. Remove frame (7).
7. Remove bracket (8).
8. Remove 5 upper mounting bolts (9) and 2 par-

tition plate mounting bolts (10) and remove
frame (11) and bracket (12) together.
9. Remove side covers (13) and (14).

a Remove mounting bolt (15) of side cover
(13), too.
10. Remove partition plate (16).
2. Loosen the damper case drain plug and drain

the damper case oil. [*1]
6 Damper case: 0.75 l
8 PC130-8
11. Remove the filters according to the following 13. Disconnect hoses (29) – (33).
procedure.
1) Disconnect hoses (17) and (18) from the 14. Disconnect suction hose (34) and elbow (35)
work equipment pump. together from the work equipment pump. [*3]
2) Disconnect attachment filter assembly
(19) and bracket together.
3) Disconnect damper case oil supply hose
(20).
4) Disconnect hydraulic oil filter assembly
(21).
a The damper case oil supply hose
bracket is tightened with 2 mounting
bolts (22), too.
5) Disconnect engine oil filter assembly (23)
and bracket together.
a Fix the engine oil filter assembly with
a rope, etc. so that it will not be an
obstacle.
15. Remove all work equipment pump mounting
6) Disconnect fuel filter assembly (24) from
bolts (36), except 1 or 2.
bracket (25).
7) Disconnect fuel prefilter assembly (26)
and bracket (25) together.
16. Sling work equipment pump (37) and remove

remaining mounting bolts (36).
12. Disconnect connectors V11 (27) and P22 (28).
PC130-8 9
17. Lift off work equipment pump (37).
a Pull out work equipment pump (37) to this

side almost to the end and then pull it out
diagonally around the brackets on the
right and left sides.
10 PC130-8
Installation q When using a new hose

q Carry out installation in the reverse order to a Tighten until dimention (BDG) is 14 – 17
removal. mm.
[*1]
a Start the engine, check the oil level, and add
new oil if necessary.
[*2]
5 Damper case: 0.75 l
a If the suction hose was disconnected from the
elbow, install the MIKALOR clamp according to
q Tighten the clamp on the inside of the
hose first and then tighten the clamp on
the hose side (elbow side).
q Apply the following lubricating oil or equiv-
alent to threaded parts [C] and tighten the
clamps.
2 Lubricating oil:
THREEBOND (PANDO 18B)
q Adjust bridge [A] so that it will be under
band [B].
q Tighten until dimensions [L] and [M] are
set to the specified dimensions.
[*3]
a Align the hose to the original position (marking
position).
a Reference
Depth of insertion
q Hydraulic oil tank side: 92 mm
q Work equipment pump side: 85 mm
mm.
clamp.
BOND PANDO 18B)
on the hose.
{0.6kgm}
PC130-8 11
Removal and installation of

control valve assembly 1
Removal
position.
re-connecting them. 4. Remove cover (4).
1. Remove undercover (1). 5. Remove brackets (5) and (6) and covers (7)
and (8).

the hydraulic oil. [*1] 6. Remove clamps (9) and (10).
(Specified quantity of oil): 145 l 7. Disconnect front upper hoses (11) - (16).
(Port Nos. and connection points)
(11) Control valve (A7) - To attachment 1
(12) Control valve (B7) - To attachment 1
(13) Control valve (A6) - To bucket head side
(14) Control valve (B6) - To bucket bottom side
(15) Control valve (A5) - To arm head side
(16) Control valve (B5) - To arm bottom side
a Disconnect hoses (11) – (14) from the
control valve.
a Disconnect hose (15) from the work equip-
ment and then disconnect it from the con-
trol valve.
12 PC130-8
8. Disconnect 8 front lower hoses (17) – (24). 9. Disconnect 11 hoses (27) – (37) on the left side
(Port Nos. and connection points) (operator cab side).
(17) Control valve (A4) – To boom bottom side (Port Nos. and connection points)
(18) Control valve (B4) – To boom head side (27) Control valve (PB7) – From attachment 1
(19) Control valve (TS2) – To hydraulic tank PPC valve
(20) Control valve (LS) – To work equipment (28) Control valve (PB6) – From bucket digging
pump (LS valve) PPC valve
(21) Control valve (A3) – To right travel motor (29) Control valve (PB5) – From arm in PPC
(reverse side) valve
(22) Control valve (B3) – To right travel motor (30) Control valve (PB4) – From boom lower
(forward side) PPC valve
(23) Control valve (A2) – To left travel motor (31) Control valve (TC) – From attachment 1
(forward side) (32) Control valve (TC) – To oil cooler
(24) Control valve (B2) – To left travel motor (33) Control valve (PS) – From merge-divider
(reverse side) valve solenoid valve
(25) Control valve (A1) – To swing motor (right (34) Control valve (PST) – From travel junction
swing side) valve solenoid valve
(26) Control valve (B1) – To swing motor (left (35) Control valve (PB3) – From right travel for-
swing side) ward PPC valve
a Disconnect hoses (25) and (26) between (36) Control valve (PB2) – From left travel
the control valve and swing motor from the reverse PPC valve
swing motor. (37) Control valve (PB1) – From swing left
PPC valve
a Hose (31) is the return hose from the
direction selector valve of attachment 1,
which is connected to the top of block
(31a).
a Hose (32) is the return hose to the oil
cooler, which is connected to the rear of
block (31a).
a Hose (34) (Port PST) is located at the rear
of hose (35) (Port PB3).
a Hose (35) is connected to the opposite
side to connector (39).
a Hose (36) is connected to the opposite
side to connector (40).
10. Disconnect connectors P25 (38), P09 (39) and

P12 (40).
PC130-8 13
11. Disconnect 12 hoses (41) – (52) on the right

side (fuel tank side).
(Port Nos. and connection points)
(41) Control valve (PP) – To work equipment
pump LS valve
(42) Control valve (PA7) – From attachment 1
PPC valve
(43) Control valve (PA6) – From bucket dump
PPC valve
(44) Control valve (PA5) – From arm dump
PPC valve
(45) Control valve (PA4) – From boom raise
PPC valve
(46) Control valve (PA4) – To control valve
(BP1) 13. Disconnect hoses (55) – (58) on the rear side
(47) Control valve (PX) – From 2-stage relief (engine side).
solenoid valve (Port Nos. and connection points)
(48) Control valve (TB) – To hydraulic tank (55) Control valve (TS1) – To hydraulic tank
(49) Control valve (PA3) – From right travel (56) Control valve (PR) – To solenoid valve
reverse PPC valve and EPC valve
(50) Control valve (PA2) – From left travel for- (57) Control valve (P2) – From work equipment
ward PPC valve pump
(51) Control valve (PA1) – From swing right (58) Control valve (P1) – From work equipment
PPC valve pump
(52) Control valve (TSW) – To swing motor
a Control valve (BP1) port is installed to the
bottom (block) of the rear of the control
valve.
a Disconnect hose (46) from port PA4 since
it will be an obstacle to disconnection of
hoses (49) - (51).
a Hose (49) is connected to the rear of con-
nector (53) and hose (50) is connected to
the rear of connector (54).
a Disconnect hose (52) from the swing
motor.
12. Disconnect connectors P10 (53) and P11 (54).
14 PC130-8
14. Remove the 4 bolts on the underside of the Installation

control valve mount (59). q Carry out installation in the reverse order to
removal.
15. Lift off control valve assembly (60).
PC130-8 15
Disassembly and assembly of [*1]

q When tightening or loosening a plug shown in
control valve assembly 1 sections G-G, M-M, N-N and AA-AA, be sure to
keep the spool in the valve body.
Assembly
q When tightening each plug, apply a drop of
a In this section, only precautions for assembling
(approx. 0.02 g) LOCTITE (No. 638) to it.
the control valve assembly are explained.
a Thoroughly degrease each plug and
a The port Nos. in the drawings refer to the port
female threaded part with denatured alco-
Nos. of the hoses that are specified to be dis-
hol etc. and then dry them before tighten-
connected in "Removal and installation of con-
ing them. Do not apply pressure to them
trol valve assembly".
for 2 hours after tightening them.
a The number in ( ) attached to each tightening
(Part to drop LOCTITE)
torque shown in the drawings indicates the
number of bolts, plugs, etc.
q Coat the sliding surfaces of the parts with

engine oil before assembling.
2 Mating face:
Gasket sealant (SEALEND 242 or equivalent)
q The tightening torque and precautions for each
part are as follows. (Random order)
q Installation of cover (1):

Tighten nuts (17) in the order of [1] – [4] in 3
times.
3 1st time: 58.8 – 68.6 Nm {6 – 7 kgm}
2nd time: 78.5 – 88.3 Nm {8 – 9 kgm}
3rd time: 98.1 – 113 Nm {10 – 11.5 kgm}
a Projection of stud end from nut end: 0.5 – 3
mm
q Assembly of block (10)

Tighten bolts (18) in the order of [1] – [4] in 3
times.
3 1st time: 19.6 – 29.4 Nm {2 – 3 kgm}
2nd time: 39.2 – 49.0 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
3rd time: 58.8 – 73.5 Nm {6 – 7.5 kgm}
16 PC130-8
PC130-8 17
(Names of each port and portion)

a As for outside views and sectional views, only the 8-spool valve (6-spool valve + 2 service valves) is
shown.
q A1: To swing motor q PA5: From arm dump PPC valve

q A2: To left travel motor q PA6: From bucket dump PPC valve
q A3: To right travel motor q PA7: From attachment 1, PPC valve
q A4: To boom cylinder bottom q PA8: From attachment 2, PPC valve
q A5: To arm cylinder head q PB1: From swing left PPC valve
q A6: To bucket cylinder head q PB2: From left travel reverse PPC valve
q A7: To attachment 1 q PB3: From right travel forward PPC valve
q A8: To attachment 2 q PB4: From boom lower PPC valve
q B1: To swing motor q PB5: From arm in PPC valve
q B2: To left travel motor q PB6: From bucket digging PPC valve
q B3: To right travel motor q PB7: From attachment 1, PPC valve
q B4: To boom cylinder head q PB8: From attachment 2, PPC valve
q B5: To arm cylinder bottom q PMAX: Pressure sensor port
q B6: To bucket cylinder bottom q PP: To main pump
q B7: To attachment 1 q PR: To solenoid valve, EPC valve
q B8: To attachment 2 q PS: From merge-divider valve solenoid valve
q BP1: From boom raise PPC valve q PST: From travel junction valve solenoid valve
q LS: To pump LS valve q PX: From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
q P1: From main pump q TB: To tank
q P2: From main pump q TC: To oil cooler
q PA1: From swing right PPC valve q TS1: To tank
q PA2: From left travel forward PPC valve q TS2: To tank
q PA3: From right travel reverse PPC valve q TSW:To swing motor
q PA4: From boom raise PPC valve
1. Cover 10. Block

2. Service valve 2 11. Swing bleed valve
3. Service valve 1 12. LS check valve
4. Bucket valve 13. Travel junction valve + LS check valve
5. Arm valve 14. Arm regeneration valve
6. Boom valve 15. Boom hydraulic drift prevention valve
7. Right travel valve 16. Merge-divider valve block
8. Left travel valve 17. Cover mounting nut
9. Swing valve 18. Block mounting bolt
18 PC130-8
PC130-8 19
(Major sectional views)

1. Suction safety valve (Service 2) 20. Spool (Bucket)
2. Suction safety valve (Service 1) 21. Spool (Arm)
3. Suction valve (Bucket) 22. Spool (Boom)
4. Suction valve (Arm) 23. Spool (Right travel)
5. Suction valve (Boom) 24. Spool (Left travel)
6. Lift check valve 25. Spool (Swing)
7. Suction valve (Right travel) 26. Unload valve
8. Suction valve (Left travel) 27. Unload valve
9. Suction valve (Left travel) 28. Suction valve spring
10. Suction valve (Right travel) 29. Piston return spring
11. Main relief valve 30. Suction valve spring
12. Suction valve (Boom) 31. Spool return spring
13. Suction valve (Arm) 32. Spool return spring
14. Suction valve (Bucket) 33. Spool return spring
15. Suction safety valve (Service 1) 34. Spool return spring
16. Suction safety valve (Service 2) 35. Spool return spring
17. Suction safety valve 36. Spool return spring
18. Spool (Service 2) 37. Spool return spring
19. Spool (Service 1) 38. Spool return spring
20 PC130-8
PC130-8 21
1. LS select valve
5. Pressure compensation valve R (Bucket)
6. Pressure compensation valve R (Arm)
7. Pressure compensation valve R (Boom)
8. Pressure compensation valve R (Right travel)
9. Pressure compensation valve R (Left travel)
10. Pressure compensation valve R (Swing)
11. Pressure compensation valve F (Swing)
12. Pressure compensation valve F (Left travel)
13. Pressure compensation valve F (Right travel)
15. Pressure compensation valve F (Boom)
16. Pressure compensation valve F (Arm)
17. Pressure compensation valve F (Bucket)
20. Check valve spring

R Pressure reducing valve
22 PC130-8
PC130-8 23
1. LS select valve
Swing valve
3. Spool
5. Swing bleed valve
Left travel valve

7. Suction valve
8. Suction valve
9. Spool
11. LS check valve
Right travel valve

13. Suction valve
14. Suction valve
15. Spool
17. Travel junction valve + LS check valve
18. Unload valve

19. LS bypass valve

23. Retainer spring
24. Spool return hose
26. Valve return spring
27. Spool return spring

24 PC130-8
PC130-8 25
1. Unload valve Service 1 valve

2. Main relief valve 22. Pressure compensation valve F
3. Cooler bypass valve 23. Suction safety valve
4. Lift check valve 24. Suction safety valve
25. Spool
Boom valve 26. Pressure compensation valve R
6. Suction valve Service 2 valve
7. Hydraulic drift prevention valve 27. Pressure compensation valve F
8. Suction valve 28. Suction safety valve
9. Spool 29. Suction safety valve
10. Pressure compensation valve R 30. Spool
Arm valve 32. Valve return spring
11. Pressure compensation valve F 33. Spool return valve spring
12. Suction valve 34. Valve spring
13. Suction valve
14. Spool F: Flow control valve
15. Pressure compensation valve R R: Pressure reducing valve
16. Regeneration valve
Bucket valve
18. Suction valve
19. Suction valve
20. Spool
26 PC130-8
PC130-8 27
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment PPC valve assembly 1

(For boom, bucket, arm, swing control)
In this section, only the precautions for disassem- Assembly

bling and assembling the work equipment PPC a When assembling, clean and inspect the parts
valve assembly are discribed. closely and take care fully so that dirt, rust,
flaw, etc. will not cause a trouble.
Disassembly
a Spring (6) and spring (7) consists of each one a When installing plug (2) to body (1), take care
of two types of springs with different installed that its tip will not enter the hole of the body 20
loads in four places, so check the mounting mm in diameter.
position (oil pressure port) and mark with tags 3 Plug (2): 4 – 9 Nm {0.4 – 0.9 kgm}
to prevent mistakes when installing.
a The head of plug (3) must not be projected
from the body (1) surface.
3 Plug (3): 6 – 11 Nm {0.6 – 1.1 kgm}
a When installing piston (8), apply grease (G2-

LI) to its outside and the inside of the body (1)
hole.
a Install spring (5) with its small diameter side on

the shim (4) side.
q Diameter of spring (Inside diameter)
Small diameter side: ø4.9, Large diameter
side: ø5.55
a When installing springs (6) and (7), note that

they are different and they must be installed to
different hydraulic ports.
28 PC130-8
q Installed height: 31.9 mm (Common to

both springs)
q Installed load:
Spring (6) (P1, P2): 35.3 N {3.6 kg}
Spring (7) (P3, P4): 21.6 N {2.2 kg}
3 Bolt (9): 11.8 – 14.7 Nm {1.2 – 1.5 kgm}
a When installing joint (12) to body (1), apply

LOCTITE as shown below.
1) When installing the joint, apply 1 drop
(approx. 0.02 g) of LOCTITE (No. 262)
each to 2 places of the female screw (A)
of the body. Before installing the joint,
thoroughly degrease and dry its male
screw and the female screw of the body
with DRYSOL.
2) Drop LOCTITE to the following positions.
2 Female screw (A) of body:
LOCTITE No. 262
3 Joint (10): 39 – 49 Nm {4 – 5 kgm}
a Apply grease (G2-LI) to the rocking part of joint

(12) and the contact surfaces of disc (13) and
piston (8).
2 Quantity of grease (G2-LI)
1) Rocking part of joint: 2 – 4 cc/periphery
2) Contact surfaces of disc and piston:
0.3 – 0.8 cc/place
PC130-8 29

travel PPC valve assembly 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol
Q'ty
2 796T-416-1010 Push tool t 1 N Q
T 3 796T-416-1030 Push tool t 1 N Q
4 796T-416-1020 Push tool t 1 N Q
Disassembly
1. Remove screw (22) to remove lever (21). 6. Remove seal (9) and collar (8).
2. Remove mounting bolt (19) to remove case 7. Remove piston (7) to remove retainer (6),
(18), shaft (16) and lever (13) assembly. springs (5) and (4) and shim (3).
a Store shim (3) after checking the thickness
3. Remove pin (17). and the number of shims at each mount-
ing position.
4. Remove shaft (16) bushing (14) (14a) and
lever (13) from the case. 8. Remove valve (2) from body (1).
5. Remove mounting bolt (11) to remove plate

(10).
a Check the thickness and the mounting
position of washer (12).
a Remove pin (24) from body (1).
30 PC130-8
Assembly
Only the precautions for assembling the travel PPC
valve assembly are discribed.
a When assembling, clean and inspect the parts

closely and take care fully so that dirt, rust,
flaw, etc. will not cause a trouble.
a When installing piston (7), apply grease (G2-

LI) to its outside and the inside of the body
hole.
a Install spring (4) with its small diameter side on

the shim (3) side.
3) Install lever (13).
q Diameter of spring (Inside diameter)
Small diameter side: 4.9, Large diameter 4) Install shaft (16).
side: 5.55 5) Using tool T4, insatll pin (17).
a Installing dimension (C) of the pin
a Assemble shaft (16) with the following proce- (17) should be as follows.
dure. q C: 0 – 0.5 mm
1) Using tool T2, install bushing (14) to case. a Do not apply shock load to the pin
a Install bushing from 10° chamfered directly.
side.
a Installing dimension (A) of the bush-
ing should be as follows.
q A: 20.4 ± 0.3 mm
a Do not apply shock load to the bush-
ing directly.
a Apply grease (G2-LI) to the rocking part of

shaft (16) and the contact surfaces of lever
(13) and piston (7) and the contact surfaces of
damper (21) and pin (20).
2 Quantity of grease (G2-LI)
Rocking part of shaft:
4 – 8 cc/periphery
2) Using tool T3, install bushing (14a) to
Contact surfaces of lever and piston:
case.
0.3 – 0.8 cc/place
a Install bushing from 10° chamfered
Contact surfaces of plate and pin:
side.
0.3 – 0.8 cc/place
a Installing dimension (B) of the bush-
ing (14a) should be as follows. (End
a Install washer (12) 1.6 mm thick first. If the dif-
surface of bushing will tightly fit to the
ference between both sides at the stroke end
end surface of case.)
of the lever exceeds 0.7°, change the washer
q B: 0 mm
thickness to reduce the difference to below
a Do not apply shock load to the bush-
0.7°. (If the washer thickness is reduced by
ing directly.
0.3 mm, the stroke end angle is increased by
0.39°.)
q Thickness of washer t: 1.0, 1.3, 1.6
PC130-8 31
a Tighten each part to the following torque.

q Plug (26): 6 – 11 Nm {0.6 – 1.1 kgm}
q Plug (25): 4 – 9 Nm {0.4 – 0.9 kgm}
q Screw (22): 7.8 – 9.8 Nm {0.8 – 1.0 kgm}
q Bolt (19): 25 – 30 Nm {2.5 – 3.2 kgm}
q Bolt (11): 27 – 34 Nm {2.8 – 3.5 kgm}
32 PC130-8
Disassembly and assembly of Disassembly

hydraulic cylinder assembly 1 a This section explains how to disassemble and
assemble the boom, arm, bucket and blade
Special tools cylinders. For how to disassemble and assem-
ble the offset cylinder, refer to "Disassembly
New/Remodel
and assembly of offset cylinder assembly".
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol 1. Piston rod assembly
Q'ty
1) Remove the piping from the cylinder
assembly.
790-502-1003 Repair stand t 1
1 2) Remove the mounting bolt to disconnect
790-101-1102 Pump t 1 head assembly (1).
790-102-4300 Wrench assembly t 1 3) Remove piston rode assembly (2).
2
790-201-4310 Pin t 1 a Place an oil pan or the like under the
cylinder to receive oil.
790-201-1702 Push tool (Kit) t 1
790-201-1791 • Push tool 1
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1702 Push tool (Kit) t 1
790-201-1811 • Push tool 1
3
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1702 Push tool (Kit) t 1
790-201-1821 • Push tool 1
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
4) Disassemble the piston rod assembly with
01010-50816 • Bolt 1 the following procedure.
U 790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1 1] Set piston rod assembly (2) on tool
790-201-1610 • Push tool 1 U1.
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1
790-201-1620 • Push tool 1
4
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
790-201-1500 Push tool (Kit) q 1
790-201-1630 • Push tool 1
790-101-5021 • Grip 1
01010-50816 • Bolt 1
5 790-720-1000 Expander t 1
796-120-1650 Ring t 1
07281-01159 Clamp t 1
6
796-720-1660 Ring t 1
07281-01159 Clamp t 1
PC130-8 33
2] Remove piston assembly lock screw 6] Remove the head assembly (7).
(3).
Screw size
M12 x 1.75 pitch:
Boom, arm and blade
M10 x 1.5 pitch: Bucket
7] Remove cap (8) to remove eleven

balls (9) and cushion plunger (10).
q For the arm cylinder only.
a Since cap (8) is made of nylon,
tighten a screw into it and pull it
a If screw (3) is caulked too tightly to be out with pliers.
removed, force the screw in once and
then tap it to remove it.
2. Sub-disassembly of piston assembly

3] Use tool U2 to remove piston assem- 1) Remove ring (11).
bly (4). 2) Remove wear ring (12).
q If tool (U2) is not used, use the 3) Remove piston ring (13).
four drill holes (diameter = 10) to 4) Remove the O-ring and backup ring (14).
loosen the piston assembly.
4] Remove plunger (5).
q Arm cylinder and boom cylinder.
5] Remove collar (6).
q Arm cylinder and boom cylinder.
34 PC130-8
3. Disassembly of cylinder head assembly Assembly

1) Remove O-ring and backup ring (15). a Be careful not to damage the packing, the dust
2) Remove snap ring (16), then remove dust seal, the O-ring or the like
seal (17). a Do not forcibly insert the backup ring but make
3) Remove rod packing (18). it warm with hot water (50 to 60°C) before
4) Remove buffer ring (19). insertion.
5) Remove bushing (20).
1. Sub-assembly of cylinder head assembly
1) Press fit bushing (20) using tool U3.
2) Engage buffer ring (19).
3) Engage rod packing (18).
4) Mount dust seal (17) using tool U4 and fix
it with snap ring (16).
5) Mount the backup ring and O-ring (15).
PC130-8 35
2. Sub-assembly of piston assembly 2) Assemble head assembly (7).

1) Expand piston ring (13) using tool U5. 3) Fit O-ring and backup ring to collar (6),
a Set the piston ring on tool U5 and and assemble.
expand it by rotating the handle eight q Arm cylinder and boom cylinder.
to ten times. 4) Assemble plunger (5).
2) Reduce piston ring (13) using tool U6. q Arm cylinder and boom cylinder.
a Check that there is a small amount of
play at the tip of the plunger.
5) Set cushion plunger (10) on the piston rod
and engage 11 balls (9) and fix them using
cap (8).
6) Assemble piston assembly (4) in the fol-
lowing procedure.
q When the rod and piston assembly
(2) are reused
a Completely wash them and clear
them of cut powder or dust.
1] Screw in piston assembly (4) by
using tool U2, and tighten piston
3) Mount the backup ring and O-ring (14). assembly (4) until the position of
4) Engage wear ring (12). the screw thread hole (H1) which
5) Engage ring (11). is in piston rod assembly (2) half-
a Be careful not to expand the ring way matches.
abutment joint too much. a Remove all burrs and
2 Ring groove: Grease (G2-LI) flashes on the threaded por-
tion with a file.
3. Piston rod assembly

1) Set piston rod assembly (2) on tool U1.
36 PC130-8
2] Tighten screw (3). 2] Drill a hole for mounting screw (3).

2 Screw (3): LOCTITE No. 262 a Engage the drill with the screw V-
3 Screw (3) : shaped grooves of piston (4) and rod
Boom, arm and blade : (2) for horizontal processing.
66.2 ± 7.35 Nm a Process the bottom cushion-
{6.75 ± 0.75 kgm} equipped cylinder (arm cylinder) on
Bucket: 30.9 ± 3.4 Nm other part than the cap hole (8).
{3.15 ± 0.35 kgm}
Cylinder Tap drill Tap drill Tap used Tap
3] Caulk the screw at two points diameter depth depth
through punching.
Boom, arm 10.3 27 12 x 1.75 20
and blade
Bucket 8.5 27 10 x 1.5 20
3] Clear it of cut powder and dust and com-

pletely wash it after processing.
4] Tighten screw (3).
2 Screw thread: LOCTITE No. 262
3 Screw (3) :
Boom, arm and blade :
66.2 ± 7.35 Nm
{6.75 ± 0.75 kgm}
Bucket: 30.9 ± 3.4 Nm
{3.15 ± 0.35 kgm}
q When new rod (2) or/and piston assembly 5] Caulk the screw at four points through
(4) is/are used punching.
a For the bottom cushion-equipped rod,
mark the cap hole (8) on the rod end
surface. (See step 3-(5))
1] Screw piston assembly (4) until it comes

in contact with rod (2) end surface (a).
3 Piston assembly (4):
294 ± 29.4 Nm {30 ± 3.0 kgm}
a After tightening the piston, make sure

that there is some play with plunger.
q For the boom and arm cylinders only.
PC130-8 37
7) Set piston rod assembly (2) on tool U1. 10) Mount the piping.
8) Engage piston rod assembly (2)
2 Seal: Grease (G2-LI)
a Set the ring abutment joint horizon-
tally and align the axes of the piston
rod assembly and the cylinder tube to
insert them.
a After insertion, make sure that the
ring is not damaged or dropped and
completely push the piston rod.
9) Mount head assembly (1) and tighten it

with the mounting bolt.
3 Mounting bolt :
Cylinder Tightening torque

Bucket 172 ± 25 Nm {17.5 ± 2.5 kgm}
Arm 270 ± 39 Nm {27.5 ± 4.0 kgm}
Boom 172 ± 25 Nm {17.5 ± 2.5 kgm}
Blade 270 ± 39 Nm {27.5 ± 4.0 kgm}
38 PC130-8
PC130-8 39

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
40 PC130-8
SEN04131-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Work equipment
Removal and installation of work equipment assembly .................................................................................. 2
PC130-8 1
Removal and installation of work 3. Disconnect working lamp wiring connector (6).
equipment assembly 1
Special tools
New/Remodel
Necessity
Sym-
Part No. Part name
Sketch
bol
Q'ty
792-785-1100 Remover t 1
796-270-1110 • Adapter t 1
V Puller
790-101-4000 t 1
(490 kN {50 ton})
790-101-1102 Pump t 1 4. Disconnect grease tube (7).
5. Remove 2 lock bolts (8) and plate (9).

Removal
k Reach out the work equipment to the maxi-
mum and lower the bucket teeth to the
ground.
k Disconnect the cable from the negative (-)
1. Remove 2 clamps (1) and disconnect hoses

(2) – (5).
a Since the engine will be started, be sure to
stop the hoses with blind plugs.
6. Sling the cylinder and push out pin (10) to the

opposite side until it comes off the cylinder
head. [*1]
a When driving out the pin, do not hit its end
face directly since the threads of the lock
bolt hole may be damaged.
a Check the quantity and locations of the
installed shims.
7. Sling boom cylinder (11) and lower it onto the

block.
2. Disconnect attachment hoses (17) and (18). a Connect the negative (–) battery cable,
start the engine, and retract the boom cyl-
inder piston.
a Disconnect the cable from the negative (–)
terminal of the battery again.
2 PC130-8
12. Set tool V to boom foot pin (12).
13. Sling work equipment assembly (16) and oper-

ate tool V to pull out boom foot pin (12). [*2]
a Operate the crane to disconnect the work
equipment assembly from the revolving
frame and lift it off slowly.
4 Work equipment assembly: 1,960 kg
8. Disconnect boom cylinder (11) on the opposite

side similarly and lower it onto the block.
9. Remove blind plug (13) of boom foot pin (12).
10. Remove mounting bolts (14) and lock plate

(15).
11. Remove toolbox cover (19).
PC130-8 3
Installation
removal.
[*1]
a When driving out the pin, do not hit its end face
directly since the threads of the lock bolt hole
may be damaged.
2 Inside of bushing when inserting pin:
Molybdenum disulfide lubricant (LM-P)
2 Lubrication after insertion of pin:
Grease (LM-G)
k When aligning the pin holes, never insert
your fingers in them.
[*2]
2 Inside of bushing when inserting pin:
Molybdenum disulfide lubricant (LM-P)
2 Lubrication after insertion of pin:
Grease (LM-G)
k When aligning the pin holes, never insert
your fingers in them.
a Adjust clearance (c) between boom (23) and
bracket (24) to 0.5 mm or less with shims.
a Standard shim thickness: 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 mm
q Bleeding air
a Bleed air. For details, see Testing and
adjusting, "Bleeding air from hydraulic cyl-
inder".
q Refilling with oil (Hydraulic tank)

a Add oil through the oil filler to the specified
level. Run the engine to circulate the oil
through the system. Then, check the oil
level again.
4 PC130-8
PC130-8 5

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
6 PC130-8
SEN04132-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Cab and its attachments
Removal and installation of operator's cab assembly ..................................................................................... 2
Removal and installation of operator cab glass (stuck glass) ......................................................................... 5
Removal and installation of front window assembly ..................................................................................... 15
Removal and installation of floor frame assembly ........................................................................................ 22
PC130-8 1
Removal and installation of 9. Remove rear covers (10) to (13).

operator's cab assembly
Removal
k Disconnect the negative terminal (–) of the
battery before starting the work.
1. Remove front window (1).

2. Remove step plate (2).
3. Remove floor mat (3).
4. Refer to “Removal and installation of monitor

assembly“, and remove monitor assembly (4).
5. Remove covers (5) and (6). 10. Remove duct (14).

6. Remove cover duct assembly (7). 11. Remove cover (15).
a Disconnect connector H15 fixed on the
back from the clip.
7. Insert key (8), turn it right, and open the out-

side-air filter cover.
8. Remove outside-air filter (9).
14. Remove lock pin (18) and remove duct (19).
2 PC130-8
15. Remove duct (20). 23. Remove ducts (32) and (33).
16. Disconnect connector L03 (21). a Cut tie-wrap.
17. Remove plates (22) and (23) from the operator 24. Disconnect wiper motor connector M05 (34).
cab. 25. Remove harness (35) and antenna (36) from
the cab wall.
a Cut 2 points of tie-wrap.
18. Disconnect connectors CK01(24) and CK02

(25) from KOMATRAX communication modem.
19. Pass over and disconnect antenna (26) from
KOMTRAX communication modem. 26. Remove duct (37).
a If connectors CK01 and CK02 are not dis- 27. Remove duct (38) upper and lower.
connected first, an error is recorded in
KOMTRAX.
20. Disconnect connector M10(27) from the opera-
tor's cab. (If equipped)
21. Disconnect cab wiring intermediate connectors

H09(28), H08(29), and H16(30).
a Cut tie-wrap.
22. Disconnect radio antenna (31).
a (23) is removed plate.
28. Disconnect window washer hose (39).

29. Disconnect harness clamp (40).
30. Haul in antenna (36).
PC130-8 3
31. Detach harness clamp (41) from the right back 35. Lift off and remove operator's cab assembly
side of cab. (47).
4 Operator's cab assembly: 470 kg
32. Remove bolt (42) under the cab and remove

lock plate (43). [*1]
33. Remove bolt (44). [*2] Installation
q Installation is done in the reverse order of
removal.
[*1]
3 Mounting bolt of lock plate (43):
98 – 123 Nm {10 – 12.5 kgm}
[*2]
3 Bolt (44):
245 – 309 Nm {25 – 31.5 kgm}
34. Dismount 6 mounting bolts (45) and 4 mount-

ing nuts (46).
a Check the bolt length beforehand.
4 PC130-8
Removal and installation of operator cab glass (stuck glass)
a Among the panes of window glass on the 4 (1) : Right side window glass
sides of the operator's cab, 5 panes (1) to (4) (2) : Left side rear window glass
and (18) are stuck. (3) : Door lower window glass
a In this section, the procedure for replacing the (4) : Front window glass
stuck glasses is explained. (5) : Front window assembly
a When replacing front window glass (4), remove (Front window glass + Front frame)
front window assembly (5) . (It is impossible to (6) : Dam rubber
replace only the front window glass while the (17) : Center trim seal
front window assembly is installed to the opera- (18) : Rear glass
tor's cab.)
a For the procedure for replacing the front win-
dow assembly, see “Removal and installation of
front window assembly“.
PC130-8 5
Special tools (The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel

loader.)
Necessity
Symbol
Sketch
Part number Part name
Q’ty
N/R
2 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) t 2
X
3 20Y-54-13180 Stopper rubber t 2
Removal
a Remove the window glass to be replaced
1. Using seal cutter [1], cut the adhesive between
broken window glass (7) and operator's cab
(metal sheet)(8).
a If the window glass is broken finely, it may

be removed with a knife [4] and a screw-
driver.
a Widening the cut with a flat blade screw-
driver, cut the dam rubber and adhesive
with knife [4].
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel

loader.)
a If a seal cutter is not available, make holes

on the adhesive and dam rubber with a
drill and pass a fine wire (piano wire, etc.)
[2] through the holes. Then, grip the both
ends of the wire with priors [3], etc. (or
hold them by winding them onto some-
thing) and move the wire to the right and
left to cut the adhesive and dam rubber.
Since the wire may be broken by the fric-
tional heat, apply lubricant to the wire.
2. Remove the window glass.
6 PC130-8
Installation a Even if the primer is packed again just

1. Using a knife and scraper [5], remove the after it is unpacked, use it within 24 hours
remaining adhesive and dam rubber from the after it is unpacked for the first time.
metal sheets (glass sticking surfaces) of the (Discard the primer 24 hours after it is
operator's cab. unpacked.)
a Remove the adhesive and dam rubber to 1) Stir the primers for both of paint and glass
a degree that they will not affect adhesion sufficiently before using them.
of the new adhesive. Take care not to a If the primer has been stored in a refrig-
scratch the painted surfaces. erator, leave it at the room temperature
(If the painted surfaces are scratched, for at least half a day before stirring it.
adhesion will be lowered.) (If the primer is unpacked just after
taken out of the refrigerator, water will
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel be condensed. Accordingly, leave the
loader.) primer at the room temperature for a
sufficient time.)
2) When reusing primer brush (11), wash it in
white gasoline.
a After washing the brush, check it
again for dirt and foreign matter.
a Prepare respective brushes for the
paint primer and glass primer.
2. Remove oil, dust, and dirt, etc. form the stick-

ing surfaces of cab (8) and window glass (9)
with white gasoline.
a If the sticking surfaces are not cleaned
well, the glass may not be stuck perfectly.
a Clean the all black part on the back side of
the window glass.
a After cleaning the sticking surfaces, leave 3) Evenly apply the paint primer to the surfaces
them for at lease 5 minutes to dry. to stick dam rubber and its outside surfaces
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel to apply adhesive on operator's cab (8).
2 Paint primer:
loader.)
Sunstar primer for painting plane
580 super or equivalent
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
times.
(If it is applied more than 2 times, its
performance will be lowered.)
3. Apply primer (10).

a The using limit of primer is 4 months after
the date of manufacture. Do not use the
primer after this limit.
a Use the primer within 2 hours after un-
packing it.
PC130-8 7
a Parts to be coated with primer; Apply the prim- a Never apply the wrong primer.
er all over dimension (a). If the glass primer, etc. is applied by mistake,
q Dimension to apply primer (a): 25 mm wipe it off with white gasoline.
4) Apply the glass primer to the sticking sur-

faces of window glass (9).
2 Glass primer:
Sunstar primer for glass 580
super or equivalent
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
times.
(If it is applied more than 2 times, its
performance will be lowered.)
a In addition to the above parts, additionally

apply the primer to right side window glass (1)
and door lower window glass (3).
q Range to apply primer additionally for right side
window glass (1): (b)
q Range to apply primer additionally for door
lower window glass (3): (c)
a After applying the primer, leave it for at least 5

minutes (within 8 hours ) to dry.
a Parts to be coated with primer; Apply
the primer to all around of sticking
surface (d) of window glass (9) for
dam rubber (6) installation position
and operator's cab (8).
a Do not apply the primer to the
boarder about 5mm wide between the
black part and transparent part of the
glass.
a After applying the primer, leave it for
at least 5 minutes (within 8 hours ) to
dry.
a Never apply the wrong primer.
If the paint primer, etc. is applied by
mistake, wipe it off with white gaso-
line.
8 PC130-8
4. Stick dam rubber (both-sided adhesive

tape)(6) along the inside edge of the glass
sticking section.
a Do not remove the release tape of dam
rubber on the glass sticking side before
sticking the glass.
a When sticking the dam rubber, do not
touch the cleaned surface to the utmost.
a Care should be taken not to float the dam
rubber of each sticking corner.
2) Stick dam rubber (6) for left side window

glass (2) to the position as shown in the
figure.
a When sticking dam rubber (6) around a

frame, do not lap its finishing end over the
starting end. Or, make clearance of about
5 mm between them (e).
1) Stick dam rubber (6) for right side window
glass (1) to the position as shown in the
figure.
a Stick dam rubber (6a) additionally to

right side window glass (1).
q Positions to stick additional dam rub-
ber to the right side window glass:
(f): 50 mm
(g): 90 mm
(h): 250 mm
PC130-8 9
3) Stick dam rubber (6) for door lower win- a Stick dam rubber (6c) of the lower
dow glass (3) to the position as shown in side of the front window glass along
the figure. the outside edge of the lower line, dif-
ferently from other dam rubbers (6).
(If it is stuck along the inside, it will be
seen through the transparent part of
the glass.)
a Stick dam rubber (6b) additionally to

door lower window glass (3).
q Positions to stick additional dam
rubber to the door lower window
class: 5. Position the new window glass.
(j) : 110 mm 1) Check the clearance between the window
(k) : 90 mm glass and the operator's cab on the right,
(m) : 200 mm left, upper, and lower sides, and then posi-
tion the window glass to be the clearances
evenly.
2) Stick tapes [6] between window glass (9)
and operator's cab (8) and draw position-
ing line (n).
a Stick tapes [6] for positioning to 3
points, that is, right, left and lower
parts of the right side window glass,
left side rear window glass, and door
lower window glass for accurate posi-
tioning.
3) Cut the tape between window glass (9)
and operator's cab (8) with a knife, etc.
and then remove the window glass.
4) Stick dam rubber (6) for front window a Do not remove the tapes left on the
glass (4) to the position as shown in the window glass and the operator's cab
figure. before installing the window glass.
10 PC130-8
a When positioning front window glass

2) Cut the tip of the adhesive nozzle (14) so
(4), set its horizontal position to the
that dimensions (q) and (r) will be as fol-
frame width.
And set its vertical position to make lows.
the height difference (p) between the q Dimension (q): 10 mm
frame top and the front window glass q Dimension (r): 15 mm
3 mm.
3) Set adhesive cartridge (12) to caulking

6. Apply adhesive. gun [7].
a Use either of two types of adhesives a An electric caulking gun is more effi-
according to the season. cient.
2 Adhesive (Apr. to Oct.):
Sunstar penguine seal 580 super “S“
or equivalent
2 Adhesive (Oct. to Apr.):
Sunstar penguine seal 580 super “W“
or equivalent
a The using limit of the adhesive is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use
the adhesive after this limit.
a Keep the adhesive in a dark place where
the temperature is below 25°C.
a Never heat the adhesive higher than 30°C.
a When reusing the adhesive, remove the
all hardened part form the nozzle tip.
1) Break aluminum seal (13) of the outlet of
adhesive cartridge (12) and install the
nozzle.
PC130-8 11
4) Remove the release tape of dam rubber

on the glass adhesive side.
5) Apply adhesive (15) to the outside of dam
rubber (6) of the operator's cab.
a Apply adhesive (15) with dimensions

(s) and (t) for dam rubber (6) of oper-
ator's cab (8).
q Dimension (s): 10 mm
q Dimension (t): 15 mm
a Apply adhesive (15) higher than dam
rubber (6).
a Apply the adhesive evenly with same
height level.
7. Install the window glass.

1) Install window class (9), matching it to the
lines of the positioning tapes drawn in step
5.
a Since the window glass cannot be
removed and stuck again, stick it with
utmost caution.
a Stick the glass within 5 minutes after
applying the adhesive.
2) After sticking window glass (9), press all
around of it until it sticks to the dam rubber
a Apply adhesive (15) additionally to closely.
additional dam rubber (6a) of right a Press the corners of the window glass
side window glass and additional dam firmly.
rubber (6b) of door lower window
glass.
12 PC130-8
a You can perform this work efficiently

by pulling window glass (9) from
inside of the operator's cab with suc-
tion cup X2.
a After installing front window glass (4),

fill the clearances between it and cen-
ter trim seal (16) with caulking mate-
rial in range (s) with dimensions (t)
and (u).
After applying the primer to glass (4)
of section A-A, apply the adhesive as
caulking material.
q Caulking dimension (t): 2 mm
q Caulking dimension (u): 5 mm
a When caulking, mask the glass side
and form the adhesive with a rubber
spatula as shown in the figure.
a Wipe off the projected adhesive.
2 Glass primer:
Sunstar primer for glass 580
super or equivalent
2 Adhesive:
SUNSTAR penguine seal 580
super “S“ or “W“ or equivalent
PC130-8 13
8. Fix the window glass. 9. After installing the window glass, remove any
1) After installing right window glass (1) to excess of the primer and adhesive from the
the operator's cab, insert stopper rubbers operator's cab and window glass.
X3 to 2 places (v) at the bottom of the a By using the white gasoline, wipe off the
glass to fix the glass. adhesive before it is dried up.
a When cleaning the glass, do not give an
impact on it.
10. Protect the stuck window glass.

1) Keep the stopper rubbers, styrene foam
blocks, and rubber bands installed for 10
hours.
(at temperature of 20°C and humidity of
60%)
2) After removing the stopper rubbers, sty-
rene foam blokes, and rubber bands, wait
at least 14 hours, that is, at least 24 hours
in total, before operating the machine
actually.
2) By using styrene foam blocks [9] and rub-

ber bands [10], fix the window glass and
the dam rubber to fit them completely.
14 PC130-8
Removal and installation of front

window assembly
k Lower the work equipment completely to
the ground and stop the engine.
a To replace the front window glass, the front win-
dow assembly must be removed from the oper-
ator's cab. The procedure for removing and
installing the front window assembly (front
frame and front window glass) is explained
below.
Removal
1. Raise the front window assembly to the ceiling
and fix it with the rear locks ( on both sides).
2. Remove left corner block (1) and right corner

block (2). [*1]
a Mounting bolt (4) and washer (3) for left

corner block are used to hang the pull-up
assist cable in the following step 6.
6. Remove left lower pin (7). [*2]

a By removing left lower pin (7), plate (8) at
the end of pull-up assist cable (9) comes
off.
a Hang plate (8) on the mounting bolt of left
corner block (use washer) and set in
place.
k The return load of 58.8 N {6 kg} is
applied to the rear of the operator's
3. Release the rear lock of the cab. cab. Accordingly, take care when
removing left lower pin (7) to discon-
4. Lower the front window assembly carefully a nect pull-up assist cable (9).
little. Put out rollers (5) and (6) under the both
sides of the front window through the portion
from which the corner blocks were removed in
the above step 2. (the portion where the rail is
open) and hold them.
5. Remove rollers (5) and (6) under the both

sides of the front window.
PC130-8 15
9. Twist front window assembly (10) to the right

and left to remove both upper rollers (11) and
(12) from the rails, and then remove front win-
dow assembly (10).
7. Pull out the bottom of front window assembly

(10) though the rail opening portion and lower
it gradually.
8. Lower front window assembly (10) completely.

a Do not let the front window assembly
touch the monitor.
16 PC130-8
Installation a Install the right corner block so that clear-

q Carry out installation in the reverse order to ance (a) between the rail and right corner
removal. block (2) becomes 0 – 2.0 mm.
a Install the right corner block so that there
[*1] is no level difference at the rolling surface
q Adjust opening and closing of the front window (R) of the roller.
assembly according to the following proce-
dure.
1. Open and close the front window to check that
it does not interfere with the rails and that the
rollers are not hitched.
2. If there is any problem in opening and closing
of the front window, loosen the mounting bolt of
roller adjustment bracket (13) and adjust the
condition of the front window, and then tighten
the mounting bolt again.
a Make sure that bracket (13) is not
mounted on the angle.
3 Mounting bolt: 34.3 Nm {3.5 kgm}
5. Install left corner block (1).

a Fully tighten the block after adjusting the
“Close“ position in the following step 6.
a Install the left corner block so that clear-
ance (b) between the rail and left corner
block (1) becomes 0 – 2.0 mm.
a Install the left corner block so that there is
no level difference at the rolling surface
(R) of the roller. (Refer to the above fig-
ure.)
3. Raise the front window assembly and fix it with

the rear locks (on both sides).
a Check that the locks in the rear of the
operator's cab are securely fastened.
4. Install right corner block (2).

a Fully tighten the block after adjusting the
“Close“ position in the following step 6.
PC130-8 17
6. Adjust the “Close“ position of the front window

assembly lock according to the following pro-
cedure.
1) Tighten left and right corner blocks (1) and
(2) at roughly right positions so that front
window glass (14) is attached firmly to
cab-side trim seal (15).
7. After the adjustment, splash water heavily over

the front window glass and check that the
water does not leak into the cab.
2) Check the working condition of right and

left locks (16) and (17) when opening and
closing the front window assembly.
q If right and left locks (16) and (17) do
not work normally.
1] Loosen lock fitting bolt (18), move
lock (16) forward, and then tighten the
bolt again.
a The same applies to the right
side.
2] After moving the lock, recheck the fit-
ness of front window glass (14) and
cab side trim seal (15) which was
checked in step 1).
3] Repeat the work in 1] and 2] until the
fitness of the front window glass and
the working condition of locks (16)
and (17) are both acceptable, and
then tighten the mounting bolts of the
right and left corner blocks.
18 PC130-8
8. Adjust the “Open“ position of the front window 3) Close front window assembly (10).
assembly lock. 4) Loosen locknut (20) of right and left side of
1) After adjusting the “Close“ position of the rubber stoppers (18), and then pull back
front window assembly lock in steps 6 and both rubber stoppers (18) so that they
7, raise the front window assembly to the won't contact with the front window
ceiling. assembly when it is in “Open“ position.
2) Set the front window assembly locks at
the both sides of rear of the operator's cab
to the “Open“ position, and then check the
following items.
q Check the working condition of right
a nd left l ock s ( 16) and ( 17) ( as
explained above).
q Front window assembly must be in
contact with the right and left rubber
stoppers (18) and furthermore, must
be pushing them backward for 1.5 –
3.0 mm.
q The front window assembly must be
pushing the limit switch backward for
4 – 7 mm. 5) Loosen both sides of locknuts (22), and
a The position of limit switch (19) can- adjust the position of striker bolt (21).
n ot be ad ju st ed. The re for e , th e a Striker bolt (21): M10
“Open“ position of the front window Inner diameter of plate (23): ø 14.5
assembly is decided within the range mm
where this switch works.
a Limit switch (19) is used to prevent
the windshield wiper from moving
when turning the wiper switch on by
m i s ta k e w h e n t h e f r o n t w i n d o w
assembly is in “Open“ position. If the
wiper operates when there is no glass
in the front, the wiper falls down
inside the cab and causes trouble.
To check whether limit switch (19) is
working, turn the key switch on and
see that, even if the wiper switch is
turned on, the wiper does not operate
when the front window assembly is in
“Open“ position.
1] Front window assembly (10) must be
pushing the limit switch backward for
4 – 7 mm (at “Open“ position).
2] Working condition of lock (17).
q After checking the above items, if it

becomes necessary to do the adjust-
ment.
PC130-8 19
6) Adjustment of right and left rubber stop- 4] Tighten locknuts (20) of the both
pers (18). sides of rubber stopper (18).
1] Bring front window assembly (10) (the
lock should be in “Open“ position) into
contact with right and left rubber stop-
pers (18).
9. Adjust stopper (24) of the front window assem-

bly.
1) Adjust and lock both sides of stopper (24)
2] Close front window assembly (10). so that when pulling up the front window
3] Turn right and left rubber stoppers assembly, surface (d) of stopper (D) of
(18) to the left for one and a half front window assembly (10) is in contact
rotation. with surface (c) of stopper (24).
a One turn of rubber stopper (18)
to the left is equivalent to
squashing the rubber for approxi-
mately 1.5 mm.
a When the front window assembly
is in “Open“ position, the front
window assembly must be push-
ing right and left rubber stoppers
(18) for 1.5 – 3.0 mm.
20 PC130-8
10. Check the operating effort of the lock of the

front window assembly.
1) After finishing the adjustment of steps 6 –
9, check that latching efforts of both right
and left locks (16) and (17) are even.
a Check the latching efforts on both
“Close“ side (in the front of the opera-
tor's cab) and “Open“ side (in the rear
of the operator's cab).
[*2]
3 Left lower pin:
27 – 34 Nm {2.75 – 3.47 kgm}
2 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LT-2)
PC130-8 21
Removal and installation of floor 5. Disconnect ground (2).

frame assembly
Removal
k In the case that you do not drain the cool-
ant, if you disconnect the heater hose when
the coolant temperature in the radiator is
high, you may be scalded. In this case, wait
until the coolant temperature lowers and
then disconnect the heater hose.
k Collect the air conditioner refrigerant
(R134a) from air conditioner circuit in
advance. 6. Disconnect the following PPC hoses from the
a Ask professional traders for collecting and fill- travel PPC valve. The color of the band is;
ing operation of refrigerant (R134a). q (3): Red
a Never release the refrigerant (R134a) to the q (4): No color
atmosphere. q (5): Green
q (6): Blue
k If refrigerant gas (R134a) gets in your eyes, a Prepare an oil sump.
you may lose your sight. Accordingly, put
on protective goggles while you are collect-
ing the refrigerant (R134a) or filling the air
conditioner circuit with the refrigerant
(R134a). Collecting and filling work must be
conducted by a qualified person.
1. Turn the upper structure by 90°.
2. Drain the engine coolant.

6 Coolant : Approx. 14 l
3. Remove the operator's cab assembly by refer-

ring to “Removal and installation of operator's
cab assembly“.
22 PC130-8
q Step 7 – 9 is optional (for breaker specifi- 19. Remove clamps (24) and (25). [*2]
cation). 20. Disconnect clamp (26). (If equipped)
7. Disconnect the following PPC hoses from the
PPC valve. The color of the band is;
q (7): Yellow
q (8): No color
a Plug the hose to stop oil flow-out.
8. Disconnect connectors P14 (9) and P15 (10).
9. Disconnect connectors V30 (11) and V13 (12).
21. Disconnect connectors N10 (27) and AC01

(28).
22. Disconnect connectors R20 (29) and R21 (30).
23. Cut tie-wrap (31) and draw in wiring harness
(32).
24. Disconnect the clamp of wiring harness (33).
10. Disconnect ground (13). From the left,

T04, T05, T06, T07, T09, T10
11. Disconnect clamp (14).
12. Disconnect connector A08 (15), (16) from the
clip.
13. Disconnect hose (17).
a Check the connecting point.
a Disconnect the work equipment PPC hose
(P) at joint box side. (See procedure 30.)
25. Remove grommet (34).

26. Move wiring harness (35) to the outside of the
floor frame.
a (SP) is made of sponge.
14. Disconnect connector P17 (18) from the air

conditioner tube.
15. Remove the clamp and disconnect spacer
(19).
16. Disconnect hose (20).
17. Disconnect heater hose (21).
18. Remove mounting bolt (22) and disconnect air
conditioner tube (23). [*1]
PC130-8 23
27. Disconnect the clamp of wiring harness (35). 30. Sling floor frame assembly (42) and remove it.
28. Move plates (36) and (37) together with wiring a Make sure that the hoses, connectors,
harness (35) to the boom side. clamps, and so on are disconnected with-
out fail.
4 Floor frame assembly: 250 kg
29. Disconnect PPC hose (40) of the work equip-

ment. From the top, the color of the band is:
Red
None
Black
White
Yellow
Blue
Brown
Green
a Prepare an oil sump.
a Disconnect hose dump.
24 PC130-8
Installation
removal.
[*1]
a When installing the air conditioner circuit hoses,
take care so that dirt, water, may not enter.
a Make sure before the installation that there is
O-ring at the piping connector of the air condi-
tioner hose.
a Check that there is no defect or deterioration on
the O-ring.
a When connecting the refrigerant piping, coat
the O-ring with compressor oil for new refrig-
erant (R134a) (Denso: ND-OIL8, Zexcel:
ZXL100PG (PAG 46 or equivalent)) .
3 Mounting bolt: 8 – 12 Nm {0.8 – 1.2 kgm}
[*2]
a Make sure that the hoses do not lap over.
q Filling air conditioner circuit with refriger-

ant (R134a)
Fill the air conditioner circuit with refrigerant
(R134a).
a Filling quantity: 850 ± 50 g
q Refilling with coolant

Add coolant through the coolant filler to the
specified level. Run the engine to circulate the
coolant through the system. Then, check the
coolant level again.
5 Coolant: Approx. 14 l
PC130-8 25

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
26 PC130-8
SEN04134-00
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up

Electrical system
Removal and installation of air compressor assembly .................................................................................... 2
Removal and installation of air conditioner condenser ................................................................................... 3
Removal and installation of air compressor unit assembly ............................................................................. 4
Removal and installation of KOMTRAX communication modem assembly.................................................... 7
Removal and installation of monitor assembly................................................................................................ 8
Removal and installation of pump controller assembly ................................................................................. 10
Removal and installation of engine controller assembly ............................................................................... 12
PC130-8 1
Removal and installation of air 7. Remove air conditioner compressor assembly

(8). [*2]
compressor assembly 1
Removal
advance.
a Ask professional traders for collecting and fill-
ing operation of refrigerant (R134a).
a Never release the refrigerant (R134a) to the
atmosphere.
k If refrigerant gas (R134a) gets in your eyes,

ing the refrigerant (R134a) or filling the air Installation
conditioner circuit with the refrigerant q Carry out installation in the reverse order to
(R134a). Collecting and filling work must be removal.
[*1]
1. Remove drive belt protective cover (1). q Precautions for installing piping
a When installing the air conditioner circuit
hoses, take care that dirt, dust, water, etc.
will not enter them.
a When connecting each air conditioner pip-
ing, apply compressor oil (DENSO: ND-
OIL 8 or equivalent) to its threaded part.
3 Mounting bolt:
8 – 12 Nm {0.8 – 1.2 kgm}
q Charging air conditioner with refrigerant

Charge the air conditioner circuit with refriger-
ant (air conditioner gas R134a).
2. Disconnect wiring connector M34 (2).
[*2]
3 Air conditioner compressor mounting bolt:
3. Disconnect air conditioner pipings (3) and (4).
24.5 – 29 Nm {2.5 – 3.0 kgm}
[*1]
4. Loosen drive belt tension adjustment bolt (5)

and lock bolt (6).
5. Remove drive belt (7).
6. Remove drive belt tension adjustment bolt (5)

and lock bolt (6).
2 PC130-8
Removal and installation of air 6. Remove bolts (7) (2 pieces each on the right
and left sides) and remove condenser assem-
conditioner condenser 1 bly (8). [*1]
Removal
advance.
ing operation of refrigerant (R134a).
atmosphere.

1. Disconnect wiring connectors (1) and (2).
Installation
removal.
[*1]
3 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LT-2)
2. Remove radiator reservoir tank (3). 3 Mounting bolt:
10.0 – 15.0 Nm {1.0 – 1.5 kgm}
3. Remove air cleaner assembly (4). q Charging air conditioner with refrigerant
Charge the air conditioner circuit with refriger-
4. Remove bracket (5). ant (air conditioner gas R134a).
5. Disconnect 2 hoses (6).
a Stop the hoses and condenser with blind
plugs to prevent water etc. will not enter
them.
PC130-8 3
Removal and installation of air 7. Pull fresh air filter cover opening lever (8).
compressor unit assembly 1 8. Remove fresh air filter (9).
Removal
k Disconnect the negative terminal (Ð) of the
k In the case that you do not drain the cool-
ant, if you disconnect the heater hose when
the coolant temperature in the radiator is
high, you may be scalded. In this case, wait
until the coolant temperature lowers and
then disconnect the heater hose.
advance.
ing operation of refrigerant (R134a). 9. Remove rear covers (10) – (13).
atmosphere.

k If the radiator coolant temperature is high,
wait until it lowers to avoid scalding your-
self and then disconnect the heater hose.
10. Remove duct (14).
1. Swing the upper structure 90 degrees.
2. Drain the coolant.
a Remove connector H15 fixed to the rear
side from the clip.
3. Remove front window (1). 12. Remove plate (16).
4. Remove step plate (2).
5. Remove floor mat (3).
6. Remove covers (5) and (6).
4 PC130-8
13. Remove plate (17). 16. Remove ducts (22) and (23).
a Cut the cable tie.
14. Remove lock pin (18) and duct (19).
17. Remove upper and lower ducts (24).
18. Remove upper and lower ducts (25).
19. Disconnect plate (26) from the cab wall.
15. Remove ducts (20) and (21).

a Cut the cable tie.
20. Disconnect connectors N10 (27) and AC01

(28).
21. Disconnect connectors ECU10 and ECU11

(29) from air conditioner controller (ACCONT).
22. Loosen cable tie (30) and draw in wiring har-

ness (31).
PC130-8 5
23. Remove cover (32). Installation

removal.
[*1]
a When installing the air conditioner circuit
hoses, take care that dirt, dust, water, etc. will
not enter them.
a When installing each air conditioner hose,
check that the O-ring is fitted to the joint.
a Check each O-ring for a flaw and deterioration.
a When connecting the refrigerant piping, coat
the O-rings with compressor oil for new refrig-
erant R134a (DENSO: ND-OIL 8, ZEXEL: ZXL
100 PG (equivalent to PAG 46).
3 Mounting bolt: 8 – 12 Nm {0.8 – 1.2 kgm}
24. Remove mounting bolt (33) and disconnect air
conditioner tubes (34). [*1]
25. Disconnect heater hoses (35). q Charging air conditioner with refrigerant
a Record the connection point. Charge the air conditioner circuit with refriger-
ant (R134a).
q Refilling with coolant

Add coolant through the coolant filler to the
specified level. Run the engine to circulate
the coolant through the system. Then,
check the coolant level again.
26. Remove the 7 mounting bolts and air condi-

tioner unit assembly (36).
6 PC130-8

KOMTRAX communication
modem assembly
Removal
1. Remove covers (1) – (4).
2. Disconnect connectors CK01(5) and CK02 (6).

3. Twist antenna wire (7) and disconnect it. If con-
nectors CK01 and CK02 are not disconnected
first, an error is recorded in KOMTRAX.
4. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and KOMTRAX
communication modem assembly (8).
Installation
removal.
PC130-8 7

monitor assembly
Removal
1. Remove cap (1).

2. Remove cover (2) and then disconnect wiring
connector P31 (3) for air conditioner sunlight
sensor (S).
3. Remove duct (4).
4. Remove cover (5) as follows. [*1]
1) Insert flat-head screwdriver inside slit (SL)
and push it upward. 5. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and lift monitor
2) Release lock (L) and remove the cover. assembly (6). [*2]
3) Disconnect wiring connector M04 of the 6. Disconnect connectors CM01 (7), CM02 (8)
cigarette lighter from the back of cover (5). and CM03 (9).
a Since CM02 (8) and CM03 (9) can be
installed reversely, be careful not to mis-
take. CM03 (9) is a green connector.
7. In the case of rear camera specification, dis-
connect connector CN-5 (11).
8. Disconnect connector (10).
8 PC130-8
Installation
[*1], [*2]
1) Temporarily install monitor assembly (6) with 4
mounting bolts, and then install cover (5).
2) With cover (5) installed, tighten the mounting
bolts of monitor assembly.
q Carry out the rest of installation in the reverse

order to removal.
PC130-8 9
Removal and installation of pump

controller assembly
Removal
Installation
q Installation is done in the reverse order of re-
moval.
a Reference
1. Procedure for removing connector cover (1).
2. Disconnect relay R08 (4) from the clip. 1) Cut and remove cable tie (2).
3. Disconnect bracket (5) and put it to the right 2) Move lever (3) up.
side.
4. Disconnect wiring connectors C01 (6) and C02
(7) as follows.
q Tilt lock (L12) inside while pressing lock
(L1).
a Bar (B) comes out and the lock is re-
leased.
5. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and pump con-
troller assembly (8).
3) Lightly push part (A) of connector cover

(1) from both sides to unfasten claw (B).
4) Remove connector cover (1) around claw
(C).
10 PC130-8
a Connector without connector cover 3) Set claw (C) to the connector and place
(1). connector cover (1).
a Take care that wiring harness (5) will
not be caught.
2. Procedure for installing connector cover

1) Push in right and left sliders (4) as far as
possible. 4) Set claw (B) and install connector cover
(1).
a Right and left sliders (4) pushed in as

far as possible (Left figure) 5) Bind connector cover (1) and wiring har-
2) Move lever (3) of connector cover (1) from ness with a new cable tie. (See 1.1).)
the upper position to the left position (lock
position) in the figure.
a (B), (C): Claws
a If the sliders and lever are not set as
shown in the following figure, the con-
nector is not disconnected or locked
securely with the lever. Accordingly,
check their positions again.
PC130-8 11
Removal and installation of Installation

engine controller assembly 1 q Carry out the installation in the reverse order of
removal.
Removal
k
[*1]
3
battery beforehand. Screw: 3 ± 1 Nm {0.3 ± 0.1 kgm}
a Reference
1. Open the engine hood.
q How to replace the seal of O-ring of power
source connector (4).
2. Referring to "Removal and installation of air
Seal of O-ring:
compressor assembly," disconnect air condi-
1010-074-0406 (NIHON-DEUTSCH Ltd.)
tioner compressor (1).
or equivalent
a Do not disconnect the air conditioner
hoses from the air conditioner compres-
1) Remove cover (7) by nipping the tab with twee-
sor.
zers [1].
3. Remove wiring connectors CE01 (2), CE02 (3)
and CE03 (4). [*1]
4. Remove mounting bolts (5) and remove engine

controller (6).
2) Remove O-ring (7) with tweezers [1].
12 PC130-8
PC130-8 13

© 2008 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
14 PC130-8
SEN03784-00
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
90 Diagrams and drawings 1

Hydraulic diagrams and drawings
Hydraulic circuit diagram (1/2) ........................................................................................................................ 3
Hydraulic circuit diagram (2/2) ........................................................................................................................ 5
PC130-8 1
SEN03784-00 90 Diagrams and drawings
2 PC130-8
Hydraulic circuit diagram (1/2) Hydraulic circuit diagram (1/2)
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03784-00
PC130-8 3
Hydraulic circuit diagram (2/2) Hydraulic circuit diagram (2/2)
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03784-00
PC130-8 5
PC130-8 7

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
8 PC130-8
SEN03785-01
PC130-8

PC130-8 80001 and up
90 Diagrams and drawings 1

Electrical diagrams and drawings
Electrical circuit diagram (1/5)......................................................................................................................... 3
Electrical circuit diagram (5/5)........................................................................................................................11
Connectors table and arrangement drawing................................................................................................. 13
PC130-8 1
2 PC130-8
Electrical circuit diagram (1/5) Electrical circuit diagram (1/5)
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03785-01
PC130-8 3
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03785-01
PC130-8 5
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03785-01
PC130-8 7
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03785-01
PC130-8 9
PC130-8
PC130-8
SEN03785-01
PC130-8 11
Connectors table and arrangement drawing
Connectors table and arrangement drawing PC130-8 PC130-8
Type of Number Type of Number

Connector No. connector of pins Location Address Connector No. Location Address
connector of pins
A08 SWP 12 Intermediate connector J-1 PFUEL BOSCH 3 Common rall pressure sensor AL-5
A13 DT 2 Intermediate connector (Working lamp) F-1 POIL - 1 Engine oil prresure switch (Low pressure) AJ-6
A22 DT 2 Intermediate connector (Working lamp) H-9 PREG - 2 Supply pump solenoid (IMV) AJ-7
A40 DT 4 Back camera I-9 PTIM BOSCH 4 Boost pressure/temp. sensor AJ-7
A41 DT 4 Back camera (If equipped) I-1 R01 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal E) N-5
A43 S 8 Intermediate connector V-1 R02 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal BR) N-6
AC01 - 8 Air conditioner unit Y-3 R03A Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal M) M-9
CAM FRAMETONE 2 CAM sensor AL-1 R03B Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal M) M-8
CE02 DRC 60 Engine controller L-8 R04 Terminal 1 Battery relay (Terminal B) M-9
CE03 DTP 4 Engine controller L-8 R05 RELAY 5 Relay for light U-9
CK01 070 14 KOMTRAX Communication module Z-7 R06 RELAY 5 Relay for Starter cut (PPC lock) P-9
CK02 070 10 KOMTRAX Communication module Z-7 R07 RELAY 5 Relay for Starter cut (Personal code) P-9
CM01 070 18 Machine monitor P-5 R10 RELAY 5 Relay for rear working lamp (If equipped) U-9
CM02 070 12 Machine monitor P-4 R12 RELAY 5 Relay for cab light U-9
CM03 070 18 Machine monitor P-3 R15 Terminal 1 Ribbon heater relay M-7
CM04 070 12 Machine monitor P-4 R16 Terminal 1 Ribbon heater relay M-7
CM05 B60 8 Machine monitor Q-6 R17 Terminal 1 Ribbon heater relay N-7
CN1 DT 2 Injector#1 AL-9 R19 X 2 Starting motor safety relay N-5
CN2 DT 2 Injector#2 AL-9 R20 RELAY 5 Blower relay T-8
CN3 DT 2 Injector#3 AM-9 R21 RELAY 4 Compressor relay T-8
CN4 DT 2 Injector#4 AN-9 R23 RELAY 6 Engine controller relay (1) W-9
CP01 AMP 81 Pump controller U-8 R24 RELAY 6 Engine controller relay (2) W-9
CP02 AMP 40 Pump controller U-8 R28 Terminal 1 Starting motor safety relay (Terminal C) M-8
D01 SWP 8 Diode O-8 R29 Terminal 1 Starting motor safety relay (Terminal B) M-8
D02 SWP 8 Diode O-9 S02 SWP 6 Light switch S-7
D03 SWP 8 Diode P-9 S04 SWP 6 Swing lock switch S-7
D10 M 2 Diode X-8 S07 SWP 6 Beacon switch (If equipped) S-7
D11 M 2 Diode Y-8 S10 YAZAKI 2 Switch horne R-6
NEG 1 DRC 60 Engine controller K-8,AK-9 S11 YAZAKI 2 Left knob switch W-1
F01 Fuse 20 Fuse V-9 S14 M 3 PPC hydraulic lock switch W-1
F04 L 2 Fusible link (65A) N-6 S21 - 11 Emergency pump drive switch P-9
F05 L 2 Fusible link (30A) N-6 S22 - 6 Emergency swing parking brake release P-9
H08 M 4 Intermediate connector Z-3,AH-4 S25 SUMITOMO 16 Intermediate connector Q-8
H09 S 8 Intermediate connector AA-4,AH-4 S30 S 8 Model selection T-8
H15 SUMITOMO 22 Intermediate connector (Starter switch) U-1 SSW Terminal 5 Starting switch R-6
H16 S (Blue) 12 Intermediate connector (Radio) Z-3 T01 Terminal 1 Floor frame Y-3
H31 DT 6 Intermediate connector (Blade up sensor) D-9 T02 Terminal 1 Cab GND AH-3
J01 SUMITOMO 20 Junction connector AA-6 T03 M 1 Radio GND X-2

(Black)
T04 Terminal 1 Revolving frame I-1
J02 SUMITOMO 20 Junction connector Y-3
(Black) T05 Terminal 1 Revolving frame I-1
SUMITOMO T06 Terminal 1 Revolving frame H-1

J03 20 Junction connector Y-2
(Green) T06 Terminal 1 GND (radio) X-2
J04 SUMITOMO 20 Junction connector Z-7 T07 Terminal 1 Revolving frame H-1
(Green)
T08 Terminal 1 GND N-5
J05 SUMITOMO 20 Junction connector Y-8
(Pink) T09 Terminal 1 Revolving frame H-1
J06 SUMITOMO 20 Junction connector Y-8 T10 Terminal 1 Revolving frame G-1
(Orange)
T13 Terminal 1 Revolving frame K-9
K01 M 2 Pump resistor P-6
T14 Terminal 1 Revolving frame I-9
K02 DT 3 CAN terminal resistance K-8
T15 Terminal 1 Revolving frame H-9
L01 DT 2 Working lamp (Boom) A-7
TWTR PACKARD 2 Engine water temperature sensor AK-9
L02 DT 2 Working lamp (Right) A-5
V01 DT 2 PPC lock solenoid valve C-9
L03 M 2 Cab light AE-8
V02 DT 2 Confluence solenoid valve C-9
L05 SWP 2 Intermediate connector (Beacon) AG-9
V03 DT 2 Travel junction solenoid valve C-8
L15 DT 2 Beacon (If equipped) AF-9
V04 DT 2 Travel speed shifting solenoid valve C-8
M01 PA 9 Radio X-2
V05 DT 2 Swing holding brake solenoid valve C-8
M02 M 2 Speaker (left) AH-8
V06 DT 2 2 step relief solenoid valve C-8
M03 M 2 Speaker (Right) AG-9
V11 DT 2 PC-EPC valve H-9
M04 2 Cigar lighter R-6
V30 DT 2 Attachment current F-1
M05 M 6 Wiper motor P-3,AC-5
W03 X 2 Rear limit switch AG-9
M06 X 2 Intermediate connector A-6
M06A KES0 2 Window washer motor A-4
M07 090 2 Horn (High tone) E-1
M11 M 4 DC/DC converter (If equipped) AA-5
M12 M 2 Spare AA-4
M13 M 2 12V power supply connector (If equipped) AA-5
M14 DT 2 Travel alarm L-2
M17 Terminal 1 Starter (Terminal C) J-9
M20 Terminal 1 Starter (Terminal B) J-9
M21 Terminal 1 Alternator (Terminal B) I-9
M22 SUMITOMO 3 Alternator J-9
M23 Terminal 1 Ribbon heater I-9
M34 X 1 Air conditioner compressor electromagnetic clutch J-9
M40 X 2 Head light (left) AD-8
M41 X 2 Head light (right) AC-7
N01 - 4 Air conditioner unit T-7
N08 DT (Gray) 12 Service connector V-9
NE FRAMETONE 3 NE sensor AL-1
P01 X 2 Pressure switch (Bucket digging) N-2
P02 X 2 Pressure switch (Boom down) N-1
P03 X 2 Pressure switch (Right swing) N-2
P04 X 2 Pressure switch (Arm digging) N-2
P05 X 2 Pressure switch (Bucket dump) N-2
P06 X 2 Pressure switch (Boom up) N-1
P07 X 2 Pressure switch (Left swing) N-2
P08 X 2 Pressure switch (Arm dump) N-2
P09 AMP 3 Pressure sensor (Right travel forward) J-9
P10 AMP 3 Pressure sensor (Right travel backward) F-9
P11 AMP 3 Pressure sensor (Left travel forward) E-9
P12 AMP 3 Pressure sensor (Left travel backward) F-9
P13 X 2 Service pressure switch G-1
P17 SUMITOMO 2 A/C HI/LO pressure switch K-1
P20 M 3 Fuel dial R-7
P21 X 2 Fuel level sensor C-8
P22 DT 2 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor G-9
P23 DT 2 Air cleaner clogging sensor L-5
P24 X 2 Radiator coolant level sensor L-4
P25 AMP 3 Pump pressure sensor G-9
P31 050 2 Sunshine sensor P-5
P44 DT 2 Engine oil level sensor K-8
PAMB AMP 3 Ambient pressure sensor AK-5
SEN03785-01
PC130-8 13
PC130-8 15

© 2007 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
16 PC130-8

Komatsu pc130-8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Komatsu pc130-8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEN03763-05

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

Machine model Serial number

00 Index and foreword 1

Composition of shop manual 1

Section Title Form Number

Shop Manual, contents binder, binder label and tabs SEN03763-05

00 Index and foreword SEN03764-05

10 Structure, function and maintenance standard SEN03769-02

20 Standard value table SEN03779-02

30 Testing and adjusting SEN03780-02

Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-mode) SEN04124-00

50 Disassembly and assembly SEN03782-03

90 Diagrams and drawings SEN03783-01

Foreword and general information SEN03766-01

10 Structure, function and maintenance standard

Swing motor ................................................................................................................................ 17

20 Standard value table

30 Testing and adjusting

Testing oil leakage....................................................................................................................... 51

Failure code [CA322] Injector #1 (L #1) system open/short error ............................................... 46

Troubleshooting by failure code, Part 4 SEN04122-01

50 Disassembly and assembly

Undercarriage and frame SEN04129-00

90 Diagrams and drawings

PC130-8 Hydraulic excavator

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR 1SHOP MANUAL

Machine model Serial number

00 Index and foreword 1

1. General precautions 7) If welding repairs are needed, always

2. Preparations for work 6) When removing a cover which is under

4. Precautions for sling work and making

How to read the shop manual 1

1. Composition of shop manual

00. Index and foreword

10. Structure, function and maintenance standard

20. Standard value table

30. Testing and adjusting

50. Disassembly and assembly

2. Revision and distribution

q Revised edition mark

Symbol Item Remarks

k Safety Special safety precautions are necessary when performing work.

Special technical precautions or other precautions for preserving stan-

2 Coat Places to be coated with adhesives, etc. during assembly.

Explanation of terms for maintenance standard 1

1. Standard size and tolerance

a The tolerance may be indicated in the text

q Usually, the size of a hole and the size of

2. Standard clearance and standard value 5. Clearance limit

4. Repair limit and allowable value or allow-

Handling of electric equipment and hydraulic component 1

Points to remember when handling electric

2. Main failures occurring in wiring harness

2) Defective crimping or soldering of connec-

4) High-pressure water entering connector

5) Oil or dirt stuck to connector

3. Removing, installing, and drying connec-

2] When removing from clips

q When removing a connector from a

3] Action to take after removing connec-

4) Drying wiring harness

5. Points to remember when troubleshooting